Table of Contents

Table of Contents

Preface

Command-Line Interface

aaa accounting dot1x default start-stop group radius through instance

interface port-channel through shape

show access-group mode interface through show vtp

snmp ifindex clear through vtp v2-mode

Acronyms and Abbreviations

Catalyst 4500 Series Switch Cisco IOS Command Reference

Catalyst 4500 Series IOS Commands

New Commands

auto security

auto security-port

show auto security

Revised Commands

A Commands

aaa accounting dot1x default start-stop group radius

aaa accounting system default start-stop group radiusclear mac-address-table

access-group mode

access-list hardware capture mode

access-list hardware entries

access-list hardware region

action

apply

ancp client server

ancp mode client

apply

arp access-list

attach module

authentication control-direction

authentication critical recovery delay

authentication event

authentication fallback

authentication host-mode

authentication open

authentication order

authentication periodic

authentication port-control

authentication priority

authentication timer

authentication violation

auto qos classify

auto qos classify police

auto qos srnd4

auto qos trust

auto qos video

auto qos voip

auto qos voip cisco-softphone

auto security

auto security-port

auto-sync

average-packet-size (netflow-lite monitor submode)

C Commands

call-home (global configuration)

call-home request

call-home send

call-home send alert-group

call-home test

channel-group

channel-protocol

cisp enable

class-map

clear counters

clear errdisable interface

clear hw-module slot password

clear interface gigabitethernet

clear interface vlan

clear ip access-template

clear ip arp inspection log

clear ip arp inspection statistics

clear ip dhcp snooping binding

clear ip dhcp snooping database

clear ip dhcp snooping database statistics

clear ip igmp group

clear ip mfib counters

clear ip mfib fastdrop

clear ip wccp

clear lacp counters

clear netflow-lite exporter statistics

clear netflow-lite monitor statistics interface

clear nmsp statistics

clear mac-address-table dynamic

clear pagp

clear port-security

clear pppoe intermediate-agent statistics

clear qos

clear switch virtual dual-active fast-hello

clear vlan counters

clear vmps statistics

control-plane

cos (netflow-lite exporter submode)

counter

D Commands

debug adjacency

debug backup

debug condition interface

debug condition standby

debug condition vlan

debug device-sensor

debug dot1x

debug etherchnl

debug interface

debug ip dhcp snooping event

debug ip dhcp snooping packet

debug ip verify source packet

debug ipc

debug lacp

debug monitor

debug nmsp

debug nvram

debug pagp

debug platform packet protocol lacp

debug platform packet protocol pagp

debug pm

debug port-security

debug pppoe intermediate-agent

debug redundancy

debug spanning-tree

debug spanning-tree backbonefast

debug spanning-tree switch

debug spanning-tree uplinkfast

debug sw-vlan

debug sw-vlan ifs

debug sw-vlan notification

debug sw-vlan vtp

debug udld

debug vqpc

define interface-range

deny

destination (netflow-lite exporter submode)

device-sensor filter-list

device-sensor filter-list dhcp

device-sensor filter-spec

device-sensor notify

diagnostic fpga soft-error recover

diagnostic monitor action

diagnostic start

dot1x auth-fail max-attempts

dot1x auth-fail vlan

dot1x credentials (global configuration)

dot1x critical

dot1x critical eapol

dot1x critical recovery delay

dot1x critical vlan

dot1x control-direction

dot1x guest-vlan

dot1x guest-vlan supplicant

dot1x host-mode

dot1x initialize

dot1x mac-auth-bypass

dot1x max-reauth-req

dot1x max-req

dot1x port-control

dot1x re-authenticate

dot1x re-authentication

dot1x system-auth-control

dot1x timeout

dscp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

dual-active detection (virtual switch)

duplex

dual-active recovery ip address

duplex

E Commands

erase

errdisable detect cause

errdisable recovery

export-protocol (netflow-lite exporter submode)

exporter (netflow-lite monitor submode)

F Commands

flowcontrol

H Commands

hardware statistics

hw-module beacon

hw-module module start

hw-module module stop

hw-module port-group

hw-module power

hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1/2

hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1/2 switch 1/2/all

hw-module system max-queue-limit

hw-module uplink mode

hw-module uplink select

I Commands

instance

interface

interface (virtual switch)

interface port-channel

interface range

interface vlan

ip admission proxy http refresh-all

ip arp inspection filter vlan

ip arp inspection limit (interface)

ip arp inspection log-buffer

ip arp inspection trust

ip arp inspection validate

ip arp inspection vlan

ip arp inspection vlan logging

ip cef load-sharing algorithm

ip dhcp snooping

ip dhcp snooping binding

ip dhcp snooping database

ip dhcp snooping information option

ip dhcp snooping information option allow-untrusted

ip dhcp snooping limit rate

ip dhcp snooping trust

ip dhcp snooping vlan

ip device tracking maximum

ip igmp filter

ip igmp max-groups

ip igmp profile

ip igmp query-interval

ip igmp snooping

ip igmp snooping report-suppression

ip igmp snooping vlan

ip igmp snooping vlan explicit-tracking

ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter

ip igmp snooping vlan static

ip local-proxy-arp

ip mfib fastdrop

ip name-server

ip route-cache flow

ip source binding

ip sticky-arp

ip verify header vlan all

ip verify source

ip verify unicast source reachable-via

ip wccp

ip wccp check services all

ip wccp group-listen

ip wccp redirect

p wccp redirect exclude in

ipv6 mld snooping

ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-count

ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-interval

ipv6 mld snooping listener-message-suppression

ipv6 mld snooping robustness-variable

ipv6 mld snooping tcn

ipv6 mld snooping vlan

issu abortversion

issu acceptversion

issu commitversion

redundancy config-sync mismatched-commands

issu loadversion

issu runversion

issu set rollback-timer

L Commands

l2protocol-tunnel

l2protocol-tunnel cos

l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold

l2protocol-tunnel shutdown-threshold

lacp port-priority

lacp system-priority

license right-to-use activate

license right-to-use deactivate

lldp tlv-select power-management

logging event trunk-status global (global configuration)

logging event link-status global (global configuration)

logging event trunk-status global (global configuration)

logging event link-status global (global configuration)

logging event link-status (interface configuration)

logging event trunk-status (interface configuration)

M Commands

mac access-list extended

mac-address (virtual switch)

mac-address-table aging-time

mac-address-table dynamic group protocols

mac-address-table learning vlan

mac-address-table notification

mac-address-table static

macro apply cisco-desktop

macro apply cisco-phone

macro apply cisco-router

macro apply cisco-switch

macro auto device

macro auto execute (built-in function)

macro auto execute (remotely-defined trigger)

macro auto execute (user-defined function)

macro auto global processing

macro auto mac-address-group

macro auto monitor

macro auto processing

macro auto sticky

macro global apply cisco-global

macro global apply system-cpp

macro global description

macsec network-link

mka

mka policy

main-cpu

match

match flow ip

mdix auto

media-type

mode

monitor capture {access-list | class-map}

monitor capture [clear | export]

monitor capture [interface | vlan | control-plane]

monitor capture file location buffer-size

monitor capture limit

monitor capture mycap match

monitor capture start

monitor session

mtu

mvr (global configuration)

mvr (interface configuration)

N Commands

name

netflow-lite exporter

netflow-lite monitor

netflow-lite sampler

nmsp

nmsp attachment suppress

O Commands

options timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

P Commands

packet-offset (netflow-lite sampler submode)

packet-rate (netflow-lite sampler submode)

packet-section size (netflow-lite sampler submode)

pagp learn-method

pagp port-priority

passive-interface

permit

policy-map

port-channel load-balance

port-channel standalone-disable

port-security mac-address

port-security mac-address sticky

port-security maximum

power dc input

power efficient-ethernet auto

power inline

power inline consumption

power inline four-pair forced

power inline logging global

power inline police

power redundancy combined max inputs

power redundancy-mode

pppoe intermediate-agent (global)

pppoe intermediate-agent (interface)

pppoe intermediate-agent (interface vlan-range)

pppoe intermediate-agent format-type (global)

pppoe intermediate-agent limit rate

pppoe intermediate-agent trust

pppoe intermediate-agent vendor-tag strip

priority

private-vlan

private-vlan mapping

private-vlan synchronize

profile

profile flow

Q Commands

qos account layer-all encapsulation

qos account layer2 encapsulation

qos trust

queue-limit

R Commands

redundancy

redundancy force-switchover

redundancy reload

remote login module

remote-span

renew ip dhcp snooping database

reset

revision

S Commands

sampler (netflow-lite monitor submode)

service-policy (interface configuration)

service-policy (policy-map class)

service-policy input (control-plane)

session module

set

set cos

set dscp

set precedence

set qos-group

shape (interface configuration)

shell trigger

snmp ifindex clear

snmp ifindex persist

snmp-server enable traps

snmp-server ifindex persist

snmp-server ifindex persist compress

snmp trap mac-notification change

source (netflow-lite exporter submode)

spanning-tree backbonefast

spanning-tree bpdufilter

spanning-tree bpduguard

spanning-tree bridge assurance

spanning-tree cost

spanning-tree etherchannel guard misconfig

spanning-tree extend system-id

spanning-tree guard

spanning-tree link-type

spanning-tree loopguard default

spanning-tree mode

spanning-tree mst

spanning-tree mst configuration

spanning-tree mst forward-time

spanning-tree mst hello-time

spanning-tree mst max-age

spanning-tree mst max-hops

spanning-tree mst simulate pvst global

spanning-tree mst simulate pvst (interface configuration mode)

spanning-tree mst root

spanning-tree pathcost method

spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration mode)

spanning-tree portfast edge bpdufilter default

spanning-tree portfast edge bpduguard default

spanning-tree portfast

spanning-tree port-priority

spanning-tree uplinkfast

spanning-tree vlan

speed

storm-control

storm-control broadcast include multicast

switch (virtual switch)

switch convert mode (virtual switch)

switch virtual domain (virtual switch)

switch virtual link (virtual switch)

switchport

switchport access vlan

switchport autostate exclude

switchport block

switchport mode

switchport port-security

switchport private-vlan association trunk

switchport private-vlan host-association

switchport private-vlan mapping

switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan

switchport private-vlan trunk native vlan tag

switchport trunk

switchport vlan mapping

system mtu

Show Commands

show access-group mode interface

show adjacency

show ancp multicast

show arp access-list

show authentication

show auto install status

show auto qos

show auto security

show bootflash:

show bootvar

show cable-diagnostics tdr

show call-home

show cdp neighbors

show class-map

show device-sensor cache

show diagnostic content

show diagnostic result module

show diagnostic result module test

show diagnostic result module test 2

show diagnostic result module test 3

show dot1x

show eigrp plugins

show errdisable detect

show errdisable recovery

show etherchannel

show flowcontrol

show hw-module port-group

show hw-module system max-port-num-mode

show hw-module uplink

show idprom

show interfaces

show interfaces (virtual switch)

show interfaces counters

show interfaces counters (virtual switch)

show interfaces description

show interfaces link

show interfaces mtu

show interfaces private-vlan mapping

show interfaces status

show interfaces switchport

show interfaces transceiver

show interfaces trunk

show ip arp inspection

show ip arp inspection log

show ip cef vlan

show ip dhcp snooping

show ip dhcp snooping binding

show ip dhcp snooping database

show ip igmp interface

show ip igmp profile

show ip igmp snooping

show ip igmp snooping membership

show ip igmp snooping mrouter

show ip igmp snooping vlan

show ip interface

show ip mfib

show ip mfib fastdrop

show ip mroute

show ip source binding

show ip verify source

show ip wccp

show ipc

show ipv6 mld snooping

show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter

show ipv6 mld snooping querier

show ipv6 snooping counters

show issu capability

show issu clients

show issu comp-matrix

show issu endpoints

show issu entities

show issu fsm

show issu message

show issu negotiated

show issu rollback-timer

show issu sessions

show issu state

show l2protocol-tunnel

show lacp

show license

show mab

show mac access-group interface

show mac-address-table address

show mac-address-table aging-time

show mac-address-table count

show mac-address-table dynamic

show mac-address-table interface

show mac address-table learning

show mac-address-table multicast

show mac-address-table notification

show mac-address-table protocol

show mac-address-table static

show mac-address-table vlan

show macro auto mac-address-group

show macro auto device

show macro auto interface

show macro auto monitor clients

show macro auto monitor device

show macro auto monitor type

show module

show monitor

show monitor capture

show monitor capture file

show mvr

show mvr interface

show mvr members

show netflow-lite exporter

show netflow-lite monitor

show netflow-lite sampler

show nmsp

show pagp

show pagp dual-active (virtual switch)

show policy-map

show policy-map control-plane

show policy-map interface

show policy-map interface vlan

show port-security

show power

show power inline police

show qos

show pppoe intermediate-agent interface

show qos

show qos aggregate policer

show qos dbl

show qos interface

show qos maps

show redundancy

show redundancy config-sync

show running-config

show slavebootflash:

show slaveslot0:

show slot0:

show spanning-tree

show spanning-tree mst

show storm-control

show switch virtual (virtual switch)

show system mtu

show tech-support

show udld

show vlan

show vlan access-map

show vlan counters

show vlan dot1q tag native

show vlan group

show vlan internal usage

show vlan mapping

show vlan mtu

show vlan private-vlan

show vlan remote-span

show vmps

show vslp (virtual switch)

show vtp

T Commands

template data timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

test cable-diagnostics tdr

traceroute mac

traceroute mac ip

transport udp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

trust

ttl (netflow-lite exporter submode)

tx-queue

U Commands

udld (global configuration mode)

udld (interface configuration mode)

udld reset

unidirectional

username

V Commands

verify

vlan (VLAN Database mode)

vlan access-map

vlan configuration

vlan database

vlan dot1q tag native

vlan filter

vlan group

vlan internal allocation policy

vmps reconfirm (global configuration)

vmps reconfirm (privileged EXEC)

vmps retry

vmps server

vrf (netflow-lite exporter submode)

vslp interval (virtual switch)

vtp (global configuration mode)

vtp client

vtp domain

vtp password

vtp pruning

vtp server

vtp transparent

vtp v2-mode

Preface

This preface describes the audience, organization, and conventions of this publication, and provides information on how to obtain related documentation.

Cisco documentation and additional literature are available in a CD-ROM package, which ships with your product. The Documentation CD-ROM, a member of the Cisco Connection Family, is updated monthly. Therefore, it might be more up to date than printed documentation. To order additional copies of the Documentation CD-ROM, contact your local sales representative or call customer service. The CD-ROM package is available as a single package or as an annual subscription.

Audience

This publication is for experienced network administrators who are responsible for configuring and maintaining Catalyst 4500 series switches.

Cisco IOS Software Documentation

In addition to the information provided in this publication, you might need to refer to the Cisco IOS documentation set. The Cisco IOS software documentation is divided into nine modules and two master indexes. Each module consists of two books: a configuration guide and a corresponding command reference. Chapters in a configuration guide describe protocols, configuration tasks, and Cisco IOS software functionality and contain comprehensive configuration examples. Chapters in a command reference provide complete command syntax information. Each configuration guide can be used in conjunction with its corresponding command reference.

Organization

This chapter describes the contents of each chapter in this document.

Chapter

Title

Description

Chapter 1

Command-Line Interface

Describes the Catalyst 4500 series switch CLI.

Chapter 2

Cisco IOS Commands for the Catalyst 4500 Series Switches

Lists all Catalyst 4500 series Cisco IOS commands alphabetically and provides detailed information on each command.

Appendix A

Abbreviations

Defines the acronyms used in this publication.

Related Documentation

The Catalyst 4500 series Cisco IOS documentation set includes these publications:

- Catalyst 4500 Series Switch Installation Guide

- Catalyst 4500 Series Switch Supervisor Engine Installation Note

- Catalyst 4500 Series Switch Cisco IOS Software Configuration Guide

- Catalyst 4500 Series Switch Cisco IOS System Message Guide

- Release Notes for Catalyst 4500 Series Switch Software

Note Access the Catalyst 4500 Series Switch documentation library at the URL

http://www.cisco.com/go/cat4500/docs

Other documents in the Cisco IOS documentation set include:

- Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Configuration Guides

- Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command References

For information about MIBs, refer to this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/public/sw-center/netmgmt/cmtk/mibs.shtml

Command Syntax Conventions

Table 1 describes the syntax used with the commands in this document.

Table 1 Command Syntax Guide

Convention

Description

boldface

Commands and keywords.

italic

Command input that is supplied by you.

[ ]

Keywords or arguments that appear within square brackets are optional.

{ x | x | x }

A choice of keywords (represented by x) appears in braces separated by vertical bars. You must select one.

^ or Ctrl

Represent the key labeled Control. For example, when you read ^D or Ctrl-D, you should hold down the Control key while you press the D key.

screen font

Examples of information displayed on the screen.

boldface screen font

Examples of information that you must enter.

< >

Nonprinting characters, such as passwords, appear in angled brackets.

[ ]

Default responses to system prompts appear in square brackets.

Notes use this convention:

Note Means reader take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to material not covered in the publication.

Cautions use this convention:

Caution Means reader be careful. In this situation, you might do something that could result in equipment damage or loss of data.

Notices

The following notices pertain to this software license.

OpenSSL/Open SSL Project

This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/).

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).

This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

License Issues

The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.

OpenSSL License:

Copyright © 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: “This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”.

4. The names “OpenSSL Toolkit” and “OpenSSL Project” must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact openssl-core@openssl.org.

5. Products derived from this software may not be called “OpenSSL” nor may “OpenSSL” appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project.

6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment:

“This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)”.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT “AS IS”' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

Original SSLeay License:

Copyright © 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). All rights reserved.

This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).

The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adhered to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

Copyright remains Eric Young’s, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment:

“This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)”.

The word ‘cryptographic’ can be left out if the routines from the library being used are not cryptography-related.

4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgment: “This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)”.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG “AS IS” AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

The license and distribution terms for any publicly available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license [including the GNU Public License].

Obtaining Documentation and Submitting a Service Request

For information on obtaining documentation, submitting a service request, and gathering additional information, see the monthly What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation, which also lists all new and revised Cisco technical documentation, at:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/general/whatsnew/whatsnew.html

Subscribe to the What’s New in Cisco Product Documentation as a Really Simple Syndication (RSS) feed and set content to be delivered directly to your desktop using a reader application. The RSS feeds are a free service and Cisco currently supports RSS Version 2.0.

Command-Line Interface

This chapter provides information for understanding and using the Cisco IOS command-line interface (CLI) on the Catalyst 4500 series switch. This chapter includes the following sections:

- Getting Help

- How to Find Command Options

- Understanding Command Modes

- Using the No and Default Forms of Commands

- Using the CLI String Search

- Saving Configuration Changes

For an overview of the Catalyst 4500 series switch Cisco IOS configuration, refer to the Catalyst 4500 Series Switch Cisco IOS Software Configuration Guide.

Getting Help

To display a list of commands that you can use within a command mode, enter a question mark (?) at the system prompt. You also can display keywords and arguments for each command with this context-sensitive help feature.

Table 1-1 lists commands you can enter to get help that is specific to a command mode, a command, a keyword, or an argument.

Table 1-1 Getting Help

Command

Purpose

abbreviated-command-entry?

Displays a list of commands that begin with a particular character string. (Do not leave a space between the command and question mark.)

abbreviated-command-entry<Tab>

Completes a partial command name.

?

Lists all commands for the command mode.

command ?

Lists all keywords for the command. Leave a space between the command and the question mark.

command keyword ?

Lists all arguments for the keyword. Leave a space between the keyword and the question mark.

How to Find Command Options

This section provides an example of how to display syntax for a command. The syntax can consist of optional or required keywords. To display keywords for a command, enter a question mark (?) at the command prompt or after entering part of a command followed by a space. The Catalyst 4500 series switch software displays a list of available keywords along with a brief description of the keywords. For example, if you are in global configuration mode and want to see all the keywords for the arap command, you enter arap ?.

Table 1-2 How to Find Command Options

Command

Purpose

Switch> enable

Password: <password>

Switch#

Enter the enable command and password to access privileged EXEC commands.

You are in privileged EXEC mode when the prompt changes to Switch#.

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)#

Enter global configuration mode.

You are in global configuration mode when the prompt changes to Switch(config)#.

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet ?

<1-9> GigabitEthernet interface number

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1

Switch(config-if)#

Enter interface configuration mode by specifying the Gigabit Ethernet interface that you want to configure using the interface gigabitethernet global configuration command.

Enter a ? to display what you must enter next on the command line. In this example, you must enter an interface number from 1 to 9 in the format module-number/port-number.

You are in interface configuration mode when the prompt changes to Switch(config-if)#.

Switch(config-if)# ?

Interface configuration commands:

access-expression Build a bridge boolean access expression

apollo Apollo interface subcommands

appletalk Appletalk interface subcommands

arp Set arp type (arpa, probe, snap) or timeout

backup Modify backup parameters

bandwidth Set bandwidth informational parameter

bgp-policy Apply policy propogated by bgp community string

bridge-group Transparent bridging interface parameters

carrier-delay Specify delay for interface transitions

cdp CDP interface subcommands

channel-group Etherchannel/port bundling configuration

clns CLNS interface subcommands

cmns OSI CMNS

custom-queue-list Assign a custom queue list to an interface

decnet Interface DECnet config commands

default Set a command to its defaults

delay Specify interface throughput delay

description Interface specific description

dlsw DLSw interface subcommands

dspu Down Stream PU

exit Exit from interface configuration mode

fair-queue Enable Fair Queuing on an Interface

flowcontrol Configure flow operation.

fras DLC Switch Interface Command

help Description of the interactive help system

hold-queue Set hold queue depth

ip Interface Internet Protocol config commands

ipx Novell/IPX interface subcommands

isis IS-IS commands

iso-igrp ISO-IGRP interface subcommands

.

.

.

Switch(config-if)#

Enter a ? to display what you must enter next on the command line. In this example, you must enter the group keyword.

Because a <cr> is not displayed, it indicates that you must enter more information to complete the command.

Switch(config-if)# channel-group ?

<1-256> Channel group number

Switch(config-if)#channel-group

After you enter the group keyword, enter a ? to display what you must enter next on the command line. In this example, you must enter a channel group number from 1 to 256.

Because a <cr> is not displayed, it indicates that you must enter more information to complete the command.

Switch(config-if)# channel-group 1 ?

mode Etherchannel Mode of the interface

Switch(config-if)#

After you enter the channel group number, enter a ? to display what you must enter next on the command line. In this example, you must enter the mode keyword.

Because a <cr> is not displayed, it indicates that you must enter more information to complete the command.

Switch(config-if)# channel-group 1 mode ?

auto Enable PAgP only if a PAgP device is detected

desirable Enable PAgP unconditionally

on Enable Etherchannel only

Switch(config-if)#

After you enter the mode keyword, enter a ? to display what you must enter next on the command line. In this example, you must enter the auto, desirable, or on keyword.

Because a <cr> is not displayed, it indicates that you must enter more information to complete the command.

Switch(config-if)# channel-group 1 mode auto ?

<cr>

Switch(config-if)#

In this example, the auto keyword is entered. After you enter the auto keyword, enter a ? to display what you must enter next on the command line.

Because a <cr> is displayed, it indicates that you can press Return to complete the command. If additional keywords are listed, you can enter more keywords or press Return to complete the command.

Switch(config-if)# channel-group 1 mode auto

Switch(config-if)#

In this example, press Return to complete the command.

Understanding Command Modes

The Cisco IOS user interface on the Catalyst 4500 series switch has many different modes. The commands that are available to you depend on which mode you are currently in. You can obtain a list of commands available for each command mode by entering a question mark (?) at the system prompt.

When you start a session on the Catalyst 4500 series switch, you begin in user mode, often called EXEC mode. Only a limited subset of the commands are available in EXEC mode. In order to have access to all commands, you must enter privileged EXEC mode. Normally, you must enter a password to enter privileged EXEC mode. From privileged EXEC mode, you can enter any EXEC command or enter global configuration mode. Most EXEC commands are one-time commands, such as show commands, which show the current status of a given item, and clear commands, which clear counters or interfaces. The EXEC commands are not saved across reboots of the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

The configuration modes provide a way for you to make changes to the running configuration. When you save changes to the configuration, the changes remain intact when the Catalyst 4500 series switch reboots. From global configuration mode, you can enter interface configuration mode, subinterface configuration mode, and other protocol-specific modes.

ROM-monitor mode is a separate mode used when the Catalyst 4500 series switch cannot boot properly. If your Catalyst 4500 series switch or access server does not find a valid system image when it is booting, or if its configuration file is corrupted at startup, the system might enter ROM-monitor mode.

Table 1-3 provides a summary of the main command modes.

Table 1-3 Summary of Main Command Modes

Command Mode

Access Method

Prompt

Exit Method

User EXEC mode

Log in.

Switch>

Use the logout command.

Privileged EXEC mode

From user EXEC mode, enter the enable EXEC command.

Switch#

To exit to user EXEC mode, enter the disable command.

To enter global configuration mode, enter the configure terminal privileged EXEC command.

Global configuration mode

From privileged EXEC mode, enter the configure terminal privileged EXEC command.

Switch(config)#

To exit to privileged EXEC mode, enter the exit or end command or press Ctrl-Z.

To enter interface configuration mode, enter an interface configuration command.

Interface configuration mode

From global configuration mode, enter by specifying an interface with an interface command.

Switch(config-if)#

To exit to global configuration mode, enter the exit command.

To exit to privileged EXEC mode, enter the exit command or press Ctrl-Z.

To enter subinterface configuration mode, specify a subinterface with the interface command.

Subinterface configuration

From interface configuration mode, specify a subinterface with an interface command.

Switch(config-subif)#

To exit to global configuration mode, enter the exit command.

To enter privileged EXEC mode, enter the end command or press Ctrl-Z.

ROM monitor

From privileged EXEC mode, enter the reload EXEC command. Press the Break key during the first 60 seconds while the system is booting.

Rommon>

To exit ROM-monitor mode, you must reload the image by entering the boot command. If you use the boot command without specifying a file or any other boot instructions, the system boots from the default Flash image (the first image in onboard Flash memory). Otherwise, you can instruct the system to boot from a specific Flash image (using the boot system flash filename command).

For more information on command modes, refer to the “Using the Command Line Interface” chapter of the Configuration Fundamentals Configuration Guide.

Using the No and Default Forms of Commands

Almost every configuration command has a no form. In general, enter the no form to disable a function. Use the command without the keyword no to reenable a disabled function or to enable a function that is disabled by default. For example, IP routing is enabled by default. To disable IP routing, specify the no ip routing command and specify ip routing to reenable it. This publication provides the complete syntax for the configuration commands and describes what the no form of a command does.

Some configuration commands have a default form. The default form of a command returns the command setting to its default settings. Most commands are disabled by default, so the default form is the same as the no form. However, some commands are enabled by default, with variables set to certain default values. In these cases, the default form of the command enables the command and returns its variables to their default values.

Using the CLI String Search

The pattern in the command output is referred to as a string. The CLI string search feature allows you to search or filter any show or more command output and allows you to search and filter at --More-- prompts. This feature is useful when you need to sort though large amounts of output, or if you want to exclude output that you do not need to see.

With the search function, you can begin unfiltered output at the first line that contains a regular expression you specify. You can then specify a maximum of one filter per command or start a new search from the --More-- prompt.

A regular expression is a pattern (a phrase, number, or more complex pattern) software uses to match against show or more command output. Regular expressions are case sensitive and allow for complex matching requirements. Examples of simple regular expressions are Serial, misses, and 138. Examples of complex regular expressions are 00210..., ( is ), and [Oo]utput.

You can perform three types of filtering:

- Use the begin keyword to begin output with the line that contains a specified regular expression.

- Use the include keyword to include output lines that contain a specified regular expression.

- Use the exclude keyword to exclude output lines that contain a specified regular expression.

You can then search this filtered output at the --More-- prompts.

Note The CLI string search function does not allow you to search or filter backward through previous output; filtering cannot be specified using HTTP access to the CLI.

Regular Expressions

A regular expression can be a single character that matches the same single character in the command output or multiple characters that match the same multiple characters in the command output. This section describes how to create both single-character patterns and multiple-character patterns and how to create more complex regular expressions using multipliers, alternation, anchoring, and parentheses.

Single-Character Patterns

The simplest regular expression is a single character that matches the same single character in the command output. You can use any letter (A-Z, a-z) or digit (0-9) as a single-character pattern. You can also use other keyboard characters (such as ! or ~) as single-character patterns, but certain keyboard characters have special meaning when used in regular expressions. Table 1-4 lists the keyboard characters that have special meaning.

Table 1-4 Characters with Special Meaning

Character

Special Meaning

.

Matches any single character, including white space.

*

Matches 0 or more sequences of the pattern.

+

Matches 1 or more sequences of the pattern.

?

Matches 0 or 1 occurrences of the pattern.

^

Matches the beginning of the string.

$

Matches the end of the string.

_ (underscore)

Matches a comma (,), left brace ({), right brace (}), left parenthesis ( ( ), right parenthesis ( ) ), the beginning of the string, the end of the string, or a space.

To enter these special characters as single-character patterns, remove the special meaning by preceding each character with a backslash (\). These examples are single-character patterns matching a dollar sign, an underscore, and a plus sign, respectively.

\$ \_ \+

You can specify a range of single-character patterns to match against command output. For example, you can create a regular expression that matches a string containing one of the following letters: a, e, i, o, or u. One and only one of these characters must exist in the string for pattern matching to succeed. To specify a range of single-character patterns, enclose the single-character patterns in square brackets ([ ]). For example,

[aeiou]

matches any one of the five vowels of the lowercase alphabet, while

[abcdABCD]

matches any one of the first four letters of the lower- or uppercase alphabet.

You can simplify ranges by entering only the end points of the range separated by a dash (-). Simplify the previous range as follows:

[a-dA-D]

To add a dash as a single-character pattern in your range, include another dash and precede it with a backslash:

[a-dA-D\-]

You can also include a right square bracket (]) as a single-character pattern in your range. To do so, enter the following:

[a-dA-D\-\]]

The previous example matches any one of the first four letters of the lower- or uppercase alphabet, a dash, or a right square bracket.

You can reverse the matching of the range by including a caret (^) at the start of the range. This example matches any letter except the ones listed:

[^a-dqsv]

This example matches anything except a right square bracket (]) or the letter d:

[^\]d]

Multiple-Character Patterns

When creating regular expressions, you can also specify a pattern containing multiple characters. You create multiple-character regular expressions by joining letters, digits, or keyboard characters that do not have special meaning. For example, a4% is a multiple-character regular expression. Put a backslash in front of the keyboard characters that have special meaning when you want to remove their special meaning.

With multiple-character patterns, order is important. The regular expression a4% matches the character a followed by a 4 followed by a % sign. If the string does not have a4%, in that order, pattern matching fails. This multiple-character regular expression:

a.

uses the special meaning of the period character to match the letter a followed by any single character. With this example, the strings ab, a!, or a2 are all valid matches for the regular expression.

You can remove the special meaning of the period character by putting a backslash in front of it. In the following expression:

a\.

only the string a. matches this regular expression.

You can create a multiple-character regular expression containing all letters, all digits, all keyboard characters, or a combination of letters, digits, and other keyboard characters. These examples are all valid regular expressions:

telebit 3107 v32bis

Multipliers

Table 1-5 Special Characters Used as Multipliers

Character

Description

*

Matches 0 or more single- or multiple-character patterns.

+

Matches 1 or more single- or multiple-character patterns.

?

Matches 0 or 1 occurrences of the single- or multiple-character patterns.

This example matches any number of occurrences of the letter a, including none:

a*

This pattern requires that at least one letter a in the string is matched:

a+

This pattern matches the string bb or bab:

ba?b

This string matches any number of asterisks (*):

\**

To use multipliers with multiple-character patterns, you enclose the pattern in parentheses. In the following example, the pattern matches any number of the multiple-character string ab:

(ab)*

As a more complex example, this pattern matches one or more instances of alphanumeric pairs (but not none; that is, an empty string is not a match):

([A-Za-z][0-9])+

The order for matches using multipliers (*, +, or ?) is to put the longest construct first. Nested constructs are matched from outside to inside. Concatenated constructs are matched beginning at the left side of the construct. Thus, the regular expression matches A9b3, but not 9Ab3 because the letters are specified before the numbers.

Alternation

Alternation allows you to specify alternative patterns to match against a string. You separate the alternative patterns with a vertical bar (|). Exactly one of the alternatives can match the string. For example, the regular expression

codex | telebit

matches the string codex or the string telebit, but not both codex and telebit.

Anchoring

You can match a regular expression pattern against the beginning or the end of the string. That is, you can specify that the beginning or end of a string contains a specific pattern. You “anchor” these regular expressions to a portion of the string using the special characters shown in Table 1-6.

Table 1-6 Special Characters Used for Anchoring

Character

Description

^

Matches the beginning of the string.

$

Matches the end of the string.

This regular expression matches a string only if the string starts with abcd:

^abcd

In contrast, this expression is in a range that matches any single letter, as long as it is not the letters a, b, c, or d:

[^abcd]

With this example, the regular expression matches a string that ends with .12:

$\.12

Contrast these anchoring characters with the special character underscore (_). The underscore matches the beginning of a string (^), the end of a string ($), parentheses ( ), space ( ), braces { }, comma (,), or underscore (_). With the underscore character, you can specify that a pattern exist anywhere in the string.

For example:

_1300_

matches any string that has 1300 somewhere in the string. The string’s 1300 can be preceded by or end with a space, brace, comma, or underscore. For example:

{1300_

matches the regular expression, but 21300 and 13000 do not.

Using the underscore character, you can replace long regular expression lists, such as the following:

^1300$ ^1300(space) (space)1300 {1300, ,1300, {1300} ,1300, (1300

with

_1300_

Parentheses for Recall

As shown in the “Multipliers” section, you use parentheses with multiple-character regular expressions to multiply the occurrence of a pattern. You can also use parentheses around a single- or multiple-character pattern to remember a pattern for use elsewhere in the regular expression.

To create a regular expression that recalls a previous pattern, you use parentheses to indicate a remembered specific pattern and a backslash (\) followed by an integer to reuse the remembered pattern. The integer specifies the occurrence of the parentheses in the regular expression pattern. If you have more than one remembered pattern in your regular expression, then \1 indicates the first remembered pattern, \2 indicates the second remembered pattern, and so on.

This regular expression uses parentheses for recall:

a(.)bc(.)\1\2

This regular expression matches an a followed by any character (call it character 1), followed by bc followed by any character (character 2), followed by character 1 again, followed by character 2 again. So, the regular expression can match aZbcTZT. The software remembers that character 1 is Z and character 2 is T and then uses Z and T again later in the regular expression.

Saving Configuration Changes

[OK]

Switch#

On most platforms, this step saves the configuration to NVRAM. On the Class A Flash file system platforms, this step saves the configuration to the location specified by the CONFIG_FILE environment variable. The CONFIG_FILE environment variable defaults to NVRAM.

show platform Commands

You should use these commands only when you are working directly with your technical support representative, while troubleshooting a problem. Do not use these commands unless your technical support representative asks you to do so.

Note The show platform commands are not described in this document.

Cisco IOS Commands for the Catalyst 4500 Series Switches

This chapter contains an alphabetical listing of Cisco IOS commands for the Catalyst 4500 series switches. For information about Cisco IOS commands that are not included in this publication, refer to Cisco IOS Release 12.2 configuration guides and command references at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/products/sw/iosswrel/ps1835/products_product_indices_list.html

#macro keywords

To specify the help string for the macro keywords, use the #macro keywords command.

#macro keywords [keyword1] [keyword2] [keyword3]

Syntax Description

keyword 1

(Optional) Specifies a keyword that is needed while applying a macro to an interface.

keyword 2

(Optional) Specifies a keyword that is needed while applying a macro to an interface.

keyword 3

(Optional) Specifies a keyword that is needed while applying a macro to an interface.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If you do not specify the mandatory keywords for a macro, the macro is to be considered invalid and fails when you attempt to apply it. By entering the #macro keywords command, you will receive a message indicating what you need to include to make the syntax valid.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify the help string for keywords associated with a macro named test:

Switch(config)# macro name test

macro name test

Enter macro commands one per line. End with the character '@'.

#macro keywords $VLAN $MAX

swichport

@

Switch(config)# int gi1/1

Switch(config-if)# macro apply test ?

WORD Keyword to replace with a value e.g $VLAN, $MAX << It is shown as help

<cr>

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro apply cisco-desktop

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to a standard desktop.

macro apply cisco-phone

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to a standard desktop and a Cisco IP phone.

macro apply cisco-router

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to a router.

macro apply cisco-switch

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to another switch.

aaa accounting dot1x default start-stop group radius

To enable accounting for 802.1X authentication sessions, use the aaa accounting dot1x default start-stop group radius command. To disable accounting, use the no form of this command.

aaa accounting dot1x default start-stop group radius

no aaa accounting dot1x default start-stop group radius

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Accounting is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

802.1X accounting requires a RADIUS server.

This command enables the Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) client’s accounting feature to forward 802.1X update and watchdog packets from the 802.1X supplicant (workstation client) to the authentication (RADIUS) server. (Watchdog packets are defined as EAPOL-LOGON, EAPOL-LOGOFF, and EAPOL-INTERIM messages.) Successful authentication and authorization of the supplicant by the authentication server is required before these packets are considered valid and are forwarded. When the client is reauthenticated, an interim-update accounting notice is sent to the accounting server.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure 802.1X accounting:

Switch(config)# aaa accounting dot1x default start-stop group radius

Note The RADIUS authentication server must be properly configured to accept and log update or watchdog packets from the AAA client.

Related Commands

Command

Description

aaa accounting system default start-stop group radius

Receives the session termination messages after the switch reboots.

aaa accounting system default start-stop group radius

To receive the session termination messages after the switch reboots, use the aaa accounting system default start-stop group radius command. To disable accounting, use the no form of this command.

aaa accounting system default start-stop group radius

no aaa accounting system default start-stop group radius

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Accounting is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

802.1X accounting requires the RADIUS server.

This command enables the AAA client’s accounting feature to forward 802.1X update and watchdog packets from the 802.1X supplicant (workstation client) to the authentication (RADIUS) server. (Watchdog packets are defined as EAPOL-LOGON, EAPOL-LOGOFF, and EAPOL-INTERIM messages.) Successful authentication and authorization of the supplicant by the authentication server is required before these packets are considered valid and are forwarded. When the client is reauthenticated, an interim-update accounting notice is sent to the accounting server.

Examples

The following example shows how to generate a logoff after a switch reboots:

Switch(config)# aaa accounting system default start-stop group radius

Note The RADIUS authentication server must be properly configured to accept and log update or watchdog packets from the AAA client.

Related Commands

Command

Description

aaa accounting dot1x default start-stop group radius

Enables accounting for 802.1X authentication sessions.

access-group mode

To specify the override modes (for example, VACL overrides PACL) and the non-override modes (for example, merge or strict mode), use the access-group mode command. To return to preferred port mode, use the no form of this command.

access-group mode {prefer {port | vlan} | merge}

no access-group mode {prefer {port | vlan} | merge}

Syntax Description

prefer port

Specifies that the PACL mode take precedence if PACLs are configured. If no PACL features are configured on the port, other features applicable to the interface are merged and applied on the interface.

prefer vlan

Specifies that the VLAN-based ACL mode take precedence. If no VLAN-based ACL features are configured on the port’s VLAN, the PACL features on the port are applied.

merge

Merges applicable ACL features before they are programmed into the hardware.

Command Default

PACL override mode

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

On the Layer 2 interface, prefer port, prefer VLAN, and merge modes are supported. A Layer 2 interface can have one IP ACL applied in either direction (one inbound and one outbound).

Examples

The following example shows how to make the PACL mode on the switch take effect:

(config-if)# access-group mode prefer port

The following example shows how to merge applicable ACL features:

(config-if)# access-group mode merge

Related Commands

Command

Description

show access-group mode interface

Displays the ACL configuration on a Layer 2 interface.

show ip interface (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Displays the IP interface configuration.

show mac access-group interface

Displays the ACL configuration on a Layer 2 interface.

access-list hardware capture mode

To select the mode of capturing control packets, use the access-list hardware capture mode command.

access-list hardware capture mode {global | vlan}

Syntax Description

global

Specifies the capture of control packets globally on all VLANs.

vlan

Specifies the capture of control packets on a specific VLAN.

Command Default

The control packets are globally captured.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is not supported on Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

Before configuring the capture mode, it is best to examine and modify your configuration to globally disable features such as DHCP snooping or IGMP snooping, and instead enable them on specific VLANs.

When changing to path managed mode, be aware that control traffic may be bridged in hardware or dropped initially until the per-vlan CAM entries are programmed in hardware.

You must ensure that any access control configuration on a member port or VLAN does not deny or drop the control packets from being forwarded to the CPU for the features which are enabled on the VLAN. If control packets are not permitted then the specific feature does not function.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the switch to capture control packets on VLANs that are configured to enable capturing control packets:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# access-list hardware capture mode vlan

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to configure the switch to capture control packets globally across all VLANs (using a static ACL):

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# access-list hardware capture mode global

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

The following example shows another way to configure the switch to capture control packets globally across all VLANs:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# no access-list hardware capture mode vlan

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

access-list hardware entries

To designate how ACLs are programmed into the switch hardware, use the access-list hardware entries command.

access-list hardware entries {packed | scattered}

Syntax Description

packed

Directs the software to use the first entry with a matching mask when selecting an entry from the ACL TCAM for programming the ACEs in an ACL.

scattered

Directs the software to use the first entry with a free mask when selecting an entry from the ACL TCAM for programming the ACEs in an ACL.

Command Default

The ACLs are programmed as packed.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(20)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Two types of hardware resources are used when ACLs are programmed: entries and masks. If one of these resources is consumed, no additional ACLs can be programmed into the hardware. If the masks are consumed, but the entries are available, change the programming algorithm from packed to scattered to make the masks available. This action allows additional ACLs to be programmed into the hardware.

The goal is to use TCAM resources more efficiently; that is, to minimize the number of masks per ACL entries. To compare TCAM utilization when using the scattered or packed algorithms, use the

show platform hardware acl statistics utilization brief command. To change the algorithm from packed to scattered, use the access-list hardware entries command.

Examples

The following example shows how to program ACLs into the hardware as packed. After they are programmed, you will need 89 percent of the masks to program only 49 percent of the ACL entries.

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# access-list hardware entries packed

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

01:15:34: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console

Switch#

Switch# show platform hardware acl statistics utilization brief

Entries/Total(%) Masks/Total(%)

----------------- ---------------

Input Acl(PortAndVlan) 2016 / 4096 ( 49) 460 / 512 ( 89)

Input Acl(PortOrVlan) 6 / 4096 ( 0) 4 / 512 ( 0)

Input Qos(PortAndVlan) 0 / 4096 ( 0) 0 / 512 ( 0)

Input Qos(PortOrVlan) 0 / 4096 ( 0) 0 / 512 ( 0)

Output Acl(PortAndVlan) 0 / 4096 ( 0) 0 / 512 ( 0)

Output Acl(PortOrVlan) 0 / 4096 ( 0) 0 / 512 ( 0)

Output Qos(PortAndVlan) 0 / 4096 ( 0) 0 / 512 ( 0)

Output Qos(PortOrVlan) 0 / 4096 ( 0) 0 / 512 ( 0)

L4Ops: used 2 out of 64

Switch#

The following example shows how to reserve space (scatter) between ACL entries in the hardware. The number of masks required to program 49 percent of the entries has decreased to 49 percent.

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# access-list hardware entries scattered

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

01:39:37: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console

Switch#

Switch# show platform hardware acl statistics utilization brief

Entries/Total(%) Masks/Total(%)

----------------- ---------------

Input Acl(PortAndVlan) 2016 / 4096 ( 49) 252 / 512 ( 49)

Input Acl(PortOrVlan) 6 / 4096 ( 0) 5 / 512 ( 0)

Input Qos(PortAndVlan) 0 / 4096 ( 0) 0 / 512 ( 0)

Input Qos(PortOrVlan) 0 / 4096 ( 0) 0 / 512 ( 0)

Output Acl(PortAndVlan) 0 / 4096 ( 0) 0 / 512 ( 0)

Output Acl(PortOrVlan) 0 / 4096 ( 0) 0 / 512 ( 0)

Output Qos(PortAndVlan) 0 / 4096 ( 0) 0 / 512 ( 0)

Output Qos(PortOrVlan) 0 / 4096 ( 0) 0 / 512 ( 0)

L4Ops: used 2 out of 64

Switch#

access-list hardware region

To modify the balance between TCAM regions in hardware, use the access-list hardware region command.

access-list hardware region {feature | qos} {input | output} balance {bal-num}

Syntax Description

feature

Specifies adjustment of region balance for ACLs.

qos

Specifies adjustment of region balance for QoS.

input

Specifies adjustment of region balance for input ACL and QoS.

output

Specifies adjustment of region balance for output ACL and QoS.

balance bal-num

Specifies relative sizes of the PandV and PorV regions in the TCAM; valid values are between 1 and 99.

Command Default

The default region balance for each TCAM is 50.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

PandV is a TCAM region containing entries which mask in both the port and VLAN tag portions of the flow label.

PorV is a TCAM region containing entries which mask in either the port or VLAN tag portion of the flow label, but not both.

A balance of 1 allocates the minimum number of PandV region entries and the maximum number of PorV region entries. A balance of 99 allocates the maximum number of PandV region entries and the minimum number of PorV region entries. A balance of 50 allocates equal numbers of PandV and PorV region entries in the specified TCAM.

Balances for the four TCAMs can be modified independently.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the MAC notification trap when a MAC address is added to a port:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# access-list hardware region feature input balance 75

Switch(config)#

action

To specify an action to be taken when a match occurs in a VACL, use the action command. To remove an action clause, use the no form of this command.

action {drop | forward}

no action {drop | forward}

Syntax Description

drop

Sets the action to drop packets.

forward

Sets the action to forward packets to their destination.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

VLAN access-map mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

In a VLAN access map, if at least one ACL is configured for a packet type (IP or MAC), the default action for the packet type is drop (deny).

If an ACL is not configured for a packet type, the default action for the packet type is forward (permit).

If an ACL for a packet type is configured and the ACL is empty or undefined, the configured action will be applied to the packet type.

Examples

The following example shows how to define a drop action:

Switch(config-access-map)# action drop

Switch(config-access-map)#

The following example shows how to define a forward action:

Switch(config-access-map)# action forward

Switch(config-access-map)#

Syntax Description

Command

Description

match

Specifies a match clause by selecting one or more ACLs for a VLAN access-map sequence.

show vlan access-map

Displays the contents of a VLAN access map.

vlan access-map

Enters VLAN access-map command mode to create a VLAN access map.

active

To enable the destination profile, use the active command.

active

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

cfg-call-home-profile

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

By default the profile is enabled upon creation.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the destination profile:

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# profile cisco

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# active

Related Commands

Command

Description

destination address

Configures the destination e-mail address or URL to which Call Home messages will be sent.

destination message-size-limit bytes

Configures a maximum destination message size for the destination profile.

destination preferred-msg-format

Configures a preferred message format.

destination transport-method

Enables the message transport method.

profile

Enters profile call-home configuration submode

subscribe-to-alert-group all

Subscribes to all available alert groups.

subscribe-to-alert-group configuration

Subscribes this destination profile to the Configuration alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic

Subscribes this destination profile to the Diagnostic alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group environment

Subscribes this destination profile to the Environment alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group inventory

Subscribes this destination profile to the Inventory alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group syslog

Subscribes this destination profile to the Syslog alert group.

ancp client port identifier

To create a mapping for an ANCP client to identify an interface on which ANCP should start or stop a multicast stream, use the ancp client port identifier command.

ancp client port identifier identifying name vlan vlan number interface interface

Syntax Description

identifier name

Identifier used by the ANCP server to specify an interface member of a VLAN.

vlan number

VLAN identifier.

interface

Interface member of this VLAN.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The ANCP server can use either the DHCP option 82 circuit ID or an identifier created with this commandto identify the port. Use only one of the two methods; do not interchange them. If you use the DHCP option 82, the port identifier used by the ANCP server should be (in hex) 0x01060004[vlan][intf]. For example, VLAN 19 and interface Fast Ethernet 2/3 will provide 0x0106000400130203. If you use the port identifier, however, use the exact string provided on the CLI.

Note This command is available only after you set the box in ANCP client mode with the ancp mode client configuration command.

Examples

The following example shows how to identify interface FastEthernet 7/3 on VLAN 10 with the string NArmstrong:

Switch# ancp client port identifier NArmstrong vlan 10 interface FastEthernet 7/3

Related Commands

Command

Description

ancp mode client

Sets the router to become an ANCP client.

ancp client server

To set the IP address of the remote ANCP server, use the ancp client server command.

ancp client server ipaddr of server interface interface

Syntax Description

ipaddr of server

IP address of the ANCP server the client must connect with TCP.

interface

Interface to use for the connection.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The interface can be the direct interface connected towards the ANCP server (if only one) or a loopback interface if several interfaces are available for connecting to the server and proper routing is set. (An IP address must be configured on this interface and it should not be in shutdown state.) Along with the ancp mode client command, the ancp client server command is required in order to activate the ANCP client. Once you enter this command, the ANCP client tries to connect to the remote server.

Examples

The following example shows how to indicate to the ANCP client the IP address of the ANCP server it needs to connect to:

Switch# ancp client server 10.1.2.31 interface FastEthernet 2/1

Related Commands

Command

Description

ancp mode client

Sets the router to become an ANCP client.

ancp mode client

To set the router to become an ANCP client, use the ancp mode client command.

ancp mode client

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

To fully activate ANCP, the administrator must also set the ANCP server IP address to which the ANCP client must connect.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the router to become an ANCP client:

Switch# ancp mode client

Related Commands

Command

Description

ancp client server

Displays multicast streams activated by ANCP.

apply

To implement a new VLAN database, increment the configuration number, save the configuration number in NVRAM, and propagate the configuration number throughout the administrative domain, use the apply command.

apply

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

VLAN configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The apply command implements the configuration changes that you made after you entered VLAN database mode and uses them for the running configuration. This command keeps you in VLAN database mode.

You cannot use this command when the switch is in the VTP client mode.

You can verify that the VLAN database changes occurred by entering the show vlan command from privileged EXEC mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to implement the proposed new VLAN database and to recognize it as the current database:

Switch(config-vlan)# apply

Switch(config-vlan)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

exit (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Closes an active terminal session by logging off the switch.

reset

Leaves the proposed new VLAN database but remains in VLAN configuration mode and resets the proposed new database to be identical to the VLAN database currently implemented.

show vlan

Displays VLAN information.

shutdown vlan (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Shuts down VLAN switching.

vtp (global configuration mode)

Modifies the name of a VTP configuration storage file.

arp access-list

To define an ARP access list or add clauses at the end of a predefined list, use the arp access-list command.

arp access-list name

Syntax Description

name

Specifies the access control list name.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to define an ARP access list named static-hosts:

Switch(config)# arp access-list static-hosts

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

deny

Denies an ARP packet based on matches against the DHCP bindings.

ip arp inspection filter vlan

Permits ARPs from hosts that are configured for static IP when DAI is enabled and to define an ARP access list and applies it to a VLAN.

permit

Permits an ARP packet based on matches against the DHCP bindings.

attach module

To remotely connect to a specific module, use the attach module configuration command.

attach module mod

Syntax Description

mod

Target module for the command.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command applies only to the Access Gateway Module on Catalyst 4500 series switches.

The valid values for mod depend on the chassis that are used. For example, if you have a Catalyst 4506 chassis, valid values for the module are from 2 to 6. If you have a 4507R chassis, valid values are from 3 to 7.

When you execute the attach module mod command, the prompt changes to Gateway#.

This command is identical in the resulting action to the session module mod and the remote login module mod commands.

Examples

The following example shows how to remotely log in to an Access Gateway Module:

Switch# attach module 5

Attaching console to module 5

Type 'exit' at the remote prompt to end the session

Gateway>

Related Commands

Command

Description

remote login module

Remotely connects to a specific module.

session module

Logs in to the standby supervisor engine using a virtual console.

authentication control-direction

To change the port control to unidirectional or bidirectional, use the authentication control-direction command in interface configuration mode. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

authentication control-direction {both | in}

no authentication control-direction

Syntax Description

both

Enables bidirectional control on the port.

in

Enables unidirectional control on the port.

Command Default

both

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

The authentication control-direction command replaces the following dot1x command, which is deprecated in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SG and later releases:

dot1x control-direction {both | in}

The IEEE 802.1X standard defines a client-server-based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized devices from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports.

IEEE 802.1X controls network access by creating two distinct virtual access points at each port. One access point is an uncontrolled port; the other is a controlled port. All traffic through the single port is available to both access points. IEEE 802.1X authenticates each user device that connects to a switch port and assigns the port to a VLAN before making available any services that are offered by the switch or the LAN. Until the device authenticates, 802.1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) over LAN (EAPOL) traffic through the port to which the device connects. After authentication succeeds, normal traffic can pass through the port.

- Unidirectional state—When you configure a port as unidirectional with the

dot1x control-direction interface configuration command, the port changes to the spanning-tree forwarding state.

When the unidirectional controlled port is enabled, the connected host is in sleeping mode or power-down state. The host does not exchange traffic with other devices in the network. If the host connected to the unidirectional port that cannot send traffic to the network, the host can only receive traffic from other devices in the network.

- Bidirectional state—When you configure a port as bidirectional with the dot1x control-direction interface configuration command, the port is access-controlled in both directions. In this state, the switch port sends only EAPOL.

Using the both keyword or using the no form of this command changes the port to its bidirectional default setting.

Setting the port as bidirectional enables 802.1X authentication with Wake-on-LAN (WoL).

You can verify your settings by entering the show authentication privileged EXEC command.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable unidirectional control:

Switch(config-if)# authentication control-direction in

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to enable bidirectional control:

Switch(config-if)# authentication control-direction both

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to return to the default settings:

Switch(config-if)# no authentication control-direction

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show authentication

Displays Authentication Manager information.

authentication critical recovery delay

To configure the 802.1X critical authentication parameters, use the authentication critical recovery delay command in global configuration mode. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

authentication critical recovery delay milliseconds

no authentication critical recovery delay

Syntax Description

milliseconds

Specifies the recovery delay period in milliseconds to wait to reinitialize a critical port when an unavailable RADIUS server becomes available. The rang is 1 to 10000 milliseconds.

Command Default

10000 milliseconds

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

The authentication critical recovery delay command replaces the following dot1x command, which is deprecated in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SG and later releases:

dot1x critical recovery delay milliseconds

You can verify your settings by entering the show authentication privileged EXEC command.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the recovery delay period that the switch waits to reinitialize a critical port when an unavailable RADIUS server becomes available:

Switch(config)# authentication critical recovery delay 1500

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show authentication

Displays Authentication Manager information.

authentication event

To configure the actions for authentication events, use the authentication event interface configuration command. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

authentication event fail [retry count] action [authorize vlan vlan | next-method}

authentication event server {alive action reinitialize | dead action authorize [vlan vlan] | voice | dead action reinitialize [vlan vlan]}}

authentication event no-response action authorize vlan vlan]}

no authentication event {fail} | {server {alive | dead}} | {no-response}

Syntax Description

fail

Specifies the behavior when an authentication fails due to bad user credentials.

retry count

(Optional) Specifies the number of times to retry failed authentications. Range is 0 to 5. Default is 2.

fail action authorize vlan vlan

When authentication fails due to wrong user credentials, authorizes the port to a particular VLAN.

fail action next-method

Specifies that the required action for an authentication event moves to the next authentication method.

server alive action reinitialize

Configures the authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server alive actions as reinitialize all authorized clients for authentication events.

server dead action authorize [vlan vlan | voice

Configures the AAA server dead actions to authorize data or voice clients for the authentication events.

server dead action reinitialize vlan vlan

Configures the AAA server dead actions to reinitialize all authorized data clients for authentication events.

no-response action authorize

When the client does not support 802.1x, authorizes the port to a particular VLAN.

Command Default

The default settings are as follows:

- The count is 2 by default.

- The current authentication method is retried indefinitely (and fails each time) until the AAA server becomes reachable.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

The authentication event fail command replaces the following 802.1X commands, which are deprecated in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SG and later releases:

- [ no ] dot1x auth-fail max-attempts count

- [ no ] dot1x auth-fail vlan vlan

The authentication event fail command is supported only for 802.1X to signal authentication failures. By default, this failure type causes the authentication method to be retried. You can configure either to authorize the port in the configured VLAN or to failover to the next authentication method. Optionally, you can specify the number of authentication retries before performing this action.

The authentication event server command replaces the following 802.1X commands, which are deprecated in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SG and later releases:

- [ no ] dot1x critical

- [ no ] dot1x critical vlan vlan

- [ no ] dot1x critical recover action initialize

The authentication event server command specifies the behavior when the AAA server becomes unreachable, ports are authorized in the specified VLAN.

The authentication server alive action command specifies the action to be taken once the AAA server becomes reachable again.

You can verify your settings by entering the show authentication privileged EXEC command.

The authentication event no-response command replaces the following 802.1X command, which is deprecated in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SG and later releases:

- [no] dot1x guest-vlan vlan

The authentication event no-response command specifies the action to be taken when the client does not support 802.1X.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify that when an authentication fails due to bad user credentials, the process advances to the next authentication method:

Switch(config-if)# authentication event fail action next-method

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to specify the AAA server alive actions as reinitialize all authorized clients for authentication events:

Switch(config-if)# authentication event server alive action reinitialize

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to specify the AAA server dead actions that authorize the port for authentication events:

Switch(config-if)# authentication event server dead action authorize

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to specify the conditions when a client doesn't support 802.1X to authorize the port for authentication events:

Switch(config-if)# authentication event authentication event no-response action authorize vlan 10

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show authentication

Displays Authentication Manager information.

authentication fallback

To enable WebAuth fallback and to specify the fallback profile to use when failing over to WebAuth, use the authentication fallback interface command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

authentication fallback profile

Syntax Description

profile

Name to use when failing over to WebAuth (maximum of 200 characters).

Command Default

Disabled

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

By default, if 802.1X times out and if MAB fails, WebAuth is enabled.

The authentication fallback command replaces the following dot1x command, which is deprecated in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SG and later releases:

[no] dot1x fallback profile

The Webauth fallback feature allows you to have those clients that do not have an 802.1X supplicant and are not managed devices to fall back to the WebAuth method.

You can verify your settings with the show authentication privileged EXEC command.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable WebAuth fallback and specify the fallback profile to use when failing over to WebAuth:

Switch(config-if)# authentication fallback fallbacktest1

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to disable WebAuth fallback:

Switch(config-if)# no authentication fallback fallbacktest1

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show authentication

Displays Authentication Manager information.

authentication host-mode

To define the classification of a session that will be used to apply the access-policies in host-mode configuration, use the authentication host-mode command in interface configuration mode. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

authentication host-mode {single-host | multi-auth | multi-domain | multi-host} [open]

[no] authentication host-mode {single-host | multi-auth | multi-domain | multi-host} [open]

Syntax Description

single-host

Specifies the session as an interface session, and allows one client on the port only. This is the default host mode when enabling 802.1X.

multi-auth

Specifies the session as a MAC-based session. Any number of clients are allowed on a port in data domain and only one client in voice domain, but each one is required to authenticate separately.

multi-domain

Specifies the session based on a combination of MAC address and domain, with the restriction that only one MAC is allowed per domain.

multi-host

Specifies the session as an interface session, but allows more than one client on the port.

open

(Optional) Configures the host-mode with open policy on the port.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

Single-host mode classifies the session as an interface session (for example, one MAC per interface). Only one client is allowed on the port, and any policies that are downloaded for the client are applied to the whole port. A security violation is triggered if more than one client is detected.

Multi-host mode classifies the session as an interface session, but the difference with this host-mode is that it allows more than one client to attach to the port. Only the first client that is detected on the port will be authenticated and the rest will inherit the same access as the first client. The policies that are downloaded for the first client will be applied to the whole port.

Multi-domain mode classifies the session based on a combination of MAC address and domain, with the restriction that only one MAC is allowed per domain. The domain in the switching environment refers to the VLAN, and the two supported domains are the DATA domain and the voice domain. Only one client is allowed on a particular domain. So, only two clients (MACs) per port are supported. Each one is required to authenticate separately. Any policies that are downloaded for the client will be applied for that client’s MAC/IP only and will not affect the other on the same port. The clients can be authenticated using different methods (such as 802.1X for PC, MAB for IP phone, or vice versa). No restriction exists on the authentication order.

The only caveat with the above statement is that web-based authentication is only available for data devices because a user is probably operating the device and HTTP capability exists. Also, if web-based authentication is configured in MDA mode, the only form of enforcement for all types of devices is downloadable ACLs (dACL). The restriction is in place because VLAN assignment is not supported for web-based authentication. Furthermore, if you use dACLs for data devices and not for voice devices, when the user’s data falls back to webauth, voice traffic is affected by the ACL that is applied based on the fallback policy. Therefore if webauth is configured as a fallback on an MDA enabled port, dACL is the only supported enforcement method.

Multi-auth mode classifies the session as a MAC-based. No limit exists for the number of clients allowed on a port data domain. Only one client is allowed in a voice domain and each one is required to authenticate separately. Any policies that are downloaded for the client are applied for that client’s MAC or IP only and do not affect others on the same port.

The optional pre-authentication open access mode allows you to gain network access before authentication is performed.This is primarily required for the PXE boot scenario, but not limited to just that use case, where a device needs to access the network before PXE times out and downloads a bootable image possibly containing a supplicant.

The configuration related to this feature is attached to the host-mode configuration whereby the host-mode itself is significant for the control plane, while the open access configuration is significant for the data plane. Open-access configuration has absolutely no bearing on the session classification. The host-mode configuration still controls this. If the open-access is defined for single-host mode, the port still allows only one MAC address. The port forwards traffic from the start and is only restricted by what is configured on the port. Such configurations are independent of 802.1X. So, if there is no form of access-restriction configured on the port, the client devices have full access on the configured VLAN.

You can verify your settings with the show authentication privileged EXEC command.

Examples

The following example shows how to define the classification of a session that are used to apply the access-policies using the host-mode configuration:

Switch(config-if)# authentication host-mode single-host

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show authentication

Displays Authentication Manager information.

authentication open

To enable open access on this port, use the authentication open command in interface configuration mode. To disable open access on this port, use the no form of this command.

authentication open

no authentication open

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

Open Access allows clients or devices to gain network access before authentication is performed.

You can verify your settings with the show authentication privileged EXEC command.

This command overrides the authentication host-mode session-type open global configuration mode command for the port only.

This command operates per-port rather than globally.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable open access to a port:

Switch(config-if)# authentication open

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to enable open access to a port:

Switch(config-if)# no authentication open

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show authentication

Displays Authentication Manager information.

authentication order

To specify the order in which authentication methods should be attempted for a client on an interface, use the authentication order command in interface configuration mode. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

authentication order method1 [method2] [method3]

no authentication order

Syntax Description

method1

Authentication method to be attempted. The valid values are as follows:

- dot1x —Adds the dot1x authentication method.

- mab —Adds the MAB authentication method.

- webauth —Adds the WebAuth authentication method.

method2

method3

(Optional) Authentication method to be attempted. The valid values are as follows:

- dot1x —Adds the dot1x authentication method.

- mab —Adds the MAB authentication method.

- webauth —Adds the WebAuth authentication method.

Command Default

The default order is dot1x, MAB, then WebAuth.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

Once you enter the authentication order command, only those methods explicitly listed will run. Each method may be entered only once in the run list and no methods may be entered after you enter the webauth keyword.

Authentication methods are applied in the configured (or default) order until authentication succeeds. For authentication fails, failover to the next authentication method occurs (subject to the configuration of authentication event handling).

You can verify your settings with the show authentication privileged EXEC command.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify the order in which authentication methods should be attempted for a client on an interface:

Switch(config-if)# authentication order mab dot1x webauth

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show authentication

Displays Authentication Manager information.

authentication periodic

To enable reauthentication for this port, use the authentication periodic command in interface configuration mode. To disable reauthentication for this port, use the no form of this command.

authentication periodic

no authentication periodic

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

The authentication periodic command replaces the following dot1x command, which is deprecated in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SG and later releases:

[no] dot1x reauthentication

The reauthentication period can be set using the authentication timer command.

You can verify your settings by entering the show authentication privileged EXEC command.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable reauthentication for this port:

Switch(config-if)# authentication reauthentication

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to disable reauthentication for this port:

Switch(config-if)# no authentication reauthentication

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

authentication timer

Configures the authentication timer.

show authentication

Displays Authentication Manager information.

authentication port-control

To configure the port-control value, use the authentication port-control command in interface configuration mode. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

authentication port-control [auto | force-authorized | force-unauthorized]

no authentication port-control

Syntax Description

auto

(Optional) Enables 802.1X port-based authentication and causes the port to begin in the unauthorized state.

force-authorized

(Optional) Disables 802.1X on the interface and causes the port to change to the authorized state without any authentication exchange required. The port transmits and receives normal traffic without 802.1X-based authentication of the client. The force-authorized keyword is the default.

force-unauthorized

(Optional) Denies all access through this interface by forcing the port to change to the unauthorized state, ignoring all attempts by the client to authenticate.

Command Default

force-authorized

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

The authentication port-control command replaces the following dot1x command, which is deprecated in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SG and later releases:

[no] dot1x port-control [auto | force-authorized | force-unauthorized]

The following guidelines apply to Ethernet switch network modules:

- The 802.1X protocol is supported on Layer 2 static-access ports.

- You can use the auto keyword only if the port is not configured as one of the following types:

– Trunk port—If you try to enable 802.1X on a trunk port, an error message appears, and 802.1X is not enabled. If you try to change the mode of an 802.1X-enabled port to trunk, the port mode is not changed.

– EtherChannel port—Before enabling 802.1X on the port, you must first remove it from the EtherChannel. If you try to enable 802.1X on an EtherChannel or on an active port in an EtherChannel, an error message appears, and 802.1X is not enabled. If you enable 802.1X on a not-yet active port of an EtherChannel, the port does not join the EtherChannel.

– Switch Port Analyzer (SPAN) destination port—You can enable 802.1X on a port that is a SPAN destination port; however, 802.1X is disabled until the port is removed as a SPAN destination. You can enable 802.1X on a SPAN source port.

To globally disable 802.1X on the device, you must disable it on each port. There is no global configuration command for this task.

You can verify your settings with the show authentication privileged EXEC command.

The auto keyword allows you to send and receive only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) frames through the port. The authentication process begins when the link state of the port transitions from down to up or when an EAPOL-start frame is received. The system requests the identity of the client and begins relaying authentication messages between the client and the authentication server. Each client attempting to access the network is uniquely identified by the system through the client’s MAC address.

Examples

The following example shows that the authentication status of the client PC will be determined by the authentication process:

Switch(config-if)# authentication port-control auto

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show authentication

Displays Authentication Manager information.

authentication priority

To specify the priority of authentication methods on an interface, use the authentication priority command in interface configuration mode. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

authentication priority method1 [method2] [method3]

no authentication priority

Syntax Description

method1

Authentication method to be attempted. The valid values are as follows:

- dot1x —Adds the dot1x authentication method.

- mab —Adds the MAB authentication method.

- webauth —Adds the Webauth authentication method.

method2

method3

(Optional) Authentication method to be attempted. The valid values are as follows:

- dot1x —Adds the dot1x authentication method.

- mab —Adds the MAB authentication method.

- webauth —Adds the Webauth authentication method.

Command Default

The default order is dot1x, MAB, then webauth.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

Configuring priorities for authentication methods allows a higher priority method (not currently running) to interrupt an authentication in progress with a lower priority method. Alternatively, if the client is already authenticated, an interrupt from a higher priority method can cause a client, which was previously authenticated using a lower priority method, to reauthenticate.

The default priority of a method is equivalent to its position in the order of execution list. If you do not configure a priority, the relative priorities (highest first) are dot1x, MAB and then webauth. If you enter the authentication order command, the default priorities are the same as the configured order.

You can verify your settings with the show authentication privileged EXEC command.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify the priority in which authentication methods should be attempted for a client on an interface:

Switch(config-if)# authentication priority mab dot1x webauth

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

authentication order

Specifies the order in which authentication methods should be attempted for a client on an interface.

show authentication

Displays Authentication Manager information.

authentication timer

To configure the authentication timer, use the authentication timer command in interface configuration mode. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

authentication timer {{inactivity value} | {reauthenticate {server | value}} | {restart value}}

no authentication timer {{inactivity value} | {reauthenticate value} | {restart value}}

Syntax Description

inactivity value

Specifies the amount of time in seconds that a host is allowed to be inactive before being authorized. Range is 1 to 65535. Default is Off.

Note The inactivity value should be less than the reauthenticate timer value, but configuring the inactivity value higher than the reauthenticate timer value is not considered an error.

reauthenticate server

Specifies that the reauthentication period value for the client should be obtained from the authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server as Session-Timeout (RADIUS Attribute 27).

reauthenticate value

Specifies the amount of time in seconds after which an automatic reauthentication is initiated. Range is 1 to 65535. Default is 3600.

restart value

Specifies the amount of time in seconds after which an attempt is made to authenticate an unauthorized port. Range is 1 to 65535. Default is Off.

Command Default

The default settings are as follows:

- inactivity value— Off.

- reauthenticate value —3600

- restart value —Off

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

Reauthentication only occurs if it is enabled on the interface.

The authentication timer reauthenticate value command replaces the following dot1x command that is deprecated in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SG and later releases:

[no] dot1x timeout {reauth-period seconds | quiet-period seconds | tx-period seconds | supp-timeout seconds | server-timeout seconds}

Note You should change the default values of this command only to adjust for unusual circumstances such as unreliable links or specific behavioral problems with certain clients or authentication servers.

During the inactivity period, the Ethernet switch network module does not accept or initiate any authentication requests. If you want to provide a faster response time to the user, enter a number less than the default.

The reauthenticate keyword affects the behavior of the Ethernet switch network module only if you have enabled periodic reauthentication with the authentication reauthentication global configuration command.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify that the reauthentication period value for the client should be obtained from the authentication, authorization, and accounting (AAA) server as Session-Timeout (RADIUS Attribute 27):

Switch(config-if)# authentication timer reauthenticate server

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show authentication

Displays Authentication Manager information.

authentication violation

Use the authentication violation interface configuration command to configure the violation mode: restrict, shutdown, and replace.

In single-host mode, a security violation is triggered when more than one device are detected on the data vlan. In multidomain authentication mode, a security violation is triggered when more than one device are detected on the data or voice VLAN.

Security violation cannot be triggered in multiplehost or multiauthentication mode.

authentication violation { restrict | shutdown | replace}

no authentication violation {restrict | shutdown | replace}

Syntax Description

restrict

Generates a syslog error when a violation error occurs.

shutdown

Error disables the [virtual] port on which an unexpected MAC address occurs.

replace

Replaces the existing host with the new host, instead of errordisabling or restricting the port.

Command Default

Shut down the port. If the restrict keyword is configured, the port does not shutdown.

Command Modes

Interface configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

Command introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(54)SG

Support for replace keyword.

Usage Guidelines

When a new host is seen in single or multiple- domain modes, replace mode tears down the old session and authenticates the new host.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure violation mode shutdown on a switch:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# authentication violation shutdown

A port is error-disabled when a security violation triggers on shutdown mode. The following syslog messages displays:

%AUTHMGR-5-SECURITY_VIOLATION: Security violation on the interface <interface name>, new MAC address <mac-address> is seen.

%PM-4-ERR_DISABLE: security-violation error detected on <interface name>, putting <interface name> in err-disable state

Related Commands

Command

Description

authentication control-direction

Configures the port mode as unidirectional or bidirectional.

authentication event

Sets the action for specific authentication events.

authentication fallback

Configures a port to use web authentication as a fallback method for clients that do not support IEEE 802.1x authentication.

authentication host-mode

Sets the authorization manager mode on a port.

authentication open

Enables or disables open access on a port.

authentication order

Sets the order of authentication methods used on a port.

authentication periodic

Enables or disables reauthentication on a port.

authentication port-control

Enables manual control of the port authorization state.

authentication priority

Adds an authentication method to the port-priority list.

authentication timer

Configures the timeout and reauthentication parameters for an 802.1x-enabled port.

show authentication

Displays information about authentication manager events on the switch.

auto qos classify

To generate a QoS configuration for an untrusted interface, use the auto qos classify interface command.

auto qos classify

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.1(1)SG,

15.1(1)SG IOS-XE 3.3.0

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command generates a QoS configuration for untrusted interfaces. It places a service-policy to classify the traffic coming from untrusted desktops or devices and marks them accordingly. The service-policies generated do not police.

Global Level Commands Generated

The global templates are defined in A, B, C.

A. Template for ACLs and application classes used by the auto qos classify command.

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Multimedia-Conf

permit udp any any range 16384 32767

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Signaling

permit tcp any any range 2000 2002

permit tcp any any range 5060 5061

permit udp any any range 5060 5061

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Transactional-Data

permit tcp any any eq 443

permit tcp any any eq 1521

permit udp any any eq 1521

permit tcp any any eq 1526

permit udp any any eq 1526

permit tcp any any eq 1575

permit udp any any eq 1575

permit tcp any any eq 1630

permit udp any any eq 1630

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Bulk-Data

permit tcp any any eq ftp

permit tcp any any eq ftp-data

permit tcp any any eq 22

permit tcp any any eq smtp

permit tcp any any eq 465

permit tcp any any eq 143

permit tcp any any eq 993

permit tcp any any eq pop3

permit tcp any any eq 995

permit tcp any any eq 1914

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Scavenger

permit tcp any any eq 1214

permit udp any any eq 1214

permit tcp any any range 2300 2400

permit udp any any range 2300 2400

permit tcp any any eq 3689

permit udp any any eq 3689

permit tcp any any range 6881 6999

permit tcp any any eq 11999

permit tcp any any range 28800 29100

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Default

permit ip any any

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Data

match dscp ef

match cos 5

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Data-Cos

match cos 5

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Signal

match dscp cs3

match cos 3

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Signal-Cos

match cos 3

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Multimedia-Conf

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Signaling-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Signaling

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Transaction-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Transactional-Data

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Bulk-Data

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Scavenger

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Default-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Default

AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Data-Cos and AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Signal-Cos are needed to handle instances when you connect an IP phone to an interface and call the auto qos voip cisco-phone command on that interface. In this situation, the input service policy on the interface must match VoIP and signaling packets solely on their CoS markings. This is because switching ASICs on Cisco IP Phones are limited to only remarking the CoS bits of VoIP and the signaling traffic. Matching DSCP markings results in a security vulnerability because a user whose PC was connected to an IP phone connected to a switch would be able to remark DSCP markings of traffic arising from their PC to dscp ef using the NIC on their PC. This causes incorrect placement of non real-time traffic in the priority queue in the egress direction.

B. Template for the auto qos classify command input service-policy

policy-map AutoQos-4.0-Classify-Input-Policy

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Classify

set dscp af41

set cos 4

set qos-group 34

class AutoQos-4.0-Signaling-Classify

set dscp cs3

set cos 3

set qos-group 16

class AutoQos-4.0-Transaction-Classify

set dscp af21

set cos 2

set qos-group 18

class AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Classify

set dscp af11

set cos 1

set qos-group 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Classify

set dscp cs1

set cos 1

set qos-group 8

class AutoQos-4.0-Default-Classify

set dscp default

set cos 0

C. Template for egress queue classes along with the SRND4 output policy that uses the egress classes to allocate 8 queues. This template is required by all SRND4 commands:

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Priority-Queue

match qos-group 32

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Control-Mgmt-Queue

match qos-group 16

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Queue

match qos-group 34

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream-Queue

match qos-group 26

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Trans-Data-Queue

match qos-group 18

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Queue

match qos-group 10

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue

match qos-group 8

match dscp cs1

Because police commands executed in policy map configuration mode do not allow the remarking of qos-groups for traffic flows that exceed defined rate limits, you must configure AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue to match either qos-group 7 or dscp af11. When you enter the auto qos classify police command, traffic flows that violate the defined rate limit are remarked to cs1 but retain their original qos-group classification because qos-groups cannot be remarked as an exceed action. However, because AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue is defined before all other queues in the output policy map, remarked packets fall into it, despite retaining their original qos-group labels.

policy-map AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policye

bandwidth remaining percent 1

class AutoQos-4.0-Priority-Queue

priority

police cir percent 30 bc 33 ms

conform-action transmit exceed-action drop

class AutoQos-4.0-Control-Mgmt-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Trans-Data-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

dbl

class AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 4

dbl

class class-default

bandwidth remaining percent 25

dbl

Interface Level Commands Generated

For Fa/Gig Ports:

Switch(config-if)# service-policy input AutoQos-4.0-Classify-Input-Policy

service-policy output AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

Examples

The following example shows how to generate a QoS configuration for the untrusted interface gigabitethernet1/1:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# auto qos classify

Related Commands

Command

Description

auto qos trust

Generate QoS configurations for trusted interfaces.

auto qos voip cisco-softphone

Generate QoS configuration for interfaces connected to PCs running the Cisco IP SoftPhone application and marks police traffic coming from such interfaces.

auto qos classify police

To police traffic form an untrusted interface, use the auto qos classify police interface command.

auto qos classify police

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.1(1)SG,

15.1(1)SG IOS-XE 3.3.0

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command generates a QoS configuration for untrusted interfaces. It places a service-policy to classify the traffic arriving from these untrusted desktops or devices and marks them accordingly. The generated service-policies police and either mark-down or drop packets.

Global Level Commands Generated

Auto QoS srn4 commands, once applied to an interface, generate one or more of the following templates (A, B, and C) at the global configuration level. Typically, a command generates a series of class-maps that either match on ACLs or on DSCP or CoS values to differentiate traffic into application classes. An input policy is generated that matches the generated classes, sets qos-groups on the classes, and in some cases, polices the classes to a set bandwidth. (A qos-group is merely a numerical tag that allows different application classes to be treated as one unit. Outside the switch’s context, it has no significance.) Furthermore, eight egress-queue class-maps are generated, matching the qos-groups set in the input policy. The actual egress output policy assigns a queue to each one of these eight egress-queue class-maps.

The commands generate the following templates as needed. For example, on initial use of the a new command, global configurations that define the eight queue egress service-policy are generated (template C, below). Subsequently, auto qos commands applied to other interfaces do not generate templates for egress queuing because all auto qos commands rely on the same eight queue model after migration, and they will have already been generated from the first use of the command.

The global templates are defined in A, B, C.

A. Template for ACLs and application classes used by the auto qos classify police command

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Multimedia-Conf

permit udp any any range 16384 32767

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Signaling

permit tcp any any range 2000 2002

permit tcp any any range 5060 5061

permit udp any any range 5060 5061

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Transactional-Data

permit tcp any any eq 443

permit tcp any any eq 1521

permit tcp any any eq 1521

permit udp any any eq 1521

permit tcp any any eq 1526

permit udp any any eq 1526

permit tcp any any eq 1575

permit udp any any eq 1575

permit tcp any any eq 1630

permit udp any any eq 1630

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Bulk-Data

permit tcp any any eq ftp

permit tcp any any eq ftp-data

permit tcp any any eq 22

permit tcp any any eq smtp

permit tcp any any eq 465

permit tcp any any eq 143

permit tcp any any eq 993

permit tcp any any eq pop3

permit tcp any any eq 995

permit tcp any any eq 1914

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Scavenger

permit tcp any any eq 1214

permit udp any any eq 1214

permit tcp any any range 2300 2400

permit udp any any range 2300 2400

permit tcp any any eq 3689

permit udp any any eq 3689

permit tcp any any range 6881 6999

permit tcp any any eq 11999

permit tcp any any range 28800 29100

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Default

permit ip any any

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Data

match dscp ef

match cos 5

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Data-Cos

match cos 5

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Signal

match dscp cs3

match cos 3

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Signal-Cos

match cos 3

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Multimedia-Conf

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Signaling-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Signaling

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Transaction-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Transactional-Data

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Bulk-Data

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Scavenger

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Default-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Default

AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Data-Cos and AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Signal-Cos are needed to handle the case in which a user connects an IP phone to an interface and calls the auto qos voip cisco-phone command on that interface. In this situation, the input service policy on the interface must match VoIP and signaling packets solely on their CoS markings because switching ASICs on Cisco IP phones are limited to only remarking the CoS bits of VoIP and signaling traffic. Matching DSCP markings would cause a security vulnerability because user whose PC was connected to an IP phone connected to a switch would be able to re-mark DSCP markings of traffic arising from their PC to dscp ef using the NIC on their PC. This places non real-time traffic in the priority queue in the egress direction.

B. Template for the input service-policy of the auto qos classify police command

policy-map AutoQos-4.0-Classify-Police-Input-Policy

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Classify

set dscp af41

set cos 4

set qos-group 34

police cir 5000000 bc 8000

exceed-action drop

class AutoQos-4.0-Signaling-Classify

set dscp cs3

set cos 3

set qos-group 16

police cir 32000 bc 8000

exceed-action drop

class AutoQos-4.0-Transaction-Classify

set dscp af21

set cos 2

set qos-group 18

police cir 10000000 bc 8000

exceed-action set-dscp-transmit cs1

exceed-action set-cos-transmit 1

class AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Classify

set dscp af11

set cos 1

set qos-group 10

police cir 10000000 bc 8000

exceed-action set-dscp-transmit cs1

exceed-action set-cos-transmit 1

class AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Classify

set dscp cs1

set cos 1

set qos-group 8

police cir 10000000 bc 8000

exceed-action drop

class AutoQos-4.0-Default-Classify

set dscp default

set cos 0

police cir 10000000 bc 8000

exceed-action set-dscp-transmit cs1

exceed-action set-cos-transmit 1

C. Template for egress queue classes along with the SRND4 output policy that uses the egress classes to allocate eight queues. This template is required by the four SRND4 commands:

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Priority-Queue

match qos-group 32

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Control-Mgmt-Queue

match qos-group 16

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Queue

match qos-group 34

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream-Queue

match qos-group 26

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Trans-Data-Queue

match qos-group 18

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Queue

match qos-group 10

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue

match qos-group 8

match dscp cs1

AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue must be configured to match either qos-group 7 or dscp af11 to accomodate for the fact that police commands executed in policy map configuration mode do not allow the remarking of qos-groups for traffic flows that exceed defined rate limits. After entering the auto qos classify police command, traffic flows that violate the defined rate limit are remarked to cs1 but retain their original qos-group classification because qos-groups cannot be remarked as an exceed action. However, because AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue is defined before all other queues in the output policy map, remarked packets fall into it, despite retaining their original qos-group labels.

policy-map AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policye

bandwidth remaining percent 1

class AutoQos-4.0-Priority-Queue

priority

police cir percent 30 bc 33 ms

conform-action transmit exceed-action drop

class AutoQos-4.0-Control-Mgmt-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Trans-Data-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

dbl

class AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 4

dbl

class class-default

bandwidth remaining percent 25

dbl

Interface Level Commands Generated

For Fa/Gig Ports:

Switch(config-if)#

service-policy input AutoQos-4.0-Classify-Police-Input-Policy

service-policy output AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

Examples

The following example shows how to police traffic from an untrusted interface gigabitethernet1/1:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# auto qos classify police

Switch(config-if)# do sh run interface gigabitethernet1

Interface gigabitethernet1

auto qos classify police

service-policy input AutoQos-4.0-Classify-Police-Input-Policy

service-policy output AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

end

Related Commands

Command

Description

auto qos voip cisco-softphone

Generates QoS configuration for interfaces connected to PCs running the Cisco IP SoftPhone application and mark police traffic coming from such interfaces.

auto qos classify

Generates a QoS configuration for an untrusted interface.

auto qos srnd4

Generates QoS configurations based on solution reference network design 4.0.

auto qos srnd4

To generate QoS configurations based on solution reference network design 4.0, use the auto qos srnd4 global command.

auto qos srnd4

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

15.1(1)SG,

15.1(1)SG IOS-XE 3.3.0

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is generated when any new auto-QoS command is configured on an interface.

AutoQos SRND4 commands, when applied to an interface, generate one or more of the following templates (A and B) at the global configuration level.

Typcally, a command generates a series of class-maps that either match on ACLs or on DSCP and CoS values to differentiate traffic into application classes. An input policy is also generated, which matches the generated classes, sets qos-groups on the classes, and in some cases, polices the classes to a set bandwidth. (A qos-group is a numerical tag that allows different application classes to be treated as one unit. It has no significance outside the context of the switch in which it was set.) Furthermore, eight egress-queue class-maps are generated, matching the qos-groups set in the input policy. The actual egress output policy assigns a queue to each of the eight egress-queue class-maps.

AutoQos srnd4 commands only generate a templates as needed. For example, the first time you use a new srnd4 command, global configurations that define the eight queue egress service-policy are generated (template B below). Subsequently, auto qos commands applied to other interfaces do not generate templates for egress queuing because all auto-QoS commands rely on the same eight queue models after migration, and they will have already been generated from the first use of the command.

For interfaces with auto qos voip trust enabled

—Global Level Commands Generated

The global templates are defined in A and B (below).

A. This template of application classes is used by the auto-QoS video cts, auto qos video ip-camera, and auto qos trust commands. This template class also includes the input service-policy for the auto qos video cts, auto qos video ip-camera, and auto qos trust commands. Because these three commands are the only ones that use AutoQos-4.0-Input-Policy, it makes sense to include that policy in the same template that defines the application classes used by the previous three commands.

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-VoIP

match dscp ef

match cos 5

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Broadcast-Vid

match dscp cs5

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Realtime-Interact

match dscp cs4

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Network-Ctrl

match dscp cs7

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Internetwork-Ctrl

match dscp cs6

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Signaling

match dscp cs3

match cos 3

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Network-Mgmt

match dscp cs2

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf

match dscp af41

match dscp af42

match dscp af43

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream

match dscp af31

match dscp af32

match dscp af33

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Transaction-Data

match dscp af21

match dscp af22

match dscp af23

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data

match dscp af11

match dscp af12

match dscp af13

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger

match dscp cs1

The AutoQos-4.0-Signaling and AutoQos-4.0-VoIP classes must match on CoS to handle the situation when an IP phone is connected to an interface. (Cisco IP phones are only capable of re-marking CoS bits, not DSCP.)

policy-map AutoQos-4.0-Input-Policy

class AutoQos-4.0-VoIP

set qos-group 32

class AutoQos-4.0-Broadcast-Vid

set qos-group 32

class AutoQos-4.0-Realtime-Interact

set qos-group 32

class AutoQos-4.0-Network-Ctrl

set qos-group 16

class AutoQos-4.0-Internetwork-Ctrl

set qos-group 16

class AutoQos-4.0-Signaling

set qos-group 16

class AutoQos-4.0-Network-Mgmt

set qos-group 16

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf

set qos-group 34

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream

set qos-group 26

class AutoQos-4.0-Transaction-Data

set qos-group 18

class AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data

set qos-group 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger

set qos-group 8

B. This template for egress queue classes (along with the SRND4 output policy) allocates eight queues. This template is required by all SRND4 commands:

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Priority-Queue

match qos-group 32

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Control-Mgmt-Queue

match qos-group 16

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Queue

match qos-group 34

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream-Queue

match qos-group 26

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Trans-Data-Queue

match qos-group 18

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Queue

match qos-group 10

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue

match qos-group 8

match dscp cs1

Because the police commands executed in policy map configuration mode do not allow the re-marking of qos-groups for traffic flows that exceed defined rate limits, you should configure AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue to match either qos-group 7 or dscp af11. When you enter the auto qos classify police command, traffic flows that violate the defined rate limit are remarked to cs1 but retain their original qos-group classificatio because such groups cannot be re-marked as an exceed action. However, because AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue is defined before all other queues in the output policy map, re-marked packets fall into it, despite retaining their original qos-group labels.

policy-map AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

class AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 1

class AutoQos-4.0-Priority-Queue

priority

police cir percent 30 bc 33 ms

conform-action transmit exceed-action drop

class AutoQos-4.0-Control-Mgmt-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Trans-Data-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

dbl

class AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 4

dbl

class class-default

bandwidth remaining percent 25

dbl

—Interface Level Commands Generated

For Fa/Gig Ports:

If Layer 2 interface:

Switch(config-if)# no service-policy input AutoQos-VoIP-Input-Cos-Policy

no service-policy output AutoQos-VoIP-Output-Policy

service-policy input AutoQos-4.0-Input-Policy

service-policy output AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

If Layer 3 interface:

Switch(config-if)# no service-policy input AutoQos-VoIP-Input-Dscp-Policy

no service-policy output AutoQos-VoIP-Output-Policy

service-policy input AutoQos-4.0-Input-Policy

service-policy output AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

For interfaces with auto qos voip cisco-phone enabled

—Global Level Commands Generated

The global templates defined in A and B (above).

—Interface Level Commands Generated

For Fa/Gig Ports:

Switch(config-if)# no qos trust device cisco-phone

no service-policy input AutoQos-VoIP-Input-Cos-Policy

no service-policy output AutoQos-VoIP-Output-Policy

qos trust device cisco-phone

service-policy input AutoQos-4.0-Cisco-Phone-Input-Policy

service-policy output AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

Examples

To generate QoS configurations based on solution reference network design 4.0, do the following:

Switch# auto qos srnd4

Related Commands

Command

Description

auto qos trust

Generate QoS configurations for trusted interfaces.

auto qos voip cisco-softphone

Generate QoS configuration for interfaces connected to PCs running the Cisco IP SoftPhone application and marks police traffic coming from such interfaces.

auto qos trust

To generate QoS configurations for trusted interfaces, use the auto qos trust interface command.

auto qos trust

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.1(1)SG,

15.1(1)SG IOS-XE 3.3.0

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Global Level Commands Generated

After you apply auto-QoS srnd4 commands to an interface, they generate one or more of the following templates (A and B) at the global configuration level. Typically, a command generates a series of class-maps that either match on ACLs or on DSCP or CoS values to differentiate traffic into application classes. An input policy is generated, which matches the generated classes, sets qos-groups on the classes, and in some cases, polices the classes to a set bandwidth. (A qos-group is simply a numerical tag that allows different application classes to be treated as one unit. Outside the switch’s context, it has no significance.) Additionally, eight egress-queue class-maps are generated, matching the qos-groups set in the input policy. The actual egress output policy assigns a queue to each of these eight class-maps.

The command only generates templates as needed. For example, on first use of a new command, global configurations that define the eight queue egress service-policy are generated. Subsequently, auto-QoS commands applied to other interfaces do not generate templates for egress queuing. This is because all auto-qos commands rely on the same eight queue models after migration, and they will have already been generated from the first use of the command.

The global templates defined in A and B.

A. Template of application classes used by the auto qos trust command

This template also includes the input service-policy for the auto qos video cts, auto qos video ip-camera, and auto qos trust commands. Because these three commands are the only ones that use the AutoQos-4.0-Input-Policy, you should include that policy in the template that defines the application classes used by the commands.

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-VoIP

match dscp ef

match cos 5

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Broadcast-Vid

match dscp cs5

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Realtime-Interact

match dscp cs4

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Network-Ctrl

match dscp cs7

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Internetwork-Ctrl

match dscp cs6

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Signaling

match dscp cs3

match cos 3

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Network-Mgmt

match dscp cs2

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf

match dscp af41

match dscp af42

match dscp af43

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream

match dscp af31

match dscp af32

match dscp af33

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Transaction-Data

match dscp af21

match dscp af22

match dscp af23

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data

match dscp af11

match dscp af12

match dscp af13

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger

match dscp cs1

The AutoQos-4.0-Signaling and AutoQos-4.0-VoIP classes must also match on CoS to handle the case when an IP phone is connected to an interface. (Cisco IP phones are only capable of remarking CoS bits, not DSCP.)

policy-map AutoQos-4.0-Input-Policy

class AutoQos-4.0-VoIP

set qos-group 32

class AutoQos-4.0-Broadcast-Vid

set qos-group 32

class AutoQos-4.0-Realtime-Interact

set qos-group 32

class AutoQos-4.0-Network-Ctrl

set qos-group 16

class AutoQos-4.0-Internetwork-Ctrl

set qos-group 16

class AutoQos-4.0-Signaling

set qos-group 16

class AutoQos-4.0-Network-Mgmt

set qos-group 16

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf

set qos-group 34

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream

set qos-group 26

class AutoQos-4.0-Transaction-Data

set qos-group 18

class AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data

set qos-group 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger

set qos-group 8

B. Templates for egress queue classes and the srnd4 output policy that uses the egress classes to allocate eight queues. This template is required by all srnd4 commands.

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Priority-Queue

match qos-group 32

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Control-Mgmt-Queue

match qos-group 16

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Queue

match qos-group 34

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream-Queue

match qos-group 26

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Trans-Data-Queue

match qos-group 18

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Queue

match qos-group 10

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue

match qos-group 8

match dscp cs1

Because police commands executed in policy map configuration mode do not allow the remarking of qos-groups for traffic flows that exceed defined rate limits, AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue must be configured to match either qos-group 7 or dscp af11. When the auto qos classify police command executes, traffic flows that violate the defined rate limit are remarked to cs1 but retain their original qos-group classification. This is because qos-groups cannot be remarked as an exceed action. However, because AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue is defined before all other queues in the output policy map, remarked packets will fall into it, despite retaining their original qos-group labels.

policy-map AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

class AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 1

class AutoQos-4.0-Priority-Queue

priority

police cir percent 30 bc 33 ms

conform-action transmit exceed-action drop

class AutoQos-4.0-Control-Mgmt-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Trans-Data-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

dbl

class AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 4

dbl

class class-default

bandwidth remaining percent 25

Interface Level Commands Generated

For Fa/Gig Ports:

Switch(config-if)# service-policy input AutoQos-4.0-Input-Policy

service-policy output AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

Examples

The following example shows how to police traffic from an untrusted interface gigabitethernet1/1:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# auto qos trust

Switch(config-if)# do sh running interface interface-id

interface FastEthernet2/1

auto qos trust

service-policy input AutoQos-4.0-Input-Policy

service-policy output AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

end

Related Commands

Command

Description

auto qos voip cisco-softphone

Generates QoS configuration for interfaces connected to PCs running the Cisco IP SoftPhone application and mark police traffic coming from such interfaces.

auto qos classify

Generates a QoS configuration for an untrusted interface.

auto qos srnd4

Generates QoS configurations based on solution reference network design 4.0.

auto qos video

To generate QOS configuration for cisco-telepresence or cisco-camera interfaces (conditional trust through CDP), use the auto qos video interface configuration command.

auto qos video {cts | ip-camera}

Syntax Description

cts

Trust the QoS marking of Cisco Telepresence device.

ip-camera

Trust the QoS marking of Cisco video surveillance camera.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.1(1)SG,

15.1(1)SG IOS-XE 3.3.0

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The auto qos video command trusts an interface only if Cisco TelePresence is detected. Else, the port is untrusted.

Global Level Commands Generated

When auto-Qos srnd4 commands are applied to an interface, they generate one or more of the following templates at the global configuration level. Typically, a command generates a series of class-maps that either match on ACLs or on DSCP (or CoS) values to differentiate traffic into application classes. An input policy is also generated, which matches the generated classes, sets qos-groups on the classes, and in some cases, polices the classes to a set bandwidth. (A qos-group is simply a numerical tag that allows different application classes to be treated as one unit. Outside the switch’s context, it has no significance.) Furthermore, eight egress-queue class-maps are generated, which match the qos-groups set in the input policy. The actual egress output policy assigns a queue to each of the eight egress-queue class-maps.

The srnd4 commsands generate the templates only as needed. For example, on first use of the new command, global configurations that define the eight queue egress service-policy are generated. Subsequently, auto-QoS commands applied to other interfaces do not generate templates for egress queuing. This is because all auto-QoS commnds rely on the same eight queue model after migration, already generated on first use of the command.

The global templates defined in A and B.

A. Template of application classes used by the auto qos video command

This template also includes the input service-policy for the auto qos video cts, auto qos video ip-camera, and auto qos trust commands. Because these three commands are the only ones that use the AutoQos-4.0-Input-Policy, we advise that you include that policy in the same template that defines the application classes used by the commands.

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-VoIP

match dscp ef

match cos 5

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Broadcast-Vid

match dscp cs5

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Realtime-Interact

match dscp cs4

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Network-Ctrl

match dscp cs7

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Internetwork-Ctrl

match dscp cs6

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Signaling

match dscp cs3

match cos 3

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Network-Mgmt

match dscp cs2

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf

match dscp af41

match dscp af42

match dscp af43

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream

match dscp af31

match dscp af32

match dscp af33

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Transaction-Data

match dscp af21

match dscp af22

match dscp af23

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data

match dscp af11

match dscp af12

match dscp af13

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger

match dscp cs1

The AutoQos-4.0-Signaling and AutoQos-4.0-VoIP classes must also match on CoS to the case where an IP phone is connected to an interface. (Cisco IP phones are only capable of remarking CoS bits, not DSCP.)

policy-map AutoQos-4.0-Input-Policy

class AutoQos-4.0-VoIP

set qos-group 32

class AutoQos-4.0-Broadcast-Vid

set qos-group 32

class AutoQos-4.0-Realtime-Interact

set qos-group 32

class AutoQos-4.0-Network-Ctrl

set qos-group 16

class AutoQos-4.0-Internetwork-Ctrl

set qos-group 16

class AutoQos-4.0-Signaling

set qos-group 16

class AutoQos-4.0-Network-Mgmt

set qos-group 16

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf

set qos-group 34

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream

set qos-group 26

class AutoQos-4.0-Transaction-Data

set qos-group 18

class AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data

set qos-group 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger

set qos-group 8

B. Template for egress queue classes and the srnd4 output policy that uses the egress classes to allocate eight queues. This template is required by all srnd commands:

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Priority-Queue

match qos-group 32

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Control-Mgmt-Queue

match qos-group 16

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Queue

match qos-group 34

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream-Queue

match qos-group 26

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Trans-Data-Queue

match qos-group 18

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Queue

match qos-group 10

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue

match qos-group 8

match dscp cs1

Because police commands executed in policy map configuration mode do not allow the remarking of qos-groups for traffic flows that exceed defined rate limits, AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue must be configured to match either qos-group 7 or dscp af11. When the auto qos classify police command has been executed, traffic flows that violate the defined rate limit are remarked to cs1 but retain their original qos-group classification because qos-groups cannot be remarked as an exceed action. However, because AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue is defined before all other queues in the output policy map, remarked packets will fall into it, despite retaining their original qos-group labels.

policy-map AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

class AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 1

class AutoQos-4.0-Priority-Queue

priority

police cir percent 30 bc 33 ms

conform-action transmit exceed-action drop

class AutoQos-4.0-Control-Mgmt-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Trans-Data-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

dbl

class AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 4

dbl

class class-default

bandwidth remaining percent 25

Interface Level Commands Generated

For Fa/Gig Ports:

Switch(config-if)# service-policy input AutoQos-4.0-Input-Policy

service-policy output AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

Examples

The following example shows how to generate a QoS configuration on the cisco-telepresence interface gigabitethernet1/1:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# auto qos video cts

Switch(config-if)# do sh running interface gigabitethernet1/1

interface interface-id

auto qos video cts

qos trust device cts

service-policy input AutoQos-4.0-Input-Policy

service-policy output AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

end

The following example shows how to generate QoS configuration for the cisco-camera interface gigabitethernet1/1:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# auto qos video ip-camera

Switch(config-if)# do sh running interface interface-id

interface interface-id

auto qos video ip-camera

qos trust device ip-camera

service-policy input AutoQos-4.0-Input-Policy

service-policy output AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

end

Related Commands

Command

Description

auto qos trust

Generates QoS configurations for trusted interfaces.

auto qos srnd4

Generates QoS configurations based on solution reference network design 4.0.

auto qos voip

To automatically configure quality of service (auto-QoS) for voice over IP (VoIP) within a QoS domain, use the auto qos voip interface configuration command. To change the auto-QoS configuration settings to the standard QoS defaults, use the no form of this command.

auto qos voip {cisco-phone | trust}

no auto qos voip {cisco-phone | trust}

Syntax Description

cisco-phone

Generates a QoS configuration for Cisco IP phone interfaces (conditional trust through CDP). The CoS labels of incoming packets are trusted only when a telephone is detected.

trust

Connects the interface to a trusted switch or router and automatically configures QoS for VoIP. The CoS and DSCP labels of incoming packets are trusted.

Command Default

Auto-QoS is disabled on all interfaces

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to configure a QoS that is appropriate for VoIP traffic within the QoS domain, which includes the switch, the interior of the network, and the edge devices that can classify incoming traffic for QoS.

Apply the cisco-phone keyword on those ports (at the edge of the network) that are connected to Cisco IP phones. The switch detects the telephone through Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) and trusts those CoS labels in packets that are received from the telephone.

Apply the trust keyword on those ports that are connected to the interior of the network. Assume that the traffic has already been classified by the other edge devices. So, the CoS/DSCP labels in these packets are trusted.

When you enable the auto-QoS feature on the specified interface, these actions automatically occur:

- QoS is globally enabled ( qos global configuration command).

- DBL is enabled globally (qos dbl global configuration command).

- When you enter the auto qos voip cisco-phone interface configuration command, the trusted boundary feature is enabled. It uses the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) to detect the presence or absence of a Cisco IP phone. When a Cisco IP phone is detected, the ingress classification on the specific interface is set to trust the CoS label that is received in the packet because some older phones do not mark DSCP. When a Cisco IP phone is absent, the ingress classification is set to not trust the CoS label in the packet.

- When you enter the auto qos voip trust interface configuration command, the ingress classification on the specified interface is set to trust the CoS label that is received in the packet provided the specified interface is configured as Layer 2 (and is set to trust DSCP if the interface is configured as Layer 3).

You can enable auto-QoS on static, dynamic-access, voice VLAN access, and trunk ports.

To display the QoS configuration that is automatically generated when auto-QoS is enabled, enable debugging (before you enable auto-QoS) with the debug auto qos privileged EXEC command.

To disable auto-QoS on an interface, use the no auto qos voip interface configuration command. When you enter this command, the switch enables standard QoS and changes the auto-QoS settings to the standard QoS default settings for that interface. This action will not change any global configuration performed by auto-QoS; the global configuration remains the same.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable auto-QoS and to trust the CoS and DSCP labels that are received in the incoming packets when the switch or router that is connected to Gigabit Ethernet interface 1/1 is a trusted device:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# auto qos voip trust

The following example shows how to enable auto-QoS and to trust the CoS labels that are received in incoming packets when the device connected to Fast Ethernet interface 2/1 is detected as a Cisco IP phone:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet2/1

Switch(config-if)# auto qos voip cisco-phone

The following example shows how to display the QoS configuration that is automatically generated when auto-QoS is enabled on an interface on a Supervisor Engine 6-E:

Switch#configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)#interface gigabitethernet3/10

Switch(config-if)#auto qos voip trust

Switch(config-if)#

1d03h: service-policy input AutoQos-VoIP-Input-Cos-Policy

1d03h: service-policy output AutoQos-VoIP-Output-Policy

Switch(config-if)#intface gigabitethernet3/11

Switch(config-if)#auto qos voip

cisco-phone

Switch(config-if)#

1d03h: qos trust device cisco-phone

1d03h: service-policy input AutoQos-VoIP-Input-Cos-Policy

1d03h: service-policy output AutoQos-VoIP-Output-Policy

Switch(config-if)#end

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show auto qos interface command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

debug auto qos (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Debugs Auto QoS.

qos trust

Sets the trusted state of an interface.

show auto qos

Displays the automatic quality of service (auto-QoS) configuration that is applied.

show qos

Displays QoS information.

show qos interface

Displays queueing information.

show qos maps

Displays QoS map information.

auto qos voip cisco-softphone

To generate QoS configuration for interfaces connected to PCs running the Cisco IP SoftPhone application and mark police traffic coming from such interfaces, use the auto qos voip interface configuration command.

auto qos voip cisco-softphone

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.1(1)SG,

15.1(1)SG IOS-XE 3.3.0

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Ports configured with auto qos voip command are considered untrusted.

Global Level Commands Generated

After auto-QoS srnd4 commands are applied to an interface, they generate one or more of the following templates (A, B, and C) at the global configuration level. Typically, a command generates a series of class-maps that either match on ACLs or on DSCP (or CoS) values to differentiate traffic into application classes. An input policy is also generated, whch matches the generated classes, sets qos-groups on the classes, and in some cases, polices the classes to a set bandwidth. (A qos-group is a numerical tag that allows different application classes to be treated as one unit. Outside the switch’s context, it has no significance.) Furthermore, eight egress-queue class-maps are generated, matching the qos-groups set in the input policy. The actual egress output policy assigns a queue to each of these eight class-maps.

The commands generate templates only as needed. For example, on first use of a new commnand, global configurations that define the eight queue egress service-policy are generated. Subsequently, auto-QoS applied to other interfaces do not generate templates for egress queuing. This is because all auto-QoS commands rely on the same eight queue models after migration, already been generated from the first use of the new command.

The global template is defined by A, B, and C.

A. Template for ACLs and application classes used by the auto qos voip cisco-softphone command

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Multimedia-Conf

permit udp any any range 16384 32767

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Signaling

permit tcp any any range 2000 2002

permit tcp any any range 5060 5061

permit udp any any range 5060 5061

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Transactional-Data

permit tcp any any eq 443

permit tcp any any eq 1521

permit udp any any eq 1521

permit tcp any any eq 1526

permit udp any any eq 1526

permit tcp any any eq 1575

permit udp any any eq 1575

permit tcp any any eq 1630

permit udp any any eq 1630

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Bulk-Data

permit tcp any any eq ftp

permit tcp any any eq ftp-data

permit tcp any any eq 22

permit tcp any any eq smtp

permit tcp any any eq 465

permit tcp any any eq 143

permit tcp any any eq 993

permit tcp any any eq pop3

permit tcp any any eq 995

permit tcp any any eq 1914

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Scavenger

permit tcp any any eq 1214

permit udp any any eq 1214

permit tcp any any range 2300 2400

permit udp any any range 2300 2400

permit tcp any any eq 3689

permit udp any any eq 3689

permit tcp any any range 6881 6999

permit tcp any any eq 11999

permit tcp any any range 28800 29100

ip access-list extended AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Default

permit ip any any

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Data

match dscp ef

match cos 5

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Data-Cos

match cos 5

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Signal

match dscp cs3

match cos 3

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Signal-Cos

match cos 3

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Multimedia-Conf

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Signaling-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Signaling

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Transaction-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Transactional-Data

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Bulk-Data

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Scavenger

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Default-Classify

match access-group name AutoQos-4.0-ACL-Default

AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Data-Cos and AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Signal-Cos handles those instances when a user connects an IP phone to an interface and enters the auto qos voip cisco-phone command on that interface. In this situation, the input service policy on the interface must match VoIP and signaling packets based solely on their CoS markings because switching ASICs on Cisco IP Phones are limited to only remarking the CoS bits of VoIP and signaling traffic. Matching DSCP markings would result in a security vulnerability because a user whose PC was connected to an IP phone connected to a switch would be able to remark DSCP markings of traffic arriving from their PC to DSCP ef using the NIC on their PC. This results in incorrectly placing non real-time traffic in the priority queue in the egress direction.

B. Template for the auto qos voip cisco-softphone command input service-policy

policy-map AutoQos-4.0-Cisco-Softphone-Input-Policy

class AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Data

set dscp ef

set cos 5

set qos-group 32

police cir 128000 bc 8000

exceed-action set-dscp-transmit cs1

exceed-action set-cos-transmit 1

class AutoQos-4.0-VoIP-Signal

set dscp cs3

set cos 3

set qos-group 16

police cir 32000 bc 8000

exceed-action set-dscp-transmit cs1

exceed-action set-cos-transmit 1

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Classify

set dscp af41

set cos 4

set qos-group 34

police cir 5000000 bc 8000

exceed-action drop

class AutoQos-4.0-Signaling-Classify

set dscp cs3

set cos 3

set qos-group 16

police cir 32000 bc 8000

exceed-action drop

class AutoQos-4.0-Transaction-Classify

set dscp af21

set cos 2

set qos-group 18

police cir 10000000 bc 8000

exceed-action set-dscp-transmit cs1

exceed-action set-cos-transmit 1

class AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Classify

set dscp af11

set cos 1

set qos-group 10

police cir 10000000 bc 8000

exceed-action set-dscp-transmit cs1

exceed-action set-cos-transmit 1

class AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Classify

set dscp cs1

set cos 1

set qos-group 8

police cir 10000000 bc 8000

exceed-action drop

class AutoQos-4.0-Default-Classify

set dscp default

set cos 0

C. Template for egress queue classes and the srnd4 output policy that uses the egress classes to allocate eight queues. This template is required by all srnd4 commands:

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Priority-Queue

match qos-group 32

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Control-Mgmt-Queue

match qos-group 16

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Queue

match qos-group 34

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream-Queue

match qos-group 26

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Trans-Data-Queue

match qos-group 18

class-map match-all AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Queue

match qos-group 10

class-map match-any AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue

match qos-group 8

match dscp cs1

Because the police commands executed in policy map configuration mode do not allow remarking of qos-groups for traffic flows that exceed defined rate limits, AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue must be configured to match either qos-group 7 or dscp af11. When the auto qos classify police command has been executed, traffic flows that violate the defined rate limit are remarked to cs1 but retain their original qos-group classification because qos-groups cannot be remarked as an exceed action. However, because AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue is defined before all other queues in the output policy map, remarked packets will fall into it, despite retaining their original qos-group labels.

policy-map AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

class AutoQos-4.0-Scavenger-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 1

class AutoQos-4.0-Priority-Queue

priority

police cir percent 30 bc 33 ms

conform-action transmit exceed-action drop

class AutoQos-4.0-Control-Mgmt-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Conf-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Multimedia-Stream-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

class AutoQos-4.0-Trans-Data-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 10

dbl

class AutoQos-4.0-Bulk-Data-Queue

bandwidth remaining percent 4

dbl

class class-default

bandwidth remaining percent 25

dbl

Interface Level Commands Generated

For Fa/Gig Ports:

Switch(config-if)#

service-policy input AutoQos-4.0-Cisco-Softphone-Input-Policy

service-policy input AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

Examples

The following example shows how to generate QoS configuration for interfaces Gigabit Ethernet 1/1 connected to a PC that is running the Cisco IP SoftPhone application:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# auto qos voip cisco-softphone

Switch(config-if)# do sh running interface gigabitethernet1/1

interface gigabitethernet1/1

auto qos voip cisco-phone

qos trust device cisco-phone

service-policy input AutoQos-4.0-Cisco-Phone-Input-Policy

service-policy output AutoQos-4.0-Output-Policy

end

Related Commands

Command

Description

auto qos voip cisco-softphone

Generate QoS configuration for interfaces connected to PCs running the Cisco IP SoftPhone application and marks police traffic coming from such interfaces.

auto qos classify

Generate a QoS configuration for an untrusted interface.

auto qos classify police

Police traffic form an untrusted interface.

auto security

To enable auto security globally, use the auto security command. Use the no form of this command to disable auto security.

auto security

no auto security

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

none

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

3.6.0E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Relevant baseline security feature CLI as shown in the output of the show auto security command is applied on or removed from access and trunk ports.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable auto security globally:

Switch(config)# auto security

Switch# show running-config | i security

auto security

auto security-port

To enable auto security feature for access (end hosts) or uplink ports, use the auto security-port command. To disable the feature, use the no form of this command.

auto security-port [host | uplink]

no auto security-port [host | uplink]

Syntax Description

host

Enables auto security on host facing port.

uplink

Enables auto security on server facing /uplink port.

Command Default

none

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

3.6.0E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is supported on Catalyst 3750X, Catalyst 2960S, and the Catalyst 4500 series starting with Cisco IOS Release 15.2(2)E.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable auto security on a host-facing port:

Switch# conf t

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# int g1/0/18

Switch(config-if)# auto security-port host

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

Apr 5 22:16:41.725: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by consolesh auto security

Switch# show auto security

Auto Secure is Enabled globally

AutoSecure is Enabled on below interface(s):

--------------------------------------------

GigabitEthernet1/0/2

GigabitEthernet1/0/3

GigabitEthernet1/0/15

GigabitEthernet1/0/18

auto-sync

To enable automatic synchronization of the configuration files in NVRAM, use the auto-sync command. To disable automatic synchronization, use the no form of this command.

auto-sync {startup-config | config-register | bootvar | standard}

no auto-sync {startup-config | config-register | bootvar | standard}

Syntax Description

startup-config

Specifies automatic synchronization of the startup configuration.

config-register

Specifies automatic synchronization of the configuration register configuration.

bootvar

Specifies automatic synchronization of the BOOTVAR configuration.

standard

Specifies automatic synchronization of the startup configuration, BOOTVAR, and configuration registers.

Command Default

Standard automatic synchronization of all configuration files

Command Modes

Redundancy main-cpu mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch (Catalyst 4507R only).

Usage Guidelines

If you enter the no auto-sync standard command, no automatic synchronizations occur.

Examples

The following example shows how (from the default configuration) to enable automatic synchronization of the configuration register in the main CPU:

Switch# config terminal

Switch (config)# redundancy

Switch (config-r)# main-cpu

Switch (config-r-mc)# no auto-sync standard

Switch (config-r-mc)# auto-sync configure-register

Switch (config-r-mc)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

redundancy

Enters the redundancy configuration mode.

average-packet-size (netflow-lite monitor submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is supported only on Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To specify the average packet size at the observation point in netflow-lite monitor submode, use the average-packet-size command. To delete a sampler, use the no form of this command.

average-packet-size average-packet-size

no average-packet-size average-packet-size

Syntax Description

average-packer-size

Specifies the average packet size in bytes expected at the observation point.

Command Default

0 bytes

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You can enter this command in physical port interface mode, port channel interface, or config VLAN mode.

The packet sampling mechanism attempts random 1-in-N sampling. Internally, 2 levels of sampling are performed. The accuracy of the first sampling level depends on the size of the packets arriving at a given interface. Use the average-packet-size parameter to tune the accuracy of the algorithm.

The system automatically determines the average packet size at an interface based on observation of input traffic and uses that value in its first level of sampling.

The algorithm requires a range of packet sizes from 64 to 9216 bytes. A value of 0 means that you want an automatic determination of average packet size.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a monitor on a port interface Gigabit 1/3:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# int GigabitEthernet1/3

Switch(config-if)# netflow-lite monitor 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# sampler sampler1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# average-packet-size 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# exit

Switch(config-if)# exit

Switch(config)# exit

Switch(config)#

Switch# show netflow-lite monitor 1 interface gi1/3

Interface GigabitEthernet1/3:

Netflow-lite Monitor-1:

Active: TRUE

Sampler: sampler1

Exporter: exporter1

Average Packet Size: 0

Statistics:

Packets exported: 0

Packets observed: 0

Packets dropped: 0

Average Packet Size observed: 64

Average Packet Size used: 64

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite exporter privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

sampler (netflow-lite monitor submode)

Activates sampling on an interface in netflow-lite monitor submode.

exporter (netflow-lite monitor submode)

Assigns an exporter in netflow-lite monitor submode.

bandwidth

To specify or modify the minimum bandwidth provided to a class belonging to a policy map attached to a physical port, use the bandwidth policy-map class command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

bandwidth {bandwidth-kbps | percent percent | remaining percent percent}

no bandwidth

Syntax Description

bandwidth-kbps

Amount of bandwidth in kbps assigned to the class. The range is 32 to 16000000.

percent percent

Percentage of available bandwidth assigned to the parent class. The range is 1 to 100.

remaining percent percent

Percentage of remaining bandwidth assigned to parent class. The range is 1 to 100. This command is supported only when priority queuing class is configured, and the prioity queuing class is not rate-limited.

Command Default

No bandwidth is specified.

Command Modes

Policy-map class configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch using a Supervisor Engine 6E.

Usage Guidelines

Use the bandwidth command only in a policy map attached to a physical port.

The bandwidth command specifies the minimum bandwidth for traffic in that class when there is traffic congestion in the switch. If the switch is not congested, the class receives more bandwidth than you specify with this command.

When queuing class is configured without any explicit bandwidth configuration, since the queue is not guaranteed any minimum bandwidth, this queue will get a share of any unallocated bandwidth on the port.

If there is no unallocated bandwidth for the new queue or if the unallocated bandwidth is not sufficient to meet the minimum configurable rate for all queues which do not have any explicit bandwidth configuration, then the policy association is rejected.

These restrictions apply to the bandwidth command:

- If the percent keyword is used, the sum of the class bandwidth percentages within a single policy map cannot exceed 100 percent. Percentage calculations are based on the bandwidth available on the port.

- The amount of bandwidth configured should be large enough to accommodate Layer 2 overhead.

- A policy map can have all the class bandwidths specified in either kbps or in percentages, but not a mix of both.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the minimum bandwidth to 2000 kbps for a class called silver-class. The class already exists in the switch configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# policy-map polmap6

Switch(config-pmap)# class silver-class

Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth 2000

Switch(config-pmap-c)# end

The following example shows how to guarantee 30 percent of the bandwidth for class1 and 25 percent of the bandwidth for class2 when CBWFQ is configured. A policy map with two classes is created and is then attached to a physical port:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# policy-map policy1

Switch(config-pmap)# class class1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 50

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# class class2

Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth percent 25

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# end

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# service-policy input policy1

Switch(config-if)# end

The following example shows how bandwidth is guaranteed if low-latency queueing (LLQ) and bandwidth are configured. In this example, LLQ is enabled in a class called voice1.

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# policy-map policy1

Switch(config-pmap)# class class1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth remaining percent 50

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# class class2

Switch(config-pmap-c)# bandwidth remaining percent 25

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# class voice1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# priority

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# end

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# service-policy output policy1

Switch(config-if)# end

You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

class

Specifies the name of the class whose traffic policy you want to create or change.

dbl

Enables active queue management on a transmit queue used by a class of traffic.

policy-map

Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

priority

Enables the strict priority queue (low-latency queueing [LLQ]) and to give priority to a class of traffic belonging to a policy map attached to a physical port.

service-policy (policy-map class)

Creates a service policy that is a quality of service (QoS) policy within a policy map.

shape (class-based queueing)

Enables traffic shaping a class of traffic in a policy map attached to a physical port.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

border

To configure the IP address of the fabric border device in the fabric domain, use the border ip address command. The no border IP address command removes reference the association of the border device from the edge device.

border ip address

no border ip address

Syntax Description

ip address

Configures the IP address of the fabric border device.

Command Default

None.

Command Modes

Fabric-auto-domain configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

3.9.01E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500-E series switch using a Supervisor Engines 8-E and 8L-E.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to configure the IP address of the fabric border device. Border devices in the fabric domain connect traditional Layer 3 networks or different fabric domains to the local domain, and translate reachability and policy (VRF and SGT) information from one domain to another.

This command auto-generates LISP configuration, to orchestrate the fabric overlay. The show-running configuration command shows the fabric domain configuration including the auto-generated commands.

Examples

The following configuration is auto-generated when this command is run on your device:

Device(config-fabric-auto-domain)#border 198.51.100.4

ipv4 use-petr 198.51.100.4 priority 10 weight 10

capwap-ac address

To configure a Control And Provisioning of Wireless Access Point (CAPWAP) access controller address, use the capwap-ac address command in DHCPv6 pool configuration mode. To remove the CAPWAP access controller address, use the no form of this command.

capwap-ac address ipv6-address

no capwap-ac address ipv6-address

Syntax Description

ipv6-address

IPv6 address for the CAPWAP access controller.

Command Default

Access controller address is not configured.

Command Modes

DHCPv6 pool configuration (config-dhcpv6)

Command History

Release

Modification

Cisco IOS Release 15.2(5)E2

This command was introduced on Cisco Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The CAPWAP protocol allows lightweight access points to use DHCPv6 to discover a Wireless Controller to which it can connect. CAPWAP is a standard, interoperable protocol that enables a controller to manage a collection of wireless access points.

Wireless access points use the DHCPv6 option 52 (RFC 5417) to supply the IPv6 management interface addresses of the primary, secondary, and tertiary Wireless Controllers.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure an IPv6 address for a CAPWAP access controller:

Device> enable

Device# configure terminal

Device(config)# ipv6 dhcp pool pool1

Device(config-dhcpv6)# capwap-ac address 2001:DB8::1

Device(config-dhcpv6)# end

Related CommandsT

Command

Description

ipv6 dhcp pool

Configures a DHCPv6 server configuration information pool and enters DHCPv6 pool configuration mode.

call-home (global configuration)

To enter call home configuration submode, use the call-home command in global configuration mode.

call-home

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on Supervisor Engine 6E and the Catalyst 4900M.

Usage Guidelines

Once you enter the call-home command, the prompt changes to Switch (cfg-call-home)#, and you have access to the call home configuration commands as follows:

- alert-group —Enables or disables an alert group. See the alert-group command.

- contact - email-addr email-address —Assigns the system contact’s e-mail address. You can enter up to 128 alphanumeric characters in e-mail address format with no spaces.

- contract-id alphanumeric —Specifies the customer contract identification for Cisco AutoNotification. You can enter up to 64 alphanumeric characters. If you include spaces, you must enclose your entry in quotes (“ ”).

- copy profile source-profile target-profile —Creates a new destination profile ( target-profile ) with the same configuration settings as the existing profile ( source-profile ) .

- customer-id name —Provides customer identification for Cisco AutoNotify. You can enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters. If you include spaces, you must enclose your entry in quotes (“ ”).

- default —Sets a command to its defaults.

- exit —Exits call home configuration mode and returns to global configuration mode.

- mail-server { ipv4-address | name } priority priority —Assigns the customer’s e-mail server address and relative priority. You can enter an IP address or a fully qualified domain name (FQDN), and assign a priority from 1 (highest) to 100 (lowest).

You can define backup e-mail servers by repeating the mail-server command and entering different priority numbers.

- no —Negates a command or set its defaults.

- phone-number + phone-number —Specifies the phone number of the contact person. The phone-number value must begin with a plus (+) prefix, and may contain only dashes (-) and numbers. You can enter up to 16 characters. If you include spaces, you must enclose your entry in quotes (“ ”).

- profile name —Enters call-home profile configuration mode. See the profile command.

- rate-limit threshold —Configures the call-home message rate-limit threshold; valid values are from 1 to 60 messages per minute.

- sender { from | reply-to } email-address —Specifies the call-home message sender’s e-mail addresses. You can enter up to 128 alphanumeric characters in e-mail address format with no spaces.

- site-id alphanumeric —Specifies the site identification for Cisco AutoNotify. You can enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters. If you include spaces, you must enclose your entry in quotes (“ ”).

- street-address street-address —Specifies the street address for the RMA part shipments. You can enter up to 256 alphanumeric characters. If you include spaces, you must enclose your entry in quotes (“ ”).

- vrf —Specifies the VPN routing or forwarding instance name; limited to 32 characters.

Examples

This example show how to configure the contact information:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# contact-email-addr username@example.com

Switch(cfg-call-home)# phone-number +1-800-555-4567

Switch(cfg-call-home)# street-address “1234 Picaboo Street, Any city, Any state, 12345”

Switch(cfg-call-home)# customer-id Customer1234

Switch(cfg-call-home)# site-id Site1ManhattanNY

Switch(cfg-call-home)# contract-id Company1234

Switch(cfg-call-home)# exit

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to configure the call-home message rate-limit threshold:

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# rate-limit 50

The following example shows how to set the call-home message rate-limit threshold to the default setting:

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# default rate-limit

The following example shows how to create a new destination profile with the same configuration settings as an existing profile:

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# copy profile profile1 profile1a

The following example shows how to configure the general e-mail parameters, including a primary and secondary e-mail server:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# mail-server smtp.example.com priority 1

Switch(cfg-call-home)# mail-server 192.168.0.1 priority 2

Switch(cfg-call-home)# sender from username@example.com

Switch(cfg-call-home)# sender reply-to username@example.com

Switch(cfg-call-home)# exit

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to specify MgmtVrf as the vrf name where the call-home email message is forwarded:

Switch(cfg-call-home)# vrf MgmtVrf

Related Commands

Command

Description

alert-group (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Enables an alert group.

profile (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Enters call-home profile configuration mode.

show call-home

Displays call home configuration information.

call-home request

To submit information about your system to Cisco for report and analysis information from the Cisco Output Interpreter tool, use the call-home request command in privileged EXEC mode. An analysis report is sent by Cisco to a configured contact e-mail address.

call-home request {output-analysis “show-command” | config-sanity | bugs-list | command-reference | product-advisory} [profile name] [ccoid user-id]

Syntax Description

output-analysis “show-command”

Sends the output of the specified CLI show command for analysis. The show command must be contained in quotes (“ ”).

config-sanity

bugs-list

command-reference

product-advisory

Specifies the type of report requested. Based on this keyword, the output of a predetermined set of commands such as the show running-config all, show version, and show module (standalone) or show module switch all (VS system) commands, is sent to Cisco for analysis.

profile name

(Optional) Specifies an existing profile to which the request is sent. If no profile is specified, the request is sent to the Cisco TAC profile.

ccoid user-id

(Optional) Specifies the identifier of a registered Smart Call Home user. If a user-id is specified, the resulting analysis report is sent to the e-mail address of the registered user. If no user-id is specified, the report is sent to the contact e-mail address of the device.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on Supervisor Engine 6E and the Catalyst 4900M.

Usage Guidelines

The recipient profile does not need to be enabled for the call-home request. The profile should specify the e-mail address where the transport gateway is configured so that the request message can be forwarded to the Cisco TAC and the user can receive the reply from the Smart Call Home service.

Based on the keyword specifying the type of report requested, the following information is returned in response to the request:

- config-sanity —Information on best practices as related to the current running configuration.

- bugs-list —Known bugs in the running version and in the currently applied features.

- command-reference —Reference links to all commands in the running configuration.

- product-advisory —Product Security Incident Response Team (PSIRT) notices, End of Life (EOL) or End of Sales (EOS) notices, or field notices (FN) that may affect devices in your network.

Examples

The following example shows a request for analysis of a user-specified show command:

Switch# call-home request output-analysis "show diagnostic result module all" profile TG

Related Commands

call-home (global configuration)

Enters call home configuration mode.

call-home send

Sends a CLI command to be executed, with the command output to be sent by e-mail.

call-home send alert-group

Sends a specific alert group message.

service call-home (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Enables or disables Call Home.

show call-home

Displays call-home configuration information.

call-home send

To execute a CLI command and e-mail the command output, use the call-home send command in privileged EXEC mode.

call-home send “cli-command” {email email-addr [service-number SR] | service-number SR}

Syntax Description

“cli-command”

Specifies a CLI command to be executed. The command output is sent by e-mail.

email email-addr

Specifies the e-mail address to which the CLI command output is sent. If no e-mail address is specified, the command output is sent to the Cisco TAC at attach@cisco.com.

service-number SR

Specifies an active TAC case number to which the command output pertains. This number is required only if no e-mail address (or a TAC e-mail address) is specified, and will appear in the e-mail subject line.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on Supervisor Engine 6E and the Catalyst 4900M.

Usage Guidelines

This command causes the specified CLI command to be executed on the system. The specified CLI command must be enclosed in quotes (“”), and can be any run or show command, including commands for all modules.

The command output is then sent by e-mail to the specified e-mail address. If no e-mail address is specified, the command output is sent to the Cisco TAC at attach@cisco.com. The e-mail is sent in long text format with the service number, if specified, in the subject line.

Examples

The following example shows how to send a CLI command and have the command output e-mailed:

Switch# call-home send "show diagnostic result module all" email support@example.com

Related Commands

call-home (global configuration)

Enters call home configuration mode.

call-home send alert-group

Sends a specific alert group message.

service call-home (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Enables or disables Call Home.

show call-home

Displays call-home configuration information.

call-home send alert-group

To send a specific alert group message, use the call-home send alert-group command in privileged EXEC mode.

call-home send alert-group {configuration | diagnostic module number | inventory} [profile profile-name]

Syntax Description

configuration

Sends the configuration alert-group message to the destination profile.

diagnostic module number

Sends the diagnostic alert-group message to the destination profile for a specific module number.

inventory

Sends the inventory call-home message.

profile profile-name

(Optional) Specifies the name of the destination profile.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on Supervisor Engine 6E and the Catalyst 4900M.

Usage Guidelines

When you enter the module number, you can enter the number of the module.

If you do not specify the profile profile-name, the message is sent to all subscribed destination profiles.

Only the configuration, diagnostic, and inventory alert groups can be manually sent. The destination profile need not be subscribed to the alert group.

Examples

The following example shows how to send the configuration alert-group message to the destination profile:

Switch# call-home send alert-group configuration

The following example shows how to send the diagnostic alert-group message to the destination profile for a specific module number:

Switch# call-home send alert-group diagnostic module 3

The following example shows how to send the diagnostic alert-group message to all destination profiles for a specific module number:

Switch# call-home send alert-group diagnostic module 3 profile Ciscotac1

The following example shows how to send the inventory call-home message:

Switch# call-home send alert-group inventory

Related Commands

call-home (global configuration)

Enters call home configuration mode.

call-home test

Sends a call-home test message that you define.

service call-home (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Enables or disables Call Home.

show call-home

Displays call-home configuration information.

call-home test

To manually send a Call Home test message, use the call-home test command in privileged EXEC mode.

call-home test [“test-message”] profile profile-name

Syntax Description

“test-message”

(Optional) Test message text.

profile profile-name

Specifies the name of the destination profile.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on Supervisor Engine 6E and the Catalyst 4900M.

Usage Guidelines

This command sends a test message to the specified destination profile. If you enter test message text, you must enclose the text in quotes (“”) if it contains spaces. If you do not enter a message, a default message is sent.

Examples

The following example shows how to manually send a Call Home test message:

Switch# call-home test “test of the day” profile Ciscotac1

Related Commands

call-home (global configuration)

Enters call home configuration mode.

call-home send alert-group

Sends a specific alert group message.

service call-home (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Enables or disables Call Home.

show call-home

Displays call-home configuration information.

channel-group

To assign and configure an EtherChannel interface to an EtherChannel group, use the channel-group command. To remove a channel group configuration from an interface, use the no form of this command.

channel-group number mode {active | on | auto [non-silent]} | {passive | desirable [non-silent]}

no channel-group

Syntax Description

number

Specifies the channel-group number; valid values are from 1 to 64.

mode

Specifies the EtherChannel mode of the interface.

active

Enables LACP unconditionally.

on

Forces the port to channel without PAgP.

auto

Places a port into a passive negotiating state, in which the port responds to PAgP packets it receives but does not initiate PAgP packet negotiation.

non-silent

(Optional) Used with the auto or desirable mode when traffic is expected from the other device.

passive

Enables LACP only if an LACP device is detected.

desirable

Places a port into an active negotiating state, in which the port initiates negotiations with other ports by sending PAgP packets.

Command Default

No channel groups are assigned.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(13)EW

Support for LACP was added.

Usage Guidelines

You do not have to create a port-channel interface before assigning a physical interface to a channel group. If a port-channel interface has not been created, it is automatically created when the first physical interface for the channel group is created.

If a specific channel number is used for the PAgP-enabled interfaces of a channel group, that same channel number cannot be used for configuring a channel that has LACP-enabled interfaces or vice versa.

You can also create port channels by entering the interface port-channel command. This will create a Layer 3 port channel. To change the Layer 3 port channel into a Layer 2 port channel, use the switchport command before you assign physical interfaces to the channel group. A port channel cannot be changed from Layer 3 to Layer 2 or vice versa when it contains member ports.

You do not have to disable the IP address that is assigned to a physical interface that is part of a channel group, but we recommend that you do so.

Any configuration or attribute changes that you make to the port-channel interface are propagated to all interfaces within the same channel group as the port channel (for example, configuration changes are also propagated to the physical interfaces that are not part of the port channel, but are part of the channel group).

You can create in on mode a usable EtherChannel by connecting two port groups together.

Caution Do not enable Layer 3 addresses on the physical EtherChannel interfaces. Do not assign bridge groups on the physical EtherChannel interfaces because it creates loops.

Examples

The following example shows how to add Gigabit Ethernet interface 1/1 to the EtherChannel group that is specified by port-channel 45:

Switch(config-if)# channel-group 45 mode on

Creating a port-channel interface Port-channel45

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

interface port-channel

Accesses or creates a port-channel interface.

show interfaces port-channel (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Displays the information about the Fast EtherChannel.

channel-protocol

To enable LACP or PAgP on an interface, use the channel-protocol command. To disable the protocols, use the no form of this command.

channel-protocol {lacp | pagp}

no channel-protocol {lacp | pagp}

Syntax Description

lacp

Enables LACP to manage channeling.

pagp

Enables PAgP to manage channeling.

Command Default

pagp

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You can also select the protocol using the channel-group command.

If the interface belongs to a channel, the no form of this command is rejected.

All ports in an EtherChannel must use the same protocol; you cannot run two protocols on one module.

PAgP and LACP are not compatible; both ends of a channel must use the same protocol.

You can manually configure a switch with PAgP on one side and LACP on the other side in the on mode.

You can change the protocol at any time, but this change causes all existing EtherChannels to reset to the default channel mode for the new protocol. You can use the channel-protocol command to restrict anyone from selecting a mode that is not applicable to the selected protocol.

Configure all ports in an EtherChannel to operate at the same speed and duplex mode (full duplex only for LACP mode).

For a complete list of guidelines, refer to the “Configuring EtherChannel” section of the Catalyst 4500 Series Switch Cisco IOS Software Configuration Guide.

Examples

The following example shows how to select LACP to manage channeling on the interface:

Switch(config-if)# channel-protocol lacp

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

channel-group

Assigns and configures an EtherChannel interface to an EtherChannel group.

show etherchannel

Displays EtherChannel information for a channel.

cisp enable

Use the cisp enable global configuration command to enable Client Information Signalling Protocol (CISP) on a switch.

cisp enable

no cisp enable

Syntax Description

cisp enable

Enable CISP.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You must enable the CISP protocol (with the global cisp enable command) on both the authenticator and supplicant switch. The CISP protocol is crucial because it conveys the client information from the supplicant switch to the authenticator switch thereby providing access for the clients of the supplicant switch through the authenticator switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable CISP:

switch(config)# cisp enable

Related Commands

Command

Description

dot1x credentials (global configuration)

Configures a profile on a supplicant switch.

show cisp

Displays CISP information for a specified interface.

Refer to IOS documentation.

class

To specify the name of the class whose traffic policy you want to create or change, use the class policy-map configuration command. To delete an existing class from a policy map, use the no form of this command.

class class-name

no class class-name

Syntax Description

class-name

Name of the predefined traffic class for which you want to configure or modify a traffic policy. The class was previously created through the class-map class-map-name global configuration command.

Command Default

No classes are defined; except for the class-default.

Command Modes

Policy-map configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Before using the class command, you must create a class map for matching packets to the class by using the class-map global configuration command. You also must use the policy-map global configuration command to identify the policy map and to enter policy-map configuration mode. After specifying a policy map, you can configure a traffic policy for new classes or modify a traffic policy for any existing classes in that policy map. The class name that you specify with the class command in the policy map ties the characteristics for that class (its policy) to the class map and its match criteria, as configured through the class-map global configuration command. You attach the policy map to a port by using the service-policy (interface configuration) configuration command.

After you enter the class command, the switch enters policy-map class configuration mode, and these configuration commands are available:

- bandwidth S pecifies or modifies the minimum bandwidth provided to a class belonging to a policy map. For more information, see the bandwidth command.

- dbl Enables dynamic buffer limiting for traffic hitting this class. For details on dbl parameters refer to the show qos dbl command.

- exit Exits policy-map class configuration mode and returns to policy-map configuration mode.

- no R eturns a command to its default setting.

- police C onfigures a single-rate policer, an aggregate policer, or a two-rate traffic policer that uses the committed information rate (CIR) and the peak information rate (PIR) for a class of traffic. The policer specifies the bandwidth limitations and the action to take when the limits are exceeded. For more information, see the police command. For more information about the two-rate policer, see the police (two rates) and the police (percent) command.

- priority Enables the strict priority queue for a class of traffic. For more information, see the priority command.

- service-policy (policy-map class) Creates a service policy as a quality of service (QoS) policy within a policy map (called a hierarchical service policy). For more information, see the service-policy (policy-map class) command. This command is effective only in a hierarchical policy map attached to an interface.

- set Classifies IP traffic by setting a class of service (CoS), a Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) or IP-precedence in the packet. For more information, see the set command.

- shape (class-based queueing) Sets the token bucket committed information rate (CIR) in a policy map. For more information, see the shape (class-based queueing) command.

- trust D efines a trust state for a traffic class. For more information, see the trust command. This command is not supported on Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

The switch supports up to 256 classes, including the default class, in a policy map. Packets that fail to meet any of the matching criteria are classified as members of the default traffic class. You configure the default traffic class by specifying class-default as the class name in the class policy-map class configuration command. You can manipulate the default traffic class (for example, set policies to police or to shape it) just like any other traffic class, but you cannot delete it.

To return to policy-map configuration mode, use the exit command. To return to privileged EXEC mode, use the end command.

Examples

The following example shows how to create a policy map called policy1. When attached to an ingress port, the policy matches all the inbound traffic defined in class1, sets the IP DSCP to 10, and polices the traffic at an average rate of 1 Mbps and bursts of 20 KB. Traffic exceeding the profile is marked down to a Traffic exceeding the profile is marked down to a DSCP value obtained from the policed-DSCP map and then sent.

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# class-map class1

Switch(config-cmap)# exit

Switch(config)# policy-map policy1

Switch(config-pmap)# class class1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# set ip dscp 10

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 1000000 20000 exceed-action policed-dscp-transmit

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# exit

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet1/0/4

Switch(config-if)# service-policy input policy1

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

bandwidth

Specifies or modifies the minimum bandwidth provided to a class belonging to a policy map attached to a physical port.

class-map

Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name you specify and to enter class-map configuration mode.

dbl

Enables active queue management on a transmit queue used by a class of traffic.

police

Configures the Traffic Policing feature.

police (percent)

Configures traffic policing on the basis of a percentage of bandwidth available on an interface.

police rate

Configures single- or dual-rate policer.

policy-map

Creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

priority

Enables the strict priority queue (low-latency queueing [LLQ]) and to give priority to a class of traffic belonging to a policy map attached to a physical port.

service-policy (interface configuration)

Attaches a policy map to an interface.

service-policy (policy-map class)

Creates a service policy that is a quality of service (QoS) policy within a policy map.

set

Marks IP traffic by setting a class of service (CoS), a Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP), or IP-precedence in the packet.

shape (class-based queueing)

Enables traffic shaping a class of traffic in a policy map attached to a physical port.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

trust

Defines a trust state for traffic classified through the class policy-map configuration command.

class-map

To create a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name you specify and to enter class-map configuration mode, use the class-map global configuration command. To delete an existing class map and to return to global configuration mode, use the no form of this command.

class-map [match-all | match-any] class-map-name

no class-map [match-all | match-any] class-map-name

Syntax Description

match-all

(Optional) Perform a logical-AND of all matching under this class map. All criteria in the class map must be matched.

match-any

(Optional) Perform a logical-OR of the matching statements under this class map. One or more criteria in the class map must be matched.

class-map-name

Name of the class map.

Command Default

No class maps are defined.

If neither the match-all nor the match-any keyword is specified, the default is match-all.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to specify the name of the class for which you want to create or modify class-map match criteria and to enter class-map configuration mode. Packets are checked against the match criteria configured for a class map to decide if the packet belongs to that class. If a packet matches the specified criteria, the packet is considered a member of the class and is forwarded according to the quality of service (QoS) specifications set in the traffic policy.

After you enter the class-map command, the switch enters class-map configuration mode, and these configuration commands are available:

- description Describes the class map (up to 200 characters). The show class-map privileged EXEC command displays the description and the name of the class map.

- exit E xits from QoS class-map configuration mode.

- match Configures classification criteria. For more information, see the match (class-map configuration) command.

- no Removes a match statement from a class map.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the class map called class1 with one match criterion, which is an access list called 103:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# access-list 103 permit any any dscp 10

Switch(config)# class-map class1

Switch(config-cmap)# match access-group 103

Switch(config-cmap)# exit

Switch#

The following example shows how to delete the class1 class map:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# no class-map class1

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show class-map privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

class

Specifies the name of the class whose traffic policy you want to create or change.

match (class-map configuration)

Defines the match criteria for a class map.

policy-map

Creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

show class-map

Displays class map information.

clear counters

To clear the interface counters, use the clear counters command.

clear counters [{FastEthernet interface_number} | {GigabitEthernet interface_number} |

{null interface_number} | {port-channel number} | {vlan vlan_id}]

Syntax Description

FastEthernet interface_number

(Optional) Specifies the Fast Ethernet interface; valid values are from 1 to 9.

GigabitEthernet interface_number

(Optional) Specifies the Gigabit Ethernet interface; valid values are from 1 to 9.

null interface_number

(Optional) Specifies the null interface; the valid value is 0.

port-channel number

(Optional) Specifies the channel interface; valid values are from 1 to 64.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 4096.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended VLAN addresses was added.

Usage Guidelines

This command clears all the current interface counters from all the interfaces unless you specify an interface.

Note This command does not clear the counters that are retrieved using SNMP, but only those seen when you enter the show interface counters command.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear all the interface counters:

Switch# clear counters

Clear "show interface" counters on all interfaces [confirm] y

Switch#

The following example shows how to clear the counters on a specific interface:

Switch# clear counters vlan 200

Clear "show interface" counters on this interface [confirm]y

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interface counters (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Displays interface counter information.

clear errdisable interface

Use the clear errdisable interface privileged EXEC command on an interface to re-enable a VLAN that was error disabled.

clear errdisable interface interface-id vlan [vlan-list]

Syntax Description

interface-id

Specifies interface and port.

vlan-list

(Optional) Specifies a list of VLANs to be re-enabled.

If not specified, then all VLANs are re-enabled.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

Added support for per-VLAN error-disable detection.

Usage Guidelines

If a VLAN range is not specified, all VLANs on the specified interface are re-enabled. The clear errdisable command recovers the disabled VLANs on an interface.

Clearing the error-disabled state from a virtual port does not change the link state of the physical port, and it does not affect other VLAN ports on the physical port. It does post an event to STP, and spanning tree goes through its normal process of bringing that VLAN port to the appropriate blocking or forwarding state.

You can re-enable a port by using the shutdown and no shutdown interface configuration commands, or you can clear error disable for VLANs by using the clear errdisable interface command.

Examples

The following example shows how to re-enable all VLANs that were error-disabled on Gigabit Ethernet port 4/0/2.

Switch# clear errdisable interface gigabitethernet4/0/2 vlan

The following example shows how to re-enable a range of disabled VLANs on an interaface:

Switch# clear errdisable interface ethernet2 vlan 10-15

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

errdisable detect cause

Enables error-disabled detection for a specific cause or all causes.

errdisable recovery

Configures the recovery mechanism variables.

show errdisable detect

Displays error-disabled detection status.

show errdisable recovery

Display error-disabled recovery timer information.

show interfaces status

Displays interface status of a list of interfaces in error-disabled state.

clear hw-module slot password

To clear the password on an intelligent line module, use the clear hw-module slot password command.

clear hw-module slot slot_num password

Syntax Description

slot_num

Slot on a line module.

Command Default

The password is not cleared.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You only need to change the password once unless the password is reset.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear the password from slot 5 on a line module:

Switch# clear hw-module slot 5 password

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

hw-module power

Turns the power off on a slot or line module.

clear interface gigabitethernet

To clear the hardware logic from a Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3z interface, use the clear interface gigabitethernet command.

Note This command does not increment interface resets as displayed with the show interface gigabitethernet mod/port command.

clear interface gigabitethernet mod/port

Syntax Description

mod/port

Number of the module and port.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear the hardware logic from a Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3z interface:

Switch# clear interface gigabitethernet 1/1

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces status

Displays the interface status.

clear interface vlan

To clear the hardware logic from a VLAN, use the clear interface vlan command.

clear interface vlan number

Syntax Description

number

Number of the VLAN interface; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended VLAN addresses added.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear the hardware logic from a specific VLAN:

Switch# clear interface vlan 5

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces status

Displays the interface status.

clear ip access-template

To clear the statistical information in access lists, use the clear ip access-template command.

clear ip access-template access-list

Syntax Description

access-list

Number of the access list; valid values are from 100 to 199 for an IP extended access list, and from 2000 to 2699 for an expanded range IP extended access list.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear the statistical information for an access list:

Switch# clear ip access-template 201

Switch#

clear ip arp inspection log

To clear the status of the log buffer, use the clear ip arp inspection log command.

clear ip arp inspection log

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear the contents of the log buffer:

Switch# clear ip arp inspection log

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

arp access-list

Defines an ARP access list or adds clauses at the end of a predefined list.

show ip arp inspection log

Displays the status of the log buffer.

clear ip arp inspection statistics

To clear the dynamic ARP inspection statistics, use the clear ip arp inspection statistics command.

clear ip arp inspection statistics [vlan vlan-range]

Syntax Description

vlan vlan-range

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN range.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear the DAI statistics from VLAN 1 and how to verify the removal:

Switch# clear ip arp inspection statistics vlan 1

Switch# show ip arp inspection statistics vlan 1

Vlan Forwarded Dropped DHCP Drops ACL Drops

---- --------- ------- ---------- ----------

1 0 0 0 0

Vlan DHCP Permits ACL Permits Source MAC Failures

---- ------------ ----------- -------------------

1 0 0 0

Vlan Dest MAC Failures IP Validation Failures

---- ----------------- ----------------------

1 0 0

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

arp access-list

Defines an ARP access list or adds clauses at the end of a predefined list.

clear ip arp inspection log

Clears the status of the log buffer.

show ip arp inspection log

Displays the status of the log buffer.

clear ip dhcp snooping binding

To clear the DHCP snooping binding, use the clear ip dhcp snooping binding command.

clear ip dhcp snooping binding [*] [ip-address] [vlan vlan_num] [interface interface_num]

Syntax Description

*

(Optional) Clears all DHCP snooping binding entries.

ip-address

(Optional) IP address for the DHCP snooping binding entries.

vlan vlan_num

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN.

interface interface_num

(Optional) Specifies an interface.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(44)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

These commands are mainly used to clear DHCP snooping binding entries.

DHCP snooping is enabled on a VLAN only if both the global snooping and the VLAN snooping are enabled.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear all the DHCP snoop binding entries:

Switch# clear ip dhcp snooping binding *

Switch#

The following example shows how to clear a specific DHCP snoop binding entry:

Switch# clear ip dhcp snooping binding 1.2.3.4

Switch#

The following example shows how to clear all the DHCP snoop binding entries on the GigabitEthernet interface 1/1:

Switch# clear ip dhcp snooping binding interface gigabitEthernet 1/1

Switch#

The following example shows how to clear all the DHCP snoop binding entries on VLAN 40:

Switch# clear ip dhcp snooping binding vlan 40

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping

Globally enables DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping binding

Sets up and generates a DHCP binding configuration to restore bindings across reboots.

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN or a group of VLANs.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries.

clear ip dhcp snooping database

To clear the DHCP binding database, use the clear ip dhcp snooping database command.

clear ip dhcp snooping database

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear the DHCP binding database:

Switch# clear ip dhcp snooping database

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

Globally enables DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping binding

Sets up and generates a DHCP binding configuration to restore bindings across reboots.

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN or a group of VLANs.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries.

clear ip dhcp snooping database statistics

To clear the DHCP binding database statistics, use the clear ip dhcp snooping database statistics command.

clear ip dhcp snooping database statistics

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear the DHCP binding database:

Switch# clear ip dhcp snooping database statistics

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping

Globally enables DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping binding

Sets up and generates a DHCP binding configuration to restore bindings across reboots.

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN or a group of VLANs.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries.

clear ip igmp group

To delete the IGMP group cache entries, use the clear ip igmp group command.

clear ip igmp group [{fastethernet mod/port} | {GigabitEthernet mod/port} | {host_name | group_address} {Loopback interface_number} | {null interface_number} |

{port-channel number} | {vlan vlan_id}]

Syntax Description

fastethernet

(Optional) Specifies the Fast Ethernet interface.

mod/port

(Optional) Number of the module and port.

GigabitEthernet

(Optional) Specifies the Gigabit Ethernet interface.

host_name

(Optional) Hostname, as defined in the DNS hosts table or with the ip host command.

group_address

(Optional) Address of the multicast group in four-part, dotted notation.

Loopback interface_number

(Optional) Specifies the loopback interface; valid values are from 0 to 2,147,483,647.

null interface_number

(Optional) Specifies the null interface; the valid value is 0.

port-channel number

(Optional) Specifies the channel interface; valid values are from 1 to 64.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The IGMP cache contains a list of the multicast groups of which hosts on the directly connected LAN are members.

To delete all the entries from the IGMP cache, enter the clear ip igmp group command with no arguments.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear the entries for a specific group from the IGMP cache:

Switch# clear ip igmp group 224.0.255.1

Switch#

The following example shows how to clear the IGMP group cache entries from a specific interface:

Switch# clear ip igmp group gigabitethernet 2/2

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip host (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Defines a static host name-to-address mapping in the host cache.

show ip igmp groups (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Displays the multicast groups with receivers that are directly connected to the router and that were learned through Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP), use the show ip igmp groups command in EXEC mode.

show ip igmp interface

Displays the information about the IGMP-interface status and configuration.

clear ip igmp snooping membership

To clear the explicit host-tracking database, use the clear ip igmp snooping membership command.

clear ip igmp snooping membership [vlan vlan_id]

Syntax Description

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 1001 and from 1006 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(20)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

By default, the explicit host tracking database maintains a maximum of 1-KB entries. After you reach this limit, no additional entries can be created in the database. To create more entries, you will need to delete the database with the clear ip igmp snooping statistics vlan command.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the IGMP snooping statistics for VLAN 25:

Switch# clear ip igmp snooping membership vlan 25

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip igmp snooping vlan explicit-tracking

Enables per-VLAN explicit host tracking.

show ip igmp snooping membership

Displays host membership information.

clear ip mfib counters

To clear the global MFIB counters and the counters for all active MFIB routes, use the clear ip mfib counters command.

clear ip mfib counters

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear all the active MFIB routes and global counters:

Switch# clear ip mfib counters

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show ip mfib

Displays all active Multicast Forwarding Information Base (MFIB) routes.

clear ip mfib fastdrop

To clear all the MFIB fast-drop entries, use the clear ip mfib fastdrop command.

clear ip mfib fastdrop

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If new fast-dropped packets arrive, the new fast-drop entries are created.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear all the fast-drop entries:

Switch# clear ip mfib fastdrop

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip mfib fastdrop

Enables MFIB fast drop.

show ip mfib fastdrop

Displays all currently active fast-drop entries and shows whether fast drop is enabled.

clear ip wccp

To remove Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP) statistics (counts) maintained on the switch for a particular service, use the clear ip wccp command in privileged EXEC mode.

clear ip wccp [vrf vrf-name {web-cache | service-number}] [web-cache | service-number]

Syntax Description

web-cache

(Optional) Directs the router to remove statistics for the web cache service.

service-number

(Optional) Number of the cache service to be removed. The number can be from 0 to 99.

Command Default

No default behavior or values.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC (#)

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

Usage Guidelines

Use the show ip wccp and show ip wccp detail commands to display WCCP statistics.

Use the clear ip wccp command to clear the WCCP counters for all WCCP services in all VRFs.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear all statistics associated with the web cache service:

Switch# clear ip wccp web-cache

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip wccp

Enables support of the specified WCCP service for participation in a service group.

show ip wccp

Displays global statistics related to the WCCP.

clear lacp counters

To clear the statistics for all the interfaces belonging to a specific channel group, use the clear lacp counters command.

clear lacp [channel-group] counters

Syntax Description

channel-group

(Optional) Channel-group number; valid values are from 1 to 64.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If you do not specify a channel group, all channel groups are cleared.

If you enter this command for a channel group that contains members in PAgP mode, the command is ignored.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear the statistics for a specific group:

Switch# clear lacp 1 counters

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show lacp

Displays LACP information.

clear mac-address-table

To clear the global counter entries from the Layer 2 MAC address table, use the clear mac-address-table command.

clear mac-address-table {dynamic [{address mac_addr} | {interface interface}] [vlan vlan_id] | notification}

Syntax Description

dynamic

Specifies dynamic entry types.

address mac_addr

(Optional) Specifies the MAC address.

interface interface

(Optional) Specifies the interface and clears the entries associated with it; valid values are FastEthernet and GigabitEthernet.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Specifies the VLANs; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

notification

Specifies MAC change notification global counters.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended VLAN addresses added.

12.2(31)SG

Support for MAC address notification global counters added.

Usage Guidelines

Enter the clear mac-address-table dynamic command with no arguments to remove all dynamic entries from the table.

The clear mac-address-table notification command only clears the global counters which are displayed with show mac-address-table notification command. It does not clear the global counters and the history table of the CISCO-MAC-NATIFICATION-MIB.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear all the dynamic Layer 2 entries for a specific interface (gi1/1):

Switch# clear mac-address-table dynamic interface gi1/1

Switch#

The following example shows how to clear the MAC address notification counters:

Switch# clear mac-address-table notification

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear mac-address-table dynamic

Clears the dynamic address entries from the Layer 2 MAC address table.

mac-address-table aging-time

Configures the aging time for entries in the Layer 2 table.

mac-address-table notification

Enables MAC address notification on a switch.

main-cpu

Enters the main CPU submode and manually synchronizes the configurations on two supervisor engines.

show mac-address-table address

Displays the information about the MAC-address table.

snmp-server enable traps

Enables SNMP notifications.

clear mac-address-table dynamic

To clear the dynamic address entries from the Layer 2 MAC address table, use the clear mac-address-table dynamic command.

clear mac-address-table dynamic [{address mac_addr} | {interface interface}] [vlan vlan_id]

Syntax Description

address mac_addr

(Optional) Specifies the MAC address.

interface interface

(Optional) Specifies the interface and clears the entries associated with it; valid values are FastEthernet and GigabitEthernet.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Specifies the VLANs; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended VLAN addresses added.

Usage Guidelines

Enter the clear mac-address-table dynamic command with no arguments to remove all dynamic entries from the table.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear all the dynamic Layer 2 entries for a specific interface (gi1/1):

Switch# clear mac-address-table dynamic interface gi1/1

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

mac-address-table aging-time

Configures the aging time for entries in the Layer 2 table.

main-cpu

Enters the main CPU submode and manually synchronizes the configurations on two supervisor engines.

show mac-address-table address

Displays the information about the MAC-address table.

clear netflow-lite exporter statistics

Note NetFlow-lite is supported only on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To clear the collector statistics, use the clear netflow-lite exporter statistics command.

clear netflow-lite exporter exporter-name statistics

Syntax Description

exporter-name

Specifies an exporter.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

Command introduced on on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

Examples

The following examples show how to clear statistics of a packet sampler at a monitor:

Switch# clear netflow-lite exporter e1 statistics

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear netflow-lite monitor statistics interface

Clears statistics of a packet sampler at a monitor.

clear netflow-lite monitor statistics interface

Note NetFlow-lite is supported only on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To clear statistics of a packet sampler at a monitor, use the clear netflow-lite monitor statistics interface command.

clear netflow-lite monitor statistics interface vlan-id

Syntax Description

vlan-id

Specifies an interface.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

Command introduced on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

Examples

The following examples show how to clear statistics of a packet sampler at a monitor:

Switch# clear netflow-lite monitor 1 statistics int gi1/1

Switch# clear netflow-lite monitor 1 statistics vlan 10

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear netflow-lite exporter statistics

Clear the collector statistics.

clear nmsp statistics

To clear the Network Mobility Services Protocol (NMSP) statistics, use the clear nmsp statistics command. This command is available only when your switch is running the cryptographic (encrypted) software image.

clear nmsp statistics

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

No default is defined.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear NMSP statistics:

Switch# clear nmsp statistics

Switch#

You can verify that information was deleted by entering the show nmsp statistics command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show nmsp

Displays the NMSP information.

clear pagp

To clear the port-channel information, use the clear pagp command.

clear pagp {group-number | counters}

Syntax Description

group-number

Channel-group number; valid values are from 1 to 64.

counters

Clears traffic filters.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear the port-channel information for a specific group:

Switch# clear pagp 32

Switch#

The following example shows how to clear all the port-channel traffic filters:

Switch# clear pagp counters

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show pagp

Displays information about the port channel.

clear port-security

To delete all configured secure addresses or a specific dynamic or sticky secure address on an interface from the MAC address table, use the clear port-security command.

clear port-security dynamic [address mac-addr [vlan vlan-id]] | [interface interface-id] [vlan access | voice]

Syntax Description

dynamic

Deletes all the dynamic secure MAC addresses.

address mac-addr

(Optional) Deletes the specified secure MAC address.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Deletes the specified secure MAC address from the specified VLAN.

interface interface-id

(Optional) Deletes the secure MAC addresses on the specified physical port or port channel.

vlan access

(Optional) Deletes the secure MAC addresses from access VLANs.

vlan voice

(Optional) Deletes the secure MAC addresses from voice VLANs.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Usage Guidelines

If you enter the clear port-security all command, the switch removes all the dynamic secure MAC addresses from the MAC address table.

Note You can clear sticky and static secure MAC addresses one at a time with the no switchport port-security mac-address command.

If you enter the clear port-security dynamic interface interface-id command, the switch removes all the dynamic secure MAC addresses on an interface from the MAC address table.

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was first introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(31)SG

Add support for sticky port security.

Examples

The following example shows how to remove all the dynamic secure addresses from the MAC address table:

Switch# clear port-security dynamic

The following example shows how to remove a dynamic secure address from the MAC address table:

Switch# clear port-security dynamic address 0008.0070.0007

The following example shows how to remove all the dynamic secure addresses learned on a specific interface:

Switch# clear port-security dynamic interface gigabitethernet0/1

You can verify that the information was deleted by entering the show port-security command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show port-security

Displays information about the port-security setting.

switchport port-security

Enables port security on an interface.

clear pppoe intermediate-agent statistics

To clear PPPoE Intermediate Agent statistics (packet counters), use the clear pppoe intermediate-agent statistics command.

clear ppoe intermediate-agent statistics

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear PPPoE Intermediate Agent statistics:

Switch# clear pppoe intermediate-agent statistics

Related Commands

Command

Description

show pppoe intermediate-agent interface

Displays PPPoE Intermediate Agent statistics (packet counters).

clear qos

To clear the global and per-interface aggregate QoS counters, use the clear qos command.

clear qos [aggregate-policer [name] | interface {{fastethernet | GigabitEthernet} {mod/interface}} | vlan {vlan_num} | port-channel {number}]

Syntax Description

aggregate-policer name

(Optional) Specifies an aggregate policer.

interface

(Optional) Specifies an interface.

fastethernet

(Optional) Specifies the Fast Ethernet 802.3 interface.

GigabitEthernet

(Optional) Specifies the Gigabit Ethernet 802.3z interface.

mod/interface

(Optional) Number of the module and interface.

vlan vlan_num

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN.

port-channel number

(Optional) Specifies the channel interface; valid values are from 1 to 64.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is not supported on Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

Note When you enter the clear qos command, the way that the counters work is affected and the traffic that is normally restricted could be forwarded for a short period of time.

The clear qos command resets the interface QoS policy counters. If no interface is specified, the clear qos command resets the QoS policy counters for all interfaces.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear the global and per-interface aggregate QoS counters for all the protocols:

Switch# clear qos

Switch#

The following example shows how to clear the specific protocol aggregate QoS counters for all the interfaces:

Switch# clear qos aggregate-policer

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show qos

Displays QoS information.

clear switch virtual dual-active fast-hello

To clear counters related to fast-hello interfaces for a virtual switching system (VSS), use the clear switch virtual dual-active fast-hello command in EXEC mode.

clear switch virtual dual-active fast-hello [counters | packet]

Syntax Description

counters

(Optional)Clear counters related to exchange of fast-hello packets between fast-hello interfaces.

packet

(Optional) Clear cumulative counters related to exchange of fast-hello packets between the VSS members.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

EXEC (>)

Command History

Release

Modification

Release IOS XE 3.5.0E and IOS 15.2(1)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to clear fast-hello counters and packet statistics.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear counters related to fast-hello interfaces:

Switch# clear switch virtual dual-active fast-hello ?

counters Dual-active fast-hello link counters

packet Dual-active fast-hello pkt counters

<cr>

Switch# clear switch virtual dual-active fast-hello counters ?

interface Interface

<cr>

Related Commands

Command

Description

dual-active detection (virtual switch)

Enables and configures dual-active detection.

snmp ifindex clear

Configures the VSS domain number and enter the virtual switch domain configuration submode.

clear vlan counters

To clear the software-cached counter values to start from zero again for a specified VLAN or all existing VLANs, use the clear vlan counters command.

clear vlan [vlan-id] counters

Syntax Description

vlan-id

(Optional) VLAN number

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If you do not specify a vlan-id value; the software-cached counter values for all the existing VLANs are cleared.

Examples

The following example shows how to clear the software-cached counter values for a specific VLAN:

Switch# clear vlan 10 counters

Clear "show vlan" counters on this vlan [confirm] y

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vlan counters

Displays VLAN counter information.

clear vmps statistics

To clear the VMPS statistics, use the clear vmps statistics command.

clear vmps statistics

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

1. The following example shows how to clear the VMPS statistics:

Switch# clear vmps statistics

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vmps

Displays VMPS information.

vmps reconfirm (privileged EXEC)

Changes the reconfirmation interval for the VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) client.

control-plane

To enter control-plane configuration mode, which allows users to associate or modify attributes or parameters (such as a service policy) that are associated with the control plane of the device, use the control-plane command.

control-plane

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Default service police system-cpp-policy is attached.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on Supervisor 6-E and Catalyst 4900M.

12.2(52)XO

This command was introduced on Supervisor 6L-E

12.2(54)XO

This command was introduced on Catalyst 4948-E

Usage Guidelines

After you enter the control-plane command, you can define control plane services for your route processor. For example, you can associate a service policy with the control plane to police all traffic that is destined to the control plane.

Examples

These examples show how to configure trusted hosts with source addresses 10.1.1.1 and 10.1.1.2 to forward Telnet packets to the control plane without constraint, while allowing all remaining Telnet packets to be policed at the specified rate:

Switch(config)# access-list 140 deny tcp host 10.1.1.1 any eq telnet

! Allow 10.1.1.2 trusted host traffic.

Switch(config)# access-list 140 deny tcp host 10.1.1.2 any eq telnet

! Rate limit all other Telnet traffic.

Switch(config)# access-list 140 permit tcp any any eq telnet

! Define class-map “telnet-class.”

Switch(config)# class-map telnet-class

Switch(config-cmap)# match access-group 140

Switch(config-cmap)# exit

Switch(config)# policy-map control-plane

Switch(config-pmap)# class telnet-class

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 32000 1000 conform transmit exceed drop

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# exit

! Define aggregate control plane service for the active Route Processor.

Switch(config)# macro global apply system-cpp

Switch(config)# control-plane

Switch(config-cp)# service-police input system-cpp-policy

Switch(config-cp)# exit

Related Commands

Command

Description

class

Specifies the name of the class whose traffic policy you want to create or change.

class-map

Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name you specify and to enter class-map configuration mode.

match access-group (refer to the Cisco IOS Release 12.2 Command Reference)

Configures the match criteria for a class map on the basis of the specified access control list (ACL).

policy-map

Creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

service-policy (interface configuration)

Attaches a policy map to an interface.

show policy-map control-plane

Displays the configuration either of a class or of all classes for the policy map of a control plane.

context

To configure layer 3 contexts in the fabric domain, use the context name id id command.

context name

id id

Syntax Description

name

Creates a new layer 3 context in the fabric domain.

id

Assigns an ID to the context.

Command Default

None.

Command Modes

Fabric-auto-domain configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

3.9.01E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500-E series switch using a Supervisor Engines 8-E and 8L-E.

Usage Guidelines

A virtual context provides virtualization at the device level, using virtual routing and forwarding (VRF), to create multiple instances of Layer 3 routing tables. Contexts or VRFs provide segmentation across IP addresses, allowing for overlapped address space and traffic separation.

This command enables the auto-generation of LISP (Locator ID Separation Protocol) and VRF (Virtual Routing and Forwarding) configuration, to orchestrate the fabric overlay. The show-running configuration command shows the virtual context configuration including the auto-generated base line commands.

Examples

The following configuration is auto-generated when this command is run on your device:

Device(config-fabric-auto-domain)# context guest id 10

ip vrf guest

description Auto-provisioned vrf for context example-context (source – fabric auto)

router lisp

eid-table vrf guest instance-id 10

control-plane

To configure the IP address of the control-plane device with which the edge device can communicate, in the fabric domain, use the control-plane ip address auth-key key command.

control-plane ip address

auth-key key

Syntax Description

control-plane ip address

Configures the IP address of the control-plane device, to which the edge device can connect.

auth-key key

Configures the key to authenticate access to the control-plane device.

Command Default

None.

Command Modes

Fabric-auto-domain configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

3.9.01E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500-E series switch using a Supervisor Engines 8-E and 8L-E.

Usage Guidelines

Use the command to configure the control-plane device IP address and the authentication key, to allow fabric edge devices in the fabric domain to communicate with the control-plane device .

This command enables the auto-generation of LISP (Locator ID Separation Protocol) and VRF (Virtual Routing and Forwarding) configuration, to orchestrate the fabric overlay. The show-running configuration command shows the virtual context configuration including the auto-generated base line commands.

Examples

The following configuration is auto-generated when this command is run on your device:

Device(config-fabric-auto-domain)#control-plane 2.2.2.2

auth_key examplekey123

r

outer lisp

locator-set default.RLOC

ipv4-interface Loopback0 priority 10 weight 10

exit

disable-ttl-propagate

ipv4 sgt

eid-table default instance-id 0

exit

loc-reach-algorithm lsb-reports ignore

ipv4 itr map-resolver 2.2.2.2

ipv4 itr

ipv4 etr map-server 2.2.2.2 key examplekey123

ipv4 etr

cos (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is supported only on Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To specify a CoS value for the NetFlow-lite collector, use the cos command. To delete the value, use the no form of this command.

cos cos-value

no cos cos-value

Syntax Description

cos-value

Specifies a CoS value for the NetFlow-lite collector. Valid values from 0 to 7.

Command Default

0

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

Usage Guidelines

This option allows you to set the CoS value of VLAN tags for packet samples exported by the fpga alone.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify a CoS value for the NetFlow-lite collector:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# destination 5.5.5.6

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# source 5.5.5.5

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# transport udp 8188

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# ttl 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# cos 7

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# dscp 32

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# template data timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options sampler-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options interface-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# export-protocol netflow-v9 Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# exit

Switch(config)#

Display the exporter

Switch# show netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Netflow-lite Exporter exporter1:

Network Protocol Configuration:

Destination IP address: 5.5.5.6

Source IP Address: 5.5.5.5

VRF label:

DSCP: 0x20

TTL: 128

COS: 7

Transport Protocol Configuration:

Transport Protocol: UDP

Destination Port: 8188

Source Port: 61670

Export Protocol Configuration:

Export Protocol: netflow-v9

Template data timeout: 60

Options sampler-table timeout: 1800

Options interface-table timeout: 1800

Exporter Statistics:

Packets Exported: 0

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite exporter privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

destination (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a destination address in netflow-lite submode.

source (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a source Layer 3 interface of the NetFlow-lite collector.

transport udp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector.

ttl (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a ttl value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

dscp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a CoS value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

template data timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a template data timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

options timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies an options timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

export-protocol (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies the export protocol for the NetFlow-lite collector.

counter

To assign counters to a Layer 3 interface, use the counter interface command. To remove a counter assignment, use the no form of this command.

counter {ipv4 | ipv6 | ipv4 ipv6 separate}

no counter

Note Supervisor Engine 6-E and Supervisor Engine 6L-E do not support Layer 3 interface counters.

Syntax Description

ipv4

Enables collection of IPv4 statistics only.

ipv6

Enables collection of IPv6 statistics only.

ipv4 ipv6 separate

Enables collection of IPv4 and IPv6 statistics and displays them individually.

Command Default

Not enabled

Command Modes

Interface configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(54)SG

Support added for IPv4 and IPv6 counters.

Usage Guidelines

Entering the counter command without keywords displays the statistics as a sum.

The total number of switch ports that can possess transmit and receive counters is 4092.

When you change a Layer 3 port assigned with a counter to a Layer 2 port, the hardware counters are cleared. This action is similar to entering the no counter command.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable counters on interface VLAN 1:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface vlan 1

Switch(config-if)# counter ipv4

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

00:17:15: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console

Switch# show run interface vlan 1

Building configuration...

Current configuration : 63 bytes

!

interface Vlan1

ip address 10.0.0.1 255.0.0.0

counter ipv4

end

Note To remove the counter assignment, use the no counter command.

If you have already assigned the maximum number of counters, the counter command fails, displaying the following error message:

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface fa3/2

Switch(config-if)# no switchport

Switch(config-if)# counter ipv6

Counter resource exhausted for interface fa3/2

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

00:24:18: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console

In this situation, you must release a counter from another interface so the new interface can use it.

dbl

To enable active queue management on a transmit queue used by a class of traffic, use the dbl command. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

dbl

no dbl

Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or arguments.

Command Default

Active queue management is disabled.

Command Modes

Policy-map class configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(40)SG

Support added on Supervisor Engine 6E.

Usage Guidelines

The semantics of the DBL configuration is similar to the WRED algorithm. The dbl command can operate alone on class-default; otherwise, it requires you to configure the bandwidth or shape commands on the class.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable dbl action in a class:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# policy-map policy1

Switch(config-pmap)# class class1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# dbl

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# exit

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1

Switch(config-if)# service-policy output policy1

Switch(config-if)# end

Related Commands

Command

Description

bandwidth

Creates a signaling class structure that can be referred to by its name.

class

Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name you specify and to enter class-map configuration mode.

policy-map

Creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

service-policy (policy-map class)

Creates a service policy that is a quality of service (QoS) policy within a policy map.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

debug adjacency

To display information about the adjacency debugging, use the debug adjacency command. To disable debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug adjacency [ipc]

no debug adjacency

Syntax Description

ipc

(Optional) Displays the IPC entries in the adjacency database.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the information in the adjacency database:

Switch# debug adjacency

4d02h: ADJ: add 172.20.52.36 (GigabitEthernet1/1) via ARP will expire: 04:00:00

4d02h: ADJ: add 172.20.52.36 (GigabitEthernet1/1) via ARP will expire: 04:00:00

4d02h: ADJ: add 172.20.52.36 (GigabitEthernet1/1) via ARP will expire: 04:00:00

4d02h: ADJ: add 172.20.52.36 (GigabitEthernet1/1) via ARP will expire: 04:00:00

4d02h: ADJ: add 172.20.52.36 (GigabitEthernet1/1) via ARP will expire: 04:00:00

4d02h: ADJ: add 172.20.52.36 (GigabitEthernet1/1) via ARP will expire: 04:00:00

4d02h: ADJ: add 172.20.52.36 (GigabitEthernet1/1) via ARP will expire: 04:00:00

4d02h: ADJ: add 172.20.52.36 (GigabitEthernet1/1) via ARP will expire: 04:00:00

<... output truncated...>

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug adjacency (same as no debug adjacency)

Disables debugging output.

debug backup

To debug the backup events, use the debug backup command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug backup

no debug backup

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to debug the backup events:

Switch# debug backup

Backup events debugging is on

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug backup (same as no debug backup)

Disables debugging output.

debug condition interface

To limit the debugging output of interface-related activities, use the debug condition interface command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug condition interface {fastethernet mod/port | GigabitEthernet mod/port |

null interface_num | port-channel interface-num | vlan vlan_id}

no debug condition interface {fastethernet mod/port | GigabitEthernet mod/port | null interface_num | port-channel interface-num | vlan vlan_id}

Syntax Description

fastethernet

Limits the debugging to Fast Ethernet interfaces.

mod/port

Number of the module and port.

GigabitEthernet

Limits the debugging to Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

null interface-num

Limits the debugging to null interfaces; the valid value is 0.

port-channel interface-num

Limits the debugging to port-channel interfaces; valid values are from 1 to 64.

vlan vlan_id

Specifies the VLAN interface number; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended VLAN addresses added.

Examples

The following example shows how to limit the debugging output to VLAN interface 1:

Switch# debug condition interface vlan 1

Condition 2 set

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

debug interface

Abbreviates the entry of the debug condition interface command.

undebug condition interface (same as no debug condition interface)

Disables interface related activities.

debug condition standby

To limit the debugging output for the standby state changes, use the debug condition standby command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug condition standby {fastethernet mod/port | GigabitEthernet mod/port |

port-channel interface-num | vlan vlan_id group-number}

no debug condition standby {fastethernet mod/port | GigabitEthernet mod/port |

port-channel interface-num | vlan vlan_id group-number}

Syntax Description

fastethernet

Limits the debugging to Fast Ethernet interfaces.

mod/port

Number of the module and port.

GigabitEthernet

Limits the debugging to Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

port-channel interface_num

Limits the debugging output to port-channel interfaces; valid values are from 1 to 64.

vlan vlan_id

Limits the debugging of a condition on a VLAN interface; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

group-number

VLAN group number; valid values are from 0 to 255.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended VLAN addresses added.

Usage Guidelines

If you attempt to remove the only condition set, you will be prompted with a message asking if you want to abort the removal operation. You can enter n to abort the removal or y to proceed with the removal. If you remove the only condition set, an excessive number of debugging messages might occur.

Examples

The following example shows how to limit the debugging output to group 0 in VLAN 1:

Switch# debug condition standby vlan 1 0

Condition 3 set

Switch#

The following example shows the display if you try to turn off the last standby debug condition:

Switch# no debug condition standby vlan 1 0

This condition is the last standby condition set.

Removing all conditions may cause a flood of debugging

messages to result, unless specific debugging flags

are first removed.

Proceed with removal? [yes/no]: n

% Operation aborted

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug condition standby (same as no debug condition standby)

Disables debugging output.

debug condition vlan

To limit the VLAN debugging output for a specific VLAN, use the debug condition vlan command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug condition vlan {vlan_id}

no debug condition vlan {vlan_id}

Syntax Description

vlan_id

Number of the VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 4096.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended VLAN addresses added.

Usage Guidelines

If you attempt to remove the only VLAN condition set, you will be prompted with a message asking if you want to abort the removal operation. You can enter n to abort the removal or y to proceed with the removal. If you remove the only condition set, it could result in the display of an excessive number of messages.

Examples

The following example shows how to limit the debugging output to VLAN 1:

Switch# debug condition vlan 1

Condition 4 set

Switch#

The following example shows the message that is displayed when you attempt to disable the last VLAN debug condition:

Switch# no debug condition vlan 1

This condition is the last vlan condition set.

Removing all conditions may cause a flood of debugging

messages to result, unless specific debugging flags

are first removed.

Proceed with removal? [yes/no]: n

% Operation aborted

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug condition vlan (same as no debug condition vlan)

Disables debugging output.

debug device-sensor

To enable debugging for Device Sensor, use the debug device-sensor command in privileged EXEC mode.

debug device-sensor errors events

Syntax Description

errors

Displays Device Sensor error messages.

events

Displays messages for events such as protocol packet arrivals, identity updates, and release events sent to the session manager.

Command Default

There are no defaults for this command.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.4.0SG and IOS 15.1(2)SG)

Command introduced on the Catalyst 4500 Series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use the debug device-sensor command in conjunction with the debug authentication all command to troubleshoot scenarios where device sensor cache entries are not being created for the connected devices

Examples

The following is sample output from the debug device-sensor events command. The debug output shows how Cisco Discovery Protocol packets and TLVs are received from the device connected to the GigabitEthernet 2/1 interface:

Switch# debug device-sensor events

Switch#

*Nov 30 23:58:45.811: DSensor: Received cdp packet from GigabitEthernet2/1:00d0.2bdf.08a5

*Nov 30 23:58:45.811: DSensor: SM returned no or invalid session label for GigabitEthernet2/1:00d0.2bdf.08a5

*Nov 30 23:58:45.811: DSensor: Updating SM with identity attribute list

cdp-tlv 0 00 01 00 0B 4A 41 45 30 37 34 31 31 50 53 32

cdp-tlv 0 00 03 00 03 32 2F 38

cdp-tlv 0 00 04 00 04 00 00 00 0A

cdp-tlv 0 00 05 00 68 57 53 2D 43 32 39 34 38 20 53 6F 66 74 77 61 72 65 2C 20 56 65 72 73 69 6F 6E 20 4D 63 70 53 57 3A 20 36 2E 34 28 35 2E

30 29 20 4E 6D 70 53 57 3A 20 36 2E 34 28 35 29 0A 43 6F 70 79 72 69 67 68 74 20 28 63 29 20 31 39 39 35 2D 32 30 30 33 20 62 79 20 43 69 73 63 6F 20 53 79 73

74 65 6D 73 2C 20 49 6E 63 2E 0A

cdp-tlv 0 00 06 00 08 57 53 2D 43 32 39 34 38

cdp-tlv 0 00 09 00 00

cdp-tlv 0 00 0A 00 02 00 21

cdp-tlv 0 00 0B 00 01 01

cdp-tlv 0 00 12 00 01 00

cdp-tlv 0 00 13 00 01 00

cdp-tlv 0 00 14 00 00

cdp-tlv 0 00 15 00 0A 06 08 2B 06 01 04 01 09 05 2A

cdp-tlv 0 00 16 00 16 00 00 00 02 01 01 CC 00 04 00 00 00 0001 01 CC 00 04 01 01 01 01

cdp-tlv 0 00 17 00 01 00

swidb 0 604702240 (0x240B0620)

clid-mac-addr 0 00 D0 2B DF 08 A5

*Nov 30 23:58:46.831: DSensor: Received cdp packet from GigabitEthernet2/1:00d0.2bdf.08a5exi

Switch#

*Nov 30 23:58:51.171: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console

Related Commands

Command

Description

debug authentication all

Displays all debugging information abou Authentication Manager and all features.

device-sensor accounting

Adds the Device Sensor protocol data to the accounting records and generates additional accounting events when new sensor data is detected.

debug dot1x

To enable the debugging for the 802.1X feature, use the debug dot1x command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug dot1x {all | errors | events | packets | registry | state-machine}

no debug dot1x {all | errors | events | packets | registry | state-machine}

Syntax Description

all

Enables the debugging of all conditions.

errors

Enables the debugging of print statements guarded by the dot1x error flag.

events

Enables the debugging of print statements guarded by the dot1x events flag.

packets

All incoming dot1x packets are printed with packet and interface information.

registry

Enables the debugging of print statements guarded by the dot1x registry flag.

state-machine

Enables the debugging of print statements guarded by the dot1x registry flag.

Command Default

Debugging is disabled.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the 802.1X debugging for all conditions:

Switch# debug dot1x all

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

undebug dot1x (same as no debug dot1x)

Disables debugging output.

debug etherchnl

To debug EtherChannel, use the debug etherchnl command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug etherchnl [all | detail | error | event | idb | linecard]

no debug etherchnl

Syntax Description

all

(Optional) Displays all EtherChannel debug messages.

detail

(Optional) Displays the detailed EtherChannel debug messages.

error

(Optional) Displays the EtherChannel error messages.

event

(Optional) Debugs the major EtherChannel event messages.

idb

(Optional) Debugs the PAgP IDB messages.

linecard

(Optional) Debugs the SCP messages to the module.

Command Default

The default settings are as follows:

- Debug is disabled.

- All messages are displayed.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If you do not specify a keyword, all debug messages are displayed.

Examples

The following example shows how to display all the EtherChannel debug messages:

Switch# debug etherchnl

PAgP Shim/FEC debugging is on

22:46:30:FEC:returning agport Po15 for port (Fa2/1)

22:46:31:FEC:returning agport Po15 for port (Fa4/14)

22:46:33:FEC:comparing GC values of Fa2/25 Fa2/15 flag = 1 1

22:46:33:FEC:port_attrib:Fa2/25 Fa2/15 same

22:46:33:FEC:EC - attrib incompatable for Fa2/25; duplex of Fa2/25 is half, Fa2/15 is full

22:46:33:FEC:pagp_switch_choose_unique:Fa2/25, port Fa2/15 in agport Po3 is incompatable

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the EtherChannel IDB debug messages:

Switch# debug etherchnl idb

Agport idb related debugging is on

Switch#

The following example shows how to disable the debugging:

Switch# no debug etherchnl

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug etherchnl (same as no debug etherchnl)

Disables debugging output.

debug fabric auto

To troubleshoot your fabric domain configuration, use the debug fabric auto command.

debug fabric auto {trace | level {error | verbose}}

Syntax Description

trace

Enables tracing for the commands auto-generated when the fabric-auto command is executed.

level error

Displays the errors encountered during fabric overlay provisioning.

level verbose

Displays the maximum number of messages encountered during fabric overlay provisioning.

Command Default

None.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

3.9.01E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500-E series switch using a Supervisor Engines 8-E and 8L-E.

Usage Guidelines

Use these debug commands to troubleshoot your fabric domain configuration, and trace the commands auto-generated by the fabric auto command, and display the errors encountered.

The no debug fabric auto level verbose command disables the display of all the messages encountered during fabric provisioning.

debug interface

To abbreviate the entry of the debug condition interface command, use the debug interface command. To disable debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug interface {FastEthernet mod/port | GigabitEthernet mod/port | null |

port-channel interface-num | vlan vlan_id}

no debug interface {FastEthernet mod/port | GigabitEthernet mod/port | null |

port-channel interface-num | vlan vlan_id}

Syntax Description

FastEthernet

Limits the debugging to Fast Ethernet interfaces.

mod/port

Number of the module and port.

GigabitEthernet

Limits the debugging to Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

null

Limits the debugging to null interfaces; the only valid value is 0.

port-channel interface-num

Limits the debugging to port-channel interfaces; valid values are from 1 to 64.

vlan vlan_id

Specifies the VLAN interface number; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended VLAN addresses added.

Examples

The following example shows how to limit the debugging to interface VLAN 1:

Switch# debug interface vlan 1

Condition 1 set

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

debug condition interface

Limits the debugging output of interface-related activities.

undebug etherchnl (same as no debug etherchnl)

Disables debugging output.

debug ipc

To debug the IPC activity, use the debug ipc command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug ipc {all | errors | events | headers | packets | ports | seats}

no debug ipc {all | errors | events | headers | packets | ports | seats}

Syntax Description

all

Enables all IPC debugging.

errors

Enables the IPC error debugging.

events

Enables the IPC event debugging.

headers

Enables the IPC header debugging.

packets

Enables the IPC packet debugging.

ports

Enables the debugging of the creation and deletion of ports.

seats

Enables the debugging of the creation and deletion of nodes.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the debugging of the IPC events:

Switch# debug ipc events

Special Events debugging is on

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug ipc (same as no debug ipc)

Disables debugging output.

debug ip dhcp snooping event

To debug the DHCP snooping events, use the debug ip dhcp snooping event command. To disable debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug ip dhcp snooping event

no debug ip dhcp snooping event

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Debugging of snooping event is disabled.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the debugging for the DHCP snooping events:

Switch# debug ip dhcp snooping event

Switch#

The following example shows how to disable the debugging for the DHCP snooping events:

Switch# no debug ip dhcp snooping event

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

debug ip dhcp snooping packet

Debugs the DHCP snooping messages.

debug ip dhcp snooping packet

To debug the DHCP snooping messages, use the debug ip dhcp snooping packet command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug ip dhcp snooping packet

no debug ip dhcp snooping packet

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Debugging of snooping packet is disabled.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the debugging for the DHCP snooping packets:

Switch# debug ip dhcp snooping packet

Switch#

The following example shows how to disable the debugging for the DHCP snooping packets:

Switch# no debug ip dhcp snooping packet

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

debug ip dhcp snooping event

Debugs the DHCP snooping events.

debug ip verify source packet

To debug the IP source guard messages, use the debug ip verify source packet command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug ip verify source packet

no debug ip verify source packet

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Debugging of snooping security packets is disabled.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable debugging for the IP source guard:

Switch# debug ip verify source packet

Switch#

The following example shows how to disable debugging for the IP source guard:

Switch# no debug ip verify source packet

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping

Globally enables DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping limit rate

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries.

debug lacp

To debug the LACP activity, use the debug lacp command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug lacp [all | event | fsm | misc | packet]

no debug lacp

Syntax Description

all

(Optional) Enables all LACP debugging.

event

(Optional) Enables the debugging of the LACP events.

fsm

(Optional) Enables the debugging of the LACP finite state machine.

misc

(Optional) Enables the miscellaneous LACP debugging.

packet

(Optional) Enables the LACP packet debugging.

Command Default

Debugging of LACP activity is disabled.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is supported only by the supervisor engine and can be entered only from the Catalyst 4500 series switch console.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the LACP miscellaneous debugging:

Switch# debug lacp

Port Aggregation Protocol Miscellaneous debugging is on

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug pagp (same as no debug pagp)

Disables debugging output.

debug monitor

To display the monitoring activity, use the debug monitor command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug monitor {all | errors | idb-update | list | notifications | platform | requests}

no debug monitor {all | errors | idb-update | list | notifications | platform | requests}

Syntax Description

all

Displays all the SPAN debugging messages.

errors

Displays the SPAN error details.

idb-update

Displays the SPAN IDB update traces.

list

Displays the SPAN list tracing and the VLAN list tracing.

notifications

Displays the SPAN notifications.

platform

Displays the SPAN platform tracing.

requests

Displays the SPAN requests.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to debug the monitoring errors:

Switch# debug monitor errors

SPAN error detail debugging is on

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug monitor (same as no debug monitor)

Disables debugging output.

debug nmsp

To the enable debugging of the Network Mobility Services Protocol (NMSP) on the switch, use the debug nmsp command. This command is available only when your switch is running the cryptographic (encrypted) software image. Use the no form of this command to disable debugging.

debug nmsp {all | connection | error | event | packet | rx | tx}

no debug nmsp

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Debugging is disabled.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The undebug nmsp command is the same as the no debug nmsp command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show debugging

Displays information about the types of debugging that are enabled.

show nmsp

Displays the NMSP information.

debug nvram

To debug the NVRAM activity, use the debug nvram command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug nvram

no debug nvram

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to debug NVRAM:

Switch# debug nvram

NVRAM behavior debugging is on

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug nvram (same as no debug nvram)

Disables debugging output.

debug pagp

To debug the PAgP activity, use the debug pagp command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug pagp [all | dual-active | event | fsm | misc | packet]

no debug pagp

Syntax Description

all

(Optional) Enables all PAgP debugging.

dual-active

(Optional) Enables the PAgP dual-active debugging.

event

(Optional) Enables the debugging of the PAgP events.

fsm

(Optional) Enables the debugging of the PAgP finite state machine.

misc

(Optional) Enables the miscellaneous PAgP debugging.

packet

(Optional) Enables the PAgP packet debugging.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is supported only on the supervisor engine and can be entered only from the Catalyst 4500 series switch console.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the PAgP miscellaneous debugging:

Switch# debug pagp misc

Port Aggregation Protocol Miscellaneous debugging is on

Switch#

*Sep 30 10:13:03: SP: PAgP: pagp_h(Fa5/6) expired

*Sep 30 10:13:03: SP: PAgP: 135 bytes out Fa5/6

*Sep 30 10:13:03: SP: PAgP: Fa5/6 Transmitting information packet

*Sep 30 10:13:03: SP: PAgP: timer pagp_h(Fa5/6) started with interval 30000

<... output truncated...>

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug pagp (same as no debug pagp)

Disables debugging output.

debug platform packet protocol lacp

To debug the LACP protocol packets, use the debug platform packet protocol lacp command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug platform packet protocol lacp [receive | transmit | vlan]

no debug platform packet protocol lacp [receive | transmit | vlan]

Syntax Description

receive

(Optional) Enables the platform packet reception debugging functions.

transmit

(Optional) Enables the platform packet transmission debugging functions.

vlan

(Optional) Enables the platform packet VLAN debugging functions.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable all PM debugging:

Switch# debug platform packet protocol lacp

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug platform packet protocol lacp (same as no debug platform packet protocol lacp)

Disables debugging output.

debug platform packet protocol pagp

To debug the PAgP protocol packets, use the debug platform packet protocol pagp command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug platform packet protocol pagp [receive | transmit | vlan]

no debug platform packet protocol pagp [receive | transmit | vlan]

Syntax Description

receive

(Optional) Enables the platform packet reception debugging functions.

transmit

(Optional) Enables the platform packet transmission debugging functions.

vlan

(Optional) Enables the platform packet VLAN debugging functions.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable all PM debugging:

Switch# debug platform packet protocol pagp

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug platform packet protocol pagp (same as no debug platform packet protocol pagp)

Disables debugging output.

debug pm

To debug the port manager (PM) activity, use the debug pm command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug pm {all | card | cookies | etherchnl | messages | port | registry | scp | sm | span | split |

vlan | vp}

no debug pm {all | card | cookies | etherchnl | messages | port | registry | scp | sm | span | split |

vlan | vp}

Syntax Description

all

Displays all PM debugging messages.

card

Debugs the module-related events.

cookies

Enables the internal PM cookie validation.

etherchnl

Debugs the EtherChannel-related events.

messages

Debugs the PM messages.

port

Debugs the port-related events.

registry

Debugs the PM registry invocations.

scp

Debugs the SCP module messaging.

sm

Debugs the state machine-related events.

span

Debugs the spanning-tree-related events.

split

Debugs the split-processor.

vlan

Debugs the VLAN-related events.

vp

Debugs the virtual port-related events.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable all PM debugging:

Switch# debug pm all

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug pm (same as no debug pm)

Disables debugging output.

debug port-security

To debug port security, use the debug port-security command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug port-security

no debug port-security

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable all PM debugging:

Switch# debug port-security

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

switchport port-security

Enables port security on an interface.

debug pppoe intermediate-agent

To turn on debugging of the PPPoE Intermediate Agent feature, use the debug pppoe intermediate-agent command. To turn off debugging, use the no form of this command.

debug pppoe intermediate-agent {event | packet | all}

no debug pppoe intermediate-agent {event | packet | all}

Syntax Description

event

Activates event debugging

packet

Activates packet debugging

all

Activates both event and packet debugging

Command Default

All debugging is turned off.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to turn on packet debugging:

Switch# debug pppoe intermediate-agent packet

PPPOE IA Packet debugging is on

*Sep 2 06:12:56.133: PPPOE_IA: Process new PPPoE packet, Message type: PADI, input interface: Gi3/7, vlan : 2 MAC da: ffff.ffff.ffff, MAC sa: aabb.cc00.0000

*Sep 2 06:12:56.137: PPPOE_IA: received new PPPOE packet from inputinterface (GigabitEthernet3/4)

*Sep 2 06:12:56.137: PPPOE_IA: received new PPPOE packet from inputinterface (GigabitEthernet3/8)

*Sep 2 06:12:56.137: PPPOE_IA: Process new PPPoE packet, Message type: PADO, input interface: Gi3/4, vlan : 2 MAC da: aabb.cc00.0000, MAC sa: 001d.e64c.6512

*Sep 2 06:12:56.137: PPPOE_IA: Process new PPPoE packet, Message type: PADO, input interface: Gi3/8, vlan : 2 MAC da: aabb.cc00.0000, MAC sa: aabb.cc80.0000

*Sep 2 06:12:56.137: PPPOE_IA: received new PPPOE packet from inputinterface (GigabitEthernet3/7)

*Sep 2 06:12:56.137: PPPOE_IA: Process new PPPoE packet, Message type: PADR, input interface: Gi3/7, vlan : 2 MAC da: 001d.e64c.6512, MAC sa: aabb.cc00.0000

*Sep 2 06:12:56.145: PPPOE_IA: received new PPPOE packet from inputinterface (GigabitEthernet3/4)

*Sep 2 06:12:56.145: PPPOE_IA: Process new PPPoE packet, Message type: PADS, input interface: Gi3/4, vlan : 2 MAC da: aabb.cc00.0000, MAC sa: 001d.e64c.6512

The following example shows how to turn off packet debugging:

Switch# debug pppoe intermediate-agent packet

PPPOE IA Packet debugging is off

Related Commands

Command

Description

pppoe intermediate-agent (interface)

Enables the PPPoE Intermediate Agent feature on an interface.

pppoe intermediate-agent limit rate

Limits the rate of the PPPoE Discovery packets arriving on an interface.

pppoe intermediate-agent trust

Sets the trust configuration of an interface.

debug redundancy

To debug supervisor engine redundancy, use the debug redundancy command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug redundancy {errors | fsm | kpa | msg | progression | status | timer}

no debug redundancy

Syntax Description

errors

Enables the redundancy facility for error debugging.

fsm

Enables the redundancy facility for FSM event debugging.

kpa

Enables the redundancy facility for keepalive debugging.

msg

Enables the redundancy facility for messaging event debugging.

progression

Enables the redundancy facility for progression event debugging.

status

Enables the redundancy facility for status event debugging.

timer

Enables the redundancy facility for timer event debugging.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch (Catalyst 4507R only).

Examples

The following example shows how to debug the redundancy facility timer event debugging:

Switch# debug redundancy timer

Redundancy timer debugging is on

Switch#

debug spanning-tree

To debug the spanning tree activities, use the debug spanning-tree command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug spanning-tree {all | backbonefast | bpdu | bpdu-opt | etherchannel | config | events | exceptions | general | ha | mstp | pvst+ | root | snmp | switch | synchronization | uplinkfast}

no debug spanning-tree {all | bpdu | bpdu-opt | etherchannel | config | events | exceptions | general | mst | pvst+ | root | snmp}

Syntax Description

all

Displays all the spanning tree debugging messages.

backbonefast

Debugs the BackboneFast events.

bpdu

Debugs the spanningtree BPDU.

bpdu-opt

Debugs the optimized BPDU handling.

etherchannel

Debugs the spanning tree EtherChannel support.

config

Debugs the spanning tree configuration changes.

events

Debugs the TCAM events.

exceptions

Debugs the spanning tree exceptions.

general

Debugs the general spanning tree activity.

ha

Debugs the HA events.

mstp

Debugs the multiple spanning tree events.

pvst+

Debugs the PVST+ events.

root

Debugs the spanning tree root events.

snmp

Debugs the spanning tree SNMP events.

switch

Debugs the switch debug events.

synchronization

Debugs the STP state synchronization events.

uplinkfast

Debugs the UplinkFast events.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to debug the spanning-tree PVST+:

Switch# debug spanning-tree pvst+

Spanning Tree PVST+ debugging is on

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug spanning-tree (same as no debug spanning-tree)

Disables debugging output.

debug spanning-tree backbonefast

To enable debugging of the spanning tree BackboneFast events, use the debug spanning-tree backbonefast command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug spanning-tree backbonefast [detail | exceptions]

no debug spanning-tree backbonefast

Syntax Description

detail

(Optional) Displays the detailed BackboneFast debugging messages.

exceptions

(Optional) Enables the debugging of spanning tree BackboneFast exceptions.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is supported only on the supervisor engine and enterable only from the switch console.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the debugging and to display the detailed spanning tree BackboneFast debugging information:

Switch# debug spanning-tree backbonefast detail

Spanning Tree backbonefast detail debugging is on

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug spanning-tree backbonefast (same as no debug spanning-tree backbonefast)

Disables debugging output.

debug spanning-tree switch

To enable the switch shim debugging, use the debug spanning-tree switch command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug spanning-tree switch {all | errors | general | pm | rx {decode | errors | interrupt |

process} | state | tx [decode]}

no debug spanning-tree switch {all | errors | general | pm | rx {decode | errors | interrupt | process} | state | tx [decode]}

Syntax Description

all

Displays all the spanning-tree switch shim debugging messages.

errors

Enables the debugging of switch shim errors or exceptions.

general

Enables the debugging of general events.

pm

Enables the debugging of port manager events.

rx

Displays the received BPDU-handling debugging messages.

decode

Enables the debugging of the decode-received packets of the spanning-tree switch shim.

errors

Enables the debugging of the receive errors of the spanning-tree switch shim.

interrupt

Enables the shim ISR receive BPDU debugging on the spanning-tree switch.

process

Enables the process receive BPDU debugging on the spanning-tree switch.

state

Enables the debugging of the state changes on the spanning-tree port.

tx

Enables the transmit BPDU debugging on the spanning-tree switch shim.

decode

(Optional) Enables the decode-transmitted packets debugging on the spanning-tree switch shim.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is supported only on the supervisor engine and enterable only from the switch console.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the transmit BPDU debugging on the spanning tree switch shim:

Switch# debug spanning-tree switch tx

Spanning Tree Switch Shim transmit bpdu debugging is on

*Sep 30 08:47:33: SP: STP SW: TX: bpdu of type ieee-st size 92 on FastEthernet5/9 303

*Sep 30 08:47:33: SP: STP SW: TX: bpdu of type ieee-st size 92 on FastEthernet5/9 304

*Sep 30 08:47:33: SP: STP SW: TX: bpdu of type ieee-st size 92 on FastEthernet5/9 305

*Sep 30 08:47:33: SP: STP SW: TX: bpdu of type ieee-st size 92 on FastEthernet5/9 349

*Sep 30 08:47:33: SP: STP SW: TX: bpdu of type ieee-st size 92 on FastEthernet5/9 350

*Sep 30 08:47:33: SP: STP SW: TX: bpdu of type ieee-st size 92 on FastEthernet5/9 351

*Sep 30 08:47:33: SP: STP SW: TX: bpdu of type ieee-st size 92 on FastEthernet5/9 801

<... output truncated...>

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug spanning-tree switch (same as no debug spanning-tree switch)

Disables debugging output.

debug spanning-tree uplinkfast

To enable the debugging of the spanning-tree UplinkFast events, use the debug spanning-tree uplinkfast command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug spanning-tree uplinkfast [exceptions]

no debug spanning-tree uplinkfast

Syntax Description

exceptions

(Optional) Enables the debugging of the spanning tree UplinkFast exceptions.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is supported only on the supervisor engine and enterable only from the switch console.

Examples

The following example shows how to debug the spanning tree UplinkFast exceptions:

Switch# debug spanning-tree uplinkfast exceptions

Spanning Tree uplinkfast exceptions debugging is on

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug spanning-tree uplinkfast (same as no debug spanning-tree uplinkfast)

Disables debugging output.

debug sw-vlan

To debug the VLAN manager activities, use the debug sw-vlan command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug sw-vlan {badpmcookies | events | management | packets | registries}

no debug sw-vlan {badpmcookies | events | management | packets | registries}

Syntax Description

badpmcookies

Displays the VLAN manager incidents of bad port manager cookies.

events

Debugs the VLAN manager events.

management

Debugs the VLAN manager management of internal VLANs.

packets

Debugs the packet handling and encapsulation processes.

registries

Debugs the VLAN manager registries.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to debug the software VLAN events:

Switch# debug sw-vlan events

vlan manager events debugging is on

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug sw-vlan (same as no debug sw-vlan)

Disables debugging output.

debug sw-vlan ifs

To enable the VLAN manager Cisco IOS file system (IFS) error tests, use the debug sw-vlan ifs command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug sw-vlan ifs {open {read | write} | read {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} | write}

no debug sw-vlan ifs {open {read | write} | read {1 | 2 | 3 | 4} | write}

Syntax Description

open

Enables the VLAN manager IFS debugging of errors in an IFS file-open operation.

read

Debugs the errors that occurred when the IFS VLAN configuration file was open for reading.

write

Debugs the errors that occurred when the IFS VLAN configuration file was open for writing.

{1 | 2 | 3 | 4}

Determines the file-read operation. See the “Usage Guidelines” section for information about operation levels.

write

Debugs the errors that occurred during an IFS file-write operation.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The following are four types of file read operations:

- Operation 1 —Reads the file header, which contains the header verification word and the file version number.

- Operation 2 —Reads the main body of the file, which contains most of the domain and VLAN information.

- Operation 3 —Reads TLV descriptor structures.

- Operation 4 —Reads TLV data.

Examples

The following example shows how to debug the TLV data errors during a file-read operation:

Switch# debug sw-vlan ifs read 4

vlan manager ifs read # 4 errors debugging is on

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug sw-vlan ifs (same as no debug sw-vlan ifs)

Disables debugging output.

debug sw-vlan notification

To enable the debugging of the messages that trace the activation and deactivation of the ISL VLAN IDs, use the debug sw-vlan notification command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug sw-vlan notification {accfwdchange | allowedvlancfgchange | fwdchange | linkchange | modechange | pruningcfgchange | statechange}

no debug sw-vlan notification {accfwdchange | allowedvlancfgchange | fwdchange | linkchange | modechange | pruningcfgchange | statechange}

Syntax Description

accfwdchange

Enables the VLAN manager notification of aggregated access interface STP forward changes.

allowedvlancfgchange

Enables the VLAN manager notification of changes to allowed VLAN configuration.

fwdchange

Enables the VLAN manager notification of STP forwarding changes.

linkchange

Enables the VLAN manager notification of interface link state changes.

modechange

Enables the VLAN manager notification of interface mode changes.

pruningcfgchange

Enables the VLAN manager notification of changes to pruning configuration.

statechange

Enables the VLAN manager notification of interface state changes.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to debug the software VLAN interface mode change notifications:

Switch# debug sw-vlan notification modechange

vlan manager port mode change notification debugging is on

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug sw-vlan notification (same as no debug sw-vlan notification)

Disables debugging output.

debug sw-vlan vtp

To enable the debugging of messages to be generated by the VTP protocol code, use the debug sw-vlan vtp command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug sw-vlan vtp {events | packets | pruning [packets | xmit] | xmit}

no debug sw-vlan vtp {events | packets | pruning [packets | xmit] | xmit}

Syntax Description

events

Displays the general-purpose logic flow and detailed VTP debugging messages generated by the VTP_LOG_RUNTIME macro in the VTP code.

packets

Displays the contents of all incoming VTP packets that have been passed into the VTP code from the Cisco IOS VTP platform-dependent layer, except for pruning packets.

pruning

Enables the debugging message to be generated by the pruning segment of the VTP protocol code.

packets

(Optional) Displays the contents of all incoming VTP pruning packets that have been passed into the VTP code from the Cisco IOS VTP platform-dependent layer.

xmit

(Optional) Displays the contents of all outgoing VTP packets that the VTP code will request that the Cisco IOS VTP platform-dependent layer to send.

xmit

Displays the contents of all outgoing VTP packets that the VTP code will request that the Cisco IOS VTP platform-dependent layer to send; does not include pruning packets.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If you do not enter any more parameters after entering pruning, the VTP pruning debugging messages are displayed.

Examples

The following example shows how to debug the software VLAN outgoing VTP packets:

Switch# debug sw-vlan vtp xmit

vtp xmit debugging is on

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug sw-vlan vtp (same as no debug sw-vlan vtp)

Disables debugging output.

debug udld

To enable the debugging of UDLD activity, use the debug udld command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug udld {events | packets | registries}

no debug udld {events | packets | registries}

Syntax Description

events

Enables the debugging of UDLD process events as they occur.

packets

Enables the debugging of the UDLD process as it receives packets from the packet queue and attempts to transmit packets at the request of the UDLD protocol code.

registries

Enables the debugging of the UDLD process as it processes registry upcalls from the UDLD process-dependent module and other feature modules.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is supportedonly on the supervisor engine and enterable only from the switch console.

Examples

The following example shows how to debug the UDLD events:

Switch# debug udld events

UDLD events debugging is on

Switch#

The following example shows how to debug the UDLD packets:

Switch# debug udld packets

UDLD packets debugging is on

Switch#

The following example shows how to debug the UDLD registry events:

Switch# debug udld registries

UDLD registries debugging is on

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

undebug udld (same as no debug udld)

Disables debugging output.

debug vqpc

To debug the VLAN Query Protocol (VQP), use the debug vqpc command. To disable the debugging output, use the no form of this command.

debug vqpc [all | cli | events | learn | packet]

no debug vqpc [all | cli | events | learn | packet]

Syntax Description

all

(Optional) Debugs all the VQP events.

cli

(Optional) Debugs the VQP command-line interface.

events

(Optional) Debugs the VQP events.

learn

(Optional) Debugs the VQP address learning.

packet

(Optional) Debugs the VQP packets.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable all VQP debugging:

Switch# debug vqpc all

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

vmps reconfirm (privileged EXEC)

Immediately sends VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) queries to reconfirm all the dynamic VLAN assignments with the VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS).

define interface-range

To create a macro of interfaces, use the define interface-range command.

define interface-range macro-name interface-range

Syntax Description

macro-name

Name of the interface range macro; up to 32 characters.

interface-range

List of valid ranges when specifying interfaces; see the “Usage Guidelines” section.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The macro name is a character string of up to 32 characters.

A macro can contain up to five ranges. An interface range cannot span modules.

When entering the interface-range, use these formats:

- interface-type { mod }/{ first-interface } - { last-interface }

- interface-type { mod }/{ first-interface } - { last-interface }

The valid values for interface-type are as follows:

- FastEthernet

- GigabitEthernet

- Vlan vlan_id

Examples

The following example shows how to create a multiple-interface macro:

Switch(config)# define interface-range macro1 gigabitethernet 4/1-6, fastethernet 2/1-5

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

interface range

Runs a command on multiple ports at the same time.

deny

To deny an ARP packet based on matches against the DHCP bindings, use the deny command. To remove the specified ACEs from the access list, use the no form of this command.

deny {[request] ip {any | host sender-ip | sender-ip sender-ip-mask} mac {any | host sender-mac | sender-mac sender-mac-mask} | response ip {any | host sender-ip | sender-ip sender-ip-mask} [{any | host target-ip | target-ip target-ip-mask}] mac {any | host sender-mac | sender-mac sender-mac-mask} [{any | host target-mac | target-mac target-mac-mask}]} [log]

no deny {[request] ip {any | host sender-ip | sender-ip sender-ip-mask} mac {any | host sender-mac | sender-mac sender-mac-mask} | response ip {any | host sender-ip | sender-ip sender-ip-mask} [{any | host target-ip | target-ip target-ip-mask}] mac {any | host sender-mac | sender-mac sender-mac-mask} [{any | host target-mac | target-mac target-mac-mask}]} [log]

Syntax Description

request

(Optional) Requests a match for the ARP request. When request is not specified, matching is performed against all ARP packets.

ip

Specifies the sender IP address.

any

Specifies that any IP or MAC address will be accepted.

host sender-ip

Specifies that only a specific sender IP address will be accepted.

sender-ip sender-ip-mask

Specifies that a specific range of sender IP addresses will be accepted.

mac

Specifies the sender MAC address.

host sender-mac

Specifies that only a specific sender MAC address will be accepted.

sender-mac sender-mac-mask

Specifies that a specific range of sender MAC addresses will be accepted.

response

Specifies a match for the ARP responses.

ip

Specifies the IP address values for the ARP responses.

host target-ip

(Optional) Specifies that only a specific target IP address will be accepted.

target-ip target-ip-mask

(Optional) Specifies that a specific range of target IP addresses will be accepted.

mac

Specifies the MAC address values for the ARP responses.

host target-mac

(Optional) Specifies that only a specific target MAC address will be accepted.

target-mac target-mac-mask

(Optional) Specifies that a specific range of target MAC addresses will be accepted.

log

(Optional) Logs a packet when it matches the access control entry (ACE).

Command Default

At the end of the ARP access list, there is an implicit deny ip any mac any command.

Command Modes

arp-nacl configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Deny clauses can be added to forward or drop ARP packets based on some matching criteria.

Examples

The following example shows a host with a MAC address of 0000.0000.abcd and an IP address of 1.1.1.1. The following example shows howto deny both requests and responses from this host:

Switch(config)# arp access-list static-hosts

Switch(config-arp-nacl)# deny ip host 1.1.1.1 mac host 0000.0000.abcd

Switch(config-arp-nacl)# end

Switch# show arp access-list

ARP access list static-hosts

deny ip host 1.1.1.1 mac host 0000.0000.abcd

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

arp access-list

Defines an ARP access list or adds clauses at the end of a predefined list.

ip arp inspection filter vlan

Permits ARPs from hosts that are configured for static IP when DAI is enabled and to define an ARP access list and applies it to a VLAN.

permit

Permits an ARP packet based on matches against the DHCP bindings.

destination (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is supported only on Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To specify a destination address in netflow-lite submode, use the destination command. To delete an exporter, use the no form of this command.

destination destination-address

no destination destination-address

Syntax Description

destination-address

Specifies a destination address of a NetFlow-lite collector.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

Usage Guidelines

One of the mandatory parameters for a minimally configured exporter along with the source Layer 3 interface and the UDP destination port of the collector.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify a destination address in netflow-lite submode:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# destination 5.5.5.6

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# source 5.5.5.5

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# transport udp 8188

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# ttl 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# cos 7

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# dscp 32

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# template data timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options sampler-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options interface-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# export-protocol netflow-v9 Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# exit

Switch(config)#

Display the exporter

Switch# show netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Netflow-lite Exporter exporter1:

Network Protocol Configuration:

Destination IP address: 5.5.5.6

Source IP Address: 5.5.5.5

VRF label:

DSCP: 0x20

TTL: 128

COS: 7

Transport Protocol Configuration:

Transport Protocol: UDP

Destination Port: 8188

Source Port: 61670

Export Protocol Configuration:

Export Protocol: netflow-v9

Template data timeout: 60

Options sampler-table timeout: 1800

Options interface-table timeout: 1800

Exporter Statistics:

Packets Exported: 0

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite exporter privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

cos (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a CoS value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

source (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a source Layer 3 interface of the NetFlow-lite collector.

transport udp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector.

ttl (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a ttl value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

dscp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a CoS value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

template data timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a template data timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

options timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies an options timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

export-protocol (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies the export protocol for the NetFlow-lite collector.

destination address

To configure the destination e-mail address or URL to which Call Home messages will be sent, use the destination address command.

destination address {email email-address | http url}

Syntax Description

email email-address

Specifies the destination e-mail address in 1 to 200 characters.

http url

Specifies the destination HTTP URL in 2 to 200 characters.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

cfg-call-home-profile

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

To enter profile call-home configuration submode, use the profile command in call-home configuration mode.

When entering the https:// destination URL for the secure server, you must also configure a trustpoint CA.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the destination to the e-mail address callhome@cisco.com:

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# profile cisco

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# destination address email callhome@cisco.com

Related Commands

Command

Description

destination message-size-limit bytes

Configures a maximum destination message size for the destination profile.

destination preferred-msg-format

Configures a preferred message format.

destination transport-method

Enables the message transport method.

profile

Enters profile call-home configuration submode

subscribe-to-alert-group all

Subscribes to all available alert groups.

subscribe-to-alert-group configuration

Subscribes this destination profile to the Configuration alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic

Subscribes this destination profile to the Diagnostic alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group environment

Subscribes this destination profile to the Environment alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group inventory

Subscribes this destination profile to the Inventory alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group syslog

Subscribes this destination profile to the Syslog alert group.

destination message-size-limit bytes

To configure a maximum destination message size for the destination profile, use the destination message-size-limit bytes command.

destination message-size-limit bytes

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

3145728 bytes

Command Modes

cfg-call-home-profile

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

To enter profile call-home configuration submode, use the profile command in call-home configuration mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the maximum message size for the destination profile as 3000000:

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# profile cisco

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# destination message-size-limit 3000000

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

destination address

Configures the destination e-mail address or URL to which Call Home messages will be sent.

destination preferred-msg-format

Configures a preferred message format.

destination transport-method

Enables the message transport method.

profile

Enters profile call-home configuration submode

subscribe-to-alert-group all

Subscribes to all available alert groups.

subscribe-to-alert-group configuration

Subscribes this destination profile to the Configuration alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic

Subscribes this destination profile to the Diagnostic alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group environment

Subscribes this destination profile to the Environment alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group inventory

Subscribes this destination profile to the Inventory alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group syslog

Subscribes this destination profile to the Syslog alert group.

destination preferred-msg-format

To configure a preferred message format, use the destination preferred-msg-format command.

destination preferred-msg-format {long-text | short-text | xml}

Syntax Description

long-text

Sends the message in long-text format.

short-text

Sends the message in short-text format.

xml

Sends the message in XML format.

Command Default

xml

Command Modes

cfg-call-home-profile

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

To enter profile call-home configuration submode, use the profile command in call-home configuration mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the preferred message format as long text:

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# profile cisco

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# destination preferred-msg-format long-text

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

destination address

Configures the destination e-mail address or URL to which Call Home messages will be sent.

destination message-size-limit bytes

Configures a maximum destination message size for the destination profile.

destination transport-method

Enables the message transport method.

profile

Enters profile call-home configuration submode

subscribe-to-alert-group all

Subscribes to all available alert groups.

subscribe-to-alert-group configuration

Subscribes this destination profile to the Configuration alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic

Subscribes this destination profile to the Diagnostic alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group environment

Subscribes this destination profile to the Environment alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group inventory

Subscribes this destination profile to the Inventory alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group syslog

Subscribes this destination profile to the Syslog alert group.

destination transport-method

To enable the message transport method, use the destination transport-method command.

destination transport-method {email | http}

Syntax Description

email

Enables e-mail as transport method.

http

Enables HTTP as transport method.

Command Default

e-mail

Command Modes

cfg-call-home-profile

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

To enter profile call-home configuration submode, use the profile command in call-home configuration mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the transport method to HTTP:

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# profile cisco

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# destination transport-method http

Related Commands

Command

Description

destination address

Configures the destination e-mail address or URL to which Call Home messages will be sent.

destination message-size-limit bytes

Configures a maximum destination message size for the destination profile.

destination preferred-msg-format

Configures a preferred message format.

profile

Enters profile call-home configuration submode

subscribe-to-alert-group all

Subscribes to all available alert groups.

subscribe-to-alert-group configuration

Subscribes this destination profile to the Configuration alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic

Subscribes this destination profile to the Diagnostic alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group environment

Subscribes this destination profile to the Environment alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group inventory

Subscribes this destination profile to the Inventory alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group syslog

Subscribes this destination profile to the Syslog alert group.

device-sensor filter-list

To create a CDP or Link Layer Discovery Protocol (LLPD) filter list that contains a list of Type-Length-Value (TLV) fields to be included or excluded in the Device Sensor output, use the device-sensor filter-list command in global configuration mode. To remove the filter list, use the no form of this command.

device-sensor filter-list cdp | lldp list list-name

no device-sensor filter-list cdp | lldp list list-name

Syntax Description

list

Contains a discovery protocol filter list.

list-name

Name of the filter list.

Command Default

Protocol TLV fields filter list is not available.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.4.0SG and IOS 15.1(2)SG)

Command introduced on the Catalyst 4500 Series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use the device-sensor filter-list command to configure the name of the protocol filter list and enter into discovery protocol sensor configuration mode. You can configure the list of TLVs in discovery protocol sensor configuration mode using the tlv {name tlv-name | number tlv-number} command. Use the name tlv-name keyword-argument pair to specify the name of the TLV. Enter ? to query the available TLV names or refer to the following tables.

CDP TLV Names

CDP TLV Name

Description

Global configuration mode

app

Enable application TLV

forward

Forward CDP packets to another interface

location

Enable location information

Interface configuration mode

app

Enable application TLV

location

Enable location information

server-location

Enable CDP location server on interface

LLDP TLVs

LLPP TLV Name

Description

Global configuration mode

4-wire-power-management

Cisco 4-wire power with MDI TLV

mac-phy-cfg

IEEE 802.3 MAC/PHY configuration status TLV

management-address

Management address TLV

port-description

Port description TLV

port-vlan

Port VLAN ID TLV

power-management

IEEE 802.3 DTE power with MDI TLV

system-capabilities

System capabilities TLV

system-description

System description TLV

system-name

System name TLV

Interface configuration mode

inventory-management

LLDP Media Endpoint Devices (MED) inventory management TLV

location

LLDP MED location TLV

network-policy

LLDP MED network policy TLV

Use the number tlv-name keyword-argument pair to specify the TLV number to be added to the TLV filter list.

Use the no tlv {name tlv-name | number tlv-number} command to remove individual TLVs from the TLV filter list.

Use the no device-sensor filter-list lldp list tlv-list-name command to remove the entire TLV list containing all of the TLVs.

The following example shows how to create an LLDP filter containing a list of TLVs:

Switch> enable

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# device-sensor filter-list lldp list lldp-list

Switch(config-sensor-lldplist)# tlv name mac-phy-config

Switch(config-sensor-lldplist)# tlv name system-name

Switch(config-sensor-lldplist)# end

Examples

The following example shows how to create an LLDP filter containing a list of TLVs:

Switch> enable

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# device-sensor filter-list lldp list lldp-list

Switch(config-sensor-lldplist)# tlv name mac-phy-config

Switch(config-sensor-lldplist)# tlv name system-name

Switch(config-sensor-lldplist)# end

Related Commands

Command

Description

debug device-sensor

Enables debugging for Device Sensor.

device-sensor accounting

Adds the Device Sensor protocol data to accounting records and generates additional accounting events when new sensor data is detected.

device-sensor filter-list dhcp

Creates a DHCP filter containing a list of options that can be included or excluded in the Device Sensor output.

show device-sensor cache

Displays Device Sensor cache entries.

device-sensor filter-list dhcp

To create a DHCP filter containing a list of options that can be included or excluded in the Device Sensor output, use the device-sensor filter-list dhcp command in global configuration mode. To remove the DHCP filter containing the list of options, use the no form of this command.

device-sensor filter-list dhcp list option-list-name

no device-sensor filter-list dhcp list option-list-name

Syntax Description

list

Contains a DHCP options filter list.

option-list-name

DHCP options filter list name.

Command Default

DHCP options filter list is not available.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.4.0SG and IOS 15.1(2)SG)

Command introduced on the Catalyst 4500 Series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use the device-sensor filter-list dhcp command to configure the name of the DHCP options filter list and enter into DHCP sensor configuration mode. You can configure the list of options in DHCP sensor configuration mode using the option {name option-name | number option-number} command. Use the name option-name keyword-argument pair to specify the name of the DHCP option. Use the number option-number keyword-argument pair to specify the TLV number to be added to the DHCP options filter list.

Use the no option {name option-name | number option-number} command to remove individual options from the DHCP options filter list.

Use the no device-sensor filter-list dhcp list option-list-name command to remov the entire options filter list.

Examples

The following example shows how to create a DHCP filter containing a list of options:

Switch> enable

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# device-sensor filter-list dhcp list dhcp-list

Switch(config-sensor-dhcplist)# option name domain-name

Switch(config-sensor-dhcplist)# option name host-name

Switch(config-sensor-dhcplist)# option number 50

Switch(config-sensor-dhcplist)# end

Related Commands

Command

Description

debug device-sensor

Enables debugging for Device Sensor.

device-sensor accounting

Adds the Device Sensor protocol data to accounting records and generates additional accounting events when new sensor data is detected.

device-sensor filter-list

Creates a CDP or LLDP filter containing a list of options that can be included or excluded in the Device Sensor output.

show device-sensor cache

Displays Device Sensor cache entries.

device-sensor filter-spec

To apply a protocol filter list to the Device Sensor output, use the device-sensor filter-spec command in global configuration mode. To remove the protocol filter list from the device sensor output, use the no form of this command.

device-sensor filter-spec {cdp | lldp | dhcp} {exclude {all | list list-name} | include list list-name}

Syntax Description

cdp

Applies a CDP TLV filter list to the device sensor output.

lldp

Applies a LLDP TLV filter list to the device sensor output.

dhcp

Applies a DHCP options filter list to the device sensor output.

exclude

Specifies the protocol TLVs or DHCP options to be excluded from the device sensor output.

all

Disables all notifications for the associated protocol.

list list-name

Specified the name of the filter list.

include

Specifies the TLVs or DHCP options that should be included in the Device Sensor output.

Command Default

All TLVs or DHCP options are included in notifications and will trigger notifications.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.4.0SG and IOS 15.1(2)SG)

Command introduced on the Catalyst 4500 Series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use the device-sensor filter-spec command to specify a list of CDP or LLDP TLV fields or DHCP options to be included in Device Sensor outputs.

Certain TLVs and message types such as DISCOVER, OFFER, REQUEST, ACK, and IP address are unconditionally excluded. These excluded TLVs and message types are used as transport for higher layer protocols, which change frequently and convey little useful information about endpoints. OFFER messages are also excluded because they can be received from multiple servers, and therefore, do not convey useful endpoint data.

Examples

The following example shows how to apply a CDP TLV filter list to the Device Sensor output:

Switch> enable

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# device-sensor filter-spec cdp include cdp-list1

Related Commands

Command

Description

debug device-sensor

Enables debugging for Device Sensor.

device-sensor accounting

Adds the Device Sensor protocol data to accounting records and generates additional accounting events when new sensor data is detected.

device-sensor filter-list

Creates a CDP or LLDP filter containing a list of options that can be included or excluded in the Device Sensor output.

device-sensor filter-list dhcp

Creates a DHCP filter containing a list of options that can be included or excluded in the Device Sensor output.

show device-sensor cache

Displays Device Sensor cache entries.

device-sensor notify

To enable client notifications and events for TLV changes, use the device-sensor notify command in global configuration mode. To disable client notifications and accounting events for TLV changes, use the no form of this command.

device-sensor notify all-changes | new-tlvs

no device-sensor notify all-changes | new-tlvs

Syntax Description

all-changes

Enables client notifications and accounting events for all TLV changes.

new-tlvs

Enables client notifications and accounting events for only new TLV changes.

Command Default

Client notifications and accounting events are generated only for new TLVs.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.4.0SG and IOS 15.1(2)SG)

Command introduced on the Catalyst 4500 Series switch.

Usage Guidelines

By default, for each supported peer protocol, client notifications and accounting events will only be generated when an incoming packet includes a TLV that has not been previously received in the context of a given session.

To enable client notifications and accounting events for all TLV changes, where either a new TLV has been received or a previously received TLV has been received with a different value, use the device-sensor notify all-changes command.

To return to the default behavior, use the device-sensor notify new-tlvs or the default device-sensor notify command.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable client notifications and accounting events for all TLV change:

Switch> enable

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# device-sensor notify all-changes

Related Commands

Command

Description

debug device-sensor

Enables debugging for Device Sensor.

device-sensor filter-list

Creates a CDP or LLDP filter containing a list of options that can be included or excluded in the Device Sensor output.

device-sensor filter-list dhcp

Creates a DHCP filter containing a list of options that can be included or excluded in the Device Sensor output.

show device-sensor cache

Displays Device Sensor cache entries.

diagnostic fpga soft-error recover

To configure the SEU behavior, use the diagnostic fpga soft-error recover command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

diagnostic fpga soft-error recover {conservative | aggressive}

no diagnostic fpga soft-error recover

Syntax Description

conservative

Dictates that the supervisor engine does not reload, Rather it issues a console error message once an hour.

You should reload the supervisor engine at the next maintenance window.

aggressive

Dictates that the supervisor engine reloads immediately and automatically. A crashdump is generated, allowing you to identify the SEU event as the cause of the reload.

Command Default

A switch exhibits the default SEU behavior when this command is not configured. On redundant switches that have reached SSO, the default behavior is aggressive. In all other switches, the default behavior is conservative.

Command Modes

Global config mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(53)SG3, 12.2(54)SG,

15.0(2)SG

XE 3.1.1SG

This command was provided on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(53)SG6

15.0(2)SG2

XE 3.3.0SG

Support for the conservative option was added.

Usage Guidelines

SEU events on the system FPGAs result in a potentially unstable switch. The only recovery is to reload the affected supervisor engine. However, SEU events may be harmless, so you might want to delay the reload until a maintenance window, to avoid impacting users. Alternatively, you might want to force an immediate reload to avoid an instance where the switch crashes or drops traffic because of the SEU.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the SEU behavior as conservative:

Switch(config)# diagnostic fpga soft-error recover conservative

The following example shows how to revert to the default behavior:

Switch(config)# no diagnositc fpga soft-error recover

diagnostic monitor action

To direct the action of the switch when it detects a packet memory failure, use the diagnostic monitor action command.

diagnostic monitor action [conservative | normal | aggressive]

Syntax Description

conservative

(Optional) Specifies that the bootup SRAM diagnostics log all failures and remove all affected buffers from the hardware operation. The ongoing SRAM diagnostics will log events, but will take no other action.

normal

(Optional) Specifies that the SRAM diagnostics operate as in conservative mode, except that an ongoing failure resets the supervisor engine; allows for the bootup tests to map out the affected memory.

aggressive

(Optional) Specifies that the SRAM diagnostics operate as in normal mode, except that a bootup failure only logs failures and does not allow the supervisor engine to come online; allows for either a redundant supervisor engine or network-level redundancy to take over.

Command Default

normal mode

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use the conservative keyword when you do not want the switch to reboot so that the problem can be fixed.

Use the aggressive keyword when you have redundant supervisor engines, or when network-level redundancy has been provided.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the switch to initiate an RPR switchover when an ongoing failure occurs:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch (config)# diagnostic monitor action normal

Related Commands

Command

Description

show diagnostic result module test 2

Displays the module-based diagnostic test results.

show diagnostic result module test 3

Displays the module-based diagnostic test results.

diagnostic start

To run the specified diagnostic test, use the diagnostic start command.

diagnostic start {module num} {test test-id} [port num]

Syntax Description

module num

Module number.

test

Specifies a test to run.

test-id

Specifies an identification number for the test to be run; can be the cable diagnostic test-id, or the cable-tdr keyword.

port num

(Optional) Specifies the interface port number.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to run the specified diagnostic test at the specified module:

This exec command starts the TDR test on specified interface

Switch# diagnostic start module 1 test cable-tdr port 3

diagnostic start module 1 test cable-tdr port 3

module 1: Running test(s) 5 Run interface level cable diags

module 1: Running test(s) 5 may disrupt normal system operation

Do you want to continue? [no]: yes

yes

Switch#

2d16h: %DIAG-6-TEST_RUNNING: module 1: Running online-diag-tdr{ID=5} ...

2d16h: %DIAG-6-TEST_OK: module 1: online-diag-tdr{ID=5} has completed successfully

Switch#

Note The show cable-diagnostic tdr command displays the results of a TDR test. The test results will not be available until approximately 1 minute after the test starts. If you enter the show cable-diagnostic tdr command within 1 minute of the test starting, you may see a “TDR test is in progress on interface...” message.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show diagnostic content

Displays diagnostic content information.

domain

To configure the fabric domain and enter fabric-auto-domain configuration mode, use the domain command. The no version of this command deletes the fabric domain.

domain {default | name name

no domain

Syntax Description

default

Configures the default fabric domain and enters fabric-auto domain configuration mode.

name name

Configures a new fabric domain and enters fabric-auto domain configuration mode.

Command Default

None.

Command Modes

Fabric-auto configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

3.9.01E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500-E series switch using a Supervisor Engines 8-E and 8L-E.

Usage Guidelines

We recommend that you use the default domain, unless your network requires you to create a new domain. This command allows you to enter fabric-auto domain configuration mode where you can configure edge devices in the fabric domain.

Examples

Device(config-fabric-auto)#domain default

Device(config-fabric-auto)#domain name exampledomain

dot1x auth-fail max-attempts

To configure the max number of attempts before a port is moved to the auth-fail VLAN, use the

dot1x auth-fail max-attempts command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

dot1x auth-fail max-attempts max-attempts

no dot1x auth-fail max-attempts max-attempts

Syntax Description

max-attempts

Specifies a maximum number of attempts before a port is moved to the auth-fail VLAN in the range of 1 to 10.

Command Default

Default is 3.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the maximum number of attempts before the port is moved to the auth-fail VLAN on Fast Ethernet interface 4/3:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet4/3

Switch(config-if)# dot1x auth-fail max-attempts 5

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

dot1x max-reauth-req

Sets the maximum number of times that the switch will retransmit an EAP-Request/Identity frame to the client before restarting the authentication process.

show dot1x

Displays 802.1x information.

dot1x auth-fail vlan

To enable the auth-fail VLAN on a port, use the dot1x auth-fail vlan command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

dot1x auth-fail vlan vlan-id

no dot1x auth-fail vlan vlan-id

Syntax Description

vlan-id

Specifies a VLAN in the range of 1 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the auth-fail VLAN on Fast Ethernet interface 4/3:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet4/3

Switch(config-if)# dot1x auth-fail vlan 40

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

dot1x max-reauth-req

Sets the maximum number of times that the switch will retransmit an EAP-Request/Identity frame to the client before restarting the authentication process.

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

dot1x control-direction

To enable unidirectional port control on a per-port basis on a switch, use the dot1x control-direction command. Use the no form of this command to disable unidirectional port control.

dot1x control-direction [in | both]

no dot1x control-direction

Syntax Description

in

(Optional) Specifies controlling in-bound traffic on a port.

both

(Optional) Specifies controlling both in-bound and out-bound traffic on a port.

Command Default

Both in-bound and out-bound traffic will be controlled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You can manage remote systems using unidirectional control. Unidirectional control enables you to turn on systems remotely using a specific Ethernet packet, known as a magic packet.

Using unidirectional control enables you to remotely manage systems using 802.1X ports. In the past, the port became unauthorized after the systems was turned off. In this state, the port only allowed the receipt and transmission of EAPoL packets. Therefore, there was no way for the unidirectional control magic packet to reach the host and without being turned on there was no way for the system to authenticate and open the port.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable unidirectional control on incoming packets:

Switch(config-if)# dot1x control-direction in

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

dot1x credentials (global configuration)

Use the dot1x credentials global configuration command to configure a profile on a supplicant switch.

dot1x credentials profile

no dot1x credentials profile

Syntax Description

profile

Specify a profile for the supplicant switch.

Command Default

No profile is configured for the switch.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

You must have another switch set up as the authenticator for this switch to be the supplicant.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a switch as a supplicant:

Switch(config)# dot1x credentials profile

You can verify your settings by entering the show running-config privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

cisp enable

Enables Client Information Signalling Protocol (CISP).

show cisp

Displays CISP information for a specified interface.

Refer to IOS documentation.

dot1x critical

To enable the 802.1X critical authentication on a port, use the dot1x critical command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

dot1x critical

no dot1x critical

Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or variables.

Command Default

Critical authentication is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable 802.1x critical authentication:

Switch(config-if)# dot1x critical

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

dot1x critical eapol

Enables sending EAPOL success packets when a port is critically authorized partway through an EAP exchange.

dot1x critical recovery delay

Sets the time interval between port reinitializations.

dot1x critical vlan

Assigns a critically authenticated port to a specific VLAN.

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

dot1x critical eapol

To enable sending EAPOL success packets when a port is critically authorized partway through an EAP exchange, use the dot1x critical eapol command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

dot1x critical eapol

no dot1x critical eapol

Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or variables.

Command Default

The default is to not send EAPOL success packets.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable sending EAPOL success packets:

Switch(config-if)# dot1x critical eapol

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

dot1x critical

Enables the 802.1X critical authentication on a port.

dot1x critical recovery delay

Sets the time interval between port reinitializations.

dot1x critical vlan

Assigns a critically authenticated port to a specific VLAN.

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

dot1x critical recovery delay

To set the time interval between port reinitializations, use the dot1x critical recovery delay command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

dot1x critical recovery delay delay-time

no dot1x critical recovery delay

Syntax Description

delay-time

Specifies the interval between port reinitializations when AAA transistion occurs; valid values are from 1 to 10,000 milliseconds.

Command Default

Delay time is set to 100 milliseconds.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the 802.1x critical recovery delay time to 500:

Switch(config-if)# dot1x critical recovery delay 500

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

dot1x critical

Enables the 802.1X critical authentication on a port.

dot1x critical eapol

Enables sending EAPOL success packets when a port is critically authorized partway through an EAP exchange.

dot1x critical vlan

Assigns a critically authenticated port to a specific VLAN.

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

dot1x critical vlan

To assign a critically authenticated port to a specific VLAN, use the dot1x critical vlan command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

dot1x critical vlan vlan-id

no dot1x critical vlan-id

Syntax Description

vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies the VLANs; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

Critical authentication is disabled on a ports VLAN.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The type of VLAN specified must match the type of the port. If the port is an access port, the VLAN must be a regular VLAN. If the port is a private-VLAN host port, the VLAN must be the secondary VLAN of a valid private-VLAN domain. If the port is a routed port, no VLAN may be specified.

This command is not supported on platforms such as Layer 3 switches that do not include the Critical Auth VLAN subsystem.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable 802.1x critical authentication on a ports VLAN:

Switch(config-if)# dot1x critical vlan 350

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

dot1x critical

Enables the 802.1X critical authentication on a port.

dot1x critical eapol

Enables sending EAPOL success packets when a port is critically authorized partway through an EAP exchange.

dot1x critical recovery delay

Sets the time interval between port reinitializations.

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

dot1x guest-vlan

To enable a guest VLAN on a per-port basis, use the dot1x guest-vlan command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id

no dot1x guest-vlan vlan-id

Syntax Description

vlan-id

Specifies a VLAN in the range of 1 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.; the guest VLAN feature is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EWA

Support for secondary VLAN as the configured guest VLAN ID was added.

Usage Guidelines

Guest VLANs can be configured only on ports that are statically configured as access ports or private VLAN host ports. Statically configured access ports can be configured with regular VLANs as guest VLANs; statically configured private VLAN host ports can be configured with secondary private VLANs as guest VLANs.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable a guest VLAN on Fast Ethernet interface 4/3:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet4/3

Switch(config-if)# dot1x port-control auto

Switch(config-if)# dot1x guest-vlan 26

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

dot1x max-reauth-req

Sets the maximum number of times that the switch will retransmit an EAP-Request/Identity frame to the client before restarting the authentication process.

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

dot1x guest-vlan supplicant

To place an 802.1X-capable supplicant (host) into a guest VLAN, use the dot1x guest-vlan supplicant global configuration command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

dot1x quest-vlan supplicant

no dot1x quest-vlan supplicant

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

802.1X-capable hosts are not put into a guest VLAN.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)EWA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

With Cisco Release 12.2(25) EWA, you can use the dot1x guest-vlan supplicant command to place an 802.1X-capable host into a guest VLAN. Prior to Cisco Release 12.2(25)EWA, you could only place non-802.1X capable hosts into a guest VLAN.

When guest VLAN supplicant behavior is enabled, the Catalyst 4500 series switch does not maintain EAPOL packet history. The switch allows clients that fail 802.1X authentication to access a guest VLAN, whether or not EAPOL packets have been detected on the interface.

Examples

The following example shows how to place an 802.1X-capable supplicant (host) into a guest VLAN:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# dot1x guest-vlan supplicant

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

dot1x system-auth-control

Enables 802.1X authentication on the switch.

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

dot1x host-mode

Use the dot1x host-mode interface configuration command on the switch stack or on a standalone switch to allow a single host (client) or multiple hosts on an IEEE 802.1x-authorized port. Use the multi-domain keyword to enable multidomain authentication (MDA) on an IEEE 802.1x-authorized port. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

dot1x host-mode {multi-host | single-host | multi-domain}

no dot1x host-mode [multi-host | single-host | multi-domain}

Syntax Description

multi-host

Enables multiple-hosts mode on the switch.

single-host

Enables single-host mode on the switch.

multi-domain

Enables MDA on a switch port.

Command Default

The default is single-host mode.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(20)EWA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(37)SG

Added support for multiple domains.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to limit an IEEE 802.1X-enabled port to a single client or to attach multiple clients to an IEEE 802.1X-enabled port. In multiple-hosts mode, only one of the attached hosts needs to be successfully authorized for all hosts to be granted network access. If the port becomes unauthorized (re-authentication fails or an Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN [EAPOL]-logoff message is received), all attached clients are denied access to the network.

Use the multi-domain keyword to enable MDA on a port. MDA divides the port into both a data domain and a voice domain. MDA allows both a data device and a voice device, such as an IP phone (Cisco or non-Cisco), on the same IEEE 802.1x-enabled port.

Before entering this command, make sure that the dot1x port-control interface configuration command is set to auto for the specified port.

You can assign both voice and data VLAN dynamically from the ACS server. No additional configuration is required to enable dynamic VLAN assignment on the switch.To enable VLAN assignment, you must configure the Cisco ACS server. For details on configuring the ACS server for voice VLAN assignment, refer to the “Cisco ACS Configuration for VLAN Assignment” section in the Catalyst 4500 Series Switch Software Configuration Guide-Release, 12.2(52)SG.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable IEEE 802.1x authentication and to enable multiple-hosts mode:

Switch# configure t

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet6/1

Switch(config-if)# dot1x port-control auto

Switch(config-if)# dot1x host-mode multi-host

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to enable MDA and to allow both a host and a voice device on the port:

Switch# configure t

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface FastEthernet6/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport access vlan 12

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode access

Switch(config-if)# switchport voice vlan 10

Switch(config-if)# dot1x pae authenticator

Switch(config-if)# dot1x port-control auto

Switch(config-if)# dot1x host-mode multi-domain

Switch(config-if)# no shutdown

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show dot1x [interface interface-id] privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

dot1x initialize

To unauthorize an interface before reinitializing 802.1X, use the dot1x initialize command.

dot1x initialize interface

Syntax Description

interface

Number of the interface.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to initialize state machines and to set up the environment for fresh authentication.

Examples

The following example shows how to initialize the 802.1X state machines on an interface:

Switch# dot1x initialize

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

dot1x mac-auth-bypass

To enable the 802.1X MAC address bypassing on a switch, use the dot1x mac-auth-bypass command. Use the no form of this command to disable MAC address bypassing.

dot1x mac-auth-bypass [eap]

no dot1x mac-auth-bypass [eap]

Syntax Description

eap

(Optional) Specifies using EAP MAC address authentication.

Command Default

There is no default setting.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The removal of the dot1x mac-auth-bypass configuration from a port does not affect the authorization or authentication state of a port. If the port is in unauthenticated state, it remains unauthenticated, and if MAB is active, the authentication will revert back to the 802.1X Authenticator. If the port is authorized with a MAC address, and the MAB configuration is removed the port remains authorized until re-authentication takes place. When re-authentication occurs the MAC address is removed in favor of an 802.1X supplicant, which is detected on the wire.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable EAP MAC address authentication:

Switch(config-if)# dot1x mac-auth-bypass

Switch(config-if)#

dot1x max-reauth-req

To set the maximum number of times that the switch will retransmit an EAP-Request/Identity frame to the client before restarting the authentication process, use the dot1x max-reauth-req command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

dot1x max-reauth-req count

no dot1x max-reauth-req

Syntax Description

count

Number of times that the switch retransmits EAP-Request/Identity frames before restarting the authentication process; valid values are from 1 to 10.

Command Default

The switch sends a maximum of two retransmissions.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You should change the default value of this command only to adjust for unusual circumstances such as unreliable links or specific behavioral problems with certain clients and authentication servers. This setting impacts the wait before a non-dot1x-capable client is admitted to the guest VLAN, if one is configured.

You can verify your settings by entering the show dot1x privileged EXEC command.

Examples

The following example shows how to set 5 as the number of times that the switch retransmits an EAP-Request/Identity frame before restarting the authentication process:

Switch(config-if)# dot1x max-reauth-req 5

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

dot1x max-req

To set the maximum number of times that the switch retransmits an Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)-Request frame of types other than EAP-Request/Identity to the client before restarting the authentication process, use the dot1x max-req command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

dot1x max-req count

no dot1x max-req

Syntax Description

count

Number of times that the switch retransmits EAP-Request frames of types other than EAP-Request/Identity before restarting the authentication process; valid values are from 1 to 10.

Command Default

The switch sends a maximum of two retransmissions.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(19)EW

This command was modified to control on EAP-Request/Identity retransmission limits.

Usage Guidelines

You should change the default value of this command only to adjust for unusual circumstances such as unreliable links or specific behavioral problems with certain clients and authentication servers.

You can verify your settings by entering the show dot1x privileged EXEC command.

Examples

The following example shows how to set 5 as the number of times that the switch retransmits an EAP-Request frame before restarting the authentication process:

Switch(config-if)# dot1x max-req 5

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to return to the default setting:

Switch(config-if)# no dot1x max-req

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

dot1x initialize

Unauthorizes an interface before reinitializing 802.1X.

dot1x max-reauth-req

Sets the maximum number of times that the switch will retransmit an EAP-Request/Identity frame to the client before restarting the authentication process.

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

dot1x port-control

To enable manual control of the authorization state on a port, use the dot1x port-control command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

dot1x port-control {auto | force-authorized | force-unauthorized}

no dot1x port-control {auto | force-authorized | force-unauthorized}

Syntax Description

auto

Enables 802.1X authentication on the interface and causes the port to transition to the authorized or unauthorized state based on the 802.1X authentication exchange between the switch and the client.

force-authorized

Disables 802.1X authentication on the interface and causes the port to transition to the authorized state without any authentication exchange required. The port transmits and receives normal traffic without 802.1X-based authentication of the client.

force-unauthorized

Denies all access through the specified interface by forcing the port to transition to the unauthorized state, ignoring all attempts by the client to authenticate. The switch cannot provide authentication services to the client through the interface.

Command Default

The port 802.1X authorization is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The 802.1X protocol is supported on both the Layer 2 static-access ports and the Layer 3-routed ports.

You can use the auto keyword only if the port is not configured as follows:

- Trunk port—If you try to enable 802.1X on a trunk port, an error message appears, and 802.1X is not enabled. If you try to change the mode of an 802.1X-enabled port to trunk, the port mode is not changed.

- Dynamic ports—A port in dynamic mode can negotiate with its neighbor to become a trunk port. If you try to enable 802.1X on a dynamic port, an error message appears, and 802.1X is not enabled. If you try to change the mode of an 802.1X-enabled port to dynamic, the port mode is not changed.

- EtherChannel port—Before enabling 802.1X on the port, you must first remove it from the EtherChannel. If you try to enable 802.1X on an EtherChannel or on an active port in an EtherChannel, an error message appears, and 802.1X is not enabled. If you enable 802.1X on an inactive port of an EtherChannel, the port does not join the EtherChannel.

- Switch Port Analyzer (SPAN) destination port—You can enable 802.1X on a port that is a SPAN destination port; however, 802.1X is disabled until the port is removed as a SPAN destination. You can enable 802.1X on a SPAN source port.

To globally disable 802.1X on the switch, you must disable it on each port. There is no global configuration command for this task.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable 802.1X on Gigabit Ethernet 1/1:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# dot1x port-control auto

Switch#

You can verify your settings by using the show dot1x all or show dot1x interface int commands to show the port-control status. An enabled status indicates that the port-control value is set either to auto or to force-unauthorized.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

dot1x re-authenticate

To manually initiate a reauthentication of all 802.1X-enabled ports or the specified 802.1X-enabled port, use the dot1x re-authenticate command.

dot1x re-authenticate [interface interface-id]

Syntax Description

interface interface-id

(Optional) Module and port number of the interface.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You can use this command to reauthenticate a client without waiting for the configured number of seconds between reauthentication attempts (re-authperiod) and automatic reauthentication.

Examples

The following example shows how to manually reauthenticate the device connected to Gigabit Ethernet interface 1/1:

Switch# dot1x re-authenticate interface gigabitethernet1/1

Starting reauthentication on gigabitethernet1/1

Switch#

dot1x re-authentication

To enable the periodic reauthentication of the client, use the dot1x re-authentication command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

dot1x re-authentication

no dot1x re-authentication

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

The periodic reauthentication is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You configure the amount of time between the periodic reauthentication attempts by using the dot1x timeout re-authperiod global configuration command.

Examples

The following example shows how to disable the periodic reauthentication of the client:

Switch(config-if)# no dot1x re-authentication

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to enable the periodic reauthentication and set the number of seconds between the reauthentication attempts to 4000 seconds:

Switch(config-if)# dot1x re-authentication

Switch(config-if)# dot1x timeout re-authperiod 4000

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show dot1x privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

dot1x timeout

Sets the reauthentication timer.

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

dot1x system-auth-control

To enable 802.1X authentication on the switch, use the dot1x system-auth-control command. To disable 802.1X authentication on the system, use the no form of this command.

dot1x system-auth-control

no dot1x system-auth-control

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

The 802.1X authentication is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You must enable dot1x system-auth-control if you want to use the 802.1X access controls on any port on the switch. You can then use the dot1x port-control auto command on each specific port on which you want the 802.1X access controls to be used.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable 802.1X authentication:

Switch(config)# dot1x system-auth-control

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

dot1x initialize

Unauthorizes an interface before reinitializing 802.1X.

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

dot1x timeout

To set the reauthentication timer, use the dot1x timeout command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

dot1x timeout {reauth-period {seconds | server} | quiet-period seconds | tx-period seconds |

supp-timeout seconds | server-timeout seconds}

no dot1x timeout {reauth-period | quiet-period | tx-period | supp-timeout | server-timeout}

Syntax Description

reauth-period seconds

Number of seconds between reauthentication attempts; valid values are from 1 to 65535. See the “Usage Guidelines” section for more information.

reauth-period server

Number of seconds between reauthentication attempts; valid values are from 1 to 65535 as derived from the Session-Timeout RADIUS attribute. See the “Usage Guidelines” section for more information.

quiet-period seconds

Number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange with the client; valid values are from 0 to 65535 seconds.

tx-period seconds

Number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an EAP-request/identity frame from the client before retransmitting the request; valid values are from 1 to 65535 seconds.

supp-timeout seconds

Number of seconds that the switch waits for the retransmission of EAP-Request packets; valid values are from 30 to 65535 seconds.

server-timeout seconds

Number of seconds that the switch waits for the retransmission of packets by the back-end authenticator to the authentication server; valid values are from 30 to 65535 seconds.

Command Default

The default settings are as follows:

- Reauthentication period is 3600 seconds.

- Quiet period is 60 seconds.

- Transmission period is 30 seconds.

- Supplicant timeout is 30 seconds.

- Server timeout is 30 seconds.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EWA

Support for selecting the reauthentication timer from the “server” was added.

Usage Guidelines

The periodic reauthentication must be enabled before entering the dot1x timeout re-authperiod command. Enter the dot1x re-authentication command to enable periodic reauthentication.

Examples

The following example shows how to set 60 as the number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an EAP-request/identity frame from the client before retransmitting the request:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet4/3

Switch(config-if)# dot1x timeout tx-period 60

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show dot1x privileged EXEC command.

The following example shows how to set up the switch to use a reauthentication timeout derived from a Session-Timeout attribute taken from the RADIUS Access-Accept message received when a host successfully authenticates via 802.1X:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet4/3

Switch(config-if)# dot1x timeout reauth-period server

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

dot1x initialize

Unauthorizes an interface before reinitializing 802.1X.

show dot1x

Displays dot1x information.

dscp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is supported only on Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To specify a CoS value for the NetFlow-lite collector, use the dscp command. To delete the value, use the no form of this command.

dscp dscp-value

no dscp dscp-value

Syntax Description

dscp-value

Specifies a DSCP value for the NetFlow-lite collector. Valid values from 0 to 63

Command Default

0

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify a CoS value for the NetFlow-lite collector:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# destination 5.5.5.6

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# source 5.5.5.5

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# transport udp 8188

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# ttl 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# cos 7

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# dscp 32

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# template data timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options sampler-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options interface-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# export-protocol netflow-v9 Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# exit

Switch(config)#

Display the exporter

Switch# show netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Netflow-lite Exporter exporter1:

Network Protocol Configuration:

Destination IP address: 5.5.5.6

Source IP Address: 5.5.5.5

VRF label:

DSCP: 0x20

TTL: 128

COS: 7

Transport Protocol Configuration:

Transport Protocol: UDP

Destination Port: 8188

Source Port: 61670

Export Protocol Configuration:

Export Protocol: netflow-v9

Template data timeout: 60

Options sampler-table timeout: 1800

Options interface-table timeout: 1800

Exporter Statistics:

Packets Exported: 0

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite exporter privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

cos (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a CoS value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

source (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a source Layer 3 interface of the NetFlow-lite collector.

transport udp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector.

ttl (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a ttl value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

destination (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a destination address in netflow-lite submode.

template data timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a template data timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

options timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies an options timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

export-protocol (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies the export protocol for the NetFlow-lite collector.

dual-active detection (virtual switch)

To enable and configure dual-active detection, use the dual-active detection command in virtual switch configuration submode. To disable dual-active detection, use the no form of this command.

dual-active detection {pagp [trust channel-group num]} | fast-hello}

no dual-active detection {pagp | fast-hello}

Syntax Description

pagp

Configures Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) as the dual-active detection method. Default: enabled.

trust channel-group num

(Optional) Specifies the EtherChannel/port bundling to be used for PAgP dual-active detection. Range: 1 to 256. Default: disabled.

fast-hello

Configures fast hello packet detection as the dual-active detection method. Default: enabled.

Command Default

Detection methods (pagp and fast-hello) are enabled and trust is disabled by default.

Command Modes

Virtual switch configuration submode (config-vs-domain)

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Release IOS XE 3.5.0E and IOS 15.2(1)SG

Support extended to fast-hello option.

Usage Guidelines

If PAgP is running on the MECs between the VSS and its access switches, the VSS can use enhanced PAgP messaging to detect dual-active scenario. The MEC must have links from both chassis of the VSS to the access switch. By default, PAgP dual-active detection is enabled. However, the enhanced messages are only sent on channel groups with trust mode enabled.

If you configure the fast hello dual-active detection mechanism, you must also configure dual-active interface pairs to act as fast hello dual-active messaging links. See the dual-active fast-hello (virtual switch) command.

When you enter the optional trust channel-group num keywords and argument, the following applies:

- You can configure trust mode on a port channel even if there are no interfaces on the port channel or the port channel is a protocol type other than PAgP. The trust mode status is displayed in the show pagp dual-active command output, but no interfaces are displayed.

- Configuring trust mode requires that the port channel exists. If the port channel does not exist, the following error message is displayed:

Router(config-vs-domain)# dual-active trust pagp channel-group 30

Port-channel 30 not configured

- If a trusted port is deleted, the trust-mode configuration is deleted and the following warning message is displayed:

Port-channel num is a trusted port-channel for PAgP

dual-active detection. Restricting this

port-channel has deleted the dual-active trust

channel-group configuration associated with it.

- If a trusted port is changed to a virtual switch port, the trust mode configuration is deleted when the port becomes restricted and the following warning message is displayed:

Port-channel num is a trusted port-channel for PAgP

dual-active detection. Deletion of this

port-channel has deleted the dual-active trust

channel-group configuration associated with it.

- If you enter the dual-active detection pagp trust port-channel command on a virtual switch port channel, the following error message is displayed:

Cannot configure dual-active trust mode on a virtual switch port-channel

Examples

The following example shows how to configure interfaces for PAgP dual-active detection:

Router(config)# switch virtual domain domain-id

Router (config-vs-domain)# dual-active detection pagp

Router (config-vs-domain)#

The following example shows how to specify that EtherChannel/port bundling to be used for PAgP dual-active detection;

Router(config)# switch virtual domain domain-id

Router (config-vs-domain)# dual-active detection pagp trust port-channel 20

Router (config-vs-domain)#

The following example shows how to configure an interface for fast hello dual-active detection:

Router(config)# switch virtual domain domain-id

Router (config-vs-domain)# dual-active detection fast-hello

Router (config-vs-domain)# exit

Router(config)# interface fastethernet 1/2/40

Router(config-if)# dual-active fast-hello

WARNING: Interface FastEthernet1/2/40 placed in restricted config mode. All extraneous

configs removed!

Router(config-if)# no shutdown

Related Commands

Command

Description

dual-active fast-hello (virtual switch)

Configures dual-active detection.

show switch virtual (virtual switch)

Displays information about dual-active detection configuration and status.

dual-active fast-hello (virtual switch)

To enable an interface to be a fast hello dual-active messaging link, use the dual-active detection command in interface configuration mode. To disable dual-active detection on an interface, use the no form of this command.

dual-active fast-hello

no dual-active fast-hello

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Fast hello dual-active detection is disabled on all interfaces by default.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode (config-if)

Command History

Release

Modification

Release IOS XE 3.5.0E and IOS 15.2(1)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command automatically removes all other configuration from the interface and restricts the interface to dual-active configuration commands.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure an interfaceas a fast hello dual-active messaging link:

Router(config)# switch virtual domain domain-id

Router (config-vs-domain)# dual-active detection fast-hello

Router (config-vs-domain)# exit

Router(config)# interface fastethernet 1/2/40

Router(config-if)# dual-active fast-hello

WARNING: Interface FastEthernet1/2/40 placed in restricted config mode. All extraneous

configs removed!

Router(config-if)# no shutdown

Related Commands

Command

Description

dual-active detection (virtual switch)

Configure dual-active detection on the virtual switch.

show switch virtual (virtual switch)

Displays information about dual-active detection configuration and status.

dual-active recovery ip address

To configure an IP address for the management interface when the switch is in recovery mode, use the dual-active recovery ip address command in virtual-switch configuration submode. To remove the IP address, use the no form of this command.

dual-active recovery [switch num] ip address ip-address ip-mask

no dual-active recovery ip address ip-address ip-mask

Syntax Description

switch num

(Optional) The virtual switch number of the chassis for which the IP address must be used. If unspecified, the same IP address is used for either switch.

ip-address

Specifies an IP address.

ip-mask

Specifies an IP address mask.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Virtual switch configuration submode (config-vs-domain)

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The command accepts up to three IP addresses - one for switch 1, one for switch 2 and one global IP address. When a switch enters recovery mode, it picks up the configured switch-specific recovery IP address for its management interface. If the switch-specific IP address is unconfigured, the global recovery IP address is used. If neither the switch-specific nor global recovery IP addresses are configured, the fastEthernet1 management interface on the switch has no IP address active, when the switch enters recovery mode.

The normal IP address configured for fastEthernet1 in interface configuration mode is retained in the configuration.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure global recovery IP address:

Switch(config)# switch virtual domain domain-id

Switch(config-vs-domain)# dual-acti

ve recovery ip address 192.168.1.5 255.255.255.0

Switch(config-vs-domain)# exit

Related Commands

Command

Description

dual-active detection (virtual switch)

Configure dual-active detection on the virtual switch.

show switch virtual (virtual switch)

Displays information about dual-active detection configuration and status.

duplex

To configure the duplex operation on an interface, use the duplex command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

duplex {auto | full | half}

no duplex

Syntax Description

auto

Specifies the autonegotiation operation.

full

Specifies the full-duplex operation.

half

Specifies the half-duplex operation.

Command Default

Half-duplex operation

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Table 2-1 lists the supported command options by interface.

Table 2-1 Supported duplex Command Options

Interface Type

Supported Syntax

Default Setting

Guidelines

10/100-Mbps module

duplex [half | full]

half

If the speed is set to auto, you will not be able to set the duplex mode.

If the speed is set to 10 or 100, and you do not configure the duplex setting, the duplex mode is set to half duplex.

100-Mbps fiber modules

duplex [half | full]

half

Gigabit Ethernet Interface

Not supported.

Not supported.

Gigabit Ethernet interfaces are set to full duplex.

10/100/1000

duplex [half | full]

If the speed is set to auto or 1000, you will not be able to set duplex.

If the speed is set to 10 or 100, and you do not configure the duplex setting, the duplex mode is set to half duplex.

If the transmission speed on a 16-port RJ-45 Gigabit Ethernet port is set to 1000, the duplex mode is set to full. If the transmission speed is changed to 10 or 100, the duplex mode stays at full. You must configure the correct duplex mode on the switch when the transmission speed changes to 10 or 100 from 1000 Mbps.

Caution Changing the interface speed and duplex mode configuration might shut down and reenable the interface during the reconfiguration.

Table 2-2 describes the system performance for different combinations of the duplex and speed modes. The specified duplex command that is configured with the specified speed command produces the resulting action shown in the table.

Table 2-2 Relationship Between duplex and speed Commands

duplex Command

speed Command

Resulting System Action

duplex half or duplex full

speed auto

Autonegotiates both speed and duplex modes

duplex half

speed 10

Forces 10 Mbps and half duplex

duplex full

speed 10

Forces 10 Mbps and full duplex

duplex half

speed 100

Forces 100 Mbps and half duplex

duplex full

speed 100

Forces 100 Mbps and full duplex

duplex full

speed 1000

Forces 1000 Mbps and full duplex

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the interface for full-duplex operation:

Switch(config-if)# duplex full

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

speed

Configures the interface speed.

interface (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Configures an interface.

show controllers (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Displays controller information.

show interfaces

Displays interface information.

epm access control

To configure access control, use the epm access control [open | default] command.

epm access control [open | default]

Syntax Description

open

Specifies open access control.

default

Specifies default access control.

Command Default

If the epm access control command is not configured, the behavior defaults to the epm access control default command. Nothing is nvgened.

Command Modes

Configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When you enter the epm access control command, it is nvgen’d.

If no ACLs are downloaded from the ACS server when a host is authenticated, the host is restricted by the port ACLs and do not receive additional permissions. In such a scenario, if you enter the epm access control open command, a permit ip host any entry is created for the host after authentication. This entry is created only if no ACLs are downloaded from the ACS.

The epm access control open command is particularly useful in authentication open mode. Traffic from a host is allowed to pass even before the host is authenticated. This traffic is restricted by the port ACL. In such a scenario, if no ACLs are downloaded from the ACS, the host will not receive any additional permissions. Even after authentication, the host is still restricted by the port ACL. If epm access control open is configured, complete access is granted upon authentication.

If epm access control default is configured and no ACL is downloaded, port ACL is the only ACL on the port. This is how access control functioned prior to Cisco IOS Release 12.2(54)SG.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable open access control:

Switch(config)# epm access control open

The following example shows how to enable default access control:

Switch(config)# epm access control default

Related Commands

Command

Description

show ipv6 snooping counters

Displays the number of packets dropped per port due to RA Guard.

erase

To erase a file system, use the erase command.

erase {/all [non-default | nvram:] | cat4000_flash | nvram: | startup-config}

Syntax Description

/all nvram:

Erases everything in nvram:.

/all non-default

Erases files and configuration in nonvolatile storage including nvram:, bootflash:, cat4000_flash:, and crashinfo: of the local supervisor engine. Resets the Catalyst 4500 series switch to the factory default settings.

Note This command option is intended to work only on a standalone supervisor engine.

cat4000_flash:

Erases the VLAN database configuration file.

nvram:

Erases the startup-config and private-config file in NVRAM.

startup-config:

Erases the startup-config and private-config file in NVRAM.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Caution When you use the erase command to erase a file system, you cannot recover the files in the file system.

In addition to the command options shown above, options with the prefix slave that are used to identify nvram: and flash (such as slavenvram: and slavecat4000_flash:) appear in the command help messages on the dual supervisor engine redundancy switch.

The erase nvram: command replaces the write erase and the erase startup-confg commands. This command erases both the startup-config and the private-config file.

The erase /all nvram: command erases all files in nvram: in addition to startup-config file and private-config file.

The erase cat4000_flash: command erases the VLAN database configuration file.

The erase /all non-default command facilitates the work of a manufacturing facility and repair center. It erases the configuration and states stored in the nonvolatile storage and resets the Catalyst 4500 series switch to the factory default settings. The default settings include those mentioned in the Cisco IOS library as well as those set by the erase /all non-default command (vtp mode=transparent, and the ROMMON variables: ConfigReg=0x2101, PS1= “rommon ! >” and EnableAutoConfig=1).

For the default settings, refer to these guides:

- Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Configuration Guide, Release 12.2, at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/fundamentals/configuration/guide/12_4/cf_12_4_book.html

- Cisco IOS Configuration Fundamentals Configuration Command Reference, Release 12.2, at this URL:

http://www.cisco.com/en/US/docs/ios/12_2/configfun/command/reference/ffun_r.html

Caution The erase /all non-default command can erase Cisco IOS images in bootflash:. Ensure that a Cisco IOS image can be copied back to the bootflash: (such as, from a accessible TFTP server or a flash card inserted in slot0:) (available on most chassis models), or that the switch can boot from a image stored in an accessible network server.

Examples

The following example shows how to erase the files and configuration in a nonvolatile storage and reset the switch to factory default settings:

Switch# erase /all non-default

Switch#

Erase and format operation will destroy all data in non-volatile storage. Continue? [confirm]

Formatting bootflash: ...

Format of bootflash complete

Erasing nvram:

Erasing cat4000_flash:

Clearing crashinfo:data

Clearing the last power failure timestamp

Clearing all ROMMON variables

Setting default ROMMON variables:

ConfigReg=0x2101

PS1=rommon ! >

EnableAutoConfig=1

Setting vtp mode to transparent

%WARNING! Please reboot the system for the changes to take effect

Switch#

00:01:48: %SYS-7-NV_BLOCK_INIT: Initialized the geometry of nvram

Switch#

The following example shows how to erase the contents in nvram.

Switch# erase /all nvram:

Erasing the nvram filesystem will remove all files! Continue? [confirm]

[OK]

Erase of nvram: complete

Switch#

00:38:10: %SYS-7-NV_BLOCK_INIT: Initalized the geometry of nvram

Switch#

The following example shows how to erase filesystem cat4000_flash.

Switch# erase cat4000_flash:

Erasing the cat4000_flash filesystem will remove all files! Continue? [confirm]

[OK]

Erase of cat4000_flash:complete

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

boot config (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Specifies the device and filename of the configuration file.

delete (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Deletes a file from a flash memory device or NVRAM.

show bootvar

Displays BOOT environment variable information.

undelete (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Recovers a file marked “deleted” on a Class a flash file system.

errdisable detect cause

Use the errdisable detect cause global configuration command, to enable error-disable detection for a specific cause or for all causes. To disable the error-disable detection feature, use the no form of this command.

errdisable detect cause {all | arp-inspection | bpduguard | dhcp-rate-limit | dtp-flap | gbic-invalid | inline-power | l2ptguard |link-flap | loopback | pagp-flap | psp | security-violation shutdown vlan | sfp-config-mismatch}

no errdisable detect cause {all | arp-inspection | bpduguard | dhcp-rate-limit | dtp-flap | gbic-invalid | inline-power | l2ptguard |link-flap | loopback | pagp-flap | psp | security-violation shutdown vlan | sfp-config-mismatch}

For the bridge protocol data unit (BPDU) guard and port security, you can use this command to configure the switch to disable only a specific VLAN on a port instead of disabling the entire port.

When the per-VLAN error-disable feature is turned off and a BPDU guard violation occurs, the entire port is disabled. Use the no form of this command to disable the per-VLAN error-disable feature.

errdisable detect cause bpduguard shutdown vlan

no errdisable detect cause bpduguard shutdown vlan

Syntax Description

all

Enable error detection for all error-disabled causes.

arp-inspection

Enable error detection for dynamic Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) inspection.

bpduguard shutdown vlan

Enable per-VLAN error-disable for BPDU guard.

dhcp-rate-limit

Enable error detection for DHCP snooping.

dtp-flap

Enable error detection for the Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) flapping.

gbic-invalid

Enable error detection for an invalid Gigabit Interface Converter (GBIC) module.

Note This error refers to an invalid small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module.

inline-power

Enable error detection for the Power over Ethernet (PoE) error-disabled cause.

This keyword is supported only on switches with PoE ports.

l2ptguard

Enable error detection for a Layer 2 protocol-tunnel error-disabled cause.

link-flap

Enable error detection for link-state flapping.

loopback

Enable error detection for detected loopbacks.

pagp-flap

Enable error detection for the Port Aggregation Protocol (PAgP) flap error-disabled cause.

psp

Enable error detection for protocol storm protection

security-violation shutdown vlan

Enable voice aware 802.1x security.

sfp-config-mismatch

Enable error detection on an SFP configuration mismatch.

Command Default

Detection is enabled for all causes. All causes, except for per-VLAN error disabling, are configured to shut down the entire port.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(52)SG

Added support for per-VLAN error-disable detection.

IOS XE 3.5.0E and IOS 15.2(1)E

The security-violation shutdown vlan keyword was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

A cause (link-flap, dhcp-rate-limit, and so forth) is the reason for the error-disabled state. When a cause is detected on an interface, the interface is placed in an error-disabled state, an operational state that is similar to a link-down state.

When a port is error-disabled, it is effectively shut down, and no traffic is sent or received on the port. For the BPDU guard, voice aware 802.1x security, and port-security features, you can configure the switch to shut down just the offending VLAN on the port when a violation occurs, instead of shutting down the entire port.

If you set a recovery mechanism for the cause by entering the errdisable recovery global configuration command for the cause, the interface is brought out of the error-disabled state and allowed to retry the operation when all causes have timed out. If you do not set a recovery mechanism, you must enter the shutdown and then the no shutdown commands to manually recover an interface from the error-disabled state.

For protocol storm protection, excess packets are dropped for a maximum of two virtual ports. Virtual port error disabling using the psp keyword is not supported for EtherChannel and Flexlink interfaces.

To verify your settings, enter the show errdisable detect privileged EXEC command.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable error-disabled detection for the link-flap error-disabled cause:

Switch(config)# errdisable detect cause link-flap

This command shows how to globally configure BPDU guard for per-VLAN error disable:

Switch(config)# errdisable detect cause bpduguard shutdown vlan

This command shows how to globally configure voice aware 802.1x security for per-VLAN error disable:

Switch(config)# errdisable detect cause security-violation shutdown vlan

You can verify your setting by entering the show errdisable detect privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show errdisable detect

Displays error-disabled detection information.

show interfaces status

Displays interface status or a list of interfaces in the error-disabled state.

clear errdisable interface

Clears the error-disabled state from a port or VLAN that was error disabled by the per-VLAN error disable feature.

errdisable recovery

To configure the recovery mechanism variables, use the errdisable recovery command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

Use the errdisable recovery command to configure the recovery mechanism variables. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

errdisable recovery [cause {all | arp-inspection | bpduguard | channel-misconfig | dhcp-rate-limit | dtp-flap | gbic-invalid | l2ptguard | link-flap | pagp-flap | pesecure-violation | security-violation | storm-control | udld | unicastflood | vmps} [arp-inspection] [interval {interval}]]

no errdisable recovery [cause {all | arp-inspection | bpduguard | channel-misconfig | dhcp-rate-limit | dtp-flap | gbic-invalid | l2ptguard | link-flap | pagp-flap | pesecure-violation | security-violation | storm-control | udld | unicastflood | vmps} [arp-inspection] [interval {interval}]]

Syntax Description

cause

(Optional) Enables the error-disable recovery to recover from a specific cause.

all

(Optional) Enables the recovery timers for all error-disable causes.

arp-inspection

(Optional) Enables the recovery timer for the ARP inspection cause.

bpduguard

(Optional) Enables the recovery timer for the BPDU guard error-disable cause.

channel-misconfig

(Optional) Enables the recovery timer for the channel-misconfig error-disable cause.

dhcp-rate-limit

(Optional) Enables the recovery timer for the DHCP rate limit error-disable cause.

dtp-flap

(Optional) Enables the recovery timer for the DTP flap error-disable cause.

gbic-invalid

(Optional) Enables the recovery timer for the GBIC invalid error-disable cause.

l2ptguard

(Optional) Enables the recovery timer for the Layer 2 protocol-tunnel error-disable cause.

link-flap

(Optional) Enables the recovery timer for the link flap error-disable cause.

pagp-flap

(Optional) Enables the recovery timer for the PAgP flap error-disable cause.

pesecure-violation

(Optional) Enables the recovery timer for the pesecure violation error-disable cause.

security-violation

(Optional) Enables the automatic recovery of ports disabled due to 802.1X security violations.

storm-control

(Optional) Enables the timer to recover from storm-control error-disable state.

udld

(Optional) Enables the recovery timer for the UDLD error-disable cause.

unicastflood

(Optional) Enables the recovery timer for the unicast flood error-disable cause.

vmps

(Optional) Enables the recovery timer for the VMPS error-disable cause.

arp-inspection

(Optional) Enables the ARP inspection cause and recovery timeout.

interval interval

(Optional) Specifies the time to recover from a specified error-disable cause; valid values are from 30 to 86400 seconds.

Command Default

Error disable recovery is disabled.

The recovery interval is set to 300 seconds.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(19)EW

Support for the storm-control feature.

Usage Guidelines

A cause (bpduguard, dtp-flap, link-flap, pagp-flap, udld) is defined as the reason why the error-disabled state occurred. When a cause is detected on an interface, the interface is placed in error-disabled state (an operational state that is similar to the link-down state). If you do not enable error-disable recovery for the cause, the interface stays in the error-disabled state until a shutdown and no shutdown occurs. If you enable recovery for a cause, the interface is brought out of the error-disabled state and allowed to retry operation again once all the causes have timed out.

You must enter the shutdown command and then the no shutdown command to recover an interface manually from error disable.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the recovery timer for the BPDU guard error disable cause:

Switch(config)# errdisable recovery cause bpduguard

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to set the timer to 300 seconds:

Switch(config)# errdisable recovery interval 300

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to enable the errdisable recovery for arp-inspection:

Switch(config)# errdisable recovery cause arp-inspection

Switch(config)# end

Switch# show errdisable recovery

ErrDisable Reason Timer Status

----------------- --------------

udld Disabled

bpduguard Disabled

security-violatio Disabled

channel-misconfig Disabled

vmps Disabled

pagp-flap Disabled

dtp-flap Disabled

link-flap Disabled

l2ptguard Disabled

psecure-violation Disabled

gbic-invalid Disabled

dhcp-rate-limit Disabled

unicast-flood Disabled

storm-control Disabled

arp-inspection Enabled

Timer interval: 300 seconds

Interfaces that will be enabled at the next timeout:

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show errdisable detect

Displays the error disable detection status.

show errdisable recovery

Displays error disable recovery timer information.

show interfaces status

Displays the interface status or a list of interfaces in error-disabled state.

export-protocol (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is supported only on Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To specify the export protocol for the NetFlow-lite collector, use the export-protocol command. To delete the value, use the no form of this command.

export-protocol {netflow-v9 | ipfix}

no export-protocol {netflow-v9 | ipfix}

Syntax Description

netflow-v9

Specifies export format of Netflow V9.

ipfix

Specifies export format of Netflow V10 or IPFIX.

Command Default

netflow-v9

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

Usage Guidelines

By default the export protocol is Netflow V9. IPFIX or Netflow V10 is a newer export format. They support variable length encoding that allows for more efficient packaging of packet samples according to the actual packet section bytes extracted from the original sampled packet.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify the export protocol for the NetFlow-lite collector:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# destination 5.5.5.6

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# source 5.5.5.5

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# transport udp 8188

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# ttl 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# cos 7

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# dscp 32

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# template data timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options sampler-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options interface-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# export-protocol netflow-v9 Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# exit

Switch(config)#

Display the exporter

Switch# show netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Netflow-lite Exporter exporter1:

Network Protocol Configuration:

Destination IP address: 5.5.5.6

Source IP Address: 5.5.5.5

VRF label:

DSCP: 0x20

TTL: 128

COS: 7

Transport Protocol Configuration:

Transport Protocol: UDP

Destination Port: 8188

Source Port: 61670

Export Protocol Configuration:

Export Protocol: netflow-v9

Template data timeout: 60

Options sampler-table timeout: 1800

Options interface-table timeout: 1800

Exporter Statistics:

Packets Exported: 0

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite exporter privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

netflow-lite exporter

Defines an exporter and to enter NetFlow-lite exporter submode.

destination (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a destination address in netflow-lite submode.

source (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a source Layer 3 interface of the NetFlow-lite collector.

transport udp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector.

ttl (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a ttl value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

cos (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a CoS value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

dscp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a CoS value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

template data timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a template data timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

options timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies an options timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

exporter (netflow-lite monitor submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is supported only on Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To assign an exporter in netflow-lite monitor submode, use the exporter command. To delete a sampler, use the no form of this command.

exporter exporter-name

no exporter exporter-name

Syntax Description

exporter-name

Specifies an exporter.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

Usage Guidelines

You can enter this command under the physical port interface mode, port channel interface, or config VLAN mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a monitor on a port interface Gigabit 1/3:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# int GigabitEthernet1/3

Switch(config-if)# netflow-lite monitor 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# sampler sampler1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# average-packet-size 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# exit

Switch(config-if)# exit

Switch(config)# exit

Switch# show netflow-lite monitor 1 interface gi1/3

Interface GigabitEthernet1/3:

Netflow-lite Monitor-1:

Active: TRUE

Sampler: sampler1

Exporter: exporter1

Average Packet Size: 0

Statistics:

Packets exported: 0

Packets observed: 0

Packets dropped: 0

Average Packet Size observed: 64

Average Packet Size used: 64

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite exporter privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

sampler (netflow-lite monitor submode)

Activate sampling on an interface in netflow-lite monitor submode.

average-packet-size (netflow-lite monitor submode)

Specifies the average packet size at the observation point.

exporter (netflow-lite monitor submode)

Assigns an exporter in netflow-lite monitor submode.

fabric auto

To enable automatic fabric provisioning and enter automatic fabric configuration mode, use the fabric auto command in global configuration mode.

fabric auto

Syntax Description

fabric auto

Enables automatic fabric provisioning and enters fabric-auto configuration mode.

Command Default

None.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

3.9.01E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500-E series switch using a Supervisor Engines 8-E and 8L-E.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to configure all the elements in your fabric domain automatically. The fabric auto command enables the auto-generation of LISP, VLAN, VRF configuration to orchestrate the fabric overlay. The show-running configuration command shows the fabric domain configuration including the and auto-generated base line commands.

Examples

Device(config)# fabric auto

flowcontrol

To configure a Gigabit Ethernet interface to send or receive pause frames, use the flowcontrol command. To disable the flow control setting, use the no form of this command.

flowcontrol {receive | send} {off | on | desired}

no flowcontrol {receive | send} {off | on | desired}

Syntax Description

receive

Specifies that the interface processes pause frames.

send

Specifies that the interface sends pause frames.

off

Prevents a local port from receiving and processing pause frames from remote ports or from sending pause frames to remote ports.

on

Enables a local port to receive and process pause frames from remote ports or send pause frames to remote ports.

desired

Obtains predictable results whether a remote port is set to on, off, or desired.

Command Default

The default settings for Gigabit Ethernet interfaces are as follows:

- Sending pause frames is off—Non-oversubscribed Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

- Receiving pause frames is desired—Non-oversubscribed Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

- Sending pause frames is on—Oversubscribed Gigabit Ethernet interfaces.

- Receiving pause frames is desired—Oversubscribed Gigabit Ethernet i nterfaces.

Table 2-3 shows the default settings for the modules.

Table 2-3 Default Module Settings

Module

Ports

Send

All modules except WS-X4418-GB and WS-X4416-2GB-TX

All ports except for the oversubscribed ports

Off

WS-X4418-GB

Uplink ports (1–2)

Off

WS-X4418-GB

Oversubscribed ports (3–18)

On

WS-X4412-2GB-TX

Uplink ports (13–14)

Off

WS-X4412-2GB-TX

Oversubscribed ports (1–12)

On

WS-X4416-2GB-TX

Uplink ports (17–18)

Off

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The pause frames are special packets that signal a source to stop sending frames for a specific period of time because the buffers are full.

Table 2-4 describes the guidelines for using the different configurations of the send and receive keywords with the flowcontrol command.

Table 2-4 Keyword Configurations for send and receive

Configuration

Description

send on

Enables a local port to send pause frames to remote ports. To obtain predictable results, use send on only when remote ports are set to receive on or receive desired.

send off

Prevents a local port from sending pause frames to remote ports. To obtain predictable results, use send off only when remote ports are set to receive off or receive desired.

send desired

Obtains predictable results whether a remote port is set to receive on, receive off, or receive desired.

receive on

Enables a local port to process pause frames that a remote port sends. To obtain predictable results, use receive on only when remote ports are set to send on or send desired.

receive off

Prevents remote ports from sending pause frames to a local port. To obtain predictable results, use send off only when remote ports are set to receive off or receive desired.

receive desired

Obtains predictable results whether a remote port is set to send on, send off, or send desired.

Table 2-5 identifies how the flow control will be forced or negotiated on the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces based on their speed settings.

Table 2-5 Send Capability by Switch Type, Module, and Port

Interface Type

Configured Speed

Advertised Flow Control

10/100/1000BASE-TX

Speed 1000

Configured flow control always

1000BASE-T

Negotiation always enabled

Configured flow control always negotiated

1000BASE-X

No speed nonegotiation

Configured flow control negotiated

1000BASE-X

Speed nonegotiation

Configured flow control forced

Examples

The following example shows how to enable send flow control:

Switch(config-if)# flowcontrol receive on

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to disable send flow control:

Switch(config-if)# flowcontrol send off

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to set receive flow control to desired:

Switch(config-if)# flowcontrol receive desired

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

interface port-channel

Accesses or creates a port-channel interface.

interface range

Runs a command on multiple ports at the same time.

show flowcontrol

Displays the per-interface status and statistics related to flow control.

show running-config

Displays the running-configuration for a switch.

speed

Configures the interface speed.

hardware statistics

To enable TCAM hardware statistics in your ACLs use the hardware statistics command. To disable TCAM hardware statistics, use the no form of this command.

hardware statistics

no hardware statistics

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Hardware statistics is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

Support introduced on Supervisor Engine 6-E and Catalyst 4900M.

Usage Guidelines

TCAM hardware on Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F do not have sufficient hardware statistics entries for every classification/QoS cam entry. Therefore, the statistics for each cam entry needs to be enabled as needed.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable TCAM hardware statistics in your ACLs ace:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)#ip access-list extended myv4

Switch(config-ext-nacl)#permit ip any any

Switch(config-ext-nacl)#hardware statistics

Switch(config-ext-nacl)#end

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip access list (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Creates an IP ACL (Access Control List).

ipv6 access list (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Creates an IPv6 ACL.

mac access-list extended

Defines the extended MAC access lists.

host-pool name

To create an IP pool to group endpoints in the fabric domain, and enter host-pool configuration mode, use the host-pool name name command in global configuration mode.

host-pool name name {host-vlan id} {gateway ip address mask} [context name name] {use-dhcp ip address}

Syntax Description

host-vlan id

Configures a VLAN ID to associate with the host-pool.

gateway ipv4 address mask

Configures the routing gateway IP address and subnet mask for the host-pool.

context name name

Associates a context or a VRF to the host-pool.

use-dhcp ipv4 address

Configures a DHCP server for the host-pool.

Command Default

None.

Command Modes

Fabric-auto-domain configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

3.9.01E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500-E series switch using a Supervisor Engines 8-E and 8L-E.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to group endpoints in the fabric domain into IP pools, and identify them with a VLAN ID, an IP subnet, and optionally, to a context or VRF in the fabric domain.

This command auto-generates LISP configuration, to orchestrate the fabric overlay. The show-running configuration command shows the fabric domain configuration including the auto-generated commands.

Examples

This example configures a host-pool in your fabric domain.

device(config-fabric-auto-domain)#host-pool name VOICE_DOMAIN

device(config-fabric-auto-domain-host-pool)#vlan 10

device(config-fabric-auto-domain-host-pool)#gateway 192.168.1.254/24

device(config-fabric-auto-domain-host-pool)#context name example-context

device(config-fabric-auto-domain-host-pool)#use-dhcp 172.10.1.1

device(config-fabric-auto-domain-host-pool)#exit

This configuration is auto-generated when you configure a host-pool:

ip dhcp relay information option vpn

ip dhcp relay information option

ip dhcp snooping vlan 10

ip dhcp snooping

vlan 10

name VOICE_DOMAIN

interface Vlan10

ip vrf forwarding example-context

ip dhcp relay source-interface Loopback0

ip address 192.168.1.254 255.255.255.0

ip helper-address global 209.65.201.6

no ip redirects

ip local-proxy-arp

ip route-cache same-interface

no lisp mobility liveness test

lisp mobility example-context.EID.VOICE_DOMAIN

!

router lisp

eid-table vrf example-context

dynamic-eid example-context.EID.VOICE_DOMAIN

database-mapping 192.168.1.0/24 locator-set default.RLOC

hw-module beacon

Note The hw-module beacon command is enabled only on the uplink modules of the WS-C4500X-32.

To control the beacon LED in conjunction with the beacon button, enter the hw-module beacon command:

hw-module beacon [on | off]

Syntax Description

on

Turns on the LED.

off

Turns off the LED.

Command Default

none

Command Modes

global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS-XE 3.3.0SG (15.1(1)SG)

This command was introduced on WS-C4500X-32.

Usage Guidelines

Either press the beacon button on the front side of the switch or enter the hw-mod beacon command, so the switch is identifiable when the operator walks around the isle to the back side of the switch. (The LED and the CLI function as switch identifiers when multiple units are present.)

Pressing the blue beacon LED switch toggles the beacon LED state.

Examples

If numerous WS-C4500X-32 chassis are in close proximity and you want to remove a transceiver from one chassis’ port 11, you can identify it with the hw-module beacon on command:

Switch# hw-module beacon on

Switch#

*Feb 16 13:12:24.418: %C4K_IOSMODPORTMAN-6-BEACONTURNEDON: Beacon has been turned on

The WS-C4500X-32 whose beacon was turned on is the switch you are looking for.

After you complete the necessary service on a switch with the beacon LED turned on, you should either press the beacon button to turn it off, or enter the hw-module beacon off command to turn the LED off.

Switch# hw-module beacon off

Switch#

*Feb 16 13:12:18.083: %C4K_IOSMODPORTMAN-6-BEACONTURNEDOFF: Beacon has been turned off

hw-module module start

Note The hw-module module start command is enabled only on the uplink modules of the WS-C4500X-32.

To boot a module after if it has been stopped, use the hw-module module start command:

hw-module module number start

Syntax Description

number

Uplink module ID. The only applicable value for WS-C4500 is 2.

Command Default

none

Command Modes

global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS-XE 3.3.0SG (15.1(1)SG)

This command was introduced on WS-C4500X-32.

Usage Guidelines

To bring up a module that has been stopped using the hw-module module number stop command or by pressing the OIR button, you either enter the hw-module module number start command or physically remove and reinsert.

Examples

The following example shows what happens if a module has been stopped and you enter this command:

Switch# hw-module module 2 start

Switch#

*Feb 5 16:36:27.352: %C4K_IOSMODPORTMAN-6-MODULEINSERTED: Module 2 is inserted

*Feb 5 16:37:15.902: %C4K_IOSMODPORTMAN-6-MODULEONLINE: Module 2 (WS-X4908X-10G-TIM S/N: JAE15340C0J Hw: 0.1) is online

Switch#show module

Chassis Type : WS-C4500X-32

Power consumed by backplane : 0 Watts

Mod Ports Card Type Model Serial No.

---+-----+--------------------------------------+------------------+-----------

1 32 4500X-32 10GE (SFP+) WS-C4900X-32P-10G JAE153505E9

2 8 10GE SFP+ WS-X4908X-10G-TIM JAE15340C0J

M MAC addresses Hw Fw Sw Status

--+--------------------------------+---+------------+----------------+---------

1 0022.bde2.1061 to 0022.bde2.1080 0.2 15.0(1r)SG(0 0.DEV-0 Ok

2 0022.bde2.1579 to 0022.bde2.1580 0.1 Ok

Switch#

The following example shows what happens if a module has not been stopped and you enter this command:

Switch# hw-module module 2 start

% Module 2 not stopped

Related Commands

Command

Description

hw-module module stop

Shuts down a module and makes it safe for removal.

hw-module module stop

Note The hw-module module stop command is enabled only on the uplink modules of the WS-C4500X-32.

To shut down a module and make it safe for removal, enter the hw-module module stop command:

hw-module module number stop

Syntax Description

number

Uplink module ID. The only applicable value for WS-C4500 is 2.

Command Default

none

Command Modes

global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS-XE 3.3.0SG (15.1(1)SG)

This command was introduced on WS-C4500X-32.

Usage Guidelines

To initiate uplink module OIR w/o pressing the OIR button.

Examples

The following example shows what happens if a module is up and you enter the hw-module module stop command:

Switch# hw-module module 2 stop

Proceed with module stop? [confirm]

Switch#

*Feb 5 16:34:37.325: %C4K_IOSMODPORTMAN-6-MODULEOFFLINE: Module 2 is offline

Switch#show module

Chassis Type : WS-C4500X-32

Power consumed by backplane : 0 Watts

Mod Ports Card Type Model Serial No.

---+-----+--------------------------------------+------------------+-----------

1 32 4500X-32 10GE (SFP+) WS-C4900X-32P-10G JAE153505E9

2 8 Module being held in reset WS-X4908X-10G-TIM JAE15340C0J

M MAC addresses Hw Fw Sw Status

--+--------------------------------+---+------------+----------------+---------

1 0022.bde2.1061 to 0022.bde2.1080 0.2 15.0(1r)SG(0 0.DEV-0 Ok

2 0022.bde2.1579 to 0022.bde2.1580 0.1 In Reset

Switch#

The following example shows what happens if a module is already stopped and you enter the hw-module module stop commandd:

Switch# hw-module module 2 stop

% Module 2 stopped

Related Commands

Command

Description

hw-module module start

Boots a module after if it has been stopped.

hw-module port-group

To select either Gigabit Ethernet or 10-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on your module, use the hw-module port-group command.

hw-module module number port-group number select [gigabitethernet | tengigabitethernet]

Syntax Description

module

Specifies a line module.

number

Specifies a module which supports TwinGig converter.

port-group number

Port group number on a switch.

select

Specifies an interface type; valid values are Gigabit Ethernet and 10-Gigabit Ethernet.

gigabitethernet

(Optional) Specifies Gigabit Ethernet.

tengigabitethernet

(Optional) Specifies 10-Gigabit Ethernet.

Command Default

10 Gigabit.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

Support for TwinGig converter module introduced.

Usage Guidelines

This command is available on the Cisco Catalyst 4500 modules that support TwinGig converter modules, such as the Supervisor Engine 6-E and WS-X4606-10GE-E.

Examples

The following example shows how to select Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on a WS-X4606-10GE-E using the TwinGig Converter:

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# hw-module module 1 port-group 1 select gigabitethernet

Switch(config)# exit

Use the show interfaces status command to display your configuration.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show hw-module port-group

Displays how the X2 holes on a module are grouped.

show interfaces status

Displays the interface status or a list of interfaces in error-disabled state.

hw-module power

To turn the power off on a slot or line module, use the no hw-module power command. To turn the power back on, use the hw-module power command.

hw-module [slot | module] number power

no hw-module [slot | module] number power

Syntax Description

slot

(Optional) Specifies a slot on a chassis.

module

(Optional) Specifies a line module.

number

Slot or module number.

Command Default

After a boot up, the power is on.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(18)EW

Add slot and module keywords.

Usage Guidelines

After you enter no hw-mod mod x power command and OIR the linecard, the configuratio persists and is valid for any slot in the chassis it is applied to.

Examples

The following example shows how to shut off power to a module in slot 5:

Switch(config)# no hw-module slot 5 power

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear hw-module slot password

Clears the password on an intelligent line module.

hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1/2

Note This command is supported only on a 10-slot chassis.

To enable support for the WS-X4640-CSFP-E linecard in a 10-slot chassis, use the hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2 command. To restore the default mode, use hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1 command or use the no form of the commands.

[no] hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1

OR

[no] hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2

Syntax Description

hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2

Enables a chassis with 80 ports and 5 Line card slots.

hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1

Restores the default mode (48 ports and 8 Line card slots).

no hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1

Restores the default mode (48 ports and 8 Line card slots).

no hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2

Restores the default mode (48 ports and 8 Line card slots).

Command Default

Unless max-port-num-mode is configured to 2, system assumes max-port-num-mode1 as the default mode with 48 ports and 8 LC slots.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

Release IOS XE 3.5.0E and IOS 15.2(1)E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable support for the WS-X4640-CSFP-E linecard in a 10-slot chassis:

Switch# enable

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# hw-module system max-port-num-mode ?

1 Select this to enable Chassis with 48 ports and 8 Line card slots

2 Select this to enable Chassis with 80 ports and 5 Line card slots

Switch(config)# hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2

A reload of the active supervisor is required to apply the new configuration.

After reload, last 3 Line card slots will not be active

Switch(config)# end

hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1/2 switch 1/2/all

Note This command is supported only in VSS mode on a 10-slot chassis.

To enable support for the WS-X4640-CSFP-E linecard in a 10-slot chassis which is present in VSS, use hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2 switch 1, hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2 switch 2, or hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2 switch All commands. (1, 2, and All (both switches) specify the switch number to which max-port-num-mode applies.)

To restore the default mode, use hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1 switch 1, hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1 switch 2, hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1 switch All or the no form of the commands.

[no] hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1 switch 1.

[no] hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1 switch 2,

[no] hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1 switch All

[no] hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2 switch 1

[no] hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2 switch 2,

[no] hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2 switch All

Syntax Description

hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2 switch 1

Enables a chassis with 80 ports and five linecard slots for switch 1.

hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2 switch 2

Enables a chassis with 80 ports and five linecard slots for switch 2.

hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2 switch All

Enables a chassis with 80 ports and five linecard slots for switch 1 and 2.

hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1 switch 1

Restores the default mode (48 ports and 8 Line card slots) for switch 1.

hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1 switch 2

Restores the default mode (48 ports and 8 Line card slots) for switch 2.

hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1 switch All

Restores the default mode (48 ports and 8 Line card slots) for switches 1 and 2.

no hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1 switch 1

Restores the default mode (48 ports and 8 Line card slots) for switch 1.

no hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1 switch 2

Restores the default mode(48 ports and 8 Line card slots) for switch 2.

no hw-module system max-port-num-mode 1 switch All

Restores the default mode (48 ports and 8 Line card slots) for switches 1 and 2.

no hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2 switch 1

Restores the default mode (48 ports and 8 Line card slots) for switch 1.

no hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2 switch 2

Restores the default modes(48 ports and 8 Line card slots) for the switch 2.

no hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2 switch All

Restore the default mode (48 ports and 8 Line card slots) for switches 1 and 2.

Command Default

Unless max-port-num-mode is set to 2, switch 1 assumes max-port-num-mode1 as the default mode with 48 ports and 8 linecard slots. Switch 2 behaves similarly.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

Release IOS XE 3.5.0E and IOS 15.2(1)E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command can be applied for individual switches or for all the switches in VSS by specifying the switch number. The switch number option is visible on the active switch provided a 10-slot chassis is present in the VSS mode.

The switch mode conversion from stand-alone to virtual and virtual to stand-alone automatically converts max-port-num-mode to the default mode (mode 1), irrespective of the existing mode configuration. max-port-num-mode is configured separately for VSS and the stand-alone switch after a switch mode conversion and reboot. Moreover the VSL port configured in WS-X4640-CSFP-E linecard in stand-alone mode is unavailable after a switch mode conversion from stand-alone to virtual.

VSS operations cannot be performed in mode 2 where the VSL port is configured beyond the 5th linecard (7th slot).

Examples

The following example shows how to enable support for the WS-X4640-CSFP-E linecard in a 10-slot chassis:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2 switch ?

1 Switch Number One

2 Switch Number Two

All Both switches

Switch(config)# hw-module system max-port-num-mode 2 switch 2

A 'redundancy reload shelf' or power-cycle of chassis is required to apply the new configuration.

After reload, last 3 Line card slots will not be active in Switch 2

Switch(config)# end

hw-module system max-queue-limit

To enable a user to change the queue limit for all interfaces globally use the hw-module system max-queue-limit command. To cancel the global setting, use the no form of the command.

hw-module system max-queue-limit max-queue-limit

no hw-module system max-queue-limit max-queue-limit

Syntax Description

max-queue-limit

Specifies the queue limit for all interfaces. Valid values are from 1024 to 8184. This parameter must be a multiple of 8.

Command Default

Not enabled by default

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG1, and 3.2.1SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command allows you to change the queue limit for all interfaces globally rather than apply a policy with a queue limit to all the interfcaes.

This is a global configuration command. It can be overriden by the per port, per class, queue-limit command.

For a standalone supervisor engine, you must reboot the engine after applying this command. For a redundant supervisor engine, you must enter the redundancy reload shelf command to enforce a reboot on both the supervisor engines.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the queue limit globally to 1024:

Switch> enable

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# hw-module system max-queue-limit 1024

Need to reboot to take effect max queue limit

Switch(config)# exit

Switch# reload (for standalone supervisors)

Switch# redundancy reload shelf (for reduandancy supervisors in SSO mode)

or

Switch# redundancy force-switchover (followed by another redundancy force-switchover, for reduandancy supervisors in RPR mode

hw-module uplink mode

To change the uplink mode so that you can use the shared-backplane or the tengigabitethernet mode. To disable shared-backplane uplink mode, use the no form of the command.

hw-module uplink mode [shared-backplane | tengigabitethernet]

no hw-module uplink mode [shared-backplane | tengigabitethernet]

Syntax Description

shared-backplane

(Optional) Specifies the four Ten-Gigabit Ethernet uplinks as blocking ports on the Supervisor Engine 6-E and Catalyst 4900 M chassis when operating in redundant mode.

tengigabitethernet

(Optional) Specifies the two Ten-Gigabit Ethernet uplinks on Supervisor Engine 6-E with the WS-X4640-CSFP-E linecard.

Command Default

Only two 10-Gigabit Ethernet ports or four 1-Gigabit Ethernet ports can be used on the supervisor engine.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(44)SG

Support for shared-backplane keyword was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch

IOS-XE 3.3.0SG (15.1(1)SG)

Support for tengigabitethernet keyword was introduced on the Supervisor Engine 6-E.

Usage Guidelines

When changing the uplink mode using the hw-module uplink mode shared-backplane command, you must reload the system. A message appears on the console to reflect this.

On a Supervisor Engine 6-E in a 6 or 7-slot chassis (Catalyst 4506-E, 4507R-E, and 4507R+E), the default uplink mode does not allow a WS-X4640-CSFP-E linecard to boot in the last slot because of a hardware limitation. After you the hw-module uplink mode tengigabitethernet command, you must reload the system to enable TenGig mode. The configuration is NVGEN’d after you save the running configuration to the startup configuration. You can use the show run | incl uplink command to check the uplink configuration before reloading the system. Furthermore, you can can enter the show hw-module uplink command to display the uplink mode. It reports the current uplink mode, as well as the mode after the system reloads.

In uplink TenGig mode, the uplink is limited to two 10-Gigabit Ethernet interfaces in non-redundant and in redundant mode; Gigabit Etnernet interfaces are not supported. The WS-X4640-CSFP-E linecard boots in the last slot on 6 and 7-slot chassis. To return to default mode, reload the system from tengigabitethernet mode. SharedBackplane mode can be selected from Default mode, where a system reload is required as well.

The hw-module module x port-group x select gigabitethernet command is blocked in uplink TenGig mode, preventing you from selecting gigabitethernet mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable shared-backplane uplink mode:

Switch(config)# hw-module uplink mode shared-backplane

A reload of the active supervisor is required to apply the new configuration.

Switch(config)# exit

Switch#

The following example shows how to disable shared-backplane uplink mode:

Switch(config)# no hw-module uplink mode shared-backplane

A reload of the active supervisor is required to apply the new configuration.

Switch(config)# exit

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the current state of uplink-mode:

Switch# show hw-module uplink

Active uplink mode configuration is Default

(will be Shared-backplane after next reload)

A reload of active supervisor is required to apply the new configuration.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show hw-module uplink

Displays hardware-module uplink information.

hw-module uplink select

To select the 10-Gigabit Ethernet, or Gigabit Ethernet uplinks on a Supervisor Engine V-10GE in a WS-C4510R chassis, or Supervisor 7L-E in a WS-C4507R chassis, use the hw-module uplink select command.

Note Supervisor Engine 7L-E is not supported on a ten-slot chassis (WS-C4510R.

hw-module uplink select {tengigabitethernet | gigabitethernet | all}

hw-module uplink select {tengigabitethernet | gigabitethernet} (Sup-7L-E only)

Note Option all is not supported on Supervisor Engine 7L-E.

Syntax Description

tengigabitethernet

(Optional) Specifies the 10-Gigabit Ethernet uplinks.

gigabitethernet

(Optional) Specifies the Gigabit Ethernet uplinks.

all

(Optional) Specifies all uplinks (10-Gigabit Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet).

Command Default

tengigabitethernet

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)SG

Support for the all keyword was added.

15.0(2)XO

The number of uplink ports for Supervisor Engine 7L-E in a WS-C4507R chassis depends on the supervisor engine mode (single or redundandant) and the uplink mode configuration (1-Gigabit or 10-Gigabit).

Usage Guidelines

On a Supervisor Engine V-10GE (WS-X4516-10GE) in a 10-slot chassis (Catalyst 4510R and 4510R-E), if a startup configuration with a new uplink mode is copied into flash memory and the system is power cycled, the system will not come up with the new uplink mode. After copying the startup configuration with the new uplink mode into flash memory, the uplink mode must be changed to the new uplink mode through the command interface before the system is power cycled. This ensures that the system comes up in the new uplink mode.

Supervisor Engine V-10GE and Supervisor Engine II+10GE support 10-Gigabit Ethernet and Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports. On the Supervisor Engine II+10GE, all uplink ports are always available. Similarly, when a Supervisor Engine V-10GE is plugged into a W-C4503, W-4506, or W-4507R chassis, all uplink ports are always available. When a Supervisor Engine V-10GE is plugged into a W-4510R chassis, you can choose to use the 10-Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports, the Gigabit Ethernet uplink ports, or all uplink ports. If you choose to use all uplink ports, then the tenth slot will support only the WS-X4302-GB switching linecard. Be aware that this command takes effect only after a reload (after you have executed the redundancy reload shelf command).

Because the uplink selection is programmed into hardware during initialization, changing the active uplinks requires saving the configuration and reloading the switch. When you are configuring a change to the uplinks, the system responds with a message informing you that the switch must be reloaded and suggesting the appropriate command (depending on redundancy mode) to reload the switch.

If you select the all keyword, ensure that the tenth slot is either empty or has a WS-X4302-GB switching module.

A no form of this command does not exist. To undo the configuration, you must configure the uplinks.

For Supervisor Engine 7L-E in a WS-C4507R chassis , the number of uplink options depends on the supervisor engine mode (single or redundandant) and the uplink mode configuration (1-Gigabit or 10-Gigabit)

Single Supervisor Mode

In single supervisor mode, Supervisor Engine 7L-E supports the uplink configuration of at most either two 10-Gigabit or four 1-Gigabit ports (Table 2-6).

Table 2-6 Uplink Options for Single Supervisor Mode

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Slot 4

Speeds Achievable with the Following Combination of Pluggables (Band Width)

Choose 10-Gigabit operation through the command line interface.

SFP+

SFP+

—

—

20 Gbps

SFP+

SFP

—

—

11 Gbps

SFP

SFP+

—

—

11 Gbps

SFP

SFP

—

—

2 Gbps

Choose 1-Gigabit operation through the command line interface.

SFP

SFP

SFP

SFP

4 Gbps

Redundant Supervisor Mode

In redundant supervisor mode, Supervisor Engine 7L-E support 1+1 (in 10-Gigabit mode) and 2+2 (in 1-Gigabit mode) (Table 2-7).

Note No redundancy support exists for slots 3 and 4.

Table 2-7 Uplink Options for Redundant Supervisor Mode

Active Supervisor Uplink Ports

Standby Supervisor Uplink Ports

A1

A2

A3

A4

B1

B2

B3

B4

Speeds Achievable with this Combination of Pluggables

Choose 10-Gigabit operation through the command line interface.

SFP+

—

—

—

SFP+

—

—

—

20 Gbps

SFP+

—

—

—

SFP

—

—

—

11 Gbps

SFP

—

—

—

SFP+

—

—

—

11 Gbps

SFP

—

—

—

SFP

—

—

—

2 Gbps

Choose 1-Gigabit operation through the command line interface.

SFP

SFP

—

—

SFP

SFP

—

—

4 Gbps

Examples

The following example shows how to select the Gigabit Ethernet uplinks:

Switch(config)# hw-module uplink select gigabitethernet

A reload of the active supervisor is required to apply the new configuration.

Switch(config)# exit

Switch#

Note The Gigabit Ethernet uplinks will be active after the next reload.

The following example shows how to select the Gigabit Ethernet uplinks in a redundant system in SSO mode:

Switch(config)# hw-module uplink select gigabitethernet

A 'redundancy reload shelf' or power-cycle of chassis is required to apply the new configuration

Switch(config)# exit

Switch#

Note The Gigabit Ethernet uplinks will be active after the next reload of the chassis/shelf. Use the

redundancy reload shelf command to reload the chassis/shelf.

The following example shows how to select the Gigabit Ethernet uplinks in a redundant system in RPR mode:

Switch(config)# hw-module uplink select gigabitethernet

A reload of the active supervisor is required to apply the new configuration.

Switch(config)# exit

Switch#

Note The Gigabit Ethernet uplinks will be active on a switchover or reload of the active supervisor engine.

The following example shows how to select all the uplinks in a redundant system in SSO mode:

Switch(config)# hw-module uplink select all

Warning: This configuration mode may disable slot10.

A 'redundancy reload shelf' or power-cycle of chassis is required to apply the new configuration.

Switch(config)# exit

Switch#

Note If you select the all keyword, only the Drome board will be supported in the tenth slot of the supervisor engine.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show hw-module uplink

Displays hardware-module uplink information.

instance

To map a VLAN or a set of VLANs to an MST instance, use the instance command. To return the VLANs to the common instance default, use the no form of this command.

instance instance-id {vlans vlan-range}

no instance instance-id

Syntax Description

instance-id

MST instance to which the specified VLANs are mapped; valid values are from 0 to 15.

vlans vlan-range

Specifies the number of the VLANs to be mapped to the specified instance. The number is entered as a single value or a range; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

Mapping is disabled.

Command Modes

MST configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The mapping is incremental, not absolute. When you enter a range of VLANs, this range is added or removed to the existing ones.

Any unmapped VLAN is mapped to the CIST instance.

Examples

The following example shows how to map a range of VLANs to instance 2:

Switch(config-mst)# instance 2 vlans 1-100

Switch(config-mst)#

The following example shows how to map a VLAN to instance 5:

Switch(config-mst)# instance 5 vlans 1100

Switch(config-mst)#

The following example shows how to move a range of VLANs from instance 2 to the CIST instance:

Switch(config-mst)# no instance 2 vlans 40-60

Switch(config-mst)#

The following example shows how to move all the VLANs mapped to instance 2 back to the CIST instance:

Switch(config-mst)# no instance 2

Switch(config-mst)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

name

Sets the MST region name.

revision

Sets the MST configuration revision number.

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST protocol information.

spanning-tree mst configuration

Enters the MST configuration submode.

interface

To select an interface to configure and to enter interface configuration mode, use the interface command.

interface type number

Syntax Description

type

Type of interface to be configured; see Valid type Values for valid values.

number

Module and port number.

Command Default

No interface types are configured.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)EW

Extended to include the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Usage Guidelines

Table 2-8 lists the valid values for type.

Table 2-8 Valid type Values

Keyword

Definition

ethernet

Ethernet IEEE 802.3 interface.

fastethernet

100-Mbps Ethernet interface.

gigabitethernet

Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3z interface.

tengigabitethernet

10-Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3ae interface.

ge-wan

Gigabit Ethernet WAN IEEE 802.3z interface; supported on Catalyst 4500 series switches that are configured with a Supervisor Engine 2 only.

pos

Packet OC-3 interface on the Packet over SONET Interface Processor; supported on Catalyst 4500 series switches that are configured with a Supervisor Engine 2 only.

atm

ATM interface; supported on Catalyst 4500 series switches that are configured with a Supervisor Engine 2 only.

vlan

VLAN interface; see the interface vlan command.

port-channel

Port channel interface; see the interface port-channel command.

null

Null interface; the valid value is 0.

Examples

The following example shows how to enter the interface configuration mode on the Fast Ethernet interface 2/4:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet2/4

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces

Displays interface information.

interface (virtual switch)

To select an interface to configure and enter interface configuration mode, use the interface global configuration mode command.

interface [interface switch-num/slot/port.subinterface}

Syntax Description

interface

Specifies the interface to be configured; see Valid type Values for valid values.

switch-num

Specifies a switch ID.

slot

Specifies a slot number.

port

Specifies a port number.

.subinterface

Specifies the port subinterface number.

Command Default

No interface types are configured.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

Support introduced on the Catalyt 4500 Series Switch.

Usage Guidelines

Table 2-9 lists the valid values for type.

Table 2-9 Valid type Values

Keyword

Definition

fastethernet

Fast Ethernet 802.3

gigabitethernet

Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3z interface.

tengigabitethernet

10-Gigabit Ethernet IEEE 802.3ae interface.

vlan

VLAN interface; see the interface vlan command.

port-channel

Port channel interface; see the interface port-channel command.

null

Null interface; the valid value is 0.

tunnel

Tunnel interface

Examples

The following example shows how to enter the interface configuration mode on the GigabitEthernet interface for switch 1, module 2, port 4:

Router(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/2/4

Router(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces (virtual switch)

Displays the traffic that is seen by a specific interface.

set ip next-hop verify-availability

To configure policy routing to verify the reachability of the next hop of a route map before the device performs policy routing to that next hop, use the set ip next-hop verify-availability command in route-map configuration mode. To disable this function, use the no form of this command.

set ip next-hop verify-availability [ next-hop-address sequence track object ]

no set ip next-hop verify-availability [ next-hop-address sequence track object ]

Syntax Description

next-hop address

(Optional) IP address of the next hop to which packets will be forwarded.

sequence

(Optional) Sequence of next hops. The acceptable range is from 1 to 65535.

track

(Optional) The tracking method is track.

object

(Optional) Object number that the tracking subsystem is tracking. The acceptable range is from 1 to 500.

Command Default

The reachability of the next hop of a route map before the device performs policy routing, is not verified.

Command Modes

Route-map configuration (config-route-map)

Command History

Release

Modification

Cisco IOS XE 3.8.0E and IOS 15.2(4)E

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

The set ip next-hop verify-availability command can be used with policy-based routing (PBR) to verify next hop reachability to support object tracking using Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) ping to verify if a remote device is reachable.

Examples

The following example shows you how to verify the next-hop IP address in a route map:

Switch# enable

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# track 100 ip sla 100

Switch(config)# ip sla 100

switch(config-ip-sla)# icmp-echo 172.19.255.253 source-ip 172.19.255.47

switch(config-ip-sla-echo)# timeout 1500

switch(config-ip-sla-echo)# threshold 1000

switch(config-ip-sla-echo)# frequency 2

switch(config)# ip sla schedule 100 life forever start-time now

switch(config)# route-map alpha permit 10

switch(config-route-map)# match ip address exlist

switch(config-route-map)# set ip next-hop verify-availability 95.1.1.2 1 track 100

switch# show route-map alpha

switch# show track 100

Related Commands

Command

Description

show route-map

Displays the configured route maps.

show track

Displays information about objects that are tracked by the tracking process.

track

Tracks the state of an interface, an ip route, or a response time reporter.

interface port-channel

To access or create a port-channel interface, use the interface port-channel command.

interface port-channel channel-group

Syntax Description

channel-group

Port-channel group number; valid values are from 1 to 64.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You do not have to create a port-channel interface before assigning a physical interface to a channel group. A port-channel interface is created automatically when the channel group gets its first physical interface, if it is not already created.

You can also create the port channels by entering the interface port-channel command. This will create a Layer 3 port channel. To change the Layer 3 port channel into a Layer 2 port channel, use the switchport command before you assign the physical interfaces to the channel group. A port channel cannot be changed from Layer 3 to Layer 2 or vice versa when it contains member ports.

Only one port channel in a channel group is allowed.

Caution The Layer 3 port-channel interface is the routed interface. Do not enable Layer 3 addresses on the physical Fast Ethernet interfaces.

If you want to use CDP, you must configure it only on the physical Fast Ethernet interface and not on the port-channel interface.

Examples

This example creates a port-channel interface with a channel-group number of 64:

Switch(config)# interface port-channel 64

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

channel-group

Assigns and configures an EtherChannel interface to an EtherChannel group.

show etherchannel

Displays EtherChannel information for a channel.

interface range

To run a command on multiple ports at the same time, use the interface range command.

interface range {vlan vlan_id - vlan_id} {port-range | macro name}

Syntax Description

vlan vlan_id - vlan_id

Specifies a VLAN range; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

port-range

Port range; for a list of valid values for port-range, see the “Usage Guidelines” section.

macro name

Specifies the name of a macro.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended VLAN addresses added.

Usage Guidelines

You can use the interface range command on the existing VLAN SVIs only. To display the VLAN SVIs, enter the show running config command. The VLANs that are not displayed cannot be used in the interface range command.

The values that are entered with the interface range command are applied to all the existing VLAN SVIs.

Before you can use a macro, you must define a range using the define interface-range command.

All configuration changes that are made to a port range are saved to NVRAM, but the port ranges that are created with the interface range command do not get saved to NVRAM.

You can enter the port range in two ways:

- Specifying up to five port ranges

- Specifying a previously defined macro

You can either specify the ports or the name of a port-range macro. A port range must consist of the same port type, and the ports within a range cannot span the modules.

You can define up to five port ranges on a single command; separate each range with a comma.

When you define a range, you must enter a space between the first port and the hyphen (-):

interface range gigabitethernet 5/1 -20, gigabitethernet4/5 -20.

Use these formats when entering the port-range:

- interface-type { mod }/{ first-port } - { last-port }

- interface-type { mod }/{ first-port } - { last-port }

Valid values for interface-type are as follows:

- FastEthernet

- GigabitEthernet

- Vlan vlan_id

Although the port-channel interface range is 1 to 256, in a VSS setup, there is a discrepancy in the way the range is displayed on the CLI when you enter the beginning of the interface range before you enter the ? prompt. This discrepancy is not seen on a standalone switch.

When you enter the beginning of the interface range, the CLI output is displayed as follows:

Switch(config)# interface range port-channel 1 -?

<1-128>  end interface number

To continue, you have to enter the beginning of the next number range:

Switch(config)# interface range port-channel 129 - ?

<129-256>  end interface number

If you do not enter the beginning of the interface range, the CLI output is displayed as follows:

Switch (config)# interface range port-channel ?

<1-256>  Port-channel interface number

You cannot specify both a macro and an interface range in the same command. After creating a macro, you can enter additional ranges. If you have already entered an interface range, the CLI does not allow you to enter a macro.

You can specify a single interface in the port-range value. This makes the command similar to the interface interface-number command.

Examples

The following example shows how to use the interface range command to interface to FE 5/18 - 20:

Switch(config)# interface range fastethernet 5/18 - 20

Switch(config-if)#

This command shows how to run a port-range macro:

Switch(config)# interface range macro macro1

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

define interface-range

Creates a macro of interfaces.

show running config (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Displays the running configuration for a switch.

interface vlan

To create or access a Layer 3 switch virtual interface (SVI), use the interface vlan command. To delete an SVI, use the no form of this command.

interface vlan vlan_id

no interface vlan vlan_id

Syntax Description

vlan_id

Number of the VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

Fast EtherChannel is not specified.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended addressing was added.

Usage Guidelines

The SVIs are created the first time that you enter the interface vlan vlan_id command for a particular VLAN. The vlan_id value corresponds to the VLAN tag that is associated with the data frames on an ISL or 802.1Q-encapsulated trunk or the VLAN ID that is configured for an access port. A message is displayed whenever a VLAN interface is newly created, so you can check that you entered the correct VLAN number.

If you delete an SVI by entering the no interface vlan vlan_id command, the associated interface is forced into an administrative down state and marked as deleted. The deleted interface will no longer be visible in a show interface command.

You can reinstate a deleted SVI by entering the interface vlan vlan_id command for the deleted interface. The interface comes back up, but much of the previous configuration will be gone.

Examples

The following example shows the output when you enter the interface vlan vlan_id command for a new VLAN number:

Switch(config)# interface vlan 23

% Creating new VLAN interface.

Switch(config)#

ip admission proxy http refresh-all

To ensure that you see a customized WebAuth login page with the same name in the switch system directory as a same-named prior login page, use the ip admission proxy http refresh-all command.

ip admission proxy http [success | failure | refresh-all | login [expired | page]]

Syntax Description

success

Successful authentication proxy.

failure

Failed authentication proxy.

refresh-all

Refresh all custom html pages.

login expired

Specify expired webpage

login page

Specify customized login webpage

Command Default

If you do not enter this command, if any of the customized web-based authentication page files with the file of same name have been changed, you see the old login page rather than the new file.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You should enter this command whenever the customized web-based authentication page has been changed in the system directory.

Examples

The following example shows how to enter this command:

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ip admission proxy http [success | failure | refresh-all | login]

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

<The new html page is observed.>

ip arp inspection filter vlan

To permit ARPs from hosts that are configured for static IP when DAI is enabled and to define an ARP access list and apply it to a VLAN, use the ip arp inspection filter vlan command. To disable this application, use the no form of this command.

ip arp inspection filter arp-acl-name vlan vlan-range [static]

no ip arp inspection filter arp-acl-name vlan vlan-range [static]

Syntax Description

arp-acl-name

Access control list name.

vlan-range

VLAN number or range; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

static

(Optional) Specifies that the access control list should be applied statically.

Command Default

No defined ARP ACLs are applied to any VLAN.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When an ARP access control list is applied to a VLAN for dynamic ARP inspection, the ARP packets containing only the IP-to-Ethernet MAC bindings are compared against the ACLs. All other packet types are bridged in the incoming VLAN without validation.

This command specifies that the incoming ARP packets are compared against the ARP access control list, and the packets are permitted only if the access control list permits them.

If the access control lists deny the packets because of explicit denies, the packets are dropped. If the packets are denied because of an implicit deny, they are then matched against the list of DHCP bindings if the ACL is not applied statically.

Examples

The following example shows how to apply the ARP ACL static hosts to VLAN 1 for DAI:

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ip arp inspection filter static-hosts vlan 1

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

Switch# show ip arp inspection vlan 1

Source Mac Validation : Enabled

Destination Mac Validation : Disabled

IP Address Validation : Disabled

Vlan Configuration Operation ACL Match Static ACL

---- ------------- --------- --------- ----------

1 Enabled Active static-hosts No

Vlan ACL Logging DHCP Logging

---- ----------- ------------

1 Acl-Match Deny

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

arp access-list

Defines an ARP access list or adds clauses at the end of a predefined list.

show ip arp inspection

Displays the status of dynamic ARP inspection for a specific range of VLANs.

ip arp inspection limit (interface)

To limit the rate of incoming ARP requests and responses on an interface and prevent DAI from consuming all of the system’s resources in the event of a DoS attack, use the ip arp inspection limit command. To release the limit, use the no form of this command.

ip arp inspection limit {rate pps | none} [burst interval seconds]

no ip arp inspection limit

Syntax Description

rate pps

Specifies an upper limit on the number of incoming packets processed per second. The rate can range from 1 to 10000.

none

Specifies no upper limit on the rate of the incoming ARP packets that can be processed.

burst interval seconds

(Optional) Specifies the consecutive interval in seconds over which the interface is monitored for the high rate of the ARP packets. The interval is configurable from 1 to 15 seconds.

Command Default

The rate is set to 15 packets per second on the untrusted interfaces, assuming that the network is a switched network with a host connecting to as many as 15 new hosts per second.

The rate is unlimited on all the trusted interfaces.

The burst interval is set to 1 second by default.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(20)EW

Added support for interface monitoring.

Usage Guidelines

The trunk ports should be configured with higher rates to reflect their aggregation. When the rate of the incoming packets exceeds the user-configured rate, the interface is placed into an error-disabled state. The error-disable timeout feature can be used to remove the port from the error-disabled state. The rate applies to both the trusted and nontrusted interfaces. Configure appropriate rates on trunks to handle the packets across multiple DAI-enabled VLANs or use the none keyword to make the rate unlimited.

The rate of the incoming ARP packets onthe channel ports is equal to the sum of the incoming rate of packets from all the channel members. Configure the rate limit for the channel ports only after examining the rate of the incoming ARP packets on the channel members.

After a switch receives more than the configured rate of packets every second consecutively over a period of burst seconds, the interface is placed into an error-disabled state.

Examples

The following example shows how to limit the rate of the incoming ARP requests to 25 packets per second:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# interface fa6/3

Switch(config-if)# ip arp inspection limit rate 25

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show ip arp inspection interfaces fastEthernet 6/3

Interface Trust State Rate (pps)

--------------- ----------- ----------

Fa6/3 Trusted 25

Switch#

The following example shows how to limit the rate of the incoming ARP requests to 20 packets per second and to set the interface monitoring interval to 5 consecutive seconds:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# interface fa6/1

Switch(config-if)# ip arp inspection limit rate 20 burst interval 5

Switch(config-if)# end

Related Commands

Command

Description

show ip arp inspection

Displays the status of dynamic ARP inspection for a specific range of VLANs.

ip arp inspection log-buffer

To configure the parameters that are associated with the logging buffer, use the ip arp inspection log-buffer command. To disable the parameters, use the no form of this command.

ip arp inspection log-buffer {entries number | logs number interval seconds}

no ip arp inspection log-buffer {entries | logs}

Syntax Description

entries number

Number of entries from the logging buffer; the range is from 0 to 1024.

logs number

Number of entries to be logged in an interval; the range is from 0 to 1024. A 0 value indicates that entries should not be logged out of this buffer.

interval seconds

Logging rate; the range is from 0 to 86400 (1 day). A 0 value indicates an immediate log.

Command Default

When dynamic ARP inspection is enabled, denied, or dropped, the ARP packets are logged.

The number of entries is set to 32.

The number of logging entries is limited to 5 per second.

The interval is set to 1.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The first dropped packet of a given flow is logged immediately. The subsequent packets for the same flow are registered but are not logged immediately. Registering these packets is done in a log buffer that is shared by all the VLANs. Entries from this buffer are logged on a rate-controlled basis.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the logging buffer to hold up to 45 entries:

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ip arp inspection log-buffer entries 45

Switch(config)# end

Switch# show ip arp inspection log

Total Log Buffer Size : 45

Syslog rate : 5 entries per 1 seconds.

No entries in log buffer.

Switch#

The following example shows how to configure the logging rate to 10 logs per 3 seconds:

Switch(config)# ip arp inspection log-buffer logs 10 interval 3

Switch(config)# end

Switch# show ip arp inspection log

Total Log Buffer Size : 45

Syslog rate : 10 entries per 3 seconds.

No entries in log buffer.

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

arp access-list

Defines an ARP access list or adds clauses at the end of a predefined list.

show ip arp inspection

Displays the status of dynamic ARP inspection for a specific range of VLANs.

ip arp inspection trust

To set a per-port configurable trust state that determines the set of interfaces where incoming ARP packets are inspected, use the ip arp inspection trust command. To make the interfaces untrusted, use the no form of this command.

ip arp inspection trust

no ip arp inspection trust

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure an interface to be trusted:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# interface fastEthernet 6/3

Switch(config-if)# ip arp inspection trust

Switch(config-if)# end

To verify the configuration, use the show form of this command:

Switch# show ip arp inspection interfaces fastEthernet 6/3

Interface Trust State Rate (pps) Burst Interval

--------------- ----------- ---------- --------------

Fa6/3 Trusted None 1

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show ip arp inspection

Displays the status of dynamic ARP inspection for a specific range of VLANs.

ip arp inspection validate

To perform specific checks for ARP inspection, use the ip arp inspection validate command. To disable checks, use the no form of this command.

ip arp inspection validate [src-mac] [dst-mac] [ip]

no ip arp inspection validate [src-mac] [dst-mac] [ip]

Syntax Description

src-mac

(Optional) Checks the source MAC address in the Ethernet header against the sender’s MAC address in the ARP body. This checking is done against both ARP requests and responses.
is enabled, packets with different MAC addresses are classified as invalid and are dropped.

dst-mac

(Optional) Checks the destination MAC address in the Ethernet header against the target MAC address in ARP body. This checking is done for ARP responses.
is enabled, the packets with different MAC addresses are classified as invalid and are dropped.

ip

(Optional) Checks the ARP body for invalid and unexpected IP addresses. Addresses include 0.0.0.0, 255.255.255.255, and all IP multicast addresses.

The sender IP addresses are checked in all ARP requests and responses and target IP addresses are checked only in ARP responses.

Command Default

Checks are disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When enabling the checks, specify at least one of the keywords (src-mac, dst-mac, and ip) on the command line. Each command overrides the configuration of the previous command. If a command enables src and dst mac validations, and a second command enables IP validation only, the src and dst mac validations are disabled as a result of the second command.

The no form of this command disables only the specified checks. If none of the check options are enabled, all the checks are disabled.

Examples

This example show how to enable the source MAC validation:

Switch(config)# ip arp inspection validate src-mac

Switch(config)# end

Switch# show ip arp inspection vlan 1

Source Mac Validation : Enabled

Destination Mac Validation : Disabled

IP Address Validation : Disabled

Vlan Configuration Operation ACL Match Static ACL

---- ------------- --------- --------- ----------

1 Enabled Active

Vlan ACL Logging DHCP Logging

---- ----------- ------------

1 Deny Deny

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

arp access-list

Defines an ARP access list or adds clauses at the end of a predefined list.

show ip arp inspection

Displays the status of dynamic ARP inspection for a specific range of VLANs.

ip arp inspection vlan

To enable dynamic ARP inspection (DAI) on a per-VLAN basis, use the ip arp inspection vlan command. To disable DAI, use the no form of this command.

ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range

no ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range

Syntax Description

vlan-range

VLAN number or range; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

ARP inspection is disabled on all VLANs.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You must specify on which VLANs to enable DAI. DAI may not function on the configured VLANs if they have not been created or if they are private.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable DAI on VLAN 1:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# ip arp inspection vlan 1

Switch(config)# end

Switch# show ip arp inspection vlan 1

Source Mac Validation : Disabled

Destination Mac Validation : Disabled

IP Address Validation : Disabled

Vlan Configuration Operation ACL Match Static ACL

---- ------------- --------- --------- ----------

1 Enabled Active

Vlan ACL Logging DHCP Logging

---- ----------- ------------

1 Deny Deny

Switch#

The following example shows how to disable DAI on VLAN 1:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# no ip arp inspection vlan 1

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

arp access-list

Defines an ARP access list or adds clauses at the end of a predefined list.

show ip arp inspection

Displays the status of dynamic ARP inspection for a specific range of VLANs.

ip arp inspection vlan logging

To control the type of packets that are logged, use the ip arp inspection vlan logging command. To disable this logging control, use the no form of this command.

ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range logging {acl-match {matchlog | none} | dhcp-bindings {permit | all | none}}

no ip arp inspection vlan vlan-range logging {acl-match | dhcp-bindings}

Syntax Description

vlan-range

Number of the VLANs to be mapped to the specified instance. The number is entered as a single value or a range; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

acl-match

Specifies the logging criteria for packets that are dropped or permitted based on ACL matches.

matchlog

Specifies that logging of packets matched against ACLs is controlled by the matchlog keyword in the permit and deny access control entries of the ACL.

Note By default, the matchlog keyword is not available on the ACEs. When the keyword is used, denied packets are not logged. Packets are logged only when they match against an ACE that has the matchlog keyword.

none

Specifies that ACL-matched packets are not logged.

dhcp-bindings

Specifies the logging criteria for packets dropped or permitted based on matches against the DHCP bindings.

permit

Specifies logging when permitted by DHCP bindings.

all

Specifies logging when permitted or denied by DHCP bindings.

none

Prevents all logging of packets permitted or denied by DHCP bindings.

Command Default

All denied or dropped packets are logged.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The acl-match and dhcp-bindings keywords merge with each other. When you set an ACL match configuration, the DHCP bindings configuration is not disabled. You can use the no form of this command to reset some of the logging criteria to their defaults. If you do not specify either option, all the logging types are reset to log on when the ARP packets are denied. The two options that are available to you are as follows:

- acl-match—Logging on ACL matches is reset to log on deny

- dhcp-bindings—Logging on DHCP binding compared is reset to log on deny

Examples

The following example shows how to configure an ARP inspection on VLAN 1 to add packets to a log on matching against the ACLs with the logging keyword:

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ip arp inspection vlan 1 logging acl-match matchlog

Switch(config)# end

Switch# show ip arp inspection vlan 1

Source Mac Validation : Enabled

Destination Mac Validation : Disabled

IP Address Validation : Disabled

Vlan Configuration Operation ACL Match Static ACL

---- ------------- --------- --------- ----------

1 Enabled Active

Vlan ACL Logging DHCP Logging

---- ----------- ------------

1 Acl-Match Deny

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

arp access-list

Defines an ARP access list or adds clauses at the end of a predefined list.

show ip arp inspection

Displays the status of dynamic ARP inspection for a specific range of VLANs.

ip cef load-sharing algorithm

To configure the load-sharing hash function so that the source TCP/UDP port, the destination TCP/UDP port, or both ports can be included in the hash in addition to the source and destination IP addresses, use the ip cef load-sharing algorithm command. To revert back to the default, which does not include the ports, use the no form of this command.

ip cef load-sharing algorithm {include-ports {source source | destination dest} | original | tunnel | universal}

no ip cef load-sharing algorithm {include-ports {source source | destination dest} | original | tunnel | universal}

Syntax Description

include-ports

Specifies the algorithm that includes the Layer 4 ports.

source source

Specifies the source port in the load-balancing hash functions.

destination dest

Specifies the destination port in the load-balancing hash. Uses the source and destination in hash functions.

original

Specifies the original algorithm; not recommended.

tunnel

Specifies the algorithm for use in tunnel-only environments.

universal

Specifies the default Cisco IOS load-sharing algorithm.

Command Default

Default load-sharing algorithm is disabled.

Note This option does not include the source or destination port in the load-balancing hash.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The original algorithm, tunnel algorithm, and universal algorithm are routed through the hardware. For software-routed packets, the algorithms are handled by the software. The include-ports option does not apply to the software-switched traffic.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the IP CEF load-sharing algorithm that includes Layer 4 ports:

Switch(config)# ip cef load-sharing algorithm include-ports

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to configure the IP CEF load-sharing algorithm that includes Layer 4 tunneling ports:

Switch(config)# ip cef load-sharing algorithm include-ports tunnel

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show ip cef vlan

Displays the IP CEF VLAN interface status and configuration information.

ip device tracking maximum

To enable IP port security binding tracking on a Layer 2 port, use the ip device tracking maximum command. To disable IP port security on untrusted Layer 2 interfaces, use the no form of this command.

ip device tracking maximum {number}

no ip device tracking maximum {number}

Syntax Description

number

Specifies the number of bindings created in the IP device tracking table for a port, valid values are from 0 to 2048.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(37)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable IP port security with IP-MAC filters on a Layer 2 access port:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ip device tracking

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 4/3

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode access

Switch(config-if)# switchport access vlan 1

Switch(config-if)# ip device tracking maximum 5

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security maximum 5

Switch(config-if)# ip verify source tracking port-security

Switch(config-if)# end

You can verify your settings by entering the show ip verify source privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip verify source

Enables IP source guard on untrusted Layer 2 interfaces.

show ip verify source

Displays the IP source guard configuration and filters on a particular interface.

ip dhcp snooping

To enable DHCP snooping globally, use the ip dhcp snooping command. To disable DHCP snooping, use the no form of this command.

ip dhcp snooping

no ip dhcp snooping

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

DHCP snooping is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You must enable DHCP snooping globally before you can use DHCP snooping on a VLAN.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable DHCP snooping:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to disable DHCP snooping:

Switch(config)# no ip dhcp snooping

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping limit rate

Configures the number of the DHCP messages that an interface can receive per second.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN or a group of VLANs.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries.

ip dhcp snooping binding

To set up and generate a DHCP binding configuration to restore bindings across reboots, use the ip dhcp snooping binding command. To disable the binding configuration, use the no form of this command.

ip dhcp snooping binding mac-address vlan vlan-# ip-address interface interface expiry seconds

no ip dhcp snooping binding mac-address vlan vlan-# ip-address interface interface

Syntax Description

mac-address

Specifies a MAC address.

vlan vlan-#

Specifies a valid VLAN number.

ip-address

Specifies an IP address.

interface interface

Specifies an interface type and number.

expiry seconds

Specifies the interval (in seconds) after which binding is no longer valid.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EW

Support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Whenever a binding is added or removed using this command, the binding database is marked as changed and a write is initiated.

Examples

The following example shows how to generate a DHCP binding configuration on interface gigabitethernet1/1 in VLAN 1 with an expiration time of 1000 seconds:

Switch# ip dhcp snooping binding 0001.1234.1234 vlan 1 172.20.50.5 interface gi1/1 expiry 1000

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping

Globally enables DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN or a group of VLANs.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries.

ip dhcp snooping database

To store the bindings that are generated by DHCP snooping, use the ip dhcp snooping database command. To either reset the timeout, reset the write-delay, or delete the agent specified by the URL, use the no form of this command.

ip dhcp snooping database {url | timeout seconds | write-delay seconds}

no ip dhcp snooping database {timeout | write-delay}

Syntax Description

url

Specifies the URL in one of the following forms:

- tftp://<host>/<filename>

- ftp://<user>:<password>@<host>/<filename>

- rcp://<user>@<host>/<filename>

- nvram:/<filename>

- bootflash:/<filename>

timeout seconds

Specifies when to abort the database transfer process after a change to the binding database.

The minimum value of the delay is 15 seconds. 0 is defined as an infinite duration.

write-delay seconds

Specifies the duration for which the transfer should be delayed after a change to the binding database.

Command Default

The timeout value is set to 300 seconds (5 minutes).

The write-delay value is set to 300 seconds.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You need to create an empty file at the configured URL on network-based URLs (such as TFTP and FTP) before the switch can write the set of bindings for the first time at the URL.

Note Because both NVRAM and bootflash have limited storage capacity, using TFTP or network-based files is recommended . If you use flash to store the database file, new updates (by the agent) result in the creation of new files (flash fills quickly). In addition, due to the nature of the file system used on the flash, a large number of files causes access to be considerably slowed. When a file is stored in a remote location accessible through TFTP, an RPR/SSO standby supervisor engine can take over the binding list when a switchover occurs.

Examples

The following example shows how to store a database file with the IP address 10.1.1.1 within a directory called directory. A file named file must be present on the TFTP server.

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping database tftp://10.1.1.1/directory/file

Switch(config)# end

Switch# show ip dhcp snooping database

Agent URL : tftp://10.1.1.1/directory/file

Write delay Timer : 300 seconds

Abort Timer : 300 seconds

Agent Running : Yes

Delay Timer Expiry : Not Running

Abort Timer Expiry : Not Running

Last Succeded Time : None

Last Failed Time : None

Last Failed Reason : No failure recorded.

Total Attempts : 1 Startup Failures : 0

Successful Transfers : 0 Failed Transfers : 0

Successful Reads : 0 Failed Reads : 0

Successful Writes : 0 Failed Writes : 0

Media Failures : 0

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping

Globally enables DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping binding

Sets up and generates a DHCP binding configuration to restore bindings across reboots.

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN or a group of VLANs.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries.

ip dhcp snooping information option

To enable DHCP option 82 data insertion, use the ip dhcp snooping information option command. To disable DHCP option 82 data insertion, use the no form of this command.

ip dhcp snooping information option format remote-id {hostname | string {word}}

no ip dhcp snooping information option format remote-id {hostname | string {word}}

Syntax Description

format

Specifies the option 82 information format.

remote-id

Specifies the remote ID for option 82.

hostname

Specifies the user-configured hostname for the remote ID.

string word

Specifies the user-defined string for the remote ID. The word string can be from 1 to 63 characters long with no spaces.

Command Default

DHCP option 82 data insertion is enabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(40)SG

Added remote-id keyword to support option 82 enhancement.

Usage Guidelines

If the hostname is longer than 63 characters it is truncated to 63 characters in the remote ID.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable DHCP option 82 data insertion:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping information option

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to disable DHCP option 82 data insertion:

Switch(config)# no ip dhcp snooping information option

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to configure the hostname as the remote ID:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping information option format remote-id hostname

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to enable DHCP Snooping on VLAN 500 through 555 and option 82 remote ID:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping

Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 500 555

Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping information option format remote-id string switch123

Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet 5/1

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping trust

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping limit rate 100

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 555 information option format-type circuit-id string customer-555

Switch(config-if)# interface FastEthernet 2/1

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 555 information option format-type circuit-id string customer-500

Switch(config)# end

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping

Globally enables DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping binding

Sets up and generates a DHCP binding configuration to restore bindings across reboots.

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping limit rate

Configures the number of the DHCP messages that an interface can receive per second.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN or a group of VLANs.

ip dhcp snooping vlan information option format-type circuit-id string

Enables circuit-id (a sub-option of DHCP snooping option-82) on a VLAN.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries.

ip dhcp snooping information option allow-untrusted

To allow DHCP packets with option 82 data inserted to be received from a snooping untrusted port, use the ip dhcp snooping information option allow-untrusted command. To disallow receipt of these DHCP packets, use the no form of this command.

ip dhcp snooping information option allow-untrusted

no ip dhcp snooping information option allow-untrusted

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

DHCP packets with option 82 are not allowed on snooping untrusted ports.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)EWA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to allow DHCP packets with option 82 data inserted to be received from a snooping untrusted port:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping information option allow-untrusted

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping

Globally enables DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping limit rate

Configures the number of the DHCP messages that an interface can receive per second.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN or a group of VLANs.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries.

ip dhcp snooping limit rate

To configure the number of the DHCP messages that an interface can receive per second, use the ip dhcp snooping limit rate command. To disable the DHCP snooping rate limiting, use the no form of this command.

ip dhcp snooping limit rate rate

no ip dhcp snooping limit rate

Syntax Description

rate

Number of DHCP messages a switch can receive per second.

Command Default

DHCP snooping rate limiting is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Typically, the rate limit applies to the untrusted interfaces. If you want to set up rate limiting for the trusted interfaces, note that the trusted interfaces aggregate all DHCP traffic in the switch, and you will need to adjust the rate limit of the interfaces to a higher value.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the DHCP message rate limiting:

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping limit rate 150

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to disable the DHCP message rate limiting:

Switch(config-if)# no ip dhcp snooping limit rate

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping

Globally enables DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN or a group of VLANs.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries.

ip dhcp snooping trust

To configure an interface as trusted for DHCP snooping purposes, use the ip dhcp snooping trust command. To configure an interface as untrusted, use the no form of this command.

ip dhcp snooping trust

no ip dhcp snooping trust

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

DHCP snooping trust is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable DHCP snooping trust on an interface:

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping trust

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to disable DHCP snooping trust on an interface:

Switch(config-if)# no ip dhcp snooping trust

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping

Globally enables DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping limit rate

Configures the number of the DHCP messages that an interface can receive per second.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN or a group of VLANs.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

Use the ip dhcp snooping vlan command to enable DHCP snooping on a VLAN. To disable DHCP snooping on a VLAN, use the no form of this command.

ip dhcp snooping [vlan number]

no ip dhcp snooping [vlan number]

Syntax Description

vlan number

(Optional) Single VLAN number or a range of VLANs; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

DHCP snooping is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

DHCP snooping is enabled on a VLAN only if both global snooping and the VLAN snooping are enabled.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable DHCP snooping on a VLAN:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 10

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to disable DHCP snooping on a VLAN:

Switch(config)# no ip dhcp snooping vlan 10

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to enable DHCP snooping on a group of VLANs:

Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 10 55

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to disable DHCP snooping on a group of VLANs:

Switch(config)# no ip dhcp snooping vlan 10 55

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping

Globally enables DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping limit rate

Configures the number of the DHCP messages that an interface can receive per second.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip dhcp snooping vlan information option format-type circuit-id string

Enables circuit-id (a suboption of DHCP snooping option-82) on a VLAN.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries.

ip dhcp snooping vlan information option format-type circuit-id string

To enable circuit-id (a suboption of DHCP snooping option 82) on a VLAN, use the ip dhcp snooping vlan information option format-type circuit-id string command. To disable circuit-id on a VLAN, use the no form of this command.

ip dhcp snooping vlan number information option format-type circuit-id [override] string string

no ip dhcp snooping vlan number information option format-type circuit-id [override] string

Syntax Description

number

Specifies single or range of VLANs; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

override

(Optional) Specifies an override string.

string string

Specifies a user-defined string for the circuit ID; range of 3 to 63 ASCII characters with no spaces.

Command Default

VLAN-mod-port, if DHCP snooping option-82 is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(54)SG

Added the override option

Usage Guidelines

The circuit-id suboption of DHCP option 82 is supported only when DHCP snooping is globally enabled and on VLANs using DHCP option 82.

This command allows you to configure a string of ASCII characters to be the circuit ID. When you want to override the vlan-mod-port format type and instead use the circuit-ID to define subscriber information, use the override keyword.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable DHCP snooping on VLAN 500 through 555 and option 82 circuit-id:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping

Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 500 555

Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping information option format remote-id string switch123

Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet 5/1

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping trust

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping limit rate 100

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 555 information option format-type circuit-id string customer-555

Switch(config-if)# interface FastEthernet 2/1

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 555 information option format-type circuit-id string customer-500

Switch(config)# end

The following example shows how to configure the option-82 circuit-ID override suboption:

Switch(config-if)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 250 information option format-type circuit-id

override string testcustomer

You can verify your settings by entering the show ip dhcp snooping user EXEC command.

Note The show ip dhcp snooping user EXEC command only displays the global command output, including a remote-ID configuration. It does not display any per-interface, per-VLAN string that you have configured for the circuit ID.

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping

Globally enables DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping limit rate

Configures the number of the DHCP messages that an interface can receive per second.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN or a group of VLANs.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries.

ip igmp filter

To control whether all hosts on a Layer 2 interface can join one or more IP multicast groups by applying an IGMP profile to the interface, use the ip igmp filter command. To remove a profile from the interface, use the no form of this command.

ip igmp filter profile number

no ip igmp filter

Syntax Description

profile number

IGMP profile number to be applied; valid values are from 1 to 429496795.

Command Default

Profiles are not applied.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(11b)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You can apply IGMP filters only to Layer 2 physical interfaces; you cannot apply IGMP filters to routed ports, switch virtual interfaces (SVIs), or ports that belong to an EtherChannel group.

An IGMP profile can be applied to one or more switch port interfaces, but one port can have only one profile applied to it.

Examples

The following example shows how to apply IGMP profile 22 to an interface:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# ip igmp filter 22

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip igmp profile

Creates an IGMP profile.

show ip igmp profile

Displays all configured IGMP profiles or a specified IGMP profile.

ip igmp max-groups

To set the maximum number of IGMP groups that a Layer 2 interface can join, use the ip igmp max-groups command. To set the maximum back to the default, use the no form of this command.

ip igmp max-groups number

no ip igmp max-groups

Syntax Description

number

Maximum number of IGMP groups that an interface can join; valid values are from 0 to 4294967294.

Command Default

No maximum limit.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(11b)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You can use the ip igmp max-groups command only on Layer 2 physical interfaces; you cannot set the IGMP maximum groups for the routed ports, the switch virtual interfaces (SVIs), or the ports that belong to an EtherChannel group.

Examples

The following example shows how to limit the number of IGMP groups that an interface can join to 25:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# ip igmp max-groups 25

Switch(config-if)

ip igmp profile

To create an IGMP profile, use the ip igmp profile command. To delete the IGMP profile, use the no form of this command.

ip igmp profile profile number

no ip igmp profile profile number

Syntax Description

profile number

IGMP profile number being configured; valid values are from 1 to 4294967295.

Command Default

No profile created.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

IGMP profile configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(11b)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When entering a range, enter the low IP multicast address, a space, and the high IP multicast address.

You can apply an IGMP profile to one or more Layer 2 interfaces, but each interface can have only one profile applied to it.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure IGMP profile 40 that permits the specified range of IP multicast addresses:

Switch # config terminal

Switch(config)# ip igmp profile 40

Switch(config-igmp-profile)# permit

Switch(config-igmp-profile)# range 233.1.1.1 233.255.255.255

Switch(config-igmp-profile)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip igmp filter

Controls whether all hosts on a Layer 2 interface can join one or more IP multicast groups by applying an IGMP profile to the interface.

show ip igmp profile

Displays all configured IGMP profiles or a specified IGMP profile.

ip igmp query-interval

To configure the frequency that the switch sends the IGMP host-query messages, use the ip igmp query-interval command. To return to the default frequency, use the no form of this command.

ip igmp query-interval seconds

no ip igmp query-interval

Syntax Description

seconds

Frequency, in seconds, at which the IGMP host-query messages are transmitted; valid values depend on the IGMP snooping mode. See the “Usage Guidelines” section for more information.

Command Default

The query interval is set to 60 seconds.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If you use the default IGMP snooping configuration, the valid query interval values are from 1 to 65535 seconds. If you have changed the default configuration to support CGMP as the IGMP snooping learning method, the valid query interval values are from 1 to 300 seconds.

The designated switch for a LAN is the only switch that sends the IGMP host-query messages. For IGMP version 1, the designated switch is elected according to the multicast routing protocol that runs on the LAN. For IGMP version 2, the designated querier is the lowest IP-addressed multicast switch on the subnet.

If no queries are heard for the timeout period (controlled by the ip igmp query-timeout command), the switch becomes the querier.

Note Changing the timeout period may severely impact multicast forwarding.

Examples

The following example shows how to change the frequency at which the designated switch sends the IGMP host-query messages:

Switch(config-if)# ip igmp query-interval 120

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip igmp querier-timeout (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Configures the timeout period before the router takes over as the querier for the interface after the previous querier has stopped querying.

ip pim query-interval (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Configures the frequency of Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) router query messages.

show ip igmp groups (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Displays the multicast groups with receivers that are directly connected to the router and that were learned through Internet Group Management Protocol (IGMP), use the show ip igmp groups command in EXEC mode.

ip igmp snooping

To enable IGMP snooping, use the ip igmp snooping command. To disable IGMP snooping, use the no form of this command.

ip igmp snooping [tcn {flood query count count | query solicit}]

no ip igmp snooping [tcn {flood query count count | query solicit}]

Syntax Description

tcn

(Optional) Specifies the topology change configurations.

flood

(Optional) Specifies to flood the spanning tree table to the network when a topology change occurs.

query

(Optional) Specifies the TCN query configurations.

count count

(Optional) Specifies how often the spanning tree table is flooded; valid values are from 1 to 10.

solicit

(Optional) Specifies an IGMP general query.

Command Default

IGMP snooping is enabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(11)EW

Support for flooding the spanning tree table was added.

Usage Guidelines

The tcn flood option applies only to Layer 2 switch ports and EtherChannels; it does not apply to routed ports, VLAN interfaces, or Layer 3 channels.

The ip igmp snooping command is disabled by default on multicast routers.

Note You can use the tcn flood option in interface configuration mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable IGMP snooping:

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to disable IGMP snooping:

Switch(config)# no ip igmp snooping

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to enable the flooding of the spanning tree table to the network after nine topology changes have occurred:

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping tcn flood query count 9

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to disable the flooding of the spanning tree table to the network:

Switch(config)# no ip igmp snooping tcn flood

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to enable an IGMP general query:

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping tcn query solicit

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to disable an IGMP general query:

Switch(config)# no ip igmp snooping tcn query solicit

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave

Enable IGMP immediate-leave processing.

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter

Configures a Layer 2 interface as a multicast router interface for a VLAN.

ip igmp snooping vlan static

Configures a Layer 2 interface as a member of a group.

ip igmp snooping report-suppression

To enable report suppression, use the ip igmp snooping report-suppression command. To disable report suppression and forward the reports to the multicast devices, use the no form of this command.

ip igmp snooping report-suppression

no igmp snooping report-suppression

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

IGMP snooping report-suppression is enabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If the ip igmp snooping report-suppression command is disabled, all the IGMP reports are forwarded to the multicast devices.

If the command is enabled, report suppression is done by IGMP snooping.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable report suppression:

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping report-suppression

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to disable report suppression:

Switch(config)# no ip igmp snooping report-suppression

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to display the system status for report suppression:

Switch# show ip igmp snoop

vlan 1

----------

IGMP snooping is globally enabled

IGMP snooping TCN solicit query is globally disabled

IGMP snooping global TCN flood query count is 2

IGMP snooping is enabled on this Vlan

IGMP snooping immediate-leave is disabled on this Vlan

IGMP snooping mrouter learn mode is pim-dvmrp on this Vlan

IGMP snooping is running in IGMP_ONLY mode on this Vlan

IGMP snooping report suppression is enabled on this Vlan

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave

Enable IGMP immediate-leave processing.

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter

Configures a Layer 2 interface as a multicast router interface for a VLAN.

ip igmp snooping vlan static

Configures a Layer 2 interface as a member of a group.

ip igmp snooping vlan

To enable IGMP snooping for a VLAN, use the ip igmp snooping vlan command. To disable IGMP snooping, use the no form of this command.

ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id

no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id

Syntax Description

vlan-id

Number of the VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 1001 and from 1006 to 4094.

Command Default

IGMP snooping is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended addressing was added.

Usage Guidelines

This command is entered in VLAN interface configuration mode only.

The ip igmp snooping vlan command is disabled by default on multicast routers.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable IGMP snooping on a VLAN:

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan 200

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN:

Switch(config)# no ip igmp snooping vlan 200

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave

Enable IGMP immediate-leave processing.

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter

Configures a Layer 2 interface as a multicast router interface for a VLAN.

ip igmp snooping vlan static

Configures a Layer 2 interface as a member of a group.

ip igmp snooping vlan explicit-tracking

To enable per-VLAN explicit host tracking, use the ip igmp snooping vlan explicit-tracking command. To disable explicit host tracking, use the no form of this command.

ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id explicit-tracking

no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id explicit-tracking

Syntax Description

vlan_id

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 1001 and from 1006 to 4094.

Command Default

Explicit host tracking is enabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(20)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to disable IGMP explicit host tracking on interface VLAN 200 and how to verify the configuration:

Switch(config)# no ip igmp snooping vlan 200 explicit-tracking

Switch(config)# end

Switch# show ip igmp snooping vlan 200 | include explicit tracking

Global IGMP Snooping configuration:

-----------------------------------

IGMP snooping : Enabled

IGMPv3 snooping : Enabled

Report suppression : Enabled

TCN solicit query : Disabled

TCN flood query count : 2

Vlan 2:

--------

IGMP snooping : Enabled

IGMPv2 immediate leave : Disabled

Explicit host tracking : Disabled

Multicast router learning mode : pim-dvmrp

CGMP interoperability mode : IGMP_ONLY

Explicit host tracking : Disabled

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave

Enables IGMP immediate-leave processing.

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter

Configures a Layer 2 interface as a multicast router interface for a VLAN.

ip igmp snooping vlan static

Configures a Layer 2 interface as a member of a group.

show ip igmp snooping membership

Displays host membership information.

ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave

To enable IGMP immediate-leave processing, use the ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave command. To disable immediate-leave processing, use the no form of this command.

ip igmp snooping vlan vlan_num immediate-leave

no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan_num immediate-leave

Syntax Description

vlan_num

Number of the VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

immediate-leave

Enables immediate leave processing.

Command Default

Immediate leave processing is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended addressing was added.

Usage Guidelines

You enter this command in global configuration mode only.

Use the immediate-leave feature only when there is a single receiver for the MAC group for a specific VLAN.

The immediate-leave feature is supported only with IGMP version 2 hosts.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable IGMP immediate-leave processing on VLAN 4:

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan 4 immediate-leave

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to disable IGMP immediate-leave processing on VLAN 4:

Switch(config)# no ip igmp snooping vlan 4 immediate-leave

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip igmp snooping

Enables IGMP snooping.

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter

Configures a Layer 2 interface as a multicast router interface for a VLAN.

ip igmp snooping vlan static

Configures a Layer 2 interface as a member of a group.

show ip igmp interface

Displays the information about the IGMP-interface status and configuration.

show mac-address-table multicast

Displays information about the multicast MAC address table.

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter

To statically configure an Layer 2 interface as a multicast router interface for a VLAN, use the

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter command. To remove the configuration, use the no form of this command.

ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter {interface {{fastethernet slot/port} | {gigabitethernet slot/port} | {tengigabitethernet slot/port} | {port-channel number}} |

{learn {cgmp | pim-dvmrp}}

no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan-id mrouter {interface {{fastethernet slot/port} | {gigabitethernet slot/port} | {tengigabitethernet slot/port} | {port-channel number}} |

{learn {cgmp | pim-dvmrp}}

Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

Specifies the VLAN ID number to use in the command; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

interface

Specifies the next-hop interface to a multicast switch.

fastethernet slot/port

Specifies the Fast Ethernet interface; number of the slot and port.

gigabitethernet slot/port

Specifies the Gigabit Ethernet interface; number of the slot and port.

tengigabitethernet slot/port

Specifies the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface; number of the slot and port.

port-channel number

Port-channel number; valid values are from 1 to 64.

learn

Specifies the multicast switch learning method.

cgmp

Specifies the multicast switch snooping CGMP packets.

pim-dvmrp

Specifies the multicast switch snooping PIM-DVMRP packets.

Command Default

Multicast switch snooping PIM-DVMRP packets are specified.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended addressing was added.

12.2(25)EW

Support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You enter this command in VLAN interface configuration mode only.

The interface to the switch must be in the VLAN where you are entering the command. It must be both administratively up and line protocol up.

The CGMP learning method can decrease control traffic.

The learning method that you configure is saved in NVRAM.

The static connections to multicast interfaces are supported only on switch interfaces.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify the next-hop interface to a multicast switch:

Switch(config-if)# ip igmp snooping 400 mrouter interface fastethernet 5/6

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to specify the multicast switch learning method:

Switch(config-if)# ip igmp snooping 400 mrouter learn cgmp

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip igmp snooping

Enable IGMP snooping.

ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave

Enable IGMP immediate-leave processing.

ip igmp snooping vlan static

Configures a Layer 2 interface as a member of a group.

show ip igmp snooping

Displays information on dynamically learned and manually configured VLAN switch interfaces.

show ip igmp snooping mrouter

Displays information on the dynamically learned and manually configured multicast switch interfaces.

ip igmp snooping vlan static

To configure a Layer 2 interface as a member of a group, use the ip igmp snooping vlan static command. To remove the configuration, use the no form of this command.

ip igmp snooping vlan vlan_num static mac-address {interface {fastethernet slot/port} | {gigabitethernet slot/port} | {tengigabitethernet slot/port} | {port-channel number}}

no ip igmp snooping vlan vlan_num static mac-address {interface {fastethernet slot/port} | {gigabitethernet slot/port} | {tengigabitethernet mod/interface-number} | {port-channel number}}

Syntax Description

vlan_num

Number of the VLAN.

mac-address

Group MAC address.

interface

Specifies the next-hop interface to multicast switch.

fastethernet slot/port

Specifies the Fast Ethernet interface; number of the slot and port.

gigabitethernet slot/port

Specifies the Gigabit Ethernet interface; number of the slot and port.

tengigabitethernet slot/port

Specifies the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface; number of the slot and port.

port-channel number

Port-channel number; valid values are from 1 through 64.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EW

Support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a host statically on an interface:

Switch(config)# ip igmp snooping vlan 4 static 0100.5e02.0203 interface fastethernet 5/11

Configuring port FastEthernet5/11 on group 0100.5e02.0203 vlan 4

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip igmp snooping

Enable IGMP snooping.

ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave

Enable IGMP immediate-leave processing.

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter

Configures a Layer 2 interface as a multicast router interface for a VLAN.

show mac-address-table multicast

Displays information about the multicast MAC address table.

ip local-proxy-arp

To enable the local proxy ARP feature, use the ip local-proxy-arp command. To disable the local proxy ARP feature, use the no form of this command.

ip local-proxy-arp

no ip local-proxy-arp

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Local proxy ARP is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use this feature only on subnets where hosts are intentionally prevented from communicating directly to the switch on which they are connected.

ICMP redirect is disabled on interfaces where the local proxy ARP feature is enabled.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the local proxy ARP feature:

Switch(config-if)# ip local-proxy-arp

Switch(config-if)#

ip mfib fastdrop

To enable MFIB fast drop, use the ip mfib fastdrop command. To disable MFIB fast drop, use the no form of this command.

ip mfib fastdrop

no ip mfib fastdrop

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

MFIB fast drop is enabled.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable MFIB fast drops:

Switch# ip mfib fastdrop

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear ip mfib fastdrop

Clears all the MFIB fast-drop entries.

show ip mfib fastdrop

Displays all currently active fast-drop entries and shows whether fast drop is enabled.

ip multicast multipath

To enable load splitting of IP multicast traffic over Equal Cost Multipath (ECMP), use the

ip multicast multipath command in global configuration mode. To disable this functionality, use the no form of this command.

ip multicast [vrf vrf-name] multipath [s-g-hash {basic | next-hop-based}]

no ip multicast [vrf vrf-name] multipath [s-g-hash {basic | next-hop-based}]

Syntax Description

vrf vrf-name

(Optional) Enables ECMP multicast load splitting for IP multicast traffic associated with the Multicast Virtual Private Network (MVPN) routing and forwarding (MVRF) instance specified for the vrf-name argument.

s-g-hash basic | next-hop-based

(Optional) Enables ECMP multicast load splitting based on source and group address or on source, group, and next-hop address.

The basic keyword enables a simple hash based on source and group address. This algorithm is referred to as the basic S-G-hash algorithm.

The next-hop-based keyword enables a more complex hash based on source, group, and next-hop address. This algorithm is referred to as the next-hop-based S-G-hash algorithm.

Command Default

If multiple equal-cost paths exist, multicast traffic will not be load-split across those paths.

Command Modes

Global configuration (config)

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(53)SG

The s-g-hash keyword was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 switch.

Usage Guidelines

The ip multicast multipath command does not work with bidirectional Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM).

Use the ip multicast multipath command to enable load splitting of IP multicast traffic across multiple equal-cost paths.

If two or more equal-cost paths from a source are available, unicast traffic will be load-split across those paths. However, by default, multicast traffic is not load-split across multiple equal-cost paths. In general, multicast traffic flows down from the reverse path forwarding (RPF) neighbor. According to the PIM specifications, this neighbor must have the highest IP address if more than one neighbor has the same metric.

When you configue load splitting with the ip multicast multipath command, the system splits multicast traffic across multiple equal-cost paths based on source address using the S-hash algorithm. When the ip multicast multipath command is configured and multiple equal-cost paths exist, the path in which multicast traffic will travel is selected based on the source IP address. Multicast traffic from different sources will be load-split across the different equal-cost paths. Load splitting will not occur across equal-cost paths for multicast traffic from the same source sent to different multicast groups.

Note The ip multicast multipath command load splits the traffic but does not load balance the traffic. Traffic from a source will use only one path, even if the traffic greatly exceeds traffic from other sources.

If the ip multicast multipath command is configured with the s-g-hash keyword and multiple equal-cost paths exist, load splitting will occur across equal-cost paths based on source and group address or on source, group, and next-hop address. If you specify the optional s-g-hash keyword for load splitting IP multicast traffic, you must select the algorithm used to calculate the equal-cost paths by specifying one of the following keywords:

- basic —The basic S-G-hash algorithm is predictable because no randomization is used in calculating the hash value. The basic S-G-hash algorithm, however, is subject to polarization because for a given source and group the same hash is always chosen irrespective of the router that the hash is being calculated on.

- next-hop-based —The next-hop-based S-G-hash algorithm is predictable because no randomization is used to determine the hash value. Unlike the S-hash and basic S-G-hash algorithms, the next-hop-based hash mechanism is not subject to polarization.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable ECMP multicast load splitting on a router based on source address using the S-hash algorithm:

Switch(config)# ip multicast multipath

The following example shows how to enable ECMP multicast load splitting on a router based on source and group address using the basic S-G-hash algorithm:

Switch(config)# ip multicast multipath s-g-hash basic

The following example shows how to enable ECMP multicast load splitting on a router based on source, group, and next-hop address using the next-hop-based S-G-hash algorithm:

Switch(config)# ip multicast multipath s-g-hash next-hop-based

ip name-server

To configure the IP address of the domain name server (DNS), use the ip name-server command. To delete the name server use the no form of this command.

ip name-server server-address1 [server-address2...server-address6]

no name-server server-address1 [server-address2...server-address6]

Syntax Description

server-address1

IPv4 or IPv6 addresses of a name server to use for name and address resolution.

[server-address2...ip-address6]

(Optional) IP addresses of additional name servers (a maximum of six name servers)

Command Default

No name server addresses are specified.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2 (31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

Usage Guidelines

Separate each server address with a space. The first server specified is the primary server. The switch sends DNS queries to the primary server first. If that query fails, the backup servers are queried.

For the Application Visibility Control (AVC) with Domain Name System as an Authoritative Source (DNS-AS) feature (AVC with DNS-AS), ensure that at least the first two IP addresses in the sequence are IPv4 addresses, because the AVC with DNS-AS feature will use only these. See the example below, here the first two addresses are IPv4 (192.0.2.1 and 192.0.2.2), the third one (2001:DB8::1) is an IPv6 address. AVC with DNS-AS will use the first two:

Switch(config)# ip name-server 192.0.2.1 192.0.2.2 2001:DB8::1

Enter the show ip name-server command to display all the name server IP addresses that have been maintained.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify IPv4 hosts 172.16.1.111 and 172.16.1.2 as the name servers:

Switch(config)# ip name-server 192.0.2.1 192.0.2.2

The following example shows how to specify IPv6 hosts 3FFE:C00::250:8BFF:FEE8:F800 and 2001:0DB8::3 as the name servers:

Switch(config)# ip name-server 3FFE:C00::250:8BFF:FEE8:F800 2001:0DB8::3

ip route-cache flow

To enable NetFlow statistics for IP routing, use the ip route-cache flow command. To disable NetFlow statistics, use the no form of this command.

ip route-cache flow [infer-fields]

no ip route-cache flow [infer-fields]

Syntax Description

infer-fields

(Optional) Includes the NetFlow fields as inferred by the software: Input identifier, Output identifier, and Routing information.

Command Default

NetFlow statistics is disabled.

Inferred information is excluded.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

12.1(19)EW

Command enhanced to support infer fields.

Usage Guidelines

To use these commands, you need to install the Supervisor Engine IV and the NetFlow Service Card.

The NetFlow statistics feature captures a set of traffic statistics. These traffic statistics include the source IP address, destination IP address, Layer 4 port information, protocol, input and output identifiers, and other routing information that can be used for network analysis, planning, accounting, billing and identifying DoS attacks.

NetFlow switching is supported on IP and IP-encapsulated traffic over all interface types.

If you enter the ip route-cache flow infer-fields command after the ip route-cache flow command, you will purge the existing cache, and vice versa. This action is done to avoid having flows with and without inferred fields in the cache simultaneously.

For additional information on NetFlow switching, refer to the Catalyst 4500 Series Switch Cisco IOS Software Configuration Guide.

Note NetFlow consumes additional memory and CPU resources compared to other switching modes. You need to know the resources required on your switch before enabling NetFlow.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable NetFlow switching on the switch:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# ip route-cache flow

Switch(config)# exit

Switch#

Note This command does not work on individual interfaces.

ip source binding

To add or delete a static IP source binding entry, use the ip source binding command. To delete the corresponding IP source binding entry, use the no form of this command.

ip source binding ip-address mac-address vlan vlan-id interface interface-name

no ip source binding ip-address mac-address vlan vlan-id interface interface-name

Syntax Description

ip-address

Binding IP address.

mac-address

Binding MAC address.

vlan vlan-id

VLAN number.

interface interface-name

Binding interface.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The ip source binding command is used to add a static IP source binding entry only.

The no form of this command deletes the corresponding IP source binding entry. For the deletion to succeed, all required parameters must match.

Each static IP binding entry is keyed by a MAC address and VLAN number. If the CLI contains an existing MAC and VLAN, the existing binding entry will be updated with the new parameters; a separate binding entry will not be created.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the static IP source binding:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# ip source binding 11.0.0.1 0000.000A.000B vlan 10 interface fastethernet6/10

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show ip source binding

Displays IP source bindings that are configured on the system.

ip sticky-arp

To enable sticky ARP, use the ip sticky-arp command. Use the no form of this command to disable sticky ARP.

ip sticky-arp

no ip sticky-arp

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Enabled

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is supported on PVLANs only.

ARP entries that are learned on Layer 3 PVLAN interfaces are sticky ARP entries. (You should display and verify ARP entries on the PVLAN interface using the show arp command).

For security reasons, sticky ARP entries on the PVLAN interface do not age out. Connecting new equipment with the same IP address generates a message and the ARP entry is not created.

Because the ARP entries on the PVLAN interface do not age out, you must manually remove ARP entries on the PVLAN interface if a MAC address changes.

Unlike static entries, sticky-ARP entries are not stored and restored when you enter the reboot and restart commands.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable sticky ARP:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config) ip sticky-arp

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to disable sticky ARP:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config) no ip sticky-arp

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

arp (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Enables Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) entries for static routing over the Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS) network.

show arp (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Displays ARP information.

ip verify header vlan all

To enable IP header validation for Layer 2-switched IPv4 packets, use the ip verify header vlan all command. To disable the IP header validation, use the no form of this command.

ip verify header vlan all

no ip verify header vlan all

Syntax Description

This command has no default settings.

Command Default

The IP header is validated for bridged and routed IPv4 packets.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(20)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command does not apply to Layer 3-switched (routed) packets.

The Catalyst 4500 series switch checks the validity of the following fields in the IPv4 header for all switched IPv4 packets:

- The version must be 4.

- The header length must be greater than or equal to 20 bytes.

- The total length must be greater than or equal to four times the header length and greater than the Layer 2 packet size minus the Layer 2 encapsulation size.

If an IPv4 packet fails the IP header validation, the packet is dropped. If you disable the header validation, the packets with the invalid IP headers are bridged but are not routed even if routing was intended. The IPv4 access lists also are not applied to the IP headers.

Examples

The following example shows how to disable the IP header validation for the Layer 2-switched IPv4 packets:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# no ip verify header vlan all

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

ip verify source

To enable IP source guard on untrusted Layer 2 interfaces, use the ip verify source command. To disable IP source guard on untrusted Layer 2 interfaces, use the no form of this command.

ip verify source {vlan dhcp-snooping | tracking} [port-security]

no ip verify source {vlan dhcp-snooping | tracking} [port-security]

Syntax Description

vlan dhcp-snooping

Enables IP source guard on untrusted Layer 2 DHCP snooping interfaces.

tracking

Enables IP port security to learn static IP address learning on a port.

port-security

(Optional) Filters both source IP and MAC addresses using the port security feature.

Command Default

IP source guard is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(37)SG

Added support for IP port security and tracking.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable IP source guard on VLANs 10 through 20 on a per-port basis:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping

Switch(config)# ip dhcp snooping vlan 10 20

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet6/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode trunk

Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk native vlan 10

Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk allowed vlan 11-20

Switch(config-if)# no ip dhcp snooping trust

Switch(config-if)# ip verify source vlan dhcp-snooping

Switch(config)# end

Switch# show ip verify source interface f6/1

Interface Filter-type Filter-mode IP-address Mac-address Vlan

--------- ----------- ----------- --------------- ----------------- ----------

Fa6/1 ip-mac active 10.0.0.1 10

Fa6/1 ip-mac active deny-all 11-20

Switch#

The following example shows how to enable IP port security with IP-MAC filters on a Layer 2 access port:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ip device tracking

Switch(config)# interface fastEthernet 4/3

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode access

Switch(config-if)# switchport access vlan 1

Switch(config-if)# ip device tracking maximum 5

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security maximum 5

Switch(config-if)# ip verify source tracking port-security

Switch(config-if)# end

You can verify your settings by entering the show ip verify source privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip device tracking maximum

Enables IP port security binding tracking on a Layer 2 port.

ip dhcp snooping

Globally enables DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping limit rate

Configures the number of the DHCP messages that an interface can receive per second.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip source binding

Adds or delete a static IP source binding entry.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries.

show ip source binding

Displays IP source bindings that are configured on the system.

show ip verify source

Displays the IP source guard configuration and filters on a particular interface.

ip verify unicast source reachable-via

To enable and configure unicast RPF checks on a IPv4 interface, use the ip verify unicast source reachable-via command. To disable unicast RPF, use the no form of this command.

ip verify unicast source reachable-via rx allow-default

no ip verify unicast source reachable-via

Syntax Description

rx

Verifies that the source address is reachable on the interface where the packet was received.

allow-default

Verifies that the default route matches the source address.

Command Default

Disabled

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

Support introduced on Catalyst 4900M chassis and a Catalyst 4500 with a Supervisor Engine 6-E.

Usage Guidelines

1. In basic RX mode, unicast RPF ensures a source address must be reachable on the arrived interface. For example, the source must be reachable without load balancing.

Note Unicast RPF is an input function and is applied only on the input interface of a router at the upstream end of a connection.

Do not use unicast RPF on internal network interfaces. Internal interfaces might have routing asymmetry, which means that there are multiple routes to the source of a packet. Apply unicast RPF only where there is natural or configured symmetry.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable unicast RPF exist-only checking mode:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# ip verify unicast source reachable-via rx allow-default

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip cef (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Enables Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) on the switch.

show running-config

Displays the current running configuration for a switch.

ip wccp

To enable support of the specified Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP) service for participation in a service group, use the ip wccp command in global configuration mode. To disable the service group, use the no form of this command.

ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} [accelerated] [group-address multicast-address] [redirect-list access-list] [group-list access-list] [password [0 | 7] password]

no ip wccp {web-cache | service-number}[accelerated] [group-address multicast-address] [redirect-list access-list] [group-list access-list] [password [0 | 7] password]

Syntax Description

web-cache

Specifies the web-cache service.
argument, are 8.

service-number

Dynamic service identifier, which means the service definition is dictated by the cache. The dynamic service number can be from 0 to 254. The maximum number of services is 8, which includes the web-cache service specified with the web-cache keyword.

Note If Cisco cache engines are being used in your service group, the reverse-proxy service is indicated by a value of 99.

accelerated

(Optional) This option applies only to hardware-accelerated routers. This keyword configures the service group to prevent a connection being formed with a cache engine unless the cache engine is configured in a way that allows redirection on the router to benefit from hardware acceleration.

group-address multicast-address

(Optional) Multicast IP address that communicates with the WCCP service group. The multicast address is used by the router to determine which cache engine should receive redirected messages.

redirect-list access-list

(Optional) Access list that controls traffic redirected to this service group. The access-list argument should consist of a string of no more than 64 characters (name or number) that specifies the access list.

group-list access-list

(Optional) Access list that determines which cache engines are allowed to participate in the service group. The access-list argument specifies either the number or the name of a standard or extended access list.

password [0 | 7] password

(Optional) Message digest algorithm 5 (MD5) authentication for messages received from the service group. Messages that are not accepted by the authentication are discarded. The encryption type can be 0 or 7, with 0 specifying not yet encrypted and 7 for proprietary. The password argument can be up to eight characters in length.

Command Default

WCCP services are not enabled on the router.

Command Modes

Global configuration (config)

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

Support introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

15.0(2)SG/3.2(0)SG

Supported extended to Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, and Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

15.0(2)SG1

Support for redirect-list keyword.

IOS XE 3.3.0 SG (15.1(1)SG)

Supported extended to Supervisor Engine 7-E and Supervisor Engine 7L-E.

Usage Guidelines

This command instructs a router to enable or disable the support for the specified service number or the web-cache service name. A service number can be from 0 to 254. Once the service number or name is enabled, the router can participate in the establishment of a service group.

When the no ip wccp command is entered, the router terminates participation in the service group, deallocates space if none of the interfaces still has the service configured, and terminates the WCCP task if no other services are configured.

The keywords following the web-cache keyword and the service-number argument are optional and may be specified in any order, but only may be specified once. The following sections outline the specific usage of each of the optional forms of this command.

ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} group-address multicast-address

A WCCP group address can be configured to set up a multicast address that cooperating routers and web caches can use to exchange WCCP protocol messages. If such an address is used, IP multicast routing must be enabled so that the messages that use the configured group (multicast) addresses are received correctly.

This option instructs the router to use the specified multicast IP address to coalesce the “I See You” responses for the “Here I Am” messages that it has received on this group address. The response is sent to the group address as well. The default is for no group address to be configured, in which case all “Here I Am” messages are responded to with a unicast reply.

ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} redirect-list access-list

This option instructs the router to use an access list to control the traffic that is redirected to the web caches of the service group specified by the service name given. The access-list argument specifies either the number or the name of a standard or extended access list. The access list itself specifies which traffic is permitted to be redirected. The default is for no redirect list to be configured (all traffic is redirected).

WCCP requires that the following protocol and ports not be filtered by any access lists:

- User Datagram Protocol (UDP) (protocol type 17) port 2048. This port is used for control signaling. Blocking this type of traffic will prevent WCCP from establishing a connection between the router and cache engines.

ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} group-list access-list

This option instructs the router to use an access list to control the cache engines that are allowed to participate in the specified service group. The access-list argument specifies either the number of a standard or extended access list or the name of any type of named access list. The access list itself specifies which cache engines are permitted to participate in the service group. The default is for no group list to be configured, in which case all cache engines may participate in the service group.

Note The ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} group-list command syntax resembles the ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} group-listen command, but these are entirely different commands. The ip wccp group-listen command is an interface configuration command used to configure an interface to listen for multicast notifications from a cache cluster. Refer to the description of the ip wccp group-listen command in the Cisco IOS IP Application Services Command Reference.

ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} password password

This option instructs the router to use MD5 authentication on the messages received from the service group specified by the service name given. Use this form of the command to set the password on the router. You must also configure the same password separately on each web cache. The password can be up to a maximum of eight characters. Messages that do not authenticate when authentication is enabled on the router are discarded. The default is for no authentication password to be configured and for authentication to be disabled.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a router to run WCCP reverse-proxy service, using the multicast address of 239.0.0.0:

Router(config)# ip multicast-routing

Router(config)# ip wccp 99 group-address 239.0.0.0

Router(config)# interface gigabitethernet 3/1

Router(config-if)# ip wccp 99 group-listen

The following example shows how to configure a router to redirect web-related packets without a destination of 10.168.196.51 to the web cache:

Router(config)# access-list 100 deny ip any host 10.168.196.51

Router(config)# access-list 100 permit ip any any

Router(config)# ip wccp web-cache redirect-list 100

Router(config)# interface gigabitethernet 3/2

Router(config-if)# ip wccp web-cache redirect out

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip wccp check services all

Enables all WCCP services.

ip wccp version

Specifies which version of WCCP you wish to use on your router.

show ip wccp

Displays global statistics related to WCCP.

ipv6 wccp

To enable support of the specified Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP) service for participation in a service group, use the ipv6 wccp command in global configuration mode. To disable the service group, use the no form of this command.

ipv6 wccp vrf vrf-name [group-address groupaddress] [redirect-list access-list] [group-list access-list]

Syntax Description no ipv6 wccp [ group-address groupaddress ] [ redirect-list access-list ] [ group-list access-list ] S

vrf vrf name

(Optional) Specifies a virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance to associate with a service group.

group-address groupaddress

(Optional) IP address that communicates with the WCCP service group. The multicast address is used by the device to determine which cache engine should receive redirected messages.

redirect-list access-list

(Optional) Access list that controls traffic redirected to this service group. The access-list argument should consist of a string of no more than 64 characters (name or number) that specifies the access list.

group-list access-list

(Optional) Access list that determines which cache engines are allowed to participate in the service group. The access-list argument specifies either the number or the name of a standard or extended access list.

Command Default

WCCP services are not enabled on the router.

Command Modes

Global configuration (config)

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.8.0E and 15.2(4)E

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

This command instructs a device to enable or disable the support for the specified service number or the VRF. A service number can be from 0 to 254. Once the service number or name is enabled, the router can participate in the establishment of a service group.

When the no ipv6 wccp command is entered, the device terminates participation in the service group, deallocates space if none of the interfaces still has the service configured, and terminates the WCCP task if no other services are configured.

The following sections outline the specific usage of each of the optional forms of this command.

ipv6 wccp vrf vrf name group-address groupaddress

The vrf vrf-name keyword and argument pair is optional. It allows you to specify a VRF to associate with a service group. You can then specify a web-cache service name or service number.

A WCCP group address can be configured to set up a multicast address that cooperating devices and can use to exchange WCCP protocol messages. If such an address is used, IP multicast routing must be enabled so that the messages that use the configured group (multicast) addresses are received correctly.

This option instructs the device to use the specified multicast IP address to coalesce the “I See You” responses for the “Here I Am” messages that it has received on this group address. The response is sent to the group address as well. The default is for no group address to be configured, in which case all “Here I Am” messages are responded to with a unicast reply.

ipv6 wccp vrf vrf name redirect-list access-list

This option instructs the device to use an access list to control the traffic that is redirected to the service group specified by the service name given. The access-list argument specifies either the number or the name of a standard or extended access list. The access list itself specifies which traffic is permitted to be redirected. The default is for no redirect list to be configured (all traffic is redirected).

WCCP requires that the following protocol and ports not be filtered by any access lists:

- User Datagram Protocol (UDP) (protocol type 17) port 2048. This port is used for control signaling. Blocking this type of traffic will prevent WCCP from establishing a connection between the router and cache engines.

ipv6 wccp vrf vrf name group-list access-list

This option instructs the router to use an access list to control the cache engines that are allowed to participate in the specified service group. The access-list argument specifies either the number of a standard or extended access list or the name of any type of named access list. The access list itself specifies which cache engines are permitted to participate in the service group. The default is for no group list to be configured, in which case all cache engines may participate in the service group.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the TCP promiscuous service for IPv4 VRF interfaces, where VLAN 40 represents the server interface and VLAN 50 represents the content engine interface:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# ipv6 wccp vrf abc 91

Switch(config)# ipv6 wccp vrf abc 92

Switch(config)# interface vlan 30

Switch(config-if)# vrf forwarding abc s

Switch(config-if)# ipv6 wccp vrf abc 91 redirect in

Switch(config)# interface vlan 40

Switch(config-if)# vrf forwarding abc

Switch(config-if)# ipv6 wccp vrf abc 92 redirect in

Switch(config)# interface vlan 50

Switch(config-if)# vrf forwarding abc

Related Commands

Command

Description

show ipv6 wccp

Displays global statistics related to WCCP.

ip wccp check services all

To enable all Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP) services, use the ip wccp check services all command in global configuration mode. To disable all services, use the no form of this command.

ip wccp check services all

no ip wccp check services all

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

WCCP services are not enabled on the router.

Command Modes

Global configuration (config)

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

Support introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

IOS XE 3.2(0)SG

(15.0(2)SG)

Support extended to Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

IOS XE 3.3.0 SG (15.1(1)SG)

Supported extended to Supervisor Engine 7-E and Supervisor Engine 7L-E.

Usage Guidelines

With the ip wccp check services all command, WCCP can be configured to check all configured services for a match and perform redirection for those services if appropriate. The caches to which packets are redirected can be controlled by a redirect ACL access control list (ACL) as well as by the priority value of the service.

It is possible to configure an interface with more than one WCCP service. When more than one WCCP service is configured on an interface, the precedence of a service depends on the relative priority of the service compared to the priority of the other configured services. Each WCCP service has a priority value as part of its definition.

If no WCCP services are configured with a redirect ACL, the services are considered in priority order until a service is found which matches the IP packet. If no services match the packet, the packet is not redirected. If a service matches the packet and the service has a redirect ACL configured, then the IP packet will be checked against the ACL. If the packet is rejected by the ACL, the packet will not be passed down to lower priority services unless the ip wccp check services all command is configured. When the ip wccp check services all command is configured, WCCP will continue to attempt to match the packet against any remaining lower priority services configured on the interface.

Note The priority of a WCCP service group is determined by the web cache appliance. The priority of a WCCP service group cannot be configured via Cisco IOS software.

Note The ip wccp check services all command is a global WCCP command that applies to all services and is not associated with a single service.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure all WCCP services:

Router(config)# ip wccp check services all

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip wccp

Enables support of the specified WCCP service for participation in a service group.

ip wccp group-listen

Configures an interface on a router to enable or disable the reception of IP multicast packets for Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP).

ip wccp redirect

Enables packet redirection on an inbound or outbound interface using Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP).

ip wccp redirect exclude in

Configure an interface to exclude packets received on an interface from being checked for redirection.

ip wccp version

Specifies which version of WCCP you wish to use on your router.

ip wccp group-listen

To configure an interface on a router to enable or disable the reception of IP multicast packets for Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP), use the ip wccp group-listen command in interface configuration mode. To disable the reception of IP multicast packets for WCCP, use the no form of this command.

ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} group-listen

no ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} group-listen

Syntax Description

web-cache

The web cache service.

service-number

WCCP service number; valid values are from 0 to 254.

Command Default

This command is disabled by default.

Command Modes

Interface configuration (config-if)

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

Support introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

IOS XE 3.2(0)SG

(15.0(2)SG)

Support extended to Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

IOS XE 3.3.0 SG

(15.1(1)SG)

Supported extended to Supervisor Engine 7-E and Supervisor Engine 7L-E.

Usage Guidelines

On routers that are to be members of a Service Group when IP multicast is used, the following configuration is required:

- Configure the IP multicast address for use by the WCCP Service Group.

- Configure the interfaces on which the router wishes to receive the IP multicast address with the ip wccp { web-cache | service-number } group-listen interface configuration command.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the multicast packets for a web cache with a multicast address of 224.1.1.100:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# ip wccp web-cache group-address 224.1.1.100

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 3/1

Switch(config-if)# ip wccp web-cache group-listen

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip wccp

Enables support of the WCCP service for participation in a service group.

ip wccp check services all

Enables all Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP) services.

ip wccp redirect

Enables WCCP redirection on an interface.

ip wccp redirect

Enables packet redirection on an inbound or outbound interface using Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP).

ip wccp redirect exclude in

Configures an interface to exclude packets received on an interface from being checked for redirection.

ip wccp version

Specifies which version of WCCP you wish to use on your router.

ip wccp redirect

To enable packet redirection on an inbound or outbound interface using Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP), use the ip wccp redirect command in interface configuration mode. To disable WCCP redirection, use the no form of this command.

ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} redirect {in | out}

no ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} redirect {in | out}

Syntax Description

web-cache

Enables the web cache service.

service-number

Identification number of the cache engine service group; valid values are from 0 to 254.

If Cisco cache engines are used in the cache cluster, the reverse proxy service is indicated by a value of 99.

in

Specifies packet redirection on an inbound interface.

out

Specifies packet redirection on an outbound interface.

Command Default

Redirection checking on the interface is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration (config-if)

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

Support introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

IOS XE 3.2(0)SG

(15.0(2)SG)

Support extended to Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

15.0(2)SG1

web-cache and service-number keywords supports on Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

IOS XE 3.3.0 SG (15.1(1)SG)

Supported extended to Supervisor Engine 7-E and Supervisor Engine 7L-E.

Usage Guidelines

The ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} redirect in command allows you to configure WCCP redirection on an interface receiving inbound network traffic. When the command is applied to an interface, all packets arriving at that interface will be compared against the criteria defined by the specified WCCP service. If the packets match the criteria, they will be redirected.

Likewise, the ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} redirect out command allows you to configure the WCCP redirection check at an outbound interface.

Tips Be careful not to confuse the ip wccp {web-cache | service-number} redirect {out | in} interface configuration command with the ip wccp redirect exclude in interface configuration command.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a session in which reverse proxy packets on Ethernet interface 3/1 are being checked for redirection and redirected to a Cisco Cache Engine:

Switch(config)# ip wccp 99

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 3/1

Switch(config-if)# ip wccp 99 redirect out

The following example shows how to configure a session in which HTTP traffic arriving on GigabitEthernet interface 3/1 is redirected to a Cache Engine:

Switch(config)# ip wccp web-cache

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 3/1

Switch(config-if)# ip wccp web-cache redirect in

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip wccp check services all

Configures an interface on a router to enable or disable the reception of IP multicast packets for Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP).

ip wccp group-listen

Configures an interface on a router to enable or disable the reception of IP multicast packets for Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP).

ip wccp redirect exclude in

Enables redirection exclusion on an interface.

show ip interface

Displays the usability status of interfaces that are configured for IP.

show ip wccp

Displays the WCCP global configuration and statistics.

p wccp redirect exclude in

To configure an interface to exclude packets received on an interface from being checked for redirection, use the ip wccp redirect exclude in command in interface configuration mode. To disable the ability of a router to exclude packets from redirection checks, use the no form of this command.

ip wccp redirect exclude in

no ip wccp redirect exclude in

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Redirection exclusion is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration (config-if)

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

Support introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

IOS XE 3.2(0)SG

(15.0(2)SG)

Support extended to Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

IOS XE 3.3.0 SG

(15.1(1)SG)

Supported extended to Supervisor Engine 7-E and Supervisor Engine 7L-E.

Usage Guidelines

This configuration command instructs the interface to exclude inbound packets from any redirection check. Note that the command is global to all the services and should be applied to any inbound interface that will be excluded from redirection.

This command is intended to be used to accelerate the flow of packets from a cache engine to the Internet as well as allow for the use of the Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP) v2 packet return feature.

Examples

In the following example, packets arriving on GigabitEthernet interface 3/1 are excluded from WCCP output redirection checks:

Router (config)# interface gigabitethernet 3/1

Router (config-if)# ip wccp redirect exclude in

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip wccp

Enables support of the WCCP service for participation in a service group.

ip wccp redirect

Enable packet redirection on an inbound or outbound interface using Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP).

ip wccp redirect out

Configures redirection on an interface in the outgoing direction.

ip wccp check services all

Configures an interface on a router to enable or disable the reception of IP multicast packets for Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP).

ip wccp group-listen

Configures an interface on a router to enable or disable the reception of IP multicast packets for Web Cache Communication Protocol (WCCP).

ip wccp redirect exclude in

Enables redirection exclusion on an interface.

show ip interface

Displays the usability status of interfaces that are configured for IP.

show ip wccp

Displays the WCCP global configuration and statistics.

ipv6 dhcp-lrda

To enable Lightweight DHCPv6 Relay Agent (LDRA) functionality on an access node, use the ipv6 dhcp-ldra command in global configuration mode. To disable the LDRA functionality, use the no form of this command.

ipv6 dhcp-lrda {enable | disable | remote-id remote-id}

no ipv6 dhcp-lrda {enable | disable | remote-id remote-id}

Syntax Description

enable

Enables LDRA functionality on an access node.

disable

Disables LDRA functionality on an access node.

remote-id remote-id

Configures the DHCPV6 LDRA remote ID globally.

Command Default

If the remote ID is not configured, a system generated remote ID is used.

Command Modes

Global configuration (config)

Command History

Release

Modification

Cisco IOS Release 15.2(5)E2

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

Usage Guidelines

You must configure the LDRA functionality globally using the ipv6 dhcp-ldra command before configuring it on a VLAN or an access node (such as a Digital Subscriber Link Access Multiplexer [DSLAM] or an Ethernet switch) interface.

To enable LDRA, configure the ipv6 dhcp-ldra command. To disable LDRA, configure either the no ipv6 dhcp-ldra enable or the ipv6 dhcp-ldra disable command. Configuring the no ipv6 dhcp-ldra command will not disable LDRA globally, and as a result, there is no carriage return after the no ipv6 dhcp-ldra command.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the LDRA functionality:

Device> enable

Device# configure terminal

Device(config)# ipv6 dhcp-ldra enable

Device(config)# exit

Related CommandsT

Command

Description

ipv6 dhcp relay destination

Specifies a destination address to which client messages are forwarded and to enable DHCPv6 relay service on the interface.

ipv6 dhcp-ldra interface-id

To configure Lightweight DHCPv6 Relay Agent (LDRA) interface ID on a port or an interface, use the ipv6 dhcp-ldra interface-id command in interface configuration mode. To disable LDRA interface ID on an interface or port, use the no form of this command.

ipv6 dhcp-ldra interface-id interface-id

no dhcp-ldra interface-id interface-id

Syntax Description

interface-id

Interface identifier. Valid length for this argument is from 2 to 23 characters.

Command Default

If the interface ID is not configured, the system uses a short name for an interface (for example, the system uses eth0/0 for Ethernet 0/0) as the interface ID.

Command Modes

Interface configuration (config-if)

Command History

Release

Modification

Cisco IOS Release 15.2(5)E2

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure an LDRA interface ID:

Device> enable

Device# configure terminal

Device(config)# ipv6 dhcp-ldra enable

Device(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/0

Device(config-if)# switchport

Device(config-if)# ipv6 dhcp-ldra interface-id 20

Device(config-if)# exit

Related Commands

Command

Description

ipv6 dhcp-ldra

Enables LDRA functionality on an access node.

ipv6 dhcp ldra attach-policy (VLAN)

Specifies a VLAN number and enters VLAN configuration mode.

ipv6 dhcp-ldra attach-policy

To enable Lightweight DHCPv6 Relay Agent (LDRA) functionality on a port or interface, use the ipv6 dhcp-ldra attach-policy command in interface configuration mode. To disable LDRA functionality on an interface or port, use the no form of this command.

ipv6 dhcp-ldra attach-policy {client-facing-trusted | client-facing-untrusted | client-facing-disable | server-facing}

no ipv6 dhcp-ldra attach-policy {client-facing-trusted | client-facing-untrusted | client-facing-disable | server-facing}

Syntax Description

client-facing-trusted

Specifies client-facing interfaces or ports as trusted.

client-facing-untrusted

Specifies client-facing interfaces or ports as untrusted.

client-facing-disable

Disables LDRA functionality on an interface or port.

server-facing

Specifies an interface or port as server facing.

Command Default

LDRA functionality is not enabled on an interface or port.

Command Modes

Interface configuration (config-if)

Command History

Release

Modification

Cisco IOS Release 15.2(5)E2

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

Usage Guidelines

You need to configure the LDRA functionality globally using the ipv6 dhcp-ldra command in global configuration mode before configuring it on an interface or port.

The ipv6 dhcp-ldra attach-policy command enables LDRA functionality on a specific interface or port. Instead of configuring LDRA individually on all the client-facing interfaces or ports individually, use the ipv6 dhcp ldra attach-policy command to configure LDRA on an entire VLAN.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable LDRA functionality on an interface and specify it as server facing:

Device> enable

Device# configure terminal

Device(config)# ipv6 dhcp-ldra enable

Device(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/0

Device(config-if)# switchport

Device(config-if)# ipv6 dhcp-ldra attach-policy server-facing

Device(config-if)# exit

Related Commands

Command

Description

ipv6 dhcp-ldra

Enables LDRA functionality on an access node.

ipv6 dhcp ldra attach-policy (VLAN)

Enables LDRA functionality on a VLAN.

ipv6 dhcp lrda attach-policy (VLAN)

To enable Lightweight DHCPv6 Relay Agent (LDRA) functionality on a VLAN, use the ipv6 dhcp ldra attach-policy command in VLAN configuration mode. To disable LDRA functionality on a VLAN, use the no form of this command.

ipv6 dhcp ldra attach-policy {client-facing-trusted | client-facing-untrusted}

no ipv6 dhcp ldra attach-policy {client-facing-trusted | client-facing-untrusted}

Syntax Description

client-facing-trusted

Specifies client-facing interfaces or ports as trusted.

client-facing-untrusted

Specifies client-facing interfaces or ports as untrusted.

Command Default

The LDRA functionality is not enabled on a VLAN.

Command Modes

VLAN configuration (config-vlan-config)

Command History

Release

Modification

Cisco IOS Release 15.2(5)E2

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches in a release prior to Cisco IOS Release 15.2(5)E2.

Usage Guidelines

You need to configure the LDRA functionality globally using the ipv6 dhcp-ldra command before configuring it on a VLAN.

In a typical deployment, a majority of the interfaces or ports on a device are client facing. Instead of configuring LDRA individually on all the client facing interfaces and ports, use the ipv6 dhcp ldra attach-policy command to configure LDRA on the entire VLAN. As a result, all the ports or interfaces associated with the VLAN will be configured as client facing.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable LDRA functionality on a VLAN:

Device> enable

Device# configure terminal

Device(config)# ipv6 dhcp-ldra enable

Device(config)# vlan configuration 5

Device(config-vlan-config)# ipv6 dhcp ldra attach-policy client-facing-trusted

Device(config-vlan-config)# exit

Related Commands

Command

Description

ipv6 dhcp-lrda

Enables LDRA functionality on an access node.

vlan configuration

Enables SNMP MAC address notifications.

ipv6 dhcp relay destination

To specify a destination address to which client messages are forwarded and to enable Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol Version 6 (DHCPv6) relay service on the interface, use the ipv6 dhcp relay destination command in interface configuration mode. To remove a relay destination on the interface or to delete an output interface for a destination, use the no form of this command.

ipv6 dhcp relay destination {ipv6-address | global ipv6-address | vrf vrfname ipv6-address} [interface-type interface-number] [link-address link-address] [source-address source-address]

no ipv6 dhcp relay destination {ipv6-address | global ipv6-address | vrf vrfname ipv6-address} [interface-type interface-number] [link-address link-address] [source-address source-address]

Syntax Description

ipv6-address

Relay destination address. There are two types of relay destination address:

- Link-scoped unicast or multicast IPv6 address. User must specify an output interface for this kind of address.

- Global or site-scoped unicast or multicast IPv6 address.

global

Specifies the relay destination when the relay destination is in the global address space and when the relay source is in a virtual routing and forwarding (VRF) instance.

vrf vrfname

Specifies the VRF instance associated with the relay destination IPv6 address.

interface-type interface-number

(Optional) Interface type and number that specifies the output interface for a destination. If this argument is configured, client messages are forwarded to the destination address through the link to which the output interface is connected.

link-address link-address

(Optional) Specifies the DHCPv6 link address. The link-address must be an IPv6 globally scoped address configured on the network interface where the DHCPv6 relay is operational.

source-address source-address

(Optional) Specifies the network interface source address. The source-address can be any IPv6 global-scoped address on a device.

Command Default

The relay function is disabled, and there is no relay destination on an interface.

Command Modes

Interface configuration (config-if)

Command History

Release

Modification

Cisco IOS Release 15.2(5)E2

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches in a release prior to Cisco IOS Release 152(5)E2.

Usage Guidelines

The ipv6 dhcp relay destination command specifies a destination address to which client messages are forwarded, and it enables DHCPv6 relay service on the interface. When relay service is enabled on an interface, a DHCPv6 message received on that interface is forwarded to all configured relay destinations. The incoming DHCPv6 message may have come from a client on that interface, or relayed by another relay agent.

The relay destination can be a unicast address of a server or another relay agent, or it may be a multicast address. There are two types of relay destination addresses:

- A link-scoped unicast or multicast IPv6 address, for which a user must specify an output interface

- A global or site-scoped unicast or multicast IPv6 address. A user can optionally specify an output interface for this kind of address.

If no output interface is configured for a destination, the output interface is determined by routing tables. In this case, it is recommended that a unicast or multicast routing protocol be running on the device.

Multiple destinations can be configured on one interface, and multiple output interfaces can be configured for one destination. When the relay agent relays messages to a multicast address, it sets the hop limit field in the IPv6 packet header to 32.

Unspecified, loopback, and node-local multicast addresses are not acceptable as the relay destination. If any one of them is configured, the message "Invalid destination address" is displayed.

Note that it is not necessary to enable the relay function on an interface for it to accept and forward an incoming relay reply message from servers. By default, the relay function is disabled, and there is no relay destination on an interface. The no form of the command removes a relay destination on an interface or deletes an output interface for a destination. If all relay destinations are removed, the relay service is disabled on the interface.

The DHCPv6 client, server, and relay functions are mutually exclusive on an interface. When one of these functions is already enabled, and a user tries to configure a different function on the same interface, one of the following messages is displayed: "Interface is in DHCP client mode," "Interface is in DHCP server mode," or "Interface is in DHCP relay mode."

Examples

The following example sets the relay destination address on Ethernet interface 4/3:

Device# configure terminal

Device(config)# interface gigabitethernet 0/0

Device(config-if)# ipv6 dhcp relay destination FE80::250:A2FF:FEBF:A056 gigabitethernet 4/3

Related Commands

Command

Description

interface

Configures an interface and enters interface configuration mode.

ipv6 dhcp-ldra

Enables LDRA functionality on an access node.

ipv6 mld snooping

To enable IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping globally or on the specified VLAN, use the ipv6 mld snooping command without keywords. To disable MLD snooping on a switch or the VLAN, use the no form of this command.

ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id]

no ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id]

Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Enables or disables IPv6 MLD snooping on the specified VLAN. The VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

Command Default

MLD snooping is globally disabled on the switch.

MLD snooping is enabled on all VLANs. However, MLD snooping must be globally enabled before VLAN snooping can take place.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500.

Usage Guidelines

When MLD snooping is globally disabled, it is disabled on all the existing VLAN interfaces. When you globally enable MLD snooping, it is enabled on all VLAN interfaces that are in the default state (enabled). VLAN configuration overrides global configuration on interfaces on which MLD snooping has been disabled.

If MLD snooping is globally disabled, you cannot enable it on a VLAN. If MLD snooping is globally enabled, you can disable it on individual VLANs.

VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in MLD snooping.

Examples

The following example shows how to globally enable MLD snooping:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to disable MLD snooping on a VLAN:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# no ipv6 mld snooping vlan 11

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show ipv6 mld snooping user EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show ipv6 mld snooping

Displays IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping configuration of the switch or the VLAN.

ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-count

To configure IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery Mulitcast Address Specific Queries (MASQs) that will be sent before aging out a client, use the ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-count command. To reset the query count to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] last-listener-query-count integer_value

no ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] last-listener-query-count

Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Configures last-listener query count on the specified VLAN. The VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

integer_value

The integer range is 1 to 7.

Command Default

The default global count is 2.

The default VLAN count is 0 (the global count is used).

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500.

Usage Guidelines

In MLD snooping, the IPv6 multicast switch periodically sends out queries to hosts belonging to the multicast group. If a host wants to leave a multicast group, it can silently leave or it can respond to the query with a Multicast Listener Done message (equivalent to an IGMP Leave message). When Immediate Leave is not configured (it should not be configured if multiple clients for a group exist on the same port), the configured last-listener query count determines the number of MASQs that are sent before an MLD client is aged out.

When the last-listener query count is set for a VLAN, this count overrides the value configured globally. When the VLAN count is not configured (set to the default of 0), the global count is used.

VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in MLD snooping.

Examples

The following example shows how to globally set the last-listener query count:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-count 1

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to set the last-listener query count for VLAN 10:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 10 last-listener-query-count 3

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] user EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-interval

Configures IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping last-listener query interval on the switch or on a VLAN.

show ipv6 mld snooping

Displays IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping configuration of the switch or the VLAN.

show ipv6 mld snooping querier

Displays IP version 6 (IPv6) MLD snooping querier-related information most recently received by the switch or the VLAN.

ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-interval

To configure IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping last-listener query interval on the switch or on a VLAN, use the ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-interval command. To reset the query time to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] last-listener-query-interval integer_value

no ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] last-listener-query-interval

Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Configures last-listener query interval on the specified VLAN. The VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

integer_value

Sets the time period (in thousandths of a second) that a multicast switch must wait after issuing a MASQ before deleting a port from the multicast group. The range is 100 to 32,768. The default is 1000 (1 second),

Command Default

The default global query interval (maximum response time) is 1000 (1 second).

The default VLAN query interval (maximum response time) is 0 (the global count is used).

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500.

Usage Guidelines

The last-listener-query-interval time is the maximum time that a multicast switch waits after issuing a Mulitcast Address Specific Query (MASQ) before deleting a port from the multicast group.

In MLD snooping, when the IPv6 multicast switch receives an MLD leave message, it sends out queries to hosts belonging to the multicast group. If there are no responses from a port to a MASQ for a length of time, the switch deletes the port from the membership database of the multicast address. The last listener query interval is the maximum time that the switch waits before deleting a nonresponsive port from the multicast group.

When a VLAN query interval is set, the global query interval is overridden. When the VLAN interval is set at 0, the global value is used.

VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in MLD snooping.

Examples

The following example shows how to globally set the last-listener query interval to 2 seconds:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-interval 2000

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to set the last-listener query interval for VLAN 1 to 5.5 seconds:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 1 last-listener-query-interval 5500

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show ipv6 MLD snooping [vlan vlan-id] user EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-count

Configures IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery Mulitcast Address Specific Queries (MASQs) that will be sent before aging out a client.

show ipv6 mld snooping querier

Displays IP version 6 (IPv6) MLD snooping querier-related information most recently received by the switch or the VLAN.

ipv6 mld snooping listener-message-suppression

To enable IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping listener message suppression, use the ipv6 mld snooping listener-message-suppression command. To disable MLD snooping listener message suppression, use the no form of this command.

ipv6 mld snooping listener-message-suppression

no ipv6 mld snooping listener-message-suppression

Command Default

The default is for MLD snooping listener message suppression to be disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500.

Usage Guidelines

MLD snooping listener message suppression is equivalent to IGMP snooping report suppression. When it is enabled, received MLDv1 reports to a group are forwarded to IPv6 multicast switchs only once in every report-forward time. This prevents the forwarding of duplicate reports.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable MLD snooping listener message suppression:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping listener-message-suppression

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to disable MLD snooping listener message suppression:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# no ipv6 mld snooping listener-message-suppression

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] user EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

ipv6 mld snooping

Enables IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping globally or on the specified VLAN.

show ipv6 mld snooping

Displays IP version 6 (IPv6) MLD snooping configuration of the switch or the VLAN.

ipv6 mld snooping robustness-variable

To configure the number of IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) queries that the switch sends before deleting a listener that does not respond, or to enter a VLAN ID to configure the number of queries per VLAN, use the ipv6 mld snooping robustness-variable command. To reset the variable to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] robustness-variable integer_value

no ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id] robustness-variable

Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Configures the robustness variable on the specified VLAN. The VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

integer_value

The robustness value ranges from 1 to 3.

Command Default

The default global robustness variable (number of queries before deleting a listener) is 2.

The default VLAN robustness variable (number of queries before aging out a multicast address) is 0, which means that the system uses the global robustness variable for aging out the listener.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500.

Usage Guidelines

Robustness is measured by the number of MLDv1 queries sent with no response before a port is removed from a multicast group. A port is deleted when there are no MLDv1 reports received for the configured number of MLDv1 queries. The global value determines the number of queries that the switch waits before deleting a listener that does not respond, and it applies to all VLANs that do not have a VLAN value set.

The robustness value configured for a VLAN overrides the global value. If the VLAN robustness value is 0 (the default), the global value is used.

VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in MLD snooping.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the global robustness variable so that the switch sends out three queries before it deletes a listener port that does not respond:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping robustness-variable 3

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to configure the robustness variable for VLAN 1. This value overrides the global configuration for the VLAN:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 1 robustness-variable 1

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show ipv6 MLD snooping [vlan vlan-id] user EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-count

Configures IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery Mulitcast Address Specific Queries (MASQs) that will be sent before aging out a client.

show ipv6 mld snooping

Displays IP version 6 (IPv6) MLD snooping configuration of the switch or the VLAN.

ipv6 mld snooping tcn

To configure IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) Topology Change Notifications (TCNs), use the ipv6 mld snooping tcn commands. To reset the default settings, use the no form of the commands.

ipv6 mld snooping tcn {flood query count integer_value | query solicit}

no ipv6 mld snooping tcn {flood query count integer_value | query solicit}

Syntax Description

flood query count integer_value

Sets the flood query count, which is the number of queries that are sent before forwarding multicast data to only those ports requesting it. The range is 1 to 10.

query solicit

Enables soliciting of TCN queries.

Command Default

TCN query soliciting is disabled.

When enabled, the default flood query count is 2.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable TCN query soliciting:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping tcn query solicit.

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to set the flood query count to 5:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping tcn flood query count 5.

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show ipv6 MLD snooping [vlan vlan-id] user EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show ipv6 mld snooping

Displays IP version 6 (IPv6) MLD snooping configuration of the switch or the VLAN.

ipv6 mld snooping vlan

To configure IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping parameters on the VLAN interface, use the ipv6 mld snooping vlan command. To reset the parameters to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id [immediate-leave | mrouter interface interface-id | static ipv6-multicast-address interface interface-id]

no ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id [immediate-leave | mrouter interface interface-id | static ip-address interface interface-id]

Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

Specifies a VLAN number. The range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

immediate-leave

(Optional) Enables MLD Immediate-Leave processing on a VLAN interface. Use the no form of the command to disable the Immediate Leave feature on the interface.

mrouter interface

(Optional) Configures a multicast switch port. The no form of the command removes the configuration.

static ipv6-multicast-address

(Optional) Configures a multicast group with the specified IPv6 multicast address.

interface interface-id

Adds a Layer 2 port to the group. The mrouter or static interface can be a physical port or a port-channel interface ranging from 1 to 48.

Command Default

MLD snooping Immediate-Leave processing is disabled.

By default, there are no static IPv6 multicast groups.

By default, there are no multicast switch ports.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500.

Usage Guidelines

You should only configure the Immediate-Leave feature when there is only one receiver on every port in the VLAN. The configuration is saved in NVRAM.

The static keyword is used for configuring the MLD member ports statically.

The configuration and the static ports and groups are saved in NVRAM.

VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in MLD snooping.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable MLD Immediate-Leave processing on VLAN 1:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 1 immediate-leave

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to disable MLD Immediate-Leave processing on VLAN 1:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# no ipv6 mld snooping vlan 1 immediate-leave

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to configure a port as a multicast switch port:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 1 mrouter interface GigabitEthernet1/1

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to configure a static multicast group:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# ipv6 mld snooping vlan 2 static FF12::34 interface GigabitEthernet1/1

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show ipv6 mld snooping vlan vlan-id user EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

ipv6 mld snooping

Enables IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping globally or on the specified VLAN.

show ipv6 mld snooping

Displays IP version 6 (IPv6) MLD snooping configuration of the switch or the VLAN.

issu abortversion

To cancel the ISSU upgrade or the downgrade process in progress and to restore the Catalyst 4500 series switch to its state before the start of the process, use the issue abortversion command.

issu abortversion active-slot [active-image-new]

Syntax Description

active-slot

Specifies the slot number for the current standby supervisor engine.

active-image-new

(Optional) Name of the new image present in the current standby supervisor engine.

Command Default

There are no default settings

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You can use the issu abortversion command at any time to stop the ISSU process. To complete the process enter the issu commitversion command. Before any action is taken, a check ensures that both supervisor engines are either in the run version (RV) or load version (LV) state.

When the issu abortversion command is entered before the issu runversion command, the standby supervisor engine is reset and reloaded with the old image. When the issu abortversion command is entered after the issu runversion command, a change takes place and the new standby supervisor engine is reset and reloaded with the old image.

Examples

The following example shows how you can reset and reload the standby supervisor engine:

Switch# issu abortversion 2

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

issu acceptversion

Halts the rollback timer and ensures that the new Cisco IOS software image is not automatically stopped during the ISSU process.

issu commitversion

Loads the new Cisco IOS software image into the new standby supervisor engine.

issu loadversion

Starts the ISSU process.

issu runversion

Forces a change from the active supervisor engine to the standby supervisor engine and causes the newly active supervisor engine to run the new image specified.

show issu state

Displays the ISSU state and current booted image name during the ISSU process.

issu acceptversion

To halt the rollback timer and to ensure that the new Cisco IOS software image is not automatically stopped during the ISSU process, use the issu acceptversion command.

issu acceptversion active-slot [active-image-new]

Syntax Description

active-slot

Specifies the slot number for the currently active supervisor engine.

active-image-new

(Optional) Name of the new image on the currently active supervisor engine.

Command Default

Rollback timer resets automatically 45 minutes after you enter the issu runversion command.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

After you are satisfied with the new image and have confirmed the new supervisor engine is reachable by both the console and the network, enter the issu acceptversion command to halt the rollback timer. If the issu acceptversion command is not entered within 45 minutes from the time the issu runversion command is entered, the entire ISSU process is automatically rolled back to the previous version of the software. The rollback timer starts immediately after you enter the issu runversion command.

If the rollback timer expires before the standby supervisor engine goes to a hot standby state, the timer is automatically extended by up to 15 minutes. If the standby state goes to a hot-standby state within this extension time or the 15 minute extension expires, the switch aborts the ISSU process. A warning message that requires your intervention is displayed every 1 minute of the timer extension.

If the rollback timer is set to a long period of time, such as the default of 45 minutes, and the standby supervisor engine goes into the hot standby state in 7 minutes, you have 38 minutes (45 minus 7) to roll back if necessary.

Use the issu set rollback-timer to configure the rollback timer.

Examples

The following example shows how to halt the rollback timer and allow the ISSU process to continue:

Switch# issu acceptversion 2

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

issu abortversion

Cancels the ISSU upgrade or the downgrade process in progress and restores the switch to its state before the start of the process.

issu commitversion

Loads the new Cisco IOS software image into the new standby supervisor engine.

issu loadversion

Starts the ISSU process.

issu runversion

Forces a change from the active supervisor engine to the standby supervisor engine and causes the newly active supervisor engine to run the new image specified.

issu set rollback-timer

Configures the In Service Software Upgrade (ISSU) rollback timer value.

show issu state

Displays the ISSU state and current booted image name during the ISSU process.

issu commitversion

To load the new Cisco IOS software image into the new standby supervisor engine, use the issu commitversion command.

issu commitversion standby-slot [standby-image-new]

Syntax Description

standby-slot

Specifies the slot number for the currently active supervisor engine.

standby-image-new

(Optional) Name of the new image on the currently active supervisor engine.

Command Default

Enabled by default.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The issu commitversion command verifies that the standby supervisor engine has the new Cisco IOS software image in its file system and that both supervisor engines are in the run version (RV) state. If these conditions are met, the following actions take place:

- The standby supervisor engine is reset and booted with the new version of Cisco IOS software.

- The standby supervisor engine moves into the Stateful Switchover (SSO) mode and is fully stateful for all clients and applications with which the standby supervisor engine is compatible.

- The supervisor engines are moved into final state, which is the same as initial state.

Entering the issu commitversion command completes the In Service Software Upgrade (ISSU) process. This process cannot be stopped or reverted to its original state without starting a new ISSU process.

Entering the issu commitversion command without entering the issu acceptversion command is equivalent to entering both the issu acceptversion and the issu commitversion commands. Use the

issu commitversion command if you do not intend to run in the current state for an extended period of time and are satisfied with the new software version.

Examples

The following example shows how you can configure the standby supervisor engine to be reset and reloaded with the new Cisco IOS software version:

Switch# issu commitversion 1

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

issu acceptversion

Halts the rollback timer and ensures that the new Cisco IOS software image is not automatically stopped during the ISSU process.

issu commitversion

Loads the new Cisco IOS software image into the new standby supervisor engine.

issu loadversion

Starts the ISSU process.

issu runversion

Forces a change from the active supervisor engine to the standby supervisor engine and causes the newly active supervisor engine to run the new image specified.

show issu state

Displays the ISSU state and current booted image name during the ISSU process.

issu loadversion

To start the ISSU process, use the issu loadversion command.

issu loadversion active-slot active-image-new standby-slot standby-image-new [force]

Syntax Description

active-slot

Specifies the slot number for the currently active supervisor engine.

active-image-new

Specifies the name of the new image on the currently active supervisor engine.

standby-slot

Specifies the standby slot on the networking device.

standby-image-new

Specifies the name of the new image on the standby supervisor engine.

force

(Optional) Overrides the automatic rollback when the new Cisco IOS software version is detected to be incompatible.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The issu loadversion command causes the standby supervisor engine to be reset and booted with the new Cisco IOS software image specified by the command. If both the old image and the new image are ISSU capable, ISSU compatible, and have no configuration mismatches, the standby supervisor engine moves into Stateful Switchover (SSO) mode, and both supervisor engines move into the load version (LV) state.

It will take several seconds after the issu loadversion command is entered for Cisco IOS software to load onto the standby supervisor engine and the standby supervisor engine to transition to SSO mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to initiate the ISSU process:

Switch# issu loadversion 1 bootflash:new-image 2 slavebootflash:new-image

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

issu abortversion

Cancels the ISSU upgrade or the downgrade process in progress and restores the switch to its state before the start of the process.

issu acceptversion

Halts the rollback timer and ensures that the new Cisco IOS software image is not automatically stopped during the ISSU process.

issu commitversion

Loads the new Cisco IOS software image into the new standby supervisor engine.

issu runversion

Forces a change from the active supervisor engine to the standby supervisor engine and causes the newly active supervisor engine to run the new image specified.

show issu state

Displays the ISSU state and current booted image name during the ISSU process.

issu runversion

To force a change from the active supervisor engine to the standby supervisor engine and to cause the newly active supervisor engine to run the new image specified in the issu loadversion command, use the issu runversion command.

issu runversion standby-slot [standby-image-new]

Syntax Description

standby-slot

Specifies the standby slot on the networking device.

standby-image-new

(Optional) Specifies the name of the new image on the standby supervisor engine.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The issu runversion command changes the currently active supervisor engine to standby supervisor engine and the real standby-supervisor engine is booted with the old image version following and resets the switch. As soon as the standby-supervisor engine moves into the standby state, the rollback timer is started.

Examples

The following example shows how to force a change of the active-supervisor engine to standby-supervisor engine:

Switch# issu runversion 2

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

issu abortversion

Cancels the ISSU upgrade or the downgrade process in progress and restores the switch to its state before the start of the process.

issu acceptversion

Halts the rollback timer and ensures that the new Cisco IOS software image is not automatically stopped during the ISSU process.

issu commitversion

Loads the new Cisco IOS software image into the new standby supervisor engine.

issu loadversion

Starts the ISSU process.

show issu state

Displays the ISSU state and current booted image name during the ISSU process.

issu set rollback-timer

To configure the In Service Software Upgrade (ISSU) rollback timer value, use the

issu set rollback-timer command.

issu set rollback-timer seconds

Syntax Description

seconds

Specfies the rollback timer value, in seconds. The valid timer value range is from 0 to 7200 seconds (2 hours). A value of 0 seconds disables the rollback timer.

Command Default

Rollback timer value is 2700 seconds.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use the issue set rollback-timer command to configure the rollback timer value. You can only enable this command when the supervisor engines are in the init state.

Examples

The following example shows how you can set the rollback timer value to 3600 seconds, or 1 hour:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# issu set rollback-timer 3600

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

issu acceptversion

Halts the rollback timer and ensures that the new Cisco IOS software image is not automatically stopped during the ISSU process.

issu set rollback-timer

Configures the In Service Software Upgrade (ISSU) rollback timer value.

key chain macsec

To create or modify a macsec keychain, and enter keychain-macsec configuration mode, use the key chain key-chain-name macsec command

To disable this feature, use the no form of this command.

key chain key-chain-name macsec

no key chain

Syntax Description

key-chain-name

Specifies the name of the keychain. The maximum length is 32.

Command Default

None.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

3.9.0E

This command was introduced on the Cisco Catalyst 4500-E and 4500-X series switches.

.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable protocol tunneling for the CDP packets:

Switch(config terminal)# key chain mac_chain macsec

Switch(config-keychain-macsec)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

l2protocol-tunnel

To enable protocol tunneling on an interface, use the l2protocol-tunnel command. You can enable tunneling for the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), or VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) packets. To disable tunneling on the interface, use the no form of this command.

l2protocol-tunnel [cdp | stp | vtp]

no l2protocol-tunnel [cdp | stp | vtp]

Syntax Description

cdp

(Optional) Enables tunneling of CDP.

stp

(Optional) Enables tunneling of STP.

vtp

(Optional) Enables tunneling of VTP.

Command Default

The default is that no Layer 2 protocol packets are tunneled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You must enter this command, with or without protocol types, to tunnel Layer 2 packets.

Layer 2 protocol tunneling across a service-provider network ensures that Layer 2 information is propagated across the network to all customer locations. When protocol tunneling is enabled, protocol packets are encapsulated with a well-known Cisco multicast address for transmission across the network. When the packets reach their destination, the well-known MAC address is replaced by the Layer 2 protocol MAC address.

You can enable Layer 2 protocol tunneling for CDP, STP, and VTP individually or for all three protocols.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable protocol tunneling for the CDP packets:

Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel cdp

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

l2protocol-tunnel cos

Configures the class of service (CoS) value for all tunneled Layer 2 protocol packets.

l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold

Sets a drop threshold for the maximum rate of Layer 2 protocol packets per second to be received before an interface drops packets.

l2protocol-tunnel shutdown-threshold

Configures the protocol tunneling encapsulation rate.

l2protocol-tunnel cos

To configure the class of service (CoS) value for all tunneled Layer 2 protocol packets, use the l2protocol-tunnel cos command. To return to the default value of zero, use the no form of this command.

l2protocol-tunnel cos value

no l2protocol-tunnel cos

Syntax Description

value

Specifies the CoS priority value for tunneled Layer 2 protocol packets. The range is 0 to 7, with 7 being the highest priority.

Command Default

The default is to use the CoS value that is configured for data on the interface. If no CoS value is configured, the default is 5 for all tunneled Layer 2 protocol packets.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was first introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When enabled, the tunneled Layer 2 protocol packets use this CoS value.

The value is saved in NVRAM.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a Layer 2 protocol tunnel CoS value of 7:

Switch(config)# l2protocol-tunnel cos 7

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

l2protocol-tunnel

Enables protocol tunneling on an interface.

l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold

Sets a drop threshold for the maximum rate of Layer 2 protocol packets per second to be received before an interface drops packets.

l2protocol-tunnel shutdown-threshold

Configures the protocol tunneling encapsulation rate.

l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold

To set a drop threshold for the maximum rate of Layer 2 protocol packets per second to be received before an interface drops packets, use the I2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold command. You can set the drop threshold for the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), or VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) packets. To disable the drop threshold on the interface, use the no form of this command.

l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold [cdp | stp | vtp] value

no l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold [cdp | stp | vtp] value

Syntax Description

cdp

(Optional) Specifies a drop threshold for CDP.

stp

(Optional) Specifies a drop threshold for STP.

vtp

(Optional) Specifies a drop threshold for VTP.

value

Specifies a threshold in packets per second to be received for encapsulation before the interface shuts down, or specifies the threshold before the interface drops packets. The range is 1 to 4096. The default is no threshold.

Command Default

The default is no drop threshold for the number of the Layer 2 protocol packets.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold command controls the number of protocol packets per second that are received on an interface before it drops packets. When no protocol option is specified with a keyword, the threshold is applied to each of the tunneled Layer 2 protocol types. If you also set a shutdown threshold on the interface, the drop-threshold value must be less than or equal to the shutdown-threshold value.

When the drop threshold is reached, the interface drops the Layer 2 protocol packets until the rate at which they are received is below the drop threshold.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the drop threshold rate:

Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold cdp 50

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

l2protocol-tunnel

Enables protocol tunneling on an interface.

l2protocol-tunnel cos

Configures the class of service (CoS) value for all tunneled Layer 2 protocol packets.

l2protocol-tunnel shutdown-threshold

Configures the protocol tunneling encapsulation rate.

l2protocol-tunnel shutdown-threshold

To configure the protocol tunneling encapsulation rate, use the I2protocol-tunnel shutdown-threshold command. You can set the encapsulation rate for the Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP), Spanning Tree Protocol (STP), or VLAN Trunking Protocol (VTP) packets. To disable the encapsulation rate on the interface, use the no form of this command.

l2protocol-tunnel shutdown-threshold [cdp | stp | vtp] value

no l2protocol-tunnel shutdown-threshold [cdp | stp | vtp] value

Syntax Description

cdp

(Optional) Specifies a shutdown threshold for CDP.

stp

(Optional) Specifies a shutdown threshold for STP.

vtp

(Optional) Specifies a shutdown threshold for VTP.

value

Specifies a threshold in packets per second to be received for encapsulation before the interface shuts down. The range is 1 to 4096. The default is no threshold.

Command Default

The default is no shutdown threshold for the number of Layer 2 protocol packets.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The l2-protocol-tunnel shutdown-threshold command controls the number of protocol packets per second that are received on an interface before it shuts down. When no protocol option is specified with the keyword, the threshold is applied to each of the tunneled Layer 2 protocol types. If you also set a drop threshold on the interface, the shutdown-threshold value must be greater than or equal to the drop-threshold value.

When the shutdown threshold is reached, the interface is error disabled. If you enable error recovery by entering the errdisable recovery cause l2ptguard command, the interface is brought out of the error-disabled state and allowed to retry the operation again when all the causes have timed out. If the error recovery feature generation is not enabled for l2ptguard, the interface stays in the error-disabled state until you enter the shutdown and no shutdown commands.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the maximum rate:

Switch(config-if)# l2protocol-tunnel shutdown-threshold cdp 50

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

l2protocol-tunnel

Enables protocol tunneling on an interface.

l2protocol-tunnel cos

Configures the class of service (CoS) value for all tunneled Layer 2 protocol packets.

l2protocol-tunnel drop-threshold

Sets a drop threshold for the maximum rate of Layer 2 protocol packets per second to be received before an interface drops packets.

lacp port-channel min-links

To define the minimum number of LACP ports that must be bundled in the link-up state and bundled in the EtherChannel in order that a port channel becomes active, use the port-channel min-links command in interface configuration mode. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

port-channel min-links min_links_number

Syntax Description

min_links_number

The minimum number of active LACP ports in the port channel. The range is 2 to 8. The default is 1.

Command Default

None.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.8.0E and IOS 15.2(4)E

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

For switches in VSS mode, when configuring min-links, ensure that the port-channel has the same number of links on the active switch and the standby switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify a minimum of three active LACP ports before port channel 2 becomes active:

Switch(config(#) interface port-channel 2

Switch(config-if)# port-channel min-links 3

Related Commands

Command

Description

show lacp

Displays LACP information.

lacp port-priority

To set the LACP priority for the physical interfaces, use the lacp port-priority command.

lacp port-priority priority

Syntax Description

priority

Priority for the physical interfaces; valid values are from 1 to 65535.

Command Default

Priority is set to 32768.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

Usage Guidelines

You must assign each port in the switch a port priority that can be specified automatically or by entering the lacp port-priority command. The port priority is used with the port number to form the port identifier. The port priority is used to decide which ports should be put in standby mode when there is a hardware limitation that prevents all compatible ports from aggregating.

Although this command is a global configuration command, the priority value is supported only on port channels with LACP-enabled physical interfaces.This command is supported on LACP-enabled interfaces.

When setting the priority, the higher numbers indicate lower priorities.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the priority for the interface:

Switch(config-if)# lacp port-priority 23748

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

channel-group

Assigns and configure an EtherChannel interface to an EtherChannel group.

channel-protocol

Enables LACP or PAgP on an interface.

lacp system-priority

Sets the priority of the system for LACP.

show lacp

Displays LACP information.

lacp rate

To set the rate at which Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) control packets are received by an LACP-supported interface, use the lacp rate command in interface configuration mode. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

lacp rate {normal | fast}

no lacp rate

Syntax Description

normal

Specifies that LACP control packets are received at the normal rate (every 30 seconds).

fast

Specifies that LACP control packets are received at the fast rate (once every 1 second).

Command Default

30 seconds

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.7.1E and IOS 15.2(3)E1

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

Using the lacp rate command, you can set the LACP rate to a default of 30 seconds or to the fast rate of 1 second. This command is supported only on LACP-enabled interfaces.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the lacp rate for an interface:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 2/1

Switch(config-if)# lacp rate fast

Related Commands

Command

Description

show lacp

Displays LACP information.

lacp system-priority

To set the priority of the system for LACP, use the lacp system-priority command.

lacp system-priority priority

Syntax Description

priority

Priority of the system; valid values are from 1 to 65535.

Command Default

Priority is set to 32768.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

Usage Guidelines

You must assign each switch that is running LACP a system priority that can be specified automatically or by entering the lacp system-priority command. The system priority is used with the switch MAC address to form the system ID and is also used during negotiation with other systems.

Although this command is a global configuration command, the priority value is supported on port channels with LACP-enabled physical interfaces.

When setting the priority, tthe higher numbers indicate lower priorities.

You can also enter the lacp system-priority command in interface configuration mode. After you enter the command, the system defaults to global configuration mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the system priority:

Switch(config)# lacp system-priority 23748

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

channel-group

Assigns and configure an EtherChannel interface to an EtherChannel group.

channel-protocol

Enables LACP or PAgP on an interface.

lacp system-priority

Sets the priority of the system for LACP.

show lacp

Displays LACP information.

license right-to-use activate

Note This command applies only to Catalyst 4500X, as well as Supervisor Engine 7-E, 7L-E, and 8-E.

To activate PRTU licenses use the license right-to-use activate command.

license right-to-use activate feature-name [acceptEula]

Syntax Description

feature-name

Specifies the feature name (e.g., entservices, ipbase, lanbase)

acceptEula

(Optional). Activates the PRTU license. The End User License Agreement is accepted but does not display.

Command Default

PRTU licenses are inactive

Command Modes

privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.4.2SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to activate PRTU licenses that are inactive.

Downloading the license file from cisco portal and installing the license are not required. The PRTU licenses are bundled with image. Because the PRTU license is of highest precedence, when the PRTU license is activated, other license of the same feature switch to inactive state.

Examples

The following example shows how to activate PRTU licenses:

Switch# license right-to-use activate entservices

Related Commands

Command

Description

license right-to-use deactivate

Deactivates the PRTU license

license right-to-use deactivate

Note This command applies only to Catalyst 4500X, as well as Supervisor Engine 7-E, 7L-E, and 8-E.

To deactivate the PRTU license use the license right-to-use deactivate command.

license right-to-use deactivate feature-name

Syntax Description

feature-name

Specifies the feature name (e.g., entservices, ipbase, lanbase)

Command Default

PRTU licenses are inactive

Command Modes

privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.4.2SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to deactivate the PRTU licenses that are active.

The PRTU licenses can be deactivated provided any other valid license is available for the same feature.

For example, to deactivate a entservices PRTU license, the switch should contain a valid evaluation license. Else, the deactivation will fail.

Examples

The following example shows how to deactivate PRTU licenses:

Switch# license right-to-use deactivate entservices

Related Commands

Command

Description

license right-to-use activate

Activates the PRTU license

link state group

To configure the link state group, use the link state group command in interface configuration mode.

link state group [number] {upstream | downstream}

Syntax Description

number

Specifies a link-state group. Valid values are from 1 to 20; the default value is 1.

upstream

Configures the interface as an upstream interface in the group.

downstream

Configures the interface as a downstream interface in the group.

Command Default

The group number is 1

Command Modes

Interface configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

15.1(1)S

This command was introduced.

3.8.0E and 15.2.(4)E

The upper limit of the group number values was increased from 10 to 20.

Usage Guidelines

You can configure a maximum of 20 link state groups per switch.

To disable a link-state group, use the no link state track number global configuration command.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the link state groups.

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# link state track 1

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet3/1

Switch(config-if)# link state group 1 upstream

Switch(config-if)# interface gigabitethernet3/3

Switch(config-if)# link state group 1 upstream

Switch(config-if)# interface gigabitethernet3/5

Switch(config-if)# link state group 1 downstream

Switch(config-if)# interface gigabitethernet3/7

Switch(config-if)# link state group 1 downstream

Related Commands

Command

Description

link state track

Configures the link state group and enables link state tracking.

show link state group

Displays the link state group information.

link state track

To configure the link state group and enable link state tracking, use the link state track command in interface configuration mode.

link state track [number]

no link state track [number]

Syntax Description

number

Specifies a link-state group and enables link state tracking. Valid values are from 1 to 20; the default value is 1.

Command Default

The link state track number is 1

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

15.1(1)S

This command was introduced.

3.8.0E and 15.2.(4)E

The upper limit of the group number values was increased from 10 to 20.

Usage Guidelines

When you configure LST for the first time, add upstream interfaces to the link state group before adding the downstream interface, otherwise the downstream interfaces move into the error-disable mode.

To restore the default link-state track, use the no link state track number global configuration command.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the link state tracking number.

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# link state track 1

Related Commands

Command

Description

link state group

Configures the link state group and the interface as either an upstream or downstream interface in the group.

show link state group

Displays the link state group information.

lldp tlv-select power-management

To to enable power negotiation through LLDP, use the lldp tlv-select power-management interface command.

lldp tlv-select power-management

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Enabled on POEP ports

Command Modes

Interface level

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You need to disable this feature if you do not want to perform power negotiation through LLDP.

This feature is not supported on non-POEP ports; the CLI is suppressed on such ports and TLV is not exchanged.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable LLDP power negotiation on interface Gigabit Ethernet 3/1:

Switch# config t

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# int gi 3/1

Switch(config-if)# lldp tlv-select power-management

Related Commands

Command

Description

lldp run

Cisco IOS Command Reference library.

logging event link-status global (global configuration)

To change the default switch-wide global link-status event messaging settings, use the

logging event link-status global command. Use the no form of this command to disable the link-status event messaging.

logging event link-status global

no logging event link-status global

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

The global link-status messaging is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If link-status logging event is not configured at the interface level, this global link-status setting takes effect for each interface.

Examples

The following example shows how to globally enable link status message on each interface:

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# logging event link-status global

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

logging event link-status (interface configuration)

Enables the link-status event messaging on an interface.

logging event link-status (interface configuration)

To enable the link-status event messaging on an interface, use the logging event link-status command. Use the no form of this command to disable link-status event messaging. Use the

logging event link-status use-global command to apply the global link-status setting.

logging event link-status

no logging event link-status

logging event link-status use-global

Command Default

Global link-status messaging is enabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

To enable system logging of interface state-change events on a specific interface, enter the

logging event link-status command in interface configuration mode.

To enable system logging of interface state-change events on all interfaces in the system, enter the logging event link-status global command in global configuration mode. All interfaces without the state change event configuration use the global setting.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable logging event state-change events on interface gi11/1:

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gi11/1

Switch(config-if)# logging event link-status

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to turn off logging event link status regardless of the global setting:

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gi11/1

Switch(config-if)# no logging event link-status

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to enable the global event link-status setting on interface gi11/1:

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gi11/1

Switch(config-if)# logging event link-status use-global

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

logging event link-status global (global configuration)

Changes the default switch-wide global link-status event messaging settings.

logging event trunk-status global (global configuration)

To enable the trunk-status event messaging globally, use the logging event trunk-status global command. Use the no form of this command to disable trunk-status event messaging.

logging event trunk-status global

no logging event trunk-status global

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Global trunk-status messaging is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If trunk-status logging event is not configured at the interface level, the global trunk-status setting takes effect for each interface.

Examples

The following example shows how to globally enable link status messaging on each interface:

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# logging event trunk-status global

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

logging event trunk-status global (global configuration)

Enables the trunk-status event messaging on an interface.

logging event trunk-status (interface configuration)

To enable the trunk-status event messaging on an interface, use the logging event trunk-status command. Use the no form of this command to disable the trunk-status event messaging. Use the

logging event trunk-status use-global command to apply the global trunk-status setting.

logging event trunk-status

no logging event trunk-status

logging event trunk-status use-global

Command Default

Global trunk-status messaging is enabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

To enable system logging of interface state-change events on a specific interface, enter the

logging event trunk-status command in interface configuration mode.

To enable system logging of interface state-change events on all interfaces in the system, enter the logging event trunk-status use-global command in global configuration mode. All interfaces without the state change event configuration use the global setting.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable logging event state-change events on interface gi11/1:

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gi11/1

Switch(config-if)# logging event trunk-status

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to turn off logging event trunk status regardless of the global setting:

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gi11/1

Switch(config-if)# no logging event trunk-status

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to enable the global event trunk-status setting on interface gi11/1:

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gi11/1

Switch(config-if)# logging event trunk-status use-global

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

logging event trunk-status global (global configuration)

Enables the trunk-status event messaging on an interface.

mab

To enable and configure MAC authorization bypass (MAB) on a port, use the mab command in interface configuration mode. To disable MAB, use the no form of this command.

mab [eap]

no mab [eap]

Note The mab command is totally independent of the effect of the dot1x system-auth control command.

Syntax Description

eap

(Optional) Specifies that a full EAP conversation should be used, as opposed to standard RADIUS Access-Request, Access-Accept conversation.

Command Default

Disabled

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

When a port is configured for MAB as a fallback method, it operates in a typical dot1X method until a configurable number of failed attempts to request the identity of the host. The authenticator learns the MAC address of the host and uses that information to query an authentication server to see whether this MAC address will be granted access.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable MAB on a port:

Switch(config-if)# mab

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to enable and configure MAB on a port:

Switch(config-if)# mab eap

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to disable MAB on a port:

Switch(config-if)# no mab

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show authentication

Displays Authentication Manager information.

show mab

Displays MAB information.

show running-config

Displays the running configuration information.

mac access-list extended

To define the extended MAC access lists, use the mac access-list extended command. To remove the MAC access lists, use the no form of this command.

mac access-list extended name

no mac access-list extended name

Syntax Description

name

ACL to which the entry belongs.

Command Default

MAC access lists are not defined.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When you enter the ACL name, follow these naming conventions:

- Maximum of 31 characters long and can include a-z, A-Z, 0-9, the dash character (-), the underscore character (_), and the period character (.)

- Must start with an alpha character and must be unique across all ACLs of all types

- Case sensitive

- Cannot be a number

- Must not be a keyword; keywords to avoid are all, default-action, map, help, and editbuffer

When you enter the mac access-list extended name command, you use the following subset to create or delete entries in a MAC layer access list:

[no] {permit | deny} {{src-mac mask | any} [dest-mac mask]} [protocol-family {appletalk | arp-non-ipv4 | decnet | ipx | ipv6 | rarp-ipv4 | rarp-non-ipv4 | vines | xns} | <arbitrary ethertype> | name-coded ethertype].

Table 2-10 describes the syntax of the mac access-list extended subcommands.

Table 2-10 mac access-list extended Subcommands

Subcommand

Description

any

Specifies any source-host or destination-host.

arbitrary ethertype

(Optional) Specifies an arbitrary ethertype in the range 1536 to 65535 (Decimal or Hexadecimal)

deny

Prevents access if the conditions are matched.

dest-mac mask

(Optional) Specifies a destination MAC address of the form: dest-mac-address dest-mac-address-mask.

name-coded ethertype

(Optional) Denotes a predefined name-coded ethertype for common protocols:

aarp—AppleTalk ARP

amber—DEC-Amber

appletalk—AppleTalk/EtherTalk

dec-spanning—DEC-Spanning-Tree

decnet-iv—DECnet Phase IV

diagnostic—DEC-Diagnostic

dsm—DEC-DSM

etype-6000—0x6000

etype-8042—0x8042

lat—DEC-LAT

lavc-sca—DEC-LAVC-SCA

mop-console—DEC-MOP Remote Console

mop-dump—DEC-MOP Dump

msdos—DEC-MSDOS

mumps—DEC-MUMPS

netbios—DEC-NETBIOS

protocol-family An Ethernet protocol family

vines-echo—VINES Echo

vines-ip—VINES IP

xns-idp—XNS IDP

no

(Optional) Deletes a statement from an access list.

permit

Allows access if the conditions are matched.

protocol-family

(Optional) Name of the protocol family. Table 2-11 lists which packets are mapped to a particular protocol family.

src-mac mask

Source MAC address in the form: source-mac-address source-mac-address-mask.

Table 2-11 describes mapping an Ethernet packet to a protocol family.

Table 2-11 Mapping an Ethernet Packet to a Protocol Family

Protocol Family

Ethertype in Packet Header

Appletalk

0x809B, 0x80F3

Arp-Non-Ipv4

0x0806 and protocol header of Arp is a non-Ip protocol family

Decnet

0x6000-0x6009, 0x8038-0x8042

Ipx

0x8137-0x8138

Ipv6

0x86DD

Rarp-Ipv4

0x8035 and protocol header of Rarp is Ipv4

Rarp-Non-Ipv4

0x8035 and protocol header of Rarp is a non-Ipv4 protocol family

Vines

0x0BAD, 0x0BAE, 0x0BAF

Xns

0x0600, 0x0807

When you enter the src-mac mask or dest-mac mask value, follow these guidelines:

- Enter the MAC addresses as three 4-byte values in dotted hexadecimal format such as 0030.9629.9f84.

- Enter the MAC address masks as three 4-byte values in dotted hexadecimal format. Use 1 bit as a wildcard. For example, to match an address exactly, use 0000.0000.0000 (can be entered as 0.0.0).

- For the optional protocol parameter, you can enter either the EtherType or the keyword.

- Entries without a protocol parameter match any protocol.

- The access list entries are scanned in the order that you enter them. The first matching entry is used. To improve performance, place the most commonly used entries near the beginning of the access list.

- An implicit deny any any entry exists at the end of an access list unless you include an explicit permit any any entry at the end of the list.

- All new entries to an existing list are placed at the end of the list. You cannot add entries to the middle of a list.

Examples

The following example shows how to create a MAC layer access list named mac_layer that denies traffic from 0000.4700.0001, which is going to 0000.4700.0009, and permits all other traffic:

Switch(config)# mac access-list extended mac_layer

Switch(config-ext-macl)# deny 0000.4700.0001 0.0.0 0000.4700.0009 0.0.0 protocol-family appletalk

Switch(config-ext-macl)# permit any any

Switch(config-ext-macl)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vlan access-map

Displays VLAN access map information.

mac-address (virtual switch)

To specify a Media Access Control (MAC) address to use as the common router MAC address for interfaces on the active and standby chassis, use the mac-address virtual switch configuration submode command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

mac-address {mac-address | use-virtual | chassis}

no mac-address {mac-address | use-virtual | chassis}

Syntax Description

mac-address

Specifies the MAC address in hexadecimal format.

use-virtual

Specifies the MAC address range reserved for the virtual switch system (VSS).

chassis

Specifies a MAC address derived from the chassis.

Command Default

The router MAC address is derived from the Cisco pool of virtual switch specific MAC addresses intended for the domain 1-255.

Command Modes

Virtual switch configuration submode (config-vs-domain)

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When a virtual switch boots, the router MAC address is derived from the Cisco pool of virtual switch specific MAC addresses. The router address is used as the common router MAC address for interfaces on both the active and the standby chassis. Between switchovers, this MAC address is maintained on the new active switch. You can enter the mac-address mac-address command to specify a MAC address to use or the mac-address use-virtual command to use the MAC address range reserved for the VSS.

The MAC address range reserved for the VSS is derived from a reserved pool of addresses with the domain ID encoded in the leading 6 bits of the last octet and trailing 2 bits of the previous octet of the mac-address. The last two bits of the first octet is allocated for the protocol mac-address that is derived by adding the protocol ID (0 to 3) to the router MAC address.

Note You must reload the virtual switch for the new router MAC address to take effect. If the MAC address you configured is different from the current MAC address, the following message is displayed:

Console (enable)#

Examples

The following example shows how to specify the MAC address to use in hexadecimal format:

Router(config)# switch virtual domain test-mac-address

Router(config-vs-domain)# mac-address 0000.0000.0000

Router(config-vs-domain)#

The following example shows how to specify the MAC address range reserved for the VSS:

Router(config)# switch virtual domain test-mac-address

Router(config-vs-domain)# mac-address use-virtual

Router(config-vs-domain)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

switch virtual domain (virtual switch)

Assigns a switch number and enters virtual switch domain configuration submode.

mac-address-table aging-time

To configure the aging time for the entries in the Layer 2 table, use the mac-address-table aging-time command. To reset the seconds value to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

mac-address-table aging-time seconds [vlan vlan_id]

no mac-address-table aging-time seconds [vlan vlan_id]

Syntax Description

seconds

Aging time in seconds; valid values are 0 and from 10 to 1000000 seconds.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Single VLAN number or a range of VLANs; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

Aging time is set to 300 seconds.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended addressing was added.

Usage Guidelines

If you do not enter a VLAN, the change is applied to all routed-port VLANs.

Enter 0 seconds to disable aging.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the aging time to 400 seconds:

Switch(config)# mac-address-table aging-time 400

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to disable aging:

Switch(config)# mac-address-table aging-time 0

Switch(config)

Related Commands

Command

Description

show mac-address-table aging-time

Displays MAC address table aging information.

mac-address-table dynamic group protocols

To enable the learning of MAC addresses in both the “ip” and “other” protocol buckets, even though the incoming packet may belong to only one of the protocol buckets, use the

mac-address-table dynamic group protocols command. To disable grouped learning, use the no form of this command.

mac-address-table dynamic group protocols {ip | other} {ip | other}

no mac-address-table dynamic group protocols {ip | other} {ip | other}

Syntax Description

ip

Specifies the “ip” protocol bucket.

other

Specifies the “other” protocol bucket.

Command Default

The group learning feature is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The entries within the “ip” and “other” protocol buckets are created according to the protocol of the incoming traffic.

When you use the mac-address-table dynamic group protocols command, an incoming MAC address that might belong to either the “ip” or the “other” protocol bucket, is learned on both protocol buckets. Therefore, any traffic destined to this MAC address and belonging to any of the protocol buckets is unicasted to that MAC address, rather than flooded. This reduces the unicast Layer 2 flooding that might be caused if the incoming traffic from a host belongs to a different protocol bucket than the traffic that is destined to the sending host.

Examples

The following example shows that the MAC addresses are initially assigned to either the “ip” or the “other” protocol bucket:

Switch# show mac-address-table dynamic

Unicast Entries

vlan mac address type protocols port

-------+---------------+--------+---------------------+--------------------

1 0000.0000.5000 dynamic other GigabitEthernet1/1

1 0001.0234.6616 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0003.3178.ec0a dynamic assigned GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0003.4700.24c3 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0003.4716.f475 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0003.4748.75c5 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0003.47f0.d6a3 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0003.47f6.a91a dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0003.ba06.4538 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0003.fd63.3eb4 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.2326.18a1 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a5d.de53 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a5e.6ecc dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a5e.f60e dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a5f.06f7 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a5f.072f dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a5f.08f6 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a5f.090b dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a88.b075 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.c1bd.1b40 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.c1d8.b3c0 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.c1d8.bd00 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0007.e997.74dd dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0007.e997.7e8f dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0007.e9ad.5e24 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 000b.5f0a.f1d8 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 000b.fdf3.c498 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0010.7be8.3794 dynamic assigned GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0012.436f.c07f dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0050.0407.5fe1 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0050.6901.65af dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0050.da6c.81cb dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0050.dad0.af07 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00a0.ccd7.20ac dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00b0.64fd.1c23 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00b0.64fd.2d8f dynamic assigned GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00d0.b775.c8bc dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00d0.b79e.de1d dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00e0.4c79.1939 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00e0.4c7b.d765 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00e0.4c82.66b7 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00e0.4c8b.f83e dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00e0.4cbc.a04f dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0800.20cf.8977 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0800.20f2.82e5 dynamic ip GigabitEthernet3/1

Switch#

The following example shows how to assign MAC addresses that belong to either the “ip” or the “other” bucket to both buckets:

Switch(config)# mac-address-table dynamic group protocols ip other

Switch(config)# exit

Switch# show mac address-table dynamic

Unicast Entries

vlan mac address type protocols port

-------+---------------+--------+---------------------+--------------------

1 0000.0000.5000 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet1/1

1 0001.0234.6616 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0003.4700.24c3 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0003.4716.f475 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0003.4748.75c5 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0003.47c4.06c1 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0003.47f0.d6a3 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0003.47f6.a91a dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0003.ba0e.24a1 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0003.fd63.3eb4 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.2326.18a1 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a5d.de53 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a5d.de55 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a5e.6ecc dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a5e.f60e dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a5f.08f6 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a5f.090b dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a64.f813 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a66.1a77 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a6b.56b2 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a6c.6a07 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.5a88.b075 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.c1bd.1b40 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.c1d8.b3c0 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0004.c1d8.bd00 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0005.dce0.7c0a dynamic assigned GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0007.e997.74dd dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0007.e997.7e8f dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0007.e9ad.5e24 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0007.e9c9.0bc9 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 000b.5f0a.f1d8 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 000b.fdf3.c498 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0012.436f.c07f dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0050.0407.5fe1 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0050.6901.65af dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0050.da6c.81cb dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0050.dad0.af07 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00a0.ccd7.20ac dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00b0.64fd.1b84 dynamic assigned GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00d0.b775.c8bc dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00d0.b775.c8ee dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00d0.b79e.de1d dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00e0.4c79.1939 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00e0.4c7b.d765 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00e0.4c82.66b7 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00e0.4c8b.f83e dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 00e0.4c8c.0861 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

1 0800.20d1.bf09 dynamic ip,other GigabitEthernet3/1

Switch#

mac-address-table learning vlan

To enable MAC address learning on a VLAN, use the mac-address-table learning global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to disable MAC address learning on a VLAN to control which VLANs can learn MAC addresses.

mac-address-table learning vlan vlan-id

no mac-address-table learning vlan vlan-id

Syntax Description

vlan-id

Specifies a single VLAN ID or a range of VLAN IDs separated by a hyphen or comma. Valid VLAN IDs are 1 to 4094.

Command Default

Enabled on all VLANs

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was modified to support the disable learning feature on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When you control MAC address learning on a VLAN, you can manage the available table space by controlling which VLANs, and which ports can learn MAC addresses.

You can disable MAC address learning on a single VLAN ID (for example, by entering

no mac-address-table learning vlan 223) or on a range of VLAN IDs (for example, by entering

no mac-address-table learning vlan 1-20, 15.)

Before you disable MAC address learning, familiarize yourself with the network topology and the switch system configuration. If you disable MAC address learning on a VLAN, flooding may occur in the network. For example, if you disable MAC address learning on a VLAN with a configured switch virtual interface (SVI), the switch floods all IP packets in the Layer 2 domain. If you disable MAC address learning on a VLAN that includes more than two ports, every packet entering the switch is flooded in that VLAN domain. Disable MAC address learning only in VLANs that contain two ports. Use caution before disabling MAC address learning on a VLAN with an SVI.

You cannot disable MAC address learning on a VLAN that the switch uses internally. This action causes the switch to generate an error message and rejects the no mac-address-table learning vlan command. To view used internal VLANs, enter the show vlan internal usage privileged EXEC command.

If you disable MAC address learning on a VLAN configured as a PVLAN primary or a secondary VLAN, the MAC addresses are still learned on the VLAN (primary or secondary) associated with the PVLAN.

You cannot disable MAC address learning on an RSPAN VLAN. The configuration is not allowed.

If you disable MAC address learning on a VLAN that includes a secure port, MAC address learning is not disabled on the secure port. If you later disable port security on the interface, the disabled MAC address learning state is enabled.

To display the MAC address learning status of a specific VLAN or for all VLANs, enter the

show mac-address-table learning vlan command.

Examples

The following example shows how to disable MAC address learning on VLAN 2003:

Switch(config)# no mac-address-table learning vlan 2003

Related Commands

Command

Description

show mac address-table learning

Displays the MAC address learning status on all VLANs or on the specified VLAN.

mac-address-table notification

To enable MAC address notification on a switch, use the mac-address-table notification command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command

mac-address-table notification [[change [history-size hs_value | interval intv_value]] | [mac-move] | [threshold [limit percentage | interval time]] | [learn-fail [interval time | limit num_fail]]

no mac-address-table notification [[change [history-size hs_value | interval intv_value]] | [mac-move] | [threshold [limit percentage | interval time]] | [learn-fail [interval time | limit num_fail]]

Syntax Description

change

(Optional) Specifies enabling MAC change notification.

history-size hs_value

(Optional) Sets a maximum number of entries in the MAC change notification history table. The range is 0 to 500 entries.

interval intv_value

(Optional) Sets a notification trap interval: the set interval time between two consecutive traps. The range is 0 to 2,147,483,647 seconds.

mac-move

(Optional) Specifies enabling MAC move notification.

threshold

(Optional) Specifies enabling MAC threshold notification.

limit percentage

(Optional) Specifies the percentage of MAT utilization threshold; valid values are from 1 to 100 percent.

interval time

(Optional) Specifies the time between MAC threshold notifications; valid values are greater than or equal to 120 seconds.

learn-fail

(Optional) Specifies syslog (level 6) notifications of failures to install MAC addresses learned in software into hardware. Disabled by default.

interval time

(Optional) Specifies the syslog interval between hardware MAC learning failure notifications. The default value is 150 seconds. The range is between 1 to 100000 seconds.

limit num_fail

(Optional) Specifies the number of hardware MAC learning failures to be allowed in a notification interval.

Command Default

MAC address notification feature is disabled.

The default MAC change trap interval value is 1 second.

The default number of entries in the history table is 1.

MAC move notification is disabled.

MAC threshold monitoring feature is disabled.

The default limit is 50 percent.

The default time is 120 seconds.

Hardware MAC learning failure syslog notification is disabled.

The default limit is 1000.

The default interval is 150 seconds.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(52)SG

Support introduced for the learn-fail keyword on Supervisor Engine 6-E and Catalyst 4900M.

Usage Guidelines

You can enable the MAC change notification feature using the mac-address-table notification change command. If you do this, you must also enable MAC notification traps on an interface using the

snmp trap mac-notification change interface configuration command and configure the switch to send MAC change traps to the NMS using the snmp-server enable traps mac-notification global configuration command.

When the history-size option is configured, the existing MAC change history table is deleted, and a new table is created.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the MAC address notification history table size to 300 entries:

Switch(config)# mac-address-table notification change history-size 300

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to set the MAC address notification interval time to 1250 seconds:

Switch(config)# mac-address-table notification change interval 1250

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to enable hardware MAC address learning failure syslog notification:

Switch(config)# mac address-table notification learn-fail

The following example shows how to set the interval of hardware MAC address learning failure syslog notification to 30 seconds:

Switch(config)# mac address-table notification learn-fail interval 30

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear mac-address-table

Clears the global counter entries from the Layer 2 MAC address table.

mac-address-table notification

Enables MAC address notification on a switch.

snmp-server enable traps

Enables SNMP notifications.

snmp trap mac-notification change

Enables SNMP MAC address notifications.

mac-address-table static

To configure the static MAC addresses for a VLAN interface or drop unicast traffic for a MAC address for a VLAN interface, use the mac-address-table static command. To remove the static MAC address configurations, use the no form of this command.

mac-address-table static mac-addr {vlan vlan-id} {interface type | drop}

no mac-address-table static mac-addr {vlan vlan-id} {interface type} {drop}

Syntax Description

mac-addr

MAC address; optional when using the no form of this command.

vlan vlan-id

VLAN and valid VLAN number; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

interface type

Interface type and number; valid options are FastEthernet and GigabitEthernet.

drop

Drops all traffic received from and going to the configured MAC address in the specified VLAN.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

Usage Guidelines

When a static MAC address is installed, it is associated with a port.

The output interface specified must be a Layer 2 interface and not an SVI.

If you do not enter a protocol type, an entry is automatically created for each of the four protocol types.

Entering the no form of this command does not remove the system MAC addresses.

When removing a MAC address, entering interface int is optional. For unicast entries, the entry is removed automatically. For multicast entries, if you do not specify an interface, the entire entry is removed. You can specify the selected ports to be removed by specifying the interface.

Examples

The following example shows how to add the static entries to the MAC address table:

Switch(config)# mac-address-table static 0050.3e8d.6400 vlan 100 interface fastethernet5/7

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show mac-address-table static

Displays the static MAC address table entries only.

macro apply cisco-desktop

To enable the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to a standard desktop, use the macro apply cisco-desktop command.

macro apply cisco-desktop $AVID access_vlanid

Syntax Description

$AVID access_vlanid

Specifies an access VLAN ID.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command can only be viewed and applied; it cannot be modified.

Ensure that the existing configuration on the interface does not conflict with the intended macro configuration. Before you apply the macro, clear the configuration on the interface with the default interface command.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the Cisco-recommended features and settings on port fa2/1:

Switch(config)# interface FastEthernet2/1

Switch(config-if)# macro apply cisco-desktop $AVID 50

Switch(config-if)#

The contents of this macro are as follows:

# Basic interface - Enable data VLAN only

# Recommended value for access vlan (AVID) should not be 1

switchport access vlan $AVID [access_vlanid]

switchport mode access

# Enable port security limiting port to a single

# MAC address -- that of desktop

switchport port-security

# Ensure port-security age is greater than one minute

# and use inactivity timer

# “Port-security maximum 1” is the default and will not

# Show up in the config

switchport port-security violation restrict

switchport port-security aging time 2

switchport port-security aging type inactivity

# Configure port as an edge network port

spanning-tree portfast

spanning-tree bpduguard enable

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro apply cisco-phone

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to a standard desktop and a Cisco IP phone.

macro apply cisco-router

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to a router.

macro apply cisco-switch

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to another switch.

macsec network-link

To enable MKA MACsec on switch-to-switch links using EAP-TLS, use the macsec netowrk-link command.

macsec network-link

Syntax Description

macsec network-link

Enables MKA MACsec on switch-to-switch links using Extensible Authentication Protocol-Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS) method.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

Cisco IOS XE 3.9.0E

This command was introduced on Cisco Catalyst 4500-E with Supervisor Engine 8-E, and on Cisco Catalyst 4500-X series switches.

Usage Guidelines

This command cannot be used to configure multi-point to multi-point links.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the Cisco-recommended features and settings on port fa2/1:

Switch(config)# interface FastEthernet2/1

Switch(config-if)# macsec network-link

Switch(config-if)# exit

mka

To apply an MACsec Key Agreement policy on an interface, and to configure MKA MACsec on a interface using a PSK, use the mka command.

mka {default-policy | policy policy name {|pre-shared-key {key-chain key-chain-name}

Syntax Description

default-policy

Enables MKA MACsec using the default MKA policy on the interface.

policy policy name

Enables MKA MACsec using a configured MKA policy on the interface.

pre-shared-key key-chain key-chain-name

Enables MKA MACsec using a pre-shared key on the interface.

Command Default

The default MKA policy is applied on the interface.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

Cisco IOS XE 3.9.0E

This command was introduced on Cisco Catalyst 4500-E with Supervisor Engine 8-E, and on Cisco Catalyst 4500-X series switches.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the Cisco-recommended features and settings on port fa2/1:

Switch(config)# interface FastEthernet2/1

Switch(config-if)# mka pre-shared-key key-chain kc1

Switch(config-if)# exit

mka policy

To configure MACsec Key Agreement policy options, and enter mka-policy configuration mode, use the mka policy command.

mka policy policy name [confidentiality-offset| default | key-server priority priority | macsec-cipher-suite {gcm-aes-128 | gcm-aes-256}]

Syntax Description

confideniality-offset offset-value

Identifies a confidentiality (encryption) offset value for the MKA policy. Valid values are 0, 30, and 50 octets (bytes).

default

Sets the policy to use the default confidentiality-offset, key-server priority and cipher suite.

key-server priority priority

Sets the MKA key-server priority between 0 and 255. Note that 255 is not used as the key-server.

macsec-cipher-suite

Configures the cipher suite for SAK derivation.

Command Default

None.

Command Modes

Global Configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

Cisco IOS XE 3.9.0E

This command was introduced on Cisco Catalyst 4500-E with Supervisor Engine 8-E, and on Cisco Catalyst 4500-X series switches.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure MKA policy options:

Switch(config)# mka policy policy1

Switch(config-mka-policy)# confidentiality-offset 0

Switch(config-mka-policy)# key-server priority 245

Switch(config-mka-policy)# gcm-aes-128

witch(config-mka-policy)# exit

macro apply cisco-phone

To enable the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to a standard desktop and a Cisco IP phone, use the macro apply cisco-phone command.

macro apply cisco-phone $AVID access_vlanid $VVID voice_vlanid

Syntax Description

$AVID access_vlanid

Specifies an access VLAN ID.

$VVID voice_vlanid

Specifies a voice VLAN ID.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command can only be viewed and applied; it cannot be modified.

Ensure that the existing configuration on the interface does not conflict with the intended macro configuration. Before you apply the macro, clear the configuration on the interface with the default interface command.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the Cisco-recommended features and settings on port fa2/1:

Switch(config)# interface FastEthernet2/1

Switch(config-if)# macro apply cisco-phone $AVID 10 $VVID 50

Switch(config-if)#

The contents of this macro are as follows:

# VoIP enabled interface - Enable data VLAN

# and voice VLAN (VVID)

# Recommended value for access vlan (AVID) should not be 1\

switchport access vlan $AVID [access_vlan_id]

switchport mode access

# Update the Voice VLAN (VVID) value which should be

# different from data VLAN

# Recommended value for voice vlan (VVID) should not be 1

switchport voice vlan $VVID [voice_vlan_id]

# Enable port security limiting port to a 3 MAC

# addressees -- One for desktop and two for phone

switchport port-security

switchport port-security maximum 3

# Ensure port-security age is greater than one minute

# and use inactivity timer

switchport port-security violation restrict

switchport port-security aging time 2

switchport port-security aging type inactivity

# Enable auto-qos to extend trust to attached Cisco phone

auto qos voip cisco-phone

# Configure port as an edge network port

spanning-tree portfast

spanning-tree bpduguard enable@

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro apply cisco-desktop

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to a standard desktop.

macro apply cisco-router

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to a router.

macro apply cisco-switch

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to another switch.

macro apply cisco-router

To enable the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to a router, use the macro apply cisco-router command.

macro apply cisco-router $NVID native_vlanid

Syntax Description

$NVID native_vlanid

Specifies a native VLAN ID.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command can only be viewed and applied; it cannot be modified.

Ensure that the existing configuration on the interface does not conflict with the intended macro configuration. Before you apply the macro apply cisco-router command, clear the configuration on the interface with the default interface command.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the Cisco-recommended features and settings on port fa2/1:

Switch(config)# interface FastEthernet2/1

Switch(config-if)# macro apply cisco-router $NVID 80

Switch(config-if)#

The contents of this macro are as follows:

# Access Uplink to Distribution

switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q

# Define unique Native VLAN on trunk ports

# Recommended value for native vlan (NVID) should not be 1

switchport trunk native vlan $NVID [native_vlan_id]

# Update the allowed VLAN range (VRANGE) such that it

# includes data, voice and native VLANs

# switchport trunk allowed vlan $VRANGE [vlan_range]

# Hardcode trunk and disable negotiation to

# speed up convergence

# Hardcode speed and duplex to router

switchport mode trunk

switchport nonegotiate

speed 100

duplex full

# Configure qos to trust this interface

auto qos voip trust

qos trust dscp

# Ensure fast access to the network when enabling the interface.

# Ensure that switch devices cannot become active on the interface.

spanning-tree portfast

spanning-tree bpduguard enable

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro apply cisco-desktop

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to a standard desktop.

macro apply cisco-phone

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to a standard desktop and a Cisco IP phone.

macro apply cisco-router

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to a router.

macro apply cisco-switch

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to another switch.

macro apply cisco-switch

To enable the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to another switch, use the macro apply cisco-switch command.

macro apply cisco-switch $NVID native_vlanid

Syntax Description

$NVID native_vlanid

Specifies a native VLAN ID.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command can only be viewed and applied; it cannot be modified.

Ensure that the existing configuration on the interface does not conflict with the intended macro configuration. Before you apply this macro, clear the configuration on the interface with the default interface command.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the Cisco-recommended features and settings on port fa2/1:

Switch(config)# interface FastEthernet2/1

Switch(config-if)# macro apply cisco-switch $NVID 45

Switch(config-if)#

The contents of this macro are as follows:

# Access Uplink to Distribution

switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q

# Define unique Native VLAN on trunk ports

# Recommended value for native vlan (NVID) should not be 1

switchport trunk native vlan $NVID [native_vlan_id]

# Update the allowed VLAN range (VRANGE) such that it

# includes data, voice and native VLANs

# switchport trunk allowed vlan $VRANGE

# Hardcode trunk and disable negotiation to

# speed up convergence

switchport mode trunk

switchport nonegotiate

# Configure qos to trust this interface

auto qos voip trust

# 802.1w defines the link as pt-pt for rapid convergence

spanning-tree link-type point-to-point

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro apply cisco-desktop

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to a standard desktop.

macro apply cisco-phone

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to a standard desktop and a Cisco IP phone.

macro apply cisco-router

Enables the Cisco-recommended features and settings that are suitable for connecting a switch port to a router.

macro auto device

Use the macro auto device command to simplify changing the parameters for a built-in functions for a device type. Use the no form of this command to revert to the intial parameter values.

macro auto device device_type [params values]

no macro auto device device_type [params values]

Syntax Description

device_type

Specifies the device type.

- phone—Apply interface configs on detecting a phone

- switch—Apply interface configs on detecting a switch

- router—Apply interface configs on detecting a router

- ap—Apply interface configs on detecting an ap

- lwap—Apply interface configs on detecting a light weight ap

- dmp—Apply interface configs on detecting a DMP

- ipvsc—Apply interface configs on detecting a IPVSC

param name=value

(Optional) parameter=value—Replace default values that begin with $. Enter new values in the form of name value pair separated by a space: [<name1>=<value1> <name2>=<value2>...]. Default values are shown in parenthesis.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Although you can use the macro auto execute command to produce the same effect as the macro auto device command, the later is simpler.

Examples

The following example shows how to change the access VLAN and voice VLAN from their default value to user defined values for phone devices.

(config)# macro auto device phone ACCESS_VLAN=10 VOICE_VLAN=20

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro auto execute (built-in function)

Changes built-in function default values or to map user-defined triggers to built-in functions, and to pass the parameter values.

macro auto execute (remotely-defined trigger)

Maps a trigger to a remotely defined functions.

macro auto execute (user-defined function)

Maps a trigger to a user-defined function.

macro auto global processing

Enables Auto Smartports on a switch.

macro auto processing

Enables Auto SmartPorts macros on a specific interface.

macro auto sticky

Specifies not to remove configurations applied by ASP across link flaps and device removal.

shell trigger

Creates a user defined trigger.

macro auto execute (built-in function)

Use the macro auto execute configuration command to change built-in function default values or to map user-defined triggers to built-in functions and to pass the parameter values. Use the no form of this command to unmap the trigger.

macro auto execute event_trigger builtin shell_function [param name=values]

no macro auto execute event_trigger builtin shell_function [param name=values]

Syntax Description

event_trigger

Defines mapping from an event trigger to a built-in macro.

Specify an event trigger:

- CISCO_PHONE_EVENT

- CISCO_SWITCH_EVENT

- CISCO_ROUTER_EVENT

- CISCO_WIRELESS_AP_EVENT

- CISCO_WIRELESS_LIGHTWEIGHT_AP_EVENT

- CISCO_DMP_EVENT

- CISCO_IPVSC_EVENT

- WORD —Apply a user-defined event trigger.

shell_function

Specifies a built-in macro name:

- CISCO_PHONE_AUTO_SMARTPORT

(Optional) Specify the parameter values: $ACCESS_VLAN=(1) and $VOICE_VLAN=(2).

- CISCO_SWITCH_AUTO_SMARTPORT

(Optional) Specify the parameter values: $NATIVE_VLAN=(1).

- CISCO_ROUTER_AUTO_SMARTPORT

(Optional) Specify the parameter values: $NATIVE_VLAN=(1).

- CISCO_AP_AUTO_SMARTPORT

(Optional) Specify the parameter values: $NATIVE_VLAN=(1).

- CISCO_LWAP_AUTO_SMARTPORT

(Optional) Specify the parameter values: $ACCESS_VLAN=(1).

- CISCO_DMP_AUTO_SMARTPORT

- CISCO_IP_CAMERA_AUTO_SMARTPORT

param name=value

(Optional) Specifies values for the parameters that are to be used in the function body.

Command Default

Auto Smartports is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The switch automatically maps from builtin event triggers to builtin functions. The builtin functions are system-defined functions in the software image.

Use the macro auto execute global configuration command to replace the builtin function default values with values specific to your switch.

You can also create user-defined triggers and use this command to map the triggers to builtin functions.

You can create user-defined event triggers by entering the shell trigger global configuration command. Use the show shell privileged EXEC command to display the contents of the builtin and user-defined triggers and functions.

Examples

The following example shows how to use two built-in Auto Smartports macros for connecting Cisco switches and Cisco IP phones to the switch. It modifies the default voice VLAN, access VLAN, and native VLAN for the trunk interface:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)#!!! the next command modifies the access and voice vlans

Switch(config)#!!! for the built in Cisco IP phone auto smartport macro

Switch(config)# macro auto execute CISCO_PHONE_EVENT builtin CISCO_PHONE_AUTO_SMARTPORT ACCESS_VLAN=10 VOICE_VLAN=20

Switch(config)#

Switch(config)#!!! the next command modifies the native vlan

Switch(config)#!!! for the built in switch auto smartport macro

Switch(config)# macro auto execute CISCO_SWITCH_EVENT builtin CISCO_SWITCH_AUTO_SMARTPORT NATIVE_VLAN=10

Switch(config)#!!! the next example creates a user-defined trigger and maps it to a builtin functions

Switch(config)# shell trigger myTrigger “user-defined trigger”

Switch(config)# macro auto execute myTrigger builtin CISCO_PHONE_AUTO_SMARTPORT_ACCESSVLAN voice_vlan

Switch(config)#!!! the next command enables auto smart ports globally

Switch(config)# macro auto global processing fallback CDP

Switch# !!! here's the running configuration of the interface connected

Switch# !!! to another Cisco Switch after the Macro is applied

Switch#

Switch# show running-config interface Gi1/0/1

Building configuration...

Current configuration : 284 bytes

!

interface GigabitEthernet1/0/1

switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q

switchport trunk native vlan 10

switchport mode trunk

srr-queue bandwidth share 10 10 60 20

queue-set 2

priority-queue out

mls qos trust cos

auto qos voip trust

macro description CISCO_SWITCH_EVENT

end

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro auto device

Simplifies changing the parameters for a built-in functions for a device type.

macro auto execute (remotely-defined trigger)

Maps a trigger to a remotely defined functions.

macro auto execute (user-defined function)

Maps a trigger to a user-defined function.

macro auto global processing

Enables Auto Smartports on a switch.

macro auto processing

Enables Auto SmartPorts macros on a specific interface.

macro auto sticky

Specifies not to remove configurations applied by ASP across link flaps and device removal.

shell trigger

Creates a user defined trigger.

macro auto execute (remotely-defined trigger)

Use the macro auto execute configuration command to map a trigger to a remotely defined function. Use the no form of this command to unmap the trigger.

macro auto execute trigger_name remote url

no macro auto execute trigger_name remote url

Syntax Description

trigger_name

Specifies the trigger name.

url

Specifies the remotely-defined URL

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command enables you to store shell functions in a central location and utilized by ASP on many switches. This alleviates the problem of updating functions on every switch for each modification.

Triggering of the remotely defined function requires network connectivity to the URL, which is accessed for each execution of the function.

Examples

The following example shows how to map a trigger to the remotely defined function myfunction - the filename that contains the function body:

Switch(config)# macro auto execute mytrigger remote tftp://dirt/tftpboot/myfunction

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro auto device

Simplifies changing the parameters for a built-in functions for a device type.

macro auto execute (built-in function)

Changes built-in function default values or to map user-defined triggers to built-in functions, and to pass the parameter values.

macro auto execute (user-defined function)

Maps a trigger to a user-defined function.

macro auto global processing

Enables Auto Smartports on a switch.

macro auto processing

Enable Auto SmartPorts macros on a specific interface.

macro auto sticky

Specifies not to remove configurations applied by ASP across link flaps and device removal.

shell trigger

Create a user defined trigger.

macro auto execute (user-defined function)

Use the macro auto execute configuration command to map a trigger to a user-defined function. Use the no form of this command to unmap the trigger.

macro auto execute trigger_name [param_name=value] {function body}

no macro auto execute trigger_name [param_name=value]

Syntax Description

trigger_name

Specifies the trigger name.

param name=value

(Optional) Specifies values for the parameters that are to be used in the function body.

function_body

Shell functions with CLIs.

Command Default

None.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Because the function defined in this command does not have a name, you cannot use it to map to another trigger. This is the only way that you can map a trigger to a user defined function. Shell functions defined in the non-configure mode can not be used to map triggers.

Examples

The following example shows how to map the user-defined event trigger Cisco Digital Media Player (DMP) to a user-defined macro.

a. Connect the DMP to an 802.1x- or MAB-enabled switch port.

b. On the RADIUS server, set the attribute-value pair to auto-smart-port=CISCO_DMP_EVENT.

c. On the switch, create the event trigger CISCO_DMP_EVENT, and enter the user-defined macro commands shown below.

d. The switch recognizes the attribute-value pair=CISCO_DMP_EVENT response from the RADIUS server and applies the macro associated with this event trigger.

Switch(config)# shell trigger CISCO_DMP_EVENT Cisco DMP player

Switch(config)# macro auto execute CISCO_DMP_EVENT {

if [[ $LINKUP -eq YES ]]; then

conf t

interface $INTERFACE

macro description $TRIGGER

switchport access vlan 1

switchport mode access

switchport port-security

switchport port-security maximum 1

switchport port-security violation restrict

switchport port-security aging time 2

switchport port-security aging type inactivity

spanning-tree portfast

spanning-tree bpduguard enable

exit

fi

if [[ $LINKUP -eq NO ]]; then

conf t

interface $INTERFACE

no macro description $TRIGGER

no switchport access vlan 1

if [[ $AUTH_ENABLED -eq NO ]]; then

no switchport mode access

fi

no switchport port-security

no switchport port-security maximum 1

no switchport port-security violation restrict

no switchport port-security aging time 2

no switchport port-security aging type inactivity

no spanning-tree portfast

no spanning-tree bpduguard enable

exit

fi

}

Switch(config)# end

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro auto device

Simplifies changing the parameters for a built-in functions for a device type.

macro auto execute (built-in function)

Changes built-in function default values or to map user-defined triggers to built-in functions, and to pass the parameter values.

macro auto execute (remotely-defined trigger)

Maps a trigger to a remotely defined functions.

macro auto global processing

Enables Auto Smartports on a switch.

macro auto processing

Enables Auto SmartPorts macros on a specific interface.

macro auto sticky

Specifies not to remove configurations applied by ASP across link flaps and device removal.

shell trigger

Creates a user defined trigger.

macro auto global processing

Use the macro auto global processing global configuration command to enable Auto SmartPorts macros on the switch. Use the no form of this command to disable Auto SmartPorts (ASP) macros globally.

macro auto global processing [cdp | lldp]

no macro auto global processing [ cdp | ldp]

Note Starting with Release 15.0(2)SG, the fallback option has been deprecated.

Syntax Description

cdp

Selects CDP as fallback mode.

lldp

Selects LLDP as fallback mode.

Command Default

Auto Smartports is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use the macro auto global processing global configuration command to globally enable Auto Smartports macros on the switch. To disable ASP macros on a specific port, use the no macro auto processing command in the interface mode before ASP is enabled globally.

Auto Smartports macros dynamically configure ports based on the device type detected on the port. When the switch detects a new device on a port it applies the appropriate ASP macro. When a link-down event occurs on a port, the switch removes the macro. For example, when you connect a Cisco IP phone to a port, ASP automatically applies the IP phone macro. The IP phone macro enables quality of service (QoS), security features, and a dedicated voice VLAN to ensure proper treatment of delay-sensitive voice traffic.

ASP uses event triggers to map devices to macros. The most common event triggers are based on Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) messages received from connected devices. The detection of a device invokes a CDP event trigger: Cisco IP phone, Cisco wireless access point, Cisco switch, or Cisco router. Other event triggers use MAC authentication bypass (MAB) and 802.1X authentication messages.

Use CDP if port authentication is enabled and the RADIUS server does not send an event trigger.

Select LLDP to apply auto configuration if authentication fails.

If authentication is enabled on a port, a switch ignores CDP and LLDP messages unless the cdp keyword is enabled.

When using 802.1X or MAB authentication, configure the RADIUS server to support the Cisco attribute-value (AV) pair auto-smart-port=event trigger.

When CDP-identified devices advertise multiple capabilities, a switch chooses a capability in this priority order: switch, router, access point, lightweight access point, phone, host.

To verify that an ASP macro is applied to an interface, use the show running config command.

The macro auto global processing cdp and macro auto global processing lldp commands enables ASP globally if it is not already enabled, and set the fallback to CDP or LLDP, respectively. However, the no macro auto global processing [cdp | lldp] command only removes the fallback mechanism. It does not disable ASP globally; only the no macro auto global processing command disables ASP globally.

The keywords cdp and lldp are also controlled at the interface level; by default, CDP is the fallback mechanism on an interface. If you prefer LLDP, first enter the no macro auto processing cdp command, then enter the macro auto processing lldp command.

If you want to activate both CDP and LLDP, you must enable them in sequence. For example, you would first enter the macro auto processing cdp command, then the macro auto processing lldp command.

Examples

The following example shows how enable ASP on a switch and to disable the feature on Gi1/0/1:

Switch(config)# interface interface Gi1/0/1

Switch(config-if)# no macro auto processing

Switch(config)# macro auto global processing

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro auto device

Simplifies changing the parameters for a built-in functions for a device type.

macro auto execute (built-in function)

Changes built-in function default values or to map user-defined triggers to built-in functions, and to pass the parameter values.

macro auto execute (remotely-defined trigger)

Maps a trigger to a remotely defined functions.

macro auto execute (user-defined function)

Maps a trigger to a user-defined function.

macro auto processing

Enables ASP macros on a specific interface.

macro auto sticky

Enables a user to not remove configurations applied by ASP across link flaps and device removal.

shell trigger

Creates a user defined trigger.

macro auto mac-address-group

Use the macro auto mac-address-group command to configure a group of MAC-address or OUIs as a trigger. Use the no form of this command to unconfigure the group.

macro auto mac-address-group grp_name

no macro auto mac-address-group grp_namel

Syntax Description

grp_name

Specifies the group name.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command changes the mode to config-mac-addr-grp, in which you can add or remove a MAC address or OUI from the group.

You can specify a list of MACs or OUIs, or a range of OUIs (maximum of 5 in the range).

Examples

The following example shows how to configure testGroup as a trigger:

Switch(config)# macro auto mac-address-group testGroup

Switch(config-addr-grp-mac)# mac-address list 1111.1111.1111 2222.2222.2222

Switch(config-addr-grp-mac)# exit

Switch(config)# exit

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro auto execute (built-in function)

Changes built-in function default values or to map user-defined triggers to built-in functions, and to pass the parameter values.

macro auto execute (remotely-defined trigger)

Maps a trigger to a remotely defined functions.

macro auto execute (user-defined function)

Maps a trigger to a user-defined function.

macro auto global processing

Enables Auto Smartports on a switch.

macro auto processing

Enables Auto SmartPorts macros on a specific interface.

macro auto sticky

Specifies not to remove configurations applied by ASP across link flaps and device removal.

shell trigger

Creates a user defined trigger.

macro auto monitor

To enable the device classifier, use the macro auto monitor global configuration command. Use the no form of this command to disable the device classifier.

macro auto monitor

no macro auto monitor

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Device classifier is enabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

Release IOS XE 3.3.0 SG (15.1(1)SG)

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use the no macro auto monitor global configuration command to disable the device classifier. You cannot disable the device classifier while it is being used by features such as ASP.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the ASP device classifier on a switch:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# macro auto monitor

Switch(config)# end

Related Commands

Command

Description

show macro auto monitor clients

Displays the clients using the device classifier facility on the switch.

show macro auto monitor device

Displays the devices connected to a switch, along with their properties and classifications.

show macro auto monitor type

Displays all the device types known to the device classification agent.

macro auto processing

Note Only use this command when Auto SmartPorts (ASP) is enabled globally; when ASP is disabled globally, interface-level control has no effect.

Use the macro auto processing interface configuration command to enable ASP macros on a specific interface. Use the no form of this command to disable ASP on a specific interface before ASP is enabled globally.

macro auto processing [fallback cdp] [fallback lldp]

no macro auto processing [fallback cdp] [fallback lldp]

Syntax Description

fallback cdp

Specifies as CDP as the fallback mechanism.

fallback lldp

Specifies as LLDP as the fallback mechanism.

Command Default

Fallback mechanism is CDP.

Command Modes

Interface level configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The no macro auto processing command should be configured on all interfaces where ASP is not desirable (such as Layer 3 and EtherChannel interfaces) before ASP is enabled globally.

At the interface level, the default fallback mechanism is CDP. To change the mechanism to LLDP, enter the no macro auto processing fallback cdp command, followed by the macro auto processing fallback lldp command.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the feature on an interface:

Switch(config)# interface Gi3/1

Switch(config-if)# macro auto processing

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro auto execute (built-in function)

Configures mapping from an event trigger to a built-in macro.

shell trigger

Creates a user defined trigger.

show shell functions

Displays configurations included for all the builtin functions including user created and built-in functions.

show shell triggers

Displays detail for all supported user created and built-in triggers.

macro auto execute (built-in function)

Changes built-in function default values or to map user-defined triggers to built-in functions, and to pass the parameter values.

macro auto execute (remotely-defined trigger)

Maps a trigger to a remotely defined functions.

macro auto execute (user-defined function)

Maps a trigger to a user-defined function.

macro auto global processing

Enables Auto Smartports on a switch.

macro auto sticky

Use the macro auto sticky configuration to specify not to remove configurations applied by ASP across link flaps and device removal.

macro auto sticky

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Not sticky (macros are removed

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command enables you to avoid unnecessary removal of ASP configurations when a feature intentionally shuts down a link (like EnergyWise, which shuts down inactive links to save energy). When such a feature is enabled, you don't want ASP macros to be applied and removed unnecessarily. So you configure the sticky feature.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify not to remove configurations:

Switch(config)# macro auto sticky

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro auto execute (built-in function)

Changes built-in function default values or to map user-defined triggers to built-in functions, and to pass the parameter values.

macro auto execute (remotely-defined trigger)

Maps a trigger to a remotely defined functions.

macro auto execute (user-defined function)

Maps a trigger to a user-defined function.

macro auto global processing

Enables Auto Smartports on a switch.

macro auto processing

Enables Auto SmartPorts macros on a specific interface.

shell trigger

Creates a user defined trigger.

macro global apply cisco-global

To apply the system-defined default template to the switch, use the macro global apply cisco-global global configuration command on the switch stack or on a standalone switch.

macro global apply cisco-global

Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or variables.

Command Default

This command has no default setting.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

These examples show how to apply the system-defined default to the switch:

Switch(config)# macro global apply cisco-global

Changing VTP domain name from gsg-vtp to [smartports] Device mode already VTP TRANSPARENT.

Switch(config)#

macro global apply system-cpp

To apply the control plane policing default template to the switch, use the macro global apply system-cpp global configuration command on the switch stack or on a standalone switch.

macro global apply system-cpp

Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or variables.

Command Default

This command has no default setting.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to apply the system-defined default to the switch:

Switch (config)# macro global apply system-cpp

Switch (config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro global apply cisco-global

Applies the system-defined default template to the switch.

macro global description

Enters a description about the macros that are applied to the switch.

macro global description

To enter a description about the macros that are applied to the switch, use the macro global description global configuration command on the switch stack or on a standalone switch. Use the no form of this command to remove the description.

macro global description text

no macro global description text

Syntax Description

text

Enters a description about the macros that are applied to the switch.

Command Default

This command has no default setting.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command associates comment text, or the macro name, with a switch. When multiple macros are applied on a switch, the description text will be from the last applied macro.

Examples

The following example shows how to add a description to a switch:

Switch(config)# macro global description udld aggressive mode enabled

You can verify your settings by entering the show parser macro description privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro global apply cisco-global

Applies the system-defined default template to the switch.

main-cpu

To enter the main CPU submode and manually synchronize the configurations on two supervisor engines, use the main-cpu command.

main-cpu

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Redundancy mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch. (Catalyst 4507R only).

Usage Guidelines

The main CPU submode is used to manually synchronize the configurations on the two supervisor engines. From the main CPU submode, use the auto-sync command to enable automatic synchronization of the configuration files in NVRAM.

Note After you enter the main CPU submode, you can use the auto-sync command to automatically synchronize the configuration between the primary and secondary route processors based on the primary configuration. In addition, you can use all of the redundancy commands that are applicable to the main CPU.

Examples

The following example shows how to reenable the default automatic synchronization feature using the auto-sync standard command to synchronize the startup-config and config-register configuration of the active supervisor engine with the standby supervisor engine. The updates for the boot variables are automatic and cannot be disabled.

Switch(config)# redundancy

Switch(config-red)# main-cpu

Switch(config-r-mc)# auto-sync standard

Switch(config-r-mc)# end

Switch# copy running-config startup-config

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

auto-sync

Enables automatic synchronization of the configuration files in NVRAM.

match

To specify a match clause by selecting one or more ACLs for a VLAN access-map sequence, use the match subcommand. To remove the match clause, use the no form of this command.

match {ip address {acl-number | acl-name}} | {mac address acl-name}

no match {ip address {acl-number | acl-name}} | {mac address acl-name}

Note If a match clause is not specified, the action for the VLAN access-map sequence is applied to all packets. All packets are matched against that sequence in the access map.

Syntax Description

ip address acl-number

Selects one or more IP ACLs for a VLAN access-map sequence; valid values are from 1 to 199 and from 1300 to 2699.

ip address acl-name

Selects an IP ACL by name.

mac address acl-name

Selects one or more MAC ACLs for a VLAN access-map sequence.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

VLAN access-map mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The match clause specifies the IP or MAC ACL for traffic filtering.

The MAC sequence is not effective for IP packets. IP packets should be access controlled by IP match clauses.

Refer to the Catalyst 4500 Series Switch Cisco IOS Software Configuration Guide for additional configuration guidelines and restrictions.

Refer to the Cisco IOS Command Reference publication for additional match command information.

Examples

The following example shows how to define a match clause for a VLAN access map:

Switch(config)# vlan access-map ganymede 10

Switch(config-access-map)# match ip address 13

Switch(config-access-map)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vlan access-map

Displays the contents of a VLAN access map.

vlan access-map

Enters VLAN access-map command mode to create a VLAN access map.

match (class-map configuration)

To define the match criteria for a class map, use the match class-map configuration command. To remove the match criteria, use the no form of this command.

match {access-group acl-index-or-name | cos cos-list | [lp] dscp dscp-list | [lp] precedence ip-precedence-list | qos-group value | protocol [ip | ipv6 | arp]

no match {access-group acl-index-or-name | cos cos-list | [lp] dscp dscp-list | [lp] precedence ip-precedence-list | qos-group value | protocol [ip | ipv6 | arp]

Syntax Description

access-group acl-index-or-name

Number or name of an IP standard or extended access control list (ACL) or MAC ACL. For an IP standard ACL, the ACL index range is 1 to 99 and 1300 to 1999. For an IP extended ACL, the ACL index range is 100 to 199 and 2000 to 2699.

cos cos-list

Lists up to four Layer 2 class of service (CoS) values to match against a packet. Separate each value with a space. The range is 0 to 7.

[lp] dscp dscp-list

(Optional) IP keyword. It specifies that the match is for IPv4 packets only. If not used, the match is for both IPv4 and IPv6 packets.

Lists up to eight IP Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) values to match against a packet. Separate each value with a space. The range is 0 to 63. You also can enter a mnemonic name for a commonly used value.

[lp] precedence ip-precedence-list

(Optional) IP keyword. It specifies that the match is for IPv4 packets only. If not used, the match is for both IPv4 and IPv6 packets.

Lists up to eight IP-precedence values to match against a packet. Separate each value with a space. The range is 0 to 7. You also can enter a mnemonic name for a commonly used value.

qos-group value

Specifies the internally generated qos-group value assigned to a packet on the input qos classification.

protocol ip

Specifies IP in the Ethernet header. Though visible in the command-line help strings, the only protocol types supported are IP, IPv6, and ARP.

protocol ipv6

Specifies IPv6 in the Ethernet header. Though visible in the command-line help strings the only protocol types supported are IP, IPv6, and ARP.

protocol arp

Specifies ARP in the Ethernet header. Though visible in the command-line help strings the only protocol types supported are IP, IPv6, and ARP.

Command Default

No match criteria are defined.

Command Modes

Class-map configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

12.2(40)SG

Support extended to Supervisor Engine 6-E and the Catalyst 4900M chassis.

12.2(46)SG

Added support for the match protocol arp command on the Supervisor Engine 6-E and Catalyst 4900M chassis.

Usage Guidelines

Before entering the match command, you must first enter the class-map global configuration command to specify the name of the class whose match criteria you want to establish. The match command is used to specify which fields in the packets are examined to classify the packets. If a packet matches the specified criteria, the packet is considered a member of the class and is forwarded according to the quality of service (QoS) specifications set in the traffic policy.

For the match ip dscp dscp-list or the match ip precedence ip-precedence-list command, you can enter a mnemonic name for a commonly used value. For example, you can enter the match ip dscp af11 command, which is the same as entering the match ip dscp 10 command. You can enter the match ip precedence critical command, which is the same as entering the match ip precedence 5 command. For a list of supported mnemonics, enter the match ip dscp ? or the match ip precedence ? command to see the command-line help strings.

To match only IPv6 packets, you must use the match protocol ipv6 command. To match only IPv4 packets you can use either the ip prefix or the protocol ip keyword.

To match only ARP packets, you must use the match protocol arp command.

You can configure the match cos cos-list, match ip dscp dscp-list, match ip precedence ip-precedence-list command in a class map within a policy map.

The match cos cos-list command applies only to Ethernet frames that carry a VLAN tag.

The match qos-group command is used by the class-map to identify a specific QoS group value assigned to a packet. The QoS group value is local to the switch and is associated with a packet on the input Qos classification.

Packets that do not meet any of the matching criteria are classified as members of the default traffic class. You configure it by specifying class-default as the class name in the class policy-map configuration command. For more information, see the “class” section.

Examples

The following example shows how to create a class map called class2, which matches all the inbound traffic with DSCP values of 10, 11, and 12:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# class-map class2

Switch(config-cmap)# match ip dscp 10 11 12

Switch(config-cmap)# exit

Switch#

The following example shows how to create a class map called class3, which matches all the inbound traffic with IP-precedence values of 5, 6, and 7 for both IPv4 and IPv6 traffic:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# class-map class3

Switch(config-cmap)# match ip precedence 5 6 7

Switch(config-cmap)# exit

Switch#

The following example shows how to delete the IP-precedence match criteria and to classify traffic using acl1:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# class-map class2

Switch(config-cmap)# match ip precedence 5 6 7

Switch(config-cmap)# no match ip precedence

Switch(config-cmap)# match access-group acl1

Switch(config-cmap)# exit

Switch#

The following example shows how to specify a class-map that applies only to IPv6 traffic on a Supervisor Engine 6-E:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# class-map match all ipv6 only

Switch(config-cmap)# match dscp af21

Switch(config-cmap)# match protocol ipv6

Switch(config-cmap)# exit

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show class-map privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

class-map

Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name you specify and to enter class-map configuration mode.

show class-map

Displays class map information.

match flow ip

To specify match criteria to treat flows with a unique source or destination address as new flows, use the match flow ip command. To disable this function, use the no form of this command.

match flow ip {source-address [ip destination-address ip protocol L4 source-address L4 destination-address] | destination-address}

no match flow ip {source-address [ip destination-address ip protocol L4 source-address L4 destination-address] | destination-address}

Syntax Description

source-address

Establishes a new flow from a flow with a unique IP source address.

ip destination-address ip protocol L4 source-address L4 destination-address

(Optional) Comprises the full flow keyword; treats each flow with unique IP source, destination, protocol, and Layer 4 source and destination address as a new flow.

destination-address

Establishes a new flow from a flow with a unique IP destination address.

Command Default

This command has no default settings..

Command Modes

class-map configuration submode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)SG

Support for the full flow option was added.

Usage Guidelines

When you specify the source-address keyword, each flow with a unique source address is treated as a new flow.

When you specify the destination-address keyword, each flow with a unique destination address is treated as a new flow.

A policy map is called a flow-based policy map when you configure the flow keywords on the class map that it uses. To attach a flow-based policy map as a child to an aggregate policy map, use the service-policy command.

Note The match flow command is available on the Catalyst 4500 series switch only when

Supervisor Engine 6-E or 6L-E is present.

Examples

The following example shows how to create a flow-based class map associated with a source address:

Switch(config)# class-map match-all c1

Switch(config-cmap)# match flow ip source-address

Switch(config-cmap)# end

Switch#

Switch# show class-map c1

Class Map match-all c1 (id 2)

Match flow ip source-address

Switch#

The following example shows how to create a flow-based class map associated with a destination address:

Switch(config)# class-map match-all c1

Switch(config-cmap)# match flow ip destination-address

Switch(config-cmap)# end

Switch#

Switch# show class-map c1

Class Map match-all c1 (id 2)

Match flow ip destination-address

Switch#

Assume there are two active flows on the Fast Ethernet interface 6/1 with source addresses 192.168.10.20 and 192.168.10.21. The following example shows how to maintain each flow to 1 Mbps with an allowed burst value of 9000 bytes:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# class-map c1

Switch(config-cmap)# match flow ip source-address

Switch(config-cmap)# exit

Switch(config)# policy-map p1

Switch(config-pmap)# class c1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 1000000 9000

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# exit

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet6/1

Switch(config-if)# service-policy input p1

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# write memory

Switch# show policy-map interface

FastEthernet6/1

Service-policy input: p1

Class-map: c1 (match-all)

15432182 packets

Match: flow ip source-address

police: Per-interface

Conform: 64995654 bytes Exceed: 2376965424 bytes

Class-map: class-default (match-any)

0 packets

Match: any

0 packets

Switch#

The following example shows two active flows on the Fast Ethernet interface 6/1 with destination addresses of 192.168.20.20 and 192.168.20.21. The following example shows how to maintain each flow to 1 Mbps with an allowed burst value of 9000 bytes:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# class-map c1

Switch(config-cmap)# match flow ip destination-address

Switch(config-cmap)# exit

Switch(config)# policy-map p1

Switch(config-pmap)# class c1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 1000000 9000

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# exit

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet6/1

Switch(config-if)# service-policy input p1

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# write memory

Switch# show policy-map interface

FastEthernet6/1

Service-policy input: p1

Class-map: c1 (match-all)

2965072 packets

Match: flow ip destination-address

police: Per-interface

Conform: 6105636 bytes Exceed: 476652528 bytes

Class-map: class-default (match-any)

0 packets

Match: any

0 packets

Switch#

Assume there are two active flows as shown below on the Fast Ethernet interface 6/1:

SrcIp DstIp IpProt SrcL4Port DstL4Port

--------------------------------------------------------

192.168.10.10 192.168.20.20 20 6789 81

192.168.10.10 192.168.20.20 20 6789 21

With the following configuration, each flow is policed to a 1000000 bps with an allowed 9000-byte burst value.

Note If you use the match flow ip source-address|destination-address command, these two flows are consolidated into one flow because they have the same source and destination address.

Switch# conf terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# class-map c1

Switch(config-cmap)# match flow ip source-address ip destination-address ip protocol l4 source-port l4 destination-port

Switch(config-cmap)# exit

Switch(config)# policy-map p1

Switch(config-pmap)# class c1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 1000000 9000

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# exit

Switch(config)# interface fastEthernet 6/1

Switch(config-if)# service-policy input p1

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# write memory

Switch# show policy-map interface

FastEthernet6/1

class-map c1

match flow ip source-address ip destination-address ip protocol l4 source-port l4 destination-port

!

policy-map p1

class c1

police 1000000 bps 9000 byte conform-action transmit exceed-action drop

!

interface FastEthernet 6/1

service-policy input p1

Switch# show class-map c1

Class Map match-all c1 (id 2)

Match flow ip source-address ip destination-address ip protocol l4 source-port l4 destination-port

Switch# show policy-map p1

Policy Map p1

Class c1

police 1000000 bps 9000 byte conform-action transmit exceed-action drop

Switch# show policy-map interface

FastEthernet6/1

Service-policy input: p1

Class-map: c1 (match-all)

15432182 packets

Match: flow ip source-address ip destination-address ip protocol l4 source-port l4 destination-port

police: Per-interface

Conform: 64995654 bytes Exceed: 2376965424 bytes

Class-map: class-default (match-any)

0 packets

Match: any

0 packets

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

service-policy (interface configuration)

Attaches a policy map to an interface.

show class-map

Displays class map information.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

show policy-map interface

Displays the statistics and configurations of the input and output policies that are attached to an interface.

mdix auto

To enable the automatic medium-dependent interface crossover (auto-MDIX) feature on the interface, use the mdix auto command. When auto-MDIX is enabled, the interface automatically detects the required cable connection type (straight-through or crossover) and configures the connection appropriately. Use the no form of this command to disable auto-MDIX.

mdix auto

no mdix auto

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Auto-MDIX is enabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(46)SG

Added supported and unsupported linecard information to the usage guidelines.

Usage Guidelines

The following linecards support Auto-MDIX through the CLI on their copper media ports: WS-X4124-RJ45, WS-X4148-RJ45 (hardware revision 3.0 or higher), and WS-X4232-GB-RJ45 (hardware revision 3.0, or higher), WS-X4920-GE-RJ45, and WS-4648-RJ45V+E (Auto-MDIX support when inline power is disabled on the port).

Linecards that support auto-MDIX by default when port auto-negotiation enabled and cannot be turned off using an mdix CLI command include: WS-X4448-GB-RJ45, WS-X4548-GB-RJ45, WS-X4424-GB-RJ45, and WS-X4412-2GB-T.

Linecards that cannot support auto-MDIX functionality, either by default or CLI commands, include: WS-X4548-GB-RJ45V, WS-X4524-GB-RJ45V, WS-X4506-GB-T, WS-X4148-RJ, WS-X4248-RJ21V, WS-X4248-RJ45V, WS-X4224-RJ45V, and WS-X4232-GB-RJ.

When you enable auto-MDIX on an interface, you must also set the interface speed to be autoneogiated so that the feature operates correctly.

When auto-MDIX (and autonegotiation of speed) is enabled on one or both of connected interfaces, link up occurs even if the cable type (straight-through or crossover) is incorrect.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable auto MDIX on a port:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface FastEthernet6/3

Switch(config-if)# speed auto

Switch(config-if)# mdix auto

Switch(config-if)# end

Related Commands

Command

Description

speed

Configures the interface speed.

show interfaces

Displays traffic on a specific interface.

show interfaces (virtual switch)

Displays the interface capabilities for an interface or for all the interfaces on a switch.

show interfaces status

Displays the interface status.

media-type

To select the connector for a dual-mode capable port, use the media-type command.

media-type {rj45 | sfp}

Syntax Description

rj45

Uses the RJ-45 connector.

sfp

Uses the SFP connector.

Command Default

sfp

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(20)EWA

This command was introduced for the WS-X4306-GB-T module and the WS-X4948 chassis.

Usage Guidelines

This command is supported on all ports on the WS-X4306-GB-T module and ports 1/45-48 on the WS-X4948 chassis.

Entering the show interface capabilities command provides the Multiple Media Types field, which displays the value no if a port is not dual-mode capable and lists the media types (sfp and rj45) for dual-mode capable ports.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure port 5/45 on a WS-X4948 chassis to use the RJ-45 connector:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 5/45

Switch(config-if)# media-type rj45

mode

To set the redundancy mode, use the mode command.

mode {rpr | sso}

Syntax Description

rpr

Specifies RPR mode.

sso

Specifies SSO mode.

Command Default

If you are upgrading the current supervisor engine from Cisco IOS Release 12.2(18)EW or an earlier release to 12.2(20)EWA, and the RPR mode has been saved to the startup configuration, both supervisor engines will continue to operate in RPR mode after the software upgrade. To use SSO mode, you must manually change the redundancy mode to SSO.

Command Modes

Redundancy configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(20)EWA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The mode command can be entered only from within redundancy configuration mode.

Follow these guidelines when configuring your system to RPR or SSO mode:

- You must use identical Cisco IOS images and supervisor engines to support RPR and SSO mode. Redundancy may not work due to differences between the Cisco IOS release and supervisor engine capabilities.

- Any modules that are not online at the time of a switchover are reset and reloaded on a switchover.

- If you perform an OIR of the module within 60 seconds before a stateful switchover, the module resets during the stateful switchover and the port states are restarted.

- The FIB tables are cleared on a switchover. Routed traffic is interrupted until route tables reconverge.

The redundant supervisor engine reloads on any mode change and begins to work in the current mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the redundancy mode to SSO:

Switch(config)# redundancy

Switch(config-red)# mode sso

Switch(config-red)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

redundancy

Enters the redundancy configuration mode.

redundancy force-switchover

Forces a switchover from the active to the standby supervisor engine.

show redundancy

Displays redundancy facility information.

show running-config

Displays the running configuration of a switch.

monitor capture {access-list | class-map}

To specify an access list or class map as the core filter, use the monitor capture {access-list | class-map} command. To remove the filter, use the no form of this command.

monitor capture name {access-list name | class-map name}

no monitor capture name {access-list name | class-map name}

Syntax Description

name

Specifies a capture point.

access-list name

Specifies access list name

class-map name

Specifies class map name

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.3.0SG/

15.1(1)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The access list or class map is defined with configuration commands. The access list or class map should be defined prior to entering the monitor capture command. We can specify the core filter as a class map, access lis, t or an explicit in-line filter. If the filter has already been specified when you enter the monitor capture command, it replaces the older one.

Examples

The following example shows how to define a core system filter using an existing ACL or class-map:

Switch# monitor capture mycap filter access-list myacl

Switch# monitor capture mycap filter class-map mycm

Switch# no monitor capture mycap filter class-map mycm

monitor capture [clear | export]

To clear capture buffer contents or to store the packets to a file, use the monitor capture [clear | export filename] command.

monitor capture name [clear] [export filename]

Syntax Description

name

Specifies a capture point.

clear

Clears all the packets in the capture buffer.

export filename

Store all the packets in capture buffer to a .pcap file.

Command Default

none

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.3.0SG/

15.1(1)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The clear option empties the capture buffer and the export option stores the packets in the capture buffer to the file. You should use these commands only when the storage destination is a capture buffer. These commands are usable either during capture or when it has stopped either because one or more end conditions has been met or you entered the stop command. If you enter the clear command after the capture has stopped, further export (or decode) and display commands have no impact because the buffer has no packets.

Examples

The following example shows how to associate or disassociate a capture file:

Switch# monitor capture mycap export bootflash:mycap.pcap

Switch# monitor capture mycap clear

monitor capture [interface | vlan | control-plane]

To specify one or more attachment points with direction, use the monitor capture [interface | vlan | control-plane] command. To remove the attachment point, use the no form of this command.

monitor capture name [{interface name | vlan num | control-plane} {in | out | both}]

no monitor capture name [{interface name | vlan num | control-plane} {in | out | both}]

Syntax Description

name

Specifies a capture point.

interface name

Specifies an interface. Interface range is allowed.

vlan num

Specifies a VLAN.

control-plane

Specifies control plane.

input | output | both

Specific traffic direction.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.3.0SG/

15.1(1)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Specifies one or more attachment points with direction. We can specify a range of interfaces also. The command can be repeated as many times as needed to add multiple attachment points.

We need to mention at least one attachment point. For VLAN, the direction has to be set to both.

Examples

The following example shows how to add an attachment point:

Switch# monitor capture mycap interface gigabitEthernet 3/1 in

The following example shows how to remove an attachment point:

Switch# no monitor capture mycap interface gigabitEthernet 3/1 in

monitor capture file location buffer-size

To specify the capture destination, use the monitor capture command. To remove the details, use the no form of this command.

monitor capture name [[file location filename [buffer-size <1-100>] [ring <2-10>] [size <1-100>]] | [buffer [circular] size <1-100>]]

]no monitor capture name [file | buffer]

Syntax Description

file location filename

Specifies filename of location.

buffer-size <1-100>

Specifies bufer size in MB.

ring <2-10>

Specifies number of files.

size <1-100>

Specifies the file size.

buffer [circular] size <1-100>

Specifies that the capture destination is a buffer. By default, the mode is linear.

The keyword circular sets the buffer mode to circular.

The keyword size specifies the buffer size.

Command Default

The default buffer size is one MB.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.3.0SG/

15.1(1)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The capture destination can be a file in storage disk or a memory buffer. This command specifies the parameters related to packet storage.

The file option specifies that the packets must be stored to a file. To reduce or avoid any loss in packet capture, you can use the buffer-size option. The capture and store operations require more CPU, limiting the capture throughput.

You can increase the throughput by triggering lock-step mode, wherein the packets are first captured in the buffer. Within this mode, the “duration” parameter defines the capture duration. Once the buffer is full or the duration closes, the buffer is written to the file, greatly increasing the capture throughput. The lock-step mode is automatically triggered by specifying the buffer size to 32MB or higher.

The size of the capture file can be limited with the size option. The file location must one of the following:

- Internal bootflash (bootflash: )

- External flash (slot0: )

- USB (usb0: )

Do not specify any other devices.

The destination file can be a ring of files rather than a single file. The ring option specifies the number of files in the ring whereas size specifies the total size of all the files. In ring file mode, when the file size limit has reached, it accommodates space for new packets by removing the oldest file.

If the capture destination is a buffer, you must use the show command to decode and display the packets from the buffer. If the circular option is specified, capture continues until you explicitly issue the stop command. If no space exists in the buffer, oldest packet(s) are removed to accommodate the new ones. If the circular option is not provided, newer packets are discarded when the capture buffer is full.

Examples

The following example usages show how to specify a file or a ring of files as the capture destination:

Switch# monitor capture mycap associate buffer-size 1000000file location bootflash:mycap.pcap

Switch# monitor capture mycap file location bootflash:mycap.pcap size 40

Switch# monitor capture mycap file location bootflash:mycap.pcap ring 4 size 40

Switch# monitor capture mycap file location bootflash:mycap.pcap buffer-size 8

Switch# monitor capture mycap file location bootflash:mycap.pcap ring 4 size 40 buffer-size 16

Switch# no monitor capture mycap file

The following example shows how to setup capture in lock-step mode:

Switch# monitor capture mycap file location bootflash:mycap.pcap buffer-size 64

Switch# no monitor capture mycap file

The following example shows how to make a circular buffer as the capture destination and operate on the buffer:

Switch# monitor capture mycap int gi 3/1 in match ipv4 any any

Switch# monitor capture mycap buffer circular size 1

Switch# monitor capture mycap start

Switch#

Switch# sh monitor capture mycap buffer

0.000000 10.1.1.164 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

1.000000 10.1.1.165 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

2.000000 10.1.1.166 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

3.000000 10.1.1.167 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

4.000000 10.1.1.168 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

5.000000 10.1.1.169 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

6.000000 10.1.1.170 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

7.000000 10.1.1.171 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

8.000000 10.1.1.172 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

9.000000 10.1.1.173 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

10.000000 10.1.1.174 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

11.000000 10.1.1.175 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

12.000000 10.1.1.176 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

Switch# sh monitor capture mycap buffer detailed

Frame 1: 256 bytes on wire (2048 bits), 256 bytes captured (2048 bits)

Arrival Time: Apr 12, 2012 10:59:06.255983000 PDT

Epoch Time: 1334253546.255983000 seconds

[Time delta from previous captured frame: 0.000000000 seconds]

[Time delta from previous displayed frame: 0.000000000 seconds]

[Time since reference or first frame: 0.000000000 seconds]

Frame Number: 1

Frame Length: 256 bytes (2048 bits)

Capture Length: 256 bytes (2048 bits)

[Frame is marked: False]

[Frame is ignored: False]

[Protocols in frame: eth:ip:udp:data]

Ethernet II, Src: 00:00:00:00:03:01 (00:00:00:00:03:01), Dst: 54:75:d0:3a:85:3f (54:75:d0:3a:85:3f)

Destination: 54:75:d0:3a:85:3f (54:75:d0:3a:85:3f)

Address: 54:75:d0:3a:85:3f (54:75:d0:3a:85:3f)

.... ...0 .... .... .... .... = IG bit: Individual address (unicast)

.... ..0. .... .... .... .... = LG bit: Globally unique address (factory default)

Source: 00:00:00:00:03:01 (00:00:00:00:03:01)

Address: 00:00:00:00:03:01 (00:00:00:00:03:01)

.... ...0 .... .... .... .... = IG bit: Individual address (unicast)

.... ..0. .... .... .... .... = LG bit: Globally unique address (factory default)

…

Switch# sh monitor capture mycap buffer dump

0.000000 10.1.1.164 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0000 54 75 d0 3a 85 3f 00 00 00 00 03 01 08 00 45 00 Tu.:.?........E.

0010 00 ee 00 00 00 00 40 11 59 58 0a 01 01 a4 14 01 ......@.YX......

0020 01 02 4e 21 4e 22 00 da 6e 13 00 01 02 03 04 05 ..N!N"..n.......

0030 06 07 08 09 0a 0b 0c 0d 0e 0f 10 11 12 13 14 15 ................

0040 16 17 18 19 1a 1b 1c 1d 1e 1f 20 21 22 23 24 25 .......... !"#$%

0050 26 27 28 29 2a 2b 2c 2d 2e 2f 30 31 32 33 34 35 &'()*+,-./012345

0060 36 37 38 39 3a 3b 3c 3d 3e 3f 40 41 42 43 44 45 6789:;<=>?@ABCDE

0070 46 47 48 49 4a 4b 4c 4d 4e 4f 50 51 52 53 54 55 FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU

0080 56 57 58 59 5a 5b 5c 5d 5e 5f 60 61 62 63 64 65 VWXYZ[\]^_`abcde

0090 66 67 68 69 6a 6b 6c 6d 6e 6f 70 71 72 73 74 75 fghijklmnopqrstu

00a0 76 77 78 79 7a 7b 7c 7d 7e 7f 80 81 82 83 84 85 vwxyz{|}~.......

00b0 86 87 88 89 8a 8b 8c 8d 8e 8f 90 91 92 93 94 95 ................

00c0 96 97 98 99 9a 9b 9c 9d 9e 9f a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 ................

00d0 a6 a7 a8 a9 aa ab ac ad ae af b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 ................

00e0 b6 b7 b8 b9 ba bb bc bd be bf c0 c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 ................

00f0 c6 c7 c8 c9 ca cb cc cd ce cf d0 d1 63 24 51 ee ............c$Q.

1.000000 10.1.1.165 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

…

Switch# monitor capture mycap clear

Switch# sh monitor capture mycap buffer detailed

…

Switch# monitor capture mycap stop

monitor capture limit

To specify capture limits, use the monitor capture limit command. To remove the limits, use the no form of this command.

monitor capture name limit {duration seconds] [packet-length size] [packets num]

no monitor capture name limit [duration] [packet-length] [packets]

Syntax Description

name

Specifies a capture point.

duration seconds

Specifies duration in seconds.

packet-length size

Specifies packet length. If the actual packet is longer, only the first size bytes are stored.

packets num

Specifies number of packets to be processed.

Command Default

Entire packet is processed if packet-length is not specified.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.3.0SG/

15.1(1)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Specifies session duration, packet segment length and number of packets to be stored

Examples

The following example shows how to associate/disassociate a capture file:

Switch# monitor capture mycap limit duration 10

Switch# monitor capture mycap limit packet-length 128

Switch# monitor capture mycap limit packets 100

Switch# no monitor capture mycap limit duration packet-length packets

Switch# monitor capture mycap limit duration 10 packet-length 128 packets 100

Switch# no monitor capture mycap limit

monitor capture mycap match

To define an expliciti in-line core filter, use the monitor capture mycap match command. To remove it, use the no form of this command.

Switch# [no] monitor capture mycap match {any | mac mac-match-string | ipv4 ipv4-match-string | ipv6 ipv6-match-string}

To use a filter for MAC, use the format below

Switch# [no] monitor capture mycap match mac {src-mac-addr src-mac-mask | any | host src-mac-addr} | {dest-mac-addr dest-mac-mask | any | host dest-mac-addr}

To use a filter for IPv4/IPv6, use one of the formats below

Switch# [no] monitor capture mycap match {ipv4 | ipv6} [src-prefix/length | any | host src-ip-addr] [dest-prefix/length | any | host dest-ip-addr]

Switch# [no] monitor capture mycap match {ipv4 | ipv6} proto {tcp | udp} [src-prefix/length | any | host src-ip-addr] [eq | gt | lt | neq <0-65535>] [dest-prefix/length | any | host dest-ip-addr] [eq | gt | lt | neq <0-65535>]

Syntax Description

any

Specifies “any” packet

mac mac-match-string

Specifies a Layer 2 packet

ipv4 ipv4-match-string

Specifies an IPv4 packet

ipv6 ipv6-match-string

Specifies an IPv6 packet

match name

Specifies a capture point

src-mac-addr

Specifies source MAC address

src-mac-mask

Specifies source MAC mask

host src-mac-addr

Source (or destination) MAC (or IP) address

dest-mac-addr

Specifies a destination MAC address

dest-mac-mask

Specifies a destination MAC mask

host dest-mac-addr

Specifies a source (or destination) MAC (or IP) address

src-prefix/length

Specifies a source prefix / length

host src-ip-addr

Specifies a host source IP address

dest-prefix/length

Specifices a destination prefix / length

host dest-ip-addr

Specifies a source (or destination) MAC (or IP) address

proto {tcp | udp}

Specifies the protocol to be used

{eq | gt | lt | neq} <0-65535>

Specifies Equal, Greater Than, Less than, Not Equal To

Command Default

none

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.3.0SG/

15.1(1)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You can specify the core filter as a class map, access list, or an explicit in-line filter. If the filter has already been specified when you enter this command, it replaces the older one.

The explicit, in-line filter is intended as a simple way to specify a core filter. In certain situations, you must go through the approval process to change a configuration, which could be time-consuming. Although explicit filters simplify this process, be aware that support is more extensive for access list and class maps.

You can capture IPv4, IPv6, MAC, or “any” traffic by specifying the appropriate keywords. Depending on the traffic type, the usage varies. For a MAC, you can specify an address or prefix. For IPv4 or IPv6, you can match on several fields. For source or destination ports, several operators are supported.

Examples

The following example usages show how to set or remove an explicit filter:

Switch# monitor capture mycap match any

Switch# monitor capture mycap match mac any any

Switch# monitor capture mycap match mac host 0000.0a01.0102 host 0000.0a01.0103

Switch# monitor capture mycap match ipv4 any any

Switch# monitor capture mycap match ipv4 host 10.1.1.2 host 20.1.1.2

Switch# monitor capture mycap match ipv4 proto udp 10.1.1.0/24 eq 20001 20.1.1.0/24 eq 20002

Switch# monitor capture mycap match ipv4 proto udp 10.1.1.2/24 eq 20001 any

Switch# no monitor capture mycap match

monitor capture start

To start or stop a capture point, use the monitor capture command.

monitor capture name start [capture-filter filter-string] [display [display-filter filter-string]] [brief | detailed | dump | stop]

Syntax Description

name

Specifies a capture point.

start

Starts the Wireshark session and captures live traffic.

capture-filter filter-string

Specifies the capture filter.

display [display-filter filter-string]

Decodes and displays the filter. Optionally, specifies the display filter.

[brief | detailed | dump]

Specifies the display mode. Default is brief.

stop

Stops the Wireshark session.

Command Default

The default display mode is brief.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.3.0SG/

15.1(1)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

These commands start or stop a capture session, assuming all mandatory parameters are specified. We must ensure that resources like CPU and memory are available before starting the session. Because the capture and display filters must observe the Wireshark display filter syntax, ensure that the filters are accurate (for example, specify the filters within double-quotes).

If the packets will be stored and displayed, do not use display filter; in this mode, if a packet is stored, it is displayed as well. If you provide a display filter, it is ignored.

If a capture filter is specified, the capture is limited to 65536 packets. In this release, there is a limitation that the timestamp will be incorrect when we use a capture filter.

Examples

The following example shows how to start or stop a capture session in various modes:

Switch# monitor capture mycap int gi 3/1 in match ipv4 any any

Switch# monitor capture mycap file location bootflash:mycap.pcap

Switch# monitor capture mycap limit packets 100 duration 60

Switch# monitor capture mycap start

Switch#

Switch# monitor capture mycap stop

Switch# monitor capture mycap start capture-filter "udp.port == 20001"

Switch# monitor capture mycap stop

Switch# monitor capture mycap start capture-filter "udp.port == 20001" display

A file by the same capture file name already exists, overwrite?[confirm]

0.000000 10.1.1.9 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.10 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.11 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.12 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.13 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.14 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.15 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.16 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.17 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.18 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.19 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.20 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.21 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.22 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.23 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.24 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.25 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.26 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.27 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.28 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.29 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.30 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

Switch# monitor capture mycap start capture-filter "udp.port == 20001" display display-filter "udp.port == 20002"

%Display-filter cannot be specified when capture is associated to a file. Ignoring display filter%

A file by the same capture file name already exists, overwrite?[confirm]

0.000000 10.1.1.96 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.97 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.98 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.99 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.100 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.101 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.102 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.103 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.104 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.105 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.106 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.107 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.108 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0.000000 10.1.1.109 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

Switch#

Switch# monitor capture mycap start capture-filter "udp.port == 20001" display display-filter "udp.port == 20002" detailed

%Display-filter cannot be specified when capture is associated to a file. Ignoring display filter%

A file by the same capture file name already exists, overwrite?[confirm]

Frame 1: 256 bytes on wire (2048 bits), 256 bytes captured (2048 bits)

Arrival Time: Dec 31, 1969 17:00:00.000000000 PDT

Epoch Time: 0.000000000 seconds

[Time delta from previous captured frame: 0.000000000 seconds]

[Time delta from previous displayed frame: 0.000000000 seconds]

[Time since reference or first frame: 0.000000000 seconds]

Frame Number: 1

Frame Length: 256 bytes (2048 bits)

Capture Length: 256 bytes (2048 bits)

[Frame is marked: False]

[Frame is ignored: False]

[Protocols in frame: eth:ip:udp:data]

Ethernet II, Src: 00:00:00:00:03:01 (00:00:00:00:03:01), Dst: 54:75:d0:3a:85:3f (54:75:d0:3a:85:3f)

Destination: 54:75:d0:3a:85:3f (54:75:d0:3a:85:3f)

Address: 54:75:d0:3a:85:3f (54:75:d0:3a:85:3f)

.... ...0 .... .... .... .... = IG bit: Individual address (unicast)

.... ..0. .... .... .... .... = LG bit: Globally unique address (factory default)

Source: 00:00:00:00:03:01 (00:00:00:00:03:01)

Address: 00:00:00:00:03:01 (00:00:00:00:03:01)

.... ...0 .... .... .... .... = IG bit: Individual address (unicast)

.... ..0. .... .... .... .... = LG bit: Globally unique address (factory default)

Switch# monitor capture mycap start capture-filter "udp.port == 20001" display dump

A file by the same capture file name already exists, overwrite?[confirm]

0.000000 10.1.1.6 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0000 54 75 d0 3a 85 3f 00 00 00 00 03 01 08 00 45 00 Tu.:.?........E.

0010 00 ee 00 00 00 00 40 11 59 f6 0a 01 01 06 14 01 ......@.Y.......

0020 01 02 4e 21 4e 22 00 da 6e b1 00 01 02 03 04 05 ..N!N"..n.......

0030 06 07 08 09 0a 0b 0c 0d 0e 0f 10 11 12 13 14 15 ................

0040 16 17 18 19 1a 1b 1c 1d 1e 1f 20 21 22 23 24 25 .......... !"#$%

0050 26 27 28 29 2a 2b 2c 2d 2e 2f 30 31 32 33 34 35 &'()*+,-./012345

0060 36 37 38 39 3a 3b 3c 3d 3e 3f 40 41 42 43 44 45 6789:;<=>?@ABCDE

0070 46 47 48 49 4a 4b 4c 4d 4e 4f 50 51 52 53 54 55 FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU

0080 56 57 58 59 5a 5b 5c 5d 5e 5f 60 61 62 63 64 65 VWXYZ[\]^_`abcde

0090 66 67 68 69 6a 6b 6c 6d 6e 6f 70 71 72 73 74 75 fghijklmnopqrstu

00a0 76 77 78 79 7a 7b 7c 7d 7e 7f 80 81 82 83 84 85 vwxyz{|}~.......

00b0 86 87 88 89 8a 8b 8c 8d 8e 8f 90 91 92 93 94 95 ................

00c0 96 97 98 99 9a 9b 9c 9d 9e 9f a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 ................

00d0 a6 a7 a8 a9 aa ab ac ad ae af b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 ................

00e0 b6 b7 b8 b9 ba bb bc bd be bf c0 c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 ................

00f0 c6 c7 c8 c9 ca cb cc cd ce cf d0 d1 ac 69 6e fd .............in.

0.000000 10.1.1.7 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

Switch#

Switch# monitor capture mycap start display display-filter "udp.port == 20002"

%Display-filter cannot be specified when capture is associated to a file. Ignoring display filter%

A file by the same capture file name already exists, overwrite?[confirm]

0.000000 10.1.1.41 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

1.000000 10.1.1.42 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

2.000000 10.1.1.43 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

3.000000 10.1.1.44 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

4.000000 10.1.1.45 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

5.000000 10.1.1.46 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

5.998993 10.1.1.47 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

6.998993 10.1.1.48 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

7.998993 10.1.1.49 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

8.998993 10.1.1.50 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

9.998993 10.1.1.51 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

10.998993 10.1.1.52 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

Switch#

Switch# monitor capture mycap start display display-filter "udp.port == 20002" dump

%Display-filter cannot be specified when capture is associated to a file. Ignoring display filter%

A file by the same capture file name already exists, overwrite?[confirm]

0.000000 10.1.1.117 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0000 54 75 d0 3a 85 3f 00 00 00 00 03 01 08 00 45 00 Tu.:.?........E.

0010 00 ee 00 00 00 00 40 11 59 87 0a 01 01 75 14 01 ......@.Y....u..

0020 01 02 4e 21 4e 22 00 da 6e 42 00 01 02 03 04 05 ..N!N"..nB......

0030 06 07 08 09 0a 0b 0c 0d 0e 0f 10 11 12 13 14 15 ................

0040 16 17 18 19 1a 1b 1c 1d 1e 1f 20 21 22 23 24 25 .......... !"#$%

0050 26 27 28 29 2a 2b 2c 2d 2e 2f 30 31 32 33 34 35 &'()*+,-./012345

0060 36 37 38 39 3a 3b 3c 3d 3e 3f 40 41 42 43 44 45 6789:;<=>?@ABCDE

0070 46 47 48 49 4a 4b 4c 4d 4e 4f 50 51 52 53 54 55 FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU

0080 56 57 58 59 5a 5b 5c 5d 5e 5f 60 61 62 63 64 65 VWXYZ[\]^_`abcde

0090 66 67 68 69 6a 6b 6c 6d 6e 6f 70 71 72 73 74 75 fghijklmnopqrstu

00a0 76 77 78 79 7a 7b 7c 7d 7e 7f 80 81 82 83 84 85 vwxyz{|}~.......

00b0 86 87 88 89 8a 8b 8c 8d 8e 8f 90 91 92 93 94 95 ................

00c0 96 97 98 99 9a 9b 9c 9d 9e 9f a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 ................

00d0 a6 a7 a8 a9 aa ab ac ad ae af b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 ................

00e0 b6 b7 b8 b9 ba bb bc bd be bf c0 c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 ................

00f0 c6 c7 c8 c9 ca cb cc cd ce cf d0 d1 41 0c b4 5d ............A..]

1.000000 10.1.1.118 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

Switch# no monitor capture mycap file

Switch# monitor capture mycap start display display-filter "udp.port == 20002" dump

0.000000 10.1.1.160 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

0000 54 75 d0 3a 85 3f 00 00 00 00 03 01 08 00 45 00 Tu.:.?........E.

0010 00 ee 00 00 00 00 40 11 59 5c 0a 01 01 a0 14 01 ......@.Y\......

0020 01 02 4e 21 4e 22 00 da 6e 17 00 01 02 03 04 05 ..N!N"..n.......

0030 06 07 08 09 0a 0b 0c 0d 0e 0f 10 11 12 13 14 15 ................

0040 16 17 18 19 1a 1b 1c 1d 1e 1f 20 21 22 23 24 25 .......... !"#$%

0050 26 27 28 29 2a 2b 2c 2d 2e 2f 30 31 32 33 34 35 &'()*+,-./012345

0060 36 37 38 39 3a 3b 3c 3d 3e 3f 40 41 42 43 44 45 6789:;<=>?@ABCDE

0070 46 47 48 49 4a 4b 4c 4d 4e 4f 50 51 52 53 54 55 FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU

0080 56 57 58 59 5a 5b 5c 5d 5e 5f 60 61 62 63 64 65 VWXYZ[\]^_`abcde

0090 66 67 68 69 6a 6b 6c 6d 6e 6f 70 71 72 73 74 75 fghijklmnopqrstu

00a0 76 77 78 79 7a 7b 7c 7d 7e 7f 80 81 82 83 84 85 vwxyz{|}~.......

00b0 86 87 88 89 8a 8b 8c 8d 8e 8f 90 91 92 93 94 95 ................

00c0 96 97 98 99 9a 9b 9c 9d 9e 9f a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 ................

00d0 a6 a7 a8 a9 aa ab ac ad ae af b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 ................

00e0 b6 b7 b8 b9 ba bb bc bd be bf c0 c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 ................

00f0 c6 c7 c8 c9 ca cb cc cd ce cf d0 d1 9f 20 8a e5 ............. ..

1.000000 10.1.1.161 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

Switch# monitor capture mycap start display display-filter "udp.port == 20002"

0.000000 10.1.1.173 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

1.000000 10.1.1.174 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

2.000000 10.1.1.175 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

3.000000 10.1.1.176 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

4.000000 10.1.1.177 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

5.000000 10.1.1.178 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

6.000000 10.1.1.179 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

7.000000 10.1.1.180 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

8.000000 10.1.1.181 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

9.000000 10.1.1.182 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

10.000000 10.1.1.183 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

11.000000 10.1.1.184 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

12.000000 10.1.1.185 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

Switch# monitor capture mycap start display detailed

Frame 1: 256 bytes on wire (2048 bits), 256 bytes captured (2048 bits)

Arrival Time: Apr 12, 2012 11:46:54.245974000 PDT

Epoch Time: 1334256414.245974000 seconds

[Time delta from previous captured frame: 0.000000000 seconds]

[Time delta from previous displayed frame: 0.000000000 seconds]

[Time since reference or first frame: 0.000000000 seconds]

Frame Number: 1

Frame Length: 256 bytes (2048 bits)

Capture Length: 256 bytes (2048 bits)

[Frame is marked: False]

[Frame is ignored: False]

[Protocols in frame: eth:ip:udp:data]

Ethernet II, Src: 00:00:00:00:03:01 (00:00:00:00:03:01), Dst: 54:75:d0:3a:85:3f (54:75:d0:3a:85:3f)

Destination: 54:75:d0:3a:85:3f (54:75:d0:3a:85:3f)

Address: 54:75:d0:3a:85:3f (54:75:d0:3a:85:3f)

.... ...0 .... .... .... .... = IG bit: Individual address (unicast)

.... ..0. .... .... .... .... = LG bit: Globally unique address (factory default)

Source: 00:00:00:00:03:01 (00:00:00:00:03:01)

Address: 00:00:00:00:03:01 (00:00:00:00:03:01)

.... ...0 .... .... .... .... = IG bit: Individual address (unicast)

.... ..0. .... .... .... .... = LG bit: Globally unique address (factory default)

Switch#

monitor session

To enable the SPAN sessions on interfaces or VLANs, use the monitor session command. To remove one or more source or destination interfaces from a SPAN session, or a source VLAN from a SPAN session, use the no form of this command.

monitor session session {destination interface {FastEthernet interface-number | GigabitEthernet interface-number} [encapsulation {isl | dot1q}] [ingress [vlan vlan_id] [learning]]} | {remote vlan vlan_id} | {source { interface {FastEthernet interface-number | GigabitEthernet interface-number | Port-channel interface-number}} | [vlan vlan_id] |{remote vlan vlan_id} | {cpu [queue queue_id | acl { input {copy {rx} | error {rx} | forward {rx} | punt {rx} | rx} } | output {copy {rx} | error {rx} | forward {rx} | punt {rx} | rx} | all {rx} | control-packet {rx} | esmp {rx} | l2-forward { adj-same-if {rx} | bridge-cpu {rx} | ip-option {rx} | ipv6-scope-check-fail {rx} | l2-src-index-check-fail {rx} | mcast-rpf-fail {rx} | non-arpa {rx} | router-cpu {rx} | ttl-expired {rx} | ucast-rpf-fail {rx} | rx} | l3-forward { forward {rx} | glean {rx} | receive {rx} | rx} mtu-exceeded {rx} | unknown-port-vlan-mapping {rx} | unknown-sa {rx}]} [ , | - | rx | tx | both]} | {filter {ip access-group [name | id]}{vlan vlan_id [ , | - ]} | {packet-type {good | bad}} | {address-type {unicast | multicast | broadcast} [rx | tx | both]}

no monitor session session {destination interface {FastEthernet interface-number | GigabitEthernet interface-number} [encapsulation {isl | dot1q}] [ingress [vlan vlan_id] [learning]]} | {remote vlan vlan_id} | {source {cpu{both | queue | rx | tx} | interface {FastEthernet interface-number | GigabitEthernet interface-number | Port-channel interface-number}} | [vlan vlan_id] |{remote vlan vlan_id} | {cpu [queue queue_id | acl {input {copy {rx} | error {rx} | forward {rx} | punt {rx} | rx} } | output {copy {rx} | error {rx} | forward {rx} | punt {rx} | rx} | all {rx} | control-packet {rx} | esmp {rx} | l2-forward { adj-same-if {rx} | bridge-cpu {rx} | ip-option {rx} | ipv6-scope-check-fail {rx} | l2-src-index-check-fail {rx} | mcast-rpf-fail {rx} | non-arpa {rx} | router-cpu {rx} | ttl-expired {rx} | ucast-rpf-fail {rx} | rx} | l3-forward {forward {rx} | glean {rx} | receive {rx} | rx} mtu-exceeded {rx} | unknown-port-vlan-mapping {rx} | unknown-sa {rx}]} [ , | - | rx | tx | both]} | {filter {ip access-group [name | id]}{vlan vlan_id [ , | - ]} | {packet-type {good | bad}} | {address-type {unicast | multicast | broadcast} [rx | tx | both]}

Syntax Description

session

Number of a SPAN session; valid values are from 1 to 6.

destination

Specifies a SPAN destination.

interface

Specifies an interface.

FastEthernet interface-number

Specifies a Fast Ethernet module and port number; valid values are from 1 to 6.

GigabitEthernet interface-number

Specifies a Gigabit Ethernet module and port number; valid values are from 1 to 6.

encapsulation

(Optional) Specifies the encapsulation type of the destination port.

isl

(Optional) Specifies ISL encapsulation.

dot1q

(Optional) Specifies dot1q encapsulation.

ingress

(Optional) Indicates whether the ingress option is enabled.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

learning

(Optional) Enables host learning on ingress-enabled destination ports.

remote vlan vlan_id

Specifies an RSPAN source or destination session on a switch.

source

Specifies a SPAN source.

Port-channel interface-number

Specifies a port-channel interface; valid values are from 1 to 64.

cpu

Causes traffic received or sent from the CPU to be copied to the destination of the session.

queue queue_id

(Optional) Specifies that only traffic received on the specific CPU subqueue should be copied to the destination of the session. Valid values are from 1 to 64, or by the following names: all, control-packet, esmp, mtu-exceeded, unknown-port-vlan-mapping, unknown-sa, acl input, acl input copy, acl input error, acl input forward, acl input punt, acl output, acl output copy, acl output error, acl output forward, acl output punt, l2-forward, adj-same-if, bridge-cpu, ip-option, ipv6-scope-check-fail, l2-src-index-check-fail, mcast-rpf-fail, non-arpa, router-cpu, ttl-expired, ucast-rpf-fail, l3-forward, forward, glean, receive.

acl

(Optional) Specifies input and output ACLs; valid values are from 14 to 20.

input

Specifies input ACLs; valid values are from 14 to 16.

error

Specifies the ACL software errors.

log/copy

Specifies packets for ACL logging.

punt

Specifies packets punted due to overflows.

rx

Specifies monitoring received traffic only.

output

Specifies output ACLs; valid values are from 17 to 20.

l2-forward

(Optional) Layer 2 or Layer 3 exception packets.

bridge-cpu

Specifies packets bridged to CPU.

ip-option

Specifies packets with an IP option.

ipv6-scope-check-fail

Specifies IPv6 packets with scope-check failures.

l2-src-index-check-fail

Specifies IP packets with mismatched SRC MAC and SRC IP addresses.

mcast-rpf-fail

Specifies IPv4/IPv6 multicast RPF failures.

non-arpa

Specifies packets with non-ARPA encapsulation.

router-cpu

Specifies software routed packets.

ttl-expired

Specifies IPv4 routed pacekts exceed TTL.

adj-same-if

Specifies packets routed to the incoming interface.

bridged

Specifies Layer 2 bridged packets.

1

Specifies packets with the highest priority.

2

Specifies packets with the a high priority.

3

Specifies packets with the a medium priority.

4

Specifies packets with the a low priority.

ucast-rpf-fail

Specifies IPv4/IPv6 Unicast RPF failures.

all

(Optional) all queues.

l3-forward

(Optional) Layer 3 packets.

forward

Specifies special Layer 3 forwards tunnel encapsulation.

glean

Specifies special Layer 3 forwards glean.

receive

Specifies packets addressed to a port.

control-packet

(Optional) Layer 2 control packets.

esmp

(Optional) ESMP packets.

mtu-exceeded

(Optional) Output Layer 3 interface MTU exceeded.

routed

Specifies Layer 3 routed packets.

received

Specifies packets addressed to a port.

rpf-failure

Specifies Multicast RPF failed packets.

unknown-port-vlan-mapping

(Optional) Packets with missing port-VLAN mapping.

unknown-sa

(Optional) Packets with missing source-IP-addresses.

,

(Optional) Symbol to specify another range of SPAN VLANs; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

-

(Optional) Symbol to specify a range of SPAN VLANs.

both

(Optional) Monitors and filters received and transmitted traffic.

rx

(Optional) Monitors and filters received traffic only.

tx

(Optional) Monitors and filters transmitted traffic only.

filter

Limits SPAN source traffic to specific VLANs.

ip access-group

(Optional) Specifies an IP access group filter, either a name or a number.

name

(Optional) Specifies an IP access list name.

id

(Optional) Specifies an IP access list number. Valid values are 1 to 199 for an IP access list and 1300 to 2699 for an IP expanded access list.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN to be filtered. The number is entered as a single value or a range; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

packet-type

Limits SPAN source traffic to packets of a specified type.

good

Specifies a good packet type

bad

Specifies a bad packet type.

address-type unicast | multicast | broadcast

Limits SPAN source traffic to packets of a specified address type. Valid types are unicast, multicast, and broadcast.

Command Default

Received and transmitted traffic, as well as all VLANs, packet types, and address types are monitored on a trunking interface.

Packets are transmitted untagged out the destination port; ingress and learning are disabled.

All packets are permitted and forwarded “as is” on the destination port.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(11b)EW

Support for differing directions within a single-user session and extended VLAN addressing was added.

12.1(19)EW

Support for ingress packets, encapsulation specification, packet and address type filtering, and CPU source sniffing enhancements was added.

12.1(20)EW

Support for remote SPAN and host learning on ingress-enabled destination ports was added.

12.2(20)EW

Support for an IP access group filter was added.

12.2(40)SG

Support for Supervisor Engine 6-E and Catlyst 4900M chassis CPU queue options were added.

Usage Guidelines

Only one SPAN destination for a SPAN session is supported. If you attempt to add another destination interface to a session that already has a destination interface that is configured, you will get an error. You must first remove a SPAN destination interface before changing the SPAN destination to a different interface.

Beginning in Cisco IOS Release 12.1(12c)EW, you can configure sources from different directions within a single user session.

Note Beginning in Cisco IOS Release 12.1(12c)EW, SPAN is limited to two sessions containing ingress sources and four sessions containing egress sources. Bidirectional sources support both ingress and egress sources.

A particular SPAN session can either monitor VLANs or monitor individual interfaces: you cannot have a SPAN session that monitors both specific interfaces and specific VLANs. If you first configure a SPAN session with a source interface, and then try to add a source VLAN to the same SPAN session, you will receive an error. You will also receive an error message if you configure a SPAN session with a source VLAN, and then try to add a source interface to that session. You must first clear any sources for a SPAN session before switching to another type of source. CPU sources may be combined with source interfaces and source VLANs.

When configuring the ingress option on a destination port, you must specify an ingress VLAN if the configured encapsulation type is untagged (the default) or is 802.1Q. If the encapsulation type is ISL, then no ingress VLAN specification is necessary.

By default, when you enable ingress, no host learning is performed on destination ports. When you enter the learning keyword, host learning is performed on the destination port, and traffic to learned hosts is forwarded out the destination port.

If you enter the filter keyword on a monitored trunking interface, only traffic on the set of specified VLANs is monitored. Port-channel interfaces are displayed in the list of interface options if you have them configured. VLAN interfaces are not supported. However, you can span a particular VLAN by entering the monitor session session source vlan vlan-id command.

The packet-type filters are supported only in the Rx direction. You can specify both Rx- and Tx-type filters and multiple-type filters at the same time (for example, you can use good and unicast to only sniff nonerror unicast frames). As with VLAN filters, if you do not specify the type, the session will sniff all packet types.

The queue identifier allows sniffing for only traffic that is sent or received on the specified CPU queues. The queues may be identified either by number or by name. The queue names may contain multiple numbered queues for convenience.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure IP access group 100 on a SPAN session:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# monitor session 1 filter ip access-group 100

Switch(config)# end

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to add a source interface to a SPAN session:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# monitor session 1 source interface fa2/3

Switch(config)# end

Switch(config)#

Switch(config)#

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to configure the sources with different directions within a SPAN session:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# monitor session 1 source interface fa2/3 rx

Switch(config)# monitor session 1 source interface fa2/2 tx

Switch(config)# end

The following example shows how to remove a source interface from a SPAN session:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# no monitor session 1 source interface fa2/3

Switch(config)# end

The following example shows how to limit SPAN traffic to VLANs 100 through 304:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# monitor session 1 filter vlan 100 - 304

Switch(config)# end

The following example shows how to configure RSPAN VLAN 20 as the destination:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# monitor session 2 destination remote vlan 20

Switch(config)# end

The following example shows how to use queue names and queue number ranges for the CPU as a SPAN source on Supervisor Engine 6-E:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# monitor session 2 source cpu queue control-packet rx

Switch(config)# monitor session 3 source cpu queue 10 rx

Switch(config)# end

Note control-packet is mapped to queue 10.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show monitor

Displays information about the SPAN session.

mtu

To enable jumbo frames on an interface by adjusting the maximum size of a packet or maximum transmission unit (MTU), use the mtu command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

mtu bytes

no mtu

Syntax Description

bytes

Byte size; valid values are from 1500 to 9198.

Command Default

The default settings are as follows:

- Jumbo frames are disabled

- 1500 bytes for all ports

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

Usage Guidelines

Jumbo frames are supported on nonblocking Gigabit Ethernet ports, switch virtual interfaces (SVI), and EtherChannels. Jumbo frames are not available for stub-based ports.

The baby giants feature uses the global system mtu size command to set the global baby giant MTU. It allows all stub-based port interfaces to support an Ethernet payload size of up to 1552 bytes.

Both the system mtu command and the per-interface mtu command work on interfaces that can support jumbo frames, but the per-interface mtu command takes precedence.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify an MTU of 1800 bytes:

Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet 1/1

Switch(config-if)# mtu 1800

Related Commands

Command

Description

system mtu

Sets the maximum Layer 2 or Layer 3 payload size.

mvr (global configuration)

To enable the multicast VLAN registration (MVR) feature on the switch, use the mvr global configuration command without keywords. Use the command with keywords to set the MVR mode for a switch, to configure the MVR IP multicast address, to specify the MVR multicast VLAN, and to set the maximum wait time for a query reply before removing a port from group membership. Use the no form of this command to return to the default settings.

mvr [group ip-address [count] | mode [compatible | dynamic] | querytime value | vlan vlan-id]

no mvr [group ip-address | mode [compatible | dynamic] | querytime | vlan vlan-id]

Syntax Description

group ip-address

Statically configures an MVR group IP multicast address on the switch.

Use the no form of this command either to remove a statically configured IP multicast address or contiguous addresses, or when no IP address is entered, to remove all statically configured MVR IP multicast addresses.

count

(Optional) Configures multiple contiguous MVR group addresses. The range is 1 to 1500.

mode

(Optional) Specifies the MVR mode of operation.

The default is compatible mode.

compatible

Sets MVR mode to disallow dynamic membership joins on source ports.

dynamic

Sets MVR mode to allow dynamic MVR membership on source ports.

querytime value

(Optional) Sets the maximum time to wait for IGMP report memberships on a receiver port. This time applies only to receiver-port leave processing. When an IGMP query is sent from a receiver port, the switch waits for the default or configured MVR querytime for an IGMP group membership report before removing the port from multicast group membership.

The value is the response time in units of tenths of a second. The range is 1 to 100; the default is 5 tenths (one-half second).

Use the no form of the command to return to the default setting.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN on which MVR multicast data is to be received. This is also the VLAN to which all the source ports belong. The range is 1 to 4094. The default is VLAN 1.

Command Default

MVR is disabled by default.

The default MVR mode is compatible mode.

No IP multicast addresses are configured on the switch by default.

The default group ip address count is 0.

The default query response time is 5 tenths (one-half) second.

The default multicast VLAN for MVR is VLAN 1.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

Release IOS XE 3.9.1E

The maximum number of supported MVR groups was increased from 500 to 1500

Release IOS XE 3.5.0E and IOS 15.2(1)E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use the mvr group command to statically set all the IP multicast addresses to participate in MVR. Any multicast data sent to a configured multicast address is sent to all the source ports on the switch and to all receiver ports that have registered to receive data on that IP multicast address.

The maximum number of supported MVR groups is 1500.

A hardware entry occurs when there is an IGMP join on a port or when you configure a port to join a group with the mvr vlan group interface configuration command.

The mvr querytime command applies only to receiver ports.

When operating in compatible mode, MVR does not support IGMP dynamic joins on MVR source ports.

MVR can coexist with IGMP snooping on a switch.

MVR and multicast cannot co-exist on the same switch. If you try to enable MVR while multicast routing or a multicast routing protocol are enabled, your operation is cancelled and you receive an error message. If you enable multicast routing or a multicast routing protocol while MVR is enabled, MVR is disabled and you receive a warning message.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable MVR:

Switch(config)# mvr

The following example shows how to disable MVR:

Switch(config)# no mvr

Use the show mvr privileged EXEC command to display the current setting for maximum multicast groups.

The following example shows how to configure 228.1.23.4 as an IP multicast address:

Switch(config)# mvr group 228.1.23.4

The following example shows how to configure ten contiguous IP multicast groups with multicast addresses from 228.1.23.1 to 228.1.23.10:

Switch(config)# mvr group 228.1.23.1 10

The following example shows how to delete the previously configured ten IP multicast addresses:

Switch(config)# no mvr group 228.1.23.1 10

The following example shows how to delete all previously configured IP multicast addresses:

Switch(config)# no mvr group

Use the show mvr members privileged EXEC command to display the configured IP multicast group addresses.

The following example shows how to set the maximum query response time as 1 second (10 tenths):

Switch(config)# mvr querytime 10

The following example shows how to return the maximum query response time to the default setting of one-half second:

Switch(config)# no mvr querytime

The following example shows how to set VLAN 2 as the multicast VLAN:

Switch(config)# mvr vlan 2

You can verify your settings by entering the show mvr privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

mvr (interface configuration)

Configures MVR ports.

show mvr

Displays MVR global parameters or port parameters.

show mvr interface

Displays the configured MVR interfaces with their type, mode, VLAN, status and Immediate Leave configuration, and can also displays all MVR groups of which the interface is a member.

show mvr members

Displays all ports that are members of an MVR multicast group; if the group has no members, its status is shown as Inactive.

mvr (interface configuration)

Use the mvr interface configuration command to configure a Layer 2 port as a multicast VLAN registration (MVR) receiver or source port, to set the Immediate Leave feature, and to statically assign a port to an IP multicast VLAN and IP address. Use the no form of this command to return to the default settings.

mvr [immediate | type {receiver | source} | vlan vlan-id {[group ip-address][receiver vlan vlan-id]}}

no mvr [immediate | type {source | receiver}| vlan vlan-id {[group ip-address][receiver vlan vlan-id]}}

Syntax Description

immediate

(Optional) Enables the Immediate Leave feature of MVR on a port. Use the no mvr immediate command to disable the feature.

type

(Optional) Configures the port as an MVR receiver port or source port.

The default port type is neither source nor receiver. The no mvr type command resets the port as neither source or receiver.

receiver

Configures the port as a subscriber port that can only receive multicast data. Receiver ports cannot belong to the multicast VLAN.

source

Configures the port as an uplink port that can send and receive multicast data for the configured multicast groups. All source ports on a switch belong to a single multicast VLAN.

Note When you are configuring a trunk port as an MVR receiver port, we recommend that the source port is configured as a network node interface (NNI) and the MVR trunk receiver port is configured as a user node interface (UNI).

vlan vlan-id

Specifies the mvr VLAN for the system.

group ip-address

(Optional) Statically configures the specified MVR IP multicast group address for the specified multicast VLAN ID. This is the IP address of the multicast group that the port or VLAN is joining.

receiver vlan vlan-id

Specifies a receiver VLAN.

Command Default

A port is configured as neither receiver nor source.

The Immediate Leave feature is disabled on all ports.

No receiver port belongs to any configured multicast group.

Command Modes

Interface configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

Release IOS XE 3.5.0E and IOS 15.2(1)E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Configure a port as a source if it is intended to both send and receive multicast data bound for the configured multicast groups. Multicast data is received on all ports configured as source ports.

Receiver ports on a switch can be in different VLANs, but should not belong to the multicast VLAN.

A port that is not taking part in MVR should not be configured as an MVR receiver port or a source port.

When Immediate Leave is enabled, a receiver port leaves a multicast group more quickly. Without Immediate Leave, when the switch receives an IGMP leave message from a group on a receiver port, it sends out an IGMP MAC-based query on that port and waits for IGMP group membership reports. If no reports are received in a configured time period, the receiver port is removed from multicast group membership. With Immediate Leave, an IGMP MAC-based query is not sent from the receiver port on which the IGMP leave was received. Once the leave message is received, the receiver port is removed from multicast group membership, which expedites leave latency.

The Immediate Leave feature should be enabled only on receiver ports to which a single receiver device is connected.

The mvr vlan group command statically configures ports to receive multicast traffic sent to the IP multicast address. A port statically configured as a member of a group remains a member of the group until statically removed. In compatible mode, this command applies only to receiver ports; in dynamic mode, it can also apply to source ports. Receiver ports can also dynamically join multicast groups by using IGMP join messages.

When operating in compatible mode, MVR does not support IGMP dynamic joins on MVR source ports.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a port as an MVR receiver port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/0/1

Switch(config-if)# mvr type receiver

The following example shows how to configure a port as an MVR source port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# mvr type source

The following example shows how to remove a port as an MVR port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/0/1

Switch(config-if))# no mvr

The following example shows how to display configured receiver ports and source ports.

Switch# show mvr interface

Port Type Mode VLAN Status Immediate Leave

---- ---- ---- ---- ------- ---------------

Fa0/2 RECEIVER Trunk 1 ACTIVE/UP DISABLED

Fa0/4 RECEIVER Trunk 1 ACTIVE/UP DISABLED

Fa0/5 RECEIVER Trunk 1 ACTIVE/UP DISABLED

Fa0/5 RECEIVER Trunk 2 ACTIVE/UP DISABLED

Fa0/10 SOURCE Access 10 ACTIVE/UP DISABLED

Fa0/11 SOURCE Trunk 10 ACTIVE/UP ENABLED

Fa0/16 RECEIVER Trunk 2 ACTIVE/UP DISABLED

Fa0/18 RECEIVER Trunk 1 ACTIVE/UP ENABLED

Fa0/18 RECEIVER Trunk 2 ACTIVE/UP ENABLED

Fa0/21 SOURCE Access 10 ACTIVE/UP DISABLED

Fa0/24 RECEIVER Access 4 ACTIVE/DOWN DISABLED

Gi0/1 RECEIVER Trunk 1 ACTIVE/UP DISABLED

Gi0/1 RECEIVER Trunk 2 ACTIVE/UP DISABLED

Gi0/2 SOURCE Access 10 ACTIVE/UP DISABLED

The following example shows how to enable Immediate Leave on a port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/0/1

Switch(config-if)# mvr immediate

The following example shows how to disable Immediate Leave on a port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/0/1

Switch(config-if)# no mvr immediate

The following example shows how to add a port interface on VLAN 1 as a static member of IP multicast group 228.1.23.4:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# mvr vlan1 group 230.1.23.4

The following example shows how to add a port 5 on VLAN 100 as a static member of IP multicast group 239.1.1.1. In this example, the receiver port is a trunk port:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/5

Switch(config-if)# mvr vlan 100 group 239.1.1.1 receiver vlan 201

The following example shows how to remove this port from membership:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/0/1

Switch(config-if)# no mvr vlan5 group 228.1.23.4

The following example shows how to remove this port from all IP multicast groups:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/0/1

Switch(config-if)# no mvr vlan5 group

The following example shows the result if you try to add a port to a multicast group and the port is not a receiver port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/0/2

Switch(config-if)# mvr vlan 1 group 230.1.23.4

Interface Gi1/0/2 not configured as a receiver interface

The following example shows how to add on port 5 the receiver VLAN 201 with an MVR VLAN of 100.

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/5

Switch(config-if)# mvr vlan 100 receiver vlan 201

The following example shows how to add on port 5 the receiver VLAN 201 as a static member of the IP multicast group 239.1.1.1, with an MVR VLAN of 100:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet0/5

Switch(config-if)# mvr vlan 100 group 239.1.1.1 receiver vlan 201

You can verify your settings by entering the show mvr members privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

mvr (global configuration)

Enables and configures multicast VLAN registration on the switch.

show mvr

Displays MVR global parameters or port parameters.

show mvr interface

Displays the configured MVR interfaces or displays the multicast groups to which a receiver port belongs. Also displays all MVR groups of which the interface is a member.

show mvr members

Displays all receiver ports that are members of an MVR multicast group.

name

To set the MST region name, use the name command. To return to the default name, use the no form of this command.

name name

no name name

Syntax Description

name

Specifies the name of the MST region. The name can be any string with a maximum length of 32 characters.

Command Default

The MST region name is not set.

Command Modes

MST configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Two or more Catalyst 4500 series switches with the same VLAN mapping and configuration version number are considered to be in different MST regions if the region names are different.

Examples

The following example shows how to name a region:

Switch(config-mst)# name Cisco

Switch(config-mst)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

instance

Maps a VLAN or a set of VLANs to an MST instance.

revision

Sets the MST configuration revision number.

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST protocol information.

spanning-tree mst configuration

Enters the MST configuration submode.

netflow-lite exporter

Note NetFlow-lite is supported only on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To define an exporter and to enter NetFlow-lite exporter submode, use the netflow-lite exporter command. To delete an exporter, use the no form of this command.

netflow-lite exporter exporter

no netflow-lite exporter exporter

Syntax Description

exporter

Specifies an exporter.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The exporter's name identifies the exporter. Mandatory parameters for a minimal complete exporter configuration are the destination IP address of the collector, source IP address (on the switch) to use and UDP destination port of the collector. Any unspecified non-mandatory parameters take on default values.

The exporter name can be specified when activating sampling at a data source via the monitor command.

The exporter submode also allows you to specify the refresh frequency for the NetFlow templates. Metadata about the NetFlow packet sampling process like sampler configuration parameters and snmp interface table mapping can also be exported periodically to the collector.

Deleting or removing the value of a non-mandatory parameter restores the default.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure an NetFlow exporter:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# destination 5.5.5.6

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# source 5.5.5.5

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# transport udp 8188

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# ttl 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# cos 7

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# dscp 32

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# template data timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options sampler-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options interface-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# export-protocol netflow-v9 Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# exit

Switch(config)#

Display the exporter

Switch# show netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Netflow-lite Exporter exporter1:

Network Protocol Configuration:

Destination IP address: 5.5.5.6

Source IP Address: 5.5.5.5

VRF label:

DSCP: 0x20

TTL: 128

COS: 7

Transport Protocol Configuration:

Transport Protocol: UDP

Destination Port: 8188

Source Port: 61670

Export Protocol Configuration:

Export Protocol: netflow-v9

Template data timeout: 60

Options sampler-table timeout: 1800

Options interface-table timeout: 1800

Exporter Statistics:

Packets Exported: 0

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite exporter privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

export-protocol (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies the export protocol for the NetFlow-lite collector.

netflow-lite exporter

Defines an exporter and to enter NetFlow-lite exporter submode.

destination (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a destination address in netflow-lite submode.

source (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a source Layer 3 interface of the NetFlow-lite collector.

transport udp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector.

ttl (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a ttl value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

cos (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

dscp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

template data timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a template data timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

options timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies an options timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

netflow-lite monitor

Note NetFlow-lite is supported only on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To define a monitor instance on an interface and to enter netflow-lite monitor submode, use the netflow-lite monitor command. To delete the monitor, use the no form of this command.

netflow-lite monitor sampler-name

no netflow-lite sampler sampler-name

Syntax Description

sampler-name

Specifies a sample.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Only a single packet sampling instance is supported on a data source. These commands are entered under the physical port interface mode, port channel interface, or config VLAN mode. Monitor is not supported on other interfaces. If the physical port is a member of a port channel, applying the monitor to the port has no effect. You must apply the monitor to the port channel instead.

Note VLAN sampling is not supported in Cisco IOS Release 15.0(2)SG. It will be supported in a later release.

Mandatory parameters are sampler and exporter. If no exporter is associated with a monitor, no samples are exported. If so, no input packet sampling occurs for that target interface. A warning message displays indicating that the sampler or exporter is invalid if any mandatory parameters are missing.

The packet sampling mechanism tries to achieve random 1-in-N sampling. Internally 2 levels of sampling are done. The accuracy of the first level of sampling depends on the size of the packets arriving at a given interface. To tune the relative accuracy of the algorithm the average-packet-size parameter can be used.

The system automatically determines the average packet size at an interface based on observation of input traffic and uses that value in its first level of sampling.

Valid range of packet sizes that can be used by the algorithm is 64 - 9216 bytes. Any number below 64 bytes is taken to mean that automatic determination of average packet size is desired.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a monitor on a port interface Gigabit 1/3:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# int GigabitEthernet1/3

Switch(config-if)# netflow-lite monitor 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# sampler sampler1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# average-packet-size 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# exit

Switch(config-if)# exit

Switch(config)# exit

Switch# show netflow-lite monitor 1 interface gi1/3

Interface GigabitEthernet1/3:

Netflow-lite Monitor-1:

Active: TRUE

Sampler: sampler1

Exporter: exporter1

Average Packet Size: 0

Statistics:

Packets exported: 0

Packets observed: 0

Packets dropped: 0

Average Packet Size observed: 64

Average Packet Size used: 64

Similarly, you can configure a monitor on a VLAN in VLAN config mode:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# vlan config 2

Switch(config-vlan-config)# netflow-lite monitor 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# average-packet-size 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# sampler sampler1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# exit

Switch(config-vlan-config)# exit

Switch# show netflow-lite monitor 1 vlan 2

VlanID-2:

Netflow-lite Monitor-1:

Active: TRUE

Sampler: sampler1

Exporter: exporter1

Average Packet Size: 0

Statistics:

Packets exported: 0

Packets observed: 0

Packets dropped: 0

Average Packet Size observed: 64

Average Packet Size used: 64

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite sampler privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

sampler (netflow-lite monitor submode)

Activate sampling on an interface in netflow-lite monitor submode.

average-packet-size (netflow-lite monitor submode)

Specifies the average packet size at the observation point.

exporter (netflow-lite monitor submode)

Assigns an exporter in netflow-lite monitor submode.

netflow-lite sampler

Note NetFlow-lite is supported only on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To configure packet sampling parameters as a reusable named entity and to enter netflow-lite sampler submode, use the netflow-lite sampler command. To delete the sampler, use the no form of this command.

netflow-lite sampler name

no netflow-lite sampler name

Syntax Description

name

Specifies a sampler.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The sampler CLI construct allows the user to configure the rate at which input packets are to be sampled. Packet sampling rate can range from 32 to 2^15 in powers of 2. A sampling rate of 1 is allowed for troubleshooting for up to two 1 Gigabit ports only and is essentially equivalent to rx span. It cannot be configured on 10GE ports because the bandwidth demand on the fpga for export is too high.

Mandatory parameters are packet rate.

You can update a sampler in use at a target interface, but you cannot remove or unconfigure mandatory parameters.

All mandatory parameters must be present to validate a sampler. Any unspecified non-mandatory parameters take on default values.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure packet sampling parameters as a reusable named entity and to display the sampler:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# netflow-lite sampler sampler1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-sampler)# packet-rate 32

Switch(config-netflow-lite-sampler)# packet-section size 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-sampler)# packet-offset 16

Switch(config-netflow-lite-sampler)# exit

Switch(config)# exit

Switch#

Switch# show netflow-lite sampler sampler1

Netflow-lite Sampler sampler1:

Id : 1

Packet Sampling rate: 1 out of 32

Packet Section Size: 64 bytes

Packet offset: 16 bytes

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite exporter privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

packet-offset (netflow-lite sampler submode)

Specifies a starting packet offset in netflow-lite submode.

packet-rate (netflow-lite sampler submode)

Specifies a packet sampling rate in netflow-lite sampler submode.

packet-section size (netflow-lite sampler submode)

Specifies a sampled header size in netflow-lite submode.

nmsp

To configure Network Mobility Services Protocol (NMSP) on the switch, use the nmsp command. This command is available only when your switch is running the cryptographic (encrypted) software image. Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting.

nmsp {enable | {notification interval {attachment | location} interval-seconds}}

no nmsp {enable | {notification interval {attachment | location} interval-seconds}}

Syntax Description

enable

Enables the NMSP features on the switch.

notification interval

Specifies the NMSP notification interval.

attachment

Specifies the attachment notification interval.

location

Specifies the location notification interval.

interval-seconds

Duration in seconds before a switch sends the location or attachment updates to the MSE. The range is 1 to 30; the default is 30.

Command Default

NMSP is disabled, NMSP notification interval attachment and NMSP notification interval location defaults are 30 seconds.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use the nmsp global configuration command to enable the switch to send encrypted NMSP location and attachment notifications to a Cisco Mobility Services Engine (MSE).

Examples

The following example shows how to enable NMSP on a switch and set the location notification time to 10 seconds:

Switch(config)# nmsp enable

Switch(config)# nmsp notification interval location 10

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear nmsp statistics

Clears the NMSP statistic counters.

nmsp attachment suppress

Suppress reporting attachment information from a specified interface.

show nmsp

Displays the NMSP information.

nmsp attachment suppress

To suppress reporting attachment information from a specified interface, use the nmsp attachment suppress interface command. This command is available only when your switch is running the cryptographic (encrypted) software image. Use the no form of this command to report attachment information.

nmsp attachment suppress

no nmsp attachment suppress

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Attachment information is reported.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use the nmsp attachment suppress interface configuration command to configure an interface to not send attachment notifications to a Cisco Mobility Services Engine (MSE).

Examples

The following example shows how to configure an interface to not send attachment information to the MSE:

Switch(config)# switch interface gigabitethernet1/2

Switch(config-if)# nmsp attachment suppress

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

nmsp

Configures Network Mobility Services Protocol (NMSP) on the switch.

show nmsp

Displays the NMSP information.

object-group

To define object groups that you can use to optimize your configuration, use the object-group command in the global configuration mode. To remove object groups from the configuration use the no form of this command.

Note Object groups for ACLs is supported only on Catalyst 4500-X Series Switches, and Catalyst 4500-E Series Switches (with Supervisor Engines 7-E, 7L-E, and 8-E).

object-group {network | service} object-group-name

no object-group {network | service} object-group-name

Syntax Description

network

Defines network object groups for use in object-group-based ACLs. When you configure the object-group network command, the command mode changes to network group configuration mode.The following options are available in this mode:

A.B.C.D Network address of the group members

description Network object group description

execute Execute a shell function

exit Exit from object group configuration mode

group-object Nested object group

host Host address of the object-group member

no Negate or set default values of a command

service

Defines service object groups for use in object-group-based ACLs.

<0-255> An IP protocol number

ahp Authentication Header Protocol

description Service object group description

eigrp Cisco's EIGRP routing protocol

esp Encapsulation Security Payload

execute Execute a shell function

exit Exit from object-group configuration mode

gre Cisco's GRE tunneling

group-object Nested object group

icmp Internet Control Message Protocol

igmp Internet Gateway Message Protocol

ip Any Internet Protocol

ipinip IP in IP tunneling

no Negate or set default values of a command

nos KA9Q NOS compatible IP over IP tunneling

ospf OSPF routing protocol

pcp Payload Compression Protocol

pim Protocol Independent Multicast

tcp Transmission Control Protocol

tcp-udp TCP or UDP protocol

udp User Datagram Protocol

object-group-name

Name of the object group (of type service or network).

The object group name is a sequence of 1 to 64 characters consisting of letters, digits, underscores (_), dashes (-), or periods (.). The object-group-name must start with a letter.

Command Default

This command has no default settings

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

3.71E and 15.2(3)E1

This command was introduced.

3.72E and 15.2(3)E2

Enhancements were made to the no version of the command

Usage Guidelines

This command supports only IPv4 addresses.

Commands within the object group configuration mode appear indented when saved or displayed using the write memory or show running-config commands.

Commands within the group configuration mode (config-network-group or config-service-group) have the same command privilege level as the main command.

The command supports unlimited number of nested object groups; however, we recommend no more than two levels.

The type of child object group must match the type of the parent (for example, if you create a network object group, the child object group that you specify must be another network object group).

The switch ignores all empty object groups. When an ACE uses an empty object-group, that ACE is not expanded, as if there is no such ACE.

When you enter the no form of the command to delete an object group, the switch does one of the following:

- If the object group is being used somewhere, the switch removes all the entries of the object group, making this an empty object group.

- If the object group is not being used anywhere, the switch deletes it.

You cannot delete an object group that is being used within an ACL or CPL policy.

If an object group that you are trying to use in an ACE is not previously defined, the switch rejects the command. For example,

Switch(config)#ip access-list extend acl-1

Switch(config-ext-nacl)#permit ip object-group OG-1 any

OG-1 doesn’t exist, this line is rejected.

Specifics for network groups

http://www.cisco.com/c/en/us/td/docs/ios-xml/ios/security/m1/sec-m1-cr-book/sec-cr-m2.html#wp2754379810

Specifics for service groups

options timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is supported only on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To specify an options timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector, use the options timeout command. To delete the value, use the no form of this command.

options {sampler-table | interface-table} timeout seconds

no options {sampler-table | interface-table} timeout second

Syntax Description

sampler-table

Specifies timeout value for export of sampler configuration.

interface-table

Specifies timeout value for export of snmp ifIndex mapping.

seconds

Specifies a n options timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

Command Default

1800 seconds

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Default timeout value is 1800 seconds or 30 minutes. The timeout value configured really depends on the collector and how often it needs the templates to be refreshed.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify an options timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# destination 5.5.5.6

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# source 5.5.5.5

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# transport udp 8188

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# ttl 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# cos 7

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# dscp 32

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# template data timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options sampler-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options interface-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# export-protocol netflow-v9 Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# exit

Switch(config)#

Display the exporter

Switch# show netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Netflow-lite Exporter exporter1:

Network Protocol Configuration:

Destination IP address: 5.5.5.6

Source IP Address: 5.5.5.5

VRF label:

DSCP: 0x20

TTL: 128

COS: 7

Transport Protocol Configuration:

Transport Protocol: UDP

Destination Port: 8188

Source Port: 61670

Export Protocol Configuration:

Export Protocol: netflow-v9

Template data timeout: 60

Options sampler-table timeout: 1800

Options interface-table timeout: 1800

Exporter Statistics:

Packets Exported: 0

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite exporter privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

cos (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

source (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a source Layer 3 interface of the NetFlow-lite collector.

transport udp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector.

ttl (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a ttl value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

destination (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a destination address in netflow-lite submode.

template data timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a template data timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

export-protocol (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies the export protocol for the NetFlow-lite collector.

dscp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

packet-offset (netflow-lite sampler submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is supported only on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To specify a starting packet offset in netflow-lite submode, use the packet-offset command. To reset to the default, use the no form of this command.

packet-offset offset

no packet-offset offset

Syntax Description

offset

Specifies the starting packet offset in bytes (maximum of 48).

Command Default

starts at byte 0 of L2 header

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Default packet section offset value is 0. The packet section extracted from the sampled packet start at offset 0 of the packet.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify a starting packet offset:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# netflow-lite sampler sampler1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-sampler)# packet-rate 32

Switch(config-netflow-lite-sampler)# packet-section size 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-sampler)# packet-offset 16

Switch(config-netflow-lite-sampler)# exit

Switch(config)# exit

Switch# show netflow-lite sampler sampler1

Netflow-lite Sampler sampler1:

Id : 1

Packet Sampling rate: 1 out of 32

Packet Section Size: 64 bytes

Packet offset: 16 bytes

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite sampler privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands.

Command

Description

packet-section size (netflow-lite sampler submode)

Specifies a sampled header size in netflow-lite submode.

packet-rate (netflow-lite sampler submode)

Specifies a packet sampling rate in netflow-lite sampler submode

packet-rate (netflow-lite sampler submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is supported only on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To specify a packet sampling rate in netflow-lite sampler submode, use the packet rate command. To delete a packet sampling rate, use the no form of this command.

packet rate n

no packet rate n

Syntax Description

n

Specifies the packet sampling rate.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Packet sampling rate can range from 32 to 2^15 in powers of 2. A rate of 1 is allowed for trouble shooting (equivalent to rx span) only for two 1Gigabit Ethernet ports. You cannot configure a rate of 1 on 10 Gigabit Ethernet ports because the bandwidth demand for export is too high.

This is a mandatory parameter. Up to 2 x 1 Gigabit Ethernet ports can be configured with 1-in-1 sampling. The best packet sampling rate that can be configured on any 1 Gigabit or 10 Gigabit Ethernet port is 1-in-32. Packet sampling rates can be configured in powers of 2 (1-in-64, 1-in-128, etc).

Examples

The following example shows how to specify a packet sampling rate in netflow-lite sampler submode:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# netflow-lite sampler sampler1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-sampler)# packet-rate 32

Switch(config-netflow-lite-sampler)# packet-section size 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-sampler)# packet-offset 16

Switch(config-netflow-lite-sampler)# exit

Switch(config)# exit

Switch#

Switch# show netflow-lite sampler sampler1

Netflow-lite Sampler sampler1:

Id : 1

Packet Sampling rate: 1 out of 32

Packet Section Size: 64 bytes

Packet offset: 16 bytes

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite sampler privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

packet-section size (netflow-lite sampler submode)

Specifies a sampled header size in netflow-lite submode.

packet-offset (netflow-lite sampler submode)

Specifies a starting packet offset in netflow-lite submode.

packet-section size (netflow-lite sampler submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is supported only on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To specify a sampled header size in netflow-lite submode, use the packet-section size command. To store the default, use the no form of this command.

packet-section size bytes

no packet-section size bytes

Syntax Description

bytes

Specifies the sampled header size. Size ranges from 16 to 252 bytes in increments of 4 bytes.

Command Default

64 bytes

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Default packet section size is 64 bytes which normally would cover Layer 2, Layer 3, and Layer 4 headers for an input IPv4 packet.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify a sampled header size:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# netflow-lite sampler sampler1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-sampler)# packet-rate 32

Switch(config-netflow-lite-sampler)# packet-section size 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-sampler)# packet-offset 16

Switch(config-netflow-lite-sampler)# exit

Switch(config)# exit

Switch#

Switch# show netflow-lite sampler sampler1

Netflow-lite Sampler sampler1:

Id : 1

Packet Sampling rate: 1 out of 32

Packet Section Size: 64 bytes

Packet offset: 16 bytes

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite sampler privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

packet-rate (netflow-lite sampler submode)

Specifies a packet sampling rate in netflow-lite sampler submode.

packet-offset (netflow-lite sampler submode)

Specifies a starting packet offset in netflow-lite submode.

pagp learn-method

To learn the input interface of the incoming packets, use the pagp learn-method command. To return to the default value, use the no form of this command.

pagp learn-method {aggregation-port | physical-port}

no pagp learn-method

Syntax Description

aggregation-port

Specifies learning the address on the port channel.

physical-port

Specifies learning the address on the physical port within the bundle.

Command Default

Aggregation port is enabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable physical port address learning within the bundle:

Switch(config-if)# pagp learn-method physical-port

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to enable aggregation port address learning within the bundle:

Switch(config-if)# pagp learn-method aggregation-port

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show pagp

Displays information about the port channel.

pagp port-priority

To select a port in hot standby mode, use the pagp port-priority command. To return to the default value, use the no form of this command.

pagp port-priority priority

no pagp port-priority

Syntax Description

priority

Port priority number; valid values are from 1 to 255.

Command Default

Port priority is set to 128.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The higher the priority, the better the chances are that the port will be selected in the hot standby mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the port priority:

Switch(config-if)# pagp port-priority 45

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

pagp learn-method

Learns the input interface of the incoming packets.

show pagp

Displays information about the port channel.

passive-interface

To disable sending routing updates on an interface, use the passive-interface command. To reenable the sending of routing updates, use the no form of this command.

passive-interface [[default] {interface-type interface-number}] | {range interface-type interface-number-interface-type interface-number}

no passive-interface [[default] {interface-type interface-number}] | {range interface-type interface-number-interface-type interface-number}

Syntax Description

default

(Optional) All interfaces become passive.

interface-type

Specifies the interface type.

interface-number

Specifies the interface number.

range

Specifies the range of subinterfaces being configured; see the “Usage Guidelines” section.

Command Default

Routing updates are sent on the interface.

Command Modes

Router configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You can use the passive-interface range command on the following interfaces: FastEthernet, GigabitEthernet, VLAN, Loopback, Port-channel, 10-GigabitEthernet, and Tunnel. When you use the passive-interface range command on a VLAN interface, the interface should be the existing VLAN SVIs. To display the VLAN SVIs, enter the show running config command. The VLANs that are not displayed cannot be used in the passive-interface range command.

The values that are entered with the passive-interface range command are applied to all the existing VLAN SVIs.

Before you can use a macro, you must define a range using the define interface-range command.

All configuration changes that are made to a port range through the passive-interface range command are retained in the running-configuration as individual passive-interface commands.

You can enter the range in two ways:

- Specifying up to five interface ranges

- Specifying a previously defined macro

You can either specify the interfaces or the name of an interface-range macro. An interface range must consist of the same interface type, and the interfaces within a range cannot span across the modules.

You can define up to five interface ranges on a single command; separate each range with a comma:

interface range gigabitethernet 5/1-20, gigabitethernet4/5-20.

Use this format when entering the port-range:

- interface-type { mod }/{ first-port } - { last-port }

You cannot specify both a macro and an interface range in the same command. After creating a macro, you can enter additional ranges. If you have already entered an interface range, the CLI does not allow you to enter a macro.

You can specify a single interface in the range range value. This makes the command similar to the passive-interface interface-number command.

Note The range keyword is only supported in OSPF, EIGRP, RIP, and ISIS router mode.

If you disable the sending of routing updates on an interface, the particular subnet will continue to be advertised to other interfaces, and updates from other routers on that interface continue to be received and processed.

The default keyword sets all interfaces as passive by default. You can then configure individual interfaces where adjacencies are desired using the no passive-interface command. The default keyword is useful in Internet service provider (ISP) and large enterprise networks where many of the distribution routers have more than 200 interfaces.

For the Open Shortest Path First (OSPF) protocol, OSPF routing information is neither sent nor received through the specified router interface. The specified interface address appears as a stub network in the OSPF domain.

For the Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System (IS-IS) protocol, this command instructs IS-IS to advertise the IP addresses for the specified interface without actually running IS-IS on that interface. The no form of this command for IS-IS disables advertising IP addresses for the specified address.

Note For IS-IS you must keep at least one active interface and configure the interface with the ip router isis command.

Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP) is disabled on an interface that is configured as passive although it advertises the route.

Examples

The following example sends EIGRP updates to all interfaces on network 10.108.0.0 except GigabitEthernet interface 1/1:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1

Switch(config-if)# router eigrp 109

Switch(config-router)# network 10.108.0.0

Switch(config-router)# passive-interface gigabitethernet 1/1

Switch(config-router)#

The following configuration enables IS-IS on Ethernet interface 1 and serial interface 0 and advertises the IP addresses of Ethernet interface 0 in its link-state protocol data units (PDUs):

Switch(config-if)# router isis Finance

Switch(config-router)# passive-interface Ethernet 0

Switch(config-router)# interface Ethernet 1

Switch(config-router)# ip router isis Finance

Switch(config-router)# interface serial 0

Switch(config-router)# ip router isis Finance

Switch(config-router)#

The following example sets all interfaces as passive, then activates Ethernet interface 0:

Switch(config-if)# router ospf 100

Switch(config-router)# passive-interface default

Switch(config-router)# no passive-interface ethernet0

Switch(config-router)# network 10.108.0.1 0.0.0.255 area 0

Switch(config-router)#

The following configuration sets the Ethernet ports 3 through 4 on module 0 and GigabitEthernet ports 4 through 7 on module 1 as passive:

Switch(config-if)# router ospf 100

Switch(config-router)# passive-interface range ethernet0/3-4,gigabitethernet1/4-7

Switch(config-router)#

permit

To permit an ARP packet based on matches against the DHCP bindings, use the permit command. To remove a specified ACE from an access list, use the no form of this command.

permit {[request] ip {any | host sender-ip | sender-ip sender-ip-mask} mac {any | host sender-mac | sender-mac sender-mac-mask} | response ip {any | host sender-ip | sender-ip sender-ip-mask} [{any | host target-ip | target-ip target-ip-mask}] mac {any | host sender-mac | sender-mac sender-mac-mask} [{any | host target-mac | target-mac target-mac-mask}]} [log]

no permit {[request] ip {any | host sender-ip | sender-ip sender-ip-mask} mac {any | host sender-mac | sender-mac sender-mac-mask} | response ip {any | host sender-ip | sender-ip sender-ip-mask} [{any | host target-ip | target-ip target-ip-mask}] mac {any | host sender-mac | sender-mac sender-mac-mask} [{any | host target-mac | target-mac target-mac-mask}]} [log]

Syntax Description

request

(Optional) Requests a match for the ARP request. When request is not specified, matching is performed against all ARP packets.

ip

Specifies the sender IP address.

any

Specifies that any IP or MAC address will be accepted.

host sender-ip

Specifies that only a specific sender IP address will be accepted.

sender-ip sender-ip-mask

Specifies that a specific range of sender IP addresses will be accepted.

mac

Specifies the sender MAC address.

host sender-mac

Specifies that only a specific sender MAC address will be accepted.

sender-mac sender-mac-mask

Specifies that a specific range of sender MAC addresses will be accepted.

response

Specifies a match for the ARP responses.

ip

Specifies the IP address values for the ARP responses.

host target-ip

(Optional) Specifies that only a specific target IP address will be accepted.

target-ip target-ip-mask

(Optional) Specifies that a specific range of target IP addresses will be accepted.

mac

Specifies the MAC address values for the ARP responses.

host target-mac

(Optional) Specifies that only a specific target MAC address will be accepted.

target-mac target-mac-mask

(Optional) Specifies that a specific range of target MAC addresses will be accepted.

log

(Optional) Logs a packet when it matches the access control entry (ACE).

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

arp-nacl configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Permit clauses can be added to forward or drop ARP packets based on some matching criteria.

Examples

The following example shows a host with a MAC address of 0000.0000.abcd and an IP address of 1.1.1.1. The following example shows how to permit both requests and responses from this host:

Switch(config)# arp access-list static-hosts

Switch(config-arp-nacl)# permit ip host 1.1.1.1 mac host 0000.0000.abcd

Switch(config-arp-nacl)# end

Switch# show arp access-list

ARP access list static-hosts

permit ip host 1.1.1.1 mac host 0000.0000.abcd

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

arp access-list

Defines an ARP access list or adds clauses at the end of a predefined list.

deny

Denies an ARP packet based on matches against the DHCP bindings.

ip arp inspection filter vlan

Permits ARPs from hosts that are configured for static IP when DAI is enabled and to define an ARP access list and applies it to a VLAN.

police

To configure the Traffic Policing feature, use the police QoS policy-map class configuration command. To remove the Traffic Policing feature from the configuration, use the no form of this command.

police {bps | kbps | mbps |gbps} [burst-normal] [burst-max] conform-action action exceed-action action [violate-action action]

no police {bps | kbps | mbps |gbps} [burst-normal] [burst-max] conform-action action exceed-action action [violate-action action]

Syntax Description

bps

Average rate, in bits per second. Valid values are 32,000 to 32,000,000,000.

kbps

Average rate, in kilobytes per second. Valid values are 32 to 32,000,000.

mbps

Average rate, in megabits per second. Valid values are 1 to 32,000.

gbps

Average rate, in gigabits per second. Valid values are 1 to 32.

burst-normal

(Optional) Normal burst size, in bytes. Valid values are 64 to 2,596,929,536. Burst value of up to four times the configured rate can be supported.

burst-max

(Optional) Excess burst size, in bytes. Valid values are 64 to 2,596,929,536. Burst value of upto four times the configured rate can be supported.

conform-action

Action to take on packets that conform to the rate limit.

exceed-action

Action to take on packets that exceed the rate limit.

violate-action

(Optional) Action to take on packets that violate the normal and maximum burst sizes.

action

Action to take on packets. Specify one of the following keywords:

- drop —Drops the packet.

- set-cos-transmit new-ios—Sets the class of services (CoS) value to a new value and send the packet. The range is 0 to 7.

- set-dscp-transmit value — Sets the IP differentiated services code point (DSCP) value and transmits the packet with the new IP DSCP value setting.

- set-prec-transmit value —Sets the IP precedence and transmits the packet with the new IP precedence value setting.

- transmit —Transmits the packet. The packet is not altered.

Command Default

This command is disabled by default.

Command Modes

Policy-map class configuration mode (when specifying a single action to be applied to a market packet)

Policy-map class police configuration mode (when specifying multiple actions to be applied to a marked packet)

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on Catalyst 4900M and Supervisor Engine 6E.

Usage Guidelines

Use the police command to mark a packet with different quality of service (QoS) values based on conformance to the service-level agreement.

Traffic policing will not be executed for traffic that passes through an interface.

Specifying Multiple Actions

The police command allows you to specify multiple policing actions. When specifying multiple policing actions when configuring the police command, note the following points:

- You can specify a maximum of four actions at one time.

- You cannot specify contradictory actions such as conform-action transmit and conform-action drop .

Using the Police Command with the Traffic Policing Feature

The police command can be used with Traffic Policing feature. The Traffic Policing feature works with a token bucket algorithm. Two types of token bucket algorithms are a single-token bucket algorithm and a two-token bucket algorithm. A single-token bucket system is used when the violate-action option is not specified, and a two-token bucket system is used when the violate-action option is specified.

Token Bucket Algorithm with One Token Bucket

The one token bucket algorithm is used when the violate-action option is not specified in the police command of the command-line interface (CLI).

The conform bucket is initially set to the full size (the full size is the number of bytes specified as the normal burst size).

When a packet of a given size (for example, “B” bytes) arrives at specific time (time “T”) the following actions occur:

- Tokens are updated in the conform bucket. If the previous arrival of the packet was at T1 and the current time is T, the bucket is updated with (T - T1) worth of bits based on the token arrival rate. The token arrival rate is calculated as follows:

(time between packets <which is equal to T - T1> * policer rate)/8 bytes

- If the number of bytes in the conform bucket B is greater than or equal to 0, the packet conforms and the conform action is taken on the packet. If the packet conforms, B bytes are removed from the conform bucket and the conform action is completed for the packet.

- If the number of bytes in the conform bucket B (minus the packet size to be limited) is fewer than 0, the exceed action is taken.

Token Bucket Algorithm with Two Token Buckets (Refer to RFC 2697)

The two-token bucket algorithm is used when the violate-action is specified in the police command CLI.

The conform bucket is initially full (the full size is the number of bytes specified as the normal burst size).

The exceed bucket is initially full (the full exceed bucket size is the number of bytes specified in the maximum burst size).

The tokens for both the conform and exceed token buckets are updated based on the token arrival rate, or committed information rate (CIR).

When a packet of given size (for example, “B” bytes) arrives at specific time (time “T”) the following actions occur:

- Tokens are updated in the conform bucket. If the previous arrival of the packet was at T1 and the current arrival of the packet is at t, the bucket is updated with T -T1 worth of bits based on the token arrival rate. The refill tokens are placed in the conform bucket. If the tokens overflow the conform bucket, the overflow tokens are placed in the exceed bucket.

The token arrival rate is calculated as follows:

(time between packets <which is equal to T-T1> * policer rate)/8 bytes

- If the number of bytes in the conform bucket - B is greater than or equal to 0, the packet conforms and the conform action is taken on the packet. If the packet conforms, B bytes are removed from the conform bucket and the conform action is taken. The exceed bucket is unaffected in this scenario.

- If the number of bytes in the conform bucket B is less than 0, the excess token bucket is checked for bytes by the packet. If the number of bytes in the exceed bucket B is greater than or equal to 0, the exceed action is taken and B bytes are removed from the exceed token bucket. No bytes are removed from the conform bucket.

- If the number bytes in the exceed bucket B is fewer than 0, the packet violates the rate and the violate action is taken. The action is complete for the packet.

Examples

Token Bucket Algorithm with One Token Bucket

The following example shows how to define a traffic class (using the class-map command) and associate the match criteria from the traffic class with the Traffic Policing configuration, which is configured in the service policy (using the policy-map command). The service-policy command is then used to attach this service policy to the interface.

In this particular example, Traffic Policing is configured with the average rate at 8000 bits per second and the normal burst size at 1000 bytes for all packets leaving Gigabit Ethernet interface 6/1:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# class-map access-match

Switch(config-cmap)# match access-group 1

Switch(config-cmap)# exit

Switch(config)# policy-map police-setting

Switch(config-pmap)# class access-match

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 8000 1000 conform-action transmit exceed-action drop

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# exit

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 6/1

Switch(config-if)# service-policy output police-setting

Switch(config-if)# end

In this example, the initial token buckets starts full at 1000 bytes. If a 450-byte packet arrives, the packet conforms because enough bytes are available in the conform token bucket. The conform action (send) is taken by the packet and 450 bytes are removed from the conform token bucket (leaving 550 bytes).

If the next packet arrives 0.25 seconds later, 250 bytes are added to the token bucket ((0.25 * 8000)/8), leaving 800 bytes in the token bucket. If the next packet is 900 bytes, the packet exceeds and the exceed action (drop) is taken. No bytes are taken from the token bucket.

Token Bucket Algorithm with Two Token Buckets Example (Refer to RFC 2697)

In this particular example, Traffic Policing is configured with the average rate at 8000 bits per second, the normal burst size at 1000 bytes, and the excess burst size at 1000 bytes for all packets leaving Gigabit Ethernet interface 6/1.

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# class-map access-match

Switch(config-cmap)# match access-group 1

Switch(config-cmap)# exit

Switch(config)# policy-map police-setting

Switch(config-pmap)# class access-match

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 8000 1000 1000 conform-action transmit exceed-action set-qos-transmit 1 violate-action drop

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# exit

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 6/1

Switch(config-if)# service-policy output police-setting

Switch(config-if)# end

In this example, the initial token buckets starts full at 1000 bytes. If a 450-byte packet arrives, the packet conforms because enough bytes are available in the conform token bucket. The conform action (send) is taken by the packet and 450 bytes are removed from the conform token bucket (leaving 550 bytes).

If the next packet arrives 0.25 seconds later, 250 bytes are added to the conform token bucket ((0.25 * 8000)/8), leaving 800 bytes in the conform token bucket. If the next packet is 900 bytes, the packet does not conform because only 800 bytes are available in the conform token bucket.

The exceed token bucket, which starts full at 1000 bytes (as specified by the excess burst size) is then checked for available bytes. Because enough bytes are available in the exceed token bucket, the exceed action (set the QoS transmit value of 1) is taken and 900 bytes are taken from the exceed bucket (leaving 100 bytes in the exceed token bucket.

If the next packet arrives 0.40 seconds later, 400 bytes are added to the token buckets ((.40 * 8000)/8). Therefore, the conform token bucket now has 1000 bytes (the maximum number of tokens available in the conform bucket) and 200 bytes overflow the conform token bucket (because it only 200 bytes were needed to fill the conform token bucket to capacity). These overflow bytes are placed in the exceed token bucket, giving the exceed token bucket 300 bytes.

If the arriving packet is 1000 bytes, the packet conforms because enough bytes are available in the conform token bucket. The conform action (transmit) is taken by the packet and 1000 bytes are removed from the conform token bucket (leaving 0 bytes).

If the next packet arrives 0.20 seconds later, 200 bytes are added to the token bucket ((.20 * 8000)/8). Therefore, the conform bucket now has 200 bytes. If the arriving packet is 400 bytes, the packet does not conform because only 200 bytes are available in the conform bucket. Similarly, the packet does not exceed because only 300 bytes are available in the exceed bucket. Therefore, the packet violates and the violate action (drop) is taken.

Related Commands

Command

Description

police (percent)

Configures traffic policing on the basis of a percentage of bandwidth available on an interface.

police (two rates)

Configures traffic policing using two rates, the committed information rate (CIR) and the peak information rate (PIR).

policy-map

Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

service-policy (policy-map class)

Creates a service policy that is a quality of service (QoS) policy within a policy map.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

show policy-map interface

Displays the statistics and configurations of the input and output policies that are attached to an interface.

police (percent)

To configure traffic policing on the basis of a percentage of bandwidth available on an interface, use the police command in QoS policy-map class configuration mode. To remove traffic policing from the configuration, use the no form of this command.

police cir percent percent [bc conform-burst-in-msec] [pir percent percentage] [be peak-burst-inmsec]

no police cir percent percent [bc conform-burst-in-msec] [pir percent percentage] [be peak-burst-inmsec]

Syntax Description

cir

Committed information rate. Indicates that the CIR will be used for policing traffic.

percent

Specifies that a percentage of bandwidth will be used for calculating the CIR.

percent

Specifies the bandwidth percentage. Valid range is a number from 1 to 100.

bc

(Optional) Conform burst (bc) size used by the first token bucket for policing traffic.

conform-burst-in-msec

(Optional) Specifies the bc value in milliseconds. Valid range is a number from 1 to 2000.

pir

(Optional) Peak information rate (PIR). Indicates that the PIR will be used for policing traffic.

percent

(Optional) Specifies that a percentage of bandwidth will be used for calculating the PIR.

percent

(Optional) Specifies the bandwidth percentage. Valid range is a number from 1 to 100.

be

(Optional) Peak burst (be) size used by the second token bucket for policing traffic.

peak-burst-in-msec

(Optional) Specifies the be size in milliseconds. Valid range is a number from 1 to 2000.

action

Action to take on packets. Specify one of the following keywords:

- drop —Drops the packet.

- set-cos-transmit new-ios—Sets the class of services (CoS) value to a new value and send the packet. The range is 0 to 7.

- set-dscp-transmit value — Sets the IP differentiated services code point (DSCP) value and transmits the packet with the new IP DSCP value setting.

- set-prec-transmit value —Sets the IP precedence and transmits the packet with the new IP precedence value setting.

- transmit —Transmits the packet. The packet is not altered.

Command Default

This command is disabled by default.

Command Modes

Policy-map class configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on Catalyst 4900M and Supervisor Engine 6-E..

Usage Guidelines

This command calculates the CIR and PIR on the basis of a percentage of the maximum amount of bandwidth available on the interface. When a policy map is attached to the interface, the equivalent CIR and PIR values in bits per second (bps) are calculated on the basis of the interface bandwidth and the percent value entered with this command. The show policy-map interface command can then be used to verify the bps rate calculated.

The calculated CIR and PIR bps rates must be in the range of 32,000 and 32,000,000,000 bps. If the rates are outside this range, the associated policy map cannot be attached to the interface. If the interface bandwidth changes (for example, more is added), the bps values of the CIR and the PIR are recalculated on the basis of the revised amount of bandwidth. If the CIR and PIR percentages are changed after the policy map is attached to the interface, the bps values of the CIR and PIR are recalculated.

This command also allows you to specify the values for the conform burst size and the peak burst size in milliseconds. If you want bandwidth to be calculated as a percentage, the conform burst size and the peak burst size must be specified in milliseconds (ms).

Examples

The following example shows how to configure traffic policing using a CIR and a PIR based on a percentage of bandwidth on Gigabit interface 6/2. In this example, a CIR of 20 percent and a PIR of 40 percent have been specified. Additionally, an optional bc value and be value (300 ms and 400 ms, respectively) have been specified.

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# policy-map policy1

Switch(config-pmap)# class-map class1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police cir percent 20 bc 3 ms pir percent 40 be 4 ms

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap-c)# interface gigabitethernet 6/2

Switch(config-if)# service-policy output policy

Switch(config-if)# end

police rate

To configure single or dual rate policer, use the police rate command in policy-map configuration mode. To remove traffic policing from the configuration, use the no form of this command.

Syntax for Bytes Per Second

police rate units bps [burst burst-in-bytes bytes] [peak-rate peak-rate-in-bps bps] [pack-burst peak-burst-in-bytes bytes]

no police rate units bps [burst burst-in-bytes bytes] [peak-rate peak-rate-in-bps bps] [pack-burst peak-burst-in-bytes bytes]

Syntax for Percent

police rate percent percentage [burst ms ms] [peak-rate percent percentage] [pack-burst ms ms]

no police rate percent percentage [burst ms ms] [peak-rate percent percentage] [pack-burst ms ms]

Syntax Description

units

Specifies the traffic police rate in bits per second. Valid range is 32,000 to 32,000,000,000.

bps

(Optional) Bits per second (bps) will be used to determine the rate at which traffic is policed.

Note If a rate is not specified, traffic is policed via bps.

burst burst-in-bytes bytes

(Optional) Specifies the burst rate, in bytes, will be used for policing traffic. Valid range is from 64 to 2,596,929,536.

peak-rate peak-rate-in-bps bps

(Optional) Specifies the peak burst value, in bytes, for the peak rate. Valid range is from 32,000 to 32,000,000,000.

peak-burst peak-burst-in-bytes bytes

(Optional) Specifies the peak burst value, in bytes, will be used for policing traffic. If the police rate is specified in bps, the valid range of values is 64 to 2,596,929,536.

percent

(Optional) A percentage of interface bandwidth will be used to determine the rate at which traffic is policed.

percentage

(Optional) Bandwidth percentage. Valid range is a number from 1 to 100.

burst ms ms

(Optional) Burst rate, in milliseconds, will be used for policing traffic. Valid range is a number from 1 to 2,000.

peak-rate percent percentage

(Optional) A percentage of interface bandwidth will be used to determine the PIR. Valid range is a number from 1 to 100.

peak-burst ms ms

(Optional) Peak burst rate, in milliseconds, will be used for policing traffic. Valid range is a number from 1 to 2,000.

Command Default

This command is disabled by default.

Command Modes

Policy-map configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch using a Supervisor Engine 6-E.

Usage Guidelines

Use the police rate command to limit traffic on the basis of pps, bps, or a percentage of interface bandwidth.

If the police rate command is issued, but the a rate is not specified, traffic that is destined will be policed on the basis of bps.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure policing on a class to limit traffic to an average rate of 1,500,000 bps:

Switch(config)# class-map c1

Switch(config-cmap)# match access-group 140

Switch(config-cmap)# exit

Switch(config)# policy-map p1

Switch(config-pmap)# class c1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police rate 1500000 burst 500000

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Related Commands

Command

Description

policy-map

Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

police (two rates)

To configure traffic policing using two rates, the committed information rate (CIR) and the peak information rate (PIR), use the police command in policy-map configuration mode. To remove two-rate traffic policing from the configuration, use the no form of this command.

police cir cir [bc conform-burst] pir pir [be peak-burst] [conform-action action [exceed-action action [violate-action action]]]

no police cir cir [bc conform-burst] pir pir [be peak-burst] [conform-action action [exceed-action action [violate-action action]]]

Syntax Description

cir

Committed information rate (CIR) at which the first token bucket is updated.

cir

Specifies the CIR value in bits per second. The value is a number from 32,000 to 32,000,000,000.

bc

(Optional) Conform burst (bc) size used by the first token bucket for policing.

conform-burst

(Optional) Specifies the bc value in bytes. The value is a number from 64 to 2,596,929,536.

pir

Peak information rate (PIR) at which the second token bucket is updated.

pir

Specifies the PIR value in bits per second. The value is a number from 32,000 to 32,000,000,000.

be

(Optional) Peak burst (be) size used by the second token bucket for policing.

peak-burst

(Optional) Specifies the peak burst (be) size in bytes. The value is a number from 64 to 2,596,929,536.

conform-action

(Optional) Action to take on packets that conform to the CIR and PIR.

exceed-action

(Optional) Action to take on packets that conform to the PIR but not the CIR.

violate-action

(Optional) Action to take on packets exceed the PIR.

action

(Optional) Action to take on packets. Specify one of the following keywords:

- drop —Drops the packet.

- set-cos-transmit new-ios—Sets the class of services (CoS) value to a new value and send the packet. The range is 0 to 7.

- set-dscp-transmit new-dscp — Sets the IP differentiated services code point (DSCP) value and sends the packet with the new IP DSCP value setting.

- set-prec-transmit new-prec —Sets the IP precedence and sends the packet with the new IP precedence value setting.

- transmit —Sends the packet with no alteration.

Command Default

This command is disabled by default.

Command Modes

Policy-map configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch using a Supervisor Engine 6-E.

Usage Guidelines

Refer to RFC 2698-Two Rate Three Color Marker.

Two-rate traffic policing uses two token buckets—Tc and Tp—for policing traffic at two independent rates. Note the following points about the two token buckets:

- The Tc token bucket is updated at the CIR value each time a packet arrives at the two-rate policer. The Tc token bucket can contain up to the confirm burst (Bc) value.

- The Tp token bucket is updated at the PIR value each time a packet arrives at the two-rate policer. The Tp token bucket can contain up to the peak burst (Be) value.

Updating Token Buckets

The following scenario illustrates how the token buckets are updated:

A packet of B bytes arrives at time t. The last packet arrived at time t1. The CIR and the PIR token buckets at time t are represented by Tc(t) and Tp(t), respectively. Using these values and in this scenario, the token buckets are updated as follows:

Tc(t) = min(CIR * (t-t1) + Tc(t1), Bc)

Tp(t) = min(PIR * (t-t1) + Tp(t1), Be)

Marking Traffic

The two-rate policer marks packets as either conforming, exceeding, or violating a specified rate. The following points (using a packet of B bytes) illustrate how a packet is marked:

- If B > Tp(t), the packet is marked as violating the specified rate.

- If B > Tc(t), the packet is marked as exceeding the specified rate, and the Tp(t) token bucket is updated as Tp(t) = Tp(t) – B.

Otherwise, the packet is marked as conforming to the specified rate, and both token buckets—Tc(t) and Tp(t)—are updated as follows:

Tp(t) = Tp(t) – B

Tc(t) = Tc(t) – B

For example, if the CIR is 100 kbps, the PIR is 200 kbps, and a data stream with a rate of 250 kbps arrives at the two-rate policer, the packet would be marked as follows:

- 100 kbps would be marked as conforming to the rate.

- 100 kbps would be marked as exceeding the rate.

- 50 kbps would be marked as violating the rate.

Marking Packets and Assigning Actions Flowchart

The flowchart in Figure 2-1 illustrates how the two-rate policer marks packets and assigns a corresponding action (that is, violate, exceed, or conform) to the packet.

Figure 2-1 Marking Packets and Assigning Actions with the Two-Rate Policer

Examples

The following example shows how to configure two-rate traffic policing on a class to limit traffic to an average committed rate of 500 kbps and a peak rate of 1 Mbps:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# class-map police

Switch(config-cmap)# match access-group 101

Switch(config-cmap)# policy-map policy1

Switch(config-pmap)# class police

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police cir 500000 bc 10000 pir 1000000 be 10000 conform-action transmit exceed-action set-prec-transmit 2 violate-action drop

Switch(config-pmap-c)# interface gigabitethernet 6/1

Switch(config-if)# service-policy output policy1

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show policy-map policy1

Policy Map policy1

Class police

police cir 500000 conform-burst 10000 pir 1000000 peak-burst 10000 conform-action transmit exceed-action set-prec-transmit 2 violate-action drop

Switch#

Traffic marked as conforming to the average committed rate (500 kbps) will be sent as is. Traffic marked as exceeding 500 kbps, but not exceeding 1 Mbps, will be marked with IP Precedence 2 and then sent. All traffic marked as exceeding 1 Mbps will be dropped. The burst parameters are set to 10000 bytes.

In the following example, 1.25 Mbps of traffic is sent (“offered”) to a policer class:

Switch# show policy-map interface gigabitethernet 6/1

GigabitEthernet6/1

Service-policy output: policy1

Class-map: police (match all)

148803 packets, 36605538 bytes

30 second offered rate 1249000 bps, drop rate 249000 bps

Match: access-group 101

police:

cir 500000 bps, conform-burst 10000, pir 1000000, peak-burst 100000

conformed 59538 packets, 14646348 bytes; action: transmit

exceeded 59538 packets, 14646348 bytes; action: set-prec-transmit 2

violated 29731 packets, 7313826 bytes; action: drop

conformed 499000 bps, exceed 500000 bps violate 249000 bps

Class-map: class-default (match-any)

19 packets, 1990 bytes

30 seconds offered rate 0 bps, drop rate 0 bps

Match: any

Switch#

The two-rate policer marks 500 kbps of traffic as conforming, 500 kbps of traffic as exceeding, and 250 kbps of traffic as violating the specified rate. Packets marked as conforming to the rate will be sent as is, and packets marked as exceeding the rate will be marked with IP Precedence 2 and then sent. Packets marked as violating the rate are dropped.

policy-map

To create or modify a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode, use the policy-map global configuration command. To delete an existing policy map and to return to global configuration mode, use the no form of this command.

policy-map policy-map-name

no policy-map policy-map-name

Syntax Description

policy-map-name

Name of the policy map.

Command Default

No policy maps are defined.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(40)SG

Extended support to Supervisor Engine 6-E and the Catalyst 4900M chassis.

Usage Guidelines

Before configuring policies for classes whose match criteria are defined in a class map, use the policy-map command to specify the name of the policy map to be created or modified. After you enter the policy-map command, the switch enters policy-map configuration mode. You can configure or modify the class policies for that policy map and decide how to treat the classified traffic.

These configuration commands are available in policy-map configuration mode:

- class—D efines the classification match criteria for the specified class map. For more information, see the “class” section.

- description— Describes the policy map (up to 200 characters).

- exit— Exits policy-map configuration mode and returns you to global configuration mode.

- no— Removes a previously defined policy map.

To return to global configuration mode, use the exit command. To return to privileged EXEC mode, use the end command.

You can configure class policies in a policy map only if the classes have match criteria defined for them. To configure the match criteria for a class, use the class-map global configuration and match class-map configuration commands.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure multiple classes in a policy map called policymap2 on a Supervisor Engine 6-E:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# policy-map policymap2

Switch(config-pmap)# class class1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 100000 20000 exceed-action

Switch(config-pmap-c)# set-dscp-transmit cs3

Switch(config-pmap-c)# set-cos-transmit 3

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# class class2

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police cir 32000 pir 64000 conform-action transmit exceed-action

Switch(config-pmap-c)# set-dscp-transmit cs3 violate-action drop

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# class class3

Switch(config-pmap-c)# set dscp cs3

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch#

The following example shows how to delete the policy map called policymap2:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# no policy-map policymap2

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

class

Specifies the name of the class whose traffic policy you want to create or change.

class-map

Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name you specify and to enter class-map configuration mode.

policy-map

Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

service-policy (interface configuration)

Attaches a policy map to an interface or applies different QoS policies on VLANs that an interface belongs to.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

port-channel load-balance

To set the load-distribution method among the ports in the bundle, use the port-channel load-balance command. To reset the load distribution to the default, use the no form of this command.

port-channel load-balance method

no port-channel load-balance

Syntax Description

method

Specifies the load distribution method. See the “Usage Guidelines” section for more information.

Command Default

Load distribution on the source XOR destination IP address is enabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The following values are valid for the load-distribution method:

- dst-ip —Load distribution on the destination IP address

- dst-mac —Load distribution on the destination MAC address

- dst-port —Load distribution on the destination TCP/UDP port

- src-dst-ip —Load distribution on the source XOR destination IP address

- src-dst-mac —Load distribution on the source XOR destination MAC address

- src-dst-port —Load distribution on the source XOR destination TCP/UDP port

- src-ip —Load distribution on the source IP address

- src-mac —Load distribution on the source MAC address

- src-port —Load distribution on the source port

Examples

The following example shows how to set the load-distribution method to the destination IP address:

Switch(config)# port-channel load-balance dst-ip

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to set the load-distribution method to the source XOR destination IP address:

Switch(config)# port-channel load-balance src-dst-port

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

interface port-channel

Accesses or creates a port-channel interface.

show etherchannel

Displays EtherChannel information for a channel.

port-channel standalone-disable

To disable the EtherChannel standalone option in a port channel, use the port-channel standalone-disable command in interface configuration mode. To enable this option, use the no form of this command.

port-channel standalone-disable

no port-channel standalone-disable

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

The standalone option is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG1

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command can only be used when the port channel protocol type is Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP). It allows you to change the current behavior when a physical port cannot bundle with an LACP EtherChannel.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the EtherChannel standalone option in a port channel:

Switch(config-if)# no port-channel standalone-disable

Related Commands

Command

Description

show etherchannel

Displays EtherChannel information for a channel.

port-security mac-address

To configure a secure address on an interface for a specific VLAN or VLAN range, use the

port-security mac-address command.

port-security mac-address mac_address

Syntax Description

mac_address

The MAC-address that needs to be secured.

Command Modes

VLAN-range interface submode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)EWA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Layer 2 interfaces can be part of multiple VLANs (for example, a typical trunk port). In conjunction with the vlan command, you can use the port-security mac-address command to specify different addresses on different VLANs.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the secure address 1.1.1 on interface Gigabit Ethernet 1/1 for VLANs 2-3:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode trunk

Switch(config-if)# vlan 2-3

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# port-security mac-address 1.1.1

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

port-security mac-address sticky

Configures a sticky address on an interface for a specific VLAN or VLAN range.

port-security maximum

Configures the maximum number of addresses on an interface for a specific VLAN or VLAN range.

port-security mac-address sticky

To configure a sticky address on an interface for a specific VLAN or VLAN range, use the

port-security mac-address sticky command.

port-security mac-address sticky mac_address

Syntax Description

mac_address

The MAC-address that needs to be secured.

Command Modes

VLAN-range interface submode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)EWA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The Sticky feature must be enabled on an interface before you can configure the

port-security mac-address sticky command.

Usage Guidelines

Layer 2 interfaces can be part of multiple VLANs (for example, a typical trunk port). In conjunction with the vlan command, you can use the port-security mac-address sticky command to specify different sticky addresses on different VLANs.

The Sticky feature must be enabled on an interface before you can configure the

port-security mac-address sticky command.

Sticky MAC addresses are addresses that persist across switch reboots and link flaps.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the sticky address 1.1.1 on interface Gigabit Ethernet 1/1 for VLANs 2-3:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode trunk

Switch(config-if)# vlan 2-3

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# port-security mac-address sticky 1.1.1

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

port-security mac-address

Configures a secure address on an interface for a specific VLAN or VLAN range.

port-security maximum

Configures the maximum number of addresses on an interface for a specific VLAN or VLAN range.

port-security maximum

To configure the maximum number of addresses on an interface for a specific VLAN or VLAN range, use the port-security maximum command.

port-security maximum max_value

Syntax Description

max_value

The maximum number of MAC-addresses.

Command Modes

VLAN-range interface submode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)EWA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Layer 2 interfaces can be part of multiple VLANs (for example, a typical trunk port). In conjunction with the vlan command, you can use the port-security maximum command to specify the maximum number of secure addresses on different VLANs.

If a specific VLAN on a port is not configured with a maximum value, the maximum configured for the port is used for that VLAN. In this situation, the maximum number of addresses that can be secured on this VLAN is limited to the maximum value configured on the port.

Each VLAN can be configured with a maximum count that is greater than the value configured on the port. Also, the sum total of the maximum configured values for all the VLANs can exceed the maximum configured for the port. In either of these situations, the number of MAC addresses secured on each VLAN is limited to the lesser of the VLAN configuration maximum and the port configuration maximum.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a maximum number of addresses (5) on interface

Gigabit Ethernet 1/1 for VLANs 2-3:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface g1/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode trunk

Switch(config-if)# vlan 2-3

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# port-security maximum 5

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# exit

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

port-security mac-address

Configures a secure address on an interface for a specific VLAN or VLAN range.

port-security mac-address sticky

Configures a sticky address on an interface for a specific VLAN or VLAN range.

power dc input

To configure the power DC input parameters on the switch, use the power dc input command. To return to the default power settings, use the no form of this command.

power dc input watts

no power dc input

Syntax Description

watts

Sets the total capacity of the external DC source in watts; valid values are from 300 to 8500.

Command Default

DC power input is 2500 W.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(11)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(13)EW

Support for dc input was added.

Usage Guidelines

If your interface is not capable of supporting Power over Ethernet, you will receive this message:

Power over Ethernet not supported on interface Admin

Examples

The following example shows how to set the total capacity of the external DC power source to 5000 W:

Switch(config)# power dc input 5000

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show power

Displays information about the power status.

power efficient-ethernet auto

To enable EEE, use the power efficient-ethernet auto command. To disable EEE, use the no form of this command.

power efficient-ethernet auto

no power efficient-ethernet auto

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

EEE is disabled

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

Release IOS XE 3.4.0SG and IOS 15.1(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

EEE is supported on WS-X4748-UPOE+E and WS-X4748-RJ45-E.

EEE defines support for physical layer devices (PHYs) to operate in Low Power Idle (LPI) mode. When enabled, EEE supports QUIET times during low link utilization allowing both sides of a link to disable portions of each PHY's operating circuitry and save power. This functionality is provided per port and is not enabled by default. To avoid issues with EEE functionality on any port during run-time, Cisco provides the power efficient-ethernet auto command to enable or disable EEE.

Because EEE relies on Auto Negotiation pulse to determine whether to activate EEE, the port must initially enable auto negotiation. Furthermore, EEE is the correct action provided the speed is auto 100M, auto 1000M, or auto 100M and 1000M. 10M (either auto or forced mode) does not require EEE for power saving.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable EEE:

Switch# config t

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1

Switch(config-if)# power efficient-ethernet auto

Switch(config-if)# exit

power inline

To set the inline-power state for the inline-power-capable interfaces, use the power inline command. To return to the default values, use the no form of this command.

power inline {auto [max milliwatt] | never | static [max milliwatt] | consumption milliwatt}

no power inline

Syntax Description

auto

Sets the Power over Ethernet state to auto mode for inline-power-capable interfaces.

max milliwatt

(Optional) Sets the maximum power that the equipment can consume; valid range is from 2000 to 15400 mW for classic modules. For the WS-X4648-RJ45V-E, the maximum is 20000. For the WS-X4648-RJ45V+E, the maximum is 30000.

never

Disables both the detection and power for the inline-power capable interfaces.

static

Allocates power statically.

consumption milliwatt

Sets power allocation per interface; valid range is from 4000 to 15400 for classic modules. Any non-default value disables automatic adjustment of power allocation.

Command Default

The default settings are as follows:

- A uto mode for Power over Ethernet is set.

- Maximum mW mode is set to 15400. For the WS-X4648-RJ45V-E, the maximum mW is set to 20000. For the WS-X4648-RJ45V+E, the maximum mW is set to 30000.

- Default allocation is set to 15400.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(11)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(19)EW

Support added for static power allocation.

12.1(20)EW

Support added for Power over Ethernet.

12.2(44)SG

Maximum supported wattage increased beyond 15400 for the WS-X4648-RJ45V-E and the WS-X4648-RJ45V+E.

Usage Guidelines

If your interface is not capable of supporting Power over Ethernet, you will receive this message:

Power over Ethernet not supported on interface Admin

Examples

The following example shows how to set the inline-power detection and power for the inline-power-capable interfaces:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 4/1

Switch(config-if)# power inline auto

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to disable the inline-power detection and power for the inline-power-capable interfaces:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 4/1

Switch(config-if)# power inline never

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to set the permanent Power over Ethernet allocation to 8000 mW for Fast Ethernet interface 4/1 regardless what is mandated either by the 802.3af class of the discovered device or by any CDP packet that is received from the powered device:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 4/1

Switch(config-if)# power inline consumption 8000

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to pre-allocate Power over Ethernet to 16500 mW for Gigabit Ethernet interface 2/1 regardless of what is mandated either by the 802.3af class of the discovered device or by any CDP packet that is received from the powered device:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 2/1

Switch(config-if)# power inline static max 16500

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show power

Displays information about the power status.

power inline consumption

To set the default power that is allocated to an interface for all the inline-power-capable interfaces on the switch, use the power inline consumption command. To return to the default values, use the no form of this command.

power inline consumption default milliwatts

no power inline consumption default

Syntax Description

default

Specifies the switch to use the default allocation.

milliwatts

Sets the default power allocation in milliwatts; the valid range is from 4000 to 15399. Any non-default value disables automatic adjustment of power allocation.

Command Default

Milliwatt mode is set to 15400.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(11)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(20)EW

Support added for Power over Ethernet.

Usage Guidelines

The inline power consumption command overrides the power allocated to the port through IEEE/Cisco phone discovery and CDP/LLDP power negotiation. To guarantee safe operation of the system, ensure that the value configured here is no less than the actual power requirement of the attached device. If the power drawn by the inline powered devices exceeds the capability of the power supply, it could trip the power supply.

If your interface is not capable of supporting Power over Ethernet, you will receive this message:

Power over Ethernet not supported on interface Admin

Examples

The following example shows how to set the Power over Ethernet allocation to use 8000 mW, regardless of any CDP packet that is received from the powered device:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# power inline consumption default 8000

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

power inline

Sets the inline-power state for the inline-power-capable interfaces.

show power

Displays information about the power status.

power inline four-pair forced

Note This command is available only on Supervisor Engine 7-E, Supervoisor Engine 7L-E, and Supervisor Engine 8-E.

To automatically enable power on both signal and spare pairs from a switch port, provided the end-device is PoE capable on both signal and spare pairs but does not support the CDP or LLDP extensions required for UPOE, use the power inline four-pair forced command.

power inline four-pair forced

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch using a Supervisor Engine 7-E and 7L-E.

Usage Guidelines

Although IEEE 802.at only provides for power up to 30W per port, the WS-X4748-UPOE+E module can provide up to 60W using the spare pair of an RJ45 cable (wires 4,5,7,8) with the signal pair (wires 1,2,3,6). Power on the spare pair is enabled when the switch port and end-device mutually identify themselves as UPOE capable using CDP or LLDP and the end-device requests for power on the spare pair to be enabled. When the spare pair is powered, the end-device can negotiate up to 60W power from the switch using CDP or LLDP.

If the end-device is PoE capable on both signal and spare pairs but does not support the CDP or LLDP extensions required for UPOE, then the following configuration automatically enables power on both signal and spare pairs from the switch port

Examples

The following example shows how to automatically enable power on both signal and spare pairs from switch port gigabit ethernet 2/1:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 2/1

Switch(config-if)# power inline four-pair forced

Switch(config-if)# shutdown

Switch(config-if)# no shutdown

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

Do not enter this command if the end-device is incapable of sourcing inline power on the spare pair or if the end-device supports the CDP or LLDP extensions for UPOE.

power inline logging global

To enable console messages that show when a PoE device has been detected and to show when a PoE device has been removed, use the power inline logging global command.

power inline logging global

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Disabled

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG2/

XE 3.2.2SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Be aware of the potential for console flooding if this command is used on a switch connected to several PoE devices.

Examples

The following example shows how to globally enable PoE status messaging on each interface:

To enable PoE event logging, you use the logging event poe-status global command:

Switch# conf terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# power inline logging global

Switch(config)# int gigabitEthernet 5/5

Switch(config-if)# shut

Switch(config-if)#

*Oct 17 12:02:48.407: %ILPOWER-5-IEEE_DISCONNECT: Interface Gi5/5: PD removed

Switch(config-if)# no shut

Switch(config-if)#

*Oct 17 12:02:54.915: %ILPOWER-7-DETECT: Interface Gi5/5: Power Device detected: IEEE PD

Related Commands

Command

Description

logging event link-status global (global configuration)

Changes the default switch-wide global link-status event messaging settings.

power inline police

To configure Power over Ethernet policing on a particular interface, use the power inline police command. The no form of the command disables PoE policing on an interface.

power inline police [action] [errdisable | log]

no power inline police [action] [errdisable | log]

Syntax Description

action

(Optional) Specifies the action to take on the port when a PoE policing fault occurs (the device consumes more power than it’s allocated).

errdisable

(Optional) Enables PoE policing on the interface and places the port in an errdisable state when a PoE policing fault occurs.

log

(Optional) Enables PoE policing on the interface and, if a PoE policing fault occurs, shuts, restarts the port, and logs an error message.

Command Default

PoE policing is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If a port is in the errdisable state because of a PoE policing fault, enter the shut command followed by a no shut on the interface to make the port operational again.

You can also configure inline-power errdisable autorecovery so that an errdisabled interface is automatically revived when the errdisable autorecovery timer expires.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable PoE policing and configure a policing action:

Switch(config)# int gigabitEthernet 2/1

Switch(config-if)# power inline police

Switch(config-if)# do show power inline police gigabitEthernet 2/1

Available:421(w) Used:39(w) Remaining:382(w)

Interface Admin Oper Admin Oper Cutoff Oper

State State Police Police Power Power

--------- ------ ---------- ---------- ---------- ------ -----

Gi2/1 auto on errdisable ok 17.4 7.6

Switch(config-if)# power inline police action log

Available:421(w) Used:39(w) Remaining:382(w)

Interface Admin Oper Admin Oper Cutoff Oper

State State Police Police Power Power

--------- ------ ---------- ---------- ---------- ------ -----

Gi2/1 auto on log ok 17.4 9.6

Related Commands

Command

Description

errdisable recovery

Enables errdisable autorecovery; the port automatically restarts itself after going to the errdisable state after its errdisable autorecovery timer expires.

show power inline police

Displays the PoE policing status of an interface, module, or chassis.

power redundancy combined max inputs

To configure the power settings for the chassis specifically for 'Combined Mode Resiliency', use the power redundancy combined max inputs command. To return to the default setting, use the default form of this command.

Note This feature only applies in combined mode when both power supply bays contain the 4200 W AC, 6000 W AC, or 9000W power supply.

power redundancy combined max inputs {x | y}

default power redundancy combined max inputs

Syntax Description

x | y

Sets the max input limits.

If 9000W power supplies are installed, the valid input range is 2-5.

Note The maximum number of power-supply inputs with two 9000W power supplies is 6.
If 4200W or 6000W power supplies are installed, the valid input range is 2-3.

Note The maximum number of power-supply inputs with either two 4200W or two 6000W power supplies is 4.

Command Default

Redundant power management mode

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.4.0SG and 15.1(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Using the combined mode power resiliency feature, you can limit the power usage to a maximum of two or three (configurable) inputs for 4000W and 6000W power supplies. For 9000W power supplies, you can limit the power usage to a maximum of 2 to 5 inputs, since the 9000W is a triple input power supply.

With two 4200 W AC or 6000 W AC power supplies, a maximum of four inputs are available. With two 9000W, a maximum of six inputs are available. This feature allows you to cap the power usage to that of two/three inputs or four/five inputs. If one of the power supplies fails, no loss of power occurs because you have capped its usage to a smaller number of inputs.

If you have max inputs 3 configured with four "good" (220 V) inputs and you limit the user to 5500 W instead of 7600 W and one subunit fails or is powered off, you have three quality inputs providing 5500 W and the chassis is powered at the same rate as it was prior to the failure event:

Switch# configuration terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# power redundancy combined max inputs 3

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

14:32:01: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by console

Here is the output of the show power command prior to invoking this feature:

Switch# show power

sh power

Power Fan Inline

Supply Model No Type Status Sensor Status

------ ---------------- --------- ----------- ------- -------

PS1 PWR-C45-4200ACV AC 4200W good good good

PS1-1 110V good

PS1-2 110V good

PS2 PWR-C45-4200ACV AC 4200W good good good

PS2-1 110V good

PS2-2 110V good

Power supplies needed by system : 1

Power supplies currently available : 2

Power Summary Maximum

(in Watts) Used Available

---------------------- ---- ---------

System Power (12V) 140 1360

Inline Power (-50V) 0 1850

Backplane Power (3.3V) 0 40

---------------------- ---- ---------

Total 140 (not to exceed Total Maximum Available = 2100)

Here is the output after invoking this feature. The combined mode was indicated before

Power supplies needed = 2 in the output of the show power command, combined mode is now indicated by the phrase Power supplies needed by system: 2 Maximum Inputs = 3.

Switch# show power

sh power

Power Fan Inline

Supply Model No Type Status Sensor Status

------ ---------------- --------- ----------- ------- -------

PS1 PWR-C45-4200ACV AC 4200W good good good

PS1-1 110V good

PS1-2 110V good

PS2 PWR-C45-4200ACV AC 4200W good good good

PS2-1 110V good

PS2-2 110V good

Power supplies needed by system : 2 Maximum Inputs = 3

Power supplies currently available : 2

Power Summary Maximum

(in Watts) Used Available

---------------------- ---- ---------

System Power (12V) 140 2400

Inline Power (-50V) 0 2000

Backplane Power (3.3V) 0 40

---------------------- ---- ---------

Total 140 (not to exceed Total Maximum Available = 2728)

Switch#

Here's another example of combined mode resiliency with 9000W power supply with a maximum of six active inputs, limited to 3 inputs:

Switch# show power

Power Fan Inline

Supply Model No Type Status Sensor Status

------ ---------------- --------- ----------- ------- -------

PS1 PWR-C45-9000ACV AC 9000W good good good

PS1-1 220V good

PS1-2 220V good

PS1-3 220V good

PS2 PWR-C45-9000ACV AC 9000W good good good

PS2-1 220V good

PS2-2 220V good

PS2-3 220V good

Power supplies needed by system : 2 Maximum Inputs = 3

Power supplies currently available : 2

Power Summary Maximum

(in Watts) Used Available

---------------------- ---- ---------

System Power (12V) 1323 2646

Inline Power (-50V) 0 6022

Backplane Power (3.3V) 40 67

---------------------- ---- ---------

Total 1363 (not to exceed Total Maximum Available = 7412)

t

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the combined mode resiliency feature when a 9000W AC power supply is detected.

Note The power usage is limited to four or five inputs.

Note The maximum inputs part of the command is ignored by all power supplies other than 9000 W AC.

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# power redundancy combined max inputs {2 | 5}

The following example shows how to configure the combined mode resiliency feature if f a 9000W AC power supply is not detected.

Note The power usage is limited to two or three inputs.

Note The maximum inputs part of the command is ignored by all power supplies other than the 4200 W AC or 6000 W AC.

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# power redundancy combined max inputs {2 | 3}

Related Commands

Command

Description

show power

Displays information about the power status.

power redundancy-mode

To configure the power settings for the chassis, use the power redundancy-mode command. To return to the default setting, use the default form of this command.

power redundancy-mode {redundant | combined}

default power redundancy-mode

Syntax Description

redundant

Configures the switch to redundant power management mode.

combined

Configures the switch to combined power management mode.

Command Default

Redundant power management mode

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The two power supplies must be the same type and wattage.

Caution If you have power supplies with different types or wattages installed in your switch, the switch will not recognize one of the power supplies. A switch set to redundant mode will not have power redundancy. A switch set to combined mode will use only one power supply.

In redundant mode, the power from a single power supply must provide enough power to support the switch configuration.

Table 2-12 lists the maximum available power for chassis and Power over Ethernet for each power supply.

Table 2-12 Available Power for Switch Power Supplies

Power Supply

Redundant Mode (W)

Combined Mode (W)

Sharing Ratio

1000 W AC

Chassis1 = 1050

PoE = 0

Chassis = 1667

PoE = 0

2/3

1300 W AC

Chassis (max) = 1050

PoE (max) = 800

Chassis + PoE + Backplane < 1300

Chassis (min) = 767

PoE (max) = 1333

Chassis (max) = 1667

PoE (min) = 533

Chassis + PoE + Backplane < 2200

2/3

1400 W DC

Chassis (min) = 200

Chassis (max) = 1360

PoE (max)2 = (DC Input3 - [Chassis (min) + Backplane] / 0.75) * 0.96

Chassis = 22674

PoE5

Chassis—2/3

PoE—0

1400 W AC

Chassis = 1360

PoE = 06

Chassis = 2473

PoE = 0

9/11

2800 W AC

Chassis = 1360

PoE = 1400

Chassis = 2473

PoE = 2333

Chassis7—9/11

PoE8—2/3

1.Chassis power includes power for the supervisor engine(s), all line cards, and the fan tray.

2.The efficiency for the 1400 W DC power supply is 0.75, and 0.96 is applied to PoE.

3.DC input can vary for the 1400 W DC power supply and is configurable. F.

4.Not available for PoE.

5.Not available for PoE.

6.No voice power.

7.Data-only.

8.Inline power.

Special Considerations for the 4200 W AC, 6000 W AC, and 9000W Power Supplies

The 4200 W AC and 6000 W AC power supply has two inputs: each can be powered at 110 or 220 V.

The 9000 W AC power supply has three inputs: each can be powered at 110 or 220V.

As with other power supplies, the two power supplies must be of the same type (6000 W AC or 4200 W AC or 9000 W AC). Otherwise, the right power supply is put in err-disable state and the left one is selected. In addition, all the inputs to the chassis must be at the same voltage. In redundant mode, the inputs to the left and right power supplies must be identical. If the left and right power supplies are powered in redundant mode, the power values is based on the power supply with the higher output wattage.

Note When the system is powered with a 4200 W, 6000 W, or 9000W power supply either in 110 V or 220 V combined mode operation, the available power is determined by the configuration of the system (the type of line cards, the number of line cards, number of ports consuming inline power, etc.) and does not reflect the absolute maximum power.

Note In a matched redundant power supply configuration, if a power supply submodule fails, the other (good) power supply provides power to its full capability.

Table 2-13 illustrates how the 4200 W AC power supply is evaluated in redundant mode.

Table 2-13 Power Output in Redundant Mode for the 4200 W AC Power Supply

Power Supply

Chassis Power

Inline Power

110 V

660

700

110 V+110 V

or 220 V

1360

1850

220 V+220 V

1360

3700

In combined mode, all the inputs to the chassis must be at the same voltage.

Table 2-14 illustrates how the 4200 W AC power supply is evaluated in combined mode.

Table 2-14 Combined Mode Output for the 4200 W AC Power Supply

Power Supply

Chassis Power

Inline Power

Both sides (bays) at 110 V

1200

1320

110 V+110 V, other side 110 V

1800

2000

Both sides at 110 V+110 V

2200

3100

Both sides at 220 V

2200

3100

220 V+220 V, other side 220 V

2200

4700

Both sides at 220 V+220 V

2200

6200

Table 2-15 illustrates how the 6000 W AC power supply is evaluated in redundant mode.

Table 2-15 Power Output in Redundant Mode for the 6000 W AC Power Supply

Power Supply

Chassis Power

Inline Power

110 V

850

922

110 V+110 V or 220V

1700

1850

220 V+220 V

2200

4800

In combined mode, all the inputs to the chassis must be at the same voltage.

Table 2-16 illustrates how the 6000 W AC power supply is evaluated in combined mode.

Table 2-16 Combined Mode Output for the 6000 W AC Power Supply

Power Supply

Chassis Power

Inline Power

Both sides (bays) at 110 V

1400

1670

110 V+110 V, other side 110 V

2360

2560

Both sides at 110 V+110 V

3090

3360

Both sides at 220 V

4000

4360

220 V+220 V, other side 220 V

4000

6600

Both sides at 220 V+220 V

4000

8700

Table 2-17 illustrates how the 9000 W AC power supply is evaluated in redundant mode.

Table 2-17 Power Output in Redundant Mode for the 9000 W AC Power Supply

Power Supply

12V (data) (W)

-50V (PoE) (W)

9Total Power (W)

110VAC

960

1000

1100

110VAC + 110 VAC

1460

2000

2200

110VAC + 110 V AC+ 110VAC

1460

2500

3300

220VAC

1460

2500

3000

220VAC + 220VAC

1960

5000

6000

220VAC + 220VAC + 220VAC

1960

7500

9000

9.Power supply output drawings should not exceed the total power.

Table 2-18 illustrates how the 9000 W AC power supply is evaluated in combined mode.

Table 2-18 Power Output in Combined Mode for the 9000 W AC Power Supply

Power Supply

12V (data) (W)

-50V (PoE) (W)

10Total Power (W)

Both sides at 110 VAC

1594

1420

1790

Both sides at 110VAC + 110VAC

2627

3320

3610

Both sides at 110VAC + 110VAC + 110VAC

2627

4150

5420

One side at 110VAC + 110VAC + 110VAC, the other at 110VAC + 110VAC

2019

3458

4520

One side at 110VAC + 110VAC + 110VAC, the other at 110VAC

1615

2367

3620

One side at 110VAC + 110VAC, the other at 110VAC

1615

2130

2710

Both sides at 220VAC

2828

4150

4930

Both sides at 220VAC + 220VAC

3762

8300

10140

Both sides at 220VAC + 220VAC + 220VAC

3762

14400

17210

One side at 220VAC + 220VAC + 220VAC, the other at 220VAC + 220VAC

2939

11250

13440

One side at 220VAC + 220VAC + 220VAC, the other at 220VAC

2168

8300

9890

One side at 220VAC + 220VAC, the other at 220VAC

2168

6225

7410

10.Power supply output drawings should not exceed the total power.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the power management mode to combined:

Switch(config)# power redundancy-mode combined

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show power

Displays information about the power status.

pppoe intermediate-agent (global)

To enable the PPPoE Intermediate Agent feature on a switch, use the pppoe intermediate-agent global configuration command. To disable the feature, use the no form of this command.

pppoe intermediate-agent

no pppoe intermediate-agent

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

disabled

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You must enable PPPoE Intermediate Agent globally on a switch before you can use

PPPoE Intermediate Agent on an interface or interface VLAN.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable PPPoE Intermediate Agent on a switch:

Switch(config)# pppoe intermediate-agent

The following example shows how to disable PPPoE Intermediate Agent on a switch:

Switch(config)# no pppoe intermediate-agent

Related Commands

Command

Description

pppoe intermediate-agent (global)

Sets the access node identifier, generic error message, and identifier string for a switch.

pppoe intermediate-agent (interface)

Note This command takes effect only if you enable the pppoe intermediate-agent global command.

To enable the PPPoE Intermediate Agent feature on an interface, use the pppoe intermediate-agent command. To disable the feature, use the no form of this command.

pppoe intermediate-agent

no pppoe intermediate-agent

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Disabled on all interfaces.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled on an interface provided the PPPoE Intermediate Agent is enabled both on the switch and the interface.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on an interface:

Switch(config-if)# pppoe intermediate-agent

The following example shows how to disable the PPPoE Intermediate Agent on an interface:

Switch(config-if)# no pppoe intermediate-agent

Related Commands

Command

Description

pppoe intermediate-agent format-type (interface)

Sets circuit ID or remote ID for an interface.

pppoe intermediate-agent limit rate

Limits the rate of the PPPoE Discovery packets coming on an interface.

pppoe intermediate-agent trust

Sets the trust configuration of an interface.

pppoe intermediate-agent vendor-tag strip

Enables vendor-tag stripping on PPPoE Discovery packets from PPPoE Server (or BRAS).

pppoe intermediate-agent (interface vlan-range)

Note This command takes effect only if you enable the pppoe intermediate-agent global command.

To enable PPPoE Intermediate Agent on an interface VLAN range, use the pppoe intermediate-agent global command. To disable the feature, use the no form of this command.

pppoe intermediate-agent

no pppoe intermediate-agent

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Disabled on all VLANs on all interfaces

Command Modes

Interface vlan-range configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Although this command takes effect irrespective of the pppoe intermediate-agent (interface configuration mode) command, you must enable the pppoe intermediate-agent (global configuration mode) command.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable PPPoE Intermediate Agent on a range of VLANs:

Switch(config-if)# vlan-range 167-368

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# pppoe intermediate-agent

The following example shows how to disable PPPoE Intermediate Agent on a single VLAN:

Switch(config-if)# vlan-range 268

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# no pppoe intermediate-agent

Related Commands

Command

Description

pppoe intermediate-agent (interface)

Enables the PPPoE Intermediate Agent feature on an interface.

pppoe intermediate-agent format-type (global)

To set the access node identifier, generic error message, and identifier string for the switch, use the

pppoe intermediate-agent format-type (global) command. To disable the feature, use the no form of this command:

pppoe intermediate-agent format-type access-node-identifier string string

pppoe intermediate-agent format-type generic-error-message string string

pppoe intermediate-agent format-type identifier-string string string option {sp|sv|pv|spv} delimiter {,|.|;|/|#}

no pppoe intermediate-agent format-type {access-node-identifier | generic-error-message | identifier-string}

Syntax Description

access-node-identifier string string

ASCII string literal value for the access-node-identifier.

generic-error-message string string

ASCII string literal value for the generic-error-message.

identifier-string string string

ASCII string literal value for the identifier-string.

option {sp|sv|pv|spv}

Options:

sp = slot + port

sv = slot + VLAN

pv = port + VLAN

spv = slot + port + VLAN

delimiter {,|.|;|/|#}

Delimiter between slot/port/VLAN portions of option.

Command Default

access-node-identifier has a default value of 0.0.0.0.

generic-error-message, identifier-string, option, and delimiter have no default values.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use the access-node-identifier and identifier-string commands to enable the switch to generate the circuit-id parameters automatically.

The no form of identifier-string command unsets the option and delimiter.

Use the generic-error-message command to set an error message notifying the sender that the

PPPoE Discovery packet was too large.

Examples

The following example shows how to set an access-node-identifier:

Switch(config)# pppoe intermediate-agent format-type access-node-identifier string switch-abc-123

The following example shows how to unset a generic-error-message:

Switch(config)# no pppoe intermediate-agent format-type generic-error-message

Related Commands

Command

Description

show pppoe intermediate-agent interface

Displays the PPPoE Intermediate Agent configuration and statistics (packet counters).

pppoe intermediate-agent format-type (interface)

Note This command takes effect only if you enable the pppoe intermediate-agent interface configuration command.

To set circuit-id or remote-id for an interface, use the pppoe intermediate-agent format-type command. To unset the parameters, use the no form of this command.

pppoe intermediate-agent format-type {circuit-id | remote-id} string string

no pppoe intermediate-agent format-type {circuit-id | remote-id} string string

Syntax Description

circuit-id string string

ASCII string literal value for circuit-id.

remote-id string string

ASCII string literal value for remote-id.

Command Default

No default values for circuit-id and remote-id.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use the pppoe intermediate-agent format-type command to set interface-specific circuit-id and remote-id values. If an interface-specific circuit-id is not set, the system's automatic generated circuit-id value is used.

Examples

The following example shows how to set remote-id for an interface:

Switch(config-if)# pppoe intermediate-agent format-type remote-id string user5551983

The following example shows how to unset circuit-id for an interface:

Switch(config)# no pppoe intermediate-agent format-type circuit-id

Related Commands

Command

Description

pppoe intermediate-agent (interface)

Enables the PPPoE Intermediate Agent feature on an interface.

pppoe intermediate-agent (interface vlan-range)

Sets the circuit-id or remote-id for an interface vlan-range.

pppoe intermediate-agent format-type (interface vlan-range)

Note This command takes effect only if you enable the pppoe intermediate-agent interface vlan-range configuration mode command.

To set circuit-id or remote-id for an interface vlan-range, use the

pppoe intermediate-agent format-type interface vlan-range mode command. To unset the parameters, use the no form of this command.

pppoe intermediate-agent format-type {circuit-id | remote-id} string string

no pppoe intermediate-agent format-type {circuit-id | remote-id} string string

Syntax Description

circuit-id string string

ASCII string literal value to be set for circuit-id.

remote-id string string

ASCII string literal value to be set for remote-id.

Command Default

No default values for circuit-id and remote-id.

Command Modes

Interface vlan-range configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use these commands to set circuit-id or remote-id on an interface vlan-range. If the circuit-id is not set, the system’s automatically generated circuit-id is used.

Examples

The following example shows how to set remote-id on an interface VLAN:

Switch(config-if)# vlan-range 268

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)#

pppoe intermediate-agent format-type remote-id string user5551983-cabletv

The following example shows how to unset circuit-id on an interface vlan-range:

Switch(config-if)# vlan-range 167-368

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# no pppoe intermediate-agent format-type circuit-id

Related Commands

Command

Description

pppoe intermediate-agent (interface vlan-range)

Enables PPPoE Intermediate Agent on an interface VLAN range.

pppoe intermediate-agent limit rate

To limit the rate of the PPPoE Discovery packets arriving on an interface, use the

pppoe intermediate-agent limit rate command. To disable the feature, use the no form of this command.

pppoe intermediate-agent limit rate number

no pppoe intermediate-agent limit rate number

Syntax Description

number

Specifies the threshold rate of PPPoE Discovery packets received on this interface in packets-per-second.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If this command is used and the PPPoE Discovery packets that are received exceeds the rate set, the interface will be error-disabled (shutdown).

Examples

The following example shows how to set a rate limit for an interface:

Switch(config-if)# pppoe intermediate-agent limit rate 50

The following example shows how to disable rate limiting for an interface:

Switch(config-if)# no pppoe intermediate-agent limit rate

Related Commands

Command

Description

pppoe intermediate-agent (interface)

Enables the PPPoE Intermediate Agent feature on an interface

pppoe intermediate-agent trust

To set the trust configuration of an interface, use the pppoe intermediate-agent trust global command. To unset the trust parameter, use the no form of this command.

pppoe intermediate-agent trust

no pppoe intermediate-agent trust

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

All interfaces are untrusted.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

At least one trusted interface must be present on the switch for PPPoE Intermediate Agent feature to work.

Set the interface connecting the switch to the PPPoE Server (or BRAS) as trusted.

Examples

The following example shows how to set an interface as trusted:

Switch(config-if)# pppoe intermediate-agent trust

The following example shows how to disable the trust configuration for an interface:

Switch(config-if)# no pppoe intermediate-agent trust

Related Commands

Command

Description

pppoe intermediate-agent vendor-tag strip

Enables vendor-tag stripping on PPPoE Discovery packets from a PPPoE Server (or BRAS).

pppoe intermediate-agent vendor-tag strip

Note This command takes effect only if you enable the pppoe intermediate-agent interface configuration command and the pppoe intermediate-agent trust command.

To enable vendor-tag stripping on PPPoE Discovery packets from PPPoE Server (or BRAS), use the

pppoe intermediate-agent vendor-tag strip command. To disable this setting, use the no form of this command.

pppoe intermediate-agent vendor-tag strip

no pppoe intermediate-agent vendor-tag strip

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

vendor-tag stripping is turned off.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command has no effect on untrusted interfaces.

Use this command on a PPPoE Intermediate Agent trusted interface to strip off the vendor-specific tags in PPPoE Discovery packets that arrive downstream from the PPPoE Server (or BRAS), if any.

Examples

The following example shows how to set vendor-tag stripping on an interface:

Switch(config-if)# pppoe intermediate-agent vendor-tag strip

The following example shows how to disable vendor-tag stripping on an interface:

Switch(config-if)# no pppoe intermediate-agent vendor-tag strip

Related Commands

Command

Description

pppoe intermediate-agent (interface)

Enables the PPPoE Intermediate Agent feature on an interface.

pppoe intermediate-agent trust

Sets the trust configuration of an interface.

priority

To enable the strict priority queue (low-latency queueing [LLQ]) and to give priority to a class of traffic belonging to a policy map attached to a physical port, use the priority policy-map class configuration command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

priority

no priority

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

The strict priority queue is disabled.

Command Modes

Policy-map class configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

Support introduced on Supervisor Engine 6E and Catalyst 4900M.

Usage Guidelines

Use the priority command only in a policy map attached to a physical port. You can use this command only in class-level classes, you cannot use this command in class class-default.

This command configures LLQ and provides strict-priority queueing. Strict-priority queueing enables delay-sensitive data, such as voice, to be sent before packets in other queues are sent. The priority queue is serviced first until it is empty.

You cannot use the bandwidth, dbl, and the shape policy-map class configuration commands with the priority policy-map class configuration command in the same class within the same policy map. However, you can use these commands in the same policy map.

You can use police or set class configuration commands with the priority police-map class configuration command.

If the priority queuing class is not rate limited, you cannot use the bandwidth command, you can use the bandwidth remaining percent command instead.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the LLQ for the policy map called policy1:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# policy-map policy1

Switch(config-pmap)# class voice

Switch(config-pmap-c)# priority

You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

bandwidth

Specifies or modifies the minimum bandwidth provided to a class belonging to a policy map attached to a physical port.

class

Specifies the name of the class whose traffic policy you want to create or change.

dbl

Enables dynamic buffer limiting for traffic hitting this class.

policy-map

Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

service-policy (policy-map class)

Creates a service policy that is a quality of service (QoS) policy within a policy map.

shape (class-based queueing)

Enables traffic shaping a class of traffic in a policy map attached to a physical port.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

private-vlan

To configure private VLANs and the association between a private VLAN and a secondary VLAN, use the private-vlan command. To return to the default value, use the no form of this command.

private-vlan {isolated | community | twoway-community | primary}

private-vlan association secondary-vlan-list [{add secondary-vlan-list} | {remove secondary-vlan-list}]

no private-vlan {isolated | community | twoway-community | primary}

no private-vlan association

Syntax Description

isolated

Designates the VLAN as an isolated private VLAN.

community

Designates the VLAN as the community private VLAN.

twoway-community

Designates the VLAN as a host port that belongs to a twoway-community secondary VLAN

primary

Designates the VLAN as the primary private VLAN.

association

Creates an association between a secondary VLAN and a primary VLAN.

secondary-vlan-list

Specifies the number of the secondary VLAN.

The list can contain only one isolated VLAN ID; it can also contain multiple community or twoway-community VLAN IDs

add

(Optional) Associates a secondary VLAN to a primary VLAN.

remove

(Optional) Clears the association between a secondary VLAN and a primary VLAN.

Command Default

Private VLANs are not configured.

Command Modes

VLAN configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended addressing was added.

12.2(20)EW

Support for community VLAN was added.

15.0(2)SG

Support for twoway-community was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

You cannot configure VLAN 1 or VLANs 1001 to 1005 as private VLANs.

VTP does not support private VLANs. You must configure private VLANs on each device where you want private VLAN ports.

The secondary_vlan_list parameter cannot contain spaces; it can contain multiple comma-separated items. Each item can be a single private VLAN ID or a range of private VLAN IDs separated by hyphens.

The secondary_vlan_list parameter can contain multiple community VLAN IDs.

The secondary_vlan_list parameter can contain only one isolated VLAN ID. A private VLAN is defined as a set of private ports characterized by a common set of VLAN number pairs: each pair is made up of at least two special unidirectional VLANs and is used by isolated ports or by a community of ports to communicate with the switches.

An isolated VLAN is a VLAN that is used by the isolated ports to communicate with the promiscuous ports. The isolated VLAN traffic is blocked on all other private ports in the same VLAN and can be received only by the standard trunking ports and the promiscuous ports that are assigned to the corresponding primary VLAN.

A community VLAN is the VLAN that carries the traffic among the community ports and from the community ports to the promiscuous ports on the corresponding primary VLAN. A community VLAN is not allowed on a private VLAN trunk.

A promiscuous port is a private port that is assigned to a primary VLAN.

A primary VLAN is a VLAN that is used to convey the traffic from the switches to the customer end stations on the private ports.

You can specify only one isolated vlan-id value, while multiple community VLANs are allowed. You can only associate isolated and community VLANs to one VLAN. The associated VLAN list may not contain primary VLANs. Similarly, a VLAN that is already associated to a primary VLAN cannot be configured as a primary VLAN.

The private-vlan commands do not take effect until you exit the config-VLAN submode.

If you delete either the primary or secondary VLAN, the ports that are associated with the VLAN become inactive.

Refer to the Catalyst 4500 Series Switch Cisco IOS Software Configuration Guide for additional configuration guidelines.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure VLAN 202 as a primary VLAN and verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# vlan 202

Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan primary

Switch(config-vlan)# end

Switch# show vlan private-vlan

Primary Secondary Type Interfaces

------- --------- ----------------- ------------------------------------------

202 primary

The following example shows how to configure VLAN 303 as a community VLAN and verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# vlan 303

Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan community

Switch(config-vlan)# end

Switch# show vlan private-vlan

Primary Secondary Type Interfaces

------- --------- ----------------- ------------------------------------------

202 primary

303 community

The following example shows how to configure VLAN 440 as an isolated VLAN and verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# vlan 440

Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan isolated

Switch(config-vlan)# end

Switch# show vlan private-vlan

Primary Secondary Type Interfaces

------- --------- ----------------- ------------------------------------------

202 primary

303 community

440 isolated

The following example shows how to create a private VLAN relationship among the primary VLAN 14, the isolated VLAN 19, and community VLANs 20 and 21:

Switch(config)# vlan 19

Switch(config-vlan) # private-vlan isolated

Switch(config)# vlan 14

Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan primary

Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan association 19

The following example shows how to remove a private VLAN relationship and delete the primary VLAN. The associated secondary VLANs are not deleted.

Switch(config-vlan)# no private-vlan 14

Switch(config-vlan)#

The following example shows how to configure VLAN 550 as a twoway-community VLAN and verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# vlan 550

Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan twoway-community

Switch(config-vlan)# end

Switch# show vlan private-vlan

Primary Secondary Type Interfaces

------- --------- ----------------- ------------------------------------------

202 primary

303 community

440 isolated

550 twoway-community

The following example shows how to associate community VLANs 303 through 307 and 309 and isolated VLAN 440 with primary VLAN 202 and verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# vlan 202

Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan association 303-307,309,440

Switch(config-vlan)# end

Switch# show vlan private-vlan

Primary Secondary Type Interfaces

------- --------- ----------------- ------------------------------------------

202 303 community

202 304 community

202 305 community

202 306 community

202 307 community

202 309 community

202 440 isolated

308 community

Note The secondary VLAN 308 has no associated primary VLAN.

The following example shows how to remove an isolated VLAN from the private VLAN association:

Switch(config)# vlan 14

Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan association remove 18

Switch(config-vlan)#

The following example shows how to configure interface FastEthernet 5/1 as a PVLAN host port and verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 5/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan host

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan host-association 202 440

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show interfaces fastethernet 5/1 switchport

Name: Fa5/1

Switchport: Enabled

Administrative Mode: private-vlan host

Operational Mode: private-vlan host

Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: negotiate

Operational Trunking Encapsulation: native

Negotiation of Trunking: Off

Access Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Voice VLAN: none

Appliance trust: none

Administrative Private Vlan

Host Association: 202 (VLAN0202) 440 (VLAN0440)

Promiscuous Mapping: none

Trunk encapsulation : dot1q

Trunk vlans:

Operational private-vlan(s):

202 (VLAN0202) 440 (VLAN0440)

Trunking VLANs Enabled: ALL

Pruning VLANs Enabled: 2-1001

Capture Mode Disabled

Capture VLANs Allowed: ALL

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vlan

Displays VLAN information.

show vlan private-vlan

Displays private VLAN information.

private-vlan mapping

To create a mapping between the primary and the secondary VLANs so that both share the same primary VLAN SVI, use the private-vlan mapping command. To remove all PVLAN mappings from an SVI, use the no form of this command.

private-vlan mapping primary-vlan-id {[secondary-vlan-list | {add secondary-vlan-list} | {remove secondary-vlan-list}]}

no private-vlan mapping

Syntax Description

primary-vlan-id

VLAN ID of the primary VLAN of the PVLAN relationship.

secondary-vlan-list

(Optional) VLAN ID of the secondary VLANs to map to the primary VLAN.

add

(Optional) Maps the secondary VLAN to the primary VLAN.

remove

(Optional) Removes the mapping between the secondary VLAN and the primary VLAN.

Command Default

All PVLAN mappings are removed.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The secondary_vlan_list parameter cannot contain spaces. It can contain multiple, comma-separated items. Each item can be a single PVLAN ID or a range of PVLAN IDs separated by hyphens.

This command is valid in the interface configuration mode of the primary VLAN.

The SVI of the primary VLAN is created at Layer 3.

The traffic that is received on the secondary VLAN is routed by the SVI of the primary VLAN.

The SVIs of the existing secondary VLANs do not function and are considered down after this command is entered.

A secondary SVI can be mapped to only one primary SVI. If the configured PVLANs association is different from what is specified in this command (if the specified primary-vlan-id is configured as a secondary VLAN), all the SVIs that are specified in this command are brought down.

If you configure a mapping between two VLANs that do not have a valid Layer 2 association, the mapping configuration does not take effect.

Examples

The following example shows how to map the interface of VLAN 20 to the SVI of VLAN 18:

Switch(config)# interface vlan 18

Switch(config-if)# private-vlan mapping 18 20

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to permit the routing of the secondary VLAN ingress traffic from PVLANs 303 through 307, 309, and 440 and how to verify the configuration:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# interface vlan 202

Switch(config-if)# private-vlan mapping add 303-307,309,440

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show interfaces private-vlan mapping

Interface Secondary VLAN Type

--------- -------------- -----------------

vlan202 303 isolated

vlan202 304 isolated

vlan202 305 isolated

vlan202 306 isolated

vlan202 307 isolated

vlan202 309 isolated

vlan202 440 isolated

Switch#

The following example shows the displayed message that you will see if the VLAN that you are adding is already mapped to the SVI of VLAN 18. You must delete the mapping from the SVI of VLAN 18 first.

Switch(config)# interface vlan 19

Switch(config-if)# private-vlan mapping 19 add 21

Command rejected: The interface for VLAN 21 is already mapped as s secondary.

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to remove all PVLAN mappings from the SVI of VLAN 19:

Switch(config)# interface vlan 19

Switch(config-if)# no private-vlan mapping

Switch(config-if)#

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface vlan 202

Switch(config-if)# private-vlan mapping add 303-307,309,440

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show interfaces private-vlan mapping

Interface Secondary VLAN Type

--------- -------------- -----------------

vlan202 303 community

vlan202 304 community

vlan202 305 community

vlan202 306 community

vlan202 307 community

vlan202 309 community

vlan202 440 isolated

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces private-vlan mapping

Displays PVLAN mapping information for VLAN SVIs.

show vlan

Displays VLAN information.

show vlan private-vlan

Displays private VLAN information.

private-vlan synchronize

To map the secondary VLANs to the same instance as the primary VLAN, use the private-vlan synchronize command.

private-vlan synchronize

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

MST configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If you do not map the VLANs to the same instance as the associated primary VLAN when you exit the MST configuration submode, a warning message displays and lists the secondary VLANs that are not mapped to the same instance as the associated primary VLAN. The private-vlan synchronize command automatically maps all secondary VLANs to the same instance as the associated primary VLANs.

Examples

The following example shows how to initialize PVLAN synchronization:

Switch(config-mst)# private-vlan synchronize

Switch(config-mst)#

This example assumes that a primary VLAN 2 and a secondary VLAN 3 are associated to VLAN 2, and that all VLANs are mapped to the CIST instance 1. This example also shows the output if you try to change the mapping for the primary VLAN 2 only:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration

Switch(config-mst)# instance 1 vlan 2

Switch(config-mst)# exit

These secondary vlans are not mapped to the same instance as their primary:

->3

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST protocol information.

profile

To enter profile call-home configuration submode, use the profile command in call-home configuration mode, use the profile command.

profile profile_name

Syntax Description

profile_name

Specifies the profile name.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

cfg-call-home

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When you enter the profile profile_name command in call-home mode, the prompt changes to Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)#, and you have access to the following profile configuration commands:

- active

- destination address

- destination message-size-limit bytes

- destination preferred-msg-format

- destination transport-method

- end

- exit

- subscribe-to-alert-group all

- subscribe-to-alert-group configuration

- subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic

- subscribe-to-alert-group environment

- subscribe-to-alert-group inventory

- subscribe-to-alert-group syslog

Examples

The following example shows how to create and configure a user-defined call-home profile:

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# profile cisco

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# destination transport-method http

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# destination address http https://172.17.46.17/its/service/oddce/services/DDCEService

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# subscribe-to-alert-group configuration

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic severity normal

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# subscribe-to-alert-group environment severity notification

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# subscribe-to-alert-group syslog severity notification pattern "UPDOWN"

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# subscribe-to-alert-group inventory periodic daily 21:12

Related Commands

Command

Description

destination address

Configures the destination e-mail address or URL to which Call Home messages will be sent.

destination message-size-limit bytes

Configures a maximum destination message size for the destination profile.

destination preferred-msg-format

Configures a preferred message format.

destination transport-method

Enables the message transport method.

subscribe-to-alert-group all

Subscribes to all available alert groups.

subscribe-to-alert-group configuration

Subscribes this destination profile to the Configuration alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic

Subscribes this destination profile to the Diagnostic alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group environment

Subscribes this destination profile to the Environment alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group inventory

Subscribes this destination profile to the Inventory alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group syslog

Subscribes this destination profile to the Syslog alert group.

profile flow

To enable Media Services Proxy (MSP), use the the profile flow command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command

profile flow

no profile flow

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

config

Command History

Release

Modification

Release IOS XE 3.4.0SG and IOS 15.1(2)SG)

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You must configure the MSP profile flow command to activate the MSP platform Packet parser. This is because the the MSP device handler is tightly coupled with MSP flow parser. Not enabling this CLI means that MSP will not send SIP, H323 notifications to IOS sensor.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable MSP:

Switch(config)# profile flow

qos account layer-all encapsulation

To account for Layer 1 header length of 20 bytes in QoS policing features, use the qos account layer-all encapsulation command. To disable the use of additional bytes, use the no form of this command.

qos account layer-all encapsulation

no qos account layer-all encapsulation

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

On Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F, policers account only for the Layer 2 header length in policing features. In contrast, in rate calculations, shapers account for header length as well as IPG.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F use the qos account layer-all encapsulation command to account for Layer 1 header of 20 bytes ( preamble + IPG) and Layer 2 header in policing features. When this command is configured, policer statistics ( in bytes ) observed in the output of the show policy-map interface command reflect the Layer 1 header length as well ( 20 bytes per packet).

Examples

The following example shows how to shows how to include IPG in policing:

Switch)# config t

Switch(config)# qos account layer-all encapsulation

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show policy-map interface

Displays policer statistics on a specific interface.

qos account layer2 encapsulation

To include additional bytes to be accounted by the QoS features, use the qos account layer2 encapsulation command. To disable the use of additional bytes, use the no form of this command.

qos account layer2 encapsulation {arpa | dot1q | isl | length len}

no qos account layer2 encapsulation {arpa | dot1q | isl | length len}

Syntax Description

arpa

Specifies the account length of the Ethernet ARPA-encapsulated packet (18 bytes).

dot1q

Specifies the account length of the 802.1Q-encapsulated packet (22 bytes).

isl

Specifies the account length of the ISL-encapsulated packet (48 bytes).

length len

Specifies the a dditional packet length to account for; the valid range is from 0 to 64 bytes.

Command Default

On Supervisor Engine 6E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, and Catalyst 4948-E, the length that is specified in the Ethernet header is considered for both IP and non-IP packets. The Layer 2 length includes the VLAN tag overhead.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

On Supervisor Engine 6E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, and Catalyst 4948-E, shaping and sharing always use Ethernet ARPA length to which 20 bytes of IPv6 overhead is always added for policing. However, only Layer 2 length including VLAN tag overhead is considered.

Note The given length is included when policing all IP packets irrespective of the encapsulation with which it was received. When qos account layer2 encapsulation isl is configured, a fixed length of 48 bytes is included when policing all IP packets, not only those IP packets that are received with ISL encapsulation.

Sharing and shaping use the length that is specified in the Layer 2 headers.

Examples

The following example shows how to include an additional 18 bytes when policing IP packets:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# qos account layer2 encapsulation length 18

Switch (config)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to disable the consistent accounting of the Layer 2 encapsulation by the QoS features:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# no qos account layer2 encapsulation

Switch (config)# end

Switch #

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces

Displays traffic on a specific interface.

switchport

Modifies the switching characteristics of a Layer 2 switch interface.

switchport block

Prevents the unknown multicast or unicast packets from being forwarded.

qos trust

To set the trusted state of an interface (for example, whether the packets arriving at an interface are trusted to carry the correct CoS, ToS, and DSCP classifications), use the qos trust command. To set an interface to the untrusted state, use the no form of this command.

qos trust {cos | device cisco-phone | dscp | extend [cos priority]}

no qos trust {cos | device cisco-phone | dscp | extend [cos priority]}

Syntax Description

cos

Specifies that the CoS bits in incoming frames are trusted and derives the internal DSCP value from the CoS bits.

device cisco-phone

Specifies the Cisco IP phone as the trust device for a port.

dscp

Specifies that the ToS bits in the incoming packets contain a DSCP value.

extend

Specifies to extend the trust to Port VLAN ID (PVID) packets coming from the PC.

cos priority

(Optional) Specifies that the CoS priority value is set to PVID packets; valid values are from 0 to 7.

Command Default

The default settings are as follows:

- If global QoS is enabled, trust is disabled on the port.

- If global QoS is disabled, trust DSCP is enabled on the port.

- The CoS priority level is 0.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(11)EW

Support for extending trust for voice was added.

12.1(19)EW

Support for trust device Cisco IP phone was added.

Usage Guidelines

You can only configure the trusted state on physical LAN interfaces.

A trusted boundary should not be configured on ports that are part of an EtherChannel (that is, a port channel).

By default, the trust state of an interface when QoS is enabled is untrusted; when QoS is disabled on the interface, the trust state is reset to trust DSCP.

When the interface trust state is qos trust cos, the transmit CoS is always the incoming packet CoS (or the default CoS for the interface, if the packet is not tagged).

When the interface trust state is not qos trust dscp, the security and QoS ACL classification will always use the interface DSCP and not the incoming packet DSCP.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the trusted state of an interface to CoS:

Switch(config-if)# qos trust cos

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to set the trusted state of an interface to DSCP:

Switch(config-if)# qos trust dscp

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to set the PVID CoS level to 6:

Switch(config-if)# qos trust extend cos 6

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to set the Cisco phone as the trust device:

Switch(config-if)# qos trust device cisco-phone

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

queue-limit

Defines per-VLAN QoS for a Layer 2 interface.

show qos interface

Displays QoS information for an interface.

queue-limit

To specify or modify the maximum number of packets the queue can hold for a class policy configured in a policy map, use the queue-limit command. To remove the queue packet limit from a class, use the no form of this command.

queue-limit number-of-packets

no queue-limit number-of-packets

Syntax Description

number-of-packets

Number of packets that the queue for this class can accumulate; valid range is 16 to 8184. This number must be a multiple of 8.

Command Default

By default, each physical interface on a Catalyst 4500 switch has a default queue based on the number of slots in a chassis and the number of ports on the linecards.

Command Modes

QoS policy-map class configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(44)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The class-based queuing (CBQ) command applies only to the Supervisor Engine 6-E and Catalyst Engine 6L-E as part of MQC support on the Catalyst 4500 switch.

By default, each physical interface on a Catalyst 4500 switch comes up with a default queue. The size of this queue is based on the number of slots in a chassis as well as the number of ports on the line card in each slot. The switch supports 512K queue entries of which 100 K are set aside as a common sharable pool. The remaining 412 K entries are equally distributed among the slots. Each slot further divides its allocated queue entries equally among its ports.

CBQ creates a queue for every class for which a class map is defined. Packets satisfying the match criterion for a class accumulate in the queue reserved for the class until they are sent, which occurs when the queue is serviced by the fair queuing process. When the maximum packet threshold you defined for the class is reached, queuing of any further packets to the class queue causes tail drop or, if DBL is configured for the class policy, packet drop to take effect.

Note The queue-limit command is supported only after you first configure a scheduling action, such as bandwidth, or priority, except when you configure queue-limit in the class-default class of an output QoS policy-map.s

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a policy-map called policy11 to contain policy for a class called acl203. Policy for this class is set so that the queue reserved for it has a maximum packet limit of 40:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch (config)# policy-map policy11

Switch (config-pmap)# class acl203

Switch (config-pmap-c)# bandwidth 2000

Switch (config-pmap-c)# queue-limit 40

Switch (config-pmap-c)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

bandwidth

Specifies or modifies the minimum bandwidth provided to a class belonging to a policy map attached to a physical port.

class

Specifies the name of the class whose traffic policy you want to create or change.

policy-map

Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

shape (class-based queueing)

Enables traffic shaping a class of traffic in a policy map attached to a physical port.

redundancy

To enter the redundancy configuration mode, use the redundancy command in the global configuration mode.

redundancy

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch (Catalyst 4507R and 4510R only).

Usage Guidelines

The redundancy configuration mode is used to enter the main CPU submode.

To enter the main CPU submode, use the main-cpu command in the redundancy configuration mode.

The main CPU submode is used to manually synchronize the configurations on the two supervisor engines.

From the main CPU submode, use the auto-sync command to enable automatic synchronization of the configuration files in NVRAM.

Use the no command to disable redundancy. If you disable redundancy, then reenable redundancy, the switch returns to default redundancy settings.

Use the exit command to exit the redundancy configuration mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to enter redundancy mode:

Switch(config)# redundancy

Switch(config-red)#

The following example shows how to enter the main CPU submode:

Switch(config)# redundancy

Switch(config-red)# main-cpu

Switch(config-r-mc)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

auto-sync

Enables automatic synchronization of the configuration files in NVRAM.

main-cpu

Enters the main CPU submode and manually synchronize the configurations on the two supervisor engines.

redundancy config-sync mismatched-commands

To move the active supervisor engine into the Mismatched Command List (MCL) and resets the standby supervisor engine, use the redundancy config-sync mismatched-commands command.

If your active and standby supervisors engines are running different versions of Cisco IOS, some of their CLIs will not be compatible. If such commands are already present in the running configuration of the active supervisor engine and the syntax-check for the command fails at the standby supervisor engine while it is booting, you must move the active supervisor engine into the Mismatched Command List (MCL).

redundancy config-sync {ignore | validate} mismatched-commands

Syntax Description

ignore

Ignore the mismatched command list.

validate

Revalidate the mismatched command list with the modified running-configuration.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(44)SG

Updated command name from issu config-sync to redundancy config-sync.

Usage Guidelines

The following is a log entry example for mismatched commands:

00:06:31: Config Sync: Bulk-sync failure due to Servicing Incompatibility. Please check full list of mismatched commands via:

show redundancy config-sync failures mcl

00:06:31: Config Sync: Starting lines from MCL file:

interface GigabitEthernet7/7

! <submode> "interface"

- ip address 11.0.0.1 255.0.0.0

! </submode> "interface"

To display all mismatched commands, use the show redundancy config-sync failures mcl command.

To clean the MCL, remove all mismatched commands from the active supervisor engine’s running configuration, revalidate the MCL with a modified running configuration using the redundancy config-sync validate mismatched-commands command, then reload the standby supervisor engine.

You could also ignore the MCL by entering the redundancy config-sync ignore mismatched-commands command and reloading the standby supervisor engine; the system changes to SSO mode.

Note If you ignore the mismatched commands, the out-of-sync configuration at the active supervisor engine and the standby supervisor engine still exists.

You can verify the ignored MCL with the show redundancy config-sync ignored mcl command.

If SSO mode cannot be established between the active and standby supervisor engines because of an incompatibility in the configuration file, a mismatched command list (MCL) is generated at the active supervisor engine and a reload into RPR mode is forced for the standby supervisor engine. Subsequent attempts to establish SSO, after removing the offending configuration and rebooting the standby supervisor engine with the exact same image, might cause the C4K_REDUNDANCY-2-IOS_VERSION_CHECK_FAIL and ISSU-3-PEER_IMAGE_INCOMPATIBLE messages to appear because the peer image is listed as incompatible. If the configuration problem can be corrected, you can clear the peer image from the incompatible list with the redundancy config-sync ignore mismatched-commands EXEC command while the peer is in a standby cold (RPR) state. This action allows the standy supervisor engine to boot in standby hot (SSO) state when it reloads.

Examples

The following example shows how to validate removal of entries from the MCL:

Switch# redundancy config-sync validate mismatched-commands

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show redundancy config-sync

Displays an ISSU config-sync failure or the ignored mismatched command list (MCL).

redundancy force-switchover

To force a switchover from the active to the standby supervisor engine, use the redundancy force-switchover command.

redundancy force-switchover

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch (Catalyst 4507R only).

Usage Guidelines

Before using this command, refer to the “Performing a Software Upgrade” section of the Catalyst 4500 Series Switch Cisco IOS Software Configuration Guide for additional information.

The redundancy force-switchover command conducts a manual switchover to the redundant supervisor engine. The redundant supervisor engine becomes the new active supervisor engine running the Cisco IOS image. The modules are reset.

The old active supervisor engine reboots with the new image and becomes the standby supervisor engine.

Examples

The following example shows how to switch over manually from the active to the standby supervisor engine:

Switch# redundancy force-switchover

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

redundancy

Enters the redundancy configuration mode.

show redundancy

Displays redundancy facility information.

redundancy reload

To force a reload of one or both supervisor engines, use the redundancy reload command.

redundancy reload {peer | shelf}

Syntax Description

peer

Reloads the peer unit.

shelf

Reboots both supervisor engines.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch (Catalyst 4507R only).

Usage Guidelines

Before using this command, refer to the “Performing a Software Upgrade” section of the Catalyst 4500 Series Switch Cisco IOS Software Configuration Guide for additional information.

The redundancy reload shelf command conducts a reboot of both supervisor engines. The modules are reset.

Examples

The following example shows how to manually reload one or both supervisor engines:

Switch# redundancy reload shelf

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

redundancy

Enters the redundancy configuration mode.

show redundancy

Displays redundancy facility information.

remote login module

To remotely connect to a specific module, use the remote login module configuration command.

remote login module mod

Syntax Description

mod

Target module for the command.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command applies only to the Access Gateway Module on Catalyst 4500 series switches.

The valid values for mod depends on the chassis used. For example, if you have a Catalyst 4506 chassis, valid values for the module are from 2 to 6. If you have a 4507R chassis, valid values are from 3 to 7.

When you execute the remote login module mod command, the prompt changes to Gateway#

The remote login module command is identical to the session module mod and the attach module mod commands.

Examples

The following example shows how to remotely log in to the Access Gateway Module:

Switch# remote login module 5

Attaching console to module 5

Type 'exit' at the remote prompt to end the session

Gateway>

Related Commands

Command

Description

attach module

Remotely connects to a specific module.

session module

Logs in to the standby supervisor engine using a virtual console.

remote-span

To convert a VLAN into an RSPAN VLAN, use the remote-span command. To convert an RSPAN VLAN to a VLAN, use the no form of this command.

remote-span

no remote-span

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

RSPAN is disabled.

Command Modes

VLAN configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(20)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to convert a VLAN into an RSPAN VLAN:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# vlan 20

Switch(config-vlan)# remote-span

Switch(config-vlan)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

monitor session

Enables the SPAN sessions on interfaces or VLANs.

renew ip dhcp snooping database

To renew the DHCP binding database, use the renew ip dhcp snooping database command.

renew ip dhcp snooping database [validation none] [url]

Syntax Description

validation none

(Optional) Specifies that the checksum associated with the contents of the file specified by the URL is not verified.

url

(Optional) Specifies the file from which the read is performed.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If the URL is not provided, the switch tries to read the file from the configured URL.

Examples

The following example shows how to renew the DHCP binding database while bypassing the CRC checks:

Switch# renew ip dhcp snooping database validation none

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping

Globally enables DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping binding

Sets up and generates a DHCP binding configuration to restore bindings across reboots.

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN or a group of VLANs.

show ip dhcp snooping

Displays the DHCP snooping configuration.

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries.

rep admin vlan

Use the rep admin vlan global configuration command to configure a Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) administrative VLAN for REP to transmit hardware flood layer (HFL) messages. Use the no form of this command to return to the default configuration with VLAN 1 as the administrative VLAN.

rep admin vlan vlan-id [segment segment-id]

no rep admin vlan vlan-id [segment segment-id]

Syntax Description

vlan-id

Configures specified VLAN as the administrative VLAN for the entire domain. The VLAN ID range is from 1 to 4094. The default is VLAN 1; the range to configure is 2 to 4094.

segment segment-id

Configures the administrative VLAN for the specified segment. The segment ID range is from 1 to 1024.

Command Default

The administrative VLAN is VLAN 1.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(44)SG

This command was introduced.

3.8.0E and 15.2.(4)E

The segment keyword was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

If the VLAN does not already exist, this command does not create the VLAN.

To avoid the delay introduced by relaying messages in software for link-failure or VLAN-blocking notification during load balancing, REP floods packets at the hardware flood layer (HFL) to a regular multicast address. These messages are flooded to the whole network, not just the REP segment. Switches that do not belong to the segment treat them as data traffic. You can control flooding of these messages by configuring an administrative VLAN for the entire domain or segment-wise.

If no REP administrative VLAN is configured, the default is VLAN 1.

There can be any number of administrative VLANs as long as it is per segment.

The administrative VLAN cannot be the RSPAN VLAN.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure VLAN 100 as the REP administrative VLAN:

Switch(config)# rep admin vlan 100

The following example shows how to create an administrative VLAN per segment. Here VLAN 2 is configured as the administrative VLAN only for REP segment 2. All remaining segments that are not configured otherwise will, by default, have VLAN 1 as the administrative VLAN.

Switch# configure terminal

Switch (config)# rep admin vlan 2 segment 2

Switch (config)# end

You can verify your settings by entering the show interface rep detail privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces rep detail

Displays detailed REP configuration and status for all interfaces or the specified interface, including the administrative VLAN.

rep block port

Use the rep block port interface configuration command on the REP primary edge port to configure Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) VLAN load balancing. Use the no form of this command to return to the default configuration.

rep block port {id port-id | neighbor_offset | preferred} vlan {vlan-list | all}

no rep block port {id port-id | neighbor_offset | preferred}

Syntax Description

id port-id

Identify the VLAN blocking alternate port by entering the unique port ID that is automatically generated when REP is enabled. The REP port ID is a 16-character hexadecimal value. You can view the port ID for an interface by entering the show interface interface-id rep detail command.

neighbor_offset

Identify the VLAN blocking alternate port by entering the offset number of a neighbor. The range is –256 to +256; a value of 0 is invalid. The primary edge port has an offset number of 1; positive numbers above 1 identify downstream neighbors of the primary edge port. Negative numbers identify the secondary edge port (offset number -1) and its downstream neighbors.

preferred

Identify the VLAN blocking alternate port as the segment port on which you entered the rep segment segment-id preferred interface configuration command.
keyword does not ensure that the preferred port is the alternate port; it gives it preference over other similar ports.

vlan

Identify the VLANs to be blocked.

vlan-list

Enter a VLAN ID from 1 to 4094 or a range or sequence of VLANs (such as 1-3, 22, 41-44) of VLANs to be blocked.

all

Enter to block all VLANs.

Command Default

The default behavior after you enter the rep preempt segment privileged EXEC command (for manual preemption) is to block all VLANs at the primary edge port. This behavior remains until you configure the rep block port command.

If the primary edge port cannot determine which port is to be the alternate port, the default action is no preemption and no VLAN load balancing.

Command Modes

Interface configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(44)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

You must enter this command on the REP primary edge port.

When you select an alternate port by entering an offset number, this number identifies the downstream neighbor port of an edge port. The primary edge port has an offset number of 1; positive numbers above 1 identify downstream neighbors of the primary edge port. Negative numbers identify the secondary edge port (offset number -1) and its downstream neighbors. See Neighbor Offset Numbers in a REP SegmentFigure 2-2.

Figure 2-2 Neighbor Offset Numbers in a REP Segment

Note You would never enter an offset value of 1 because that is the offset number of the primary edge port itself.

If you have configured a preempt delay time by entering the rep preempt delay seconds interface configuration command and a link failure and recovery occurs, VLAN load balancing begins after the configured preemption time period elapses without another link failure. The alternate port specified in the load-balancing configuration blocks the configured VLANs and unblocks all other segment ports. If the primary edge port cannot determine the alternate port for VLAN balancing, the default action is no preemption.

Each port in a segment has a unique port ID. The port ID format is similar to the one used by the spanning tree algorithm: a port number (unique on the bridge) associated to a MAC address (unique in the network). To determine the port ID of a port, enter the show interface interface-id rep detail privileged EXEC command.

There is no limit to the number of times that you can enter the rep block port id port-id vlan vlan-list interface configuration command. You can block an unlimited number, range, or sequence of VLANs.

When you use the rep block port id port-id vlan vlan-list interface configuration command on a REP primary edge port to block a VLAN list and then use the same command to block another VLAN list on the same port, the second VLAN list does not replace the first VLAN list but is appended to the first VLAN list.

When you use the rep block port id port-id vlan vlan-list interface configuration command on a REP primary edge port to block a VLAN list on one port and then use the same command to block another VLAN list on another port, the original port number and VLAN list are overwritten.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure REP VLAN load balancing on the Switch B primary edge port (Gigabit Ethernet port 1/0/1) and to configure Gigabit Ethernet port 1/1 of Switch A as the alternate port to block VLANs 1 to 100. The alternate port is identified by its port ID, shown in bold in the output of the show interface rep detail command for the Switch A port.

Switch A# show interface gigabitethernet1/1 rep detail

GigabitEthernet1/1 REP enabled

Segment-id: 2 (Segment)

PortID: 0080001647FB1780

Preferred flag: No

Operational Link Status: TWO_WAY

Current Key: 007F001647FB17800EEE

Port Role: Open

Blocked Vlan: <empty>

Admin-vlan: 1

Preempt Delay Timer: 35 sec

Load-balancing block port: none

Load-balancing block vlan: none

STCN Propagate to:

PDU/TLV statistics:

LSL PDU rx: 107122, tx: 192493

Switch B# config t

Switch (config)# interface gigabitethernet1/0/1

Switch (config-if)# rep block port id 0080001647FB1780 vlan 1-100

Switch (config-if)# exit

The following example shows how to configure VLAN load balancing by using a neighbor offset number and how to verify the configuration by entering the show interfaces rep detail privileged EXEC command:

Switch# config t

Switch (config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch (config-if)# rep block port 6 vlan 1-110

Switch (config-if)# end

Switch# show interface GigabitEthernet1/1 rep detail

GigabitEthernet1/1 REP enabled

Segment-id: 2 (Segment)

PortID: 0080001647FB1780

Preferred flag: No

Operational Link Status: TWO_WAY

Current Key: 007F001647FB178009C3

Port Role: Open

Blocked Vlan: <empty>

Admin-vlan: 3

Preempt Delay Timer: 35 sec

Load-balancing block port: 6

Load-balancing block vlan: 1-110

STCN Propagate to: none

LSL PDU rx: 1466780, tx: 3056637

HFL PDU rx: 2, tx: 0

BPA TLV rx: 1, tx: 2119695

BPA (STCN, LSL) TLV rx: 0, tx: 0

BPA (STCN, HFL) TLV rx: 0, tx: 0

EPA-ELECTION TLV rx: 757406, tx: 757400

EPA-COMMAND TLV rx: 1, tx: 1

EPA-INFO TLV rx: 178326, tx: 178323

Related Commands

Command

Description

rep preempt delay

Configures a waiting period after a segment port failure and recovery before REP VLAN load balancing is triggered.

rep preempt segment

Manually starts REP VLAN load balancing on a segment.

show interfaces rep detail

Displays REP detailed configuration and status for all interfaces or the specified interface, including the administrative VLAN.

rep lsl-age-timer

Use the rep lsl-age-timer interface configuration command on a Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) port to configure the Link Status Layer (LSL) age timer for the time period that the REP interface remains up without receiving a hello from the REP neighbor. Use the no form of this command to return to the default time.

rep lsl-age timer value

no rep lsl-age timer

Syntax Description

value

The age-out time in milliseconds. The range is from 120 to 10000 ms in 40-ms increments. The default is 5000 ms (5 seconds).

Command Default

The REP link shuts down if it does not receive a hello message from a neighbor within 5000 ms.

Command Modes

Interface configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(44)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

The LSL hello timer is set to the age-timer value divided by 3 so that there should be at least two LSL hellos sent during the LSL age-timer period. If no hellos are received within that time, the REP link shuts down.

In Cisco IOS Release 12.2(52)SE, the LSL age-timer range changed from 3000 to 10000 ms in 500-ms increments to 120 to 10000 ms in 40-ms increments. If the REP neighbor device is not running Cisco IOS Release 12.2(52)SE or later, you must use the shorter time range because the device does not accept values out of the earlier range.

EtherChannel port channel interfaces do not support LSL age-timer values less than 1000 ms. If you try to configure a value less than 1000 ms on a port channel, you receive an error message and the command is rejected.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the REP LSL age timer on a REP link to 7000 ms:

Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# rep lsl-age-timer 7000

Switch(config-if)# exit

You can verify the configured ageout time by entering the show interfaces rep detail privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces rep [detail]

Displays REP configuration and status for all interfaces or the specified interface, including the configured LSL age-out timer value.

rep preempt delay

Use the rep preempt delay interface configuration command on the REP primary edge port to configure a waiting period after a segment port failure and recovery before Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) VLAN load balancing is triggered. Use the no form of this command to remove the configured delay.

rep preempt delay seconds

no rep preempt delay

Syntax Description

seconds

Set the number of seconds to delay REP preemption. The range is 15 to 300.

Command Default

No preemption delay is set. If you do not enter the rep preempt delay command, the default is manual preemption with no delay.

Command Modes

Interface configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(44)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

You must enter this command on the REP primary edge port.

You must enter this command and configure a preempt time delay if you want VLAN load balancing to automatically trigger after a link failure and recovery.

If VLAN load balancing is configured, after a segment port failure and recovery, the REP primary edge port starts a delay timer before VLAN load balancing occurs. Note that the timer restarts after each link failure. When the timer expires, the REP primary edge alerts the alternate port to perform VLAN load balancing (configured by using the rep block port interface configuration command) and prepares the segment for the new topology. The configured VLAN list is blocked at the alternate port, and all other VLANs are blocked at the primary edge port.

Do not configure VLAN load balancing on an interface that carries Ethernet over multiprotocol label switching (EoMPLS) traffic. VLAN load balancing across the REP ring might cause some of the EoMPLS traffic to not be forwarded.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure REP preemption time delay of 100 seconds on the primary edge port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/0/1

Switch(config-if)# rep preempt delay 100

Switch(config-if)# exit

You can verify your settings by entering the show interfaces rep privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

rep block port

Configures VLAN load balancing.

show interfaces rep [detail]

Displays REP configuration and status for all interfaces or the specified interface.

rep preempt segment

Use the rep preempt segment privileged EXEC command to manually start Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) VLAN load balancing on a segment.

rep preempt segment segment_id

Syntax Description

segment-id

ID of the REP segment. The range is from 1 to 1024.

Command Default

Manual preemption is the default behavior.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(44)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

When you enter the rep preempt segment segment-id command, a confirmation message appears before the command is executed because preemption can cause network disruption.

Enter this command on the switch on the segment that has the primary edge port.

If you do not configure VLAN load balancing, entering this command results in the default behavior—the primary edge port blocks all VLANs.

You configure VLAN load balancing by entering the rep block port {id port-id | neighbor_offset | preferred} vlan {vlan-list | all} interface configuration command on the REP primary edge port before you manually start preemption.

There is not a no version of this command.

Examples

The following example shows how to manually trigger REP preemption on segment 100 with the confirmation message:

Switch)# rep preempt segment 100

The command will cause a momentary traffic disruption.

Do you still want to continue? [confirm]

Related Commands

Command

Description

rep block port

Configures VLAN load balancing.

show interfaces rep [detail]

Displays REP configuration and status for all interfaces or the specified interface.

rep segment

Use the rep segment interface configuration command to enable Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) on the interface and to assign a segment ID to it. Use the no form of this command to disable REP on the interface.

rep segment segment-id [edge [no-neighbor] [primary]] [preferred]

no rep segment

Syntax Description

segment-id

Assign a segment ID to the interface. The range is from 1 to 1024.

edge

(Optional) Identify the interface as one of the two REP edge ports. Entering the edge keyword without the primary keyword configures the port as the secondary edge port.

no-neighbor

(Optional) Configure a segment edge with no external REP neighbor.

primary

(Optional) On an edge port, specify that the port is the primary edge port. A segment has only one primary edge port. If you configure two ports in a segment as the primary edge port, for example ports on different switches, the REP selects one of them to serve as the segment primary edge port.

preferred

(Optional) Specify that the port is the preferred alternate port or the preferred port for VLAN load balancing.

Note Configuring a port as preferred does not guarantee that it becomes the alternate port; it merely gives it a slight edge among equal contenders. The alternate port is usually a previously failed port.

Command Default

REP is disabled on the interface.

When REP is enabled on an interface, the default is for the port to be a regular segment port.

Command Modes

Interface configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(44)SG

This command was introduced.

15(02)SG

The no-neighbor keyword was added.

Usage Guidelines

REP ports must be Layer 2 trunk ports. A non-ES REP port can be either an IEEE 802.1Q trunk port or an ISL trunk port.

REP ports should not be configured as one of these port types:

- SPAN destination port

- Private VLAN port

- Tunnel port

- Access port

You must configure two edge ports on each REP segment, a primary edge port and a port to act as a secondary edge port. If you configure two ports in a segment as the primary edge port, for example ports on different switches, the configuration is allowed, but the REP selects one of them to serve as the segment primary edge port.

REP is supported on EtherChannels, but not on an individual port that belongs to an EtherChannel.

- REP ports follow these rules:

– There is no limit to the number of REP ports on a switch; however, only two ports on a switch can belong to the same REP segment.

– If only one port on a switch is configured in a segment, the port should be an edge port.

– If two ports on a switch belong to the same segment, they must be both edge ports, both regular segment ports, or one regular port and one edge no-neighbor port. An edge port and regular segment port on a switch cannot belong to the same segment.

– If two ports on a switch belong to the same segment and one is configured as an edge port and one as a regular segment port (a misconfiguration), the edge port is treated as a regular segment port.

If you configure two ports in a segment as the primary edge port, for example ports on different switches, the REP selects one of them to serve as the segment primary edge port. Enter the show rep topology privileged EXEC command on a port in the segment to verify which port is the segment primary edge port.

REP interfaces come up in a blocked state and remain in a blocked state until notified that it is safe to unblock. You need to be aware of this to avoid sudden connection losses.

You should configure REP only in networks with redundancy. Configuring REP in a network without redundancy causes loss of connectivity.

In networks where ports on a neighboring switch do not support REP, you can configure the non-REP facing ports as edge no-neighbor ports. These ports inherit all properties of edge ports and you can configure them as any other edge port, including to send STP or REP topology change notices to the aggregation switch. In this case, the STP topology change notice (TCN) that is sent is a multiple spanning-tree (MST) STP message.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable REP on a regular (nonedge) segment port:

Switch (config)# interface gigabitethernet1/0/1

Switch (config-if)# rep segment 100

The following example shows how to enable REP on a port and identify the port as the REP primary edge port:

Switch (config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch (config-if)# rep segment 100 edge primary

The following example shows how to configure the same configuration when the interface has no external REP neighbor:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch (config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch (config-if)# rep segment 100 edge no-neighbor primary

The following example shows how to enable REP on a port and identify the port as the REP secondary edge port:

Switch (config)# interface GigabitEthernet1/1

Switch (config-if)# rep segment 100 edge

You can verify your settings by entering the show interfaces rep privileged EXEC command. To verify which port in the segment is the primary edge port, enter the show rep topology privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces rep [detail]

Displays REP configuration and status for all interfaces or the specified interface.

show rep topology [detail]

Displays information about all ports in the segment, including which one was configured and selected as the primary edge port.

rep stcn

Use the rep stcn interface configuration command on a Resilient Ethernet Protocol (REP) edge port to configure the port to send REP segment topology change notifications (STCNs) to another interface, to other segments, or to Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) networks. Use the no form of this command to disable the sending of STCNs to the interface, segment, or STP network.

rep stcn {interface interface-id | segment id-list | stp}

no rep stcn {interface | segment | stp}

Syntax Description

interface interface-id

Identify a physical interface or port channel to receive STCNs.

segment id-list

Identify one REP segment or list of segments to receive STCNs. The range is 1 to 1024. You can also configure a sequence of segments (for example 3-5, 77, 100).

stp

Send STCNs to an STP network.

Command Default

Transmission of STCNs to other interfaces, segments, or STP networks is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(44)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

Enter this command on a segment edge port.

You use this command to notify other portions of the Layer 2 network of topology changes that occur in the local REP segment. This removes obsolete entries in the Layer 2 forwarding table in other parts of the network, which allows faster network convergence.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a REP edge port to send STCNs to segments 25 to 50:

Switch (config)# interface GigabitEthernet1/1

Switch (config-if)# rep stcn segment 25-50

Switch (config-if)# exit

You can verify your settings by entering the show interfaces rep detail privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces rep [detail]

Displays REP configuration and status for all interfaces or the specified interface.

reset

To leave the proposed new VLAN database but remain in VLAN configuration mode and reset the proposed new database to be identical to the VLAN database currently implemented, use the reset command.

reset

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

VLAN configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to reset the proposed new VLAN database to the current VLAN database:

Switch(vlan-config)# reset

RESET completed.

Switch(vlan-config)#

revision

To set the MST configuration revision number, use the revision command. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

revision version

no revision

Syntax Description

version

Configuration revision number; valid values are from 0 to 65535.

Command Default

Revision version is set to 0.

Command Modes

MST configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If two Catalyst 4500 series switches have the same configuration but have different configuration revision numbers, they are considered to be part of two different regions.

Caution Be careful when using the revision command to set the MST configuration revision number because a mistake can put the switch in a different region.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the configuration revision number:

Switch(config-mst)# revision 5

Switch(config-mst)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

instance

Maps a VLAN or a set of VLANs to an MST instance.

name

Sets the MST region name.

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST protocol information.

spanning-tree mst configuration

Enters the MST configuration submode.

sampler (netflow-lite monitor submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is supported only on Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To activate sampling on an interface in netflow-lite monitor submode, use the sampler command. To delete a sampler, use the no form of this command.

sampler sampler-name

no sampler sampler-name

Syntax Description

sampler-name

Specifies a sampler.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You can enter this command under the physical port interface mode, port channel interface, or config VLAN mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a monitor on a port interface Gigabit 1/3:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# int GigabitEthernet1/3

Switch(config-if)# netflow-lite monitor 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# sampler sampler1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# average-packet-size 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-monitor)# exit

Switch(config-if)# exit

Switch(config)# exit

Switch# show netflow-lite monitor 1 interface gi1/3

Interface GigabitEthernet1/3:

Netflow-lite Monitor-1:

Sampler: sampler1

Exporter: exporter1

Average Packet Size: 128

Statistics:

Packets exported: 0

Packets observed: 0

Packets dropped: 0

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite sampler privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

average-packet-size (netflow-lite monitor submode)

Specifies the average packet size at the observation point.

exporter (netflow-lite monitor submode)

Assigns an exporter in netflow-lite monitor submode.

service-policy (interface configuration)

To attach a policy map to an interface or to apply different QoS policies on VLANs that an interface belongs to, use the service-policy command. To remove a policy map from an interface, use the no form of this command.

service-policy {input | output} policy-map name

no service-policy {input | output} policy-map name

Syntax Description

input

Specifies the input policy maps.

output

Specifies the output policy maps.

policy-map name

Name of a previously configured policy map.

Command Default

A policy map is not attached to an interface or a VLAN.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EWA

Support for applying different QoS policies on VLANs was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

Layer 2 interfaces can be part of multiple VLANs (for example, a typical trunk port). In conjunction with the vlan-range command, you can use the service-policy command to specify different QoS policies on different VLANs.

Note This capability is restricted to Layer 2 interfaces.

You can apply a service policy under an interface as well as a VLAN range at the same time. However, this is allowed only when the interface policy has only queuing actions whereas a VLAN has only non-queueing actions (QoS marking and/or policing) actions.

To attach a service policy to a VLAN, the VLAN configuration mode has to be used.

Examples

The following example shows how to attach a policy map to Fast Ethernet interface 5/20:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 5/20

Switch(config-if)# service-policy input pmap1

Switch(config-if)# end

The following example shows how to apply policy map p1 for traffic in VLANs 20 and 400, and policy map p2 for traffic in VLANs 300 through 301:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface gigabitEthernet 6/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode trunk

Switch(config-if)# vlan-range 20,400

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# service-policy input p1

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# exit

Switch(config-if)# vlan-range 300-301

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# service-policy output p2

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# end

Switch# show policy-map interface gigabitEthernet 6/1 vlan 20

GigabitEthernet6/1 vlan 20

Service-policy input: p1

Class-map: class-default (match-any)

0 packets

Match: any

0 packets

police: Per-interface

Conform: 0 bytes Exceed: 0 bytes

Switch# show policy-map interface gigabitEthernet 6/1

GigabitEthernet6/1 vlan 20

Service-policy input: p1

Class-map: class-default (match-any)

0 packets

Match: any

0 packets

police: Per-interface

Conform: 0 bytes Exceed: 0 bytes

GigabitEthernet6/1 vlan 300

Service-policy output: p2

Class-map: class-default (match-any)

0 packets

Match: any

0 packets

police: Per-interface

Conform: 0 bytes Exceed: 0 bytes

GigabitEthernet6/1 vlan 301

Service-policy output: p2

Class-map: class-default (match-any)

0 packets

Match: any

0 packets

police: Per-interface

Conform: 0 bytes Exceed: 0 bytes

GigabitEthernet6/1 vlan 400

Service-policy input: p1

Class-map: class-default (match-any)

0 packets

Match: any

0 packets

police: Per-interface

Conform: 0 bytes Exceed: 0 bytes

The following example shows how to attach a policy map to a VLAN using a Supervisor Engine 6-E:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)#vlan configuration 20

Switch(config-vlan-config)#service-policy out policy-vlan

Switch(config-vlan-config)#end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

class-map

Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name you specify and to enter class-map configuration mode.

policy-map

Creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

service-policy (interface configuration)

Attaches a policy map to an interface.

show policy-map interface vlan

Displays the QoS policy-map information applied to a specific VLAN on an interface.

service-policy (policy-map class)

To create a service policy that is a quality of service (QoS) policy within a policy map (called a hierarchical service policy), use the service-policy policy-map class configuration command. To disable the service policy within a policy map, use the no form of this command.

service-policy policy-map-name

no service-policy policy-map-name

Syntax Description

policy-map-name

Name of the policy map.

Command Default

No service policies maps are defined.

Command Modes

Policy-map class configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(40)SG

Added support for Supervisor Engine 6-E and Catalyst 4900M chassis.

Usage Guidelines

Use the service-policy command only in a hierarchical policy map attached to a physical port. This command is valid in policy maps at level two of the hierarchy.

You can create a hierarchy by having the parent policy map specify marking and/or policing actions and having the child policy map specify the queueing actions.

If you enter this command in policy-map class configuration mode, you return to policy-map configuration mode by using the exit command. To return to privileged EXEC mode, use the end command.

Examples

The following example shows how to create a hierarchical service policy in the service policy called “parent”:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# policy-map child

Switch(config-pmap)# class voice

Switch(config-pmap-c)# priority

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# exit

Switch(config)# policy-map parent

Switch(config-pmap)# class class1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 32k

Switch(config-pmap-c)# service-policy child

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

bandwidth

Creates a signaling class structure that can be referred to by its name.

class

Specifies the name of the class whose traffic policy you want to create or change.

dbl

Enables active queue management on a transmit queue used by a class of traffic.

policy-map

Creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

priority

Enables the strict priority queue (low-latency queueing [LLQ]) and to give priority to a class of traffic belonging to a policy map attached to a physical port.

random-detect (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Enables Weighted Random Early Detection (WRED) or distributed WRED (DWRED).

shape (class-based queueing)

Enables traffic shaping a class of traffic in a policy map attached to a physical port.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

service-policy input (control-plane)

To attach a policy map to a control plane for aggregate control plane services, use the service-policy input command. Use the no form of this command to remove a service policy from a control plane.

service-policy input policy-map-name

Syntax Description

input

Applies the specified service policy to the packets that are entering the control plane.

policy-map-name

Name of a service policy map (created using the policy-map command) to be attached.

Command Default

No service policy is specified.

Command Modes

Control-plane configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

In this release, the only policy-map accepted on the control-plane is system-cpp-policy. It is already attached to the control-plane at start up. If not (due to some error conditions), it is recommended to use the global macro system-cpp command to attach it to the control-plane. The system-cpp-policy created by the system contains system predefined classes. For these predefined classes, you can change the policing parameters but you should not make any other change to the classes.

You can define your own class-maps and append them to the end of the system-cpp-policy policy-map.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure trusted hosts with source addresses 10.1.1.1 and 10.1.1.2 to forward Telnet packets to the control plane without constraint, while allowing all remaining Telnet packets to be policed at the specified rate:

Switch(config)# access-list 140 deny tcp host 10.1.1.1 any eq telnet

! Allow 10.1.1.2 trusted host traffic.

Switch(config)# access-list 140 deny tcp host 10.1.1.2 any eq telnet

! Rate limit all other Telnet traffic.

Switch(config)# access-list 140 permit tcp any any eq telnet

! Define class-map “telnet-class.”

Switch(config)# class-map telnet-class

Switch(config-cmap)# match access-group 140

Switch(config-cmap)# exit

Switch(config)# policy-map control-plane-policy

Switch(config-pmap)# class telnet-class

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 80000 conform transmit exceed drop

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# exit

! Define aggregate control plane service for the active Route Processor.

Switch(config)# control-plane

Switch(config-cp)# service-policy input control-plane-policy

Switch(config-cp)# exit

Related Commands

Command

Description

control-plane

Enters control-plane configuration mode.

macro global apply system-cpp

Applies the control plane policing default template to the switch.

policy-map

Creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

show policy-map control-plane

Displays the configuration either of a class or of all classes for the policy map of a control plane.

session module

Note This command is only supported in SSO mode and does not work in RPR mode.

To log in to the standby supervisor engine using a virtual console, use the session module configuration command.

session module mod

Syntax Description

mod

Target module for the command.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Catalyst 4500 series switches can be configured with two supervisor engines to provide redundancy. When the switch is powered, one of the supervisor engines becomes active and remains active until a switchover occurs. The other supervisor engine remains in standby mode.

Each supervisor engine has its own console port. Access to the standby supervisor engine is possible only through the console port of the standby supervisor engine. Therefore, you must connect to the standby console to access, monitor or debug the standby supervisor.

The virtual console for the standby supervisor engine enables you to access the standby console from the active supervisor engine without requiring a physical connection to the standby console. It uses IPC over EOBC to communicate with the standby supervisor engine and emulates the standby console on the active supervisor engine. Only one active standby console session is active at any time.

The virtual console for the standby supervisor engine allows users who are logged onto the active supervisor engine to remotely execute show commands on the standby supervisor engine and view the results on the active supervisor engine. Virtual console is available only from the active supervisor engine.

You can access the standby virtual console from the active supervisor engine with the attach module, session module, or remote login commands on the active supervisor engine. You must be in privilege EXEC mode (level 15) to run these commands to access the standby console.

Note The session module command is identical to the attach module mod and the remote login module mod commands.

Once you enter the standby virtual console, the terminal prompt automatically changes to hostname-standby-console#, where hostname is the configured name of the switch. The prompt is restored back to the original prompt when you exit the virtual console.

You exit the virtual console with the exit or quit commands. When the inactivity period of the terminal on the active supervisor engine where you logged in exceeds the configured idle time, you are automatically logged out of the terminal on the active supervisor engine. In such a case, the virtual console session is also terminated. Virtual console session is also automatically terminated when the standby is rebooted. After the standby boots up, you need to create another virtual console session.

The following limitations apply to the standby virtual console:

- All commands on the virtual console run to completion. It does not provide the auto-more feature; it behaves as if the terminal length 0 command has been executed. It is also non-interactive. Therefore, a running command cannot be interrupted or aborted by any key sequence on the active supervisor engine. If a command produces considerable output, the virtual console displays it on the supervisor screen.

- The virtual console is non-interactive. Because the virtual console does not detect the interactive nature of a command, any command that requires user interaction causes the virtual console to wait until the RPC timer aborts the command.

- The virtual console timer is set to 60 seconds. The virtual console returns to its prompt after 60 seconds. During this time, you cannot abort the command from the keyboard. You must wait for the timer to expire before you continue.

- You cannot use virtual console to view debug and syslog messages that are being displayed on the standby supervisor engine. The virtual console only displays the output of commands that are executed from the virtual console. Other information that is displayed on the real standby console does not appear on the virtual console.

Examples

To log in to the standby supervisor engine using a virtual console, do the following:

Switch# session module 2

Connecting to standby virtual console

Type "exit" or "quit" to end this session

Switch-standby-console# exit

Switch#

If the standby console is not enabled, the following message appears:

Switch-standby-console#

Standby console disabled.

Valid commands are: exit, logout

Related Commands

Command

Description

attach module

Remotely connects to a specific module.

remote login module

Remotely connects to a specific module.

set

To mark IP traffic by setting a class of service (CoS), a Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP), or IP-precedence in the packet, use the set policy-map class configuration command. To remove the traffic classification, use the no form of this command.

set {cos new-cos | [ip] {dscp new-dscp | precedence new-precedence} | qos group value}

no set cos new-cos | ip {dscp new-dscp | precedence new-precedence} | qos group value}

Syntax Description

cos new-cos

New CoS value assigned to the classified traffic. The range is 0 to 7.

ip dscp new-dscp

New DSCP value assigned to the classified traffic. The range is 0 to 63. You also can enter a mnemonic name for a commonly used value. The specified value sets the type of service (ToS) traffic class byte in the IPv4/IPv6 packet header.

ip precedence new-precedence

New IP-precedence value assigned to the classified traffic. The range is 0 to 7. You also can enter a mnemonic name for a commonly used value. The specified value sets the precedence bit in the IP header.

qos group value

Internal QoS group assigned to a classified packet on ingress to an interface.

Command Default

No marking is enabled on packets.

Command Modes

Policy-map class configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(40)SG

Added support for Supervisor Engine 6-E and Catalyst 4900M chassis.

Usage Guidelines

You can use the set command only in class-level classes.

The set dscp new-dscp and the set precedence new-precedence commands are the same as the set ip dscp new-dscp and the set ip precedence new-precedence commands.

For the set dscp new-dscp or the set precedence new-precedence command, you can enter a mnemonic name for a commonly used value. For example, you can enter the set dscp af11 command, which is the as same entering the set dscp 10 command. You can enter the set precedence critical command, which is the same as entering the set precedence 5 command. For a list of supported mnemonics, enter the set dscp ? or the set precedence ? command to see the command-line help strings.

You can configure the set cos new-cos, set dscp new-dscp, or set precedence new-precedence command in an ingress and an egress policy map attached to an interface or VLAN.

To return to policy-map configuration mode, use the exit command. To return to privileged EXEC mode, use the end command.

Examples

The following example shows how to create a policy map called p1 with CoS values assigned to different traffic types. Class maps for voice and video-data have already been created.

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# policy-map p1

Switch(config-pmap)# class voice

Switch(config-pmap-c)# set cos 1

Switch(config-pmap)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# class video-data

Switch(config-pmap-c)# set cos 2

Switch(config-pmap)# exit

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

class

Specifies the name of the class whose traffic policy you want to create or change.

policy-map

Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

trust

Defines a trust state for traffic classified through the class policy-map configuration command.

set cos

To set the Layer 2 class of service (CoS) value of a packet, use the set cos command in policy-map class configuration mode. To remove a specific CoS value setting, use the no form of this command.

set cos {cos-value | from-field [table table-map-name]}

no set cos {cos-value | from-field [table table-map-name]}

Syntax Description

cos-value

Specific IEEE 802.1Q CoS value from 0 to 7.

from-field

Specific packet-marking category to be used to set the CoS value of the packet. If you are using a table map for mapping and converting packet-marking values, this establishes the “map from” packet-marking category. Packet-marking category keywords are as follows:

- precedence

- dscp

- cos

- qos group

table

(Optional) Indicates that the values set in a specified table map will be used to set the CoS value.

table-map-name

(Optional) Name of the table map used to specify the CoS value. The table map name can be a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters.

Command Default

No CoS value is set for the outgoing packet.

Command Modes

Policy-map class configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on Supervisor Engine 6E and Catalyst 4900M.

Usage Guidelines

The set cos command can be used in an ingress as well as an egress policy map attached to an interface or VLAN.

You can use this command to specify the “from-field” packet-marking category to be used for mapping and setting the CoS value. The “from-field” packet-marking categories are as follows:

- Precedence

- Differentiated services code point (DSCP)

- Cost of Service (CoS)

- Quality of Service (QoS) group

If you specify a “from-field” category but do not specify the table keyword and the applicable table-map-name argument, the default action will be to copy the value associated with the “from-field” category as the CoS value. For instance, if you configure the set cos precedence command, the precedence value will be copied and used as the CoS value.

You can do the same for the DSCP marking category. That is, you can configure the set cos dscp command, and the DSCP value will be copied and used as the CoS value.

Note If you configure the set cos dscp command, only the first three bits (the class selector bits) of the DSCP field are used.

Note If you configure the set cos qos group command, only the three least significant bits of the qos group field are used.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a policy map called cos-set and assign different CoS values for different types of traffic. This example assumes that the class maps called voice and video-data have already been created.

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# policy-map cos-set

Switch(config-pmap)# class voice

Switch(config-pmap-c)# set cos 1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# class video-data

Switch(config-pmap-c)# set cos 2

Switch(config-pmap-c)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to configure a policy map called policy-cos and to use the values defined in a table map called table-map1. The table map called table-map1 was created earlier with the table-map (value mapping) command. For more information about the table-map (value mapping) command, see the table-map (value mapping) command page.

The following example shows how the setting of the CoS value is based on the precedence value defined in table-map1:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# policy-map policy-cos

Switch(config-pmap)# class class-default

Switch(config-pmap-c)# set cos precedence table table-map1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

match (class-map configuration)

Defines the match criteria for a class map.

policy-map

Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

service-policy (policy-map class)

Creates a service policy that is a quality of service (QoS) policy within a policy map.

set dscp

Marks a packet by setting the differentiated services code point (DSCP) value in the type of service (ToS) byte.

set precedence

Sets the precedence value in the packet header.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

set dscp

To mark a packet by setting the differentiated services code point (DSCP) value in the type of service (ToS) byte, use the set dscp command in policy-map class configuration mode. To remove a previously set DSCP value, use the no form of this command.

set [ip] dscp {dscp-value | from-field [table table-map-name]}

no set [ip] dscp {dscp-value | from-field [table table-map-name]

Syntax Description

ip

(Optional) Specifies that the match is for IPv4 packets only. If not used, the match is on both IPv4 and IPv6 packets.

dscp-value

A number from 0 to 63 that sets the DSCP value. A mnemonic name for commonly used values can also be used.

from-field

Specific packet-marking category to be used to set the DSCP value of the packet. If you are using a table map for mapping and converting packet-marking values, this establishes the “map from” packet-marking category. Packet-marking category keywords are as follows:

- cos

- qos-group

- dscp

- precedence

table

(Optional) Used in conjunction with the from-field argument. Indicates that the values set in a specified table map will be used to set the DSCP value.

table-map-name

(Optional) Used in conjunction with the table keyword. Name of the table map used to specify the DSCP value. The name can be a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters.

Command Default

Disabled

Command Modes

Policy-map class configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(40)SG

Added support for from-field on Supervisor Engine 6-E and Catalyst 4900M.

Usage Guidelines

Once the DSCP bit is set, other quality of service (QoS) features can then operate on the bit settings.

DSCP and Precedence Values Are Mutually Exclusive

The set dscp command cannot be used with the set precedence command to mark the same packet. The two values, DSCP and precedence, are mutually exclusive. A packet can have one value or the other, but not both.

You can use this command to specify the “from-field” packet-marking category to be used for mapping and setting the DSCP value. The “from-field” packet-marking categories are as follows:

- Class of service (CoS)

- QoS group

- Precedence

- Differentiated services code point (DSCP)

If you specify a “from-field” category but do not specify the table keyword and the applicable table-map-name argument, the default action will be to copy the value associated with the “from-field” category as the DSCP value. For instance, if you configure the set dscp cos command, the CoS value will be copied and used as the DSCP value.

Note The CoS field is a three-bit field, and the DSCP field is a six-bit field. If you configure the set dscp cos command, only the three bits of the CoS field will be used.

If you configure the set dscp qos-group command, the QoS group value will be copied and used as the DSCP value.

The valid value range for the DSCP is a number from 0 to 63. The valid value range for the QoS group is a number from 0 to 63.

Set DSCP Values in IPv6 Environments

When this command is used in IPv6 environments, the default match occurs on both IP and IPv6 packets. However, the actual packets set by this function are only those which meet the match criteria of the class-map containing this function.

Set DSCP Values for IPv6 Packets Only

To set DSCP values for IPv6 values only, the match protocol ipv6 command must also be used. Without that command, the DSCP match defaults to match both IPv4 and IPv6 packets.

Set DSCP Values for IPv4 Packets Only

To set DSCP values for IPv4 packets only, use the ip keyword in the match command for classification. Without the ip keyword, the match occurs on both IPv4 and IPv6 packets.

Examples

Packet-marking Values and Table Map

In the following example, the policy map called policy1 is created to use the packet-marking values defined in a table map called table-map1. The table map was created earlier with the table-map (value mapping) command. For more information about the table-map (value mapping) command, see the table-map (value mapping) command page.

The following example shows how the DSCP value is set according to the CoS value defined in the table map called table-map1.

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# policy-map policy1

Switch(config-pmap)# class class-default

Switch(config-pmap-c)# set dscp cos table table-map1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

match (class-map configuration)

Defines the match criteria for a class map.

policy-map

Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

service-policy (policy-map class)

Creates a service policy that is a quality of service (QoS) policy within a policy map.

set cos

Sets IP traffic by setting a class of service (CoS).

set precedence

Sets the precedence value in the packet header.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

show policy-map interface

Displays the statistics and configurations of the input and output policies that are attached to an interface.

table-map (value mapping) (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Modifies metric and tag values when the IP routing table is updated with BGP learned routes.

set precedence

To set the precedence value in the packet header, use the set precedence command in policy-map class configuration mode. To remove the precedence value, use the no form of this command.

set precedence {precedence-value | from-field [table table-map-name]}

no set precedence {precedence-value | from-field [table table-map-name]}

Syntax Description

precedence-value

A number from 0 to 7 that sets the precedence bit in the packet header.

from-field

Specific packet-marking category to be used to set the precedence value of the packet. If you are using a table map for mapping and converting packet-marking values, this argument value establishes the “map from” packet-marking category. Packet-marking category keywords are as follows:

- cos

- qos-group

- dscp

- precedence

table

(Optional) Indicates that the values set in a specified table map will be used to set the precedence value.

table-map-name

(Optional) Name of the table map used to specify a precedence value based on the class of service (CoS) value. The name can be a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters.

Command Default

Disabled

Command Modes

Policy-map class configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(40)SG

Added support for from-field on Supervisor Engine 6-E and Catalyst 4900M.

Usage Guidelines

Command Compatibility

The set precedence command cannot be used with the set dscp command to mark the same packet. The two values, DSCP and precedence, are mutually exclusive. A packet can be one value or the other, but not both.

You can use this command to specify the “from-field” packet-marking category to be used for mapping and setting the precedence value. The “from-field” packet-marking categories are as follows:

- CoS

- QoS group

- DSCP

- Precedence

If you specify a “from-field” category but do not specify the table keyword and the applicable table-map-name argument, the default action will be to copy the value associated with the “from-field” category as the precedence value. For instance, if you configure the set precedence cos command, the CoS value will be copied and used as the precedence value.

You can do the same for the QoS group-marking category. That is, you can configure the set precedence qos-group command, and the QoS group value will be copied and used as the precedence value.

The valid value range for the precedence value is a number from 0 to 7. The valid value range for the QoS group is a number from 0 to 63. Therefore, when configuring the set precedence qos-group command the three least significant bits of qos-group are copied to precedence.

Precedence Values in IPv6 Environments

When this command is used in IPv6 environments it can set the value in both IPv4 and IPv6 packets. However, the actual packets set by this function are only those that meet the match criteria of the class-map containing this function.

Setting Precedence Values for IPv6 Packets Only

To set the precedence values for IPv6 packets only, the match protocol ipv6 command must also be used in the class-map that classified packets for this action. Without the match protocol ipv6 command, the class-map may classify both IPv6 and IPv4 packets, (depending on other match criteria) and the set precedence command will act upon both types of packets.

Setting Precedence Values for IPv4 Packets Only

To set the precedence values for IPv4 packets only, use a command involving the ip keyword like the match ip precedence or match ip dscp command or include the match protocol ip command along with the others in the class map. Without the additional ip keyword, the class-map may match both IPv6 and IPv4 packets (depending on the other match criteria) and the set precedence or set dscp command may act upon both types of packets.

Examples

In the following example, the policy map named policy-cos is created to use the values defined in a table map named table-map1. The table map named table-map1 was created earlier with the table-map (value mapping) command. For more information about the table-map (value mapping) command, see the table-map (value mapping) command page.

The following example shows how the precedence value is set according to the CoS value defined in table-map1.

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# policy-map policy-cos

Switch(config-pmap)# class class-default

Switch(config-pmap-c)# set precedence cos table table-map1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

match (class-map configuration)

Defines the match criteria for a class map.

policy-map

Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

service-policy (policy-map class)

Creates a service policy that is a quality of service (QoS) policy within a policy map.

set cos

Sets IP traffic by setting a class of service (CoS).

set dscp

Marks a packet by setting the differentiated services code point (DSCP) value in the type of service (ToS) byte.

set qos-group

Sets a quality of service (QoS) group identifier (ID) that can be used later to classify packets.

set precedence

Sets the precedence value in the packet header.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

show policy-map interface

Displays the statistics and configurations of the input and output policies that are attached to an interface.

table-map (value mapping) (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Modifies metric and tag values when the IP routing table is updated with BGP learned routes.

set qos-group

To set a quality of service (QoS) group identifier (ID) that can be used later to classify packets, use the set qos-group command in policy-map class configuration mode. To remove the group ID, use the no form of this command.

set qos-group group-id

no set qos-group group-id

Syntax Description

group-id

Group ID number in the range from 0 to 63.

Command Default

The group ID is set to 0.

Command Modes

Policy-map class configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch using a Supervisor Engine 6-E and Catalyst 4900M chassis.

Usage Guidelines

The set qos-group command allows you to associate a group ID with a packet. This association is made through a service-policy attached to an interface or VLAN in the input direction. The group ID can be later used in the output direction to apply QoS service policies to the packet.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the qos-group to 5:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# policy-map p1

Switch(config-pmap)# class c1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# set qos

Switch(config-pmap-c)# set qos-group 5

Switch(config-pmap-c)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

match (class-map configuration)

Defines the match criteria for a class map.

policy-map

Creates or modifies a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

service-policy (policy-map class)

Creates a service policy that is a quality of service (QoS) policy within a policy map.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

show policy-map interface

Displays the statistics and configurations of the input and output policies that are attached to an interface.

shape (class-based queueing)

To enable traffic shaping a class of traffic in a policy map attached to a physical port, use the shape average policy-map class command. Traffic shaping limits the data transmission rate. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

shape average {rate} [bps | kbps | mbps | gbps]

shape average percent {percent_value}

no shape average

Syntax Description

rate

Specifies an average rate for traffic shaping; the range is 16000 to 10000000000. Post-fix notation (k, m, and g) is optional and a decimal point is allowed.

bps

(Optional) Specifies a rate in bits per seconds.

kbps

(Optional) Specifies a rate in kilobytes per seconds.

mbps

(Optional) Specifies a rate in megabits per seconds.

gbps

(Optional) Specifies a rate in gigabits per seconds.

percent

Specifies a percentage of bandwidth for traffic shaping.

percent_value

(Optional) Specifies a percentage of the bandwidth used for traffic shaping; valid values are from 1 to 100 percent.

Command Default

Average-rate traffic shaping is disabled.

Command Modes

Policy-map class configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on Supervisor Engine 6E.

Usage Guidelines

Use the shape command only in a policy map attached to a physical port. This command is valid in policy maps at any level of the hierarchy.

Shaping is the process of delaying out-of-profile packets in queues so that they conform to a specified profile. Shaping is distinct from policing. Policing drops packets that exceed a configured threshold, but shaping buffers packets so that traffic remains within the threshold. Shaping offers greater smoothness in handling traffic than policing.

You cannot use the bandwidth, dbl, and the shape policy-map class configuration commands with the priority policy-map class configuration command in the same class within the same policy map. However, you can use these commands in the same policy map.

To return to policy-map configuration mode, use the exit command. To return to privileged EXEC mode, use the end command.

Examples

The following example shows how to limit the specified traffic class to a data transmission rate of 256 kbps:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# policy-map policy1

Switch(config-pmap)# class class1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# shape average 256000

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# exit

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# service-policy output policy1

Switch(config-if)# end

You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

bandwidth

Creates a signaling class structure that can be referred to by its name.

class

Specifies the name of the class whose traffic policy you want to create or change.

dbl

Enables active queue management on a transmit queue used by a class of traffic.

policy-map

Creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

service-policy (policy-map class)

Creates a service policy that is a quality of service (QoS) policy within a policy map.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

shape (interface configuration)

To specify traffic shaping on an interface, use the shape command. To remove traffic shaping, use the no form of this command

shape [rate] [percent]

no shape [rate] [percent]

Syntax Description

rate

(Optional) Specifies an average rate for traffic shaping; the range is 16000 to 1000000000. Post-fix notation (k, m, and g) is optional and a decimal point is allowed.

percent

(Optional) Specifies a percent of bandwidth for traffic shaping.

Command Default

Default is no traffic shaping.

Command Modes

Interface transmit queue configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is not supported on Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

Traffic shaping is available on all the ports, and it sets an upper limit on the bandwidth.

When the high shape rates are configured on the Catalyst 4500 the Catalyst 4500 Supervisor Engine V (WS-X4516) and the Catalyst 4500 Supervisor Engine V-10GE (WS-X4516-10GE), the shaped traffic rate may not be achieved in situations that involve contention and unusual packet size distributions. On the ports that are multiplexed through a Stub ASIC and connected to the backplane gigaports, the shape rates above 7 Mbps may not be achieved under worst-case conditions. On ports that are connected directly to the backplane gigaports, or the supervisor engine gigaports, the shape rates above 50 Mbps may not be achieved under worst-case conditions.

Some examples of ports that are connected directly to the backplane are as follows:

- Uplink ports on Supervisor Engine V and V-10GE

- Ports on the WS-X4306-GB module

- The two 1000BASE-X ports on the WS-X4232-GB-RJ module

- The first two ports on the WS-X4418-GB module

- The two 1000BASE-X ports on the WS-X4412-2GB-TX module

All ports on the 24-port modules and the 48-port modules are multiplexed through a Stub ASIC. Some examples of ports multiplexed through a Stub ASIC are as follows:

- 10/100 ports on the WS-X4148-RJ45 module

- 10/100/1000 ports on the WS-X4124-GB-RJ45 module

- 10/100/1000 ports on the WS-X4448-GB-RJ45 module

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a maximum bandwidth (70 percent) for the interface fa3/1:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet3/1

Switch(config-if)# tx-queue 3

Switch(config-if-tx-queue)# shape 70m

Switch(config-if-tx-queue)#

shell trigger

Use the shell trigger global configuration command to create a user defined trigger. Use the no form of this command to delete the trigger.

shell trigger identifier description

no shell trigger identifier description

Syntax Description

identifier

Specifies the event trigger identifier. The identifier should have no spaces or hyphens between words.

description

Specifies the event trigger description text.

Command Default

There are system-defined event triggers:

- CISCO_PHONE_EVENT

- CISCO_SWITCH_EVENT

- CISCO_ROUTER_EVENT

- CISCO_WIRELESS_AP_EVENT

- CISCO_WIRELESS_LIGHTWEIGHT_AP_EVENT

- DMP

- IPVSC

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SE

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to create user-defined event triggers in conjunction with the macro auto execute global configuration command.

To support dynamic device discovery when using 802.1X authentication, configure the RADIUS authentication server to support the Cisco attribute-value (AV) pair: auto-smart-port=event trigger.

This command is mainly used for 802.1X authentication based triggers provided 802.1X or MAB is supported, enabling you to map new platform strings or device IDs to their respective macros or functions.

Examples

The following example shows how to create a user-defined event trigger called RADIUS_MAB_EVENT:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# shell trigger RADIUS_MAB_EVENT MAC_AuthBypass Event

Switch(config)# end

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro auto global processing

Enables Auto Smartports on a switch.

macro auto processing

Enable Auto SmartPorts macros on a specific interface.

show shell

Displays information about event triggers and macros.

macro auto device

Simplifies changing the parameters for a built-in functions for a device type.

macro auto execute (builtin function)

Changes built-in function default values or to map user-defined triggers to built-in functions, and to pass the parameter values.

macro auto execute (user-defined function)

Maps a trigger to a user-defined function.

macro auto execute (remotely-defined function)

Maps a trigger to a remotely defined functions.

macro auto processing

Enables Auto SmartPorts macros on a specific interface.

macro auto sticky

Specifies not to remove configurations applied by ASP across link flaps and device removal.

show access-group mode interface

To display the ACL configuration on a Layer 2 interface, use the show access-group mode interface command.

show access-group mode interface [interface interface-number]

Syntax Description

interface

(Optional) Interface type; valid values are ethernet, fastethernet, gigabitethernet, tengigabitethernet, and port-channel.

interface-number

(Optional) Interface number.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EW

Support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The valid values for the port number depend on the chassis used.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the ACL configuration on the Fast Ethernet interface 6/1:

Switch# show access-group mode interface fa6/1

Interface FastEthernet6/1:

Access group mode is: merge

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

access-group mode

Specifies the override modes (for example, VACL overrides PACL) and the non-override modes (for example, merge or strict mode).

show adjacency

To display information about the Layer 3 switching adjacency table, use the show adjacency command.

show adjacency [{interface interface-number} | {null interface-number} | {port-channel number} | {vlan vlan-id} | detail | internal | summary]

Syntax Description

interface

(Optional) Interface type; possible valid values are ethernet, fastethernet, gigabitethernet, tengigabitethernet, pos, ge-wan, and atm.

interface-number

(Optional) Module and port number; see the “Usage Guidelines” section for valid values.

null interface-number

(Optional) Specifies the null interface; the valid value is 0.

port-channel number

(Optional) Specifies the channel interface; valid values are a maximum of 64 values ranging from 1 to 256.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

detail

(Optional) Displays the information about the protocol detail and timer.

internal

(Optional) Displays the information about the internal data structure.

summary

(Optional) Displays a summary of CEF-adjacency information.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)EW

Extended to include the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Usage Guidelines

The interface-number argument designates the module and port number. Valid values for interface-number depend on the specified interface type and the chassis and module that are used. For example, if you specify a Gigabit Ethernet interface and have a 48-port 10/100BASE-T Ethernet module that is installed in a 13-slot chassis, valid values for the module number are from 1 to 13, and valid values for the port number are from 1 to 48.

Hardware Layer 3 switching adjacency statistics are updated every 60 seconds.

The following information is contained in the show adjacency command:

- Protocol interface.

- Type of routing protocol that is configured on the interface.

- Interface address.

- Method of adjacency that was learned.

- MAC address of the adjacent router.

- Time left before the adjacency rolls out of the adjacency table. After it rolls out, a packet must use the same next hop to the destination.

Examples

The following example shows how to display adjacency information:

Switch# show adjacency

Protocol Interface Address

IP FastEthernet2/3 172.20.52.1(3045)

IP FastEthernet2/3 172.20.52.22(11)

Switch#

The following example shows how to display a summary of adjacency information:

Switch# show adjacency summary

Adjacency Table has 2 adjacencies

Interface Adjacency Count

FastEthernet2/3 2

Switch#

The following example shows how to display protocol detail and timer information:

Switch# show adjacency detail

Protocol Interface Address

IP FastEthernet2/3 172.20.52.1(3045)

0 packets, 0 bytes

000000000FF920000380000000000000

00000000000000000000000000000000

00605C865B2800D0BB0F980B0800

ARP 03:58:12

IP FastEthernet2/3 172.20.52.22(11)

0 packets, 0 bytes

000000000FF920000380000000000000

00000000000000000000000000000000

00801C93804000D0BB0F980B0800

ARP 03:58:06

Switch#

The following example shows how to display adjacency information for a specific interface:

Switch# show adjacency fastethernet2/3

Protocol Interface Address

IP FastEthernet2/3 172.20.52.1(3045)

IP FastEthernet2/3 172.20.52.22(11)

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

debug adjacency

Displays information about the adjacency debugging.

show ancp multicast

To display multicast streams activated by Access Node Control Protocol (ANCP), use the show ancp multicast command.

show ancp multicast [group groupaddr] [source sourceaddr] | [ interface interfacename]

Syntax Description

group groupaddr

(Optional) Specifies a multicast group address.

source sourceaddr

(Optional) Specifies a multicast source address.

interface interfacename

(Optional) Specifies a multicast flowing on a specific interface.

Command Default

Displays all the multicast streams activated with ANCP.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to display multicast streams activated by ANCP:

ANCP-Client# show ancp mul

ANCP Multicast Streams

ClientID VLAN Interface Joined on

Group 235.3.2.1

0x01060004000A0703 10 Fa7/3 18:27:35 UTC Sat Sep 13 2008

0x0106000400140703 20 Fa7/3 18:27:35 UTC Sat Sep 13 2008

0x01060004000A0704 10 Fa7/4 18:25:43 UTC Sat Sep 13 2008

0x0106000400140704 20 Fa7/4 18:25:43 UTC Sat Sep 13 2008

Group 238.1.2.3

0x01060004000A0703 10 Fa7/3 18:27:37 UTC Sat Sep 13 2008

0x0106000400140703 20 Fa7/3 18:27:35 UTC Sat Sep 13 2008

0x01060004000A0704 10 Fa7/4 18:25:43 UTC Sat Sep 13 2008

0x0106000400140704 20 Fa7/4 18:25:43 UTC Sat Sep 13 2008

ANCP-Client#

show arp access-list

To display detailed information on an ARP access list, use the show arp command.

show arp access-list

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the ARP ACL information for a switch:

Switch# show arp access-list

ARP access list rose

permit ip 10.101.1.1 0.0.0.255 mac any

permit ip 20.3.1.0 0.0.0.255 mac any

Related Commands

Command

Description

access-group mode

Specifies the override modes (for example, VACL overrides PACL) and the non-override modes (for example, merge or strict mode).

arp access-list

Defines an ARP access list or adds clauses at the end of a predefined list.

ip arp inspection filter vlan

Permits ARPs from hosts that are configured for static IP when DAI is enabled, defines an ARP access list, and applies the access list to a VLAN.

show authentication

To display the Auth Manager information, use the show authentication command in EXEC or Privileged EXEC mode.

show authentication {interface interface | registrations | sessions [session-id session-id] [handle handle] [interface interface] [mac mac] [method method] [interface interface [details | policy]]

Syntax Description

interface interface

Displays all of the Auth Manager details associated with the specified interface.

registrations

Displays details of all methods registered with the Auth Manager.

sessions

Displays details of the current Auth Manager sessions (for example, client devices). If you do not enter any optional specifiers, all current active sessions are displayed. You can enter the specifiers singly or in combination to display a specific session (or group of sessions).

session-id session-id

(Optional) Specifies an Auth Manager session.

handle handle

(Optional) Specifies the particular handle for which Auth Manager information is displayed. Range is 1 to 4294967295.

mac mac

(Optional) Displays Auth Manager session information for a specified MAC address.

method method

(Optional) Displays all clients authorized by a specified authentication method. Valid values are as follows:

- dot1x

- mab

- webauth

interface interface details

(Optional) Displays detailed information.

interface interface policy]

(Optional) Displays policies applied on the interface.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

Table 2-19 describes the significant fields shown in the show authentication display.

Note The possible values for the status of sessions are given below. For a session in terminal state, “Authz Success” or “Authz Failed” are displayed. “No methods” is displayed if no method has provided a result.

Table 2-19 show authentication Command Output

Field

Description

Idle

The session has been initialized and no methods have run yet.

Running

A method is running for this session.

No methods

No method has provided a result for this session.

Authc Success

A method has resulted in authentication success for this session.

Authc Failed

A method has resulted in authentication fail for this session.

Authz Success

All features have been successfully applied for this session.

Authz Failed

A feature has failed to be applied for this session.

Table 2-20 lists the possible values for the state of methods. For a session in terminal state, “Authc Success,” “Authc Failed,” or “Failed over” are displayed (the latter indicates a method ran and failed over to the next method which did not provide a result. “Not run” is displayed in the case of sessions that are synchronized on standby.

Table 2-20 State Method Values

Method State

State Level

Description

Not run

Terminal

The method has not run for this session.

Running

Intermediate

The method is running for this session.

Failed over

Terminal

The method has failed and the next method is expected to provide a result.

Authc Success

Terminal

The method has provided a successful authentication result for the session.

Authc Failed

Terminal

The method has provided a failed authentication result for the session.

Examples

Switch# show authentication interface gigabitethernet1/23

Client list:

MAC Address Domain Status Handle Interface

000e.84af.59bd DATA Authz Success 0xE0000000 GigabitEthernet1/0/23

Available methods list:

Handle Priority Name

3 0 dot1x

Runnable methods list:

Handle Priority Name

3 0 dot1x

Switch#

The following example shows how to display all Auth Manager sessions on the switch:

Switch# show authentication sessions

Interface MAC Address Method Domain Status Session ID

Gi3/45 (unknown) N/A DATA Authz Failed 0908140400000007003651EC

Gi3/46 (unknown) N/A DATA Authz Success 09081404000000080057C274

The following example shows how to display all Auth Manager sessions on an interface:

Switch# show authentication sessions int gi 3/46

Interface: GigabitEthernet3/46

MAC Address: Unknown

IP Address: Unknown

Status: Authz Success

Domain: DATA

Oper host mode: multi-host

Oper control dir: both

Authorized By: Guest Vlan

Vlan Policy: 4094

Session timeout: N/A

Idle timeout: N/A

Common Session ID: 09081404000000080057C274

Acct Session ID: 0x0000000A

Handle: 0xCC000008

Runnable methods list:

Method State

dot1x Failed over

The following example shows how to display Auth Manager session for a specified MAC address:

Switch# show authentication sessions mac 000e.84af.59bd

Interface: GigabitEthernet1/23

MAC Address: 000e.84af.59bd

Status: Authz Success

Domain: DATA

Oper host mode: single-host

Authorized By: Authentication Server

Vlan Policy: 10

Handle: 0xE0000000

Runnable methods list:

Method State

dot1x Authc Success

Switch#

The following example shows how to display all clients authorized via a specified auth method:

Switch# show authentication sessions method mab

No Auth Manager contexts match supplied criteria

Switch# show authentication sessions method dot1x

MAC Address Domain Status Handle Interface

000e.84af.59bd DATA Authz Success 0xE0000000 GigabitEthernet1/23

Switch#

The following example displays the policies applied on interface e0/0:

AUTH# show authentication sessions interface e0/0 policy

Interface: Ethernet0/0

MAC Address: aabb.cc01.ff00

IPv6 Address: Unknown

IPv4 Address: Unknown

User-Name: gupn

Status: Authorized

Domain: DATA

Security Policy: Should Secure

Security Status: Unsecure

Oper host mode: multi-host

Oper control dir: both

Session timeout: N/A

Common Session ID: 0D0102330000000D0003329A

Acct Session ID: Unknown

Handle: 0x6F000002

Current Policy: POLICY_Et0/0

Local Policies:

Template: SVC_1 (priority 10)

Idle timeout: 500 sec

TAG: blue

URL Redirect: www.a.com

URL Redirect ACL: a

Template: SVC_3 (priority 20)

Idle timeout: 300 sec

TAG: red

URL_Redirect: www.b.com

URL-Redirect ACL: b

Server Policies:

Idle timeout: 800 sec

Resultant policies:

Idle timeout: 500 sec

TAG: blue

URL Redirect: www.a.com

URL Redirect ACL: a

TAG: red

Method status list:

Method State

dot1x Authc Success

Related Commands

Command

Description

authentication control-direction

Changes the port control to unidirectional or bidirectional.

authentication critical recovery delay

Configures the 802.1X critical authentication parameters.

authentication event

Configures the actions for authentication events.

authentication fallback

Enables the Webauth fallback and specifies the fallback profile to use when failing over to Webauth.

authentication host-mode

Defines the classification of a session that will be used to apply the access-policies using the host-mode configuration.

authentication open

Enables open access on this port.

authentication order

Specifies the order in which authentication methods should be attempted for a client on an interface.

authentication periodic

Enables reauthentication for this port.

authentication port-control

Configures the port-control value.

authentication priority

Specifies the priority of authentication methods on an interface.

authentication timer

Configures the authentication timer.

authentication violation

Specifies the action to be taken when a security violation exists on a port.

show auto install status

To display the status of an automatic installation, use the show auto install status command.

show auto install status

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(20)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the IP address of the TFTP server and to display whether or not the switch is currently acquiring the configuration file on the TFTP server:

Switch# show auto install status

Status : Downloading config file

DHCP Server : 20.0.0.1

TFTP Server : 30.0.0.3

Config File Fetched : Undetermined

The first IP address in the display indicates the server that is used for the automatic installation. The second IP address indicates the TFTP server that provided the configuration file.

show auto qos

To display the automatic quality of service (auto-QoS) configuration that is applied, use the show auto qos user EXEC command.

show auto qos [interface [interface-id]] [{begin | exclude | include} expression]

Syntax Description

interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays auto-QoS information for the specified interface or for all interfaces. Valid interfaces include physical ports.

begin

(Optional) Begins with the line that matches the expression.

exclude

(Optional) Excludes lines that match the expression.

include

(Optional) Includes lines that match the specified expression.

expression

(Optional) Expression in the output to use as a reference point.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The show auto qos interface interface-id command displays the auto-QoS configuration; it does not display any user changes to the configuration that might be in effect.

To display information about the QoS configuration that might be affected by auto-QoS on a non-Supervisor Engine 6-E, use one of these commands:

- show qos

- show qos map

- show qos interface interface-id

- show running-config

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

The following example shows output from the show auto qos command when auto-QoS is enabled:

Switch# show auto qos

GigabitEthernet1/2

auto qos voip cisco-phone

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

auto qos voip

Automatically configures quality of service (auto-QoS) for Voice over IP (VoIP) within a QoS domain.

show auto security

To display the auto security (configuration), use the show auto security command.

show auto security [configuration]

Syntax Description

configuration

Displays the CLIs that are applied with AS.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

3.6.0E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Switch# conf t

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# int g1/0/15

Switch(config-if)# auto security-port uplink

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# sh auto security

Auto Secure is Enabled globally

AutoSecure is Enabled on below interface(s):

--------------------------------------------

GigabitEthernet1/0/2

GigabitEthernet1/0/3

GigabitEthernet1/0/15

The following example shows how to enable auto security on an access port:

Switch# conf t

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# int g1/0/18

Switch(config-if)# auto security-port host

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

Apr 5 22:16:41.725: %SYS-5-CONFIG_I: Configured from console by consolesh auto security

Switch# show auto security

Auto Secure is Enabled globally

AutoSecure is Enabled on below interface(s):

--------------------------------------------

GigabitEthernet1/0/2

GigabitEthernet1/0/3

GigabitEthernet1/0/15

GigabitEthernet1/0/18

The following example shows how to display the CLIs that are applied with AS:

Switch# show auto security configuration

%AutoSecure provides a single CLI config 'auto secure'

to enable Base-line security Features like

DHCP snooping, ARP inspection and Port-Security

Auto Secure CLIs applied globally:

---------------------------------

ip dhcp snooping

ip dhcp snooping vlan 2-1005

no ip dhcp snooping information option

ip arp inspection vlan 2-1005

Auto Secure CLIs applied on Access Port:

----------------------------------------

switchport port-security maximum 2

switchport port-security maximum 1 vlan access

switchport port-security maximum 1 vlan voice

switchport port-security violation restrict

switchport port-security aging time 2

switchport port-security aging type inactivity

switchport port-security

ip arp inspection limit rate 100

ip dhcp snooping limit rate 100

Auto Secure CLIs applied on Trunk Port:

--------------------------------------

ip dhcp snooping trust

ip arp inspection trust

switchport port-security maximum 100

switchport port-security violation restrict

switchport port-security

show bootflash:

To display information about the bootflash: file system, use the show bootflash: command.

show bootflash: [all | chips | filesys]

Syntax Description

all

(Optional) Displays all possible Flash information.

chips

(Optional) Displays Flash chip information.

filesys

(Optional) Displays file system information.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Switch> show bootflash:

-# - ED --type-- --crc--- -seek-- nlen -length- -----date/time------ name

1 .. image 8C5A393A 237E3C 14 2063804 Aug 23 1999 16:18:45 c4-boot-mz

2 .. image D86EE0AD 957CE8 9 7470636 Sep 20 1999 13:48:49 rp.halley

Switch>

The following example shows how to display all bootflash information:

Switch> show bootflash: all

-# - ED --type-- --crc--- -seek-- nlen -length- -----date/time------ name

1 .. image 8C5A393A 237E3C 14 2063804 Aug 23 1999 16:18:45 c4-boot-

mz

2 .. image D86EE0AD 957CE8 9 7470636 Sep 20 1999 13:48:49 rp.halley

6456088 bytes available (9534696 bytes used)

-------- F I L E S Y S T E M S T A T U S --------

Device Number = 0

DEVICE INFO BLOCK: bootflash

Magic Number = 6887635 File System Vers = 10000 (1.0)

Length = 1000000 Sector Size = 40000

Programming Algorithm = 39 Erased State = FFFFFFFF

File System Offset = 40000 Length = F40000

MONLIB Offset = 100 Length = C628

Bad Sector Map Offset = 3FFF8 Length = 8

Squeeze Log Offset = F80000 Length = 40000

Squeeze Buffer Offset = FC0000 Length = 40000

Num Spare Sectors = 0

Spares:

STATUS INFO:

Writable

NO File Open for Write

Complete Stats

No Unrecovered Errors

No Squeeze in progress

USAGE INFO:

Bytes Used = 917CE8 Bytes Available = 628318

Bad Sectors = 0 Spared Sectors = 0

OK Files = 2 Bytes = 917BE8

Deleted Files = 0 Bytes = 0

Files w/Errors = 0 Bytes = 0

Switch>

show bootvar

To display BOOT environment variable information, use the show bootvar command.

show bootvar

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to display BOOT environment variable information:

Switch# show bootvar

BOOT variable = sup:1;

CONFIG_FILE variable does not exist

BOOTLDR variable does not exist

Configuration register is 0x0

Switch#

show cable-diagnostics tdr

To display the test results for the TDR cable diagnostics, use the show cable-diagnostics tdr command.

show cable-diagnostics tdr {interface {interface interface-number}}

Note This command will be deprecated in future Cisco IOS releases; use the diagnostic start command instead.

Syntax Description

interface interface

Interface type; valid values are fastethernet and gigabitethernet.

interface-number

Module and port number.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The TDR test is supported on Catalyst 4500 series switches running Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SG for the following line cards only:

- WS-X4548-GB-RJ45

- WS-X4548-GB-RJ45V

- WS-X4524-GB-RJ45V

- WS-X4013+TS

- WS-C4948

- WS-C4948-10GE

The distance to the fault is displayed in meters (m).

Examples

Table 2-21 show cable-diagnostics tdr Command Output Fields

Field

Description

Interface

Interface tested.

Speed

Current line speed.

Pair

Local pair name.

Cable Length

Distance to the fault in meters (m).

Channel

Pair designation (A, B, C, or D).

Status

Pair status displayed is one of the following:

- Terminated—The link is up.

- Fault—Cable fault (open or short)

Related Commands

Command

Description

test cable-diagnostics tdr

show call-home

To display the configured CallHome information, use the show call-home command in privileged EXEC mode.

show call-home [alert-group | detail | mail-server | profile {all | name} | statistics]

Syntax Description

alert-group

(Optional) Displays the available alert group.

detail

(Optional) Displays the CallHome configuration in detail.

mail-server

(Optional) Displays the CallHome mail server-related information.

profile all

(Optional) Displays configuration information for all existing profiles.

profile name

(Optional) Displays configuration information for a specific destination profile.

statistics

(Optional) Displays the CallHome statistics.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC (#)

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch, Supervisor Engine 6-E, and Catalyst 4900M chassis.

Examples

Switch# show call-home detail

Current call home settings:

call home feature : disable

call home message's from address: switch@example.com

call home message's reply-to address: support@example.com

vrf for call-home messages: Not yet set up

contact person's email address: technical@example.com

contact person's phone number: +1-408-555-1234

street address: 1234 Picaboo Street, Any city, Any state, 12345

customer ID: ExampleCorp

contract ID: X123456789

site ID: SantaClara

Mail-server[1]: Address: smtp.example.com Priority: 1

Mail-server[2]: Address: 192.168.0.1 Priority: 2

Rate-limit: 20 message(s) per minute

Available alert groups:

Keyword State Description

------------------------ ------- -------------------------------

configuration Disable configuration info

diagnostic Disable diagnostic info

environment Disable environmental info

inventory Enable inventory info

syslog Disable syslog info

Profiles:

Profile Name: campus-noc

Profile status: ACTIVE

Preferred Message Format: long-text

Message Size Limit: 3145728 Bytes

Transport Method: email

Email address(es): noc@example.com

HTTP address(es): Not yet set up

Alert-group Severity

------------------------ ------------

inventory normal

Syslog-Pattern Severity

------------------------ ------------

N/A N/A

Profile Name: CiscoTAC-1

Profile status: ACTIVE

Preferred Message Format: xml

Message Size Limit: 3145728 Bytes

Transport Method: email

Email address(es): callhome@cisco.com

HTTP address(es): https://tools.cisco.com/its/service/oddce/services/DDCEService

Periodic configuration info message is scheduled every 1 day of the month at 09:27

Periodic inventory info message is scheduled every 1 day of the month at 09: 12

Alert-group Severity

------------------------ ------------

diagnostic minor

environment warning

inventory normal

Syslog-Pattern Severity

------------------------ ------------

.* major

Switch#

Available Call Home Alert Groups

Switch# show call-home alert-group

Available alert groups:

Keyword State Description

------------------------ ------- -------------------------------

configuration Disable configuration info

diagnostic Disable diagnostic info

environment Disable environmental info

inventory Enable inventory info

syslog Disable syslog info

Switch#

E-Mail Server Status Information

Switch# show call-home mail-server status

Please wait. Checking for mail server status ...

Translating "smtp.example.com"

Mail-server[1]: Address: smtp.example.com Priority: 1 [Not Available]

Mail-server[2]: Address: 192.168.0.1 Priority: 2 [Not Available]

Switch#

Information for All Destination Profiles (Predefined and User-Defined)

Switch# show call-home profile all

Profile Name: campus-noc

Profile status: ACTIVE

Preferred Message Format: long-text

Message Size Limit: 3145728 Bytes

Transport Method: email

Email address(es): noc@example.com

HTTP address(es): Not yet set up

Alert-group Severity

------------------------ ------------

inventory normal

Syslog-Pattern Severity

------------------------ ------------

N/A N/A

Profile Name: CiscoTAC-1

Profile status: ACTIVE

Preferred Message Format: xml

Message Size Limit: 3145728 Bytes

Transport Method: email

Email address(es): callhome@cisco.com

HTTP address(es): https://tools.cisco.com/its/service/oddce/services/DDCEService

Periodic configuration info message is scheduled every 1 day of the month at 09:27

Periodic inventory info message is scheduled every 1 day of the month at 09:12

Alert-group Severity

------------------------ ------------

diagnostic minor

environment warning

inventory normal

Syslog-Pattern Severity

------------------------ ------------

.* major

Switch#

Information for a User-Defined Destination Profile

Switch# show call-home profile CiscoTAC-1

Profile Name: CiscoTAC-1

Profile status: INACTIVE

Preferred Message Format: xml

Message Size Limit: 3145728 Bytes

Transport Method: email

Email address(es): callhome@cisco.com

HTTP address(es): https://tools.cisco.com/its/service/oddce/services/DDCEService

Periodic configuration info message is scheduled every 11 day of the month at 11:25

Periodic inventory info message is scheduled every 11 day of the month at 11:10

Alert-group Severity

------------------------ ------------

diagnostic minor

environment warning

inventory normal

Syslog-Pattern Severity

------------------------ ------------

.* major

Call Home Statistics

Switch# show call-home statistics

Message Types Total Email HTTP

------------- -------------------- -------------------- ------------------

Total Success 0 0 0

Config 0 0 0

Diagnostic 0 0 0

Environment 0 0 0

Inventory 0 0 0

SysLog 0 0 0

Test 0 0 0

Request 0 0 0

Send-CLI 0 0 0

Total In-Queue 0 0 0

Config 0 0 0

Diagnostic 0 0 0

Environment 0 0 0

Inventory 0 0 0

SysLog 0 0 0

Test 0 0 0

Request 0 0 0

Send-CLI 0 0 0

Total Failed 0 0 0

Config 0 0 0

Diagnostic 0 0 0

Environment 0 0 0

Inventory 0 0 0

SysLog 0 0 0

Test 0 0 0

Request 0 0 0

Send-CLI 0 0 0

Total Ratelimit

-dropped 0 0 0

Config 0 0 0

Diagnostic 0 0 0

Environment 0 0 0

Inventory 0 0 0

SysLog 0 0 0

Test 0 0 0

Request 0 0 0

Send-CLI 0 0 0

Last call-home message sent time: n/a

Related Commands

Command

Description

call-home (global configuration)

Enters call-home configuration mode.

call-home send alert-group

Sends a specific alert group message.

service call-home (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Enables or disables call home.

show cdp neighbors [type number] [detail]

Syntax Description

type

(Optional) Interface type that is connected to the neighbors about which you want information; possible valid values are ethernet, fastethernet, gigabitethernet, tengigabitethernet, port-channel, and vlan.

number

(Optional) Interface number that is connected to the neighbors about which you want information.

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed information about a neighbor (or neighbors) including network address, enabled protocols, hold time, and software version.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)EW

Extended to include the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Usage Guidelines

The vlan keyword is supported in Catalyst 4500 series switches that are configured with a Supervisor Engine 2.

The port-channel values are from 0 to 282; values from 257 to 282 are supported on the CSM and the FWSM only.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the information about the CDP neighbors:

Switch# show cdp neighbors

Capability Codes: R - Router, T - Trans Bridge, B - Source Route Bridge

S - Switch, H - Host, I - IGMP, r - Repeater, P - Phone

Device ID Local Intrfce Holdtme Capability Platform Port ID

lab-7206 Eth 0 157 R 7206VXR Fas 0/0/0

lab-as5300-1 Eth 0 163 R AS5300 Fas 0

lab-as5300-2 Eth 0 159 R AS5300 Eth 0

lab-as5300-3 Eth 0 122 R AS5300 Eth 0

lab-as5300-4 Eth 0 132 R AS5300 Fas 0/0

lab-3621 Eth 0 140 R S 3631-telcoFas 0/0

008024 2758E0 Eth 0 132 T CAT3000 1/2

Switch#

Table 2-22 describes the fields that are shown in the example.

Table 2-22 show cdp neighbors Field Descriptions

Field

Definition

Device ID

Configured ID (name), MAC address, or serial number of the neighbor device.

Local Intrfce

(Local Interface) The protocol that is used by the connectivity media.

Holdtme

(Holdtime) Remaining amount of time, in seconds, that the current device holds the CDP advertisement from a transmitting router before discarding it.

Capability

Capability code that is discovered on the device. This device type is listed in the CDP Neighbors table. Possible values are as follows:

R—Router

T—Transparent bridge

B—Source-routing bridge

S—Switch

H—Host

I—IGMP device

r—Repeater

P—Phone

Platform

Product number of the device.

Port ID

Protocol and port number of the device.

The following example shows how to display detailed information about your CDP neighbors:

Switch# show cdp neighbors detail

-------------------------

Device ID: lab-7206

Entry address(es):

IP address: 172.19.169.83

Platform: cisco 7206VXR, Capabilities: Router

Interface: Ethernet0, Port ID (outgoing port): FastEthernet0/0/0

Holdtime : 123 sec

Version :

Cisco Internetwork Operating System Software

IOS (tm) 5800 Software (C5800-P4-M), Version 12.1(2)

Copyright (c) 1986-2002 by Cisco Systems, Inc.

advertisement version: 2

Duplex: half

-------------------------

Device ID: lab-as5300-1

Entry address(es):

IP address: 172.19.169.87

.

.

.

Switch#

Table 2-23 describes the fields that are shown in the example.

Table 2-23 show cdp neighbors detail Field Descriptions

Field

Definition

Device ID

Name of the neighbor device and either the MAC address or the serial number of this device.

Entry address(es)

List of network addresses of neighbor devices.

[network protocol] address

Network address of the neighbor device. The address can be in IP, IPX, AppleTalk, DECnet, or CLNS protocol conventions.

Platform

Product name and number of the neighbor device.

Capabilities

Device type of the neighbor. This device can be a router, a bridge, a transparent bridge, a source-routing bridge, a switch, a host, an IGMP device, or a repeater.

Interface

Protocol and port number of the port on the current device.

Holdtime

Remaining amount of time, in seconds, that the current device holds the CDP advertisement from a transmitting router before discarding it.

Version:

Software version running on the neighbor device.

advertisement version:

Version of CDP that is being used for CDP advertisements.

Duplex:

Duplex state of connection between the current device and the neighbor device.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show cdp (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Displays global CDP information, including timer and hold-time information.

show cdp entry (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Displays information about a specific neighboring device discovered using Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP).

show cdp interface (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Displays information about the interfaces on which Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) is enabled.

show cdp traffic (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

show class-map

To display class map information, use the show class-map command.

show class-map class_name

Syntax Description

class_name

Name of the class map.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)SG

Displays results from the full-flow option.

Examples

Switch# show class-map ipp5

Class Map match-all ipp5 (id 1)

Match ip precedence 5

Switch#

Assume there are two active flows as shown below on Fast Ethernet interface 6/1:

SrcIp DstIp IpProt SrcL4Port DstL4Port

--------------------------------------------------------

192.168.10.10 192.168.20.20 20 6789 81

192.168.10.10 192.168.20.20 20 6789 21

With following configuration, each flow will be policed to a 1000000 bps with an allowed 9000-byte burst value.

Note If you use the match flow ip source-address|destination-address command, these two flows are consolidated into one flow and they have the same source and destination address.

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# class-map c1

Switch(config-cmap)# match flow ip source-address ip destination-address ip protocol l4 source-port l4 destination-port

Switch(config-cmap)# exit

Switch(config)# policy-map p1

Switch(config-pmap)# class c1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 1000000 9000

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# exit

Switch(config)# interface fastEthernet 6/1

Switch(config-if)# service-policy input p1

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# write memory

Switch# show policy-map interface

FastEthernet6/1

class-map c1

match flow ip source-address ip destination-address ip protocol l4 source-port l4 destination-port

!

policy-map p1

class c1

police 1000000 bps 9000 byte conform-action transmit exceed-action drop

!

interface FastEthernet 6/1

service-policy input p1

Switch# show class-map c1

Class Map match-all c1 (id 2)

Match flow ip source-address ip destination-address ip protocol l4 source-port l4 destination-port

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

class-map

Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name you specify and to be used enter class-map configuration mode.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

show policy-map interface

Displays the statistics and configurations of the input and output policies that are attached to an interface.

show device-sensor cache {mac mac-address | all}

Syntax Description

mac mac-address

Specifies the MAC address of the device for which the sensor cache entries are to be displayed.

all

Displays sensor cache entries for all devices.

Command Default

There are no defaults for this command.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.4.0SG and IOS 15.1(2)SG)

Command introduced on the Catalyst 4500 Series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use the show device-sensor cache command to display a list of TLV fields or options received from a particular device or from all devices.

Examples

The following is sample output from the show device-sensor cache mac mac-address command:

Router# show device-sensor cache mac 0024.14dc.df4d

Device: 0024.14dc.df4d on port GigabitEthernet1/0/24

--------------------------------------------------

Proto Type:Name Len Value

cdp 26:power-available-type 16 00 1A 00 10 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 00 FF FF FF FF

cdp 22:mgmt-address-type 17 00 16 00 11 00 00 00 01 01 01 CC 00 04 09 1B 65

0E

cdp 11:duplex-type 5 00 0B 00 05 01

cdp 9:vtp-mgmt-domain-type 4 00 09 00 04

cdp 4:capabilities-type 8 00 04 00 08 00 00 00 28

cdp 1:device-name 14 00 01 00 0E 73 75 70 70 6C 69 63 61 6E 74

lldp 0:end-of-lldpdu 2 00 00

lldp 8:management-address 14 10 0C 05 01 09 1B 65 0E 03 00 00 00 01 00

lldp 7:system-capabilities 6 0E 04 00 14 00 04

lldp 4:port-description 23 08 15 47 69 67 61 62 69 74 45 74 68 65 72 6E 65

74 31 2F 30 2F 32 34

lldp 5:system-name 12 0A 0A 73 75 70 70 6C 69 63 61 6E 74

dhcp 82:relay-agent-info 20 52 12 01 06 00 04 00 18 01 18 02 08 00 06 00 24

14 DC DF 80

dhcp 12:host-name 12 0C 0A 73 75 70 70 6C 69 63 61 6E 74

dhcp 61:client-identifier 32 3D 1E 00 63 69 73 63 6F 2D 30 30 32 34 2E 31 34

64 63 2E 64 66 34 64 2D 47 69 31 2F 30 2F 32 34

dhcp 57:max-message-size 4 39 02 04 80

Field

Description

Device

MAC address of the device and the interface which it is connected to.

Proto

Protocol from which the endpoint device data is being gleaned.

Type

Type of TLV.

Name

Name of the TLV.

Len

Length of the TLV.

Value

Value of the TLV.

Related Commands

Command

Description

debug device-sensor

Enables debugging for Device Sensor.

device-sensor accounting

Adds the Device Sensor protocol data to accounting records and generates additional accounting events when new sensor data is detected.

device-sensor filter-list

Creates a CDP or LLDP filter containing a list of options that can be included or excluded in the Device Sensor output.

device-sensor filter-list dhcp

Creates a DHCP filter containing a list of options that can be included or excluded in the Device Sensor output.

show device-sensor cache

Displays Device Sensor cache entries.

show diagnostic content

To display test information about the test ID, test attributes, and supported coverage test levels for each test and for all modules, use the show diagnostic content command.

show diagnostic content module {all | num}

Syntax Description

all

Displays all the modules on the chassis.

num

Module number.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(20)EWA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Displays the module-based diagnostic test results.

show diagnostic result module test 2

Displays the results of the bootup packet memory test.

show diagnostic result module test 3

show diagnostic result module

To display the module-based diagnostic test results, use the show diagnostic result module command.

show diagnostic result module [slot-num | all] [test [test-id | test-id-range | all]] [detail]

Syntax Description

slot-num

(Optional) Specifies the slot on which diagnostics are displayed.

all

(Optional) Displays the diagnostics for all slots.

test

(Optional) Displays selected tests on the specified module.

test-id

(Optional) Specifies a single test ID.

test-id-range

(Optional) Specifies a range of test IDs.

all

(Optional) Displays the diagnostics for all tests.

detail

(Optional) Displays the complete test results.

Command Default

A summary of the test results for all modules in the chassis is displayed.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Switch# show diagnostic result module 1 detail

Current bootup diagnostic level: minimal

module 1:

Overall diagnostic result: PASS

Diagnostic level at card bootup: minimal

Test results: (. = Pass, F = Fail, U = Untested)

___________________________________________________________________________

1) supervisor-bootup -----------------------> .

Error code --------------------------> 0 (DIAG_SUCCESS)

Total run count ---------------------> 0

Last test execution time ------------> n/a

First test failure time -------------> n/a

Last test failure time --------------> n/a

Last test pass time -----------------> n/a

Total failure count -----------------> 0

Consecutive failure count -----------> 0

Power-On-Self-Test Results for ACTIVE Supervisor

Power-on-self-test for Module 1: WS-X4014

Port/Test Status: (. = Pass, F = Fail)

Reset Reason: PowerUp Software/User

Port Traffic: L2 Serdes Loopback ...

0: . 1: . 2: . 3: . 4: . 5: . 6: . 7: . 8: . 9: . 10: . 11: .

12: . 13: . 14: . 15: . 16: . 17: . 18: . 19: . 20: . 21: . 22: . 23: .

24: . 25: . 26: . 27: . 28: . 29: . 30: . 31: .

Port Traffic: L2 Asic Loopback ...

0: . 1: . 2: . 3: . 4: . 5: . 6: . 7: . 8: . 9: . 10: . 11: .

12: . 13: . 14: . 15: . 16: . 17: . 18: . 19: . 20: . 21: . 22: . 23: .

24: . 25: . 26: . 27: . 28: . 29: . 30: . 31: .

Port Traffic: L3 Asic Loopback ...

0: . 1: . 2: . 3: . 4: . 5: . 6: . 7: . 8: . 9: . 10: . 11: .

12: . 13: . 14: . 15: . 16: . 17: . 18: . 19: . 20: . 21: . 22: . 23: .

24: . 25: . 26: . 27: . 28: . 29: . 30: . 31: . au: .

Switch Subsystem Memory ...

1: . 2: . 3: . 4: . 5: . 6: . 7: . 8: . 9: . 10: . 11: . 12: .

13: . 14: . 15: . 16: . 17: . 18: . 19: . 20: . 21: . 22: . 23: . 24: .

25: . 26: . 27: . 28: . 29: . 30: . 31: . 32: . 33: . 34: . 35: . 36: .

37: . 38: . 39: . 40: . 41: . 42: . 43: . 44: . 45: . 46: . 47: . 48: .

49: . 50: . 51: . 52: . 53: . 54: .

Module 1 Passed

___________________________________________________________________________

2) packet-memory-bootup --------------------> .

Error code --------------------------> 0 (DIAG_SUCCESS)

Total run count ---------------------> 0

Last test execution time ------------> n/a

First test failure time -------------> n/a

Last test failure time --------------> n/a

Last test pass time -----------------> n/a

Total failure count -----------------> 0

Consecutive failure count -----------> 0

packet buffers on free list: 64557 bad: 0 used for ongoing tests: 979

Number of errors found: 0

Cells with hard errors (failed two or more tests): 0

Cells with soft errors (failed one test, includes hard): 0

Suspect bad cells (uses a block that tested bad): 0

total buffers: 65536

bad buffers: 0 (0.0%)

good buffers: 65536 (100.0%)

Bootup test results:1

No errors.

___________________________________________________________________________

3) packet-memory-ongoing -------------------> U

Error code --------------------------> 0 (DIAG_SUCCESS)

Total run count ---------------------> 0

Last test execution time ------------> n/a

First test failure time -------------> n/a

Last test failure time --------------> n/a

Last test pass time -----------------> n/a

Total failure count -----------------> 0

Consecutive failure count -----------> 0

packet buffers on free list: 64557 bad: 0 used for ongoing tests: 979

Packet memory errors: 0 0

Current alert level: green

Per 5 seconds in the last minute:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

Per minute in the last hour:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Per hour in the last day:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

Per day in the last 30 days:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Direct memory test failures per minute in the last hour:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Potential false positives: 0 0

Ignored because of rx errors: 0 0

Ignored because of cdm fifo overrun: 0 0

Ignored because of oir: 0 0

Ignored because isl frames received: 0 0

Ignored during boot: 0 0

Ignored after writing hw stats: 0 0

Ignored on high gigaport: 0

Ongoing diag action mode: Normal

Last 1000 Memory Test Failures:

Last 1000 Packet Memory errors:

First 1000 Packet Memory errors:

___________________________________________________________________________

Switch#

show diagnostic result module test

To display the results of the bootup packet memory test, use the show diagnostic result module test command. The output indicates whether the test passed, failed, or was not run.

show diagnostic result module [N | all] [test test-id] [detail]

Syntax Description

N

(Optional) Specifies the module number.

all

(Optional) Specifies all modules.

test test-id

(Optional) Specifies the number for the tdr test on the platform.

detail

(Optional) Specifies the display of detailed information for analysis.

This option is recommended.

Command Default

Non-detailed results.

Command Modes

EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The detail keyword is intended for use by Cisco support personnel when analyzing failures.

Examples

show diagnostic result module test 2

To display the results of the bootup packet memory test, use the show diagnostic result module test 2 command. The output indicates whether the test passed, failed, or was not run.

show diagnostic result module N test 2 [detail]

Syntax Description

N

Specifies the module number.

detail

(Optional) Specifies the display of detailed information for analysis.

Command Default

Non-detailed results.

Command Modes

EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The detail keyword is intended for use by Cisco support personnel when analyzing failures.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the results of the bootup packet memory tests:

Switch# show diagnostic result module 1 test 2

Test results: (. = Pass, F = Fail, U = Untested)

2) packet-memory-bootup ------------> .

The following example shows how to display detailed results from the bootup packet memory tests:

Switch# show diagnostic result module 2 test 2 detail

Test results: (. = Pass, F = Fail, U = Untested)

___________________________________________________________________________

2) packet-memory-bootup ------------> .

Error code ------------------> 0 (DIAG_SUCCESS)

Total run count -------------> 0

Last test execution time ----> n/a

First test failure time -----> n/a

Last test failure time ------> n/a

Last test pass time ---------> n/a

Total failure count ---------> 0

Consecutive failure count ---> 0

packet buffers on free list: 64557 bad: 0 used for ongoing tests: 979

Number of errors found: 0

Cells with hard errors (failed two or more tests): 0

Cells with soft errors (failed one test, includes hard): 0

Suspect bad cells (uses a block that tested bad): 0

total buffers: 65536

bad buffers: 0 (0.0%)

good buffers: 65536 (100.0%)

Bootup test results:

No errors.

Related Commands

Command

Description

diagnostic monitor action

Directs the action of the switch when it detects a packet memory failure.

show diagnostic result module test 3

Displays the results from the ongoing packet memory test.

show diagnostic result module N test 3 [detail]

Syntax Description

N

Module number.

detail

(Optional) Specifies the display of detailed information for analysis.

Command Default

Non-detailed results.

Command Modes

EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The detail keyword is intended for use by Cisco support personnel when analyzing failures.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the results from the ongoing packet memory tests:

Switch# show diagnostic result module 1 test 3

Test results: (. = Pass, F = Fail, U = Untested)

3) packet-memory-ongoing -----------> .

The following example shows how to display the detailed results from the ongoing packet memory tests:

Switch# show diagnostic result module 1 test 3 detail

Test results: (. = Pass, F = Fail, U = Untested)

___________________________________________________________________________

3) packet-memory-ongoing -----------> .

Error code ------------------> 0 (DIAG_SUCCESS)

Total run count -------------> 0

Last test execution time ----> n/a

First test failure time -----> n/a

Last test failure time ------> n/a

Last test pass time ---------> n/a

Total failure count ---------> 0

Consecutive failure count ---> 0

packet buffers on free list: 64557 bad: 0 used for ongoing tests: 979

Packet memory errors: 0 0

Current alert level: green

Per 5 seconds in the last minute:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0

Per minute in the last hour:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Per hour in the last day:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

Per day in the last 30 days:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Direct memory test failures per minute in the last hour:

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Potential false positives: 0 0

Ignored because of rx errors: 0 0

Ignored because of cdm fifo overrun: 0 0

Ignored because of oir: 0 0

Ignored because isl frames received: 0 0

Ignored during boot: 0 0

Ignored after writing hw stats: 0 0

Ignored on high gigaport: 0

Ongoing diag action mode: Normal

Last 1000 Memory Test Failures: v

Last 1000 Packet Memory errors:

First 1000 Packet Memory errors:

Related Commands

Command

Description

diagnostic monitor action

Directs the action of the switch when it detects a packet memory failure.

show diagnostic result module test 2

Displays the results of the bootup packet memory test.

show dot1x [interface interface-id] | [statistics [interface interface-id]] | [all]

Syntax Description

interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays the 802.1X status for the specified port.

statistics

(Optional) Displays 802.1X statistics for the switch or the specified interface.

all

(Optional) Displays per-interface 802.1X configuration information for all interfaces with a nondefault 802.1X configuration.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(19)EW

Display enhanced to show the guest-VLAN value.

12.2(25)EW

Support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EWA

Support for currently assigned reauthentication timer (if the timer is configured to honor the Session-Timeout value) was added.

12.2(31)SG

Support for port direction control and critical recovery was added.

Usage Guidelines

If you do not specify an interface, the global parameters and a summary are displayed. If you specify an interface, the details for that interface are displayed.

If you enter the statistics keyword without the interface option, the statistics are displayed for all interfaces. If you enter the statistics keyword with the interface option, the statistics are displayed for the specified interface.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter exclude output, the lines that contain output are not displayed, but the lines that contain Output are displayed.

The show dot1x command displays the currently assigned reauthentication timer and time remaining before reauthentication, if reauthentication is enabled.

Examples

Switch# show dot1x interface fastethernet6/1

Dot1x Info for FastEthernet6/1

-----------------------------------

PAE = AUTHENTICATOR

PortControl = AUTO

ControlDirection = Both

HostMode = MULTI_DOMAIN

ReAuthentication = Disabled

QuietPeriod = 60

ServerTimeout = 10

SuppTimeout = 30

ReAuthPeriod = 3600 (Locally configured)

ReAuthMax = 2

MaxReq = 2

TxPeriod = 30

RateLimitPeriod = 0

Dot1x Authenticator Client List

-------------------------------

Domain = DATA

Supplicant = 0000.0000.ab01

Auth SM State = AUTHENTICATED

Auth BEND SM Stat = IDLE

Port Status = AUTHORIZED

Authentication Method = Dot1x

Authorized By = Authentication Server

Vlan Policy = 12

Domain = VOICE

Supplicant = 0060.b057.4687

Auth SM State = AUTHENTICATED

Auth BEND SM Stat = IDLE

Port Status = AUTHORIZED

Authentication Method = Dot1x

Authorized By = Authentication Server

Switch#

Note Table 2-24 provides a partial list of the displayed fields. The remaining fields in the display show internal state information. For a detailed description of these state machines and their settings, refer to the 802.1X specification.

Table 2-24 show dot1x interface Field Description

Field

Description

PortStatus

Status of the port (authorized or unauthorized). The status of a port is displayed as authorized if the dot1x port-control interface configuration command is set to auto and has successfully completed authentication.

Port Control

Setting of the dot1x port-control interface configuration command.

MultiHosts

Setting of the dot1x multiple-hosts interface configuration command (allowed or disallowed).

This is an example of output from the show dot1x statistics interface gigabitethernet1/1 command. Table 2-25 describes the fields in the display.

Switch# show dot1x statistics interface gigabitethernet1/1

PortStatistics Parameters for Dot1x

--------------------------------------------

TxReqId = 0 TxReq = 0 TxTotal = 0

RxStart = 0 RxLogoff = 0 RxRespId = 0 RxResp = 0

RxInvalid = 0 RxLenErr = 0 RxTotal= 0

RxVersion = 0 LastRxSrcMac 0000.0000.0000

Switch#

Table 2-25 show dot1x statistics Field Descriptions

Field

Description

TxReq/TxReqId

Number of EAP-request/identity frames that have been sent.

TxTotal

Number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been sent.

RxStart

Number of valid EAPOL-start frames that have been received.

RxLogoff

Number of EAPOL-logoff frames that have been received.

RxRespId

Number of EAP-response/identity frames that have been received.

RxResp

Number of valid EAP-response frames (other than response/identity frames) that have been received.

RxInvalid

Number of EAPOL frames that have been received and have an unrecognized frame type.

RxLenError

Number of EAPOL frames that have been received in which the packet body length field is invalid.

RxTotal

Number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received.

RxVersion

Protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.

LastRxSrcMac

Source MAC address carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame.

Related Commands

Command

Description

dot1x critical

Enables the 802.1X critical authentication on a port.

dot1x critical eapol

Enables sending EAPOL success packets when a port is critically authorized partway through an EAP exchange.

dot1x critical recovery delay

Sets the time interval between port reinitializations.

dot1x critical vlan

Assigns a critically authenticated port to a specific VLAN.

dot1x guest-vlan

Enables a guest VLAN on a per-port basis.

dot1x max-reauth-req

Sets the maximum number of times that the switch will retransmit an EAP-Request/Identity frame to the client before restarting the authentication process.

dot1x port-control

Enables manual control of the authorization state on a port.

mac-address-table notification

show eigrp plugins

To display general information including the versions of the Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol (EIGRP) protocol features that are currently running, use the show eigrp plugins command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.

show eigrp plugins [plugin-name] [detailed]

Syntax Description

plugin-name

(Optional) Name of an EIGRP plugin to display.

detailed

(Optional) Displays detailed information about EIGRP features.

Command Modes

User EXEC (>)

Privileged EXEC (#)

Command History

Release

Modification

15.2(5)E2

Support for EVN/vNets is introduced.

Usage Guidelines

Use the show eigrp plugins command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode to determine if a particular EIGRP feature is available in your Cisco IOS image. This command displays a summary of information about EIGRP service families and address families.

This command is useful when contacting Cisco technical support.

Examples

The following example shows how to display EIGRP plugin information:

Sup7e#show eigrp plugins

EIGRP feature plugins:::

eigrp-release : 20.00.00 : Portable EIGRP Release

: 1.01.18 : Source Component Release(rel20)

parser : 2.02.00 : EIGRP Parser Support

igrp2 : 2.00.00 : Reliable Transport/Dual Database

eigrp-nsf : 2.01.00 : Platform Support

Spatial Reuse Prot : 1.01.00 : Platform Support

bfd : 2.00.00 : BFD Platform Support

EVN/vNets : 1.00.00 : Easy Virtual Network (EVN/vNets)

ipv4-af : 2.01.01 : Routing Protocol Support

ipv4-sf : 1.02.00 : Service Distribution Support

ipv6-af : 2.01.01 : Routing Protocol Support

ipv6-sf : 2.01.00 : Service Distribution Support

vNets-parse : 1.00.00 : EIGRP vNets Parse Support

snmp-agent : 2.00.00 : SNMP/SNMPv2 Agent Support

Table 26 describes the significant fields shown in the display.

Table 26 show eigrp plugins Field Descriptions

Field

Description

eigrp release

Displays the portable EIGRP release version.

igrp2

Displays the reliable transport and dual database version.

bfd

Displays the EIGRP-BFD feature version.

EVN/vNets

Displays the EVN/vNets version.

ipv4-af

Displays the EIGRP IPv4 routing protocol feature version.

ipv4-sf

Displays the EIGRP IPv4 service distribution feature version.

ipv6-af

Displays the EIGRP IPv6 routing protocol feature version.

ipv6-sf

Displays the EIGRP IPv6 service distribution feature version.

snmp-agent

Displays the EIGRP SNMP and SNMPv2 Agent Support version.

show environment

To display the environment alarm, operational status, and current reading for the chassis, use the show environment command.

show environment [alarm] | [status [chassis | fantray | powersupply | supervisor]] | [temperature]

Syntax Description

alarm

(Optional) Specifies the alarm status of the chassis.

status

(Optional) Specifies the operational status information.

chassis

(Optional) Specifies the operational status of the chassis.

fantray

(Optional) Specifies the status of the fan tray, and shows fan tray power consumption.

powersupply

(Optional) Specifies the status of the power supply.

supervisor

(Optional) Specifies the status of the supervisor engine.

temperature

(Optional) Specifies the current chassis temperature readings.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for the ability to display generic environment information with the show environment command was added.

Examples

Switch# show environment alarm

no alarm

Switch#

The following example shows how to display information about the power supplies, chassis type, and fan trays:

Switch# show environment status

Power Fan

Supply Model No Type Status Sensor

------ --------------- --------- ----------- ------

PS1 PWR-C45-1400AC AC 1400W good good

PS2 none -- -- --

Power Supply Max Min Max Min Absolute

(Nos in Watts) Inline Inline System System Maximum

-------------- ------ ------ ------ ------ --------

PS1 0 0 1360 1360 1400

PS2 -- -- -- -- --

Power supplies needed by system : 1

Chassis Type : WS-C4507R

Supervisor Led Color : Green

Fantray : good

Power consumed by Fantray : 50 Watts

Switch#

The following example shows how to display information about the chassis:

Switch# show environment status chassis

Chassis Type :WS-C4507R

Switch#

The following example shows how to display information about the fan tray:

Switch# show environment status fantray

Fantray : good

Power consumed by Fantray : 50 Watts

Switch#

The following example shows how to display information about the power supply:

Switch# show environment status powersupply

Power Fan

Supply Model No Type Status Sensor

------ --------------- --------- ------- ------

PS1 WS-X4008 AC 400W good good

PS2 WS-X4008 AC 400W good good

PS3 none -- -- --

Switch#

The following example shows how to display information about the supervisor engine:

Switch# show environment status supervisor

Supervisor Led Color :Green

Switch#

The following example shows how to display information about the temperature of the chassis:

Switch# show environment temperature

Chassis Temperature = 32 degrees Celsius

Chassis Over Temperature Threshold = 75 degrees Celsius

Chassis Critical Temperature Threshold = 95 degrees Celsius

Switch#

show errdisable detect

To display the error disable detection status, use the show errdisable detect command.

show errdisable detect

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(19)EW

Display includes the status of storm control.

Usage Guidelines

A displayed gbic-invalid error reason refers to an invalid small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module.

The error-disable reasons in the command output are listed in alphabetical order. The mode column shows how error disable is configured for each feature.

You can configure error-disabled detection in these modes:

- port mode—The entire physical port is error disabled if a violation occurs.

- vlan mode—The VLAN is error disabled if a violation occurs.

- port/vlan mode—The entire physical port is error disabled on some ports and per-VLAN error disabled on other ports.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show errdisable detect command:

Switch> show errdisable detect

ErrDisable Reason Detection Mode

----------------- --------- ----

arp-inspection Enabled port

bpduguard Enabled vlan

channel-misconfig Enabled port

community-limit Enabled port

dhcp-rate-limit Enabled port

dtp-flap Enabled port

gbic-invalid Enabled port

inline-power Enabled port

invalid-policy Enabled port

l2ptguard Enabled port

link-flap Enabled port

loopback Enabled port

lsgroup Enabled port

pagp-flap Enabled port

psecure-violation Enabled port/vlan

security-violatio Enabled port

sfp-config-mismat Enabled port

storm-control Enabled port

udld Enabled port

vmps Enabled port

Related Commands

Command

Description

errdisable detect cause

Enables error-disabled detection for a specific cause or all causes.

show errdisable recovery

Displays error-disabled recovery timer information.

show interfaces status

Displays interface status or a list of interfaces in error-disabled state.

show errdisable recovery

Use the show errdisable recovery user EXEC command to display the error-disabled recovery timer information.

show errdisable recovery

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(19)EW

Display includes the status of storm control.

Usage Guidelines

A gbic-invalid error-disable reason refers to an invalid small form-factor pluggable (SFP) module interface.

Examples

Related Commands

Command

Description

errdisable recovery

Configures the recover mechanism variables.

show errdisable detect

Displays error-disabled detection status.

show interfaces status

Displays interface status or a list of interfaces in error-disabled state.

show etherchannel

To display EtherChannel information for a channel, use the show etherchannel command.

show etherchannel [channel-group] {port-channel | brief | detail | summary | port | load-balance | protocol}

Syntax Description

channel-group

(Optional) Number of the channel group; valid values are from 1 to 64.

port-channel

Displays port-channel information.

brief

Displays a summary of EtherChannel information.

detail

Displays detailed EtherChannel information.

summary

Displays a one-line summary per channel group.

port

Displays EtherChannel port information.

load-balance

Displays load-balance information.

protocol

Displays the enabled protocol.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(13)EW

Support for LACP was added to this command.

Usage Guidelines

If you do not specify a channel group, all channel groups are displayed.

In the output below, the Passive port list field is displayed for Layer 3 port channels only. This field means that the physical interface, which is still not up, is configured to be in the channel group (and indirectly is in the only port channel in the channel group).

Examples

Switch# show etherchannel load-balance

Source XOR Destination mac address

Switch#

The following example shows how to display a summary of information for a specific group:

Switch# show etherchannel 1 brief

Group state = L3

Ports: 2 Maxports = 8

port-channels: 1 Max port-channels = 1

Switch#

The following example shows how to display detailed information for a specific group:

Switch# show etherchannel 1 detail

Group state = L3

Ports: 2 Maxports = 8

Port-channels: 1 Max Port-channels = 1

Ports in the group:

-------------------

Port: Fa5/4

------------

Port state = EC-Enbld Down Not-in-Bndl Usr-Config

Channel group = 1 Mode = Desirable Gcchange = 0

Port-channel = null GC = 0x00000000 Psudo-agport = Po1

Port indx = 0 Load = 0x00

Flags: S - Device is sending Slow hello. C - Device is in Consistent state.

A - Device is in Auto mode. P - Device learns on physical port.

Timers: H - Hello timer is running. Q - Quit timer is running.

S - Switching timer is running. I - Interface timer is running.

Local information:

Hello Partner PAgP Learning Group

Port Flags State Timers Interval Count Priority Method Ifindex

Fa5/4 d U1/S1 1s 0 128 Any 0

Age of the port in the current state: 02h:33m:14s

Port: Fa5/5

------------

Port state = EC-Enbld Down Not-in-Bndl Usr-Config

Channel group = 1 Mode = Desirable Gcchange = 0

Port-channel = null GC = 0x00000000 Psudo-agport = Po1

Port indx = 0 Load = 0x00

Flags: S - Device is sending Slow hello. C - Device is in Consistent state.

A - Device is in Auto mode. P - Device learns on physical port.

Timers: H - Hello timer is running. Q - Quit timer is running.

S - Switching timer is running. I - Interface timer is running.

Local information:

Hello Partner PAgP Learning Group

Port Flags State Timers Interval Count Priority Method Ifindex

Fa5/5 d U1/S1 1s 0 128 Any 0

Age of the port in the current state: 02h:33m:17s

Port-channels in the group:

----------------------

Port-channel: Po1

------------

Age of the Port-channel = 02h:33m:52s

Logical slot/port = 10/1 Number of ports in agport = 0

GC = 0x00000000 HotStandBy port = null

Passive port list = Fa5/4 Fa5/5

Port state = Port-channel L3-Ag Ag-Not-Inuse

Ports in the Port-channel:

Index Load Port

-------------------

Switch#

The following example shows how to display a one-line summary per channel group:

Switch# show etherchannel summary

Flags: D - down P - bundled in port-channel

I - stand-alone s - suspended

H - Hot-standby (LACP only)

R - Layer3 S - Layer2

U - in use f - failed to allocate aggregator

M - not in use, minimum links not met

u - unsuitable for bundling

w - waiting to be aggregated

d - default port

Number of channel-groups in use: 2

Number of aggregators: 2

Group Port-channel Protocol Ports

------+-------------+-----------+-----------------------------------------------

1 Po1(SD) LACP Gi1/23(H) Gi1/24(H)

Switch#

The following example shows how to display EtherChannel port information for all ports and all groups:

Switch# show etherchannel port

Channel-group listing:

-----------------------

Group: 1

----------

Ports in the group:

-------------------

Port: Fa5/4

------------

Port state = EC-Enbld Down Not-in-Bndl Usr-Config

Channel group = 1 Mode = Desirable Gcchange = 0

Port-channel = null GC = 0x00000000 Psudo-agport = Po1

Port indx = 0 Load = 0x00

Flags: S - Device is sending Slow hello. C - Device is in Consistent state.

A - Device is in Auto mode. P - Device learns on physical port.

Timers: H - Hello timer is running. Q - Quit timer is running.

S - Switching timer is running. I - Interface timer is running.

Local information:

Hello Partner PAgP Learning Group

Port Flags State Timers Interval Count Priority Method Ifindex

Fa5/4 d U1/S1 1s 0 128 Any 0

Age of the port in the current state: 02h:40m:35s

Port: Fa5/5

------------

Port state = EC-Enbld Down Not-in-Bndl Usr-Config

Channel group = 1 Mode = Desirable Gcchange = 0

Port-channel = null GC = 0x00000000 Psudo-agport = Po1

Port indx = 0 Load = 0x00

Flags: S - Device is sending Slow hello. C - Device is in Consistent state.

A - Device is in Auto mode. P - Device learns on physical port.

Timers: H - Hello timer is running. Q - Quit timer is running.

S - Switching timer is running. I - Interface timer is running.

<...output truncated...>

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the protocol enabled:

Switch# show etherchannel protocol

Channel-group listing:

-----------------------

Group: 12

----------

Protocol: PAgP

Group: 24

----------

Protocol: - (Mode ON)

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

channel-group

Assigns and configures an EtherChannel interface to an EtherChannel group.

interface port-channel

Accesses or creates a port-channel interface.

show fabric domain

Command Default

Default domain and default context.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

3.9.01E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500-E series switch using a Supervisor Engines 8-E and 8L-E.

Usage Guidelines

Use the command to display a summary of the fabric domain.

Examples

This is sample output for the show fabric domain command, for an edge device.

device#show fabric domain

Fabric Domain : "default"

Role : Edge

Control-Plane Service: Disabled

Number of "Control-Plane" node(s): 2

IP Address Auth-key

---------------------------------

192.168.1.4 example-key1

192.168.1.5 example-key2

Number of "Border" node(s): 1

IP Address

---------------

192.168.1.6

Number of context(s): 2

Codes: * - Not Configured

Name ID Host-pools

------------------------------------------------

default 0 *

example-context 10 1

show fabric context

To display your fabric domain configuration, use the show fabric domain command.

show fabric context [default | name]

Syntax Description

default

The default context

name

Specifies a context in the fabric domain

Command Default

Default context

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

3.9.01E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500-E series switch using a Supervisor Engines 8-E and 8L-E.

Usage Guidelines

Use the command to display a summary of the context configuration in your fabric domain.

Examples

This is sample output for the show fabric context command:

device#show fabric context

Fabric-domain: default

Number of context(s): 2

Name ID Host-pools

----------------------------------------------

default 0 *

example-context 10 1

* - Not Configured

show fabric host-pool

To display your fabric domain configuration, use the show fabric domain command.

show fabric host-pool name

Syntax Description

name

The name of the host-pool

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

3.9.01E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500-E series switch using a Supervisor Engines 8-E and 8L-E.

Usage Guidelines

Use the command to display a summary of the specified host-pool configuration.

Examples

This is sample output for the show fabric host-pool command:

device# show fabric host-pool

Fabric Domain : "default"

context: default

Number of host-pools : 0

name vlan prefix gateway use-dhcp

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

context: example-context

Number of host-pools : 1

name vlan prefix gateway use-dhcp

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------

VOICE_DOMAIN 10 192.168.1.0/24 192.168.1.254 209.65.201.6

show flowcontrol

To display the per-interface status and statistics related to flow control, use the show flowcontrol command.

show flowcontrol [module slot | interface interface]

Syntax Description

module slot

(Optional) Limits the display to interfaces on a specific module.

interface interface

(Optional) Displays the status on a specific interface.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EW

Support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Table 2-27 show flowcontrol Command Output

Field

Description

Port

Module and port number.

Send-Flowcontrol-Admin

Flow-control administration. Possible settings: on indicates the local port sends flow control to the far end; off indicates the local port does not send flow control to the far end; desired indicates the local end sends flow control to the far end if the far end supports it.

Send-Flowcontrol-Oper

Flow-control operation. Possible setting: disagree indicates the two ports could not agree on a link protocol.

Receive-Flowcontrol-Admin

Flow-control administration. Possible settings: on indicates the local port requires the far end to send flow control; off indicates the local port does not allow the far end to send flow control; desired indicates the local end allows the far end to send flow control.

Receive-Flowcontrol-Oper

Flow-control operation. Possible setting: disagree indicates the two ports could not agree on a link protocol.

RxPause

Number of pause frames received.

TxPause

Number of pause frames transmitted.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the flow control status on all the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces:

Switch# show flowcontrol

Port Send FlowControl Receive FlowControl RxPause TxPause

admin oper admin oper

--------- -------- -------- -------- -------- ------- -------

Te1/1 off off on off 0 0

Te1/2 off off on off 0 0

Gi1/3 off off desired on 0 0

Gi1/4 off off desired on 0 0

Gi1/5 off off desired on 0 0

Gi1/6 off off desired on 0 0

Gi3/1 off off desired off 0 0

Gi3/2 off off desired off 0 0

Gi3/3 off off desired off 0 0

Gi3/4 off off desired off 0 0

Gi3/5 off off desired off 0 0

Gi3/6 off off desired off 0 0

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the flow control status on module 1:

Switch# show flowcontrol module 1

Port Send FlowControl Receive FlowControl RxPause TxPause

admin oper admin oper

----- -------- -------- -------- -------- ------- -------

Gi1/1 desired off off off 0 0

Gi1/2 on disagree on on 0 0

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the flow control status on Gigabit Ethernet interface 3/4:

Switch# show flowcontrol interface gigabitethernet3/4

Port Send FlowControl Receive FlowControl RxPause TxPause

admin oper admin oper

----- -------- -------- -------- -------- ------- -------

Gi3/4 off off on on 0 0

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the flow control status on 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface 1/1:

Switch# show flowcontrol interface tengigabitethernet1/1

Port Send FlowControl Receive FlowControl RxPause TxPause

admin oper admin oper

--------- -------- -------- -------- -------- ------- -------

Te1/1 off off on off 0 0

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

channel-group

Configures a Gigabit Ethernet interface to send or receive pause frames.

show interfaces status

Displays the interface status or a list of interfaces in error-disabled state.

show hw-module module number port-group

Syntax Description

module

Specifies a line module.

number

Specifies a slot or module number.

port-group

Specifies a port-group on a switch.

Command Default

X2 mode.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

Support for WS-X4606-10GE-E Twin Gigabit converter introduced.

Usage Guidelines

When a TwinGig converter is enabled or disabled, the number and type of ports on the line card change dynamically. The terminology must reflect this behavior. In Cisco IOS, 10-Gigabit ports are named TenGigabit and 1-Gigabit ports are named Gigabit. Starting with Cisco IOS Release 12.2(40)SG, to avoid having ports named TenGigabit1/1 and Gigabit1/1, the 10-Gigabit and 1-Gigabit port numbers are independent. The WS-X4606-10GE-E module with six X2 ports are named TenGigabit<slot-num>/<1-6>, and the SFP ports are named Gigabit<slot-num>/<7-18>.

On Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F, the ports are connected to the switching engine through a stub ASIC. This stub ASIC imposes some limitations on the ports: Gigabit and 10-Gigabit ports cannot be mixed on a single stub ASIC; they must either be all 10-Gigabit (X2), or all Gigabit (TwinGig converter and SFP). The faceplates of X2 modules show this stub-port grouping, either with an actual physical grouping, or a box drawn around a grouping.

Examples

The following example shows to determine how the X2 holes on a module are grouped on a WS-X4606-10GE-E:

Switch# show hw-module module 1 port-group

Module Port-group Active Inactive

-------------------------------------------------------------

1 1 Te1/1-3 Gi1/7-12

1 2 Te1/4-6 Gi1/13-18

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

hw-module port-group

Selects either Gigabit Ethernet or Ten Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on your module.

show hw-module system max-port-num-mode

To display the current mode in which a system is running as well as a message informing you that linecards beyond the 5th slot are unsupported, use the show hw-module system max-port-num-mode command.

show hw-module system max-port-num-mode

Command Default

none

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

Release IOS XE 3.5.0E and IOS 15.2(1)E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The CLI shall be visible only on a 10-slot chassis or if 10-slot chassis is present in VSS.

Examples

The following example shows the output of the show hw-module system max-port-num-mode command on the standalone switch:

Switch# show hw-module system max-port-num-mode

Active max-port-num-mode configuration is 2

In this mode, Line cards inserted in last 3 slots (8,9 and 10) will not be active

The following example shows the output of the show hw-module system max-port-num-mode command in switch virtual mode:

Switch1# show hw-module system max-port-num-mode

Executing the command on VSS member switch role = VSS Active, id = 1

Active max-port-num-mode configuration is 1 (Default)

Executing the command on VSS member switch role = VSS Standby, id = 2

Active max-port-num-mode configuration is 2

In this mode, Line cards inserted in last 3 slots (8,9 and 10) will not be active

show hw-module uplink

To display the current uplink mode, use the show hw-module uplink command.

show hw-module uplink

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If the active uplink mode is different than configured mode, the output displays the change.

By default, the current (operational) uplink selection is displayed.

Examples

Switch# show hw-module uplink

Active uplink configuration is TenGigabitEthernet

(will be GigabitEthernet after next reload)

A 'redundancy reload shelf' or power-cycle of chassis is required to

apply the new configuration

The following example shows the output for redundant systems in RPR mode if the 10-Gigabit Ethernet uplinks are active, and the Gigabit Ethernet uplinks are selected:

Switch# show hw-module uplink

Active uplink configuration is TenGigabitEthernet

(will be GigabitEthernet after next reload)

A reload of active supervisor is required to apply the new configuration.

Related Commands

Command

Description

hw-module uplink select

Selects the 10-Gigabit Ethernet or Gigabit Ethernet uplinks on the Supervisor Engine V-10GE within the W-C4510R chassis.

show idprom

To display the IDPROMs for the chassis, supervisor engine, module, power supplies, fan trays, clock module, and multiplexer (mux) buffer, use the show idprom command.

show idprom {all | chassis | module [mod] | interface int_name | supervisor | power-supply number | fan-tray}

Syntax Description

all

Displays information for all IDPROMs.

chassis

Displays information for the chassis IDPROMs.

module

Displays information for the module IDPROMs.

mod

(Optional) Specifies the module name.

interface int_name

Displays information for the GBIC or SFP IDPROMs.

supervisor

Displays information for the supervisor engine IDPROMs.

power-supply number

Displays information for the power supply IDPROMs.

fan-tray

Displays information for the fan tray IDPROMs.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for the power-supply, fan-tray, clock-module, and mux-buffer keywords was added.

12.1(13)EW

Support for interface keyword was added.

12.2(18)EW

Enhanced the show idprom interface output to include the hexadecimal display of the GBIC/SFP SEEPROM contents.

12.2(25)EW

Support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When you enter the show idprom interface command, the output lines for Calibration type and Rx (receive) power measurement may not be displayed for all GBICs.

Examples

The following example shows how to display IDPROM information for module 4:

Switch# show idprom module 4

Module 4 Idprom:

Common Block Signature = 0xABAB

Common Block Version = 1

Common Block Length = 144

Common Block Checksum = 4199

Idprom Size = 256

Block Count = 2

FRU Major Type = 0x4201

FRU Minor Type = 303

OEM String = Cisco Systems, Inc.

Product Number = WS-X4306

Serial Number = 00000135

Part Number = <tbd>

Hardware Revision = 0.2

Manufacturing Bits = 0x0000

Engineering Bits = 0x0000

Snmp OID = 0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0

Power Consumption = 0

RMA Failure Code = 0 0 0 0

Linecard Block Signature = 0x4201

Linecard Block Version = 1

Linecard Block Length = 24

Linecard Block Checksum = 658

Feature Bits = 0x0000000000000000

Card Feature Index = 50

MAC Base = 0010.7bab.9830

MAC Count = 6

Switch#

The following example shows how to display IDPROM information for the GBICs on the Gigabit Ethernet interface 1/2:

Switch# show idprom interface gigabitethernet1/2

GBIC Serial EEPROM Contents:

Common Block:

Identifier = GBIC [0x1]

Extended Id = Not specified/compliant with defined MOD_DEF [0x0]

Connector = SC connector [0x1]

Transceiver

Speed = Not available [0x0]

Media = Not available [0x0]

Technology = Not available [0x0]

Link Length = Not available [0x0]

GE Comp Codes = Not available [0x0]

SONET Comp Codes = Not available [0x0]

Encoding = 8B10B [0x1]

BR, Nominal = 1300000000 MHz

Length(9u) in km = GBIC does not support single mode fibre, or the length

must be determined from the transceiver technology.

Length(9u) = > 25.4 km

Length(50u) = GBIC does not support 50 micron multi-mode fibre, or the

length must be determined from the transceiver technology.

Length(62.5u) = GBIC does not support 62.5 micron multi-mode fibre, or

the length must be determined from transceiver technology.

Length(Copper) = GBIC does not support copper cables, or the length must

be determined from the transceiver technology.

Vendor name = CISCO-FINISAR

Vendor OUI = 36965

Vendor Part No. = FTR-0119-CSC

Vendor Part Rev. = B

Wavelength = Not available

CC_BASE = 0x1A

Extended ID Fields

Options = Loss of Signal implemented TX_FAULT signal implemented TX_DISABLE is implemented and disables the serial output [0x1A]

BR, max = Unspecified

BR, min = Unspecified

Vendor Serial No. = K1273DH

Date code = 030409

Diag monitoring = Implemented

Calibration type = Internal

Rx pwr measuremnt = Optical Modulation Amplitude (OMA)

Address change = Required

CC_EXT = 0xB2

Vendor Specific ID Fields:

20944D30 29 00 02 80 22 33 38 3D C7 67 83 E8 DF 65 6A AF )..."38=Gg^Ch_ej/

20944D40 1A 80 ED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 38 23 3C 1B ............8#<.

SEEPROM contents (hex) size 128:

0x0000 01 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 0D 00 00 FF ................

0x0010 00 00 00 00 43 49 53 43 4F 2D 46 49 4E 49 53 41 ....CISCO-FINISA

0x0020 52 20 20 20 00 00 90 65 46 54 52 2D 30 31 31 39 R ..^PeFTR-0119

0x0030 2D 43 53 43 20 20 20 20 42 20 20 20 00 00 00 1A -CSC B ....

0x0040 00 1A 00 00 4B 31 32 37 33 44 48 20 20 20 20 20 ....K1273DH

0x0050 20 20 20 20 30 33 30 34 30 39 20 20 64 00 00 B2 030409 d..2

0x0060 29 00 02 80 22 33 38 3D C7 67 83 E8 DF 65 6A AF )..^@"38=Gg^C._ej.

0x0070 1A 80 ED 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 38 23 3C 1B .^@m.........8#<.

Switch#

The following example shows how to display IDPROM information for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface 1/1:

Switch# show idprom interface tengigabitethernet1/1

X2 Serial EEPROM Contents:

Non-Volatile Register (NVR) Fields

X2 MSA Version supported :0xA

NVR Size in bytes :0x100

Number of bytes used :0xD0

Basic Field Address :0xB

Customer Field Address :0x77

Vendor Field Address :0xA7

Extended Vendor Field Address :0x100

Reserved :0x0

Transceiver type :0x2 =X2

Optical connector type :0x1 =SC

Bit encoding :0x1 =NRZ

Normal BitRate in multiple of 1M b/s :0x2848

Protocol Type :0x1 =10GgE

Standards Compliance Codes :

10GbE Code Byte 0 :0x2 =10GBASE-LR

10GbE Code Byte 1 :0x0

SONET/SDH Code Byte 0 :0x0

SONET/SDH Code Byte 1 :0x0

SONET/SDH Code Byte 2 :0x0

SONET/SDH Code Byte 3 :0x0

10GFC Code Byte 0 :0x0

10GFC Code Byte 1 :0x0

10GFC Code Byte 2 :0x0

10GFC Code Byte 3 :0x0

Transmission range in 10m :0x3E8

Fibre Type :

Fibre Type Byte 0 :0x40 =NDSF only

Fibre Type Byte 1 :0x0 =Unspecified

Centre Optical Wavelength in 0.01nm steps - Channel 0 :0x1 0xFF 0xB8

Centre Optical Wavelength in 0.01nm steps - Channel 1 :0x0 0x0 0x0

Centre Optical Wavelength in 0.01nm steps - Channel 2 :0x0 0x0 0x0

Centre Optical Wavelength in 0.01nm steps - Channel 3 :0x0 0x0 0x0

Package Identifier OUI :0xC09820

Transceiver Vendor OUI :0x3400800

Transceiver vendor name :CISCO-OPNEXT,INC

Part number provided by transceiver vendor :TRT5021EN-SMC-W

Revision level of part number provided by vendor :00

Vendor serial number :ONJ08290041

Vendor manufacturing date code :2004072000

Reserved1 : 00 02 02 20 D1 00 00

Basic Field Checksum :0x10

Customer Writable Area :

0x00: 58 32 2D 31 30 47 42 2D 4C 52 20 20 20 20 20 20

0x10: 20 20 20 20 20 4F 4E 4A 30 38 32 39 30 30 34 31

0x20: 31 30 2D 32 30 33 36 2D 30 31 20 20 41 30 31 20

Vendor Specific :

0x00: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

0x10: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

0x20: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00

0x30: 00 00 00 00 11 E2 69 A9 2F 95 C6 EE D2 DA B3 FD

0x40: 9A 34 4A 24 CB 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 EF FC

0x50: F4 AC 1A D7 11 08 01 36 00

Switch#

The following example shows how to display IDPROM information for the supervisor engine:

Switch# show idprom supervisor

Supervisor Idprom:

Common Block Signature = 0xABAB

Common Block Version = 1

Common Block Length = 144

Common Block Checksum = 4153

Idprom Size = 256

Block Count = 2

FRU Major Type = 0x4101

FRU Minor Type = 333

OEM String = Cisco Systems, Inc.

Product Number = WS-X4014

Serial Number = JAB05320CCE

Part Number = 73-6854-04

Part Revision = 05

Manufacturing Deviation String = 0

Hardware Revision = 0.4

Manufacturing Bits = 0x0000

Engineering Bits = 0x0000

Snmp OID = 0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0

Power Consumption = 0

RMA Failure Code = 0 0 0 0

Supervisor Block Signature = 0x4101

Supervisor Block Version = 1

Supervisor Block Length = 24

Supervisor Block Checksum = 548

Feature Bits = 0x0000000000000000

Card Feature Index = 95

MAC Base = 0007.0ee5.2a44

MAC Count = 2

Switch#

The following example shows how to display IDPROM information for the chassis:

Switch# show idprom chassis

Chassis Idprom:

Common Block Signature = 0xABAB

Common Block Version = 1

Common Block Length = 144

Common Block Checksum = 4285

Idprom Size = 256

Block Count = 2

FRU Major Type = 0x4001

FRU Minor Type = 24

OEM String = Cisco Systems, Inc.

Product Number = WS-C4507R

Serial Number = FOX04473737

Part Number = 73-4289-02

Part Revision = 02

Manufacturing Deviation String = 0x00

Hardware Revision = 0.2

Manufacturing Bits = 0x0000

Engineering Bits = 0x0000

Snmp OID = 0.0.0.0.0.0.0.0

Chassis Block Signature = 0x4001

Chassis Block Version = 1

Chassis Block Length = 22

Chassis Block Checksum = 421

Feature Bits = 0x0000000000000000

MAC Base = 0004.dd42.2600

MAC Count = 1024

Switch#

The following example shows how to display IDPROM information for power supply 1:

Switch# show idprom power-supply 1

Power Supply 0 Idprom:

Common Block Signature = 0xABAB

Common Block Version = 1

Common Block Length = 144

Common Block Checksum = 10207

Idprom Size = 256

Block Count = 1

FRU Major Type = 0xAB01

FRU Minor Type = 8224

OEM String = Cisco Systems, Inc.

Product Number = WS-CAC-1440W

Serial Number = ACP05180002

Part Number = 34-XXXX-01

Part Revision = A0

Manufacturing Deviation String =

Hardware Revision = 1.1

Manufacturing Bits = 0x0000

Engineering Bits = 0x3031

Snmp OID = 9.12.3.65535.65535.65535.65535.65535

Power Consumption = -1

RMA Failure Code = 255 255 255 255

Power Supply Block Signature = 0xFFFF

PowerSupply Block Version = 255

PowerSupply Block Length = 255

PowerSupply Block Checksum = 65535

Feature Bits = 0x00000000FFFFFFFF

Current @ 110V = -1

Current @ 220V = -1

StackMIB OID = 65535

Switch#

The following example shows how to display IDPROM information for the fan tray:

Switch# show idprom fan-tray

Fan Tray Idprom :

Common Block Signature = 0xABAB

Common Block Version = 1

Common Block Length = 144

Common Block Checksum = 19781

Idprom Size = 256

Block Count = 1

FRU Major Type = 0x4002

FRU Minor Type = 0

OEM String = "Cisco Systems"

Product Number = WS-X4502-fan

Serial Number =

Part Number =

Part Revision =

Manufacturing Deviation String =

Hardware Revision = 0.1

Manufacturing Bits = 0xFFFF

Engineering Bits = 0xFFFF

Snmp OID = 65535.65535.65535.65535.65535.65535.65535.65535

Power Consumption = -1

RMA Failure Code = 255 255 255 255

Switch#

show interfaces

To display traffic on a specific interface, use the show interfaces command.

show interfaces [{{fastethernet mod/interface-number} | {gigabitethernet mod/interface-number} | {tengigabitethernet mod/interface-number} | {null interface-number} | vlan vlan_id} | status}]

Syntax Description

fastethernet mod/interface-number

(Optional) Specifies the Fast Ethernet module and interface.

gigabitethernet mod/interface-number

(Optional) Specifies the Gigabit Ethernet module and interface.

tengigabitethernet mod/interface-number

(Optional) Specifies the 10-Gigabit Ethernet module and interface.

null interface-number

(Optional) Specifies the null interface; the valid value is 0.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

status

(Optional) Displays status information.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended VLAN addresses was added.

12.2(25)EW

Support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(31)SGA

Support for auto-MDIX reflected in command output.

12.2(52)SG

Added support for per-VLAN error-disable detection.

Usage Guidelines

The statistics are collected per VLAN for Layer 2 switched packets and Layer 3 switched packets. The statistics are available for both unicast and multicast. The Layer 3 switched packet counts are available for both the ingress and egress directions. The per-VLAN statistics are updated every 5 seconds.

In some cases, the duplex mode that is displayed by the show interfaces command is different than that displayed by the show running-config command. The duplex mode that is displayed in the show interfaces command is the actual duplex mode that the interface is running. The show interfaces command shows the operating mode for an interface, but the show running-config command shows the configured mode for an interface.

If you do not enter any keywords, all counters for all modules are displayed.

Line cards that support auto-MDIX configuration on their copper media ports include: WS-X4124-RJ45, WS-X4148-RJ with hardware revision 3.0 or later, and WS-X4232-GB-RJ with hardware revision 3.0 or later.

Examples

Switch# show interfaces tengigabitethernet1/1

Name: Tengigabitethernet1/1

Switchport: Enabled

Administrative Mode: private-vlan promiscuous trunk

Operational Mode: private-vlan promiscuous (suspended member of bundle Po1)

Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: negotiate

Operational Trunking Encapsulation: native

Negotiation of Trunking: Off

Access Mode VLAN: none

Trunking Native Mode VLAN: none

Administrative Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Voice VLAN: none

Administrative private-vlan host-association: none

Administrative private-vlan mapping: 202 (VLAN0202) 303 (VLAN0303) 304 (VLAN0304)

Administrative private-vlan trunk native VLAN: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk

Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Administrative private-vlan trunk encapsulation: 802.1q

Administrative private-vlan trunk normal VLANs: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk private VLANs: none

Administrative private-vlan mapping trunk: New 202 (VLAN0202) 303 (VLAN0303) 304 (VLAN0304) 204 (VLAN0204) 305 (VLAN0305) 306 (VLAN0306)

Operational private-vlan: 202 (VLAN0202) 303 (VLAN0303) 304 (VLAN0304)

Trunking VLANs Enabled: ALL

Pruning VLANs Enabled: 2-1001

Capture Mode Disabled

Capture VLANs Allowed: ALL

Switch#

The following example shows how to verify the status of auto-MDIX on an RJ-45 port:

Note You can verify the configuration setting and the operational state of auto-MDIX on the interface by entering the show interfaces EXEC command. This field is applicable and appears only on the

show interfaces command output for 10/100/1000BaseT RJ-45 copper ports on supported linecards including WS-X4124-RJ45, WS-X4148-RJ with hardware revision 3.0 or later, and WS-X4232-GB-RJ with hardware revision 3.0 or later.

FastEthernet6/3 is up, line protocol is up (connected)

Hardware is Fast Ethernet Port, address is 0003.6ba8.ee68 (bia 0003.6ba8.ee68)

MTU 1500 bytes, BW 100000 Kbit, DLY 100 usec,

reliability 255/255, txload 1/255, rxload 1/255

Encapsulation ARPA, loopback not set

Keepalive set (10 sec)

Full-duplex, 100Mb/s, link type is auto, media type is 10/100BaseTX

input flow-control is unsupported output flow-control is unsupported

Auto-MDIX on (operational: on)

ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00

Last input never, output never, output hang never

Last clearing of "show interface" counters never

Input queue: 0/2000/0/0 (size/max/drops/flushes); Total output drops: 0

Queueing strategy: fifo

Output queue: 0/40 (size/max)

5 minute input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec

5 minute output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec

0 packets input, 0 bytes, 0 no buffer

Received 0 broadcasts (0 multicasts)

0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles

0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 0 ignored

0 input packets with dribble condition detected

157082 packets output, 13418032 bytes, 0 underruns

0 output errors, 0 collisions, 0 interface resets

0 babbles, 0 late collision, 0 deferred

1 lost carrier, 0 no carrier

0 output buffer failures, 0 output buffers swapped out

Switch#

The following example shows how to display status information for Gigabit Ethernet interface 1/2:

Switch# show interfaces gigabitethernet1/2 status

Port Name Status Vlan Duplex Speed Type

Gi1/2 notconnect 1 auto 1000 1000-XWDM-RXONLY

Switch#

The following example shows how to display status information for the interfaces on the supervisor engine:

Switch# show interfaces status

Port Name Status Vlan Duplex Speed Type

Te1/1 connected 1 full 10G 10GBase-LR

Te1/2 connected 1 full 10G 10GBase-LR

Switch#

show interfaces (virtual switch)

To display traffic that is seen by a specific interface, use the show interfaces command in EXEC mode.

show interfaces [interface iswitch-num/mod/port]

Syntax Description

interface

(Optional) Specifies interface type

switch-num

Specifies port number.

/mod

Specifies module number

/port

Specifies port number

Command Default

This command has no defaults settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

Cisco IOS XE 3.4.0SG and 15.1(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Statistics are collected on a per-VLAN basis for Layer 2-switched packets and Layer 3-switched packets. Statistics are available for both unicast and multicast traffic. The Layer 3-switched packet counts are available for both ingress and egress directions. The per-VLAN statistics are updated every 5 seconds.

In some cases, you might see a difference in the duplex mode that is displayed between the show interfaces (virtual switch) command and the show running-config switch (virtual switch) command. In this case, the duplex mode that is displayed in the show interfaces (virtual switch) command is the actual duplex mode that the interface is running. The show interfaces (virtual switch) command shows the operating mode for an interface, while the show running-config switch (virtual switch) command shows the configured mode for an interface.

If you do not specify an interface, the information for all interfaces is displayed.

The output of the show interfaces GigabitEthernet command displays an extra 4 bytes for every packet that is sent or received. The extra 4 bytes are the Ethernet frame CRC in the input and output byte statistics.

Examples

The following example shows how to display traffic for a specific interface:

Router# show interfaces GigabitEthernet switch 1/3/3

GigabitEthernet1/3/3 is up, line protocol is up (connected)

Hardware is C6k 1000Mb 802.3, address is 000f.2305.49c0 (bia 000f.2305.49c0)

MTU 1500 bytes, BW 1000000 Kbit, DLY 10 usec,

reliability 255/255, txload 1/255, rxload 1/255

Encapsulation 802.1Q Virtual LAN, Vlan ID 1., loopback not set

Keepalive set (10 sec)

Full-duplex, 1000Mb/s, media type is LH

input flow-control is off, output flow-control is on

Clock mode is auto

ARP type: ARPA, ARP Timeout 04:00:00

Last input 00:00:19, output 00:00:00, output hang never

Last clearing of "show interface" counters never

Input queue: 0/75/0/0 (size/max/drops/flushes); Total output drops: 0

Queueing strategy: fifo

Output queue: 0/40 (size/max)

5 minute input rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec

5 minute output rate 0 bits/sec, 0 packets/sec

L2 Switched: ucast: 360 pkt, 23040 bytes - mcast: 0 pkt, 0 bytes

L3 in Switched: ucast: 0 pkt, 0 bytes - mcast: 0 pkt, 0 bytes mcast

L3 out Switched: ucast: 0 pkt, 0 bytes mcast: 0 pkt, 0 bytes

437 packets input, 48503 bytes, 0 no buffer

Received 76 broadcasts (0 IP multicast)

0 runts, 0 giants, 0 throttles

0 input errors, 0 CRC, 0 frame, 0 overrun, 0 ignored

0 watchdog, 0 multicast, 0 pause input

0 input packets with dribble condition detected

86 packets output, 25910 bytes, 0 underruns

0 output errors, 0 collisions, 0 interface resets

0 babbles, 0 late collision, 0 deferred

0 lost carrier, 0 no carrier, 0 PAUSE output

0 output buffer failures, 0 output buffers swapped out

Router#

Related Commands

Command

Description

interface (virtual switch)

Selects an interface to configure and enters the interface configuration mode.

show interfaces counters

To display the traffic on the physical interface, use the show interfaces counters command.

show interfaces counters [all | detail | errors | storm-control | trunk] [module mod]

Syntax Description

all

(Optional) Displays all the interface counters including errors, trunk, and detail.

detail

(Optional) Displays the detailed interface counters.

errors

(Optional) Displays the interface error counters.

storm-control

(Optional) Displays the number of packets discarded due to suppression on the interface.

trunk

(Optional) Displays the interface trunk counters.

module mod

(Optional) Limits the display to interfaces on a specific module.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(19)EW

Support for storm control.

12.2(18)EW

Support for the display of total suppression discards.

Usage Guidelines

If you do not enter any keywords, all the counters for all modules are displayed.

The display for the storm-control keyword includes the suppressed multicast bytes.

Examples

Switch# show interfaces counters module 1

Port InOctets InUcastPkts InMcastPkts InBcastPkts

Gi1/1 0 0 0 0

Gi1/2 0 0 0 0

Port OutOctets OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts

Gi1/1 0 0 0 0

Gi1/2 0 0 0 0

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the trunk counters for a specific module:

Switch# show interfaces counters trunk module 1

Port TrunkFramesTx TrunkFramesRx WrongEncap

Gi1/1 0 0 0

Gi1/2 0 0 0

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the number of packets that are discarded due to suppression:

Switch# show interfaces counters storm-control

Multicast Suppression : Enabled

Port BcastSuppLevel TotalSuppressionDiscards

Fa5/35 10.00% 6278550

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces (virtual switch)

Displays the interface capabilities for an interface or for all the interfaces on a switch.

show interfaces counters (virtual switch)

To display the traffic that the physical interface sees, use the show interfaces counters command in EXEC mode.

show interfaces [interface switch-num/mod/port] counters [errors | etherchannel | protocol status | storm-control]

Syntax Description

interface

(Optional) Specifies the interface type.

switch-num

Specifies the switch number; valid values are 1 and 2.

/mod

Specifies the module number.

/port

Specifies the port number.

errors

(Optional) Displays the interface error counters.

etherchannel

(Optional) Displays information about the EtherChannel interface.

protocol status

(Optional) Displays information about the current status of the enabled protocols.

storm-control

(Optional) Displays the discard count and the level settings for each mode.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The show interfaces counters command displays the number of all of the packets arriving and includes the number of packets that may be dropped by the interface due to the storm-control settings. To display the total number of dropped packets, you can enter the show interfaces counters storm-control command.

The show interfaces counters storm-control command displays the discard count and the level settings for each mode. The discard count is a total of all three modes.

If you do not enter any keywords, all counters for all modules are displayed.

If you do not specify an interface, the information for all interfaces is displayed.

When you enter the show interfaces interface counters etherchannel command, follow these guidelines:

- If interface specifies a physical port, the command displays the message "Etherchannel not enabled on this interface."

- If interface is omitted, the command displays the counters for all port channels (in the system) and for their associated physical ports.

- If interface specifies a port channel, the command displays the counters for the port channel and all of the physical ports that are associated with it. In addition, when you enter the command specifying the primary aggregator in a Link Aggregation Control Protocol (LACP) port channel with multiple aggregators, the output includes the statistics for all of the aggregators in the port channels and for the ports that are associated with them.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the error counters for a specific:

Router# show interfaces gigabitethernet 2/4/47 counters errors

Port Align-Err FCS-Err Xmit-Err Rcv-Err UnderSize OutDiscards

Gi2/4/47 0 0 0 0 0 0

Port Single-Col Multi-Col Late-Col Excess-Col Carri-Sen Runts s

Gi2/4/47 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Port SQETest-Err Deferred-Tx IntMacTx-Err IntMacRx-Err Symbol-Err

Gi2/4/47 0 0 0 0 0

Router#

The following example shows how to display traffic that is seen by a specific interface:

Router# show interfaces gigabitethernet 1/2/5 counters

Port InOctets InUcastPkts InMcastPkts InBcastPkts

Gi1/2/5 0 0 0 0

Port OutOctets OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts

Gi1/2/5 0 0 0 0

Router#

The following example shows how to display the counters for all port channels (in the system) and their associated physical ports:

Router# show interfaces counters etherchannel

Port InOctets InUcastPkts InMcastPkts InBcastPkts

Po1 0 0 0 0

Po3 0 0 0 0

Po10 16341138343 77612803 12212915 14110863

Gi1/4/1 15628478622 77612818 7525970 14110865

Gi1/4/2 712662881 0 4686951 5

Po20 33887345029 88483183 11506653 14101212

Gi2/4/1 33326378013 88491521 7177393 14101663

Gi2/4/2 562904837 0 4330030 6

Port OutOctets OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts

Po1 0 0 0 0

Po3 0 0 0 0

Po10 33889238079 14101204 99999327 0

Gi1/4/1 33326354634 14101205 95669326 0

Gi1/4/2 562904707 7 4330029 0

Po20 16338422056 14353951 89573339 0

Gi2/4/1 15628501864 14232410 85017290 0

Gi2/4/2 712663011 121541 4565416 0

Router#

The following example shows how to display the counters for all port channels (in the system) and their associated physical ports in Cisco IOS Release 12.2(50)SY and later releases:

Router# show interfaces counters etherchannel

Port InOctets InUcastPkts InMcastPkts InBcastPkts

Po1 0 0 0 0

Po3 0 0 0 0

Po10 16341138343 77612803 12212915 14110863

Gi1/4/1 15628478622 77612818 7525970 14110865

Gi1/4/2 712662881 0 4686951 5

Po20 33887345029 88483183 11506653 14101212

Gi2/4/1 33326378013 88491521 7177393 14101663

Gi2/4/2 562904837 0 4330030 6

Router#

The following example shows how to display the protocols enabled for a specific interface:

Router# show interfaces gigabitethernet 1/2/5 counters protocol status

Protocols allocated:

GigabitEthernet1/2/5: Other, IP

Router#

The following example shows how to display the discard count and the level settings for each mode for a specific interface:

Router# show interfaces gigabitethernet 1/2/5 counters storm-control

Port UcastSupp % McastSupp % BcastSupp % TotalSuppDiscards

Gi1/2/5 100.0 100.0 100.0 0

Router#

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear counters

Clears the interface counters.

show interfaces description

To display a description and status of an interface, use the show interfaces description command.

show interfaces [interface] description

Syntax Description

interface

(Optional) Type of interface.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to display information for all interfaces:

Switch# show interfaces description

Interface Status Protocol Description

PO0/0 admin down down First interface

PO0/1 admin down down

Gi1/1 up up GigE to server farm

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

description (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Includes a specific description about the digital signal processor (DSP) interface.

show interfaces link

To display how long a cable has been disconnected from an interface, use the show interfaces link command:

show interfaces link [module mod_num]

Syntax Description

module mod_num

(Optional) Limits the display to interfaces on a module.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If the interface state is up, the command displays 0:00. If the interface state is down, the time (in hours, minutes, and seconds) is displayed.

Examples

The following example shows how to display active link-level information:

Switch# show interfaces link

Port Name Down Time

Gi1/1 00:00:00

Gi1/2 00:00:00

Gi3/1 00:00:00

Gi3/2 00:00:00

Fa4/1 00:00:00

Fa4/2 00:00:00

Fa4/3 00:00:00

Fa4/4 00:00:00

The following example shows how to display inactive link-level information:

Switch# show interfaces link

Port Name Down Time

Gi3/4 1 minute 28 secs

Gi3/5 1 minute 28 secs

Gi3/6 1 minute 28 secs

Gi4/1 1 minute 28 secs

In this example, the cable has been disconnected from the port for 1 minute and 28 seconds.

show interfaces mtu

To display the maximum transmission unit (MTU) size of all the physical interfaces and SVIs on the switch, use the show interfaces mtu command.

show interfaces mtu [module mod]

Syntax Description

module mod

(Optional) Limits the display to interfaces on a specific module.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Enables jumbo frames on an interface by adjusting the maximum size of a packet or maximum transmission unit (MTU).

show interfaces private-vlan mapping

To display PVLAN mapping information for VLAN SVIs, use the show interfaces private-vlan mapping command.

show interfaces private-vlan mapping [active]

Syntax Description

active

(Optional) Displays active interfaces only.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command displays SVI information only.

Examples

The following example shows how to display PVLAN mapping information:

Switch# show interfaces private-vlan mapping

Interface Secondary VLAN Type

--------- -------------- -----------------

vlan2 301 isolated

vlan2 302 isolated

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

private-vlan

Configures private VLANs and the association between a private VLAN and a secondary VLAN.

private-vlan mapping

Creates a mapping between the primary and the secondary VLANs so that both share the same primary VLAN SVI.

show interfaces status

To display the interface status or a list of interfaces in error-disabled state, use the show interfaces status command.

show interfaces status [err-disabled | inactive ] [module {module}]

Syntax Description

err-disabled

(Optional) Displays interfaces in error-disabled state.

inactive

(Optional) Displays interfaces in inactive state.

module module

(Optional) Displays interfaces on a specific module.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(40)SG

Support for WS-X4606-10GE-E Twin Gigabit converter introduced.

12.2(52)SG

Support for per-VLAN error-disable was introduced by adding Err-Disabled VLAN column to output.

Usage Guidelines

When at least one VLAN on a port is error-disabled the output for the show interfaces status command will display vl-err-dis in the VLAN column.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the status of all interfaces:

Switch# show interfaces status

Port Name Status Vlan Duplex Speed Type

Te1/1 connected 1 full 10G 10GBase-LR

Te1/2 connected vl-err-dis full 10G 10GBase-LR

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the status of interfaces in an error-disabled state:

Switch# show interfaces status err-disabled

Port Name Status Reason Err-Disabled VLANs

---- ---- ------ ------- -------------------

Fa9/4 notconnect link-flap

Fa9/5 err-disabled psecure_violation 3-5

Fa9/6 connected psecure_violation 10,15

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on a WS-X4606-10GE-E switch using the TwinGig Convertor:

Switch# show interfaces status module 1

Port Name Status Vlan Duplex Speed Type

Te1/1 inactive 1 full 10G No X2

Te1/2 inactive 1 full 10G No X2

Te1/3 inactive 1 full 10G No X2

Te1/4 notconnect 1 full 10G No X2

Te1/5 notconnect 1 full 10G No X2

Te1/6 notconnect 1 full 10G No X2

Gi1/7 notconnect 1 full 1000 No Gbic

Gi1/8 notconnect 1 full 1000 No Gbic

Gi1/9 notconnect 1 full 1000 No Gbic

Gi1/10 notconnect 1 full 1000 No Gbic

Gi1/11 notconnect 1 full 1000 No Gbic

Gi1/12 notconnect 1 full 1000 No Gbic

Gi1/13 inactive 1 full 1000 No Gbic

Gi1/14 inactive 1 full 1000 No Gbic

Gi1/15 inactive 1 full 1000 No Gbic

Gi1/16 inactive 1 full 1000 No Gbic

Gi1/17 inactive 1 full 1000 No Gbic

Gi1/18 inactive 1 full 1000 No Gbic

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

errdisable detect cause

Enables error-disable detection.

hw-module port-group

Selects either Gigabit Ethernet or Ten Gigabit Ethernet interfaces on your module.

show errdisable recovery

Displays error-disable recovery timer information.

show interfaces switchport

To display the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port, use the show interfaces switchport command.

show interfaces [interface-id] switchport [module mod]

Syntax Description

interface-id

(Optional) Interface ID for the physical port.

module mod

(Optional) Limits the display to interfaces on the specified module; valid values are from 1 to 6.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(19)EW

Support for per-interface display.

12.2(18)EW

Support for displaying the status of native VLAN tagging in the command output.

15.1.0 SG

Support for PVLAN modes over EtherChannel. Modes include: private-vlan host, private-vlan promiscuous, private-vlan trunk secondary, and private-vlan trunk promiscuous.

Examples

Switch# show interfaces switchport module 1

Name:Gi1/1

Switchport:Enabled

Administrative Mode:dynamic auto

Operational Mode:down

Administrative Trunking Encapsulation:negotiate

Negotiation of Trunking:On

Access Mode VLAN:1 (default)

Trunking Native Mode VLAN:1 (default)

Administrative private-vlan host-association:none

Administrative private-vlan mapping:none

Operational private-vlan:none

Trunking VLANs Enabled:ALL

Pruning VLANs Enabled:2-1001

Name:Gi1/2

Switchport:Enabled

Administrative Mode:dynamic auto

Operational Mode:down

Administrative Trunking Encapsulation:negotiate

Negotiation of Trunking:On

Access Mode VLAN:1 (default)

Trunking Native Mode VLAN:1 (default)

Administrative private-vlan host-association:none

Administrative private-vlan mapping:none

Operational private-vlan:none

Trunking VLANs Enabled:ALL

Pruning VLANs Enabled:2-1001

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the status of native VLAN tagging on the port:

Switch# show interfaces f3/1 switchport

show interface f3/1 switchport

Name: Fa3/1

Switchport: Enabled

Administrative Mode: private-vlan promiscuous

Operational Mode: private-vlan trunk secondary

Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: negotiate

Operational Trunking Encapsulation: dot1q

Negotiation of Trunking: On

Access Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Administrative Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Voice VLAN: none

Administrative private-vlan host-association: none

Administrative private-vlan mapping: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk native VLAN: 1

Administrative private-vlan trunk Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Administrative private-vlan trunk encapsulation: dot1q

Administrative private-vlan trunk normal VLANs: 1

Administrative private-vlan trunk associations: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk mappings:

10 (VLAN0010) 100 (VLAN0100)

Operational private-vlan:

10 (VLAN0010) 100 (VLAN0100)

Trunking VLANs Enabled: ALL

Pruning VLANs Enabled: 2-1001

Capture Mode Disabled

Capture VLANs Allowed: ALL

Unknown unicast blocked: disabled

Unknown multicast blocked: disabled

Appliance trust: none

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces (virtual switch)

Displays the interface capabilities for an interface or for all the interfaces on a switch.

show interfaces counters

Displays the traffic on the physical interface.

show interfaces transceiver

To display diagnostic-monitoring data for all interfaces that have transceivers installed, use the show interfaces transceiver command.

show interfaces {{[int_name] transceiver {[detail]} | {transceiver [module mod] | detail [module mod]}}

Syntax Description

int_name

(Optional) Interface name.

detail

(Optional) Displays the calibrated values and the A2D readouts if the readout values differ from the calibrated values. Also displays the high-alarm, high-warning, low-warning, and low-alarm thresholds.

module mod

(Optional) Limits the display to interfaces on a specific module.

Command Default

The noninterface-specific versions of the show interfaces transceiver command are enabled by default.

The interface-specific versions of these commands are enabled by default if the specified interface has a transceiver (GBIC or SFP) that is configured for diagnostic monitoring, and the transceiver is in a module that supports diagnostic monitoring.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(20)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(18)EW

Support for the calibration keyword was withdrawn.

Usage Guidelines

The show interfaces transceiver command provides useful information under the following conditions:

- At least one transceiver is installed on a chassis that is configured for diagnostic monitoring.

- The transceiver is in a module that supports diagnostic monitoring.

If you notice that the alarm and warning flags have been set on a transceiver, reenter the command to confirm.

Examples

The following example shows how to display diagnostic monitoring data for all interfaces with transceivers installed on the switch:

Switch# show interfaces transceiver

If device is externally calibrated, only calibrated values are printed.

++ : high alarm, + : high warning, - : low warning, -- : low alarm.

NA or N/A: not applicable, Tx: transmit, Rx: receive.

mA: milliamperes, dBm: decibels (milliwatts).

Optical Optical

Temperature Voltage Current Tx Power Rx Power

Port (Celsius) (Volts) (mA) (dBm) (dBm)

------- ----------- ------- -------- -------- --------

Gi1/1 48.1 3.30 0.0 8.1 ++ N/A

Gi1/2 33.0 3.30 1.8 -10.0 -36.9

Gi2/1 43.7 5.03 50.6 + -16.7 -- N/A

Gi2/2 39.2 5.02 25.7 0.8 N/A

Switch#

Note The value for the Optical Tx Power (in dBm) equals ten times log (Tx Power in mW). If the Tx Power value is 3 mW, then the Optical Tx Power value equals 10 * log (3), which equals 10 * .477 or 4.77 dBm. The Optical Rx Power value behaves similarly. If the Tx Power or the Rx Power is zero, then its dBm value is undefined and is shown as N/A (not applicable).

Switch# show interfaces transceiver module 2

If device is externally calibrated, only calibrated values are printed.

++ : high alarm, + : high warning, - : low warning, -- : low alarm.

NA or N/A: not applicable, Tx: transmit, Rx: receive.

mA: milliamperes, dBm: decibels (milliwatts).

Optical Optical

Temperature Voltage Current Tx Power Rx Power

Port (Celsius) (Volts) (mA) (dBm) (dBm)

------- ----------- ------- -------- -------- --------

Gi2/1 43.7 5.03 50.6 + -16.7 -- N/A

Gi2/2 39.2 5.02 25.7 0.8 N/A

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the detailed monitoring data for the interfaces that have transceivers installed on module 2:

Switch# show interfaces transceiver detail module 2

mA: milliamperes, dBm: decibels (milliwatts), NA or N/A: not applicable.

++ : high alarm, + : high warning, - : low warning, -- : low alarm.

A2D readouts (if they differ), are reported in parentheses.

The threshold values are calibrated.

High Alarm High Warn Low Warn Low Alarm

Temperature Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold

Port (Celsius) (Celsius) (Celsius) (Celsius) (Celsius)

------- ------------------ ---------- --------- --------- ---------

Gi2/1 43.5 70.0 60.0 5.0 0.0

Gi2/2 39.1 70.0 60.0 5.0 0.0

High Alarm High Warn Low Warn Low Alarm

Voltage Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold

Port (Volts) (Volts) (Volts) (Volts) (Volts)

------- --------------- ---------- --------- --------- ---------

Gi2/1 5.03 5.50 5.25 4.75 4.50

Gi2/2 5.02 5.50 5.25 4.75 4.50

High Alarm High Warn Low Warn Low Alarm

Current Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold

Port (milliamperes) (mA) (mA) (mA) (mA)

------- ----------------- ---------- --------- --------- ---------

Gi2/1 50.6 + 60.0 40.0 10.0 5.0

Gi2/2 25.8 60.0 40.0 10.0 5.0

Optical High Alarm High Warn Low Warn Low Alarm

Transmit Power Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold

Port (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm)

------- ----------------- ---------- --------- --------- ---------

Gi2/1 -16.7 (-13.0) -- 3.4 3.2 -0.3 -0.5

Gi2/2 0.8 ( 5.1) 3.4 3.2 -0.3 -0.5

Optical High Alarm High Warn Low Warn Low Alarm

Receive Power Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold

Port (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm)

------- ----------------- ---------- --------- --------- ---------

Gi2/1 N/A (-28.5) 5.9 -6.7 -28.5 -28.5

Gi2/2 N/A (-19.5) 5.9 -6.7 -28.5 -28.5

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the monitoring data for the transceivers on interface Gi1/2:

Switch# show interfaces g1/2 transceiver

ITU Channel 23 (1558.98 nm),

Transceiver is externally calibrated.

If device is externally calibrated, only calibrated values are printed.

++ : high alarm, + : high warning, - : low warning, -- : low alarm.

NA or N/A: not applicable, Tx: transmit, Rx: receive.

mA: milliamperes, dBm: decibels (milliwatts).

Optical Optical

Temperature Voltage Current Tx Power Rx Power

Port (Celsius) (Volts) (mA) (dBm) (dBm)

------- ----------- ------- -------- -------- --------

Gi2/1 43.7 5.03 50.6 + -16.7 -- N/A

Switch#

The following example shows how to display detailed the monitoring data for the transceivers on interface Gi1/2:

Switch# show interfaces g1/2 transceiver detail

ITU Channel 23 (1558.98 nm),

Transceiver is externally calibrated.

mA: milliamperes, dBm: decibels (milliwatts), NA or N/A: not applicable.

++ : high alarm, + : high warning, - : low warning, -- : low alarm.

A2D readouts (if they differ), are reported in parentheses.

The threshold values are calibrated.

High Alarm High Warn Low Warn Low Alarm

Temperature Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold

Port (Celsius) (Celsius) (Celsius) (Celsius) (Celsius)

------- ------------------ ---------- --------- --------- ---------

Gi2/1 43.5 70.0 60.0 5.0 0.0

High Alarm High Warn Low Warn Low Alarm

Voltage Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold

Port (Volts) (Volts) (Volts) (Volts) (Volts)

------- --------------- ---------- --------- --------- ---------

Gi2/1 5.03 5.50 5.25 4.75 4.50

High Alarm High Warn Low Warn Low Alarm

Current Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold

Port (milliamperes) (mA) (mA) (mA) (mA)

------- ----------------- ---------- --------- --------- ---------

Gi2/1 50.6 + 60.0 40.0 10.0 5.0

Optical High Alarm High Warn Low Warn Low Alarm

Transmit Power Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold

Port (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm)

------- ----------------- ---------- --------- --------- ---------

Gi2/1 -16.7 (-13.0) -- 3.4 3.2 -0.3 -0.5

Optical High Alarm High Warn Low Warn Low Alarm

Receive Power Threshold Threshold Threshold Threshold

Port (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm) (dBm)

------- ----------------- ---------- --------- --------- ---------

Gi2/1 N/A (-28.5) 5.9 -6.7 -28.5 -28.5

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show idprom

Displays the IDPROMs for the chassis.

show interfaces status

Displays the interface status or a list of interfaces in error-disabled state.

show interfaces trunk

To display port and module interface-trunk information, use the show interfaces trunk command.

show interfaces trunk [module mod]

Syntax Description

module mod

(Optional) Limits the display to interfaces on the specified module; valid values are from 1 to 6.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If you do not specify a keyword, only information for trunking ports is displayed.

Examples

The following example shows how to display interface-trunk information for module 5:

Switch# show interfaces trunk module 5

Port Mode Encapsulation Status Native vlan

Fa5/1 routed negotiate routed 1

Fa5/2 routed negotiate routed 1

Fa5/3 routed negotiate routed 1

Fa5/4 routed negotiate routed 1

Fa5/5 routed negotiate routed 1

Fa5/6 off negotiate not-trunking 10

Fa5/7 off negotiate not-trunking 10

Fa5/8 off negotiate not-trunking 1

Fa5/9 desirable n-isl trunking 1

Fa5/10 desirable negotiate not-trunking 1

Fa5/11 routed negotiate routed 1

Fa5/12 routed negotiate routed 1

...

Fa5/48 routed negotiate routed 1

Port Vlans allowed on trunk

Fa5/1 none

Fa5/2 none

Fa5/3 none

Fa5/4 none

Fa5/5 none

Fa5/6 none

Fa5/7 none

Fa5/8 200

Fa5/9 1-1005

Fa5/10 none

Fa5/11 none

Fa5/12 none

Fa5/48 none

Port Vlans allowed and active in management domain

Fa5/1 none

Fa5/2 none

Fa5/3 none

Fa5/4 none

Fa5/5 none

Fa5/6 none

Fa5/7 none

Fa5/8 200

Fa5/9 1-6,10,20,50,100,152,200,300,303-305,349-351,400,500,521,524,570,801-8

02,850,917,999,1002-1005

Fa5/10 none

Fa5/11 none

Fa5/12 none

Fa5/48 none

Port Vlans in spanning tree forwarding state and not pruned

Fa5/1 none

Fa5/2 none

Fa5/3 none

Fa5/4 none

Fa5/5 none

Fa5/6 none

Fa5/7 none

Fa5/8 200

Fa5/9 1-6,10,20,50,100,152,200,300,303-305,349-351,400,500,521,524,570,801-8

02,850,917,999,1002-1005

Fa5/10 none

Fa5/11 none

Fa5/48 none

Switch#

The following example shows how to display trunking information for active trunking ports:

Switch# show interfaces trunk

Port Mode Encapsulation Status Native vlan

Fa5/9 desirable n-isl trunking 1

Port Vlans allowed on trunk

Fa5/9 1-1005

Port Vlans allowed and active in management domain

Fa5/9 1-6,10,20,50,100,152,200,300,303-305,349-351,400,500,521,524,570,801-8

02,850,917,999,1002-1005

Port Vlans in spanning tree forwarding state and not pruned

Fa5/9 1-6,10,20,50,100,152,200,300,303-305,349-351,400,500,521,524,570,801-8

02,850,917,999,1002-1005

Switch#

show ip arp inspection

To show the status of dynamic ARP inspection for a specific range of VLANs, use the show ip arp inspection command.

show ip arp inspection {[statistics] vlan vlan-range | interfaces [interface-name]}

Syntax Description

statistics

(Optional) Displays statistics for the following types of packets that have been processed by this feature: forwarded, dropped, MAC validation failure, and IP validation failure.

vlan vlan-range

(Optional) When used with the statistics keyword, displays the statistics for the selected range of VLANs. Without the statistics keyword, displays the configuration and operating state of DAI for the selected range of VLANs.

interfaces interface-name

(Optional) Displays the trust state and the rate limit of ARP packets for the provided interface. When the interface name is not specified, the command displays the trust state and rate limit for all applicable interfaces in the system.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Switch# show ip arp inspection statistics

Vlan Forwarded Dropped DHCP Drops ACL Drops

---- --------- ------- ---------- ----------

1 0 0 0 0

2 0 0 0 0

3 68322 220356 220356 0

4 0 0 0 0

100 0 0 0 0

101 0 0 0 0

1006 0 0 0 0

1007 0 0 0 0

Vlan DHCP Permits ACL Permits Source MAC Failures

---- ------------ ----------- -------------------

1 0 0 0

2 0 0 0

3 68322 0 0

4 0 0 0

100 0 0 0

101 0 0 0

1006 0 0 0

1007 0 0 0

Vlan Dest MAC Failures IP Validation Failures

---- ----------------- ----------------------

1 0 0

2 0 0

3 0 0

4 0 0

100 0 0

101 0 0

1006 0 0

1007 0 0

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the configuration and operating state of DAI for VLAN 1:

Switch# show ip arp inspection vlan 1

Source Mac Validation : Disabled

Destination Mac Validation : Disabled

IP Address Validation : Disabled

Vlan Configuration Operation ACL Match Static ACL

---- ------------- --------- --------- ----------

1 Enabled Active

Vlan ACL Logging DHCP Logging

---- ----------- ------------

1 Deny Deny

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the trust state of Fast Ethernet interface 6/1:

Switch# show ip arp inspection interfaces fastEthernet 6/1

Interface Trust State Rate (pps) Burst Interval

--------------- ----------- ---------- --------------

Fa6/1 Untrusted 20 5

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the trust state of the interfaces on the switch:

Switch# show ip arp inspection interfaces

Interface Trust State Rate (pps)

--------------- ----------- ----------

Gi1/1 Untrusted 15

Gi1/2 Untrusted 15

Gi3/1 Untrusted 15

Gi3/2 Untrusted 15

Fa3/3 Trusted None

Fa3/4 Untrusted 15

Fa3/5 Untrusted 15

Fa3/6 Untrusted 15

Fa3/7 Untrusted 15

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

arp access-list

Defines an ARP access list or adds clauses at the end of a predefined list.

clear ip arp inspection log

Clears the status of the log buffer.

show ip arp inspection log

Displays the status of the log buffer.

show ip arp inspection log

To show the status of the log buffer, use the show ip arp inspection log command.

show ip arp inspection log

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the current contents of the log buffer before and after the buffers are cleared:

Switch# show ip arp inspection log

Total Log Buffer Size : 10

Syslog rate : 0 entries per 10 seconds.

Interface Vlan Sender MAC Sender IP Num of Pkts

--------------- ----- ----------------- --------------- -----------

Fa6/3 1 0002.0002.0002 1.1.1.2 1(12:02:52 UTC Fri Apr 25 2003)

Fa6/3 1 0002.0002.0002 1.1.1.3 1(12:02:52 UTC Fri Apr 25 2003)

Fa6/3 1 0002.0002.0002 1.1.1.4 1(12:02:52 UTC Fri Apr 25 2003)

Fa6/3 1 0002.0002.0002 1.1.1.5 1(12:02:52 UTC Fri Apr 25 2003)

Fa6/3 1 0002.0002.0002 1.1.1.6 1(12:02:52 UTC Fri Apr 25 2003)

Fa6/3 1 0002.0002.0002 1.1.1.7 1(12:02:52 UTC Fri Apr 25 2003)

Fa6/3 1 0002.0002.0002 1.1.1.8 1(12:02:52 UTC Fri Apr 25 2003)

Fa6/3 1 0002.0002.0002 1.1.1.9 1(12:02:52 UTC Fri Apr 25 2003)

Fa6/3 1 0002.0002.0002 1.1.1.10 1(12:02:52 UTC Fri Apr 25 2003)

Fa6/3 1 0002.0002.0002 1.1.1.11 1(12:02:52 UTC Fri Apr 25 2003)

-- -- -- -- 5(12:02:52 UTC Fri Apr 25 2003)

Switch#

The following example shows how to clear the buffer with the clear ip arp inspection log command:

Switch# clear ip arp inspection log

Switch# show ip arp inspection log

Total Log Buffer Size : 10

Syslog rate : 0 entries per 10 seconds.

No entries in log buffer.

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

arp access-list

Defines an ARP access list or adds clauses at the end of a predefined list.

clear ip arp inspection log

Clears the status of the log buffer.

show ip cef vlan

To view IP CEF VLAN interface status and configuration information and display the prefixes for a specific interface, use the show ip cef vlan command.

show ip cef vlan vlan_num [detail]

Syntax Description

vlan_num

Number of the VLAN.

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed information.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Switch# show ip cef vlan 1003 detail

IP Distributed CEF with switching (Table Version 2364), flags=0x0

1383 routes, 0 reresolve, 0 unresolved (0 old, 0 new)

1383 leaves, 201 nodes, 380532 bytes, 2372 inserts, 989 invalidations

0 load sharing elements, 0 bytes, 0 references

universal per-destination load sharing algorithm, id 9B6C9823

3 CEF resets, 0 revisions of existing leaves

refcounts: 54276 leaf, 51712 node

Adjacency Table has 5 adjacencies

Switch#

show ip dhcp snooping

To display the DHCP snooping configuration, use the show ip dhcp snooping command.

show ip dhcp snooping

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EWA

Support for option 82 on untrusted ports was added.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the DHCP snooping configuration:

Switch# show ip dhcp snooping

Switch DHCP snooping is enabled

DHCP snooping is configured on following VLANs:

500,555

DHCP snooping is operational on following VLANs:

500,555

DHCP snooping is configured on the following L3 Interfaces:

Insertion of option 82 is enabled

circuit-id default format: vlan-mod-port

remote-id: switch123 (string)

Option 82 on untrusted port is not allowed Verification of hwaddr field is enabled DHCP snooping trust/rate is configured on the following Interfaces:

Interface Trusted Rate limit (pps)

------------------------ ------- ----------------

FastEthernet5/1 yes 100

Custom circuit-ids:

VLAN 555: customer-555

FastEthernet2/1 no unlimited

Custom circuit-ids:

VLAN 500: customer-500

Switch#

show ip dhcp snooping binding

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping

Globally enables DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping limit rate

Configures the number of the DHCP messages that an interface can receive per second.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN or a group of VLANs.

To display the DHCP snooping binding entries, use the show ip dhcp snooping binding command.

show ip dhcp snooping binding [ip-address] [mac-address] [vlan vlan_num]

[interface interface_num]

Syntax Description

ip-address

(Optional) IP address for the binding entries.

mac-address

(Optional) MAC address for the binding entries.

vlan vlan_num

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN.

interface interface_num

(Optional) Specifies an interface.

Command Default

If no argument is specified, the switch will display the entire DHCP snooping binding table.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

DHCP snooping is enabled on a VLAN only if both the global snooping and the VLAN snooping are enabled.

To configure a range of VLANs, use the optional last_vlan argument to specify the end of the VLAN range.

Examples

Switch# show ip dhcp snooping binding 172.100.101.102

MacAddress IP Address Lease (seconds) Type VLAN Interface

----------- ----------- ---------------- ------------- ----- ------------

0000.0100.0201 172.100.101.102 1600 dhcp-snooping 100 FastEthernet3/1

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the MAC address for the DHCP snooping binding entries:

Switch# show ip dhcp snooping binding 55.5.5.2 0002.b33f.3d5f

MacAddress IpAddress Lease(sec) Type VLAN Interface

------------------ --------------- ---------- ------------- ---- --------------------

00:02:B3:3F:3D:5F 55.5.5.2 492 dhcp-snooping 99 FastEthernet6/36

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the DHCP snooping binding entries’ MAC address for a specific VLAN:

Switch# show ip dhcp snooping binding 55.5.5.2 0002.b33f.3d5f vlan 99

MacAddress IpAddress Lease(sec) Type VLAN Interface

------------------ --------------- ---------- ------------- ---- --------------------

00:02:B3:3F:3D:5F 55.5.5.2 479 dhcp-snooping 99 FastEthernet6/36

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the dynamic DHCP snooping binding entries:

Switch# show ip dhcp snooping binding dynamic

MacAddress IP Address Lease (seconds) Type VLAN Interface

----------- ----------- ---------------- ------------ ----- ------------

0000.0100.0201 10.0.0.1 1600 dhcp-snooping 100 FastEthernet3/1

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the DHCP snooping binding entries on VLAN 100:

Switch# show ip dhcp snooping binding vlan 100’

MacAddress IP Address Lease (seconds) Type VLAN Interface

----------- ----------- ---------------- ------------ ----- ------------

0000.0100.0201 10.0.0.1 1600 dhcp-snooping 100 FastEthernet3/1

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the DHCP snooping binding entries on Ethernet interface 0/1:

Switch# show ip dhcp snooping binding interface fastethernet3/1

MacAddress IP Address Lease (seconds) Type VLAN Interface

----------- ----------- ---------------- ------------ ----- ------------

0000.0100.0201 10.0.0.1 1600 dhcp-snooping 100 FastEthernet3/1

Switch#

Table 2-28 describes the fields in the show ip dhcp snooping command output.

Table 2-28 show ip dhcp snooping Command Output

Field

Description

Mac Address

Client hardware MAC address.

IP Address

Client IP address assigned from the DHCP server.

Lease (seconds)

IP address lease time.

Type

Binding type; statically configured from CLI or dynamically learned.

VLAN

VLAN number of the client interface.

Interface

Interface that connects to the DHCP client host.

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping limit rate

Configures the number of the DHCP messages that an interface can receive per second.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN or a group of VLANs.

ip igmp snooping

Enables IGMP snooping.

ip igmp snooping vlan

Enables IGMP snooping for a VLAN.

show ip dhcp snooping database

To display the status of the DHCP snooping database agent, use the show ip dhcp snooping database command.

show ip dhcp snooping database [detail]

Syntax Description

detail

(Optional) Provides additional operating state and statistics information.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(19)EW

Added support of state and statistics information.

Examples

Switch# show ip dhcp snooping database detail

Agent URL : tftp://10.1.1.1/directory/file

Write delay Timer : 300 seconds

Abort Timer : 300 seconds

Agent Running : No

Delay Timer Expiry : 7 (00:00:07)

Abort Timer Expiry : Not Running

Last Succeded Time : None

Last Failed Time : 17:14:25 UTC Sat Jul 7 2001

Last Failed Reason : Unable to access URL.

Total Attempts : 21 Startup Failures : 0

Successful Transfers : 0 Failed Transfers : 21

Successful Reads : 0 Failed Reads : 0

Successful Writes : 0 Failed Writes : 21

Media Failures : 0

First successful access: Read

Last ignored bindings counters :

Binding Collisions : 0 Expired leases : 0

Invalid interfaces : 0 Unsupported vlans : 0

Parse failures : 0

Last Ignored Time : None

Total ignored bindings counters:

Binding Collisions : 0 Expired leases : 0

Invalid interfaces : 0 Unsupported vlans : 0

Parse failures : 0

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping

Globally enables DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping database

Stores the bindings that are generated by DHCP snooping.

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping limit rate

Configures the number of the DHCP messages that an interface can receive per second.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip dhcp snooping vlan

Enables DHCP snooping on a VLAN or a group of VLANs.

show ip igmp interface

To view IP IGMP interface status and configuration information, use the show ip igmp interface command.

show ip igmp interface [fastethernet slot/port | gigabitethernet slot/port |

tengigabitethernet slot/port | null interface-number | vlan vlan_id]

Syntax Description

fastethernet

slot/port

(Optional) Specifies the Fast Ethernet interface and the number of the slot and port.

gigabitethernet

slot/port

(Optional) Specifies the Gigabit Ethernet interface and the number of the slot and port; valid values are from 1 to 9.

tengigabitethernet slot/port

(Optional) Specifies the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface and the number of the slot and port; valid values are from 1 to 2.

null interface-number

(Optional) Specifies the null interface and the number of the interface; the only valid value is 0.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN and the number of the VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

If you do not specify a VLAN, information for VLAN 1 is shown.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Added support for extended VLAN addresses.

12.2(25)EW

Added support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Usage Guidelines

If you omit the optional arguments, the show ip igmp interface command displays information about all interfaces.

Examples

The following example shows how to view IGMP information for VLAN 200:

Switch# show ip igmp interface vlan 200

IGMP snooping is globally enabled

IGMP snooping is enabled on this Vlan

IGMP snooping immediate-leave is disabled on this Vlan

IGMP snooping mrouter learn mode is pim-dvmrp on this Vlan

IGMP snooping is running in IGMP-ONLY mode on this VLAN

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear ip igmp group

Deletes the IGMP group cache entries.

show ip igmp snooping mrouter

Displays information on the dynamically learned and manually configured multicast switch interfaces.

show ip igmp profile [profile number]

Syntax Description

profile number

(Optional) IGMP profile number to be displayed; valid ranges are from 1 to 4294967295.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(11b)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If no profile number is entered, all IGMP profiles are displayed.

Examples

The following example shows how to display IGMP profile 40:

Switch# show ip igmp profile 40

IGMP Profile 40

permit

range 233.1.1.1 233.255.255.255

Switch#

The following example shows how to display all IGMP profiles:

Switch# show ip igmp profile

IGMP Profile 3

range 230.9.9.0 230.9.9.0

IGMP Profile 4

permit

range 229.9.9.0 229.255.255.255

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip igmp profile

Creates an IGMP profile.

show ip igmp snooping

To display information on dynamically learned and manually configured VLAN switch interfaces, use the show ip igmp snooping command.

show ip igmp snooping [querier | groups | mrouter] [vlan vlan_id] a.b.c.d [summary | sources | hosts] [count]

Syntax Description

querier

(Optional) Specifies that the display will contain IP address and version information.

groups

(Optional) Specifies that the display will list VLAN members sorted by group IP addresses.

mrouter

(Optional) Specifies that the display will contain information on dynamically learned and manually configured multicast switch interfaces.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 1001 and from 1006 to 4094.

a.b.c.d

Group or multicast IP address.

summary

(Optional) Specifies a display of detailed information for a v2 or v3 group.

sources

(Optional) Specifies a list of the source IPs for the specified group.

hosts

(Optional) Specifies a list of the host IPs for the specified group.

count

(Optional) Specifies a display of the total number of group addresses learned by the system on a global or per-VLAN basis.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(19)EW

Support for extended addressing was added.

12.1(20)EW

Added support to display configuration state for IGMPv3 explicit host tracking.

Usage Guidelines

You can also use the show mac-address-table multicast command to display the entries in the MAC address table for a VLAN that has IGMP snooping enabled.

You can display IGMP snooping information for VLAN interfaces by entering the show ip igmp snooping command.

Examples

Switch# show ip igmp snooping vlan 2

Global IGMP Snooping configuration:

-----------------------------------

IGMP snooping : Enabled

IGMPv3 snooping : Enabled

Report suppression : Enabled

TCN solicit query : Disabled

TCN flood query count : 2

Vlan 2:

--------

IGMP snooping : Enabled

IGMPv2 immediate leave : Disabled

Explicit host tracking : Enabled

Multicast router learning mode : pim-dvmrp

CGMP interoperability mode : IGMP_ONLY

Switch>

The following example shows how to display IGMP querier information for all VLANs on a switch:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping querier

Vlan IP Address IGMP Version Port

---------------------------------------------------

2 10.10.10.1 v2 Router

3 172.20.50.22 v3 Fa3/15

Switch>

The following example shows how to display IGMP querier information for VLAN 5 when running IGMPv2:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping querier vlan 5

IP address :5.5.5.10

IGMP version :v2

Port :Fa3/1

Max response time :10s

Switch>

The following example shows how to display IGMP querier information for VLAN 5 when running IGMPv3:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping querier vlan 5

IP address :5.5.5.10

IGMP version :v3

Port :Fa3/1

Max response time :10s

Query interval :60s

Robustness variable :2

Switch>

The following example shows how to display snooping information for a specific group:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping group

Vlan Group Version Ports

---------------------------------------------------------

2 224.0.1.40 v3 Router

2 224.2.2.2 v3 Fa6/2

Switch>

The following example shows how to display the group’s host types and ports in VLAN 1:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping group vlan 1

Vlan Group Host Type Ports

---------------------------------------------------------

1 229.2.3.4 v3 fa2/1 fa2/3

1 224.2.2.2 v3 Fa6/2

Switch>

The following example shows how to display the group’s host types and ports in VLAN 1:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping group vlan 10 226.6.6.7

Vlan Group Version Ports

---------------------------------------------------------

10 226.6.6.7 v3 Fa7/13, Fa7/14

Switch>

The following example shows how to display the current state of a group with respect to a source IP address:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping group vlan 10 226.6.6.7 sources

Source information for group 226.6.6.7:

Timers: Expired sources are deleted on next IGMP General Query

SourceIP Expires Uptime Inc Hosts Exc Hosts

-------------------------------------------------------

2.0.0.1 00:03:04 00:03:48 2 0

2.0.0.2 00:03:04 00:02:07 2 0

Switch>

The following example shows how to display the current state of a group with respect to a host MAC address:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping group vlan 10 226.6.6.7 hosts

IGMPv3 host information for group 226.6.6.7

Timers: Expired hosts are deleted on next IGMP General Query

Host (MAC/IP) Filter mode Expires Uptime # Sources

-------------------------------------------------------------

175.1.0.29 INCLUDE stopped 00:00:51 2

175.2.0.30 INCLUDE stopped 00:04:14 2

Switch>

Switch# show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1

vlan ports

-----+----------------------------------------

1 Gi1/1,Gi2/1,Fa3/48,Router

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the total number of group addresses learned by the system globally:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping group count

Total number of groups: 54

Switch>

The following example shows how to display the total number of group addresses learned on VLAN 5:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping group vlan 5 count

Total number of groups: 30

Switch>

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip igmp snooping

Enable IGMP snooping.

ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave

Enable IGMP immediate-leave processing.

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter

Configures a Layer 2 interface as a multicast router interface for a VLAN.

ip igmp snooping vlan static

Configures a Layer 2 interface as a member of a group.

show ip igmp interface

Displays the information about the IGMP-interface status and configuration.

show ip igmp snooping mrouter

Displays information on the dynamically learned and manually configured multicast switch interfaces.

show mac-address-table multicast

Displays information about the multicast MAC address table.

show ip igmp snooping membership

To display host membership information, use the show ip igmp snooping membership command.

show ip igmp snooping membership [interface interface_num] [vlan vlan_id]

[reporter a.b.c.d] [source a.b.c.d group a.b.c.d]

Syntax Description

interface interface_num

(Optional) Displays IP address and version information of an interface.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Displays VLAN members sorted by group IP address of a VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 1001 and from 1006 to 4094.

reporter a.b.c.d

(Optional) Displays membership information for a specified reporter.

source a.b.c.d

(Optional) Specifies a reporter, source, or group IP address.

group a.b.c.d

(Optional) Displays all members of a channel (source, group), sorted by interface or VLAN.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(20)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EW

Added support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Usage Guidelines

This command is valid only if explicit host tracking is enabled on the switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to display host membership for the Gigabit Ethernet interface 4/1:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping membership interface gigabitethernet4/1

#channels: 5

#hosts : 1

Source/Group Interface Reporter Uptime Last-Join Last-Leave

40.40.40.2/224.10.10.10 Gi4/1 20.20.20 .20 00:23: 37 00:06: 50 00:20:30

40.40.40.4/224.10.10.10 Gi4/1 20.20.20 .20 00:39: 42 00:09:17 -

Switch#

The following example shows how to display host membership for VLAN 20 and group 224.10.10.10:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping membership vlan 20 source 40.40.40.2 group 224.10.10.10

#channels: 5

#hosts : 1

Source/Group Interface Reporter Uptime Last-Join Last-Leave

40.40.40.2/224.10.10.10 Gi4/1 20.20.20 .20 00:23: 37 00:06: 50 00:20:30

Switch#

The following example shows how to display host membership information for VLAN 20 and to delete the explicit host tracking:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping membership vlan 20

Snooping Membership Summary for Vlan 20

------------------------------------------

Total number of channels:5

Total number of hosts :4

Source/Group Interface Reporter Uptime Last-Join/

Last-Leave

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

40.0.0.1/224.1.1.1 Fa7/37 0002.4ba0.a4f6 00:00:04 00:00:04 /

-

40.0.0.2/224.1.1.1 Fa7/37 0002.fd80.f770 00:00:17 00:00:17 /

-

40.0.0.3/224.1.1.1 Fa7/36 20.20.20.20 00:00:04 00:00:04 /

-

40.0.0.4/224.1.1.1 Fa7/35 20.20.20.210 00:00:17 00:00:17 /

-

40.0.0.5/224.1.1.1 Fa7/37 0002.fd80.f770 00:00:17 00:00:17 /

-

Switch# clear ip igmp snooping membership vlan 20

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear ip igmp snooping membership

Clears the explicit host tracking database.

ip igmp snooping vlan explicit-tracking

Enables per-VLAN explicit host tracking.

show ip igmp snooping

Displays information on dynamically learned and manually configured VLAN switch interfaces.

show ip igmp snooping mrouter

To display information on the dynamically learned and manually configured multicast switch interfaces, use the show ip igmp snooping mrouter command.

show ip igmp snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-id]

Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 1001 and from 1006 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(19)EW

Added support for extended VLAN addresses.

Usage Guidelines

You can also use the show mac-address-table multicast command to display entries in the MAC address table for a VLAN that has IGMP snooping enabled.

You can display IGMP snooping information for the VLAN interfaces by entering the show ip igmp interface vlan vlan-num command.

Examples

The following example shows how to display snooping information for a specific VLAN:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping mrouter vlan 1

vlan ports

-----+----------------------------------------

1 Gi1/1,Gi2/1,Fa3/48,Switch

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter

Statically configures a Layer 2 interface as a multicast router interface for a VLAN.

show ip igmp interface

Displays the information about the IGMP-interface status and configuration.

show mac-address-table multicast

show ip igmp snooping vlan

To display information on the dynamically learned and manually configured VLAN switch interfaces, use the show ip igmp snooping vlan command.

show ip igmp snooping vlan vlan_num

Syntax Description

vlan_num

Number of the VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 1001 and from 1006 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended addressing was added.

Usage Guidelines

You can also use the show mac-address-table multicast command to display the entries in the MAC address table for a VLAN that has IGMP snooping enabled.

Examples

The following example shows how to display snooping information for a specific VLAN:

Switch# show ip igmp snooping vlan 2

vlan 2

----------

IGMP snooping is globally enabled

IGMP snooping TCN solicit query is globally enabled

IGMP snooping global TCN flood query count is 2

IGMP snooping is enabled on this Vlan

IGMP snooping immediate-leave is disabled on this Vlan

IGMP snooping mrouter learn mode is pim-dvmrp on this Vlan

IGMP snooping is running in IGMP_ONLY mode on this Vlan

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip igmp snooping

Enable IGMP snooping.

ip igmp snooping vlan immediate-leave

Enable IGMP immediate-leave processing.

ip igmp snooping vlan mrouter

Statically configures a Layer 2 interface as a multicast router interface for a VLAN.

ip igmp snooping vlan static

Configures a Layer 2 interface as a member of a group.

show ip igmp interface

Displays the information about the IGMP-interface status and configuration.

show ip igmp snooping mrouter

Displays information on the dynamically learned and manually configured multicast switch interfaces.

show mac-address-table multicast

Displays information about the multicast MAC address table.

show ip interface

To display the usability status of interfaces that are configured for IP, use the show ip interface command.

show ip interface [type number]

Syntax Description

type

(Optional) Interface type.

number

(Optional) Interface number.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)EW

Extended to include the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Usage Guidelines

The Cisco IOS software automatically enters a directly connected route in the routing table if the interface is usable. A usable interface is one through which the software can send and receive packets. If the software determines that an interface is not usable, it removes the directly connected routing entry from the routing table. Removing the entry allows the software to use dynamic routing protocols to determine backup routes to the network, if any.

If the interface can provide two-way communication, the line protocol is marked “up.” If the interface hardware is usable, the interface is marked “up.”

If you specify an optional interface type, you see information only on that specific interface.

If you specify no optional arguments, you see information on all the interfaces.

When an asynchronous interface is encapsulated with PPP or Serial Line Internet Protocol (SLIP), IP fast switching is enabled. The show ip interface command on an asynchronous interface that is encapsulated with PPP or SLIP displays a message indicating that IP fast switching is enabled.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the usability status for a specific VLAN:

Switch# show ip interface vlan 1

Vlan1 is up, line protocol is up

Internet address is 10.6.58.4/24

Broadcast address is 255.255.255.255

Address determined by non-volatile memory

MTU is 1500 bytes

Helper address is not set

Directed broadcast forwarding is disabled

Outgoing access list is not set

Inbound access list is not set

Proxy ARP is enabled

Local Proxy ARP is disabled

Security level is default

Split horizon is enabled

ICMP redirects are always sent

ICMP unreachables are always sent

ICMP mask replies are never sent

IP fast switching is enabled

IP fast switching on the same interface is disabled

IP Flow switching is disabled

IP CEF switching is enabled

IP Fast switching turbo vector

IP Normal CEF switching turbo vector

IP multicast fast switching is enabled

IP multicast distributed fast switching is disabled

IP route-cache flags are Fast, CEF

Router Discovery is disabled

IP output packet accounting is disabled

IP access violation accounting is disabled

TCP/IP header compression is disabled

RTP/IP header compression is disabled

Probe proxy name replies are disabled

Policy routing is disabled

Network address translation is disabled

WCCP Redirect outbound is disabled

WCCP Redirect inbound is disabled

WCCP Redirect exclude is disabled

BGP Policy Mapping is disabled

Sampled Netflow is disabled

IP multicast multilayer switching is disabled

Netflow Data Export (hardware) is enabled

Switch#

Table 2-29 describes the fields that are shown in the example.

Table 2-29 show ip interface Field Descriptions

Field

Description

Ethernet0 is up

If the interface hardware is usable, the interface is marked “up.” For an interface to be usable, both the interface hardware and line protocol must be up.

line protocol is up

If the interface can provide two-way communication, the line protocol is marked “up.” For an interface to be usable, both the interface hardware and line protocol must be up.

Internet address and subnet mask

IP address and subnet mask of the interface.

Broadcast address

Broadcast address.

Address determined by...

Status of how the IP address of the interface was determined.

MTU

MTU value that is set on the interface.

Helper address

Helper address, if one has been set.

Secondary address

Secondary address, if one has been set.

Directed broadcast forwarding

Status of directed broadcast forwarding.

Multicast groups joined

Multicast groups to which this interface belongs.

Outgoing access list

Status of whether the interface has an outgoing access list set.

Inbound access list

Status of whether the interface has an incoming access list set.

Proxy ARP

Status of whether Proxy Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) is enabled for the interface.

Security level

IP Security Option (IPSO) security level set for this interface.

Split horizon

Status of split horizon.

ICMP redirects

Status of the redirect messages on this interface.

ICMP unreachables

Status of the unreachable messages on this interface.

ICMP mask replies

Status of the mask replies on this interface.

IP fast switching

Status of whether fast switching has been enabled for this interface. Fast switching is typically enabled on serial interfaces, such as this one.

IP SSE switching

Status of the IP silicon switching engine (SSE).

Router Discovery

Status of the discovery process for this interface. It is typically disabled on serial interfaces.

IP output packet accounting

Status of IP accounting for this interface and the threshold (maximum number of entries).

TCP/IP header compression

Status of compression.

Probe proxy name

Status of whether the HP Probe proxy name replies are generated.

WCCP Redirect outbound is enabled

Status of whether packets that are received on an interface are redirected to a cache engine.

WCCP Redirect exclude is disabled

Status of whether packets that are targeted for an interface are excluded from being redirected to a cache engine.

Netflow Data Export (hardware) is enabled

NDE hardware flow status on the interface.

show ip mfib

To display all active Multicast Forwarding Information Base (MFIB) routes, use the show ip mfib command.

show ip mfib [all | counters | log [n]]

Syntax Description

all

(Optional) Specifies all routes in the MFIB, including those routes that are used to accelerate fast switching but that are not necessarily in the upper-layer routing protocol table.

counters

(Optional) Specifies the counts of MFIB-related events. Only nonzero counters are shown.

log

(Optional) Specifies a log of the most recent number of MFIB-related events. The most recent event is first.

n

(Optional) Number of events.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(40)SG

Support for command introduced on the Supervisor Engine 6-E and Catalyst 4900M chassis.

Usage Guidelines

In the Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F, the output of the show ip mfib command does not display any hardware counters.

The MFIB table contains a set of IP multicast routes; each route in the MFIB table contains several flags that associate to the route.

The route flags indicate how a packet that matches a route is forwarded. For example, the IC flag on an MFIB route indicates that some process on the switch needs to receive a copy of the packet. These flags are associated with MFIB routes:

- Internal Copy (IC) flag—Set on a route when a process on the switch needs to receive a copy of all packets matching the specified route.

- Signaling (S) flag—Set on a route when a switch process needs notification that a packet matching the route is received. In the expected behavior, the protocol code updates the MFIB state in response to having received a packet on a signaling interface.

- Connected (C) flag—When set on a route, the C flag has the same meaning as the S flag, except that the C flag indicates that only packets sent by directly connected hosts to the route should be signaled to a protocol process.

A route can also have a set of flags associated with one or more interfaces. For an (S,G) route, the flags on interface 1 indicate how the ingress packets should be treated and whether packets matching the route should be forwarded onto interface 1. These per-interface flags are associated with the MFIB routes:

- Accepting (A)—Set on the RPF interface when a packet that arrives on the interface and that is marked as Accepting (A) is forwarded to all Forwarding (F) interfaces.

- Forwarding (F)—Used with the A flag as described above. The set of forwarding interfaces together form a multicast olist or output interface list.

- Signaling (S)—Set on an interface when a multicast routing protocol process in Cisco IOS needs to be notified of ingress packets on that interface.

- Not Platform (NP) fast-switched—Used with the F flag. A forwarding interface is also marked as Not Platform fast-switched whenever that output interface cannot be fast-switched by the platform hardware and requires software forwarding.

Examples

The following example shows how to display all active MFIB routes:

Switch# show ip mfib

IP Multicast Forwarding Information Base

Entry Flags: C - Directly Connected, S - Signal,

IC - Internal Copy

Interface Flags: A - Accept, F - Forward, NS - Signal,

NP - Not platform switched

Packets: Fast/Partial/Slow Bytes: Fast/Partial/Slow:

(171.69.10.13, 224.0.1.40), flags (IC)

Packets: 2292/2292/0, Bytes: 518803/0/518803

Vlan7 (A)

Vlan100 (F NS)

Vlan105 (F NS)

(*, 224.0.1.60), flags ()

Packets: 2292/0/0, Bytes: 518803/0/0

Vlan7 (A NS)

(*, 224.0.1.75), flags ()

Vlan7 (A NS)

(10.34.2.92, 239.192.128.80), flags ()

Packets: 24579/100/0, 2113788/15000/0 bytes

Vlan7 (F NS)

Vlan100 (A)

(*, 239.193.100.70), flags ()

Packets: 1/0/0, 1500/0/0 bytes

Vlan7 (A)

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear ip mfib counters

Clears the global MFIB counters and the counters for all active MFIB routes.

show ip mfib fastdrop

To display all currently active fast-drop entries and to show whether fast drop is enabled, use the show ip mfib fastdrop command.

show ip mfib fastdrop

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to display all currently active fast-drop entries and whether fast drop is enabled.

Switch# show ip mfib fasttdrop

MFIB fastdrop is enabled.

MFIB fast-dropped flows:

(10.0.0.1, 224.1.2.3, Vlan9 ) 00:01:32

(10.1.0.2, 224.1.2.3, Vlan9 ) 00:02:30

(1.2.3.4, 225.6.7.8, Vlan3) 00:01:50

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear ip mfib fastdrop

Clears all the MFIB fast-drop entries.

show ip mroute

To display IP multicast routing table information, use the show ip mroute command.

show ip mroute [interface_type slot/port | host_name | host_address [source] | active [kbps | interface_type num] | count | pruned | static | summary]

Syntax Description

interface_type

slot/port

(Optional) Interface type and number of the slot and port; valid values for interface type are fastethernet, gigabitethernet, tengigabitethernet, null, and vlan.

host_name

(Optional) Name or IP address as defined in the DNS hosts table.

host_address

source

(Optional) IP address or name of a multicast source.

active

(Optional) Displays the rate that active sources are sending to multicast groups.

kbps

interface_type num

(Optional) Minimum rate at which active sources are sending to multicast groups; active sources sending at this rate or greater will be displayed. Valid values are from 1 to 4294967295 kbps.

count

(Optional) Displays the route and packet count information.

pruned

(Optional) Displays the pruned routes.

static

(Optional) Displays the static multicast routes.

summary

(Optional) Displays a one-line, abbreviated summary of each entry in the IP multicast routing table.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EW

Added support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Usage Guidelines

If you omit all the optional arguments and keywords, the show ip mroute command displays all the entries in the IP multicast routing table.

The show ip mroute active kbps command displays all the sources sending at a rate greater than or equal to kbps.

The multicast routing table is populated by creating source, group (S,G) entries from star, group (*,G) entries. The star refers to all source addresses, the “S” refers to a single source address, and the “G” refers to the destination multicast group address. In creating (S,G) entries, the software uses the best path to that destination group found in the unicast routing table (through Reverse Path Forwarding (RPF).

Examples

The following example shows how to display all the entries in the IP multicast routing table:

Switch# show ip mroute

IP Multicast Routing Table

Flags:D - Dense, S - Sparse, s - SSM Group, C - Connected, L - Local,

P - Pruned, R - RP-bit set, F - Register flag, T - SPT-bit set,

J - Join SPT, M - MSDP created entry, X - Proxy Join Timer Running

A - Advertised via MSDP, U - URD, I - Received Source Specific Host

Report

Outgoing interface flags:H - Hardware switched

Timers:Uptime/Expires

Interface state:Interface, Next-Hop or VCD, State/Mode

(*, 230.13.13.1), 00:16:41/00:00:00, RP 10.15.1.20, flags:SJC

Incoming interface:GigabitEthernet4/8, RPF nbr 10.15.1.20

Outgoing interface list:

GigabitEthernet4/9, Forward/Sparse-Dense, 00:16:41/00:00:00, H

(*, 230.13.13.2), 00:16:41/00:00:00, RP 10.15.1.20, flags:SJC

Incoming interface:GigabitEthernet4/8, RPF nbr 10.15.1.20, RPF-MFD

Outgoing interface list:

GigabitEthernet4/9, Forward/Sparse-Dense, 00:16:41/00:00:00, H

(10.20.1.15, 230.13.13.1), 00:14:31/00:01:40, flags:CJT

Incoming interface:GigabitEthernet4/8, RPF nbr 10.15.1.20, RPF-MFD

Outgoing interface list:

GigabitEthernet4/9, Forward/Sparse-Dense, 00:14:31/00:00:00, H

(132.206.72.28, 224.2.136.89), 00:14:31/00:01:40, flags:CJT

Incoming interface:GigabitEthernet4/8, RPF nbr 10.15.1.20, RPF-MFD

Outgoing interface list:Null

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the rate that the active sources are sending to the multicast groups and to display only the active sources that are sending at greater than the default rate:

Switch# show ip mroute active

Active IP Multicast Sources - sending > = 4 kbps

Group: 224.2.127.254, (sdr.cisco.com)

Source: 146.137.28.69 (mbone.ipd.anl.gov)

Rate: 1 pps/4 kbps(1sec), 4 kbps(last 1 secs), 4 kbps(life avg)

Group: 224.2.201.241, ACM 97

Source: 130.129.52.160 (webcast3-e1.acm97.interop.net)

Rate: 9 pps/93 kbps(1sec), 145 kbps(last 20 secs), 85 kbps(life avg)

Group: 224.2.207.215, ACM 97

Source: 130.129.52.160 (webcast3-e1.acm97.interop.net)

Rate: 3 pps/31 kbps(1sec), 63 kbps(last 19 secs), 65 kbps(life avg)

Switch#

The following example shows how to display route and packet count information:

Switch# show ip mroute count

IP Multicast Statistics

56 routes using 28552 bytes of memory

13 groups, 3.30 average sources per group

Forwarding Counts:Pkt Count/Pkts per second/Avg Pkt Size/Kilobits per second

Other counts:Total/RPF failed/Other drops(OIF-null, rate-limit etc)

Group:224.2.136.89, Source count:1, Group pkt count:29051

Source:132.206.72.28/32, Forwarding:29051/-278/1186/0, Other:85724/8/56665

Switch#

The following example shows how to display summary information:

Switch# show ip mroute summary

IP Multicast Routing Table

Flags: D - Dense, S - Sparse, s - SSM Group, C - Connected, L - Local,

P - Pruned, R - RP-bit set, F - Register flag, T - SPT-bit set,

J - Join SPT, M - MSDP created entry, X - Proxy Join Timer Running

A - Advertised via MSDP, U - URD, I - Received Source Specific Host

Report

Outgoing interface flags: H - Hardware switched

Timers: Uptime/Expires

Interface state: Interface, Next-Hop or VCD, State/Mode

Switch#

Table 2-30 describes the fields shown in the output.

Table 2-30 show ip mroute Field Descriptions

Field

Description

Flags:

Information about the entry.

D - Dense

Entry is operating in dense mode.

S - Sparse

Entry is operating in sparse mode.

s - SSM Group

Entry is a member of an SSM group.

C - Connected

Member of the multicast group is present on the directly connected interface.

L - Local

Switch is a member of the multicast group.

P - Pruned

Route has been pruned. This information is retained in case a downstream member wants to join the source.

R - Rp-bit set

Status of the (S,G) entry; is the (S,G) entry pointing toward the RP. The R - Rp-bit set is typically a prune state along the shared tree for a particular source.

F - Register flag

Status of the software; indicates if the software is registered for a multicast source.

T - SPT-bit set

Status of the packets; indicates if the packets been received on the shortest path source tree.

J - Join SPT

For (*, G) entries, indicates that the rate of traffic flowing down the shared tree is exceeding the SPT-Threshold set for the group. (The default SPT-Threshold setting is 0 kbps.) When the J - Join SPT flag is set, the next (S,G) packet received down the shared tree triggers an (S,G) join in the direction of the source causing the switch to join the source tree.

For (S, G) entries, indicates that the entry was created because the SPT-Threshold for the group was exceeded. When the J - Join SPT flag is set for (S,G) entries, the switch monitors the traffic rate on the source tree and attempts to switch back to the shared tree for this source if the traffic rate on the source tree falls below the group’s SPT-Threshold for more than one minute.

The switch measures the traffic rate on the shared tree and compares the measured rate to the group’s SPT-Threshold once every second. If the traffic rate exceeds the SPT-Threshold, the J- Join SPT flag is set on the (*, G) entry until the next measurement of the traffic rate. The flag is cleared when the next packet arrives on the shared tree and a new measurement interval is started.

If the default SPT-Threshold value of 0 Kbps is used for the group, the J- Join SPT flag is always set on (*, G) entries and is never cleared. When the default SPT-Threshold value is used, the switch immediately switches to the shortest-path tree when traffic from a new source is received.

Outgoing interface flag:

Information about the outgoing entry.

H - Hardware switched

Entry is hardware switched.

Timer:

Uptime/Expires.

Interface state:

Interface, Next-Hop or VCD, State/Mode.

(*, 224.0.255.1)

(198.92.37.100/32, 224.0.255.1)

Entry in the IP multicast routing table. The entry consists of the IP address of the source switch followed by the IP address of the multicast group. An asterisk (*) in place of the source switch indicates all sources.

Entries in the first format are referred to as (*,G) or “star comma G” entries. Entries in the second format are referred to as (S,G) or “S comma G” entries. (*,G) entries are used to build (S,G) entries.

uptime

How long (in hours, minutes, and seconds) the entry has been in the IP multicast routing table.

expires

How long (in hours, minutes, and seconds) until the entry is removed from the IP multicast routing table on the outgoing interface.

RP

Address of the RP switch. For switches and access servers operating in sparse mode, this address is always 0.0.0.0.

flags:

Information about the entry.

Incoming interface

Expected interface for a multicast packet from the source. If the packet is not received on this interface, it is discarded.

RPF neighbor

IP address of the upstream switch to the source. “Tunneling” indicates that this switch is sending data to the RP encapsulated in Register packets. The hexadecimal number in parentheses indicates to which RP it is registering. Each bit indicates a different RP if multiple RPs per group are used.

DVMRP or Mroute

Status of whether the RPF information is obtained from the DVMRP routing table or the static mroutes configuration.

Outgoing interface list

Interfaces through which packets are forwarded. When the ip pim nbma-mode command is enabled on the interface, the IP address of the PIM neighbor is also displayed.

Ethernet0

Name and number of the outgoing interface.

Next hop or VCD

Next hop specifies downstream neighbor’s IP address. VCD specifies the virtual circuit descriptor number. VCD0 indicates that the group is using the static-map virtual circuit.

Forward/Dense

Status of the packets; indicates if they are they forwarded on the interface if there are no restrictions due to access lists or the TTL threshold. Following the slash (/), mode in which the interface is operating (dense or sparse).

Forward/Sparse

Sparse mode interface is in forward mode.

time/time

(uptime/expiration time)

Per interface, how long (in hours, minutes, and seconds) the entry has been in the IP multicast routing table. Following the slash (/), how long (in hours, minutes, and seconds) until the entry is removed from the IP multicast routing table.

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip multicast-routing (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Enables IP multicast routing.

ip pim (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

show ip source binding

To display IP source bindings that are configured on the system, use the show ip source binding EXEC command.

show ip source binding [ip-address] [mac-address] [dhcp-snooping | static] [vlan vlan-id] [interface interface-name]

Syntax Description

ip-address

(Optional) Binding IP address.

mac-address

(Optional) Binding MAC address.

dhcp-snooping

(Optional) DHCP-snooping type binding.

static

(Optional) Statically configured binding.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) VLAN number.

interface interface-name

(Optional) Binding interface.

Command Default

Displays both static and DHCP snooping bindings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The optional parameters filter the display output result.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the IP source bindings:

Switch# show ip source binding

MacAddress IpAddress Lease(sec) Type VLAN Interface

------------------ --------------- ---------- ------------- ---- --------------------

00:00:00:0A:00:0B 11.0.0.1 infinite static 10 FastEthernet6/10

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the static IP binding entry of IP address 11.0.01:

Switch# show ip source binding 11.0.0.1 0000.000A.000B static vlan 10 interface Fa6/10

show ip source binding 11.0.0.1 0000.000A.000B static vlan 10 interface Fa6/10

MacAddress IpAddress Lease(sec) Type VLAN Interface

------------------ --------------- ---------- ------------- ---- --------------------

00:00:00:0A:00:0B 11.0.0.1 infinite static 10 FastEthernet6/10 Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip source binding

Adds or deletes a static IP source binding entry.

show ip verify source

To display the IP source guard configuration and filters on a particular interface, use the show ip verify source command.

show ip verify source [interface interface_num]

Syntax Description

interface interface_num

(Optional) Specifies an interface.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

- This output appears when you enter the show ip verify source interface fa6/2 command and DHCP snooping is enabled on VLANs 10–20, interface fa6/1 has IP source filter mode that is configured as IP, and there is an existing IP address binding 10.0.0.1 on VLAN 10:

Interface Filter-type Filter-mode IP-address Mac-address Vlan

--------- ----------- ----------- --------------- -------------- ---------

fa6/2 ip inactive-trust-port

- This output appears when you enter the show ip verify source interface fa6/3 command and the interface fa6/3 does not have a VLAN enabled for DHCP snooping:

Interface Filter-type Filter-mode IP-address Mac-address Vlan

--------- ----------- ----------- --------------- -------------- ---------

fa6/3 ip inactive-no-snooping-vlan

- This output appears when you enter the show ip verify source interface fa6/4 command and the interface fa6/4 has an IP source filter mode that is configured as IP MAC and the existing IP MAC that binds 10.0.0.2/aaaa.bbbb.cccc on VLAN 10 and 11.0.0.1/aaaa.bbbb.cccd on VLAN 11:

Interface Filter-type Filter-mode IP-address Mac-address Vlan

--------- ----------- ----------- --------------- -------------- ---------

fa6/4 ip-mac active 10.0.0.2 aaaa.bbbb.cccc 10

fa6/4 ip-mac active 11.0.0.1 aaaa.bbbb.cccd 11

fa6/4 ip-mac active deny-all deny-all 12-20

- This output appears when you enter the show ip verify source interface fa6/5 command and the interface fa6/5 has IP source filter mode that is configured as IP MAC and existing IP MAC binding 10.0.0.3/aaaa.bbbb.ccce on VLAN 10, but port security is not enabled on fa6/5:

Interface Filter-type Filter-mode IP-address Mac-address Vlan

--------- ----------- ----------- --------------- -------------- ---------

fa6/5 ip-mac active 10.0.0.3 permit-all 10

fa6/5 ip-mac active deny-all permit-all 11-20

Note Enable port security first because the DHCP security MAC filter cannot apply to the port or VLAN.

- This output appears when you enter the show ip verify source interface fa6/6 command and the interface fa6/6 does not have IP source filter mode that is configured:

DHCP security is not configured on the interface fa6/6.

The following example shows how to display all the interfaces on the switch that have DHCP snooping security and IP Port Security tracking enabled with the show ip verify source command.

The output is an accumulation of per-interface show CLIs:

Interface Filter-type Filter-mode IP-address Mac-address Vlan

--------- ----------- ----------- --------------- -------------- ---------

fa6/1 ip active 10.0.0.1 10

fa6/1 ip active deny-all 11-20

fa6/2 ip inactive-trust-port

Fa6/3 ip trk active 40.1.1.24 10

Fa6/3 ip trk active 40.1.1.20 10

Fa6/3 ip trk active 40.1.1.21 10

fa6/4 ip-mac active 10.0.0.2 aaaa.bbbb.cccc 10

fa6/4 ip-mac active 11.0.0.1 aaaa.bbbb.cccd 11

fa6/4 ip-mac active deny-all deny-all 12-20

fa6/5 ip-mac active 10.0.0.3 permit-all 10

fa6/5 ip-mac active deny-all permit-all 11-20

Related Commands

Command

Description

ip dhcp snooping information option

Enables DHCP option 82 data insertion.

ip dhcp snooping limit rate

Configures the number of the DHCP messages that an interface can receive per second.

ip dhcp snooping trust

Enables DHCP snooping on a trusted VLAN.

ip igmp snooping

Enables IGMP snooping.

ip igmp snooping vlan

Enables IGMP snooping for a VLAN.

ip source binding

Adds or deletes a static IP source binding entry.

ip verify source

Enables IP source guard on untrusted Layer 2 interfaces.

show ip source binding

Displays the DHCP snooping binding entries.

show ip wccp [service-number [view | detail] | interfaces [cef | counts | detail] | web-cache]

Syntax Description

service-number

(Optional) Identification number of the web cache service group being controlled by the cache. The number can be from 0 to 254. For web caches using Cisco cache engines, the reverse proxy service is indicated by a value of 99.

interfaces

(Optional) WCCP redirect interfaces.

cef

(Optional) CEF interface statistics, including the number of input, output, dynamic, static, and multicast services.

counts

(Optional) WCCP interface count statistics, including the number of CEF and process-switched output and input packets redirected.

detail

(Optional) WCCP interface configuration statistics, including the number of input, output, dynamic, static, and multicast services.

web-cache

(Optional) Statistics for the web cache service.

view

(Optional) Other members of a particular service group, have or have not been detected.

detail

(Optional) Information about the router and all web caches.

Command Modes

User EXEC (>)

Privileged EXEC (#)

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, Supervisor Engine 6-E, and Supervisor Engine 6L-E.

Usage Guidelines

Use the clear ip wccp command to reset the counter for the “Packets Redirected” information.

Use the show ip wccp service-number command to get the “Total Packets S/W Redirected” count. The “Total Packets S/W Redirected” count is the number of packets redirected in software.

Use the show ip wccp service-number detail command to get the “Packets Redirected” count. The “Packets Redirected” count is the number of packets redirected in software.

Use the show ip wccp web-cache detail command to get an indication of which traffic is redirected to which cache engine.

Use the show ip wccp command to show the configured WCCP services and a summary of their current state.

For cache-engine clusters using Cisco cache engines, the reverse proxy service-number is indicated by a value of 99.

All the packet statistics correspond to packets switched in software.

Examples

This section contains examples and field descriptions for the following forms of this command:

- show ip wccp service-number

- show ip wccp service-number view

- show ip wccp service-number detail

- show ip wccp interfaces

- show ip wccp web-cache

- show ip wccp web-cache detail

- show ip wccp

show ip wccp service-number

Table 31 show ip wccp service-number Field Descriptions

Field

Description

Router information

A list of routers detected by the current router.

Protocol Version

The version of WCCP being used by the router in the service group.

Service Identifier

Indicates which service is detailed.

Number of Service Group Clients:

The number of clients that are visible to the router and other clients in the service group.

Number of Service Group Routers

The number of routers in the service group.

Total Packets s/w Redirected

Total number of packets s/w redirected by the router.

Redirect Access-list

The name or number of the access list that determines which packets will be redirected.

Total Packets Denied Redirect

Total number of packets that were not redirected because they did not match the access list.

Total Packets Unassigned

Number of packets that were not redirected because they were not assigned to any cache engine. Packets may not be assigned during initial discovery of cache engines or when a cache is dropped from a cluster.

Group Access-list

Indicates which cache engine is allowed to connect to the router.

Total Messages Denied to Group

Indicates the number of packets denied by the group-list access list.

Total Authentication failures

The number of instances where a password did not match.

Total Bypassed Packets Received

The number of packets that have been bypassed. Process, fast, and Cisco Express Forwarding (CEF) are switching paths within Cisco IOS software.

show ip wccp service-number view

If any web cache is displayed under the WCCP Cache Engines Not Visible field, the router needs to be reconfigured to map the web cache that is not visible to it.

Table 32 describes the significant fields shown in the display.

Table 32 show ip wccp service-number view Field Descriptions

Field

Description

WCCP Router Informed of

A list of routers detected by the current router.

WCCP Clients Visible

A list of clients that are visible to the router and other clients in the service group.

WCCP Clients Not Visible

A list of clients in the service group that are not visible to the router and other clients in the service group.

show ip wccp service-number detail

Table 33 show ip wccp interfaces Field Descriptions

Field

Description

Output services

Indicates the number of output services configured on the interface.

Input services

Indicates the number of input services configured on the interface.

Mcast services

Indicates the number of multicast services configured on the interface.

Exclude In

Displays whether traffic on the interface is excluded from redirection.

show ip wccp web-cache

Table 34 show ip wccp web-cache Field Descriptions

Field

Description

Protocol Version

Indicates that WCCPv2 is enabled.

Service Identifier

Indicates which service is detailed.

Number of Service Group Clients

Number of clients using the router as their home router.

Number of Service Group Routers

The number of routers in the service group.

Total Packets s/w Redirected

Total number of packets s/w redirected by the router.

Redirect access-list

The name or number of the access list that determines which packets will be redirected.

Total Packets Denied Redirect

Total number of packets that were not redirected because they did not match the access list.

Total Packets Unassigned

Number of packets that were not redirected because they were not assigned to any cache engine. Packets may not be assigned during initial discovery of cache engines or when a cache is dropped from a cluster.

Group access-list

Indicates which cache engine is allowed to connect to the router.

Total Messages Denied to Group

Indicates the number of packets denied by the group-list access list.

Total Authentication failures

The number of instances where a password did not match.

show ip wccp web-cache detail

Table 35 show ip wccp web-cache detail Field Descriptions

Field

Description

WCCP Client Information

The header for the area that contains fields for information on clients.

WCCP Client ID

The IP address of the cache engine in the service group.

Protocol Version

The version of WCCP being used by the cache engine in the service group.

State

Indicates whether the cache engine is operating properly and can be contacted by a router and other cache engines in the service group.

Packets Redirected

The number of packets that have been redirected to the cache engine.

Connect Time

The amount of time the cache engine has been connected to the router.

show ip wccp

Switch# show ip wccp

Global WCCP information:

Router information:

Router Identifier: 10.10.11.10

Protocol Version: 2.0

Service Identifier: web-cache

Number of Service Group Clients: 1

Number of Service Group Routers: 1

Total Packets s/w Redirected: 0

Process: 0

CEF: 0

Redirect access-list: -none-

Total Packets Denied Redirect: 0

Total Packets Unassigned: 0

Group access-list: -none-

Total Messages Denied to Group: 0

Total Authentication failures: 0

Total Bypassed Packets Received: 0

Service Identifier: 91

Number of Service Group Clients: 1

Number of Service Group Routers: 1

Total Packets s/w Redirected: 0

Process: 0

CEF: 0

Redirect access-list: -none-

Total Packets Denied Redirect: 0

Total Packets Unassigned: 0

Group access-list: -none-

Total Messages Denied to Group: 0

Total Authentication failures: 0

Total Bypassed Packets Received: 0

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear ip wccp

Clears the counter for packets redirected using WCCP.

ip wccp

Enables support of the WCCP service for participation in a service group.

ip wccp redirect

Enables packet redirection on an outbound or inbound interface using WCCP.

show ipc

To display IPC information, use the show ipc command.

show ipc {nodes | ports | queue | status}

Syntax Description

nodes

Displays the participating nodes.

ports

Displays the local IPC ports.

queue

Displays the contents of the IPC retransmission queue.

status

Displays the status of the local IPC server.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Switch# show ipc ports

There are 11 ports defined.

Port ID Type Name (current/peak/total)

10000.1 unicast IPC Master:Zone

10000.2 unicast IPC Master:Echo

10000.3 unicast IPC Master:Control

10000.4 unicast Remote TTY Server Port

10000.5 unicast GALIOS RF :Active

index = 0 seat_id = 0x2020000 last sent = 0 heard = 1635 0/1/1635

10000.6 unicast GALIOS RED:Active

index = 0 seat_id = 0x2020000 last sent = 0 heard = 2 0/1/2

2020000.3 unicast GALIOS IPC:Card 2:Control

2020000.4 unicast GALIOS RFS :Standby

2020000.5 unicast Slave: Remote TTY Client Port

2020000.6 unicast GALIOS RF :Standby

2020000.7 unicast GALIOS RED:Standby

RPC packets: current/peak/total

0/1/17

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the contents of the IPC retransmission queue:

Switch# show ipc queue

There are 0 IPC messages waiting for acknowledgement in the transmit queue.

There are 0 IPC messages waiting for a response.

There are 0 IPC messages waiting for additional fragments.

There are 0 IPC messages currently on the IPC inboundQ.

There are 0 messages currently in use by the system.

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the status of the local IPC server:

Switch# show ipc status

IPC System Status:

This processor is the IPC master server.

6000 IPC message headers in cache

3363 messages in, 1680 out, 1660 delivered to local port,

1686 acknowledgements received, 1675 sent,

0 NACKS received, 0 sent,

0 messages dropped on input, 0 messages dropped on output

0 no local port, 0 destination unknown, 0 no transport

0 missing callback or queue, 0 duplicate ACKs, 0 retries,

0 message timeouts.

0 ipc_output failures, 0 mtu failures,

0 msg alloc failed, 0 emer msg alloc failed, 0 no origs for RPC replies

0 pak alloc failed, 0 memd alloc failed

0 no hwq, 1 failed opens, 0 hardware errors

No regular dropping of IPC output packets for test purposes

Switch#

show ipv6 dhcp-ldra

To display configuration details and statistics for a Lightweight DHCPv6 Relay Agent (LDRA), use the show ipv6 dhcp-ldra command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.

show ipv6 ldra [statistics]

Syntax Description

statistics

(Optional) Displays LDRA-related statistics.

Command Modes

User EXEC (>)

Privileged EXEC (#)

Command History

Release

Modification

Cisco IOS Release 15.2(5)E2

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to view the number and type of DHCPv6 packets received or processed, the number and type of DHCPv6 messages dropped, error counters, and the interface state (client-facing trusted interface, server-facing interface, and so on).

You can also view LDRA configuration details, such as the type of LDRA configuration and the interface or VLAN where the LDRA is configured.

Examples

Device # show ipv6 dhcp-ldra statistics

DHCPv6 LDRA client facing statistics.

Messages received 2

Messages sent 2

Messages discarded 0

Messages Received

SOLICIT 1

REQUEST 1

Messages Sent

RELAY-FORWARD 2

DHCPv6 LDRA server facing statistics.

Messages received 2

Messages sent 2

Messages discarded 0

Messages Received

RELAY-REPLY 2

Messages Sent

ADVERTISE 1

REPLY 1

Related Commands

Command

Description

ipv6 dhcp-ldra

Enables LDRA functionality on an access node.

ipv6 dhcp ldra attach-policy (VLAN)

Enables LDRA functionality on a VLAN.

ipv6 dhcp-ldra attach-policy

Enables LDRA functionality on an interface.

show ipv6 snooping counters interface

Syntax Description

interface

Specifies the interface.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Interface mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

The show ipv6 first-hop counters command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

15.0(2)SG, XE 3.3.0SG

Same behavior, new syntax; show ipv6 snooping counters

Examples

Related Commands

Command

Description

epm access control

Configures access control.

show ipv6 mld snooping

To display IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping configuration of the switch or the VLAN, use the show ipv6 mld snooping command.

show ipv6 mld snooping [vlan vlan-id]

Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN; the range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

Command Modes

User EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to display MLD snooping configuration for the switch or for a specific VLAN.

VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in MLD snooping.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 mld snooping vlan command. It shows snooping characteristics for a specific VLAN.

Switch> show ipv6 mld snooping vlan 100

Global MLD Snooping configuration:

-------------------------------------------

MLD snooping : Enabled

MLDv2 snooping (minimal) : Enabled

Listener message suppression : Enabled

TCN solicit query : Disabled

TCN flood query count : 2

Robustness variable : 3

Last listener query count : 2

Last listener query interval : 1000

Vlan 100:

--------

MLD snooping : Disabled

MLDv1 immediate leave : Disabled

Explicit host tracking : Enabled

Multicast router learning mode : pim-dvmrp

Robustness variable : 3

Last listener query count : 2

Last listener query interval : 1000

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 mld snooping command. It displays snooping characteristics for all VLANs on the switch.

Switch> show ipv6 mld snooping

Global MLD Snooping configuration:

-------------------------------------------

MLD snooping : Enabled

MLDv2 snooping (minimal) : Enabled

Listener message suppression : Enabled

TCN solicit query : Disabled

TCN flood query count : 2

Robustness variable : 3

Last listener query count : 2

Last listener query interval : 1000

Vlan 1:

--------

MLD snooping : Disabled

MLDv1 immediate leave : Disabled

Explicit host tracking : Enabled

Multicast router learning mode : pim-dvmrp

Robustness variable : 1

Last listener query count : 2

Last listener query interval : 1000

<output truncated>

Vlan 951:

--------

MLD snooping : Disabled

MLDv1 immediate leave : Disabled

Explicit host tracking : Enabled

Multicast router learning mode : pim-dvmrp

Robustness variable : 3

Last listener query count : 2

Last listener query interval : 1000

Related Commands

Command

Description

ipv6 mld snooping

Enables IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping globally or on the specified VLAN.

show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter [vlan vlan-id]

Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN; the range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

Command Modes

User EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on Catalyst 4500.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to display MLD snooping switch ports for the switch or for a specific VLAN.

VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in MLD snooping.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter command. It displays snooping characteristics for all VLANs on the switch that are participating in MLD snooping.

Switch> show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter

Vlan ports

---- -----

2 Gi1/0/11(dynamic)

72 Gi1/0/11(dynamic)

200 Gi1/0/11(dynamic)

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter vlan command. It shows multicast switch ports for a specific VLAN.

Switch> show ipv6 mld snooping mrouter vlan 100

Vlan ports

---- -----

2 Gi1/0/11(dynamic)

Related Commands

Command

Description

ipv6 mld snooping

Enables IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping globally or on the specified VLAN.

ipv6 mld snooping vlan

Configures IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping parameters on the VLAN interface.

show ipv6 mld snooping querier [vlan vlan-id]

Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifiesa VLAN; the range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

Command Modes

User EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500.

Usage Guidelines

Use the show ipv6 mld snooping querier command to display the MLD version and IPv6 address of a detected device that sends MLD query messages, which is also called a querier. A subnet can have multiple multicast switches but has only one MLD querier. The querier can be a Layer 3 switch.

The show ipv6 mld snooping querier command output also shows the VLAN and interface on which the querier was detected. If the querier is the switch, the output shows the Port field as Router. If the querier is a router, the output shows the port number on which the querier is learned in the Port field.

The output of the show ipv6 mld snoop querier vlan command displays the information received in response to a query message from an external or internal querier. It does not display user-configured VLAN values, such as the snooping robustness variable on the particular VLAN. This querier information is used only on the MASQ message that is sent by the switch. It does not override the user-configured robustness variable that is used for aging out a member that does not respond to query messages.

VLAN numbers 1002 through 1005 are reserved for Token Ring and FDDI VLANs and cannot be used in MLD snooping.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 mld snooping querier command:

Switch> show ipv6 mld snooping querier

Vlan IP Address MLD Version Port

-------------------------------------------------------------

2 FE80::201:C9FF:FE40:6000 v1 Gi3/0/1

This is an example of output from the show ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan command:

Switch> show ipv6 mld snooping querier vlan 2

IP address : FE80::201:C9FF:FE40:6000

MLD version : v1

Port : Gi3/0/1

Max response time : 1000s

Related Commands

Command

Description

ipv6 mld snooping

Enables IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery (MLD) snooping globally or on the specified VLAN.

ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-count

Configures IP version 6 (IPv6) Multicast Listener Discovery Mulitcast Address Specific Queries (MASQs) that will be sent before aging out a client.

ipv6 mld snooping last-listener-query-interval

Configures IP version 6 (IPv6) MLD snooping last-listener query interval on the switch or on a VLAN.

ipv6 mld snooping robustness-variable

Configures the number of IP version 6 (IPv6) MLD queries that the switch sends before deleting a listener that does not respond.

ipv6 mld snooping tcn

Configures IP version 6 (IPv6) MLD Topology Change Notifications (TCNs).

show issu capability {entries | groups | types} [client_id]

Syntax Description

entries

Displays a list of Capability Types and Dependent Capability Types that are included in a single Capability Entry. Types within an entry can also be independent.

groups

Displays a list of Capability Entries in priority order (the order that they will be negotiated on a session).

types

Displays an ID that identifies a particular capability.

client_id

(Optional) Identifies the client registered to the ISSU infrastructure.

To obtain a list of client IDs, use the show issu clients command.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

User EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Capability is a functionality that an ISSU client can support and is required to interoperate with peers.

When an ISSU-aware client establishes its session with the peer, an ISSU negotiation takes place. The ISSU infrastructure uses the registered information to negotiate the capabilities and the message version to be used during the session.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the ISSU capability types for the IP host ISSU client (clientid=2082):

Switch# show issu capability types 2082

Client_ID = 2082, Entity_ID = 1 :

Cap_Type = 0

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the ISSU capabilities entries for the IP host ISSU client (clientid=2082):

Switch# show issu capability entries 2082

Client_ID = 2082, Entity_ID = 1 :

Cap_Entry = 1 :

Cap_Type = 0

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the ISSU capabilities groups for the IP host ISSU client (clientid=2082):

Switch# show issu capability groups 2082

Client_ID = 2082, Entity_ID = 1 :

Cap_Group = 1 :

Cap_Entry = 1

Cap_Type = 0

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show issu clients

Displays the ISSU clients.

show issu clients [peer_uid]

Syntax Description

peer_uid

(Optional) Displays a list of clients registered to ISSU infrastructure at the peer supervisor engine.

Command Default

Displays a list of clients registered to the ISSU infrastructure at the supervisor engine where the command is entered.

Command Modes

User EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

To implement ISSU versioning functionality, a client must first register itself, client capability, and client message information with the ISSU infrastructure during the system initialization.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the ISSU clients:

Switch# show issu clients

Client_ID = 2, Client_Name = ISSU Proto client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 3, Client_Name = ISSU RF, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 4, Client_Name = ISSU CF client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 5, Client_Name = ISSU Network RF client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 7, Client_Name = ISSU CONFIG SYNC, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 8, Client_Name = ISSU ifIndex sync, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 9, Client_Name = ISSU IPC client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 10, Client_Name = ISSU IPC Server client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 11, Client_Name = ISSU Red Mode Client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 100, Client_Name = ISSU rfs client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 110, Client_Name = ISSU ifs client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 200, Client_Name = ISSU Event Manager client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2002, Client_Name = CEF Push ISSU client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2003, Client_Name = ISSU XDR client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2004, Client_Name = ISSU SNMP client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2010, Client_Name = ARP HA, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2012, Client_Name = ISSU HSRP Client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2021, Client_Name = XDR Int Priority ISSU client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2022, Client_Name = XDR Proc Priority ISSU client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2023, Client_Name = FIB HWIDB ISSU client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2024, Client_Name = FIB IDB ISSU client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2025, Client_Name = FIB HW subblock ISSU client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2026, Client_Name = FIB SW subblock ISSU client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2027, Client_Name = Adjacency ISSU client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2028, Client_Name = FIB IPV4 ISSU client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2054, Client_Name = ISSU process client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2058, Client_Name = ISIS ISSU RTR client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2059, Client_Name = ISIS ISSU UPD client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2067, Client_Name = ISSU PM Client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2068, Client_Name = ISSU PAGP_SWITCH Client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2070, Client_Name = ISSU Port Security client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2071, Client_Name = ISSU Switch VLAN client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2072, Client_Name = ISSU dot1x client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2073, Client_Name = ISSU STP, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2077, Client_Name = ISSU STP MSTP, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2078, Client_Name = ISSU STP IEEE, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2079, Client_Name = ISSU STP RSTP, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2081, Client_Name = ISSU DHCP Snooping client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2082, Client_Name = ISSU IP Host client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2083, Client_Name = ISSU Inline Power client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 2084, Client_Name = ISSU IGMP Snooping client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 4001, Client_Name = ISSU C4K Chassis client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 4002, Client_Name = ISSU C4K Port client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 4003, Client_Name = ISSU C4K Rkios client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 4004, Client_Name = ISSU C4K HostMan client, Entity_Count = 1

Client_ID = 4005, Client_Name = ISSU C4k GaliosRedundancy client, Entity_Count = 1

Base Clients:

Client_Name = ISSU Proto client

Client_Name = ISSU RF

Client_Name = ISSU CF client

Client_Name = ISSU Network RF client

Client_Name = ISSU CONFIG SYNC

Client_Name = ISSU ifIndex sync

Client_Name = ISSU IPC client

Client_Name = ISSU IPC Server client

Client_Name = ISSU Red Mode Client

Client_Name = ISSU rfs client

Client_Name = ISSU ifs client

Client_Name = ISSU Event Manager client

Client_Name = CEF Push ISSU client

Client_Name = ISSU XDR client

Client_Name = ARP HA

Client_Name = XDR Int Priority ISSU client

Client_Name = XDR Proc Priority ISSU client

Client_Name = FIB HWIDB ISSU client

Client_Name = FIB IDB ISSU client

Client_Name = FIB HW subblock ISSU client

Client_Name = FIB SW subblock ISSU client

Client_Name = Adjacency ISSU client

Client_Name = FIB IPV4 ISSU client

Client_Name = ISSU process client

Client_Name = ISSU PM Client

Client_Name = ISSU C4K Chassis client

Client_Name = ISSU C4K Port client

Client_Name = ISSU C4K Rkios client

Client_Name = ISSU C4K HostMan client

Client_Name = ISSU C4k GaliosRedundancy client

Related Commands

Command

Description

show issu capability

Displays the ISSU capability for a client.

show issu entities

Displays the ISSU entity information.

show issu comp-matrix {negotiated | stored | xml}

Syntax Description

negotiated

Displays negotiated compatibility matrix information.

stored

Displays stored compatibility matrix information.

xml

Displays negotiated compatibility matrix information in XML format.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

User EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Before attempting an ISSU, you should know the compatibility level between the old and the new Cisco IOS software versions on the active and the standby supervisor engines. ISSU will not work if the two versions are incompatible.

The compatibility matrix is available on Cisco.com so that you can also veiw in advance whether an upgrade can be performed with the ISSU process. The compatibility matrix during the ISSU process and later by entering the show issu comp-matrix command. To display information on the negotiation of the compatibility matrix data between two software versions on a given system, use the show issu comp-matrix negotiated command.

Compatibility matrix data is stored with each Cisco IOS software image that supports ISSU capability. To display stored compatibility matrix information, use the show issu comp-matrix stored command.

The compatibility matrix information are built-in any Cisco IOS ISSU image. The ISSU infrastructure performs a matrix lookup as soon as the communication with the standby supervisor engine is established. There are three possible results from the lookup operation:

- Compatible—The Base-level system infrastructure and all optional HA-aware subsystems are compatible. In-service upgrade or downgrade between these versions will succeed with minimal service impact.

- Base-Level Compatible—One or more of the optional HA-aware subsystems are not compatible. Although an in-service upgrade or downgrade between these versions will succeed, some subsystems will not be able to maintain their state during the switchover. Prior to attempting an in-service upgrade or downgrade, the impact of this on operation and service of the switch must be considered carefully.

- Incompatible—A set of core system infrastructure must be able to execute in a stateful manner for SSO to function correctly. If any of these “required” features or subsystems is not compatible in two different Cisco IOS images, the two versions of the Cisco IOS images are declared “Incompatible”. This means that an in-service upgrade or downgrade between these versions is not possible. The systems operates in RPR mode during the period when the versions of Cisco IOS at the active and standby supervisor engines differ.

Examples

Switch> show issu comp-matrix stored

Number of Matrices in Table = 1

(1) Matrix for cat4500-ENTSERVICES-M(112) - cat4500-ENTSERVICES-M(112)

==========================================

Start Flag (0xDEADBABE)

My Image ver: 12.2(31)SGA

Peer Version Compatibility

------------ -------------

12.2(31)SGA Comp(3)

Related Commands

Command

Description

show issu clients

Displays the ISSU clients.

show issu sessions

Displays ISSU session information for a specified client.

show issu endpoints

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

User EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Endpoint is an execution unit within a redundancy domain. There are only 2 endpoints on the Catalyst 4500 series switch redundant chassis: 1 and 2. The endpoints correspond to the slot numbers for the supervisor engine. The ISSU infrastructure communicates between these two endpoints to establish session and to perform session negotiation for ISSU clients.

Examples

show issu entities

To display the ISSU entity information, use the show issu entities command.

show issu entities [client_id]

Syntax Description

client_id

(Optional) ISSU client ID.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

User EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Entity is a logical group of sessions with some common attributes (like capability list and message type). Currently, most ISSU clients on the Catalyst 4500 series switch have only one entity.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the entity information for a specified ISSU client:

Switch#show issu entities 2072

Client_ID = 2072 :

Entity_ID = 1, Entity_Name = ISSU dot1x entity :

MsgType MsgGroup CapType CapEntry CapGroup

Count Count Count count Count

28 1 1 1 1

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show issu clients

Displays the ISSU clients.

To display the ISSU finite state machine (FSM) information corresponding to an ISSU session, use the show issu fsm command.

show issu fsm [session_id]

Syntax Description

session_id

(Optional) Provides detailed information about the FSM for the specified session.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

User EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example displays and verifies the ISSU state after LOADVERSION:

Switch# show issu fsm 26

Session_ID = 26 :

FSM_Name Curr_State Old_State Error_Reason

FSM_L1 TRANS A_VER none

FSM_L2_HELLO EXIT RCVD none

FSM_L2_A_CAP A_EXIT A_RSP none

FSM_L2_P_CAP P_INIT unknown none

FSM_L2_A_VER A_EXIT A_RES_RSP none

FSM_L2_P_VER P_INIT unknown none

FSM_L2_TRANS COMP COMP none

Current FSM is FSM_L2_TRANS

Session is compatible

Negotiation started at 00:01:07.688, duration is 0.148 seconds

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show issu clients

Displays the ISSU clients.

show issu sessions

show issu message

To display checkpoint messages for a specified ISSU client, use the show issu message command.

show issu message {groups | types} [client_id]

Syntax Description

groups

Displays information on Message Group supported by the specified client.

types

Displays information on all Message Types supported by the specified client.

client_id

(Optional) Specifies a client ID.

Command Default

If client ID is not specified, displays message groups or message types information for all clients registered to the ISSU infrastructure.

Command Modes

User EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Messages are sync-data (also known as checkpoint data) sent between two endpoints.

When an ISSU-aware client establishes its session with a peer, an ISSU negotiation takes place. The ISSU infrastructure uses the registered information to negotiate the capabilities and the message version to be used during the session.

Examples

Switch#show issu message types 2082

Client_ID = 2082, Entity_ID = 1 :

Message_Type = 1, Version_Range = 1 ~ 2

Message_Ver = 1, Message_Mtu = 12

Message_Ver = 2, Message_Mtu = 8

Message_Type = 2, Version_Range = 1 ~ 2

Message_Ver = 1, Message_Mtu = 32

Message_Ver = 2, Message_Mtu = 28

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show issu clients

Displays the ISSU clients.

show issu negotiated {capability | version} [session_id]

Syntax Description

capability

Displays all negotiated capabilities.

version

Displays details of all negotiated messages.

session_id

(Optional) Specifies the ISSU session ID for which the capability or version information is displayed.

Command Default

Displays negotiated capability or version information for all ISSU sessions.

Command Modes

User EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the message types for a specific group:

Switch# show issu negotiated capability 26

Session_ID = 26 :

Cap_Type = 0, Cap_Result = 1 No cap value assigned

Switch# show issu negotiated version 26

Session_ID = 26 :

Message_Type = 1, Negotiated_Version = 1, Message_MTU = 44

Message_Type = 2, Negotiated_Version = 1, Message_MTU = 4

Related Commands

Command

Description

show issu sessions

show issu rollback-timer

To display ISSU rollback-timer status, use the show issu rollback-timer command.

show issu rollback-timer

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Priviledged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the rollback-timer status:

Switch#show issu rollback-timer

Rollback Process State = Not in progress

Configured Rollback Time = 45:00

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

issu acceptversion

Halts the rollback timer and ensures that the new Cisco IOS software image is not automatically stopped during the ISSU process.

issu runversion

Forces a change from the active supervisor engine to the standby supervisor engine and causes the newly active supervisor engine to run the new image specified in the issu loadversion command.

show issu sessions

To display ISSU session information for a specified client, use the show issu sessions command.

show issu sessions [client_id]

Syntax Description

client_id

(Optional) Specifies the ISSU client ID.

Command Default

Displays session information for all clients registered to the ISSU infrastructure.

Command Modes

User EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Session is bidirectional and a reliable connection is established between two endpoints. Sync-data and negotiation messages are sent to the peer endpoint through a session. On a Catalyst 4500 series switch, each ISSU-aware client has a maximum of one session at each endpoint.

When an ISSU-aware client establishes its session with the peer, an ISSU negotiation takes place. The ISSU infrastructure uses the registered information to negotiate the capabilities and the message version to be used during the session.

Examples

show issu state

To display the ISSU state and current booted image name during the ISSU process, use the

show issu state command.

show issu state [slot_number] [detail]

Syntax Description

slot_number

(Optional) Specifies the slot number whose ISSU state needs to be displayed (1 or 2).

detail

(Optional) Provides detailed information about the state of the active and standby supervisor engines.

Command Default

The command displays the ISSU state and current booted image name of both the active and standby supervisor engines.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

It might take several seconds after the issu loadversion command is entered for Cisco IOS software to load onto the standby supervisor engine and the standby supervisor engine to transition to SSO mode. If you enter the show issu state command too soon, you might not see the information you need.

Examples

The following example displays and verifies the ISSU state after LOADVERSION:

Switch# show issu state detail

Slot = 1

RP State = Active

ISSU State = Load Version

Boot Variable = bootflash:old_image,12

Operating Mode = Stateful Switchover

Primary Version = bootflash:old_image

Secondary Version = bootflash:new_image

Current Version = bootflash:old_image

Slot = 2

RP State = Standby

ISSU State = Load Version

Boot Variable = bootflash:new_image,12;bootflash:old_image,12

Operating Mode = Stateful Switchover

Primary Version = bootflash:old_image

Secondary Version = bootflash:new_image

Current Version = bootflash:new_image

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

issu abortversion

Cancels the ISSU upgrade or the downgrade process in progress and restores the switch to its state before the start of the process.

issu acceptversion

Halts the rollback timer and ensures that the new Cisco IOS software image is not automatically stopped during the ISSU process.

issu commitversion

Loads the new Cisco IOS software image into the new standby supervisor engine.

issu loadversion

Starts the ISSU process.

issu runversion

Forces a change from the active supervisor engine to the standby supervisor engine and causes the newly active supervisor engine to run the new image specified.

show l2protocol-tunnel

To display information about the Layer 2 protocol tunnel ports, use the show l2protocol-tunnel command. This command displays information for the interfaces with protocol tunneling enabled.

show l2protocol-tunnel [interface interface-id] [[summary] | {begin | exclude | include} expression]

Syntax Description

interface interface-id

(Optional) Specifies the interface for which protocol tunneling information appears. Valid interfaces are physical ports and port channels; the port channel range is 1 to 64.

summary

(Optional) Displays only Layer 2 protocol summary information.

begin

(Optional) Displays information beginning with the line that matches the expression.

exclude

(Optional) Displays information that excludes lines that match the expression.

include

(Optional) Displays the lines that match the specified expression.

expression

(Optional) Expression in the output to use as a reference point.

Command Modes

User EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was first introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EW

Added support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Usage Guidelines

After enabling Layer 2 protocol tunneling on an access or 802.1Q tunnel port with the l2protocol-tunnel command, you can configure some or all of these parameters:

- Protocol type to be tunneled

- Shutdown threshold

- Drop threshold

If you enter the show l2protocol-tunnel [interface interface-id] command, only information about the active ports on which all the parameters are configured appears.

If you enter the show l2protocol-tunnel summary command, only information about the active ports on which some or all of the parameters are configured appears.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show l2protocol-tunnel command:

Switch> show l2protocol-tunnel

COS for Encapsulated Packets: 5

Port Protocol Shutdown Drop Encapsulation Decapsulation Drop

Threshold Threshold Counter Counter Counter

------- -------- --------- --------- ------------- ------------- -------------

Fa0/10 --- ---- ---- ---- ---- ----

stp ---- ---- 9847 1866 0

vtp ---- ---- 77 12 0

pagp ---- ---- 859 860 0

lacp ---- ---- 0 0 0

udld ---- ---- 219 211 0

Fa0/11 cdp 1100 ---- 2356 2350 0

stp 1100 ---- 116 13 0

vtp 1100 ---- 3 67 0

pagp ---- 900 856 5848 0

lacp ---- 900 0 0 0

udld ---- 900 0 0 0

Fa0/12 cdp ---- ---- 2356 0 0

stp ---- ---- 11787 0 0

vtp ---- ---- 81 0 0

pagp ---- ---- 0 0 0

lacp ---- ---- 849 0 0

udld ---- ---- 0 0 0

Fa0/13 cdp ---- ---- 2356 0 0

stp ---- ---- 11788 0 0

vtp ---- ---- 81 0 0

pagp ---- ---- 0 0 0

lacp ---- ---- 849 0 0

udld ---- ---- 0 0 0

Switch#

This is an example of output from the show l2protocol-tunnel summary command:

Switch> show l2protocol-tunnel summary

COS for Encapsulated Packets: 5

Port Protocol Shutdown Drop Status

Threshold Threshold

(cdp/stp/vtp) (cdp/stp/vtp)

(pagp/lacp/udld) (pagp/lacp/udld)

------- ----------- ---------------- ---------------- ----------

Fa0/10 --- stp vtp ----/----/---- ----/----/---- up

pagp lacp udld ----/----/---- ----/----/----

Fa0/11 cdp stp vtp 1100/1100/1100 ----/----/---- up

pagp lacp udld ----/----/---- 900/ 900/ 900

Fa0/12 cdp stp vtp ----/----/---- ----/----/---- up

pagp lacp udld ----/----/---- ----/----/----

Fa0/13 cdp stp vtp ----/----/---- ----/----/---- up

pagp lacp udld ----/----/---- ----/----/----

Fa0/14 cdp stp vtp ----/----/---- ----/----/---- down

pagp ---- udld ----/----/---- ----/----/----

Fa0/15 cdp stp vtp ----/----/---- ----/----/---- down

pagp ---- udld ----/----/---- ----/----/----

Fa0/16 cdp stp vtp ----/----/---- ----/----/---- down

pagp lacp udld ----/----/---- ----/----/----

Fa0/17 cdp stp vtp ----/----/---- ----/----/---- down

pagp lacp udld ----/----/---- ----/----/----

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

l2protocol-tunnel

Enables protocol tunneling on an interface.

l2protocol-tunnel cos

Configures the class of service (CoS) value for all tunneled Layer 2 protocol packets.

show lacp [channel-group] {counters | internal | neighbors | sys-id}

Syntax Description

channel-group

(Optional) Number of the channel group; valid values are from 1 to 64.

counters

Displays the LACP statistical information.

internal

Displays the internal information.

neighbors

Displays the neighbor information.

sys-id

Displays the LACP system identification.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

Usage Guidelines

If you do not specify a channel-group value, all channel groups are displayed.

You can enter the optional channel-group value to specify a channel group for all keywords, except the sys-id keyword.

Examples

- The LACPDUs Sent and Recv columns display the LACPDUs sent and received on each specific interface.

- The LACPDUs Pkts and Err columns display the marker protocol packets.

Switch# show lacp 1 internal

Flags: S - Device sends PDUs at slow rate. F - Device sends PDUs at fast rate.

A - Device is in Active mode. P - Device is in Passive mode.

Channel group 1

LACPDUs LACP Port Admin Oper Port Port

Port Flags State Interval Priority Key Key Number State

Fa4/1 saC bndl 30s 32768 100 100 0xc1 0x75

Fa4/2 saC bndl 30s 32768 100 100 0xc2 0x75

Fa4/3 saC bndl 30s 32768 100 100 0xc3 0x75

Fa4/4 saC bndl 30s 32768 100 100 0xc4 0x75

Switch#

Table 2-36 lists the output field definitions.

Table 2-36 show lacp internal Command Output Fields

Field

Description

State

State of the specific port at the current moment is displayed; allowed values are as follows:

- bndl—Port is attached to an aggregator and bundled with other ports.

- susp—Port is in a suspended state; it is not attached to any aggregator.

- indep—Port is in an independent state (not bundled but able to switch data traffic. In this case, LACP is not running on the partner port).

- hot-sby—Port is in a hot-standby state.

- down—Port is down.

LACPDUs Interval

Interval setting.

LACP Port Priority

Port priority setting.

Admin Key

Administrative key.

Oper Key

Operator key.

Port Number

Port number.

Port State

State variables for the port encoded as individual bits within a single octet with the following meaning [1]:

- bit0: LACP_Activity

- bit1: LACP_Timeout

- bit2: Aggregation

- bit3: Synchronization

- bit4: Collecting

- bit5: Distributing

- bit6: Defaulted

- bit7: Expired

The following example shows how to display LACP neighbors information for a specific port channel:

Switch# show lacp 1 neighbor

Flags: S - Device sends PDUs at slow rate. F - Device sends PDUs at fast rate.

A - Device is in Active mode. P - Device is in Passive mode.

Channel group 1 neighbors

Partner Partner

Port System ID Port Number Age Flags

Fa4/1 8000,00b0.c23e.d84e 0x81 29s P

Fa4/2 8000,00b0.c23e.d84e 0x82 0s P

Fa4/3 8000,00b0.c23e.d84e 0x83 0s P

Fa4/4 8000,00b0.c23e.d84e 0x84 0s P

Port Admin Oper Port

Priority Key Key State

Fa4/1 32768 200 200 0x81

Fa4/2 32768 200 200 0x81

Fa4/3 32768 200 200 0x81

Fa4/4 32768 200 200 0x81

Switch#

In the case where no PDUs have been received, the default administrative information is displayed in braces.

Related Commands

Command

Description

lacp port-priority

Sets the LACP priority for the physical interfaces.

lacp system-priority

Sets the priority of the system for LACP.

show license

To display information about the software license, use the show license command.

.show license [agent [counters | session] [all | detail [feature-name] | feature | file | statistics | status | udi | right-to-use | summary | permanent | in-use | image levels | evaluation | expiring]

Syntax Description

agent

Shows information about the software license agent.

all

Shows information about all licenses in the system.

detail feature-name

Shows detailed information about a specified licensed feature or about all licenses.

feature

Shows a list of licensed features available in an image

file

Shows license entries stored in the license file.

statistics

Shows license statistics information.

status

Shows information about supported license types and license operations, and provides device status.

udi

Shows all the unique device identifier (UDI) values that can be licensed in a system

right-to-use

Shows all PRTU licenses.

summary

Shows a brief summary of all licenses.

permanent

Show all available permanent licenses

in-use

Show all available in-use licenses

image levels

Shows license image levels

evaluation

Shows all evaluation licenses.

expiring

Shows all available expiring licenses.

Command Default

License-related information is not displayed

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.1.0

Support for show license introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

IOS XE 3.4.2

Keyword right-to-use introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to display license information and to help with troubleshooting issues related to Cisco IOS software licenses. It displays all the licenses in the system.

This command also displays those features that are available but not licensed to execute (i.e., multiple license can be active but not in use (execute) simulteously). Only one type license can be used at a given time. Output is grouped according to how the features are stored in license storage (i.e., .where license information is stored on the device).

Examples).

Switch# show license detail

Index: 1 Feature: entservices Version: 1.0

License Type: Evaluation

Evaluation total period: 8 weeks 4 days

Evaluation period left: 8 weeks 3 days

License State: Active, Not in Use, EULA accepted

License Count: Non-Counted

License Priority: Low

Store Index: 0

Store Name: Dynamic Evaluation License Storage

Index: 2 Feature: entservices Version: 1.0

License Type: PermanentRightToUse

License State: Inactive

License Count: Non-Counted

Store Index: 1

Store Name: Dynamic Evaluation License Storage

Index: 3 Feature: ipbase Version: 1.0

License Type: PermanentRightToUse

License State: Active, Not in Use, EULA accepted

License Count: Non-Counted

Store Index: 3

Store Name: Dynamic Evaluation License Storage

Index: 4 Feature: ipbase Version: 1.0

License Type: Evaluation

Evaluation total period: 8 weeks 4 days

Evaluation period left: 8 weeks 3 days

License State: Inactive

License Count: Non-Counted

License Priority: Low

Store Index: 2

Store Name: Dynamic Evaluation License Storage

This is an example of output from the show license detail entservices command:

Switch# show license detail entservices

Feature: entservices Period Left: 8 weeks 3 days

Index: 1 Feature: entservices Version: 1.0

License Type: Evaluation

Evaluation total period: 8 weeks 4 days

Evaluation period left: 8 weeks 3 days

License State: Active, Not in Use, EULA accepted

License Count: Non-Counted

License Priority: Low

Store Index: 0

Store Name: Dynamic Evaluation License Storage

Index: 2 Feature: entservices Version: 1.0

License Type: PermanentRightToUse

License State: Inactive

License Count: Non-Counted

Store Index: 1

Store Name: Dynamic Evaluation License Storage

This is an example of output from the show license feature command:

Switch# show license feature

Feature name Enforcement Evaluation Clear Allowed Enabled Right…

-—————————————————————————————————————-

entservices true true true false true

ipbase true true true true true

lanbase false false true false false

internal_service true false true false false

This is an example of output from the show license file command:

Switch# show license file

License Store: Primary License Storage

License Index: 1

License: 11 ipbase 1.0 LONG NORMAL STANDALONE EXCL INFINITE_KEYS INFINITE_KEYS NEVER NEVER NiL SLM_CODE CL_ND_LCK NiL *1DELA9XDSFSJXAH400 NiL NiL NiL 5_MINS WS-C4507R+EFOX1327G52D xLt5Q1e2VJi03pzp3GSE3PrvxwyfO,SLjP0SXuZOq0f4QTXyc1pSQY51xj31fh7ZfTD6AskNyeUYT8sCUesi9IVKB85wsZSX1HZiXwOd9RHp3mjmnhxFDnS0e6UxjgXgqvV:$AQEBIf8B///kh4dluXv+U+xjUPlzoc3++jpV9d8He4jOubafbkmmOtaOYAoB3inJLnlLyv50VCuRqwInXo3s+nsLU7rOtdOxoIxYZAo3LYmUJ+MFzsqlhKoJVlPyEvQ8H21MNUjVbhoN0gyIWsyiJaM8AQIkVBQFzhr10GYolVzdzfJfEPQIx6tZ++/Vtc/q3SF/5Ko8XCY=

Comment:

Hash: Z+EY3ce1csQlVpRGc5NNy5ypmds=

License Store: Dynamic License Storage

License Store: Primary License Storage

License Store: Dynamic License Storage

License Index: 0

License: 11 entservices 1.0 LONG TRIAL DISABLED 1440 DISABLED STANDALONE ADD INFINITE_KEYS INFINITE_KEYS NEVER NEVER NiL SLM_CODE DEMO NiL NiL Ni NiL NiL 5_MINS NiL BGf3gQnLuroDmnnMJMwWVa2ukR8kP2JZyinKpmOXpa32jwPuSBmHvcSRiSSaqBngV8$AQEBIQAB///FTlc+Qu1Xlg2Z+yB2StUHHymf2w5PEw+cYg/hTOKYCI+oXi0jwBZ2iLrYTKYwxSSRqwInXo3s+nsLU7rOtdOxoIxYZAo3LYmUJ+MFzsqlhKoJVlPyEvQ8H21MNUjVbhoN0gyIWsyiJaM8AQIkVBQFzhr10GYolVzdzfJfEPQIx6tZ++/Vtc/q3SF/5Ko8XCY=

Comment:

Hash: RmO9Kumi8BFKq0wCAx2CcUDE6rg=

License Index: 1

License: 12 entservices 1.0 LONG TRIAL DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED STANDALONE ADD INFINITE_KEYS INFINITE_KEYS 1 JAN 2006 1 JAN 2035 NiL NiL SLM_CODE DEMO NiL NiL Ni NiL NiL 5_MINS NOTLOCKEDNOTLOCKEDHBL l1nG2zXePlBt,ifk7ZReL80LqzvzgRUCelWrBp41FC3jOKer6ZMT7XC4834W3Ev7fm1eXoWaK58t:oDeH5RI1V3dVE2VpAnYb7WiKDz9En8PfrI7vewhayNbschEXBD9:tfPfir6GaALUFwsLxcqYzHuL2$AQEBIf8B///mCSo9+7kn+8zTC3WX1YS9if+g0e8AjRRu1Jq3Kye4y8wv4c+Y9FHJ7Ro/mw7ERwqRqwInXo3s+nsLU7rOtdOxoIxYZAo3LYmUJ+MFzsqlhKoJVlPyEvQ8H21MNUjVbhoN0gyIWsyiJaM8AQIkVBQFzhr10GYolVzdzfJfEPQIx6tZ++/Vtc/q3SF/5Ko8XCY=

Comment:

Hash: 9w09jAFGBzi2w6XQCljLOBe2p+Y=

License Index: 2

License: 11 ipbase 1.0 LONG TRIAL DISABLED 1440 DISABLED STANDALONE ADD INFINITE_KEYS INFINITE_KEYS NEVER NEVER NiL SLM_CODE DEMO NiL NiL Ni NiL NiL 5_MINS NiL YXNJUtpFJiC2Rpdt1SJNVQBCpQUBNt59tdkJJTgKwmLTKj:vmp,sVkMiiRYLfMHQfj$AQEBIf8B//kagzg0R7bT5rn6dVYVPUFmxB1UsblGgbkInHYo55DJzHE/Bqnlf9keNdSyzPbUhSRqwInXo3snsLU7rOtdOxoIxYZAo3LYmUJ+MFzsqlhKoJVlPyEvQ8H21MNUjVbhoN0gyIWsyiJaM8AQIkVBQFzhr10GYolVzdzfJfEPQIx6tZ++/Vtc/q3SF/5Ko8XCY=

Comment:

Hash: H6zsXVLv9TFlmTfFGm0tK4VHJ2Q=

License Index: 3

License: 12 ipbase 1.0 LONG TRIAL DISABLED DISABLED DISABLED STANDALONE ADD INFINITE_KEYS INFINITE_KEYS 1 JAN 2006 1 JAN 2035 NiL NiL SLM_CODE DEMO NiL NiL Ni NiL NiL 5_MINS NOTLOCKEDNOTLOCKEDHBL Zh0GdIANTlXwW6LJgQ95LB0aCazzbsjSOL4HUaqcySLcOvcLq,d04oTgS8pJbHIO3BaD0tgELHog9egQWj9bCJ3,sm2jRaJkgkhYKO9BrbWYLOA,mO3Qe2E,TPJou8fms:LtvrfctzLbujmB0XcB68MPLm$AQEBIf8B//+O8JwRWipzfjtWlAItclx+D6NLhKMyqS1hJoxCM1Txgw8BpmG5QQY5nCiE14CPvVKRqwInXo3s+nsLU7rOtdOxoIxYZAo3LYmUJ+MFzsqlhKoJVlPyEvQ8H21MNUjVbhoN0gyIWsyiJaM8AQIkVBQFzhr10GYolVzdzfJfEPQIx6tZ++/Vtc/q3SF/5Ko8XCY=

Comment:

Hash: S3Ks+G07ueugA9hMFPkXGTF12So=

This is an example of output from the show license statistics command:

Switch# show license statistics

Administrative statistics

Install success count: 4

Install failure count: 1

Install duplicate count: 0

Comment add count: 0

Comment delete count: 0

Clear count: 0

Save count: 0

Save cred count: 0

Client status Request success count 1 Request failure count 0 Release count 0 Global Notify count 1

This is an example of output from the show license status command:

Switch# show license status

License Type Supported

permanent Non-expiring node locked license

extension Expiring node locked license

evaluation Expiring non node locked license

License Operation Supported install Install license clear Clear license annotate Comment license save Save license revoke Revoke license call-home License call-home Call-home Operation Supported show pak Display license pak via call-home install Install license via call-home revoke Revoke license via call-home resend Fetch license via call-home Device status Device Credential type: IMAGE Device Credential Verification: PASS Rehost Type: DC_OR_IC

When you enter the show license udi command on WS-C4507R+E, this output appears:

Switch# show license udi

Device# PID SN UDI

-—————————————————————————————————————

*0 WS-C4507R+E FOX1327G52D WS-C4507R+E:FOX1327G52D

Note The show license udi command output shows details on the current switch.

Switch# show license summary

Index 0 Feature: entservices

Period left: 8 weeks 3 days

License Type: Evaluation

License State: Active, Not in Use, EULA accepted

License Count: Non-Counted

License Priority: Low

Index 1 Feature: ipbase

Period left: Life time

License Type: Permanent

License State: Active, In Use

License Count: Non-Counted

License Priority: Medium

Index 2 Feature: lanbase

Period left: 0 seconds

Index 3 Feature: internal_service

Period left: 0 seconds

This is an example of the show license evaluation command:

Switch# show license evaluation

License Store: Primary License Storage

License Store: Dynamic License Storage

StoreIndex: 0 Feature: entservices Version: 1.0

License Type: Evaluation

Evaluation total period: 8 weeks 4 days

Evaluation period left: 8 weeks 3 days

License State: Active, Not in Use, EULA accepted

License Count: Non-Counted

License Priority: Low

StoreIndex: 2 Feature: ipbase Version: 1.0

License Type: Evaluation

Evaluation total period: 8 weeks 4 days

Evaluation period left: 8 weeks 4 days

License State: Inactive

License Count: Non-Counted

License Priority: None

This is an example of the show license image levels command:

Switch# show license image levels

Module name Image level Priority Configured Valid license

-————————————————————————————————-

WS-X45-SUP7-E entservices 1 NO entservices

ipbase 2 NO ipbase

lanbase 3 NO lanbase

Module Name Role Current Level Reboot Level

-————————————————————————————————-

WS-X45-SUP7-E Active ipbase ipbase

This is an example of the show license expiring command

Switch# show license expiring

License Store: Primary License Storage

License Store: Dynamic License Storage

StoreIndex: 0 Feature: entservices Version: 1.0

License Type: Evaluation

Evaluation total period: 8 weeks 4 days

Evaluation period left: 8 weeks 3 days

License State: Active, Not in Use, EULA accepted

License Count: Non-Counted

License Priority: Low

StoreIndex: 2 Feature: ipbase Version: 1.0

License Type: Evaluation

Evaluation total period: 8 weeks 4 days

Evaluation period left: 8 weeks 4 days

License State: Inactive

License Count: Non-Counted

License Priority: None

Switch#

This is an example of the show license in-use command

Switch# show license in-use

License Store: Primary License Storage

StoreIndex: 1 Feature: ipbase Version: 1.0

License Type: Permanent

License State: Active, In Use

License Count: Non-Counted

License Priority: Medium

License Store: Dynamic License Storage

show link state group

To display link state group information, use the show link state group command in user EXEC or privileged EXEC mode.

show link state group detail

Syntax Description

detail

Displays detailed information about the group.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

User EXEC (>)

Privileged EXEC (#)

Command History

Release

Modification

15.1(1)S

This command was introduced.

Examples

The following example displays the link-state group information:

Switch# enable

Switch# show link state group 1

Link State Group: 1 Status: Enabled, Down

Router> show link state group detail

(Up):Interface up (Dwn):Interface Down (Dis):Interface disabled

Link State Group: 1 Status: Enabled, Down

Upstream Interfaces : Gi3/5(Dwn) Gi3/6(Dwn)

Downstream Interfaces : Gi3/1(Dis) Gi3/2(Dis) Gi3/3(Dis) Gi3/4(Dis)

Link State Group: 2 Status: Enabled, Down

Upstream Interfaces : Gi3/15(Dwn) Gi3/16(Dwn) Gi3/17(Dwn)

Downstream Interfaces : Gi3/11(Dis) Gi3/12(Dis) Gi3/13(Dis) Gi3/14(Dis)

(Up):Interface up (Dwn):Interface Down (Dis):Interface disabled

Related Commands

Command

Description

link state track

Configures the link state group and enables link state tracking.

link state group

Configures the link state group and interface, as either an upstream or downstream interface in the group.

show mab

To display MAC authentication bypass (MAB) information, use the show mab command in EXEC mode.

show mab {interface interface interface-number | all} [detail]

Syntax Description

interface interface

Interface type; possible valid value is gigabitethernet.

interface-number

Module and port number.

all

Displays MAB information for all interfaces.

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed MAB information.

Command Default

None.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

Table 2-37 show mab Command Output

Field

Description

Mac-Auth-Bypass

MAB state

Inactivity Timeout

Inactivity timeout

Client MAC

Client MAC address

MAB SM state

MAB state machine state

Auth Status

Authorization status

Table 2-38 lists the possible values for the state of the MAB state machine.

Table 2-38 MAB State Machine Values

State

State Level

Description

Initialize

Intermediate

The state of the session when it initializes

Acquiring

Intermediate

The state of the session when it is obtaining the client MAC address

Authorizing

Intermediate

The state of the session during MAC-based authorization

Terminate

Terminal

The state of the session once a result has been obtained. For a session in terminal state, “TERMINATE” displays.

Table 2-39 lists the possible displayed values for the MAB authorization status.

Table 2-39 MAB Authorization Status Values

Status

Description

AUTHORIZED

The session has successfully authorized.

UNAUTHORIZED

The session has failed to be authorized.

Examples

The following example shows how to display MAB information:

Switch# show mab all

MAB details for GigaEthernet1/3

-------------------------------------

Mac-Auth-Bypass = Enabled

Inactivity Timeout = None

Switch#

The following example shows how to display detailed MAB information:

Switch# show mab all detail

MAB details for GigaEthernet1/3

-------------------------------------

Mac-Auth-Bypass = Enabled

Inactivity Timeout = None

MAB Client List

---------------

Client MAC = 000f.23c4.a401

MAB SM state = TERMINATE

Auth Status = AUTHORIZED

The following example shows how to display MAB information for a specific interface:

Switch# show mab interface GigaEthernet1/3

MAB details for GigaEthernet1/3

-------------------------------------

Mac-Auth-Bypass = Enabled

Inactivity Timeout = None

The following example shows how to display detailed MAB information for a specific interface:

Switch# show mab interface gigabitethernet1/1 detail

MAB details for GigaEthernet1/1

-------------------------------------

Mac-Auth-Bypass = Enabled

Inactivity Timeout = None

MAB Client List

---------------

Client MAC = 000f.23c4.a401

MAB SM state = TERMINATE

Auth Status = AUTHORIZED

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

mab

Enables and configures MAC authorization bypass (MAB) on a port.

show mac access-group interface

To display the ACL configuration on a Layer 2 interface, use the show mac access-group interface command.

show mac access-group interface [interface interface-number]

Syntax Description

interface

(Optional) Specifies the interface type; valid values are ethernet, fastethernet, gigabitethernet, tengigabitethernet, pos, atm, port-channel, and ge-wan.

interface-number

(Optional) Specifies the port number.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The valid values for the port number depend on the chassis used.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the ACL configuration on interface fast 6/1:

Switch# show mac access-group interface fast 6/1

Interface FastEthernet6/1:

Inbound access-list is simple-mac-acl

Outbound access-list is not set

Related Commands

Command

Description

access-group mode

Specifies the override modes (for example, VACL overrides PACL) and the non-override modes (for example, merge or strict mode).

show mac-address-table address

To display MAC address table information for a specific MAC address, use the

show mac-address-table address command.

show mac-address-table address mac_addr [interface type slot/port | protocol protocol | vlan vlan_id]

Syntax Description

mac_addr

48-bit MAC address; the valid format is H.H.H.

interface type slot/port

(Optional) Displays information for a specific interface; valid values for type are fastethernet, gigabitethernet, and tengigabitethernet.

protocol protocol

(Optional) Specifies a protocol. See the “Usage Guidelines” section for more information.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Displays entries for the specific VLAN only; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Added support for extended VLAN addresses.

12.2(25)EW

Added support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Usage Guidelines

For the MAC address table entries that are used by the routed ports, the routed port name is displayed in the “vlan” column not the internal VLAN number.

The keyword definitions for the protocol variable are as follows:

- ip specifies the IP protocol.

- ipx specifies the IPX protocols.

- assigned specifies the assigned protocol entries.

- other specifies the other protocol entries.

Examples

The following example shows how to display MAC address table information for a specific MAC address:

Switch# show mac-address-table address 0030.94fc.0dff

Unicast Entries

vlan mac address type protocols port

-------+---------------+--------+---------------------+--------------------

1 0030.94fc.0dff static ip,ipx,assigned,other Switch

Fa6/1 0030.94fc.0dff static ip,ipx,assigned,other Switch

Fa6/2 0030.94fc.0dff static ip,ipx,assigned,other Switch

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show mac-address-table aging-time

Displays MAC address table aging information.

show mac-address-table count

Displays the number of entries currently in the MAC address table.

show mac-address-table dynamic

Displays the dynamic MAC address table entries only.

show mac-address-table interface

Displays the MAC address table information for a specific interface.

show mac-address-table multicast

Displays information about the multicast MAC address table.

show mac-address-table protocol

Displays the MAC address table information that is based on the protocol.

show mac-address-table static

Displays the static MAC address table entries only.

show mac-address-table vlan

Displays information about the MAC address table for a specific VLAN.

show mac-address-table aging-time

To display the MAC address aging time, use the show mac-address-table aging-time command.

show mac-address-table aging-time [vlan vlan_id]

Syntax Description

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended addressing was added.

Examples

Switch# show mac-address-table aging-time vlan 100

Vlan Aging Time

---- ----------

100 300

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show mac-address-table address

Displays the information about the MAC-address table.

show mac-address-table count

Displays the number of entries currently in the MAC address table.

show mac-address-table dynamic

Displays the dynamic MAC address table entries only.

show mac-address-table interface

Displays the MAC address table information for a specific interface.

show mac-address-table multicast

Displays information about the multicast MAC address table.

show mac-address-table protocol

Displays the MAC address table information that is based on the protocol.

show mac-address-table static

Displays the static MAC address table entries only.

show mac-address-table vlan

Displays information about the MAC address table for a specific VLAN.

show mac-address-table count

To display the number of entries currently in the MAC address table, use the show mac-address-table count command.

show mac-address-table count [vlan vlan_id]

Syntax Description

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Specifies a VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Added support for extended VLAN addresses.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the entry count for a specific VLAN:

Switch# show mac-address-table count vlan 1

MAC Entries for Vlan 1:

Dynamic Unicast Address Count: 0

Static Unicast Address (User-defined) Count: 0

Static Unicast Address (System-defined) Count: 1

Total Unicast MAC Addresses In Use: 1

Total Unicast MAC Addresses Available: 32768

Multicast MAC Address Count: 1

Total Multicast MAC Addresses Available: 16384

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show mac-address-table address

Displays the information about the MAC-address table.

show mac-address-table aging-time

Displays MAC address table aging information.

show mac-address-table dynamic

Displays the dynamic MAC address table entries only.

show mac-address-table interface

Displays the MAC address table information for a specific interface.

show mac-address-table multicast

Displays information about the multicast MAC address table.

show mac-address-table protocol

Displays the MAC address table information that is based on the protocol.

show mac-address-table static

Displays the static MAC address table entries only.

show mac-address-table vlan

Displays information about the MAC address table for a specific VLAN.

show mac-address-table dynamic

To display the dynamic MAC address table entries only, use the show mac-address-table dynamic command.

show mac-address-table dynamic [address mac_addr | interface type slot/port |

protocol protocol | vlan vlan_id]

Syntax Description

address mac_addr

(Optional) Specifies a 48-bit MAC address; the valid format is H.H.H.

interface type slot/port

(Optional) Specifies an interface to match; valid values for type are fastethernet, gigabitethernet, and tengigabitethernet.

protocol protocol

(Optional) Specifies a protocol. See the “Usage Guidelines” section for more information.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Displays entries for a specific VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Added support for extended VLAN addresses.

12.2(25)EW

Added support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Usage Guidelines

The keyword definitions for the protocol argument are as follows:

- assigned specifies assigned protocol entries.

- ip specifies IP protocol.

- ipx specifies IPX protocols.

- other specifies other protocol entries.

The show mac-address-table dynamic command output for an EtherChannel interface changes the port number designation (such as, 5/7) to a port group number (such as, Po80).

For the MAC address table entries that are used by the routed ports, the routed port name is displayed in the “vlan” column not the internal VLAN number.

Examples

The following example shows how to display all the dynamic MAC address entries:

Switch# show mac-address-table dynamic

Unicast Entries

vlan mac address type protocols port

-------+---------------+--------+---------------------+--------------------

1 0000.0000.0201 dynamic ip FastEthernet6/15

1 0000.0000.0202 dynamic ip FastEthernet6/15

1 0000.0000.0203 dynamic ip,assigned FastEthernet6/15

1 0000.0000.0204 dynamic ip,assigned FastEthernet6/15

1 0000.0000.0205 dynamic ip,assigned FastEthernet6/15

2 0000.0000.0101 dynamic ip FastEthernet6/16

2 0000.0000.0102 dynamic ip FastEthernet6/16

2 0000.0000.0103 dynamic ip,assigned FastEthernet6/16

2 0000.0000.0104 dynamic ip,assigned FastEthernet6/16

2 0000.0000.0105 dynamic ip,assigned FastEthernet6/16

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the dynamic MAC address entries with a specific protocol type (in this case, assigned):

Switch# show mac-address-table dynamic protocol assigned

Unicast Entries

vlan mac address type protocols port

-------+---------------+--------+---------------------+--------------------

1 0000.0000.0203 dynamic ip,assigned FastEthernet6/15

1 0000.0000.0204 dynamic ip,assigned FastEthernet6/15

1 0000.0000.0205 dynamic ip,assigned FastEthernet6/15

2 0000.0000.0103 dynamic ip,assigned FastEthernet6/16

2 0000.0000.0104 dynamic ip,assigned FastEthernet6/16

2 0000.0000.0105 dynamic ip,assigned FastEthernet6/16

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show mac-address-table protocol

Displays the MAC address table information that is based on the protocol.

show mac-address-table static

Displays the static MAC address table entries only.

show mac-address-table vlan

Displays information about the MAC address table for a specific VLAN.

show mac-address-table interface

To display the MAC address table information for a specific interface, use the

show mac-address-table interface command.

show mac-address-table interface type slot/port

Syntax Description

type

Interface type; valid values are ethernet, fastethernet, gigabitethernet, and tengigabitethernet.

slot/port

Number of the slot and port.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EW

Added support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Usage Guidelines

For the MAC address table entries that are used by the routed ports, the routed port name is displayed in the “vlan” column not the internal VLAN number.

Examples

The following example shows how to display MAC address table information for a specific interface:

Switch# show mac-address-table interface fastethernet6/16

Unicast Entries

vlan mac address type protocols port

-------+---------------+--------+---------------------+--------------------

2 0000.0000.0101 dynamic other FastEthernet6/16

2 0000.0000.0102 dynamic other FastEthernet6/16

2 0000.0000.0103 dynamic other FastEthernet6/16

2 0000.0000.0104 dynamic other FastEthernet6/16

2 0000.0000.0105 dynamic other FastEthernet6/16

2 0000.0000.0106 dynamic other FastEthernet6/16

Multicast Entries

vlan mac address type ports

-------+---------------+-------+-------------------------------------------

2 ffff.ffff.ffff system Fa6/16

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show mac-address-table address

Displays the information about the MAC-address table.

show mac-address-table aging-time

Displays MAC address table aging information.

show mac-address-table count

Displays the number of entries currently in the MAC address table.

show mac-address-table dynamic

Displays the dynamic MAC address table entries only.

show mac-address-table multicast

Displays information about the multicast MAC address table.

show mac-address-table protocol

Displays the MAC address table information that is based on the protocol.

show mac-address-table static

Displays the static MAC address table entries only.

show mac-address-table vlan

Displays information about the MAC address table for a specific VLAN.

show mac address-table learning

To display the status of MAC address learning for all VLANs or a specified VLAN, use the

show mac address-table learning user EXEC command.

show mac address-table learning [vlan vlan-id] [ | {begin | exclude | include} expression]

Syntax Description

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Displays information for a specific VLAN. The range is 1 to 4094.

| begin

(Optional) Displays the line that matches the expression.

| exclude

(Optional) Displays excluded lines that match the expression.

| include

(Optional) Displays included lines that match the specified expression.

expression

(Optional) Specifies the expression in the output as a reference point.

Command Default

MAC address learning is enabled on all VLANs.

Command Modes

User EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was modified to support the learning disable feature on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

To display configured VLANs, and whether MAC address learning is enabled or disabled, use the

show mac address-table learning command without keywords. .

To display the learning status on an individual VLAN, use the command with a specific VLAN ID.

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output do not appear, but the lines that contain Output appear.

Examples

The following example shows that MAC address learning is disabled on VLAN 200:

Switch> show mac address-table learning

VLAN Learning Status

---- ---------------

1 yes

100 yes

200 no

Related Commands

Command

Description

mac-address-table learning vlan

Enables or disables MAC address learning on a VLAN.

show mac-address-table multicast

To display information about the multicast MAC address table, use the show mac-address-table multicast command.

show mac-address-table multicast [count | {igmp-snooping [count]} | {user [count]} |

{vlan vlan_num}]

Syntax Description

count

(Optional) Displays the number of multicast entries.

igmp-snooping

(Optional) Displays only the addresses learned by IGMP snooping.

user

(Optional) Displays only the user-entered static addresses.

vlan vlan_num

(Optional) Displays information for a specific VLAN only; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Added support for extended VLAN addresses.

Usage Guidelines

For the MAC address table entries that are used by the routed ports, the routed port name is displayed in the “vlan” column not the the internal VLAN number.

Examples

The following example shows how to display multicast MAC address table information for a specific VLAN:

Switch# show mac-address-table multicast vlan 1

Multicast Entries

vlan mac address type ports

-------+---------------+-------+-------------------------------------------

1 ffff.ffff.ffff system Switch,Fa6/15

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the number of multicast MAC entries for all VLANs:

Switch# show mac-address-table multicast count

MAC Entries for all vlans:

Multicast MAC Address Count: 141

Total Multicast MAC Addresses Available: 16384

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show mac-address-table address

Displays the information about the MAC-address table.

show mac-address-table aging-time

Displays MAC address table aging information.

show mac-address-table count

Displays the number of entries currently in the MAC address table.

show mac-address-table dynamic

Displays the dynamic MAC address table entries only.

show mac-address-table interface

Displays the MAC address table information for a specific interface.

show mac-address-table protocol

Displays the MAC address table information that is based on the protocol.

show mac-address-table static

Displays the static MAC address table entries only.

show mac-address-table vlan

Displays information about the MAC address table for a specific VLAN.

show mac-address-table notification

To display the MAC address table notification status and history, use the show mac-address-table notification command.

show mac-address-table notification [change] [interface [interface-id]] | [mac-move] | [threshold] | [learn-fail]

Syntax Description

change

(Optional) Displays the MAC address change notification status.

interface

(Optional) Displays MAC change information for an interfaces.

interface-id

(Optional) Displays the information for a specific interface. Valid interfaces include physical ports and port channels.

mac-move

(Optional) Displays MAC move notification status.

threshold

(Optional) Displays the MAC threshold notification status.

learn-fail

(Optional) Displays general information of hardware MAC learning failure notifications.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(52)SG

Support for learn-fail keyword, Supervisor Engine 6-E, and Catalyst 4900M chassis added.

Usage Guidelines

Use the show mac-address-table notification change command to display the MAC change notification interval, the maximum number of entries allowed in the history table, the history table contents, and whether the MAC change feature is enabled or disabled.

Use the interface keyword to display the flags for all interfaces. If the interface-id is included, only the flags for that interface are displayed.

Examples

Switch# show mac-address-table notification change interface FastEthernet 7/1

MAC Notification Feature is Enabled on the switch

Interface MAC Added Trap MAC Removed Trap

--------- -------------- ----------------

FastEthernet7/1 Enabled Disabled

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the MAC address move status:

Switch# show mac-address-table notification mac-move

MAC Move Notification: Enabled

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the MAC address table utilization status:

Switch# show mac-address-table notification threshold

Status limit Interval

-------------+-----------+-------------

enabled 50 120

Switch#

The following example shows how to display general information of MAC learning failure notifications:

Switch# show mac address-table notification learn-fail

Status limit Interval

-------------+-----------+-------------

disabled 2000 120

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear mac-address-table

Clears the address entries from the Layer 2 MAC address table.

mac-address-table notification

Enables MAC address notification on a switch.

snmp-server enable traps

Enables SNMP notifications (traps or informs).

snmp trap mac-notification change

Enables SNMP MAC address notifications.

show mac-address-table protocol

To display the MAC address table information that is based on the protocol, use the show mac-address-table protocol command.

show mac-address-table protocol {assigned | ip | ipx | other}

Syntax Description

assigned

Specifies the assigned protocol entries.

ip

Specifies the IP protocol entries.

ipx

Specifies the IPX protocol entries.

other

Specifies the other protocol entries.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

For the MAC address table entries that are used by the routed ports, the routed port name is displayed in the “vlan” column not the the internal VLAN number.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the MAC address table entries that have a specific protocol type (in this case, assigned):

Switch# show mac-address-table protocol assigned

vlan mac address type protocol qos ports

-----+---------------+--------+---------+---+--------------------------------

200 0050.3e8d.6400 static assigned -- Switch

100 0050.3e8d.6400 static assigned -- Switch

5 0050.3e8d.6400 static assigned -- Switch

4092 0000.0000.0000 dynamic assigned -- Switch

1 0050.3e8d.6400 static assigned -- Switch

4 0050.3e8d.6400 static assigned -- Switch

4092 0050.f0ac.3058 static assigned -- Switch

4092 0050.f0ac.3059 dynamic assigned -- Switch

1 0010.7b3b.0978 dynamic assigned -- Fa5/9

Switch#

The following example shows the other output for the previous example:

Switch# show mac-address-table protocol other

Unicast Entries

vlan mac address type protocols port

-------+---------------+--------+---------------------+--------------------

1 0000.0000.0201 dynamic other FastEthernet6/15

1 0000.0000.0202 dynamic other FastEthernet6/15

1 0000.0000.0203 dynamic other FastEthernet6/15

1 0000.0000.0204 dynamic other FastEthernet6/15

1 0030.94fc.0dff static ip,ipx,assigned,other Switch

2 0000.0000.0101 dynamic other FastEthernet6/16

2 0000.0000.0102 dynamic other FastEthernet6/16

2 0000.0000.0103 dynamic other FastEthernet6/16

2 0000.0000.0104 dynamic other FastEthernet6/16

Fa6/1 0030.94fc.0dff static ip,ipx,assigned,other Switch

Fa6/2 0030.94fc.0dff static ip,ipx,assigned,other Switch

Multicast Entries

vlan mac address type ports

-------+---------------+-------+-------------------------------------------

1 ffff.ffff.ffff system Switch,Fa6/15

2 ffff.ffff.ffff system Fa6/16

1002 ffff.ffff.ffff system

1003 ffff.ffff.ffff system

1004 ffff.ffff.ffff system

1005 ffff.ffff.ffff system

Fa6/1 ffff.ffff.ffff system Switch,Fa6/1

Fa6/2 ffff.ffff.ffff system Switch,Fa6/2

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show mac-address-table address

Displays the information about the MAC-address table.

show mac-address-table aging-time

Displays MAC address table aging information.

show mac-address-table count

Displays the number of entries currently in the MAC address table.

show mac-address-table dynamic

Displays the dynamic MAC address table entries only.

show mac-address-table interface

Displays the MAC address table information for a specific interface.

show mac-address-table multicast

Displays information about the multicast MAC address table.

show mac-address-table static

Displays the static MAC address table entries only.

show mac-address-table vlan

Displays information about the MAC address table for a specific VLAN.

show mac-address-table static

To display the static MAC address table entries only, use the show mac-address-table static command.

show mac-address-table static [address mac_addr | interface type number | protocol protocol | vlan vlan_id]

Syntax Description

address mac_addr

(Optional) Specifies a 48-bit MAC address to match; the valid format is H.H.H.

interface type number

(Optional) Specifies an interface to match; valid values for type are fastethernet, gigabitethernet, and tengigabitethernet.

protocol protocol

(Optional) Specifies a protocol. See the “Usage Guidelines” section for more information.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Displays the entries for a specific VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Added support for extended VLAN addresses.

12.2(25)EW

Added support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Usage Guidelines

For the MAC address table entries that are used by the routed ports, the routed port name is displayed in the “vlan” column not the internal VLAN number.

The keyword definitions for the protocol argument are as follows:

- assigned specifies the assigned protocol entries.

- ip specifies the IP protocol.

- ipx specifies the IPX protocols.

- other specifies the other protocol entries.

Examples

Switch# show mac-address-table static protocol assigned

Unicast Entries

vlan mac address type protocols port

-------+---------------+--------+---------------------+--------------------

1 0030.94fc.0dff static ip,ipx,assigned,other Switch

Fa6/1 0030.94fc.0dff static ip,ipx,assigned,other Switch

Fa6/2 0030.94fc.0dff static ip,ipx,assigned,other Switch

Multicast Entries

vlan mac address type ports

-------+---------------+-------+-------------------------------------------

1 ffff.ffff.ffff system Switch,Fa6/15

2 ffff.ffff.ffff system Fa6/16

1002 ffff.ffff.ffff system

1003 ffff.ffff.ffff system

1004 ffff.ffff.ffff system

1005 ffff.ffff.ffff system

Fa6/1 ffff.ffff.ffff system Switch,Fa6/1

Fa6/2 ffff.ffff.ffff system Switch,Fa6/2

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show mac-address-table address

Displays the information about the MAC-address table.

show mac-address-table aging-time

Displays MAC address table aging information.

show mac-address-table count

Displays the number of entries currently in the MAC address table.

show mac-address-table dynamic

Displays the dynamic MAC address table entries only.

show mac-address-table interface

Displays the MAC address table information for a specific interface.

show mac-address-table multicast

Displays information about the multicast MAC address table.

show mac-address-table protocol

Displays the MAC address table information that is based on the protocol.

show mac-address-table vlan

Displays information about the MAC address table for a specific VLAN.

show mac-address-table vlan

To display information about the MAC address table for a specific VLAN, use the show mac-address-table vlan command.

show mac-address-table [vlan vlan_id] [protocol protocol]

Syntax Description

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Displays the entries for a specific VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

protocol protocol

(Optional) Specifies a protocol. See the “Usage Guidelines” section for more information.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended addressing was added.

Usage Guidelines

For the MAC address table entries used by the routed ports, the routed port name is displayed in the “vlan” column not the the internal VLAN number.

The keyword definitions for the protocol variable are as follows:

- assigned specifies the assigned protocol entries.

- ip specifies the IP protocol.

- ipx specifies the IPX protocols.

- other specifies the other protocol entries.

Examples

Switch# show mac-address-table vlan 100 protocol other

Unicast Entries

vlan mac address type protocols port

-------+---------------+--------+---------------------+--------------------

1 0000.0000.0203 dynamic other FastEthernet6/15

1 0000.0000.0204 dynamic other FastEthernet6/15

1 0030.94fc.0dff static ip,ipx,assigned,other Switch

Multicast Entries

vlan mac address type ports

-------+---------------+-------+-------------------------------------------

1 ffff.ffff.ffff system Switch,Fa6/15

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show mac-address-table address

Displays the information about the MAC-address table.

show mac-address-table aging-time

Displays MAC address table aging information.

show mac-address-table count

Displays the number of entries currently in the MAC address table.

show mac-address-table dynamic

Displays the dynamic MAC address table entries only.

show mac-address-table interface

Displays the MAC address table information for a specific interface.

show mac-address-table multicast

Displays information about the multicast MAC address table.

show mac-address-table protocol

Displays the MAC address table information that is based on the protocol.

show mac-address-table static

Displays the static MAC address table entries only.

show macro auto mac-address-group

Use the show macro auto mac-address-group command to display the configuration of MAC address group.

show macro auto mac-address-group

Syntax Description

No keywords

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to displaythe configuration of the MAC address group:

Switch# show macro auto address-group

MAC Address Group Configuration:

Group Name OUI MAC ADDRESS

--------------------------------------------------------------

testGroup 2222.2222.2222

1111.1111.1111

show macro auto device

Use the show macro auto device global configuration command to display the default information for a device, including builtin function name and the parameters that can be provided for the commands when executing the builtin function.

show macro auto device device_id

Syntax Description

device_id

Specifies the device ID.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command displays the default values as well as the currently used values if configured.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the default information for the device access-point:

Switch# show macro auto device access-point

Device:access-point

Default Macro:CISCO_AP_AUTO_SMARTPORT

Current Macro:CISCO_AP_AUTO_SMARTPORT

Configurable Parameters:NATIVE_VLAN

Defaults Parameters:NATIVE_VLAN=1

Current Parameters:NATIVE_VLAN=1

Related Commands

Command

Description

show macro auto event manager

Refer to the Command Reference in the IOS library

show macro auto interface

Display Auto SmartPorts status and the functions applied on an interface.

show macro auto interface

Use the show macro auto interface command to display Auto SmartPorts status and the functions applied on an interface.

show macro auto interface interface_id

Syntax Description

interface_id

Specifies an interface ID.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to display Auto SmartPorts status and the applied macros:

Switch# show macro auto int gi3/8

Global Auto Smart Port Status

Auto Smart Ports Enabled

Fallback : CDP Disabled, LLDP Disabled

Interface Auto Smart Port Fallback Macro Description(s)

--------------------------------------------------------------

Gi3/8 TRUE None CISCO_PHONE_EVENT

Related Commands

Command

Description

show macro auto device

Displays the default information for a device, including builtin function name and the parameters that can be provided for the commands when executing the builtin function.

show macro auto monitor clients

To display the clients using the device classifier facility on the switch, use the show macro auto monitor clients user EXEC command.

show macro auto monitor clients

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

User EXEC

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

Release IOS XE 3.3.0 SG (15.1(1)SG)

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Device classifier (DC) is enabled by default when you enable a client application (for example, Auto Smartports) that uses its functionality. Use the show macro auto monitor clients command to display the clients that are using the DC feature on the switch.

As long as any clients are using the DC, you cannot disable it by using the no macro auto monitor command. If you attempt to disable the DC while a client is using it, an error message appears.

Examples

Switch(config)# no macro auto monitor

These subsystems should be disabled before disabling Device classifier

Auto Smart Ports

% Error - device classifier is not disabled

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro auto device

Configures macro default parameter values.

macro auto execute (built-in function)

Configures mapping from an event trigger to a built-in macro.

macro auto global processing

Enables Auto Smartports on a switch.

macro auto mac-address-group

Configures MAC address groups.

macro auto sticky

Configures macro persistence.

shell trigger

Creates event triggers.

show macro auto monitor type

Displays all the device types recognized by the device classifier.

show shell triggers

Displays information about event triggers and macros.

show macro auto monitor device

To display the devices connected to a switch and their associated properties, use the show macro auto monitor device user EXEC command.

show macro auto monitor device [detail | filter string | interface interface_id | mac-address mac_address]

Syntax Description

detail

Displays detailed device classifier information.

filter string

Displays information for devices that match the filter.

interface interface_id

Displays information about devices attached to the specified interface.

mac mac_address

Displays device information for the specified endpoint.

Command Modes

User EXEC

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

Release IOS XE 3.3.0 SG (15.1(1)SG)

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to display the devices connected to a switch. Use the show macro auto device privileged EXEC command to display the configurable parameters for a device.

Examples

Switch# show macro auto monitor device mac-address 001f.9e90.1250

MAC_Address Port_Id Profile Name

============== ======= ============================

001f.9e90.1250 Gi1/0/4 Cisco-AP-Aironet-1130

==========================================================

The following example shows how to use the show macro auto monitor device privileged EXEC command with the optional mac-address and detail keywords to view detailed information about the connected device with the specified MAC address:

Switch# show macro auto monitor device mac-address 001f.9e90.1250 detail

MAC_Address Port_Id Certainty Parent ProfileType Profile Name Device_Name

============== ======= ========= ====== =========== ============================ ===========

001f.9e90.1250 Gi1/0/4 40 2 Built-in Cisco-AP-Aironet-1130 cisco AIR-LAP1131AG-E-K9

=================================================================================================

The following example shows how to use the show macro auto monitor device privileged EXEC command with the optional interface keyword to view summary information about the device connected to the specified interface:

Switch# show macro auto monitor device interface gi 1/0/2

MAC_Address Port_Id Profile Name

============== ======= ============================

000a.b8c6.1e07 Gi1/0/2 Cisco-Device

=====================================================

The following example shows how to use the show macro auto monitor device privileged EXEC command with the optional interface and detail keywords to view detailed information about the device connected to the specified interface:

Switch# show macro auto monitor device interface gi 1/0/2 detail

MAC_Address Port_Id Certainty Parent ProfileType Profile Name Device_Name

============== ======= ========= ====== =========== ============================ ===========

000a.b8c6.1e07 Gi1/0/2 10 0 Default Cisco-Device cisco WS-C2960-48TT-L

=================================================================================================

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro auto device

Configures macro default parameter values.

macro auto execute (built-in function)

Configures mapping from an event trigger to a built-in macro.

macro auto global processing

Enables Auto Smartports on a switch.

macro auto mac-address-group

Configures MAC address groups.

macro auto sticky

Configures macro persistence.

shell trigger

Creates event triggers.

show macro auto monitor clients

Displays all the device types recognized by the device classifier.

show macro auto monitor type

Displays all the device types recognized by the device classifier.

show shell triggers

Displays information about event triggers and macros.

show macro auto monitor type

To display all the device types recognized by the device classifier, use the show macro auto monitor type user EXEC command.

show macro auto monitor type [table [built-in | default] | string filter_string]

Syntax Description

table

Displays device classification in a table.

built-in

Displays device classification information from the built-in device table.

default

Displays device classification information from the default device table.

filter string

Displays information for devices that match the filter.

Command Modes

User EXEC

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

Release IOS XE 3.3.0 SG (15.1(1)SG)

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command displays all the device types recognized by the device classification engine. The number of available device types is the number of profiles stored on the switch. Because the number of profiles can be very large, you can use the filter keyword to limit the command output.

Examples

The following example shows how to use the show macro auto monitor type privileged EXEC command with no optional keywords to view the devices recognized by the device classifier:

Switch# show macro auto monitor type table

Valid Type Profile Name min Conf ID

=========== ========= ================== ======== ====

Valid Default Apple-Device 10 0

Valid Default Aruba-Device 10 1

Valid Default Avaya-Device 10 2

Valid Default Avaya-IP-Phone 20 3

Valid Default BlackBerry 20 4

Valid Default Cisco-Device 10 5

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone 20 6

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7902 70 7

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7905 70 8

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7906 70 9

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7910 70 10

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7911 70 11

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7912 70 12

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7940 70 13

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7941 70 14

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7942 70 15

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7945 70 16

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7945G 70 17

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7960 70 18

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7961 70 19

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7962 70 20

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7965 70 21

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7970 70 22

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7971 70 23

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7975 70 24

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-7985 70 25

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Phone-9971 70 26

Valid Default Cisco-WLC-2100-Series 40 27

Valid Default DLink-Device 10 28

Valid Default Enterasys-Device 10 29

Valid Default HP-Device 10 30

Valid Default HP-JetDirect-Printer 30 31

Valid Default Lexmark-Device 10 32

Valid Default Lexmark-Printer-E260dn 30 33

Valid Default Microsoft-Device 10 34

Valid Default Netgear-Device 10 35

Valid Default NintendoWII 10 36

Valid Default Nortel-Device 10 37

Valid Default Nortel-IP-Phone-2000-Series 20 38

Valid Default SonyPS3 10 39

Valid Default XBOX360 20 40

Valid Default Xerox-Device 10 41

Valid Default Xerox-Printer-Phaser3250 30 42

Valid Default Aruba-AP 20 43

Valid Default Cisco-Access-Point 10 44

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Conference-Station-7935 70 45

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Conference-Station-7936 70 46

Valid Default Cisco-IP-Conference-Station-7937 70 47

Valid Default DLink-DAP-1522 20 48

Valid Default Cisco-AP-Aironet-1130 30 49

Valid Default Cisco-AP-Aironet-1240 30 50

Valid Default Cisco-AP-Aironet-1250 30 51

Valid Default Cisco-AIR-LAP 25 52

Valid Default Cisco-AIR-LAP-1130 30 53

Valid Default Cisco-AIR-LAP-1240 50 54

Valid Default Cisco-AIR-LAP-1250 50 55

Valid Default Cisco-AIR-AP 25 56

Valid Default Cisco-AIR-AP-1130 30 57

Valid Default Cisco-AIR-AP-1240 50 58

Valid Default Cisco-AIR-AP-1250 50 59

Invalid Default Sun-Workstation 10 60

Valid Default Linksys-Device 20 61

Valid Default LinksysWAP54G-Device 30 62

Valid Default HTC-Device 10 63

Valid Default MotorolaMobile-Device 10 64

Valid Default VMWare-Device 10 65

Valid Default ISE-Appliance 10 66

Valid Built-in Cisco-Device 10 0

Valid Built-in Cisco-Router 10 1

Valid Built-in Router 10 2

Valid Built-in Cisco-IP-Camera 10 3

Valid Built-in Cisco-IP-Camera-2xxx 30 4

Valid Built-in Cisco-IP-Camera-2421 50 5

Valid Built-in Cisco-IP-Camera-2500 50 6

Valid Built-in Cisco-IP-Camera-2520 50 7

Valid Built-in Cisco-IP-Camera-2530 50 8

Valid Built-in Cisco-IP-Camera-4xxx 50 9

Valid Built-in Cisco-Transparent-Bridge 8 10

Valid Built-in Transparent-Bridge 8 11

Valid Built-in Cisco-Source-Bridge 10 12

Valid Built-in Cisco-Switch 10 13

Valid Built-in Cisco-IP-Phone 20 14

Valid Built-in IP-Phone 20 15

Valid Built-in Cisco-DMP 10 16

Valid Built-in Cisco-DMP-4305G 70 17

Valid Built-in Cisco-DMP-4310G 70 18

Valid Built-in Cisco-DMP-4400G 70 19

Valid Built-in Cisco-WLC-2100-Series 40 20

Valid Built-in Cisco-Access-Point 10 21

Valid Built-in Cisco-AIR-LAP 30 22

Valid Built-in Cisco-AIR-AP 30 23

Valid Built-in Linksys-Device 20 24

Related Commands

Command

Description

macro auto device

Configures macro default parameter values.

macro auto execute (built-in function)

Configures mapping from an event trigger to a built-in macro.

macro auto global processing

Enables Auto Smartports on a switch.

macro auto mac-address-group

Configures MAC address groups.

macro auto sticky

Configures macro persistence.

shell trigger

Creates event triggers.

show macro auto monitor clients

Displays all the device types recognized by the device classifier.

show macro auto monitor device

Displays all the device types recognized by the device classifier.

show module

To display information about the module, use the show module command.

show module [mod | all]

Syntax Description

mod

(Optional) Number of the module; valid values vary from chassis to chassis.

all

(Optional) Displays information for all modules.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EW

Enhanced the output of the show idprom interface command to include the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Usage Guidelines

In the Mod Sub-Module fields in the command output, the show module command displays the supervisor engine number but appends the uplink daughter card’s module type and information.

If the PoE consumed by the module is more than 50 W above the administratively allocated PoE, the “Status” displays as “PwrOver.” If the PoE consumed by the module is more than 50 W above the PoE module limit, the “Status” displays as “PwrFault.”

Examples

The following example shows how to display information for all the modules.

The following example shows the show module command output for a system with inadequate power for all installed modules. The system does not have enough power for Module 5; the “Status” displays it as “PwrDeny.”

Switch# show module all

Mod Ports Card Type Model Serial No.

----+-----+--------------------------------------+-----------------+-----------

1 2 1000BaseX (GBIC) Supervisor(active) WS-X4014 JAB054109GH

2 6 1000BaseX (GBIC) WS-X4306 00000110

3 18 1000BaseX (GBIC) WS-X4418 JAB025104WK

5 0 Not enough power for module WS-X4148-FX-MT 00000000000

6 48 10/100BaseTX (RJ45) WS-X4148 JAB023402RP

M MAC addresses Hw Fw Sw Status

--+--------------------------------+---+------------+----------------+---------

1 005c.9d1a.f9d0 to 005c.9d1a.f9df 0.5 12.1(11br)EW 12.1(20020313:00 Ok

2 0010.7bab.9920 to 0010.7bab.9925 0.2 Ok

3 0050.7356.2b36 to 0050.7356.2b47 1.0 Ok

5 0001.64fe.a930 to 0001.64fe.a95f 0.0 PwrDeny

6 0050.0f10.28b0 to 0050.0f10.28df 1.0 Ok

Switch#

The following example shows how to display information for a specific module:

Switch# show module mod2

Mod Ports Card Type Model Serial No.

--- ----- -------------------------------------- ------------------ -----------

2 2 Catalyst 4000 supervisor 2 (Active) WS-X6K-SUP2-2GE SAD04450LF1

Mod MAC addresses Hw Fw Sw Status

--- ---------------------------------- ------ ------------ ------------ -------

2 0001.6461.39c0 to 0001.6461.39c1 1.1 6.1(3) 6.2(0.97) Ok

Mod Sub-Module Model Serial Hw Status

--- --------------------------- --------------- --------------- ------- -------

2 Policy Feature Card 2 WS-F6K-PFC2 SAD04440HVU 1.0 Ok

2 Cat4k MSFC 2 daughterboard WS-F6K-MSFC2 SAD04430J9K 1.1 Ok

Switch#

The following example shows how to display information for all the modules on the switch:

Switch# show module

Chassis Type : WS-C4506

Power consumed by backplane : 0 Watts

Mod Ports Card Type Model Serial No.

---+-----+--------------------------------------+------------------+-----------

1 6 XG (X2), 1000BaseX (SFP) Supervisor(ac WS-X4517 ""

3 6 1000BaseX (GBIC) WS-X4306 00000110

M MAC addresses Hw Fw Sw Status

--+--------------------------------+---+------------+----------------+---------

1 0004.dd46.7700 to 0004.dd46.7705 0.0 12.2(20r)EW( 12.2(20040513:16 Ok

3 0010.7bab.9920 to 0010.7bab.9925 0.2 Ok

Switch#

show monitor

To display information about the SPAN session, use the show monitor command.

show monitor [session] [range session-range | local | remote | all | session-number] [detail]

Syntax Description

session

(Optional) Displays the SPAN information for a session.

range

(Optional) Displays information for a range of sessions.

session-range

(Optional) Specifies a range of sessions.

local

(Optional) Displays all local SPAN sessions.

remote

(Optional) Displays the RSPAN source and destination sessions.

all

(Optional) Displays the SPAN and RSPAN sessions.

session-number

(Optional) Session number; valid values are from1 to 6.

detail

(Optional) Displays the detailed SPAN information for a session.

Command Default

The detail keyword only displays lines with a nondefault configuration.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(13)EW

Added support for differing directions within a single user session.

12.1(19)EW

Output enhanced to display configuration status of SPAN enhancements.

12.1(20)EW

Added support to display configuration state for remote SPAN and learning.

12.2(20)EW

Added support to display ACLs that are applied to SPAN sessions.

Examples

Switch# show monitor session 2

Session 2

------------

Type : Remote Source Session

Source Ports:

RX Only: Fa1/1-3

Dest RSPAN VLAN: 901

Ingress : Enabled, default VLAN=2

Learning : Disabled

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the detailed SPAN information for session 1:

Switch# show monitor session 1 detail

Session 1

---------

Type : Local Session

Source Ports :

RX Only : None

TX Only : None

Both : Gi1/1, CPU

Source VLANs :

RX Only : None

TX Only : None

Both : None

Source RSPAN VLAN : Fa6/1

Destination Ports : Fa6/1

Encapsulation : DOT1Q

Ingress : Enabled, default VLAN = 2

Filter VLANs : None

Filter Types RX : Good

Filter Types TX : None

Dest Rspan Vlan : 901

Ingress : Enabled, default VLAN=2

Learning : Disabled

IP Access-group : None

Switch#

The following example shows how to display SPAN information for session 1 beginning with the line that starts with Destination:

Switch# show monitor session 1 | begin Destination

Destination Ports: None

Filter VLANs: None

Switch#

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

monitor session

Enables the SPAN sessions on interfaces or VLANs.

show monitor capture

To display the capture point details, so that you can see what capture points are defined, what their attributes are, and whether they are active, use the show monitor capture command.

show monitor capture [name [parameter] | buffer [brief | detailed | dump]]

Syntax Description

name

Specifies the capture point name.

parameter

Reconstructs and displays the exec commands for specifying the capture point.

buffer [brief | detailed | dump]

Source the packets from the capture buffer, decode and display them in brief, detailed or dump mode.

Command Default

If the capture point name is not provided, the command displays all the capture point details.

If the display mode is not specified, the command defaults to brief mode.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.3.0SG/

15.1(1)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When the command is issued with no parameters, it displays the details of all the capture points. When specified with a capture point name and no other parameters, it displays the details of the specific capture point name. With the parameter keyword, the command reconstructs the commands that describe the capture point and displays them.

show monitor capture file name [display-filter filter-string] [brief | detailed | dump]

Syntax Description

name

Specfies the filename.

display-filter filter-string

Specifies the display filter string according to Wireshark’s display-filter syntax.

brief | detailed | dump

Determines the display mode.

brief—Displays a one line summary of the packet with key fields

detailed—Displays all the fields in the packet for the protocols supported and displays the payload in hexadecimal form.

dump—Displays a one line summary of the packet with key fields and also displays the packet in hexadecimal form.

Command Default

brief

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS XE 3.3.0SG/

15.1(1)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If no display filter is specified, then all the packets in the file are displayed. Because the display filter must observe the Wireshark display filter syntax, ensure that the display filter is accurate. Also, use a double quotes when specifying the filter.

Examples

The following example shows how to display packets from a .pcap file with a display filter:

Switch# show monitor capture file bootflash:test.pcap display-filter

This example displays a brief output from a .pcap file:

Switch# show monitor capture file bootflash:mycap.pcap

1 0.000000 10.1.1.140 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

2 1.000000 10.1.1.141 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

3 2.000000 10.1.1.142 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

4 3.000000 10.1.1.143 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

5 4.000000 10.1.1.144 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

6 5.000000 10.1.1.145 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

7 6.000000 10.1.1.146 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

8 7.000000 10.1.1.147 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

9 8.000000 10.1.1.148 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

10 9.000000 10.1.1.149 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

11 10.000000 10.1.1.150 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

12 11.000000 10.1.1.151 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

13 12.000000 10.1.1.152 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

14 13.000000 10.1.1.153 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

15 14.000000 10.1.1.154 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

16 15.000000 10.1.1.155 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

17 16.000000 10.1.1.156 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

18 17.000000 10.1.1.157 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

19 18.000000 10.1.1.158 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

20 19.000000 10.1.1.159 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

21 20.000000 10.1.1.160 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

22 21.000000 10.1.1.161 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

23 22.000000 10.1.1.162 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

24 23.000000 10.1.1.163 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

25 24.000000 10.1.1.164 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

26 25.000000 10.1.1.165 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

27 26.000000 10.1.1.166 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

28 27.000000 10.1.1.167 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

29 28.000000 10.1.1.168 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

30 29.000000 10.1.1.169 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

31 30.000000 10.1.1.170 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

32 31.000000 10.1.1.171 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

33 32.000000 10.1.1.172 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

34 33.000000 10.1.1.173 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

35 34.000000 10.1.1.174 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

36 35.000000 10.1.1.175 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

37 36.000000 10.1.1.176 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

38 37.000000 10.1.1.177 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

39 38.000000 10.1.1.178 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

40 39.000000 10.1.1.179 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

41 40.000000 10.1.1.180 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

42 41.000000 10.1.1.181 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

43 42.000000 10.1.1.182 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

44 43.000000 10.1.1.183 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

45 44.000000 10.1.1.184 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

46 45.000000 10.1.1.185 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

47 46.000000 10.1.1.186 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

48 47.000000 10.1.1.187 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

49 48.000000 10.1.1.188 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

50 49.000000 10.1.1.189 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

51 50.000000 10.1.1.190 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

52 51.000000 10.1.1.191 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

53 52.000000 10.1.1.192 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

54 53.000000 10.1.1.193 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

55 54.000000 10.1.1.194 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

56 55.000000 10.1.1.195 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

57 56.000000 10.1.1.196 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

58 57.000000 10.1.1.197 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

59 58.000000 10.1.1.198 -> 20.1.1.2 UDP Source port: 20001 Destination port: 20002

The following example shows how to display a detailed output from a .pcap file:

Switch# show monitor capture file bootflash:mycap.pcap detailed

Frame 1: 256 bytes on wire (2048 bits), 256 bytes captured (2048 bits)

Arrival Time: Mar 21, 2012 14:35:09.111993000 PDT

Epoch Time: 1332365709.111993000 seconds

[Time delta from previous captured frame: 0.000000000 seconds]

[Time delta from previous displayed frame: 0.000000000 seconds]

[Time since reference or first frame: 0.000000000 seconds]

Frame Number: 1

Frame Length: 256 bytes (2048 bits)

Capture Length: 256 bytes (2048 bits)

[Frame is marked: False]

[Frame is ignored: False]

[Protocols in frame: eth:ip:udp:data]

Ethernet II, Src: 00:00:00:00:03:01 (00:00:00:00:03:01), Dst: 54:75:d0:3a:85:3f (54:75:d0:3a:85:3f)

Destination: 54:75:d0:3a:85:3f (54:75:d0:3a:85:3f)

Address: 54:75:d0:3a:85:3f (54:75:d0:3a:85:3f)

.... ...0 .... .... .... .... = IG bit: Individual address (unicast)

.... ..0. .... .... .... .... = LG bit: Globally unique address (factory default)

Source: 00:00:00:00:03:01 (00:00:00:00:03:01)

Address: 00:00:00:00:03:01 (00:00:00:00:03:01)

.... ...0 .... .... .... .... = IG bit: Individual address (unicast)

.... ..0. .... .... .... .... = LG bit: Globally unique address (factory default)

Type: IP (0x0800)

Frame check sequence: 0x03b07f42 [incorrect, should be 0x08fcee78]

Internet Protocol, Src: 10.1.1.140 (10.1.1.140), Dst: 20.1.1.2 (20.1.1.2)

Version: 4

Header length: 20 bytes

Differentiated Services Field: 0x00 (DSCP 0x00: Default; ECN: 0x00)

0000 00.. = Differentiated Services Codepoint: Default (0x00)

.... ..0. = ECN-Capable Transport (ECT): 0

.... ...0 = ECN-CE: 0

Total Length: 238

Identification: 0x0000 (0)

Flags: 0x00

0... .... = Reserved bit: Not set

.0.. .... = Don't fragment: Not set

..0. .... = More fragments: Not set

Fragment offset: 0

Time to live: 64

Protocol: UDP (17)

Header checksum: 0x5970 [correct]

[Good: True]

[Bad: False]

Source: 10.1.1.140 (10.1.1.140)

Destination: 20.1.1.2 (20.1.1.2)

User Datagram Protocol, Src Port: 20001 (20001), Dst Port: 20002 (20002)

Source port: 20001 (20001)

Destination port: 20002 (20002)

Length: 218

Checksum: 0x6e2b [validation disabled]

[Good Checksum: False]

[Bad Checksum: False]

Data (210 bytes)

0000 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0a 0b 0c 0d 0e 0f ................

0010 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 1a 1b 1c 1d 1e 1f ................

0020 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2a 2b 2c 2d 2e 2f !"#$%&'()*+,-./

0030 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 3a 3b 3c 3d 3e 3f 0123456789:;<=>?

0040 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 4a 4b 4c 4d 4e 4f @ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO

0050 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 5a 5b 5c 5d 5e 5f PQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_

0060 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 6a 6b 6c 6d 6e 6f `abcdefghijklmno

0070 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 7a 7b 7c 7d 7e 7f pqrstuvwxyz{|}~.

0080 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 8a 8b 8c 8d 8e 8f ................

0090 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 9a 9b 9c 9d 9e 9f ................

00a0 a0 a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a8 a9 aa ab ac ad ae af ................

00b0 b0 b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b8 b9 ba bb bc bd be bf ................

00c0 c0 c1 c2 c3 c4 c5 c6 c7 c8 c9 ca cb cc cd ce cf ................

00d0 d0 d1 ..

Data: 000102030405060708090a0b0c0d0e0f1011121314151617...

[Length: 210]

Frame 2: 256 bytes on wire (2048 bits), 256 bytes captured (2048 bits)

Arrival Time: Mar 21, 2012 14:35:10.111993000 PDT

show mvr

Use the show mvr privileged EXEC command without keywords to display the following: the current Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) global parameter values (including whether or not MVR is enabled), the MVR multicast VLAN, the maximum query response time, the number of multicast groups, and the MVR mode (dynamic or compatible).

show mvr

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

Release IOS XE 3.5.0E and IOS 15.2(1)E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Related Commands

Command

Description

mvr (global configuration)

Enables and configures multicast VLAN registration on the switch.

mvr (interface configuration)

Configures MVR ports.

show mvr interface

Displays the configured MVR interfaces, status of the specified interface, or all multicast groups to which the interface belongs when the interface and members keywords are appended to the command.

show mvr members

Displays all ports that are members of an MVR multicast group or, if there are no members, means the group is inactive.

show mvr interface

To display the Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) receiver and source ports, use the show mvr interface privileged EXEC command without keywords. Use the command with keywords to display MVR parameters for a specific receiver port.

show mvr interface [interface-id [members [vlan vlan-id]]]

Syntax Description

interface-id

(Optional) Specifies the MVR type, status, and Immediate Leave setting for the interface.

Valid interfaces include physical ports (including type, module, and port number).

members

(Optional) Displays all MVR groups to which the specified interface belongs.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Displays all MVR group members on this VLAN. The VLAN ID range is 1 to 1001 and 1006 to 4094.

Command Default

Output shows all MVR-enabled ports on the switch

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

Release IOS XE 3.5.0E and IOS 15.2(1)E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If you enter only the show mvr interface command, the output shows all MVR-enabled ports on the switch.

If you enter the show mvr interface interface-id command and the specified port is non-MVR, the output displays NON MVR in the Type field. For active MVR ports, it displays the port type (RECEIVER or SOURCE), mode (access or trunk), VLAN, status, and Immediate-Leave setting.

If you enter the members keyword, all MVR group members on the interface are displayed. If you enter a VLAN ID, all MVR group members in the VLAN are displayed.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show mvr interface command:

Switch# show mvr interface

Port Type Mode VLAN Status Immediate Leave

---- ---- ---- ---- ------- ---------------

Fa0/1 Receiver Trunk 1 ACTIVE/UP DISABLED

Fa0/1 Receiver Trunk 2000 ACTIVE/DOWN DISABLED

Fa0/2 Receiver Trunk 2 ACTIVE/UP DISABLED

Fa0/2 Receiver Trunk 3000 ACTIVE/UP DISABLED

Fa0/3 Receiver Trunk 2 ACTIVE/UP DISABLED

Fa0/3 Receiver Trunk 3000 ACTIVE/UP DISABLED

Fa0/10 Source Access 10 ACTIVE/UP DISABLED

In the preceding display, Status is defined as follows:

- Active means that the port is part of a VLAN.

- Up/Down means that the port is forwarding or nonforwarding.

- Inactive means that the port is not yet part of any VLAN.

Switch# show mvr interface fastethernet1/0/6 members

239.255.0.0 DYNAMIC ACTIVE

239.255.0.1 DYNAMIC ACTIVE

239.255.0.2 DYNAMIC ACTIVE

239.255.0.3 DYNAMIC ACTIVE

239.255.0.4 DYNAMIC ACTIVE

239.255.0.5 DYNAMIC ACTIVE

239.255.0.6 DYNAMIC ACTIVE

239.255.0.7 DYNAMIC ACTIVE

239.255.0.8 DYNAMIC ACTIVE

239.255.0.9 DYNAMIC ACTIVE

Related Commands

Command

Description

mvr (global configuration)

Enables and configures multicast VLAN registration on the switch.

mvr (interface configuration)

Configures MVR ports.

show mvr

Displays the global MVR configuration on the switch.

show mvr members

Displays all receiver ports that are members of an MVR multicast group.

show mvr members

To display all receiver and source ports that are currently members of an IP multicast group, use the show mvr members privileged EXEC command.

show mvr members [ip-address]

Syntax Description

ip-address

(Optional) Specifies the IP multicast address.

If the address is entered, all receiver and source ports that are members of the multicast group are displayed.

If no address is entered, all members of all Multicast VLAN Registration (MVR) groups are listed.

If a group has no members, the group is listed as Inactive.

Command Default

Displays all the static and dynamic MVR members on the switch

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

Release IOS XE 3.5.0E and IOS 15.2(1)E

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The show mvr members command applies to receiver and source ports. For MVR compatible mode, all source ports are members of all multicast groups.

Examples

Switch# show mvr members 239.255.0.2

Switch# show mvr members 239.255.0.2

239.255.0.2 ACTIVE Fa1/0/1(d), Fa1/0/2(d), Fa1/0/3(d)

Fa1/0/4(d), Fa1/0/5(s)

Related Commands

Command

Description

mvr (global configuration)

Enables and configures multicast VLAN registration on the switch.

mvr (interface configuration)

Configures MVR ports.

show mvr

Displays the global MVR configuration on the switch.

show mvr interface

Displays the configured MVR interfaces, status of the specified interface, or all multicast groups to which the interface belongs when the members keyword is appended to the command.

show netflow-lite exporter

Note NetFlow-lite is only supported on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To displays information about the collector and global stats, use the show netflow-lite exporter command.

show netflow-lite exporter exporter-name

Syntax Description

exporter-name

Specifies an exporter name.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

Command introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command displays the total number of export packets sent.

Examples

The following example shows how to display information about the collector and global stats:

Switch# show netflow-lite exporter e1

Netflow-lite Exporter e1:

Description: Exporter

Network Protocol Configuration:

Destination IP address: 192.168.1.1

VRF label: cisc

Source IP Address: 10.1.1.5

DSCP: 0x1

TTL: 30

COS: 1

Transport Protocol Configuration:

Transport Protocol: UDP

Destination Port: 1234

Source Port: 65535

Export Protocol Configuration:

Export Protocol: netflow-v9

Exporter Statistics:

Export packets sent: 36

Related Commands

Command

Description

cos (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

source (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a source Layer 3 interface of the NetFlow-lite collector.

transport udp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector.

ttl (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a ttl value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

dscp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

template data timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a template data timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

options timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies an options timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

export-protocol (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies the export protocol for the NetFlow-lite collector.

show netflow-lite monitor

Note NetFlow-lite is only supported on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To display information about a particular packet or per data source stats, use the show netflow-lite monitor command.

show netflow-lite monitor monitor-number interface interface-name

show netflow-lite monitor monitor-number vlan vlan-id

Syntax Description

monitor-number

Specifies a monitor name.

interface-name

Specifies an interface.

vlan-id

Specifies a VLAN.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

Command introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command displays information about a particular packet or per data source stats. The interface can be either a physical port or a VLAN.

This command displays the following packet sampling statistics:

- Total # of packet (samples) exported

- Total # of packet (samples) dropped due to lack of local resources

- Total# of packets seen at the data source

The packetsObserved statistic accounts for packets that are dropped by input ACL or QoS policer.

The exported packets only represent samples from the non-dropped packet population.

Examples

Activates sampling on an interface in netflow-lite monitor submode.

exporter (netflow-lite monitor submode)

Assigns an exporter in netflow-lite monitor submode.

average-packet-size (netflow-lite monitor submode)

Specifies the average packet size at the observation point.

show netflow-lite sampler

Note NetFlow-lite is only supported on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To display information about a sampler, use the show netflow-lite sampler command.

show netflow-lite sampler sampler-name

Syntax Description

sampler-name

Specifies a sampler name.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

Command introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to display information about a sampler,:

Switch# show netflow-lite sampler low-rate

Netflow-lite Sampler low-rate:

Description: Sampler

Sampling rate: 1 out of 256

Packet Section Size: 64 bytes

Packet offset: 0 bytes

Related Commands

Command

Description

packet-section size (netflow-lite sampler submode)

Specifies a sampled header size in netflow-lite submode.

packet-rate (netflow-lite sampler submode)

Specifies a packet sampling rate in netflow-lite sampler submode.

packet-offset (netflow-lite sampler submode)

Specifies a starting packet offset in netflow-lite submode.

show nmsp

To display the Network Mobility Services Protocol (NMSP) information for the switch, use the show nmsp command. This command is available only when your switch is running the cryptographic (encrypted) software image.

show nmsp {attachment suppress interface | capability | notification interval | statistics {connection | summary} | status | subscription {detail | summary}}

Syntax Description

attachment suppress interface

Displays attachment suppress interfaces.

capability

Displays switch capabilities including the supported services and subservices.

notification interval

Displays the notification intervals of the supported services.

statistics connection | summary

Displays the NMSP statistics information.

- connection —Displays the message counters on each connection.

- summary —Displays the global counters.

status

Displays information about the NMSP connections.

subscription detail | summary

Displays the subscription information on each NMSP connection.

- detail —Displays all services and subservices subscribed on each connection.

- summary —Displays all services subscribed on each connection.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show nmsp attachment suppress interface command:

Switch# show nmsp attachment suppress interface

NMSP Attachment Suppression Interfaces

--------------------------------------

GigabitEthernet1/1

GigabitEthernet1/2

Switch#

This is an example of output from the show nmsp capability command:

Switch# show nmsp capability

NMSP Switch Capability

------------------------

Service Subservice

----------- --------------

Attachment Wired Station

Location Subscription

Switch#

This is an example of output from the show nmsp notification interval command:

Switch# show nmsp notification interval

NMSP Notification Intervals

----------------------------------

Attachment notify interval: 30 sec (default)

Location notify interval: 30 sec (default)

Switch#

This is an example of output from the show nmsp statistics connection and show nmsp statistics summary commands:

Switch# show nmsp statistics connection

NMSP Connection Counters

----------------------------------

Connection 1:

Connection status: UP

Freed connection: 0

Tx message count Rx message count

----------------------- -----------------------

Subscr Resp: 1 Subscr Req: 1

Capa Notif: 1 Capa Notif: 1

Atta Resp: 1 Atta Req: 1

Atta Notif: 0

Loc Resp: 1 Loc Req: 1

Loc Notif: 0

Unsupported msg: 0

Switch#

Switch# show nmsp statistics summary

NMSP Global Counters

------------------------

Send too big msg: 0

Failed socket write: 0

Partial socket write: 0

Socket write would block: 0

Partial socket write: 0

Failed socket read: 0

Socket read would block: 0

Transmit Q full: 0

Max Location Nofity Msg: 0

Max Attachement Notify Msg: 0

Max TX Q Size: 0

Switch#

This is an example of output from the show nmsp status command:

Switch# show nmsp status

NMSP Status

---------------

NMSP: enabled

MSE IP Address TxEchoResp RxEchoReq TxData RxData

-------------- ---------- --------- ------ ------

172.19.35.109 5 5 4 4

Switch#

This is an example of output from the show nmsp show subscription detail and show nmsp show subscription summary commands:

Switch# show nmsp subscription detail

Mobility Services Subscribed by 172.19.35.109:

Services Subservices

------------ -------------------

Attachment: Wired Station

Location: Subscription

Switch# show nmsp subscription summary

Mobility Services Subscribed:

MSE IP Address Services

-------------- --------

172.19.35.109 Attachment, Location

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear nmsp statistics

Clears the NMSP statistic counters.

nmsp

Configures Network Mobility Services Protocol (NMSP) on the switch.

show pagp

To display information about the port channel, use the show pagp command.

show pagp [group-number] {counters | dual-active | internal | neighbor}

Syntax Description

group-number

(Optional) Channel-group number; valid values are from 1 to 64.

counters

Specifies the traffic counter information.

dual-active

Specifies the dual-active information.

internal

Specifies the PAgP internal information.

neighbor

Specifies the PAgP neighbor information.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You can enter any show pagp command to display the active PAgP port-channel information. To display the nonactive information, enter the show pagp command with a group.

Examples

The following example shows how to display information about the PAgP counter:

Switch# show pagp counters

Information Flush

Port Sent Recv Sent Recv

--------------------------------------

Channel group: 1

Fa5/4 2660 2452 0 0

Fa5/5 2676 2453 0 0

Channel group: 2

Fa5/6 289 261 0 0

Fa5/7 290 261 0 0

Switch#

The following example shows how to display PAgP dual-active information:

Switch# show pagp dual-active

PAgP dual-active detection enabled: Yes

PAgP dual-active version: 1.1

Channel group 30

Dual-Active Partner Partner Partner

Port Detect Capable Name Port Version

Te3/1 Yes VS1-Reg2 Te1/1/7 1.1

Te4/1 Yes VS1-Reg2 Te2/2/8 1.1

Channel group 32

Dual-Active Partner Partner Partner

Port Detect Capable Name Port Version

Gi1/43 Yes VS3 Gi1/1/43 1.1

Gi1/44 Yes VS3 Gi1/1/44 1.1

Gi1/45 Yes VS3 Gi1/1/45 1.1

Gi1/46 Yes VS3 Gi2/1/46 1.1

Gi1/47 Yes VS3 Gi2/1/47 1.1

Gi1/48 Yes VS3 Gi2/1/48 1.1

Gi2/3 Yes VS3 Gi1/1/1 1.1

Gi2/4 Yes VS3 Gi2/1/1 1.1

Switch#

The following example shows how to display internal PAgP information:

Switch# show pagp 1 internal

Flags: S - Device is sending Slow hello. C - Device is in Consistent state.

A - Device is in Auto mode.

Timers: H - Hello timer is running. Q - Quit timer is running.

S - Switching timer is running. I - Interface timer is running.

Channel group 1

Hello Partner PAgP Learning

Port Flags State Timers Interval Count Priority Method IfIndx

Fa5/4 SC U6/S7 30s 1 128 Any 129

Fa5/5 SC U6/S7 30s 1 128 Any 129

Switch#

The following example shows how to display PAgP neighbor information for all neighbors:

Switch# show pagp neighbor

Flags: S - Device is sending Slow hello. C - Device is in Consistent state.

A - Device is in Auto mode. P - Device learns on physical port.

Channel group 1 neighbors

Partner Partner Partner Partner Group

Port Name Device ID Port Age Flags Cap.

Fa5/4 JAB031301 0050.0f10.230c 2/45 2s SAC 2D

Fa5/5 JAB031301 0050.0f10.230c 2/46 27s SAC 2D

Channel group 2 neighbors

Partner Partner Partner Partner Group

Port Name Device ID Port Age Flags Cap.

Fa5/6 JAB031301 0050.0f10.230c 2/47 10s SAC 2F

Fa5/7 JAB031301 0050.0f10.230c 2/48 11s SAC 2F

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

pagp learn-method

Learns the input interface of the incoming packets.

pagp port-priority

Selects a port in hot standby mode.

show pagp dual-active (virtual switch)

To display dual-active detection information, use the show pagp dual-active command in EXEC mode.

show pagp [group-number] dual-active

Syntax Description

group-number

(Optional) Channel-group number. Range: 1 to 256 with a maximum of 64 values.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Router# show pagp dual-active

PAgP dual-active detection enabled: Yes

PAgP dual-active version: 1.1

Channel group 3 dual-active detect capability w/nbrs Dual-Active trusted group: No

Dual-Active Partner Partner Partner

Port Detect Capable Name Port Version

Fa1/2/33 No None None N/A

Channel group 4

Dual-Active trusted group: Yes

No interfaces configured in the channel group

Channel group 5

Dual-Active trusted group: Yes

Channel group 5 is not participating in PAGP

Channel group 10 dual-active detect capability w/nbrs Dual-Active trusted group: Yes

Dual-Active Partner Partner Partner

Port Detect Capable Name Port Version

Gi1/6/1 Yes mr-rogers-nbr Gi1/5/1 1.1

Gi2/5/1 Yes mr-rogers-nbr Gi1/5/2 1.1

Channel group 11 dual-active detect capability w/nbrs Dual-Active trusted group: No

Dual-Active Partner Partner Partner

Port Detect Capable Name Port Version

Gi1/6/2 Yes mr-rogers-nbr Gi1/3/1 1.1

Gi2/5/2 Yes mr-rogers-nbr Gi1/3/2 1.1

Channel group 12 dual-active detect capability w/nbrs Dual-Active trusted group: Yes

Dual-Active Partner Partner Partner

Port Detect Capable Name Port Version

Fa1/2/13 Yes mr-rogers-nbr Fa1/2/13 1.1

Fa1/2/14 Yes mr-rogers-nbr Fa1/2/14 1.1

Gi2/1/15 Yes mr-rogers-nbr Fa1/2/15 1.1

Gi2/1/16 Yes mr-rogers-nbr Fa1/2/16 1.1

Router#

The following example shows how to display dual-active detection information for a specific port channel:

Router# show pagp dual-active

PAgP dual-active detection enabled: Yes

PAgP dual-active version: 1.1

Channel group 3 dual-active detect capability w/nbrs

Dual-Active trusted group: No

Dual-Active Partner Partner Partner

Port Detect Capable Name Port Version

Fa1/2/33 No None None N/A

Router#

Related Commands

Command

Description

dual-active detection (virtual switch)

Enables and configures dual-active detection.

show policy-map

To display information about the policy map, use the show policy-map command.

show policy-map [policy_map_name]

Syntax Description

policy_map_name

(Optional) Name of the policy map.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Switch# show policy ipp5-policy

Policy Map ipp5-policy

class ipp5

set ip precedence 6

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

class-map

Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name you specify and to enter class-map configuration mode

policy-map

Creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode

show class-map

Displays class map information.

show policy-map interface

Displays the statistics and configurations of the input and output policies that are attached to an interface.

show policy-map control-plane

To display the configuration either of a class or of all classes for the policy map of a control plane, use the show policy-map control-plane command.

show policy-map control-plane [input [class class-name] | [class class-name]]

Syntax Description

input

(Optional) Displays statistics for the attached input policy.

class class-name

(Optional) Displays the name of the class.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is not supported on Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

The show policy-map control-plane command displays information for aggregate control-plane services that control the number or rate of packets that are going to the process level.

Examples

Table 2-40 show policy-map control-plane Field Descriptions

Field

Description

Fields Associated with Classes or Service Policies

Service-policy input

Name of the input service policy that is applied to the control plane. (If configured, this field will also show the output service policy.)

Class-map

Class of traffic being displayed. Traffic is displayed for each configured class. The choice for implementing class matches (for example, match-all or match-any) can also appear next to the traffic class.

Match

Match criteria for the specified class of traffic.
.

Fields Associated with Traffic Policing

police

police command has been configured to enable traffic policing.

conformed

Action to be taken on packets conforming to a specified rate; displays the number of packets and bytes on which the action was taken.

exceeded

Action to be taken on packets exceeding a specified rate; displays the number of packets and bytes on which the action was taken.

Related Commands

Command

Description

control-plane

Enters control-plane configuration mode.

service-policy input (control-plane)

Attaches a policy map to a control plane for aggregate control plane services.

show policy-map interface

To display the statistics and configurations of the input and output policies that are attached to an interface, use the show policy-map interface command.

show policy-map interface [{fastethernet interface-number} | {gigabitethernet interface-number} | {port-channel number} | {vlan vlan_id}] [input | output]

Syntax Description

fastethernet interface-number

(Optional) Specifies the Fast Ethernet 802.3 interface.

gigabitethernet interface-number

(Optional) Specifies the Gigabit Ethernet 802.3z interface.

port-channel number

(Optional) Specifies the port channel.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN ID; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

input

(Optional) Specifies input policies only.

output

(Optional) Specifies output policies only.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Added support for extended VLAN addresses.

12.2(25)SG

Displays results for full flow policing.

Examples

Switch# show policy-map interface fastethernet 5/36 input

service-policy input:ipp5-policy

class-map:ipp5 (match-all)

0 packets

match:ip precedence 5

set:

ip precedence 6

class-map:class-default (match-any)

0 packets

match:any

0 packets

Switch#

With the following configuration, each flow is policed to a 1000000 bps with an allowed 9000-byte burst value.

Note If you use the match flow ip source-address|destination-address command, these two flows are consolidated into one flow and they have the same source and destination address.

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# class-map c1

Switch(config-cmap)# match flow ip source-address ip destination-address ip protocol l4 source-port l4 destination-port

Switch(config-cmap)# exit

Switch(config)# policy-map p1

Switch(config-pmap)# class c1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 1000000 9000

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch(config-pmap)# exit

Switch(config)# interface fastEthernet 6/1

Switch(config-if)# service-policy input p1

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# write memory

Switch# show policy-map interface

FastEthernet6/1

class-map c1

match flow ip source-address ip destination-address ip protocol l4 source-port l4 destination-port

!

policy-map p1

class c1

police 1000000 bps 9000 byte conform-action transmit exceed-action drop

!

interface FastEthernet 6/1

service-policy input p1

Switch# show policy-map p1

Policy Map p1

Class c1

police 1000000 bps 9000 byte conform-action transmit exceed-action drop

Switch# show policy-map interface

FastEthernet6/1

Service-policy input: p1

Class-map: c1 (match-all)

15432182 packets

Match: flow ip source-address ip destination-address ip protocol l4 source-port l4 destination-port

police: Per-interface

Conform: 64995654 bytes Exceed: 2376965424 bytes

Class-map: class-default (match-any)

0 packets

Match: any

0 packets

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

class-map

Creates a class map to be used for matching packets to the class whose name you specify and to be used enter class-map configuration mode.

policy-map

Creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

show class-map

Displays class map information.

show qos

Displays QoS information.

show policy-map interface vlan

To show the QoS policy-map information applied to a specific VLAN on an interface, use the

show policy-map interface vlan command.

show policy-map interface vlan interface-id vlan vlan-id

Syntax Description

interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays QoS policy-map information for a specific interface.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Displays QoS policy-map information for a specific VLAN.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example show a configuration on a non-Supervisor Engine 6-E:

interface GigabitEthernet3/1

vlan-range 20,400

service-policy input p1

vlan-range 300-301

service-policy output p2

The following example shows how to display policy-map statistics on VLAN 20 on the Gigabit Ethernet 6/1 interface:

Switch# show policy-map interface gigabitEthernet 3/1 vlan 20

GigabitEthernet3/1 vlan 20

Service-policy input: p1

Class-map: class-default (match-any)

0 packets

Match: any

0 packets

police: Per-interface

Conform: 0 bytes Exceed: 0 bytes

Switch#

The following example shows a configuration on a non-Supervisor Engine 6-E:

interface fastethernet6/1

vlan-range 100

service-policy in p1

The following example shows how to display policy-map statistics on VLAN 100 on the FastEthernet interface:

Switch# show policy-map interface fastEthernet 6/1 vlan 100

FastEthernet6/1 vlan 100

Service-policy input: p1

Class-map: c1 (match-all)

0 packets

Match: ip dscp af11 (10)

police: Per-interface

Conform: 0 bytes Exceed: 0 bytes

Class-map: class-default (match-any)

0 packets

Match: any

0 packets

Switch#

The following example shows a configuration on a Supervisor Engine 6-E:

interface gigabitethernet3/1

vlan-range 100

service-policy in p1

The following example shows how to display policy-map statistics on VLAN 100 on the FastEthernet interface:

Switch# show policy-map interface gigabitethernet 3/1 vlan 100

GigabitEthernet3/1 vlan 100

Service-policy input: p1

Class-map: c1 (match-all)

0 packets

Match: ip dscp af11 (10)

police:

rate 128000 bps, burst 4000 bytes

conformed 0 packets, 0 bytes; action:

transmit

exceeded 0 packets, 0 bytes; action:

drop

conformed 0 bps, exceeded 0 bps

Class-map: class-default (match-any)

0 packets

Match: any

0 packets

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

service-policy (interface configuration)

Attaches a policy map to an interface.

show policy-map interface

Displays the statistics and configurations of the input and output policies that are attached to an interface.

show port-security [address] [interface interface-id]

[interface port-channel port-channel-number] [vlan vlan-id]

Syntax Description

address

(Optional) Displays all secure MAC addresses for all ports or for a specific port.

interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays port security settings for a specific interface.

interface port-channel port channel-number

(Optional) Displays port security for a specific port-channel interface.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Displays port security settings for a specific VLAN.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(18)EW

Support was enhanced to display sticky MAC addresses.

12.2(25)EWA

Support was enhanced to display settings on a per-VLAN basis.

12.2(31)SGA

Support was enhanced to display settings on EtherChannel interfaces.

Usage Guidelines

If you enter the command without keywords, the output includes the administrative and operational status of all secure ports on the switch.

If you enter the interface-id value or port-channel-interface value, the show port-security command displays port security settings for the interface.

If you enter the address keyword, the show port-security address command displays the secure MAC addresses for all interfaces and the aging information for each secure address.

If you enter the interface-id value and the address keyword, the show port-security address interface command displays all the MAC addresses for the interface with aging information for each secure address. You can also use this command to display all the MAC addresses for an interface even if you have not enabled port security on it.

Sticky MAC addresses are addresses that persist across switch reboots and link flaps.

Examples

Switch# show port-security interface fastethernet 5/1

Port Security : Enabled

Port Status : Secure-up

Violation Mode : Shutdown

Aging Time : 0 mins

Aging Type : Absolute

SecureStatic Address Aging : Disabled

Maximum MAC Addresses : 1

Total MAC Addresses : 1

Configured MAC Addresses : 0

Sticky MAC Addresses : 1

Last Source Address : 0000.0001.001a

Security Violation Count : 0

Switch#

The following example shows how to display all secure MAC addresses configured on all switch interfaces:

Switch# show port-security address

Secure Mac Address Table

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Vlan Mac Address Type Ports Remaining Age

(mins)

---- ----------- ---- ----- -------------

1 0000.0001.0000 SecureConfigured Fa3/1 15 (I)

1 0000.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Fa3/1 14 (I)

1 0000.0001.0100 SecureConfigured Fa3/2 -

1 0000.0001.0101 SecureConfigured Fa3/2 -

1 0000.0001.0200 SecureConfigured Fa3/3 -

1 0000.0001.0201 SecureConfigured Fa3/3 -

1 0000.0001.0300 SecureConfigured Fa3/4 -

1 0000.0001.0301 SecureConfigured Fa3/4 -

1 0000.0001.1000 SecureDynamic Fa3/5 -

1 0000.0001.1001 SecureDynamic Fa3/5 -

1 0000.0001.1100 SecureDynamic Fa3/6 -

1 0000.0001.1101 SecureDynamic Fa3/6 -

1 0000.0001.1200 SecureSticky Fa3/7 -

1 0000.0001.1201 SecureSticky Fa3/7 -

1 0000.0001.1300 SecureSticky Fa3/8 -

1 0000.0001.1301 SecureSticky Fa3/8 -

1 0000.0001.2000 SecureSticky Po2 -

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Addresses in System (excluding one mac per port) :8

Max Addresses limit in System (excluding one mac per port) :3072

The following example shows how to display the maximum allowed number of secure MAC addresses and the current number of secure MAC addresses on interface Gigabitethernet1/1:

Switch# show port-security interface gigabitethernet1/1 vlan

Default maximum: 22

VLAN Maximum Current

2 22 3

3 22 3

4 22 3

5 22 1

6 22 2

The following example shows how to display the port security settings on interface Gigabitethernet1/1 for VLANs 2 and 3:

Switch# show port-security interface gigabitethernet1/1 vlan 2-3

Default maximum: 22

VLAN Maximum Current

2 22 3

3 22 3

The following example shows how to display all secure MAC addresses configured on interface Gigabitethernet1/1 with aging information for each address.

Switch# show port-security interface gigabitethernet1/1 address

Secure Mac Address Table

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Vlan Mac Address Type Ports Remaining Age(mins)

---- ----------- ---- ----- -------------

2 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

2 0001.0001.0002 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0002 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0003 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

4 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

4 0001.0001.0003 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

6 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

6 0001.0001.0002 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Addresses: 12

The following example shows how to display all secure MAC addresses configured on VLANs 2 and 3 on interface Gigabitethernet1/1 with aging information for each address:

Switch# show port-security interface gigabitethernet1/1 address vlan 2-3

Secure Mac Address Table

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Vlan Mac Address Type Ports Remaining Age(mins)

---- ----------- ---- ----- -------------

2 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

2 0001.0001.0002 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

2 0001.0001.0003 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0002 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0003 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Addresses: 12

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the maximum allowed number of secure MAC addresses and the current number of secure MAC addressees on Fast Ethernet port 1:

Switch# show port-security interface fastethernet5/1 vlan

Default maximum: 22

VLAN Maximum Current

2 22 3

3 22 3

5 22 1

6 22 2

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the port security settings on Fast Ethernet port 1 for VLANs 2 and 3:

Switch# show port-security interface fastethernet5/1 vlan 2-3

Default maximum: 22

VLAN Maximum Current

2 22 3

3 22 3

Switch#

The following example shows how to display all secure MAC addresses configured on Fast Ethernet port 1 with aging information for each address.

Switch# show port-security interface fastethernet5/1 address

Secure Mac Address Table

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Vlan Mac Address Type Ports Remaining Age(mins)

---- ----------- ---- ----- -------------

2 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

2 0001.0001.0002 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

2 0001.0001.0003 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0002 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0003 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

4 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

4 0001.0001.0002 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

4 0001.0001.0003 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

5 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

6 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

6 0001.0001.0002 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Addresses: 12

Switch#

The following example shows how to display all secure MAC addresses configured on VLANs 2 and 3 on

Fast Ethernet port 1 with aging information for each address:

Switch# show port-security interface fastethernet5/1 address vlan 2-3

Secure Mac Address Table

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Vlan Mac Address Type Ports Remaining Age(mins)

---- ----------- ---- ----- -------------

2 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

2 0001.0001.0002 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

2 0001.0001.0003 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0002 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0003 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Addresses: 12

Switch#

The following example shows how to display all secure MAC addresses configured on all switch interfaces:

Switch# show port-security address

Secure Mac Address Table

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Vlan Mac Address Type Ports Remaining Age

(mins)

---- ----------- ---- ----- -------------

1 0000.0001.0000 SecureConfigured Fa3/1 15 (I)

1 0000.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Fa3/1 14 (I)

1 0000.0001.0100 SecureConfigured Fa3/2 -

1 0000.0001.0101 SecureConfigured Fa3/2 -

1 0000.0001.0200 SecureConfigured Fa3/3 -

1 0000.0001.0201 SecureConfigured Fa3/3 -

1 0000.0001.0300 SecureConfigured Fa3/4 -

1 0000.0001.0301 SecureConfigured Fa3/4 -

1 0000.0001.1000 SecureDynamic Fa3/5 -

1 0000.0001.1001 SecureDynamic Fa3/5 -

1 0000.0001.1100 SecureDynamic Fa3/6 -

1 0000.0001.1101 SecureDynamic Fa3/6 -

1 0000.0001.1200 SecureSticky Fa3/7 -

1 0000.0001.1201 SecureSticky Fa3/7 -

1 0000.0001.1300 SecureSticky Fa3/8 -

1 0000.0001.1301 SecureSticky Fa3/8 -

-------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Addresses in System (excluding one mac per port) :8

Max Addresses limit in System (excluding one mac per port) :3072

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the maximum allowed number of secure MAC addresses and the current number of secure MAC addresses on interface Gigabitethernet1/1:

Switch# show port-security interface gigabitethernet1/1 vlan

Default maximum: 22

VLAN Maximum Current

2 22 3

3 22 3

4 22 3

5 22 1

6 22 2

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the port security settings on interface Gigabitethernet1/1 for VLANs 2 and 3:

Switch# show port-security interface gigabitethernet1/1 vlan 2-3

Default maximum: 22

VLAN Maximum Current

2 22 3

3 22 3

Switch#

The following example shows how to display all secure MAC addresses configured on interface Gigabitethernet1/1 with aging information for each address.

Switch# show port-security interface gigabitethernet1/1 address

Secure Mac Address Table

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Vlan Mac Address Type Ports Remaining Age(mins)

---- ----------- ---- ----- -------------

2 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

2 0001.0001.0002 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0002 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0003 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

4 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

4 0001.0001.0003 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

6 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

6 0001.0001.0002 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Addresses: 12

Switch#

The following example shows how to display all secure MAC addresses configured on VLANs 2 and 3 on interface Gigabitethernet1/1 with aging information for each address:

Switch# show port-security interface gigabitethernet1/1 address vlan 2-3

Secure Mac Address Table

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Vlan Mac Address Type Ports Remaining Age(mins)

---- ----------- ---- ----- -------------

2 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

2 0001.0001.0002 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

2 0001.0001.0003 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0001 SecureConfigured Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0002 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

3 0001.0001.0003 SecureSticky Gi1/1 -

------------------------------------------------------------------------

Total Addresses: 12

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

switchport port-security

Enables port security on an interface.

show power

To display information about the power status, use the show power command.

show power [available | capabilities | detail | inline {[interface] detail | consumption default | module mod detail}} | module | status | supplies]

Syntax Description

available

(Optional) Displays the available system power.

capabilities

(Optional) Displays the individual power supply capabilities.

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed information on power resources.

inline

(Optional) Displays the PoE status.

interface detail

(Optional) Detailed information on the PoE status for the interface

consumption default

(Optional) Displays the PoE consumption.

module mod default

(Optional) Displays the PoE consumption for the specified module.

status

(Optional) Displays the power supply status.

supplies

(Optional) Displays the number of power supplies needed by the system.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(52)SG

Support to display detailed PoE consumption information on an interface/module.

Usage Guidelines

If a powered device is connected to an interface with external power, the switch does not recognize the powered device. The Device column in the output of the show power inline command displays as unknown.

If your port is not capable of supporting PoE, you will receive this message:

Power over Ethernet not supported on interface Admin

The show power inline interface | module command displays the amount of power that is used to operate a Cisco IP Phone. To view the amount of power requested, use the show cdp neighbors command.

Because FPGAs and other hardware components on the WS-X4548-RJ45V+ and WS-X4648-RJ45V+E modules consume PoE, the operating PoE consumption for an 802.3af-compliant module can be nonzero when there are no powered devices attached to the module. The operating PoE can vary by as much as 20 W because of fluctuations in the PoE that is consumed by the hardware components.

Examples

The following example shows how to display information about the general power supply:

Switch# show power

Power Fan Inline

Supply Model No Type Status Sensor Status

------ ---------------- --------- ----------- ------ ------

PS1 PWR-C45-2800AC AC 2800W good good good

PS2 PWR-C45-1000AC AC 1000W err-disable good n.a.

*** Power Supplies of different type have been detected***

Power supplies needed by system :1

Power supplies currently available :1

Power Summary Maximum

(in Watts) Used Available

---------------------- ---- ---------

System Power (12V) 328 1360

Inline Power (-50V) 0 1400

Backplane Power (3.3V) 10 40

---------------------- ----

Total Used 338 (not to exceed Total Maximum Available = 750)

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the amount of available system power:

Switch# show power available

Power Summary

(in Watts) Available Used Remaining

------------- --------- ------ ---------

System Power 1360 280 1080

Inline Power 1400 0 1400

Maximum Power 2800 280 2520

Switch#

Note The “Inline Power Oper” column displays the PoE consumed by the powered devices attached to the module in addition to the PoE consumed by the FPGAs and other hardware components on the module. The “Inline Power Admin” column displays only the PoE allocated by the powered devices attached to the module.

Switch# show power inline consumption default

Default PD consumption : 5000 mW

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the status of inline power:

Switch# show power inline

Available:677(w) Used:117(w) Remaining:560(w)

Interface Admin Oper Power(Watts) Device Class

From PS To Device

--------- ------ ---------- ---------- ---------- ------------------- -----

Fa3/1 auto on 17.3 15.4 Ieee PD 0

Fa3/2 auto on 4.5 4.0 Ieee PD 1

Fa3/3 auto on 7.1 6.3 Cisco IP Phone 7960 0

Fa3/4 auto on 7.1 6.3 Cisco IP Phone 7960 n/a

Fa3/5 auto on 17.3 15.4 Ieee PD 0

Fa3/6 auto on 17.3 15.4 Ieee PD 0

Fa3/7 auto on 4.5 4.0 Ieee PD 1

Fa3/8 auto on 7.9 7.0 Ieee PD 2

Fa3/9 auto on 17.3 15.4 Ieee PD 3

Fa3/10 auto on 17.3 15.4 Ieee PD 4

Fa3/11 auto off 0 0 n/a n/a

Fa3/12 auto off 0 0 n/a n/a

Fa3/13 auto off 0 0 n/a n/a

Fa3/14 auto off 0 0 n/a n/a

Fa3/15 auto off 0 0 n/a n/a

Fa3/16 auto off 0 0 n/a n/a

Fa3/17 auto off 0 0 n/a n/a

Fa3/18 auto off 0 0 n/a n/a

--------- ------ ---------- ---------- ---------- ------------------- -----

Totals: 10 on 117.5 104.6

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the number of power supplies needed by the system:

Switch# show power supplies

Power supplies needed by system = 2

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the PoE status for Fast Ethernet interface 3/1:

Switch# show power inline fastethernet3/1

Available:677(w) Used:11(w) Remaining:666(w)

Interface Admin Oper Power(Watts) Device Class

From PS To Device

--------- ------ ---------- ---------- ---------- ------------------- -----

Fa3/1 auto on 11.2 10.0 Ieee PD 0

Interface AdminPowerMax AdminConsumption

(Watts) (Watts)

---------- --------------- --------------------

Fa3/1 15.4 10.0

Switch#

The output of the commands show power detail and show power module display the supervisor engine’s variable power consumption and its inline power summary:

Switch# show power detail

sh power detail

Power Fan Inline

Supply Model No Type Status Sensor Status

------ ---------------- --------- ----------- ------- -------

PS1 PWR-C45-1400DC DCSP1400W good good n.a.

PS1-1 12.5A good

PS1-2 15.0A off

PS1-3 15.0A off

PS2 none -- -- -- --

Power supplies needed by system : 1

Power supplies currently available : 1

Power Summary Maximum

(in Watts) Used Available

---------------------- ---- ---------

System Power (12V) 360 360

Inline Power (-50V) 0 0

Backplane Power (3.3V) 0 40

---------------------- ---- ---------

Total 360 400

Module Inline Power Summary (Watts)

(12V -> -48V on board conversion)

---------------------------------

Maximum

Mod Used Available

--- ---- ---------

1 5 25

--- ---- ---------

Watts Used of System Power (12V)

Mod Model currently out of reset in reset

---- ----------------- --------- ------------ --------

1 WS-X4013+TS 180 180 180

2 WS-X4506-GB-T 60 60 20

3 WS-X4424-GB-RJ45 90 90 50

-- Fan Tray 30 -- --

----------------------- --------- ------------ -------

Total 360 330 250

Watts used of Chassis Inline Power (-50V)

Inline Power Admin Inline Power Oper

Mod Model PS Device PS Device Efficiency

---- ----------------- ---------------- ---------------- ----------

2 WS-X4506-GB-T 0 0 0 0 89

3 WS-X4424-GB-RJ45 - - - - -

----------------------- ---------------- ---------------- ----------

Total 0 0 0 0

Watts used of Module Inline Power (12V -> -50V)

Inline Power Admin Inline Power Oper

Mod Model PS Device PS Device Efficiency

---- ----------------- ---------------- ---------------- ----------

1 WS-X4013+TS 6 5 3 3 90

----------------------- ---------------- ---------------- ----------

Switch# show power module

sh power module

Watts Used of System Power (12V)

Mod Model currently out of reset in reset

---- ----------------- --------- ------------ --------

1 WS-X4013+TS 180 180 180

2 WS-X4506-GB-T 60 60 20

3 WS-X4424-GB-RJ45 90 90 50

-- Fan Tray 30 -- --

----------------------- --------- ------------ -------

Total 360 330 250

Watts used of Chassis Inline Power (-50V)

Inline Power Admin Inline Power Oper

Mod Model PS Device PS Device Efficiency

---- ----------------- ---------------- ---------------- ----------

2 WS-X4506-GB-T 0 0 0 0 89

3 WS-X4424-GB-RJ45 - - - - -

----------------------- ---------------- ---------------- ----------

Total 0 0 0 0

Watts used of Module Inline Power (12V -> -50V)

Inline Power Admin Inline Power Oper

Mod Model PS Device PS Device Efficiency

---- ----------------- ---------------- ---------------- ----------

1 WS-X4013+TS 6 5 3 3 90

----------------------- ---------------- ---------------- ----------

Switch#

The following example shows how to display detailed information on the PoE status for Gigabit interface 2/1:

Switch# show power inline g2/1 detail

Available:800(w) Used:71(w) Remaining:729(w)

Interface: Gi2/1

Inline Power Mode: auto

Operational status: on

Device Detected: yes

Device Type: Cisco IP Phone 7970

IEEE Class: 3

Discovery mechanism used/configured: Ieee and Cisco

Police: off

Power Allocated

Admin Value: 20.0

Power drawn from the source: 11.0

Power available to the device: 10.3

Actual consumption

Measured at the port: 5.0

Maximum Power drawn by the device since powered on: 5.2

Absent Counter: 0

Over Current Counter: 0

Short Current Counter: 0

Invalid Signature Counter: 0

Power Denied Counter: 0

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the PoE status for all all ports of the module:

Switch# show module

Chassis Type : WS-C4503-E

Power consumed by backplane : 0 Watts

Mod Ports Card Type Model Serial No.

---+-----+--------------------------------------+------------------+----

1 6 Sup 6-E 10GE (X2), 1000BaseX (SFP) WS-X45-SUP6-E JAE1132SXRP

3 48 10/100/1000BaseT POE E Series WS-X4648-RJ45V-E JAE114740YF

M MAC addresses Hw Fw Sw Status

--+--------------------------------+---+------------+----------------+--

1 0017.94c8.f580 to 0017.94c8.f585 0.4 12.2(44r)SG( 12.2(52) Ok

3 001e.7af1.f5d0 to 001e.7af1.f5ff 1.0 Ok

Switch# show power inline module 3 detail

Available:800(w) Used:0(w) Remaining:800(w)

Interface: Gi3/1

Inline Power Mode: auto

Operational status: off

Device Detected: no

Device Type: n/a

IEEE Class: n/a

Discovery mechanism used/configured: Ieee and Cisco

Police: off

Power Allocated

Admin Value: 20.0

Power drawn from the source: 0.0

Power available to the device: 0.0

Actual consumption

Measured at the port: 0.0

Maximum Power drawn by the device since powered on: 0.0

Absent Counter: 0

Over Current Counter: 0

Short Current Counter: 0

Invalid Signature Counter: 0

Power Denied Counter: 0

Interface: Gi3/2

Inline Power Mode: auto

Operational status: off

Device Detected: no

Device Type: n/a

IEEE Class: n/a

Discovery mechanism used/configured: Ieee and Cisco

Police: off

Power Allocated

Admin Value: 20.0

Power drawn from the source: 0.0

Power available to the device: 0.0

Actual consumption

Measured at the port: 0.0

Maximum Power drawn by the device since powered on: 0.0

Absent Counter: 0

Over Current Counter: 0

Short Current Counter: 0

Invalid Signature Counter: 0

Power Denied Counter: 0

Interface: Gi3/3

Inline Power Mode: auto

Operational status: off

Device Detected: no

Device Type: n/a

IEEE Class: n/a

Discovery mechanism used/configured: Ieee and Cisco

Police: off

Power Allocated

Admin Value: 20.0

Power drawn from the source: 0.0

Power available to the device: 0.0

Actual consumption

Measured at the port: 0.0

Maximum Power drawn by the device since powered on: 0.0

Absent Counter: 0

Over Current Counter: 0

Short Current Counter: 0

Invalid Signature Counter: 0

Power Denied Counter: 0

Interface: Gi3/4

Inline Power Mode: auto

Operational status: off

Device Detected: no

Device Type: n/a

IEEE Class: n/a

Discovery mechanism used/configured: Ieee and Cisco

Police: off

Power Allocated

Admin Value: 20.0

Power drawn from the source: 0.0

Power available to the device: 0.0

Actual consumption

Measured at the port: 0.0

Maximum Power drawn by the device since powered on: 0.0

Absent Counter: 0

Over Current Counter: 0

Short Current Counter: 0

Invalid Signature Counter: 0

Power Denied Counter: 0

Interface: Gi3/5

Inline Power Mode: auto

Operational status: off

Device Detected: no

Device Type: n/a

IEEE Class: n/a

Discovery mechanism used/configured: Ieee and Cisco

Police: off

Power Allocated

Admin Value: 20.0

Power drawn from the source: 0.0

Power available to the device: 0.0

Actual consumption

Measured at the port: 0.0

Maximum Power drawn by the device since powered on: 0.0

Absent Counter: 0

Over Current Counter: 0

Short Current Counter: 0

Invalid Signature Counter: 0

Power Denied Counter: 0

Interface: Gi3/6

Inline Power Mode: auto

Operational status: off

Device Detected: no

Device Type: n/a

IEEE Class: n/a

Discovery mechanism used/configured: Ieee and Cisco

Police: off

Power Allocated

Admin Value: 20.0

Power drawn from the source: 0.0

Power available to the device: 0.0

................

Related Commands

Command

Description

power dc input

Configures the power DC input parameters on the switch.

power inline

Sets the inline-power state for the inline-power-capable interfaces.

power inline consumption

Sets the default power that is allocated to an interface for all the inline-power-capable interfaces on the switch.

power redundancy-mode

Configures the power settings for the chassis.

show power inline police

To display PoE policing and monitoring status, use the show power inline police command.

show power inline police [interfacename] [module n]

Syntax Description

interfacename

(optional) Displays PoE policing and monitoring status for a particular interface.

module n

(optional) Display PoE policing and monitoring status for all interfaces on this module.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The Oper Power field displays the true power consumption of the connected device.

The show power inline police command with no keywords displays PoE policing status for all interfaces in the chassis.

If this command is executed at the global level, the last line of the output under Oper Power field displays the total true inline power consumption of all devices connected to the switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to display PoE policing status for a interface GigabitEthernet 2/1:

Switch# show power inline police gigabitEthernet 2/1

Available:421(w) Used:44(w) Remaining:377(w)

Interface Admin Oper Admin Oper Cutoff Oper

State State Police Police Power Power

--------- ------ ---------- ---------- ---------- ------ -----

Gi2/1 auto on errdisable ok 22.6 9.6

Related Commands

Command

Description

power inline police

Configures PoE policing on a particular interface.

show pppoe intermediate-agent interface

To display PPPoE Intermediate Agent configuration and statistics (packet counters), use the

show pppoe intermediate-agent interface command.

show ppoe intermediate-agent information interface interface

show ppoe intermediate-agent statistics interface interface

Syntax Description

interface interface

Interface for which information or statistics are displayed.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(50)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Switch# show pppoe intermediate-agent statistics interface g3/7

Interface : GigabitEthernet3/7

Packets received

All = 3

PADI = 0 PADO = 0

PADR = 0 PADS = 0

PADT = 3

Packets dropped:

Rate-limit exceeded = 0

Server responses from untrusted ports = 0

Client requests towards untrusted ports = 0

Malformed PPPoE Discovery packets = 0

Vlan 2: Packets received PADI = 6 PADO = 0 PADR = 6 PADS = 0 PADT = 6

Vlan 3: Packets received PADI = 4 PADO = 0 PADR = 4 PADS = 0 PADT = 4

Related Commands

Command

Description

pppoe intermediate-agent (global)

Enables the PPPoE Intermediate Agent feature on a switch.

pppoe intermediate-agent format-type (global)

Sets the access-node-identifier, generic-error-message, and identifier-string for the switch.

pppoe intermediate-agent (interface)

Enables the PPPoE Intermediate Agent feature on an interface.

pppoe intermediate-agent format-type (interface)

Sets circuit-id or remote-id for an interface.

show qos

To display QoS information, use the show qos command.

show qos

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is not supported on Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

Examples

The following example shows the output that might be displayed if you do not enter any keywords:

Switch# show qos

QoS is enabled globally

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

qos account layer-all encapsulation

Globally enables QoS functionality on the switch.

show qos aggregate policer

To display QoS aggregate policer information, use the show qos aggregate policer command.

show qos aggregate policer [aggregate_name]

Syntax Description

aggregate_name

(Optional) Named aggregate policer.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is not supported on Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

The aggregate policer name is case sensitive.

Examples

The following example shows the output if you do not enter any keywords:

Switch# show qos aggregate policer

Policer aggr-1

Rate(bps):10000000 Normal-Burst(bytes):1000000

conform-action:transmit exceed-action:policed-dscp-transmit

Policymaps using this policer:

ipp5-policy

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

qos trust

Defines a named aggregate policer.

show qos dbl

To display global Dynamic Buffer Limiting (DBL) information, use the show qos dbl command.

show qos dbl

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is not supported on Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

Examples

The following example shows how to display global DBL information:

Switch# show qos dbl

DBL is enabled globally

DBL flow includes vlan

DBL flow includes l4-ports

DBL does not use ecn to indicate congestion

DBL exceed-action mark probability:15%

DBL max credits:15

DBL aggressive credit limit:10

DBL aggressive buffer limit:2 packets

DBL DSCPs with default drop probability:

1-10

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

qos account layer-all encapsulation

Globally enables QoS functionality on the switch.

show qos interface

To display queueing information, use the show qos interface command.

show qos interface {fastethernet interface-number | gigabitethernet interface-number} |

[vlan vlan_id | port-channel number]

Syntax Description

fastethernet interface-number

Specifies the Fast Ethernet 802.3 interface.

gigabitethernet interface-number

Specifies the Gigabit Ethernet 802.3z interface.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN ID; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

port-channel number

(Optional) Specifies the port channel; valid ranges are from 1 to 64.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(13)EW

Added support for extended VLAN addresses.

12.1(19)EW

Display changed to include the Port Trust Device.

Usage Guidelines

This command is not supported on Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

Examples

The following example shows how to display queueing information:

Switch# show qos interface fastethernet 6/1

QoS is enabled globally

Port QoS is enabled

Administrative Port Trust State: ‘dscp’

Operational Port Trust State: ‘untrusted’

Port Trust Device:'cisco-phone'

Default DSCP:0 Default CoS:0

Tx-Queue Bandwidth ShapeRate Priority QueueSize

(bps) (bps) (packets)

1 31250000 disabled N/A 240

2 31250000 disabled N/A 240

3 31250000 disabled normal 240

4 31250000 disabled N/A 240

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show qos

Displays QoS information.

tx-queue

Configures the transmit queue parameters for an interface.

show qos maps

To display QoS map information, use the show qos maps command.

show qos maps [cos | dscp [policed | tx-queue]]

Syntax Description

cos

(Optional) Displays CoS map information.

dscp

(Optional) Displays DSCP map information.

policed

(Optional) Displays policed map information.

tx-queue

(Optional) Displays tx-queue map information.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is not supported on Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

Examples

The following example shows how to display QoS map settings:

Switch# show qos maps

DSCP-TxQueue Mapping Table (dscp = d1d2)

d1 :d2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-------------------------------------

0 : 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01

1 : 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 02 02 02

2 : 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02 02

3 : 02 02 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03

4 : 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 03 04 04

5 : 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04

6 : 04 04 04 04

Policed DSCP Mapping Table (dscp = d1d2)

d1 :d2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-------------------------------------

0 : 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09

1 : 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

2 : 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

3 : 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

4 : 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

5 : 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59

6 : 60 61 62 63

DSCP-CoS Mapping Table (dscp = d1d2)

d1 :d2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

-------------------------------------

0 : 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 01 01

1 : 01 01 01 01 01 01 02 02 02 02

2 : 02 02 02 02 03 03 03 03 03 03

3 : 03 03 04 04 04 04 04 04 04 04

4 : 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 05 06 06

5 : 06 06 06 06 06 06 07 07 07 07

6 : 07 07 07 07

CoS-DSCP Mapping Table

CoS: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

--------------------------------

DSCP: 0 8 16 24 32 40 48 56

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

qos account layer-all encapsulation

Globally enables QoS functionality on the switch.

show redundancy

To display redundancy facility information, use the show redundancy command.

show redundancy {clients | counters | history | states}

Syntax Description

clients

(Optional) Displays information about the redundancy facility client.

counters

(Optional) Displays information about the redundancy facility counter.

history

(Optional) Displays a log of past status and related information for the redundancy facility.

states

(Optional) Displays information about the redundancy facility state, such as disabled, initialization, standby, active.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1.(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch

12.2(31)SGA

Support for ISSU was introduced.

Examples

Switch# show redundancy clients

clientID = 0 clientSeq = 0 RF_INTERNAL_MSG

clientID = 30 clientSeq = 135 Redundancy Mode RF

clientID = 28 clientSeq = 330 GALIOS_CONFIG_SYNC

clientID = 65000 clientSeq = 65000 RF_LAST_CLIENT Switch

The output displays the following information:

- clientID displays the client’s ID number.

- clientSeq displays the client’s notification sequence number.

- Current redundancy facility state.

Switch# show redundancy history

00:00:01 client added: RF_INTERNAL_MSG(0) seq=0

00:00:01 client added: RF_LAST_CLIENT(65000) seq=65000

00:00:01 client added: GALIOS_CONFIG_SYNC(28) seq=330

00:00:03 client added: Redundancy Mode RF(30) seq=135

00:00:03 *my state = INITIALIZATION(2) *peer state = DISABLED(1)

00:00:03 RF_PROG_INITIALIZATION(100) RF_INTERNAL_MSG(0) op=0 rc=11

00:00:03 RF_PROG_INITIALIZATION(100) Redundancy Mode RF(30) op=0 rc=11

00:00:03 RF_PROG_INITIALIZATION(100) GALIOS_CONFIG_SYNC(28) op=0 rc=11

00:00:03 RF_PROG_INITIALIZATION(100) RF_LAST_CLIENT(65000) op=0 rc=11

00:00:03 *my state = NEGOTIATION(3) peer state = DISABLED(1)

00:00:25 RF_EVENT_GO_ACTIVE(511) op=0

00:00:25 *my state = ACTIVE-FAST(9) peer state = DISABLED(1)

00:00:25 RF_STATUS_MAINTENANCE_ENABLE(403) Redundancy Mode RF(30) op=0

00:00:25 RF_STATUS_MAINTENANCE_ENABLE(403) GALIOS_CONFIG_SYNC(28) op=0

00:00:25 RF_PROG_ACTIVE_FAST(200) RF_INTERNAL_MSG(0) op=0 rc=11

00:00:25 RF_PROG_ACTIVE_FAST(200) Redundancy Mode RF(30) op=0 rc=11

00:00:25 RF_PROG_ACTIVE_FAST(200) GALIOS_CONFIG_SYNC(28) op=0 rc=11

00:00:25 RF_PROG_ACTIVE_FAST(200) RF_LAST_CLIENT(65000) op=0 rc=11

00:00:25 *my state = ACTIVE-DRAIN(10) peer state = DISABLED(1)

00:00:25 RF_PROG_ACTIVE_DRAIN(201) RF_INTERNAL_MSG(0) op=0 rc=11

00:00:25 RF_PROG_ACTIVE_DRAIN(201) Redundancy Mode RF(30) op=0 rc=11

00:00:25 RF_PROG_ACTIVE_DRAIN(201) GALIOS_CONFIG_SYNC(28) op=0 rc=11

00:00:25 RF_PROG_ACTIVE_DRAIN(201) RF_LAST_CLIENT(65000) op=0 rc=11

00:01:34 RF_PROG_PLATFORM_SYNC(300) RF_INTERNAL_MSG(0) op=0 rc=11

00:01:34 RF_PROG_PLATFORM_SYNC(300) Redundancy Mode RF(30) op=0 rc=11

00:01:34 RF_PROG_PLATFORM_SYNC(300) GALIOS_CONFIG_SYNC(28) op=0 rc=0

00:01:34 RF_EVENT_CLIENT_PROGRESSION(503) GALIOS_CONFIG_SYNC(28) op=1 rc=0

00:01:36 RF_EVENT_PEER_PROG_DONE(506) GALIOS_CONFIG_SYNC(28) op=300

00:01:36 RF_PROG_PLATFORM_SYNC(300) RF_LAST_CLIENT(65000) op=0 rc=0

00:01:36 RF_EVENT_CLIENT_PROGRESSION(503) RF_LAST_CLIENT(65000) op=1 rc=0

00:01:36 RF_EVENT_PEER_PROG_DONE(506) RF_LAST_CLIENT(65000) op=300

00:01:38 *my state = ACTIVE(13) *peer state = STANDBY COLD(4)

Switch#

The following example shows how to display information about the redundancy facility state:

Switch# show redundancy states

my state = 13 -ACTIVE

peer state = 8 -STANDBY HOT

Mode = Duplex

Unit = Primary

Unit ID = 2

Redundancy Mode (Operational) = Stateful Switchover

Redundancy Mode (Configured) = Stateful Switchover

Split Mode = Disabled

Manual Swact = Enabled

Communications = Up

client count = 21

client_notification_TMR = 240000 milliseconds

keep_alive TMR = 9000 milliseconds

keep_alive count = 0

keep_alive threshold = 18

RF debug mask = 0x0

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

redundancy

Enters the redundancy configuration mode.

redundancy force-switchover

Forces a switchover from the active to the standby supervisor engine.

show redundancy config-sync

To display an ISSU config-sync failure or the ignored mismatched command list (MCL), if any, use the show redundancy config-sync command.

show redundancy config-sync {failures | ignored} {bem | mcl| prc}

show redundancy config-sync ignored failures mcl

Syntax Description

failures

Displays MCL entries or BEM/PRC failures.

ignored

Displays the ignored MCL entries.

bem

(Deprecated)

mcl

Displays commands that exist in the active supervisor engine’s running configuration, but are not supported by the image on the standby supervisor engine.

prc

Displays a Parser Return Code (PRC) failure and forces the system to operate in RPR mode provided there is a mismatch in the return code for a command execution at the active and standby supervisor engine.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

User EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SGA

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(44)SG

Updated command syntax from issu config-sync to redundancy config-sync.

Usage Guidelines

When two versions of Cisco IOS images are involved, the command sets supported by two images might differ. If any of those mismatched commands are executed on the active supervisor engine, the standby supervisor engine might not recognize those commands. This causes a config mismatch condition. If the syntax check for the command fails on standby supervisor engine during a bulk sync, the command is moved into the MCL and the standby supervisor engine is reset. To display all the mismatched commands, use the show redundancy config-sync failures mcl command.

To clean the MCL, follow these steps:

Step 1 Remove all mismatched commands from the active supervisor engines’ running configuration.

Step 2 Revalidate the MCL with a modified running configuration using the

redundancy config-sync validate mismatched-commands command.

Step 3 Reload the standby supervisor engine.

Alternatively, you could ignore the MCL by following these steps:

Step 1 Enter the redundancy config-sync ignore mismatched-commands command.

Step 2 Reload the standby supervisor engine; the system transitions to SSO mode.

Note If you ignore the mismatched commands, the out-of-sync configuration at the active supervisor engine and the standby supervisor engine still exists.

Step 3 You can verify the ignored MCL with the show redundancy config-sync ignored mcl command.

Each command sets a return code in the action function that implements the command. This return code indicates whether or not the command successfully executes. The active supervisor engine maintains the PRC after executing a command. The standby supervisor engine executes the command and sends PRC back to the active supervisor engine. PRC failure occurs if these two PRCs do not match. If a PRC error occurs at the standby supervisor engine either during bulk sync or LBL sync, the standby supervisor engine is reset. To display all PRC failures, use the show redundancy config-sync failures prc command.

To display best effort method (BEM) errors, use the show redundancy config-sync failures bem command.

Examples

Switch# show redundancy config-sync failures mcl

Mismatched Command List

-----------------------

The list is Empty

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the ISSU PRC failures:

Switch# show redundancy config-sync failures prc

PRC Failed Command List

-------------------------------

interface FastEthernet3/2

! <submode> "interface"

- channel-protocol pagp

! </submode> "interface"

Related Commands

Command

Description

redundancy config-sync mismatched-commands

Moves the active supervisor engine into the Mismatched Command List (MCL) and resets the standby supervisor engine.

show running-config

To display the module status and configuration, use the show running-config command.

show running-config [module slot]

Syntax Description

module slot

(Optional) Specifies the module slot number; valid values are from 1 to 6.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

In some cases, you might see a difference in the duplex mode displayed when you enter the show interfaces command and the show running-config command. If you do see a difference, the duplex mode displayed in the show interfaces command is the actual duplex mode that the interface is running. The show interfaces command shows the operating mode for an interface, while the show running-config command shows the configured mode for an interface.

The show running-config command output for an interface may display a duplex mode configuration but no configuration for the speed. When no speed is displayed in the output, it indicates that the interface speed is configured to be auto and that the duplex mode shown becomes the operational setting once the speed is configured to something other than auto. With this configuration, it is possible that the operating duplex mode for that interface does not match the duplex mode shown with the show running-config command.

Examples

Switch# show running-config int fastethernet 6/1

Building configuration...

Current configuration:133 bytes

!

interface FastEthernet6/1

switchport voice vlan 2

no snmp trap link-status

spanning-tree portfast

channel-group 1 mode on

end

Switch#

show shell functions

Use the show shell functions command to display configurations for all builtin shell functions.

show shell functions

Syntax Description

No keywords

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Priviledged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command only displays the contents of builtin shell functions. To display the contents of user created functions, use the show shell triggers command.

Examples

This example illustrates how to display configurations included for all the shell functions:

Switch# show shell functions

Related Commands

Command

Description

shell trigger

Creates a user defined trigger.

show shell triggers

Configures a user defined trigger.

show shell triggers

Use the show shell triggers command to display detail for all supported builtin and user created triggers.

show shell triggers

Syntax Description

No keywords

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command displays builtin triggers and user defined triggers (with their mapped functions).

Examples

This example illustrates how to display detail for all supported triggers:

Switch# show shell triggers

Trigger Id: testGroup

Trigger description: testGroup

Trigger environment:

Trigger mapping function:

Related Commands

Command

Description

shell trigger

Creates a user defined trigger.

show shell functions

Displays configurations included for all the builtin functions including user created and built-in functions.

show slavebootflash:

To display information about the standby bootflash file system, use the show slavebootflash: command.

show slavebootflash: [all | chips | filesys]

Syntax Description

all

(Optional) Displays all possible Flash information.

chips

(Optional) Displays Flash chip information.

filesys

(Optional) Displays file system information.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Switch# show slavebootflash:

-# - ED --type-- --crc--- -seek-- nlen -length- -----date/time------ name

1 .. image 8C5A393A 237E3C 14 2063804 Aug 23 1999 16:18:45 c4-boot-mz

2 .. image D86EE0AD 957CE8 9 7470636 Sep 20 1999 13:48:49 rp.halley

Switch>

The following example shows how to display all bootflash information:

Switch# show slavebootflash: all

-# - ED --type-- --crc--- -seek-- nlen -length- -----date/time------ name

1 .. image 8C5A393A 237E3C 14 2063804 Aug 23 1999 16:18:45 c4-boot-

mz

2 .. image D86EE0AD 957CE8 9 7470636 Sep 20 1999 13:48:49 rp.halley

6456088 bytes available (9534696 bytes used)

-------- F I L E S Y S T E M S T A T U S --------

Device Number = 0

DEVICE INFO BLOCK: bootflash

Magic Number = 6887635 File System Vers = 10000 (1.0)

Length = 1000000 Sector Size = 40000

Programming Algorithm = 39 Erased State = FFFFFFFF

File System Offset = 40000 Length = F40000

MONLIB Offset = 100 Length = C628

Bad Sector Map Offset = 3FFF8 Length = 8

Squeeze Log Offset = F80000 Length = 40000

Squeeze Buffer Offset = FC0000 Length = 40000

Num Spare Sectors = 0

Spares:

STATUS INFO:

Writable

NO File Open for Write

Complete Stats

No Unrecovered Errors

No Squeeze in progress

USAGE INFO:

Bytes Used = 917CE8 Bytes Available = 628318

Bad Sectors = 0 Spared Sectors = 0

OK Files = 2 Bytes = 917BE8

Deleted Files = 0 Bytes = 0

Files w/Errors = 0 Bytes = 0

Switch>

show slaveslot0:

To display information about the file system on the standby supervisor engine, use the show slaveslot0: command.

show slot0: [all | chips | filesys]

Syntax Description

all

(Optional) Displays all flash information including the output from the show slot0: chips and show slot0: filesys commands.

chips

(Optional) Displays flash chip register information.

filesys

(Optional) Displays file system status information.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Switch# show slaveslot0: chips

******** Intel Series 2+ Status/Register Dump ********

ATTRIBUTE MEMORY REGISTERS:

Config Option Reg (4000): 2

Config Status Reg (4002): 0

Card Status Reg (4100): 1

Write Protect Reg (4104): 4

Voltage Cntrl Reg (410C): 0

Rdy/Busy Mode Reg (4140): 2

COMMON MEMORY REGISTERS: Bank 0

Intelligent ID Code : 8989A0A0

Compatible Status Reg: 8080

Global Status Reg: B0B0

Block Status Regs:

0 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

8 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

16 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

24 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

COMMON MEMORY REGISTERS: Bank 1

Intelligent ID Code : 8989A0A0

Compatible Status Reg: 8080

Global Status Reg: B0B0

Block Status Regs:

0 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

8 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

16 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

24 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

COMMON MEMORY REGISTERS: Bank 2

Intelligent ID Code : 8989A0A0

Compatible Status Reg: 8080

Global Status Reg: B0B0

Block Status Regs:

0 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

8 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

16 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

24 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

COMMON MEMORY REGISTERS: Bank 3

Intelligent ID Code : 8989A0A0

Compatible Status Reg: 8080

Global Status Reg: B0B0

Block Status Regs:

0 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

8 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

16 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

24 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

COMMON MEMORY REGISTERS: Bank 4

Intelligent ID Code : FFFFFFFF

IID Not Intel -- assuming bank not populated

The following example shows how to display file system information:

Switch# show slaveslot0: filesys

-------- F I L E S Y S T E M S T A T U S --------

Device Number = 0

DEVICE INFO BLOCK: slot0

Magic Number = 6887635 File System Vers = 10000 (1.0)

Length = 1000000 Sector Size = 20000

Programming Algorithm = 4 Erased State = FFFFFFFF

File System Offset = 20000 Length = FA0000

MONLIB Offset = 100 Length = F568

Bad Sector Map Offset = 1FFF0 Length = 10

Squeeze Log Offset = FC0000 Length = 20000

Squeeze Buffer Offset = FE0000 Length = 20000

Num Spare Sectors = 0

Spares:

STATUS INFO:

Writable

NO File Open for Write

Complete Stats

No Unrecovered Errors

No Squeeze in progress

USAGE INFO:

Bytes Used = 9F365C Bytes Available = 5AC9A4

Bad Sectors = 0 Spared Sectors = 0

OK Files = 1 Bytes = 9F35DC

Deleted Files = 0 Bytes = 0

Files w/Errors = 0 Bytes =

Switch>

show slot0:

To display information about the slot0: file system, use the show slot0: command.

show slot0: [all | chips | filesys]

Syntax Description

all

(Optional) Displays all flash information including the output from the show slot0: chips and show slot0: filesys commands.

chips

(Optional) Displays flash chip register information.

filesys

(Optional) Displays file system status information.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Switch# show slot0: chips

******** Intel Series 2+ Status/Register Dump ********

ATTRIBUTE MEMORY REGISTERS:

Config Option Reg (4000): 2

Config Status Reg (4002): 0

Card Status Reg (4100): 1

Write Protect Reg (4104): 4

Voltage Cntrl Reg (410C): 0

Rdy/Busy Mode Reg (4140): 2

COMMON MEMORY REGISTERS: Bank 0

Intelligent ID Code : 8989A0A0

Compatible Status Reg: 8080

Global Status Reg: B0B0

Block Status Regs:

0 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

8 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

16 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

24 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

COMMON MEMORY REGISTERS: Bank 1

Intelligent ID Code : 8989A0A0

Compatible Status Reg: 8080

Global Status Reg: B0B0

Block Status Regs:

0 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

8 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

16 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

24 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

COMMON MEMORY REGISTERS: Bank 2

Intelligent ID Code : 8989A0A0

Compatible Status Reg: 8080

Global Status Reg: B0B0

Block Status Regs:

0 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

8 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

16 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

24 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

COMMON MEMORY REGISTERS: Bank 3

Intelligent ID Code : 8989A0A0

Compatible Status Reg: 8080

Global Status Reg: B0B0

Block Status Regs:

0 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

8 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

16 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

24 : B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0 B0B0

COMMON MEMORY REGISTERS: Bank 4

Intelligent ID Code : FFFFFFFF

IID Not Intel -- assuming bank not populated

Switch>

The following example shows how to display file system information:

Switch# show slot0: filesys

-------- F I L E S Y S T E M S T A T U S --------

Device Number = 0

DEVICE INFO BLOCK: slot0

Magic Number = 6887635 File System Vers = 10000 (1.0)

Length = 1000000 Sector Size = 20000

Programming Algorithm = 4 Erased State = FFFFFFFF

File System Offset = 20000 Length = FA0000

MONLIB Offset = 100 Length = F568

Bad Sector Map Offset = 1FFF0 Length = 10

Squeeze Log Offset = FC0000 Length = 20000

Squeeze Buffer Offset = FE0000 Length = 20000

Num Spare Sectors = 0

Spares:

STATUS INFO:

Writable

NO File Open for Write

Complete Stats

No Unrecovered Errors

No Squeeze in progress

USAGE INFO:

Bytes Used = 9F365C Bytes Available = 5AC9A4

Bad Sectors = 0 Spared Sectors = 0

OK Files = 1 Bytes = 9F35DC

Deleted Files = 0 Bytes = 0

Files w/Errors = 0 Bytes = 0

Switch>

show spanning-tree

To display spanning-tree state information, use the show spanning-tree command.

show spanning-tree [bridge_group | active | backbonefast | bridge [id] | inconsistentports | interface type | root | summary [total] | uplinkfast | vlan vlan_id | pathcost method | detail]

Syntax Description

bridge_group

(Optional) Specifies the bridge group number; valid values are from 1 to 255.

active

(Optional) Displays the spanning-tree information on active interfaces only.

backbonefast

(Optional) Displays the spanning-tree BackboneFast status.

bridge

(Optional) Displays the bridge status and configuration information.

id

(Optional) Name of the bridge.

inconsistentports

(Optional) Displays the root inconsistency state.

interface type

(Optional) Specifies the interface type and number; valid values are fastethernet, gigabitethernet, tengigabitethernet, port-channel (1 to 64), and vlan (1 to 4094).

root

(Optional) Displays the root bridge status and configuration.

summary

(Optional) Specifies a summary of port states.

total

(Optional) Displays the total lines of the spanning-tree state section.

uplinkfast

(Optional) Displays the spanning-tree UplinkFast status.

vlan vlan_id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN ID; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

pathcost method

(Optional) Displays the default path cost calculation method used.

detail

(Optional) Displays a summary of interface information.

Command Default

Interface information summary is displayed.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended addressing was added.

12.2(25)EW

Added support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Examples

Switch# show spanning-tree backbonefast

BackboneFast is enabled

BackboneFast statistics

-----------------------

Number of transition via backboneFast (all VLANs) : 0

Number of inferior BPDUs received (all VLANs) : 0

Number of RLQ request PDUs received (all VLANs) : 0

Number of RLQ response PDUs received (all VLANs) : 0

Number of RLQ request PDUs sent (all VLANs) : 0

Number of RLQ response PDUs sent (all VLANs) : 0

Switch#

The following example shows how to display spanning-tree information for the bridge:

Switch# show spanning-tree bridge

VLAN1

Bridge ID Priority 32768

Address 0050.3e8d.6401

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

VLAN2

Bridge ID Priority 32768

Address 0050.3e8d.6402

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

VLAN3

Bridge ID Priority 32768

Address 0050.3e8d.6403

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

Switch#

The following example shows how to display a summary of interface information:

Switch# show spanning-tree

VLAN1

Spanning tree enabled protocol ieee

Root ID Priority 32768

Address 0030.94fc.0a00

This bridge is the root

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

Bridge ID Priority 32768

Address 0030.94fc.0a00

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

Aging Time 300

Interface Designated

Name Port ID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID Port ID

------------------- ------- --- ------ --- ---- -------------------- -------

FastEthernet6/15 129.79 128 19 FWD 0 32768 0030.94fc.0a00 129.79

VLAN2

Spanning tree enabled protocol ieee

Root ID Priority 32768

Address 0030.94fc.0a01

This bridge is the root

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

Bridge ID Priority 32768

Address 0030.94fc.0a01

Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec

Aging Time 300

Interface Designated

Name Port ID Prio Cost Sts Cost Bridge ID Port ID

------------------- ------- --- ------ --- ---- -------------------- -------

FastEthernet6/16 129.80 128 19 FWD 0 32768 0030.94fc.0a01 129.80

Switch#

The following example shows how to display spanning-tree information for Fast Ethernet interface 5/9:

Switch# show spanning-tree interface fastethernet5/9

Interface Fa0/10 (port 23) in Spanning tree 1 is ROOT-INCONSISTENT

Port path cost 100, Port priority 128

Designated root has priority 8192, address 0090.0c71.a400

Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 00e0.1e9f.8940

Designated port is 23, path cost 115

Timers: message age 0, forward delay 0, hold 0

BPDU: sent 0, received 0

The port is in the portfast mode

Switch#

The following example shows how to display spanning-tree information for GigabitEthernet 3/13:

Switch# show spanning-tree interface gigabitethernet3/13 detail

Port 269 (GigabitEthernet3/13) of VLAN0002 is forwarding

Port path cost 4, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.269.

Designated root has priority 32770, address 0002.172c.f400

Designated bridge has priority 32770, address 0002.172c.f400

Designated port id is 128.269, designated path cost 0

Timers: message age 0, forward delay 0, hold 0

Number of transitions to forwarding state: 1

Link type is point-to-point by default

Loop guard is enabled by default on the port

The port is in the portfast network mode by default

BPDU: sent 2183, received 0

The following example shows how to display spanning-tree information for a specific VLAN:

Switch# show spanning-tree vlan 1

VLAN1 is executing the ieee compatible Spanning Tree protocol

Bridge Identifier has priority 32768, address 0030.94fc.0a00

Configured hello time 2, max age 20, forward delay 15

We are the root of the spanning tree

Topology change flag not set, detected flag not set

Number of topology changes 5 last change occurred 01:50:47 ago

from FastEthernet6/16

Times: hold 1, topology change 35, notification 2

hello 2, max age 20, forward delay 15

Timers:hello 0, topology change 0, notification 0, aging 300

Port 335 (FastEthernet6/15) of VLAN1 is forwarding

Port path cost 19, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 129.79.

Designated root has priority 32768, address 0030.94fc.0a00

Designated bridge has priority 32768, address 0030.94fc.0a00

Designated port id is 129.79, designated path cost 0

Timers:message age 0, forward delay 0, hold 0

Number of transitions to forwarding state:1

BPDU:sent 6127, received 0

Switch#

The following example shows how to display spanning-tree information for a specific bridge group:

Switch# show spanning-tree vlan 1

UplinkFast is disabled

BackboneFast is disabled

Switch#

The following example shows how to display a summary of port states:

Switch# show spanning-tree summary

Switch is in rapid-pvst mode

Root bridge for: VLAN0199-VLAN0200, VLAN0128

EtherChannel misconfig guard is enabled

Extended system ID is enabled

Portfast Default is network

Portfast Edge BPDU Guard Default is disabled

Portfast Edge BPDU Filter Default is disabled

Loopguard Default is enabled

PVST Simulation Default is enabled but inactive in rapid-pvst mode

Bridge Assurance is enabled

UplinkFast is disabled

BackboneFast is disabled

Configured Pathcost method used is short

Name Blocking Listening Learning Forwarding STP Active

---------------------- -------- --------- -------- ---------- ----------

VLAN0199 0 0 0 5 5

VLAN0200 0 0 0 4 4

VLAN0128 0 0 0 4 4

---------------------- -------- --------- -------- ---------- ----------

3 vlans 0 0 0 13 13

The following example shows how to display the total lines of the spanning-tree state section:

Switch# show spanning-tree summary totals

Root bridge for:VLAN1, VLAN2.

PortFast BPDU Guard is disabled

EtherChannel misconfiguration guard is enabled

UplinkFast is disabled

BackboneFast is disabled

Default pathcost method used is short

Name Blocking Listening Learning Forwarding STP Active

-------------------- -------- --------- -------- ---------- ----------

2 VLANs 0 0 0 2 2

Switch#

The following example shows how to determine whether any ports are in root inconsistent state:

Switch# show spanning-tree inconsistentports

Name Interface Inconsistency

-------------------- -------------------- ------------------

VLAN1 FastEthernet3/1 Root Inconsistent

Number of inconsistent ports (segments) in the system:1

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

spanning-tree backbonefast

Enables BackboneFast on a spanning-tree VLAN.

spanning-tree bridge assurance

Enables Bridge Assurance

spanning-tree cost

Calculates the path cost of STP on an interface.

spanning-tree guard

Enables root guard.

spanning-tree pathcost method

Sets the path cost calculation method.

spanning-tree portfast

Enables PortFast by default on all access ports.

spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration mode)

Enables PortFast mode.

spanning-tree port-priority

Prioritizes an interface when two bridges compete for position as the root bridge.

spanning-tree uplinkfast

Enables the UplinkFast feature.

spanning-tree vlan

Configures STP on a per-VLAN basis.

show spanning-tree mst [configuration]

show spanning-tree mst [instance-id] [detail]

show spanning-tree mst [instance-id] interface interface [detail]

Syntax Description

configuration

(Optional) Displays region configuration information.

instance-id

(Optional) Instance identification number; valid values are from 0 to 15.

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed MST protocol information.

interface interface

(Optional) Interface type and number; valid values for type are fastethernet, gigabitethernet, tengigabitethernet, port-channel, and vlan. See the “Usage Guidelines” section for more information.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EW

Added support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

Usage Guidelines

Examples

Switch# show spanning-tree mst 3 detail

# # # # # # MST03 vlans mapped: 3,3000-3999

Bridge address 0002.172c.f400 priority 32771 (32768 sysid 3)

Root this switch for MST03

GigabitEthernet1/1 of MST03 is boundary forwarding

Port info port id 128.1 priority 128

cost 20000

Designated root address 0002.172c.f400 priority 32771

cost 0

Designated bridge address 0002.172c.f400 priority 32771 port

id 128.1

Timers: message expires in 0 sec, forward delay 0, forward transitions 1

Bpdus (MRecords) sent 4, received 0

FastEthernet4/2 of MST03 is backup blocking

Port info port id 128.194 priority 128 cost

200000

Designated root address 0002.172c.f400 priority 32771

cost 0

Designated bridge address 0002.172c.f400 priority 32771 port id

128.193

Timers: message expires in 2 sec, forward delay 0, forward transitions 1

Bpdus (MRecords) sent 3, received 252

Switch#

The following example shows how to display MST information for a specific interface:

Switch# show spanning-tree mst 0 interface fastethernet4/1 detail

Edge port: no (trunk) port guard : none

(default)

Link type: point-to-point (point-to-point) bpdu filter: disable

(default)

Boundary : internal bpdu guard : disable

(default)

FastEthernet4/1 of MST00 is designated forwarding

Vlans mapped to MST00 1-2,4-2999,4000-4094

Port info port id 128.193 priority 128 cost

200000

Designated root address 0050.3e66.d000 priority 8193

cost 20004

Designated ist master address 0002.172c.f400 priority 49152

cost 0

Designated bridge address 0002.172c.f400 priority 49152 port id

128.193

Timers: message expires in 0 sec, forward delay 0, forward transitions 1

Bpdus sent 492, received 3

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

spanning-tree mst

Sets the path cost and port-priority parameters for any MST instance.

spanning-tree mst forward-time

Sets the forward delay timer for all the instances.

spanning-tree mst hello-time

Sets the hello-time delay timer for all the instances.

spanning-tree mst max-hops

Specifies the number of possible hops in the region before a BPDU is discarded.

spanning-tree mst root

Designates the primary root.

show storm-control

To display the broadcast storm control settings on the switch or on the specified interface, use the

show storm-control command.

show storm-control [interface-id | broadcast]

Supervisor Engine 6-E and Catalyst 4900M chassis

show storm-control [interface-id | broadcast | multicast]

Syntax Description

interface-id

(Optional) Specifies the interface ID for the physical port.

broadcast

(Optional) Displays the broadcast storm threshold setting.

multicast

(Optional) Displays the multicast storm threshold setting.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EW

Added support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

12.2(40)SG

Added support for the Supervisor Engine 6-E and Catalyst 4900M chassis.

Usage Guidelines

When you enter an interface ID, the storm control thresholds are displayed for the specified interface.

If you do not enter an interface ID, the settings are displayed for the broadcast traffic type for all ports on the switch.

Examples

Switch# show storm-control multicast //Supervisor Engine 6-E

Interface Filter State Broadcast Multicast Level

--------- ------------- --------- --------- -----

Fa6/2 Blocking Enabled Enabled 61%

Switch#

This is an example of output from the show storm-control command on a Supervisor Engine 6-E when no keywords are entered:

Switch# show storm-control

Interface Filter State Broadcast Multicast Level

--------- ------------- --------- --------- -----

Fa6/1 Blocking Enabled Disabled 81%

Fa6/2 Blocking Enabled Enabled 61%

Switch#

This is an example of output from the show storm-control command for a specified interface:

Switch# show storm-control fastethernet2/17

Interface Filter State Level Current

--------- ------------- ------- -------

Fa2/17 Forwarding 50.00% 0.00%

Switch#

This is an example of output from the show storm-control command for a specified interface on a Supervisor Engine 6-E:

Switch# show storm-control interface fastethernet6/1

Interface Filter State Broadcast Multicast Level

--------- ------------- ------- ------- -----

Fa6/1 Blocking Enabled Disabled 81%

Switch#

Table 2-41 describes the fields in the show storm-control display.

Table 2-41 show storm-control Field Descriptions

Field

Description

Interface

Displays the ID of the interface.

Filter State

Displays the status of the filter:

- Blocking—Storm control is enabled, and a storm has occurred.

- Forwarding—Storm control is enabled, and no storms have occurred.

- Inactive—Storm control is disabled.

Level

Displays the threshold level set on the interface for broadcast traffic.

Current

Displays the bandwidth utilization of broadcast traffic as a percentage of total available bandwidth. This field is valid only when storm control is enabled.

Note N/A is displayed for interfaces that do storm control in the hardware.

Related Commands

Command

Description

storm-control

Enables broadcast storm control on a port and specifies what to do when a storm occurs on a port.

show interfaces counters

Displays the traffic on the physical interface.

show running-config

Displays the running configuration of a switch.

show switch virtual (virtual switch)

To display configuration and status information for a virtual switching system (VSS), use the show switch virtual command in EXEC mode.

show switch virtual [dual-active {pagp | fast-hello | summary} | link [counters | detail | port-channel | ports] | redundancy | role | slot-map]

Syntax Description

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed virtual switch information.

detail-active

(Optional) Displays virtual switch dual-active information.

pagp

Specifies a summary of dual-active PAgP information

fast-hello

Specifies a summary of dual-active fast-hello information,

summary

Specifies a summary of dual-active configuration information,

link

(Optional) Displays the virtual switch link information.

counters

(Optional) Displays VSL counter information

port-channel

(Optional) Displays VSL port channel information.

ports

(Optional) Displays VSL port information.

redundancy

(Optional) Displays the VSS redundancy status.

role

(Optional) Displays the VSS role information.

slot-map

(Optional) Displays the VSS slot map table.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Release IOS XE 3.5.0E and IOS 15.2(1)SG

This command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to display configuration and status information for a VSS.

The show switch virtual link detail command displays the output of the show switch virtual link commands and the show vslp lmp internal commands. In the output, the entry "show int" is displayed for all the VSL members.

The show switch virtual dual-active pagp command displays dual-active trust mode status.

Examples

The following example shows how to display configuration and status information for the VSS:

- In virtual switch mode without skipping config-register:

Router# show switch virtual

Switch mode : Virtual Switch

Virtual switch domain number : 1

Local switch number : 2

Local switch operational role: Virtual Switch Active

Peer switch number : 1

Peer switch operational role : Virtual Switch Standby

Router#

- In virtual switch mode with skipping config-register but not yet rebooted:

Router# show switch virtual

Switch mode : Virtual Switch

Virtual switch domain number : 1

Local switch number : 2

Local switch operational role: Virtual Switch Active

Peer switch number : 1

Peer switch operational role : Virtual Switch Standby

Warning: Config-register set or will be set to skip configuration 0x2142 in the next reload.

Change config-register; otherwise, switch will be boot in Standalone mode with some default config.

Router#

- In standalone mode without skipping config-register:

Router# show switch virtual

Switch Mode : Standalone

Not in Virtual Switch mode due to:

Domain ID is not configured

Router#

- In standalone mode with skipping config-register:

Router# show switch virtual

Switch Mode : Standalone

Not in Virtual Switch mode due to:

Domain ID is not configured

Warning: config-register is set to skip parse 0x2142 in RP or SP

Use [show boot] on RP/SP to verify.

Router#

The following example shows how to display the virtual switch priority for local and peer switches:

Router# show switch virtual

Switch mode : Virtual Switch

Virtual switch domain number : 100

Local switch number : 1

Local switch operational role: Virtual Switch Active

Peer switch number : 2

Peer switch operational role : Virtual Switch Standby

Router#

The following example shows how to display the virtual switch link information:

Router# show switch virtual link

VSL Status : UP

VSL Uptime : 4 hours, 26 minutes

VSL SCP Ping : Pass (or Fail) OK (or Not OK)

VSL ICC (Ping) : Pass (or Fail)

VSL Control Link : Te1/3/1

Router#

The following example shows how to display the virtual switch link counter information:

Router# show switch virtual link counters

Port InOctets InUcastPkts InMcastPkts InBcastPkts

Po10 66340451 190415 15637 112069

Te1/3/1 66981250 194528 15770 112072

Po20 42116619 92926 16406 128593

Te2/2/1 42117401 92932 16406 128593

Port OutOctets OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts

Po10 39030669 112680 105482 0

Te1/3/1 42133252 129182 108824 0

Po20 66948309 112069 210227 0

Te2/2/1 66957613 112070 210233 0

Port Align-Err FCS-Err Xmit-Err Rcv-Err UnderSize OutDiscards

Te1/3/1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Po10 0 0 0 0 0 0

Te1/3/1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Po20 0 0 0 0 0 0

Te2/3/1 0 0 0 0 0 0

Router#

The following example shows how to display the virtual switch link port-channel information:

Router# show switch virtual link port-channel

VSL Port Channel Information

Flags: D - down P - bundled in port-channel

I - stand-alone s - suspended

H - Hot-standby (LACP only)

R - Layer3 S - Layer2

U - in use N - not in use, no aggregation

f - failed to allocate aggregator

M - not in use, no aggregation due to minimum links not met

m - not in use, port not aggregated due to minimum links not met

u - unsuitable for bundling

w - waiting to be aggregated

The following example shows how to display the virtual switch link port information:

Router# show switch virtual link port

VSL Link Info : Configured: 3 Operational: 1

Peer Peer Peer

Interface State MAC Switch Interface

-----------------------------------------------------------------------

Gi1/3/1 link_down - - -

Gi1/5/4 operational 0013.5fcb.1480 2 Gi1/6/4

Gi1/5/5 link_down - - -

Last operational Current packet Last Diag Time since

Interface Failure state State Result Last Diag

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Gi1/1/1 No failure Hello bidir Never ran 7M:51S

Gi1/1/2 No failure No failure Never ran 7M:51S

Hello Tx (T4) ms Hello Rx (T5*) ms

Interface State Cfg Cur Rem Cfg Cur Rem

----------------------------------------------------------------------

Te1/1/1 operational 500 500 404 5000 5000 4916

Te1/1/2 link_down 500 - - 500000 - -

Te1/3/3 link_down 500 - - 500000 - -

Te1/3/4 operational 500 500 404 500000 500000 499916

*T5 = min_rx * multiplier

Router#

The following example shows how to display redundancy status information for each switch in the virtual switch:

Router# show switch virtual redundancy

My Switch Id = 1

Peer Switch Id = 2

Last switchover reason = user forced

Configured Redundancy Mode = sso

Operating Redundancy Mode = sso

Switch 1 Slot 5 Processor Information :

-----------------------------------------------

Current Software state = ACTIVE

Uptime in current state = 9 hours, 32 minutes

Image Version = Cisco IOS Software, s72033_rp Software (s72033_rp-ADVENTERPRISEK9_WAN_DBG-VM), Version 12.2(SIERRA_INTEG_090405) INTERIM SOFTWARE

Synced to V122_32_8_11, 12.2(32.8.11)SR on rainier, Weekly 12.2(32.8.11)SX261

Technical Support: http://www.cisco.com/techsupport

Copyright (c) 1986-2009 by Cisco Systems, Inc.

Compiled Mon 06-Apr-09 02:54 by kchristi

BOOT = disk0:mz_good_image,12;

CONFIG_FILE =

BOOTLDR =

Configuration register = 0x2

Fabric State = ACTIVE

Control Plane State = ACTIVE

Switch 1 Slot 6 Processor Information :

-----------------------------------------------

Current Software state = RPR-Warm

Uptime in current state = 4 days, 17 hours, 36 minutes

Image Version =

BOOT = disk0:mz-rbh,12;

CONFIG_FILE =

BOOTLDR =

Configuration register = 0x2

Fabric State = RPR-Warm

Control Plane State = RPR-Warm

Switch 2 Slot 5 Processor Information :

-----------------------------------------------

Current Software state = STANDBY HOT (switchover target)

Uptime in current state = 9 hours, 24 minutes

Image Version = Cisco IOS Software, s72033_rp Software (s72033_rp-ADVENTERPRISEK9_WAN_DBG-VM), Version 12.2(SIERRA_INTEG_090405) INTERIM SOFTWARE

Synced to V122_32_8_11, 12.2(32.8.11)SR on rainier, Weekly 12.2(32.8.11)SX261

Technical Support: http://www.cisco.com/techsupport

Copyright (c) 1986-2009 by Cisco Systems, Inc.

Compiled Mon 06-Apr-09 02:54 by kchristi

BOOT = disk0:mz_good_image,12;

CONFIG_FILE =

BOOTLDR =

Configuration register = 0x2

Fabric State = ACTIVE

Control Plane State = STANDBY

Switch 2 Slot 6 Processor Information :

-----------------------------------------------

Current Software state = RPR-Warm

Uptime in current state = 4 days, 17 hours, 36 minutes

Image Version =

BOOT = disk0:mz-rbh,12;

CONFIG_FILE =

BOOTLDR =

Configuration register = 0x2

Fabric State = RPR-Warm

Control Plane State = RPR-Warm

Router#

The following example shows how to display role and configuration and status information for each switch in the virtual switch:

Router# show switch virtual role

Switch Switch Status Preempt Priority Role Session ID

Number Local Remote

--------------------------------------------------------------------

Local 1 UP TRUE 200 ACTIVE 0 0

Remote 2 UP FALSE 100 STANDBY 9272 271

In dual-active recovery mode: No

Valid flag can be moved to detail

SID

The following example shows how to display the virtual switch slot map table:

Router# show switch virtual slot-map

Virtual Slot to Remote Switch/Physical Slot Mapping Table:

Virtual Remote / Physical Module

Slot No Switch No Slot No Uptime

---------+-----------+----------+----------

17 1 1 03:04:51

18 1 2 03:04:50

19 1 3 03:00:25

20 1 4 03:04:53

21 1 5 03:04:59

22 1 0 -

23 1 0 -

24 1 0 -

25 1 0 -

26 1 0 -

27 1 0 -

28 1 0 -

29 1 0 -

30 1 0 -

31 1 0 -

32 1 0 -

33 2 1 02:59:25

34 2 2 02:59:23

35 2 3 02:59:23

36 2 4 02:59:27

37 2 5 03:03:17

38 1 0 -

39 1 0 -

40 1 0 -

41 1 0 -

42 1 0 -

43 1 0 -

44 1 0 -

45 1 0 -

46 1 0 -

47 1 0 -

48 1 0 -

49 1 0 -

Router#

The following example shows how to display virtual switch priority for local and peer switches:

Router# show switch virtual

Switch mode : Virtual Switch

Virtual switch domain number : 100

Local switch number : 1

Local switch operational role: Virtual Switch Active

Peer switch number : 2

Peer switch operational role : Virtual Switch Standby

Router#

Related Commands

Command

Description

dual-active detection (virtual switch)

Enables and configures dual-active detection.

switch (virtual switch)

Configures the VSS domain number and enter the virtual switch domain configuration submode.

show system mtu

To display the global MTU setting, use the show system mtu command.

show system mtu

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the global MTU setting:

Switch# show system mtu

Global Ethernet MTU is 1550 bytes.

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

system mtu

Sets the maximum Layer 2 or Layer 3 payload size.

show tech-support

To display troubleshooting information for TAC, use the show tech-support command.

show tech-support [bridging | cef | ipmulticast | isis | password [page] | page]

Syntax Description

bridging

(Optional) Specifies bridging-related information.

cef

(Optional) Specifies CEF-related information.

ipmulticast

(Optional) Specifies IP multicast-related information.

isis

(Optional) Specifies CLNS and ISIS-related information.

password

(Optional) Includes passwords and other security information in the output.

page

(Optional) Displays one page of information at a time in the output.

Command Default

The defaults are as follows:

- Outputs are displayed without page breaks.

- Passwords and other security information are removed from the output.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Output from the show tech-support command may be terminated in midstream with the key combination Ctrl+Alt+6. The command output is buffered so that the command terminates when output of the current subcommand running under this command completes.

Press the Return key to display the next line of output, or press the Space bar to display the next page of information. If you do not enter the page keyword, the output scrolls. It does not stop for page breaks.

If you enter the password keyword, password encryption is enabled, but only the encrypted form appears in the output.

If you do not enter the password keyword, the passwords and other security-sensitive information in the output are replaced in the output with the word “removed.”

The show tech-support commands are a compilation of several show commands and the output can be quite lengthy. For a sample display of the output of the show tech-support command, see the individual show command listed.

If you enter the show tech-support command without arguments, the output displays the equivalent of these show commands:

- show version

- show running-config

- show stacks

- show interfaces

- show controllers

- show process memory

- show process cpu

- show buffers

- show logging

- show module

- show power

- show environment

- show interfaces switchport

- show interfaces trunk

- show vlan

If you enter the ipmulticast keyword, the output displays the equivalent of these show commands:

- show ip pim interface

- show ip pim interface count

- show ip pim neighbor

- show ip pim rp

- show ip igmp groups

- show ip igmp interface

- show ip mroute count

- show ip mroute

- show ip mcache

- show ip dvmrp route

Examples

For a sample display of the show tech-support command output, see the commands listed in the “Usage Guidelines” section for more information.

Related Commands

See the “Usage Guidelines ” section.

show udld

To display the administrative and operational UDLD status, use the show udld priviledged EXEC command.

show udld interface-id | neighbors | fast-hello {interface id}

Syntax Description

interface id

Specifies the administrative and operational UDLD status for a specific interface.

neighbors

Specifies the UDLD neighbor summary.

fast-hello

Specifies Fast UDLD neighbor summary and interface specific status.

interface-id

Specifies the name of the interface.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(25)EW

Added support for the 10-Gigabit Ethernet interface.

12.2(54)SG

Added support for show udld fast-hello and show udld fast-hello interface id.

Usage Guidelines

If you do not enter an interface_id value, the administrative and operational UDLD status for all interfaces is displayed.

Examples

To verify status for a particular link as reported by UDLD, enter the following command:

Switch# show udld g1/34

Interface Gi1/34

---

Port enable administrative configuration setting: Enabled / in aggressive mode

Port enable operational state: Enabled / in aggressive mode

Current bidirectional state: Bidirectional

Current operational state: Advertisement - Single neighbor detected

Message interval: 15000 ms

Time out interval: 5000 ms

Port fast-hello configuration setting: Disabled

Port fast-hello interval: 0 ms

Port fast-hello operational state: Disabled

Neighbor fast-hello configuration setting: Disabled

Neighbor fast-hello interval: Unknown

Entry 1

---

Expiration time: 43300 ms

Cache Device index: 1

Current neighbor state: Bidirectional

Device ID: FOX10430380

Port ID: Gi1/34

Neighbor echo 1 device: FOX104303NL

Neighbor echo 1 port: Gi1/34

TLV Message interval: 15 sec

No TLV fast-hello interval

TLV Time out interval: 5

TLV CDP Device name: Switch

To verify link status as reported by UDLD, enter the following command:

Switch# show udld neighbors

Port Device Name Device ID Port ID Neighbor State

---- ----------- --------- ------- --------------

Gi1/33 FOX10430380 1 Gi1/33 Bidirectional

Gi1/34 FOX10430380 1 Gi1/34 Bidirectional

To verify Fast UDLD configuration, enter the following command:

Switch# show udld fast-hello

Total ports on which fast hello can be configured: 16

Total ports with fast hello configured: 3

Total ports with fast hello operational: 3

Total ports with fast hello non-operational: 0

Port-ID Hello Neighbor-Hello Neighbor-Device Neighbor-Port Status

------- ----- -------------- --------------- ------------- ------

Gi1/45 200 200 FOX104303NL Gi1/45 Operational

Gi1/46 200 200 FOX104303NL Gi1/46 Operational

Gi1/47 200 200 FOX104303NL Gi1/47 Operational

To verify status for a particular link as reported by Fast UDLD, enter the following command:

Switch# show udld fast-hello g1/33

Interface Gi1/33

---

Port enable administrative configuration setting: Enabled / in aggressive mode

Port enable operational state: Enabled / in aggressive mode

Current bidirectional state: Bidirectional

Current operational state: Advertisement - Single neighbor detected

Message interval: 200 ms

Time out interval: 5000 ms

Port fast-hello configuration setting: Enabled

Port fast-hello interval: 200 ms

Port fast-hello operational state: Enabled

Neighbor fast-hello configuration setting: Enabled

Neighbor fast-hello interval: 200 ms

Entry 1

---

Expiration time: 500 ms

Cache Device index: 1

Current neighbor state: Bidirectional

Device ID: FOX10430380

Port ID: Gi1/33

Neighbor echo 1 device: FOX104303NL

Neighbor echo 1 port: Gi1/33

TLV Message interval: 15

TLV fast-hello interval: 200 ms

TLV Time out interval: 5

TLV CDP Device name: Switch

Related Commands

Command

Description

udld (global configuration mode)

Enables aggressive or normal mode in the UDLD protocol and sets the configurable message timer time.

udld (interface configuration mode)

Enables UDLD on an individual interface or prevents a fiber interface from being enabled by the udld (global configuration mode) command.

show vlan

To display VLAN information, use the show vlan command.

show vlan [brief | id vlan_id | name name]

show vlan private-vlan [type]

Syntax Description

brief

(Optional) Displays only a single line for each VLAN, naming the VLAN, status, and ports.

id vlan_id

(Optional) Displays information about a single VLAN identified by VLAN ID number; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

name name

(Optional) Displays information about a single VLAN identified by VLAN name; valid values are an ASCII string from 1 to 32 characters.

private-vlan

Displays private VLAN information.

type

(Optional) Private VLAN type.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Added support for extended VLAN addresses.

Examples

Switch# show vlan brief

VLAN Name Status Ports

---- -------------------------------- --------- -------------------------------

1 default active Fa5/9

2 VLAN0002 active Fa5/9

3 VLAN0003 active Fa5/9

4 VLAN0004 active Fa5/9

5 VLAN0005 active Fa5/9

10 VLAN0010 active Fa5/9

.

.

.

999 VLAN0999 active Fa5/9

1002 fddi-default active Fa5/9

1003 trcrf-default active Fa5/9

1004 fddinet-default active Fa5/9

1005 trbrf-default active Fa5/9

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the VLAN parameters for VLAN 3 only:

Switch# show vlan id 3

VLAN Name Status Ports

---- -------------------------------- --------- -------------------------------

3 VLAN0003 active Fa5/9

VLAN Type SAID MTU Parent RingNo BridgeNo Stp BrdgMode Trans1 Trans2

---- ----- ---------- ----- ------ ------ -------- ---- -------- ------ ------

3 enet 100003 1500 - - - - - 303 0

Switch#

Table 2-42 describes the fields in the show vlan command output.

Table 2-42 show vlan Command Output Fields

Field

Description

VLAN

VLAN number.

Name

Name, if configured, of the VLAN.

Status

Status of the VLAN (active or suspend).

Ports

Ports that belong to the VLAN.

Type

Media type of the VLAN.

SAID

Security Association Identifier value for the VLAN.

MTU

Maximum transmission unit size for the VLAN.

Parent

Parent VLAN, if one exists.

RingNo

Ring number for the VLAN, if applicable.

BrdgNo

Bridge number for the VLAN, if applicable.

Stp

Spanning Tree Protocol type used on the VLAN.

The following example shows how to verify that the primary VLAN and secondary VLANs are correctly associated with each other and the same association also exists on the PVLAN port:

Switch# show vlan private-vlan

Primary Secondary Type Ports

------- --------- ----------------- ------------------------------------------

10 100 community Fa3/1, Fa3/2

The following example shows how to remove the VLAN association:

Switch(config)# vlan 10

Switch(config-vlan)# private-vlan association remove 100

Switch(config-vlan)# end

Switch# show vlan private

Primary Secondary Type Ports

------- --------- ----------------- ------------------------------------------

10 primary

100 community

This example show how to verify PVLAN configuration on the interface:

Switch# show interface f3/2 status

Port Name Status Vlan Duplex Speed Type

Fa3/2 connected pvlan seco a-full a-100 10/100BaseTX

Switch# show interface f3/1 status

Port Name Status Vlan Duplex Speed Type

Fa3/1 connected pvlan prom a-full a-100 10/100BaseTX

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

vlan (VLAN Database mode)

Configures a specific VLAN.

vlan database

Enters VLAN configuration mode.

vtp (global configuration mode)

Modifies the name of a VTP configuration storage file.

show vlan access-map [map-name]

Syntax Description

map-name

(Optional) Name of the VLAN access map.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

This command shows how to display the contents of a VLAN access map:

Switch# show vlan access-map mordred

Vlan access-map "mordred" 1

match: ip address 13

action: forward capture

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

vlan access-map

show vlan counters

To display the software-cached counter values, use the show vlan counters command.

show vlan [id vlanid] counters

Syntax Description

id vlanid

(Optional) Displays the software-cached counter values for a specific VLAN.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

Usage Guidelines

If you enter the show vlan counters command without specifying the VLAN ID, the software-cached counter values for all VLANs are displayed.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the software-cached counter values for a specific VLAN:

Switch# show vlan counters

* Multicast counters include broadcast packets

Vlan Id : 1

L2 Unicast Packets : 0

L2 Unicast Octets : 0

L3 Input Unicast Packets : 0

L3 Input Unicast Octets : 0

L3 Output Unicast Packets : 0

L3 Output Unicast Octets : 0

L3 Output Multicast Packets : 0

L3 Output Multicast Octets : 0

L3 Input Multicast Packets : 0

L3 Input Multicast Octets : 0

L2 Multicast Packets : 1

L2 Multicast Octets : 94

Switch>

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear vlan counters

Clears the software-cached counter values to start from zero again for a specified VLAN or all existing VLANs.

show vlan dot1q tag native

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

User EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show vlan dot1q tag native command:

Switch# show vlan dot1q tag native

dot1q native vlan tagging is disabled globally

Per Port Native Vlan Tagging State

----------------------------------

Port Operational Native VLAN

Mode Tagging State

------------------------------------

f3/2 trunk enabled

f3/16 PVLAN trunk disabled

f3/16 trunk enabled

Related Commands

Command

Description

switchport mode

Sets the interface type.

vlan (global configuration) (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Enters global VLAN configuration mode.

vlan (VLAN configuration) (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Enters VLAN configuration mode.

show vlan group [group-name group-name]

Syntax Description

group-name group-name

(Optional) Displays the VLANs mapped to the specified VLAN group.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was modified to support user distribution on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The show vlan group command displays the existing VLAN groups and lists the VLANs and VLAN ranges that are members of each VLAN group. If you use the group-name keyword, you display only the members of the VLAN group specified by the group-name argument.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the members of a specified VLAN group:

Switch# show vlan group group-name ganymede

Group Name Vlans Mapped

---------------- -------------------

ganymede 7-9

Related Commands

Command

Description

vlan group

Creates or modifies a VLAN group.

show vlan internal usage

To display information about the internal VLAN allocation, use the show vlan internal usage command.

show vlan [id vlan-id] internal usage

Syntax Description

id vlan-id

(Optional) Displays internal VLAN allocation information for the specified VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Switch# show vlan id 1030 internal usage

VLAN Usage

---- --------------------

1030 GigabitEthernet1/2

Related Commands

Command

Description

vlan internal allocation policy

Configures the internal VLAN allocation scheme.

show vlan mapping

Use the show vlan mapping privileged EXEC command to display information about VLAN mapping on trunk ports.

show vlan mapping [interface interface-id] [ | {begin | exclude | include} expression]

Syntax Description

interface interface-id

(Optional) Displays VLAN mapping information for the specified interface.

| begin

(Optional) Displays begins with the line that matches the expression.

| exclude

(Optional) Displays excludes lines that match the expression.

| include

(Optional) Displays includes lines that match the specified expression.

expression

Specifies an expression in the output to use as a reference point.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Expressions are case sensitive. For example, if you enter | exclude output, the lines that contain output are not displayed, but the lines that contain Output are displayed.

Examples

This is a sample output from the show vlan mapping command:

Switch# show vlan mapping

Interface Fa0/5:

VLANs on wire Translated VLAN Operation

------------------ --------------- --------------

default QinQ 1 selective QinQ

Interface Fa0/2:

VLANs on wire Translated VLAN Operation

------------------ --------------- --------------

2 104 1-to-1 mapping

This is a sample output from the show vlan mapping command for an interface:

Switch# show vlan mapping interface fa0/6

Interface fa0/6:

VLAN on wire Translated VLAN Operation

1 11 1-to-1 mapping

12,16-18 100 selective QinQ

* 101 default QinQ

Related Commands

Command

Description

switchport vlan mapping

Configures VLAN mapping on an interface.

show vlan mtu

To display the minimum and maximum transmission unit (MTU) sizes of each VLAN, use the show vlan mtu command.

show vlan mtu

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The MTU_Mismatch column in the command output indicates whether all the ports in the VLAN have the same MTU. When “yes” is displayed in the MTU_Mismatch column, it means that the VLAN has a port with different MTUs, and packets might be dropped that are switched from a port with a larger MTU to a port with a smaller MTU. If the VLAN does not have an SVI, the hyphen (-) symbol is displayed in the SVI_MTU column.

For a VLAN, if the MTU-Mismatch column displays “yes,” the names of the port with the MinMTU and the port with the MaxMTU are displayed. For a VLAN, if the SVI_MTU is bigger than the MinMTU, “TooBig” is displayed after the SVI_MTU.

Examples

This is an example of output from the show vlan mtu command:

Switch# show vlan mtu

VLAN SVI_MTU MinMTU(port) MaxMTU(port) MTU_Mismatch

---- ------------- ------------- ------------ ------------

1 1500 1500 1500 No

Switch>

Related Commands

Command

Description

mtu

Enables jumbo frames on an interface by adjusting the maximum size of a packet or maximum transmission unit (MTU).

show vlan private-vlan [type]

Syntax Description

type

(Optional) Displays the private VLAN type; valid types are isolated, primary, community, twoway-community nonoperational, and normal.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(20)EW

Support for community VLAN was added.

15.1.0 SG

Support for PVLAN modes over EtherChannel. Modes include: private-vlan host, private-vlan promiscuous, private-vlan trunk secondary, and private-vlan trunk promiscuous.

Usage Guidelines

When the show vlan private-vlan type command displays a VLAN type as normal, it indicates that a regular VLAN has been used in the private VLAN configuration. When normal is displayed, this indicates that two VLANs have been associated before the type was set, and the private VLAN is not operational. This information is useful for debugging purposes.

Examples

The following example shows how to display information about all currently configured private VLANs:

Switch# show vlan private-vlan

Primary Secondary Type Ports

------- --------- ----------------- ------------------------------------------

2 301 community Fa5/3, Fa5/25

2 302 community

2 303 community Fa5/3, Po63

10 community

100 101 isolated

150 151 non-operational

202 community

303 twoway-community

401 402 non-operational

Switch#

Note A blank Primary value indicates that no association exists.

Table 2-43 show vlan private-vlan Command Output Fields

Field

Description

Primary

Number of the primary VLAN.

Secondary

Number of the secondary VLAN.

Secondary-Type

Secondary VLAN type is isolated or community.

Ports

Indicates the ports within a VLAN.

Type

Type of VLAN; possible values are primary, isolated, community, nonoperational, or normal.

Related Commands

Command

Description

private-vlan

Configures private VLANs and the association between a private VLAN and a secondary VLAN.

private-vlan mapping

show vlan remote-span

To display a list of Remote SPAN (RSPAN) VLANs, use the show vlan remote-span command.

show vlan remote-span

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

Examples

The following example shows how to display a list of RSPAN VLANs:

Router# show vlan remote-span

Remote SPAN VLANs

------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2,20

Related Commands

Command

Description

remote-span

Converts a VLAN into an RSPAN VLAN.

vlan (VLAN Database mode)

Configures a specific VLAN.

show vmps [statistics]

Syntax Description

statistics

(Optional) Displays the client-side statistics.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Switch# show vmps statistics

VMPS Client Statistics

----------------------

VQP Queries: 0

VQP Responses: 0

VMPS Changes: 0

VQP Shutdowns: 0

VQP Denied: 0

VQP Wrong Domain: 0

VQP Wrong Version: 0

VQP Insufficient Resource: 0

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

vmps reconfirm (privileged EXEC)

Sends VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) queries to reconfirm all the dynamic VLAN assignments with the VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS).

show vslp (virtual switch)

To display Virtual Switch Link Protocol (VSLP) instance information, use the show vslp command in EXEC mode.

show vslp {lmp | rrp [type]} | {instances | lmp [type] | packet [counters] | rrp [type]}

Syntax Description

lmp

Specifies the Link Maintenance Protocol (LMP) information.

rrp

Specifies the Role Resolution Protocol (RRP) information.

type

Specifies the type of information; see the "Usage Guidelines" section for valid values.

instances

Displays the VSLP instance mappings.

packet

Displays the VSLP packet information.

counters

(Optional) Displays the VSLP packet counter information.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The valid values for the type argument are as follows:

- counters—Displays counter information.

- detail—Displays detailed information.

- fsm—Displays Finite State Machine (FSM) information.

- neighbors—Displays neighbor information (supported with the lmp keyword only).

- status—Displays status information.

- summary—Displays a summary of information.

- timer—Displays Tx and Rx hello timer values.

The timers already displayed in the show vslp lmp timers output are shown in the output of the show vslp lmp summary command.

The output of the show vslp rrp detail command includes the information from the following commands:

- show vslp rrp summary

- show vslp rrp counters

- show vslp rrp fsm

Examples

The following example shows how to display a summary of LMP information for a specific VSLP instance.

Router# show vslp 2 lmp summary

LMP summary

Link info: Configured: 2 Operational: 0

Peer Peer Peer Peer Timer(s) running

Port Flag State Flag MAC Swtch Port (Time remaining)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

4/1 v link_down - - - -

4/2 v link_down - - - -

Router#

The following example shows how to displays the VSLP instance mappings.

Router# show vslp instances

VSLP instance mappings:

Instance Num Name Switch Num Flag

----------------------------------------------------------------------

2 VSL 2 0x00000001

Router#

The following example shows how to display LMP neighbor information:

Router# show vslp 2 lmp neighbors

LMP neighbors

Peer Group info: # Groups: 0

Router#

The following example shows how to display a summary of LMP information:

Router# show vslp lmp summary

Instance #1:

LMP summary

Link info: Configured: 3 Operational: 1

Peer Peer Peer Peer Timer(s) running

Interface Flag State Flag MAC Switch Interface (Time remaining)

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Gi1/3/1 v link_down - - - -

Gi1/5/4 vf operational vf 0013.5fcb.1480 2 Gi1/6/4 T4(240ms) T5(2.22s)

Gi1/5/5 v link_down - - - -

Flags: V - valid f -> B - bidirectional

The following examples shows how to display the LMP Tx and Rx hello timer values:

Router# show vslp lmp timer

Instance #1:

LMP hello timer

Hello Tx (T4) ms Hello Rx (T5*) ms

Interface State Cfg Cur Rem Cfg Cur Rem

-------------------------------------------------------------------------

Gi1/9/1 link_down 1000 - - 500000 - -

Gi1/9/3 link_down 1000 - - 500000 - -

Gi1/9/5 link_down 1000 - - 500000 - -

Router#

The following example shows how to display VSLP packet information:

Router# show vslp packet

VSLP packet counters

Transmitted:

total = 1543

error = 0

err_cksum = 0

eobc = 0

ibc = 0

eobc[LMP] = 0

eobc[RRP] = 0

eobc[PING] = 0

Received:

total = 1564

error = 0

err_cksum = 0

eobc = 1564

ibc = 0

total[LMP] = 0

total[RRP] = 0

total[PING] = 0

eobc[LMP] = 1559

eobc[RRP] = 5

eobc[PING] = 0

Router#

The following example shows how to display VSLP packet counter information:

Router# show vslp packet counters

VSLP packet counters

Transmitted:

total = 28738

error = 0

err_cksum = 0

eobc = 28738

eobc[LMP] = 28701

eobc[RRP] = 17

eobc[PING] = 20

ibc = 0

ibc[LMP] = 0

ibc[RRP] = 0

ibc[PING] = 0

Received:

total = 28590

error = 0

err_cksum = 0

eobc = 28590

eobc[LMP] = 28552

eobc[RRP] = 18

eobc[PING] = 20

ibc = 0

ibc[LMP] = 0

ibc[RRP] = 0

ibc[PING] = 0

Router#

The following example shows how to display a summary of RRP information:

Router# show vslp rrp summary

RRP information for Instance 1

-------------------------------

Valid Flags Peer Preferred Reserved

Count Peer Peer

-----------------------------------------------

TRUE V 1 1 1

Switch Peer Switch Status Preempt Priority Role Local Remote

Group Number SID SID

--------------------------------------------------------------------

Local 0 1 UP TRUE 200 ACTIVE 0 0

Remote 1 2 UP FALSE 100 STANDBY 9272 271

Flags: V - valid

show vtp

To display VTP statistics and domain information, use the show vtp command.

show vtp {counters | status}

Syntax Description

counters

Specifies the VTP statistics.

status

Specifies the VTP domain status.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

Switch# show vtp status

VTP Version : 2

Configuration Revision : 250

Maximum VLANs supported locally : 1005

Number of existing VLANs : 33

VTP Operating Mode : Server

VTP Domain Name : Lab_Network

VTP Pruning Mode : Enabled

VTP V2 Mode : Enabled

VTP Traps Generation : Disabled

MD5 digest : 0xE6 0xF8 0x3E 0xDD 0xA4 0xF5 0xC2 0x0E

Configuration last modified by 172.20.52.18 at 9-22-99 11:18:20

Local updater ID is 172.20.52.18 on interface Vl1 (lowest numbered VLAN interfac

e found)

Switch#

The following example shows how to display only those lines in the show vtp output that contain the word Summary:

Switch# show vtp counters | include Summary

Summary advertisements received : 1

Summary advertisements transmitted : 32

Trunk Join Transmitted Join Received Summary advts received from

Switch#

Table 2-44 describes the fields in the show vtp command output.

Table 2-44 show vtp Command Output Fields

Field

Description

Summary advertisements received

Total number of summary advertisements received.

Subset advertisements received

Total number of subset advertisements received.

Request advertisements received

Total number of request advertisements received.

Summary advertisements transmitted

Total number of summary advertisements transmitted.

Subset advertisements transmitted

Total number of subset advertisements transmitted.

Request advertisements transmitted

Total number of request advertisements transmitted.

Number of config revision errors

Number of config revision errors.

Number of config digest errors

Number of config revision digest errors.

Number of V1 summary errors

Number of V1 summary errors.

Trunk

Trunk port participating in VTP pruning.

Join Transmitted

Number of VTP-Pruning Joins transmitted.

Join Received

Number of VTP-Pruning Joins received.

Summary advts received from non-pruning-capable device

Number of Summary advertisements received from nonpruning-capable devices.

Number of existing VLANs

Total number of VLANs in the domain.

Configuration Revision

VTP revision number used to exchange VLAN information.

Maximum VLANs supported locally

Maximum number of VLANs allowed on the device.

Number of existing VLANs

Number of existing VLANs.

VTP Operating Mode

Indicates whether VTP is enabled or disabled.

VTP Domain Name

Name of the VTP domain.

VTP Pruning Mode

Indicates whether VTP pruning is enabled or disabled.

VTP V2 Mode

Indicates the VTP V2 mode as server, client, or transparent.

VTP Traps Generation

Indicates whether VTP trap generation mode is enabled or disabled.

MD5 digest

Checksum values.

Related Commands

Command

Description

vtp (global configuration mode)

Modifies the name of a VTP configuration storage file.

vtp client

Places a device in VTP client mode.

vtp domain

Configures the administrative domain name for a device.

vtp password

Creates a VTP domain password.

vtp pruning

Enables pruning in the VLAN database.

vtp server

Places the device in VTP server mode.

vtp transparent

Places device in VTP transparent mode.

vtp v2-mode

snmp ifindex clear

To clear any previously configured snmp ifindex commands that were entered for a specific interface, use the snmp ifindex clear command.

snmp ifindex clear

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

Usage Guidelines

Interface index persistence occurs when ifIndex values in the interface MIB (IF-MIB) persist across reboots and allow for consistent identification of specific interfaces using SNMP.

Use the snmp ifindex clear command on a specific interface when you want that interface to use the global configuration setting for ifIndex persistence. This command clears any ifIndex configuration commands previously entered for that specific interface.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable ifIndex persistence for all interfaces:

Router(config)# snmp-server ifindex persist

The following example shows how to disable IfIndex persistence for FastEthernet 1/1 only:

Router(config)# interface fastethernet 1/1

Router(config-if)# no snmp ifindex persist

Router(config-if)# exit

The following example shows how to clear the ifIndex configuration from the FastEthernet 1/1 configuration:

Router(config)# interface fastethernet 1/1

Router(config-if)# snmp ifindex clear

Router(config-if)# exit

As a result of this sequence of commands, ifIndex persistence is enabled for all interfaces that are specified by the snmp-server ifindex persist global configuration command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

snmp ifindex persist

Enables ifIndex values in the Interfaces MIB (IF-MIB) that persist across reboots (ifIndex persistence) on a specific interface.

snmp-server ifindex persist

Enables ifIndex values that will remain constant across reboots for use by SNMP.

snmp ifindex persist

To enable ifIndex values in the Interfaces MIB (IF-MIB) that persist across reboots (ifIndex persistence) on a specific interface, use the snmp ifindex persist command. To disable ifIndex persistence only on a specific interface, use the no form of this command.

snmp ifindex persist

no snmp ifindex persist

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

Usage Guidelines

Interface index persistence occurs when ifIndex values in the IF-MIB persist across reboots and allow for consistent identification of specific interfaces using SNMP.

The snmp ifindex persist interface configuration command enables and disables ifIndex persistence for individual entries (that correspond to individual interfaces) in the ifIndex table of the IF-MIB.

The snmp-server ifindex persist global configuration command enables and disables ifIndex persistence for all interfaces on the routing device. This action applies only to interfaces that have ifDescr and ifIndex entries in the ifIndex table of the IF-MIB.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable ifIndex persistence for interface FastEthernet 1/1 only:

Router(config)# interface fastethernet 1/1

Router(config-if)# snmp ifindex persist

Router(config-if)# exit

The following example shows how to enable ifIndex persistence for all interfaces, and then disable ifIndex persistence for interface FastEthernet 1/1 only:

Router(config)# snmp-server ifindex persist

Router(config)# interface fastethernet 1/1

Router(config-if)# no snmp ifindex persist

Router(config-if)# exit

Related Commands

Command

Description

snmp ifindex clear

Clears any previously configured snmp ifindex commands that were entered for a specific interface.

snmp ifindex persist

Enables ifIndex values in the Interfaces MIB (IF-MIB) that persist across reboots (ifIndex persistence) on a specific interface.

snmp-server enable traps

To enable SNMP notifications (traps or informs), use the snmp-server enable traps command. To disable all SNMP notifications, use the no form of this command.

snmp-server enable traps [flash [insertion | removal] | fru-ctrl | port-security [trap-rate trap-rate] | removal | stpx | vlancreate | vlandelete | vtp] [mac-notification [change | move | threshold]

no snmp-server enable traps [flash [insertion | removal] | fru-ctrl | port-security [trap-rate trap-rate] | removal | stpx | vlancreate | vlandelete | vtp] [mac-notification]

Syntax Description

flash

(Optional) Controls the SNMP FLASH trap notifications.

insertion

(Optional) Controls the SNMP flash insertion trap notifications.

removal

(Optional) Controls the SNMP flash removal trap notifications.

fru-ctrl

(Optional) Controls the SNMP entity FRU control trap notifications.

port-security

(Optional) Controls the SNMP trap generation.

trap-rate trap-rate

(Optional) Sets the number of traps per second.

stpx

(Optional) Controls all the traps defined in CISCO-STP-EXTENSIONS-MIB notifications.

vlancreate

(Optional) Controls the SNMP VLAN created trap notifications.

vlandelete

(Optional) Controls the SNMP VLAN deleted trap notifications.

vtp

(Optional) Controls the SNMP VTP trap notifications.

mac-notification

(Optional) Controls the SNMP MAC trap notifications.

change

(Optional) Controls the SNMP MAC change trap notifications.

move

(Optional) Controls the SNMP MAC move trap notifications.

threshold

(Optional) Controls the SNMP MAC threshold trap notifications.

Command Default

SNMP notifications are disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(31)SG

Support for MAC notification was added.

Usage Guidelines

If you enter this command without an option, all notification types controlled by this command are enabled.

SNMP notifications can be sent as traps or inform requests. This command enables both traps and inform requests for the specified notification types. To specify whether the notifications should be sent as traps or informs, use the snmp-server host [traps | informs] command.

The snmp-server enable traps command is used in conjunction with the snmp-server host command. Use the snmp-server host command to specify which host or hosts receive SNMP notifications. To send notifications, you must configure at least one snmp-server host command.

This list of the MIBs is used for the traps:

- flash— Controls SNMP FLASH traps from the CISCO-FLASH-MIB.

– insertion—Controls the SNMP Flash insertion trap notifications.

– removal—Controls the SNMP Flash removal trap notifications.

- fru-ctrl— Controls the FRU control traps from the CISCO-ENTITY-FRU-CONTROL-MIB.

- port-security— Controls the port-security traps from the CISCO-PORT-SECURITY-MIB.

- stpx— Controls all the traps from the CISCO-STP-EXTENSIONS-MIB.

- vlancreate— Controls SNMP VLAN created trap notifications.

- vlandelete— Controls SNMP VLAN deleted trap notifications.

- vtp— Controls the VTP traps from the CISCO-VTP-MIB.

Examples

The following example shows how to send all traps to the host is specified by the name myhost.cisco.com using the community string defined as public:

Switch(config)# snmp-server enable traps

Switch(config)# snmp-server host myhost.cisco.com public

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to enable the MAC address change MIB notification:

Switch(config)# snmp-server enable traps mac-notification change

Switch(config)#

SNMP traps can be enabled with a rate-limit to detect port-security violations due to restrict mode. The following example shows how to enable traps for port-security with a rate of 5 traps per second:

Switch(config)# snmp-server enable traps port-security trap-rate 5

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear mac-address-table dynamic

Clears the dynamic address entries from the Layer 2 MAC address table.

mac-address-table notification

Enables MAC address notification on a switch.

show mac-address-table notification

Displays the MAC address table notification status and history.

snmp-server enable traps

Enables SNMP notifications.

snmp trap mac-notification change

Enables SNMP MAC address notifications.

snmp-server ifindex persist

To globally enable ifIndex values that will remain constant across reboots for use by SNMP, use the snmp-server ifindex persist command. To globally disable inIndex persistence, use the no form of this command.

snmp-server ifindex persist

no snmp-server ifindex persist

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

Usage Guidelines

Interface index persistence occurs when ifIndex values in the IF-MIB persist across reboots and allow for consistent identification of specific interfaces using SNMP.

The snmp-server ifindex persist global configuration command does not override the interface-specific configuration. To override the interface-specific configuration of ifIndex persistence, enter the no snmp ifindex persist and snmp ifindex clear interface configuration commands.

Entering the no snmp-server ifindex persist global configuration command enables and disables ifIndex persistence for all interfaces on the routing device using ifDescr and ifIndex entries in the ifIndex table of the IF-MIB.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable ifIndex persistence for all interfaces:

Router(config)# snmp-server ifindex persist

Related Commands

Command

Description

snmp ifindex clear

Clears any previously configured snmp ifindex commands that were entered for a specific interface.

snmp ifindex persist

Enables ifIndex values in the Interfaces MIB (IF-MIB) that persist across reboots (ifIndex persistence) on a specific interface.

snmp-server ifindex persist compress

To configure the format of the ifIndex table in a compressed format, use the snmp-server ifindex persist compress command. To place the table in a decompressed format, use the no form of this command.

snmp-server ifindex persist compress

no snmp-server ifindex persist compress

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Disabled

Command Modes

Global configuration mode.

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switches.

Usage Guidelines

This command is hidden because the ifIndex table is always in a compressed format on those supervisor engines.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable compression of the ifIndex table:

Router(config)# snmp-server ifindex persist compress

The following example shows how to disable compression of the ifIndex table:

Router(config)# no snmp-server ifindex persist compress

Related Commands

Command

Description

snmp ifindex clear

Clears any previously configured snmp ifindex commands that were entered for a specific interface.

snmp ifindex persist

Enables ifIndex values in the Interfaces MIB (IF-MIB) that persist across reboots (ifIndex persistence) on a specific interface.

snmp-server ifindex persist

Enables ifIndex values that will remain constant across reboots for use by SNMP.

snmp trap mac-notification change

To enable SNMP MAC address notifications, use the snmp trap mac-notification command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

snmp trap mac-notification change {added | removed}

no snmp trap mac-notification change {added | removed}

Syntax Description

added

Specifies enabling the MAC address notification trap whenever a MAC address is added to an interface.

removed

Specifies enabling the MAC address notification trap whenever a MAC address is removed from an interface.

Command Default

MAC address addition and removal are disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(31)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Even though you enable the change notification trap for a specific interface by using the snmp trap mac-notification change command, the trap is generated only when you enable the snmp-server enable traps mac-notification change and the mac address-table notification change global configuration commands.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the MAC notification trap when a MAC address is added to a port:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# snmp trap mac-notification change added

You can verify your settings by entering the show mac address-table notification change interface privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

clear mac-address-table

Clears the address entries from the Layer 2 MAC address table.

mac-address-table notification

Enables MAC address notification on a switch.

show mac-address-table notification

Displays the MAC address table notification status and history.

snmp-server enable traps

Enables SNMP notifications.

source (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is only supported on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To specify a source Layer 3 interface of the NetFlow-lite collector, use the source command. To delete a source address, use the no form of this command.

source source-address

no source source-address

Syntax Description

source-address

Specifies a source Layer 3 interface for a NetFlow-lite exporter.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

One of the mandatory parameters for a minimally configured exporter along with the destination address and the UDP destination port of the collector.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify a source Layer 3 interface of the NetFlow-lite collector:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# destination 5.5.5.6

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# source 5.5.5.5

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# transport udp 8188

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# ttl 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# cos 7

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# dscp 32

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# template data timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options sampler-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options interface-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# export-protocol netflow-v9 Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# exit

Switch(config)#

Display the exporter

Switch# show netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Netflow-lite Exporter exporter1:

Network Protocol Configuration:

Destination IP address: 5.5.5.6

Source IP Address: 5.5.5.5

VRF label:

DSCP: 0x20

TTL: 128

COS: 7

Transport Protocol Configuration:

Transport Protocol: UDP

Destination Port: 8188

Source Port: 61670

Export Protocol Configuration:

Export Protocol: netflow-v9

Template data timeout: 60

Options sampler-table timeout: 1800

Options interface-table timeout: 1800

Exporter Statistics:

Packets Exported: 0

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite exporter privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

options timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies an options timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

cos (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

source (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a source Layer 3 interface of the NetFlow-lite collector.

transport udp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector.

ttl (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a ttl value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

destination (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a destination address in netflow-lite submode.

template data timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a template data timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

export-protocol (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies the export protocol for the NetFlow-lite collector.

dscp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

source-interface

To send out call home email messages with specific source interface, use the source-interface command.

source-interface interface name

Syntax Description

interface name

Source interface name for call home email messages

Command Default

None

Command Modes

cfg-call-home

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You should configure no shut on an interface and provide a valid IP address before specifying it as a source interface for Call Home. Doing this avoids a connection failure when sending Call Home email messages. You should only specify a source interface name under Call Home if source-ip-address is not specified. You can only specify either a source interface or source-ip-address in call-home mode, not simultaneously.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure source interface for Call Home. Generally, the interface should already be configured with a valid IP address as usually configured for an interface.

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# source-interface fastEthernet 1/1

Switch(cfg-call-home)# source-ip

Switch(cfg-call-home)# source-ip-address 10.2.4.1

Error:a source-interface has already been configured,please remove source-interface config first if you want to configure source-ip-address

Switch(cfg-call-home)# no source-interface

Switch(cfg-call-home)# source-ip-address 10.2.4.1

Note If Call Home is configured to use http or https as the transport method, you must use ip http client source-interface to configure the source interface for all http clients. You cannot specify a source interface for Call Home http messages only.

Related Commands

Command

Description

source-ip-address

Sends out Call Home email messages with specific source IP address.

source-ip-address

To send out Call Home email messages with specific source IP address, use the source-ip-address command.

source-ip-address ip address

Syntax Description

ip address

Source IP address for Call Home messages.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

cfg-call-home

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

It is best to configure no shut an interface with this valid IP address before specifying it as source-ip-address for Call Home. Doing this avoids a connection failure when sending Call Home email messages. You should only specify source-ip-address under Call Home if source-interface is not specified. You can only specify either source interface or source-ip-address in Call Home mode, not both simultaneously.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure source-ip-address for Call Home:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# source-interface fastEthernet 1/1

Switch(cfg-call-home)# source-ip

Switch(cfg-call-home)# source-ip-address 10.2.4.1

Error:a source-interface has already been configured,please remove source-interface config first if you want to configure source-ip-address

Switch(cfg-call-home)# no source-interface

Switch(cfg-call-home)# source-ip-address 10.2.4.1

Related Commands

Command

Description

source-interface

Sends out call home email messages with specific source interface.

spanning-tree backbonefast

To enable BackboneFast on a spanning-tree VLAN, use the spanning-tree backbonefast command. To disable BackboneFast, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree backbonefast

no spanning-tree backbonefast

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

BackboneFast is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

BackboneFast should be enabled on all Catalyst 4506 series switches to allow the detection of indirect link failures. Enabling BackboneFast starts the spanning-tree reconfiguration more quickly.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable BackboneFast on all VLANs:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree backbonefast

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

spanning-tree cost

Calculates the path cost of STP on an interface.

spanning-tree portfast

Enables PortFast by default on all access ports.

spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration mode)

Enables PortFast mode.

spanning-tree port-priority

Prioritizes an interface when two bridges compete for position as the root bridge.

spanning-tree uplinkfast

Enables the UplinkFast feature.

spanning-tree vlan

Configures STP on a per-VLAN basis.

show spanning-tree

Displays spanning-tree information.

spanning-tree bpdufilter

To enable BPDU filtering on an interface, use the spanning-tree bpdufilter command. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree bpdufilter {enable | disable}

no spanning-tree bpdufilter

Syntax Description

enable

Enables BPDU filtering on this interface.

disable

Disables BPDU filtering on this interface.

Command Default

Disabled

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch..

Usage Guidelines

Caution Use care when entering the spanning-tree bpdufilter enable command. Enabling BPDU filtering on an interface is approximately equivalent to disabling the spanning tree for this interface. It is possible to create bridging loops if this command is not correctly used.

When configuring Layer 2 protocol tunneling on all the service provider edge switches, you must enable spanning-tree BPDU filtering on the 802.1Q tunnel ports by entering the spanning-tree bpdufilter enable command.

BPDU filtering allows you to prevent a port from sending and receiving BPDUs. The configuration is applicable to the whole interface, whether it is trunking or not. This command has three states:

- spanning-tree bpdufilter enable — This state unconditionally enables the BPDU filter feature on the interface.

- spanning-tree bpdufilter disable — This state unconditionally disables the BPDU filter feature on the interface.

- no spanning-tree bpdufilter — This state enables the BPDU filter feature on the interface if the interface is in operational PortFast state and if the spanning-tree portfast edge bpdufilter default command is configured.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the BPDU filter feature on this interface:

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree bpdufilter enable

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree

Displays spanning-tree information.

spanning-tree portfast edge bpdufilter default

Enables the BPDU filtering by default on all PortFast ports.

spanning-tree bpduguard

To enable BPDU guard on an interface, use the spanning-tree bpduguard command. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree bpduguard {enable | disable}

no spanning-tree bpduguard

Syntax Description

enable

Enables BPDU guard on this interface.

disable

Disables BPDU guard on this interface.

Command Default

BPDU guard is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

BPDU guard is a feature that prevents a port from receiving BPDUs. This feature is typically used in a service provider environment where the administrator wants to prevent an access port from participating in the spanning tree. If the port still receives a BPDU, it is put in the ErrDisable state as a protective measure. This command has three states:

- spanning-tree bpduguard enable — This state unconditionally enables BPDU guard on the interface.

- spanning-tree bpduguard disable — This state unconditionally disables BPDU guard on the interface.

- no spanning-tree bpduguard —This state enables BPDU guard on the interface if it is in the operational PortFast state and if the spanning-tree portfast edge bpduguard default command is configured.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable BPDU guard on this interface:

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree bpduguard enable

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree

Displays spanning-tree information.

spanning-tree portfast edge bpdufilter default

Enables the BPDU filtering by default on all PortFast ports.

spanning-tree bridge assurance

To enable Bridge Assurance on your network, use the spanning-tree bridge assurance command. To disable the feature, use the no form of the command.

spanning-tree bridge assurance

no spanning-tree bridge assurance

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Bridge Assurance is enabled

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

3.8.0E and 15.2.(4)E

Support for the command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

This feature protects your network from bridging loops. It monitors the receipt of BPDUs on point-to-point links on all network ports. When a port does not receive BPDUs within the alloted hello time period, the port is put into a blocked state (the same as a port inconsistent state, which stops forwarding of frames). When the port resumes receipt of BPDUs, the port resumes normal spanning tree operations.

By default, Bridge Assurance is enabled on all operational network ports, including alternate and backup ports. If you have configured the spanning-tree portfast network command on all the required ports that are connected Layer 2 switches or bridges, Bridge Assurance is automatically effective on all those network ports.

Only Rapid PVST+ and MST spanning tree protocols support Bridge Assurance. PVST+ does not support Bridge Assurance.

For Bridge Assurance to work properly, it must be supported and configured on both ends of a point-to-point link. If the device on one side of the link has Bridge Assurance enabled and the device on the other side does not, then the connecting port is blocked (a Bridge Assurance inconsistent state). We recommend that you enable Bridge Assurance throughout your network.

To enable Bridge Assurance on a port, BPDU filtering and BPDU Guard must be disabled.

You can enable Bridge Assurance in conjunction with Loop Guard.

You can enable Bridge Assurance in conjunction with Root Guard. The latter is designed to provide a way to enforce the root bridge placement in the network.

Disabling Bridge Assurance causes all configured network ports to behave as normal spanning tree ports.

Use the show spanning-tree summary command to see if the feature is enabled on a port.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable Bridge Assurance on all network ports on the switch, and how to configure a network port:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree bridge assurance

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 5/8

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree portfast network

Switch(config-if)# exit

This example show how to display spanning tree information and verify if Bridge Assurance is enabled. Look for these details in the output:

- Portfast Default—Network

- Bridge Assurance—Enabled

Switch# show spanning-tree summary

Switch is in rapid-pvst mode

Root bridge for: VLAN0199-VLAN0200, VLAN0128

EtherChannel misconfig guard is enabled

Extended system ID is enabled

Portfast Default is network

Portfast Edge BPDU Guard Default is disabled

Portfast Edge BPDU Filter Default is disabled

Loopguard Default is enabled

PVST Simulation Default is enabled but inactive in rapid-pvst mode

Bridge Assurance is enabled

UplinkFast is disabled

BackboneFast is disabled

Configured Pathcost method used is short

Name Blocking Listening Learning Forwarding STP Active

---------------------- -------- --------- -------- ---------- ----------

VLAN0199 0 0 0 5 5

VLAN0200 0 0 0 4 4

VLAN0128 0 0 0 4 4

---------------------- -------- --------- -------- ---------- ----------

3 vlans 0 0 0 13 13

Related Commands

Command

Description

spanning-tree portfast

Globally enables a default state for all ports (whether edge, network, or, normal)

spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration mode)

Configures a port type on an individual interface ((whether edge, network, or, normal).

show spanning-tree

Displays spanning-tree information.

spanning-tree cost

To calculate the path cost of STP on an interface, use the spanning-tree cost command. To revert to the default, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree cost cost

no spanning-tree cost cost

Syntax Description

cost

Path cost; valid values are from 1 to 200,000,000.

Command Default

The default settings are as follows:

- FastEthernet—19

- GigabitEthernet—1

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When you configure the cost, the higher values indicate higher costs. The range applies regardless of the protocol type that is specified. The path cost is calculated, based on the interface bandwidth.

Examples

The following example shows how to access an interface and set a path cost value of 250 for the spanning-tree VLAN that is associated with that interface:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 2/1

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree cost 250

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

spanning-tree portfast

Enables PortFast by default on all access ports.

spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration mode)

Enables PortFast mode.

spanning-tree port-priority

Prioritizes an interface when two bridges compete for position as the root bridge.

spanning-tree uplinkfast

Enables the UplinkFast feature.

spanning-tree vlan

Configures STP on a per-VLAN basis.

show spanning-tree

Displays spanning-tree information.

spanning-tree etherchannel guard misconfig

To display an error message when a loop due to a channel misconfiguration is detected, use the spanning-tree etherchannel guard misconfig command. To disable the feature, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree etherchannel guard misconfig

no spanning-tree etherchannel guard misconfig

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Spanning-tree EtherChannel guard is enabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When an EtherChannel guard misconfiguration is detected, this message is displayed:

%SPANTREE-2-CHNL_MISCFG:Detected loop due to etherchannel misconfig of interface Port-Channel1

To determine which local ports are involved in the misconfiguration, enter the show interfaces status err-disabled command. To verify the EtherChannel configuration on the remote device, enter the show etherchannel summary command on the remote device.

After you correct the configuration, enter the shutdown and the no shutdown commands on the associated port-channel interface.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the EtherChannel guard misconfiguration feature:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree etherchannel guard misconfig

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show etherchannel

Displays EtherChannel information for a channel.

show interfaces status

Displays the interface status or a list of interfaces in error-disabled state.

shutdown (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Disables a port.

spanning-tree extend system-id

To enable the extended system ID feature on a chassis that supports 1024 MAC addresses, use the spanning-tree extend system-id command. To disable the feature, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree extend system-id

no spanning-tree extend system-id

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Enabled on systems that do not provide 1024 MAC addresses.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Releases 12.1(13)E and later support chassis with 64 or 1024 MAC addresses. For chassis with 64 MAC addresses, STP uses the extended system ID plus a MAC address to make the bridge ID unique for each VLAN.

You cannot disable the extended system ID on chassis that support 64 MAC addresses.

Enabling or disabling the extended system ID updates the bridge IDs of all active STP instances, which might change the spanning-tree topology.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable the extended system ID:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree extend system-id

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree

Displays spanning-tree information.

spanning-tree guard

To enable root guard, use the spanning-tree guard command. To disable root guard, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree guard {loop | root | none}

no spanning-tree guard

Syntax Description

loop

Enables the loop guard mode on the interface.

root

Enables root guard mode on the interface.

none

Sets the guard mode to none.

Command Default

Root guard is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Loop guard support was added.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable root guard:

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree guard root

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree

Displays spanning-tree information.

spanning-tree link-type

To configure a link type for a port, use the spanning-tree link-type command. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree link-type {point-to-point | shared}

no spanning-tree link-type

Syntax Description

point-to-point

Specifies that the interface is a point-to-point link.

shared

Specifies that the interface is a shared medium.

Command Default

Link type is derived from the duplex mode.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch..

Usage Guidelines

RSTP+ fast transition works only on point-to-point links between two bridges.

By default, the switch derives the link type of a port from the duplex mode. A full-duplex port is considered as a point-to-point link while a half-duplex configuration is assumed to be on a shared link.

If you designate a port as a shared link, RSTP+ fast transition is forbidden, regardless of the duplex setting.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the port as a shared link:

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree link-type shared

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree

Displays spanning-tree information.

spanning-tree loopguard default

To enable loop guard as the default on all ports of a specific bridge, use the spanning-tree loopguard default command. To disable loop guard, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree loopguard default

no spanning-tree loopguard default

Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or arguments.

Command Default

Loop guard is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch..

Usage Guidelines

Loop guard provides an additional security in the bridge network. Loop guard prevents alternate or root ports from becoming the designated port because of a failure leading to a unidirectional link.

Loop guard operates only on ports that are considered point-to-point by the spanning tree.

Individual loop-guard port configuration overrides this global default.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable loop guard:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree loopguard default

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

spanning-tree guard

Enables root guard.

show spanning-tree

Displays spanning-tree information.

spanning-tree mode

To switch between PVST+ and MST modes, use the spanning-tree mode command. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree mode {pvst | mst | rapid-pvst}

no spanning-tree mode {pvst | mst | rapid-pvst}

Syntax Description

pvst

Specifies PVST+ mode.

mst

Specifies MST mode.

rapid-pvst

Specifies Rapid PVST mode.

Command Default

PVST+ mode

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch..

12.1(19)EW

Support for the rapid-pvst keyword.

Usage Guidelines

Caution Be careful when using the spanning-tree mode command to switch between PVST+ and MST modes. When you enter the command, all spanning-tree instances are stopped for the previous mode and restarted in the new mode. Using this command may cause disruption of user traffic.

Examples

The following example shows how to switch to MST mode:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mode mst

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to return to the default mode (PVST):

Switch(config)# no spanning-tree mode

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST protocol information.

spanning-tree mst

To set the path cost and port-priority parameters for any MST instance (including the CIST with instance ID 0), use the spanning-tree mst command. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree mst instance-id [cost cost] | [port-priority prio]

no spanning-tree mst instance-id {cost | port-priority}

Syntax Description

instance-id

Instance ID number; valid values are from 0 to 15.

cost cost

(Optional) Specifies the path cost for an instance; valid values are from 1 to 200000000.

port-priority prio

(Optional) Specifies the port priority for an instance; valid values are from 0 to 240 in increments of 16.

Command Default

Port priority is 128.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The higher cost cost values indicate higher costs. When entering the cost value, do not include a comma in the entry; for example, enter 1000, not 1,000.

The higher port-priority prio values indicate smaller priorities.

By default, the cost depends on the port speed; faster interface speeds indicate smaller costs. MST always uses long path costs.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the interface path cost:

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree mst 0 cost 17031970

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to set the interface priority:

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree mst 0 port-priority 64

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST protocol information.

spanning-tree port-priority

Enables an interface when two bridges compete for position as the root bridge.

spanning-tree mst configuration

To enter the MST configuration submode, use the spanning-tree mst configuration command. To return to the default MST configuration, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree mst configuration

no spanning-tree mst configuration

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

The default settings are as follows:

- No VLANs are mapped to any MST instance.

- All VLANs are mapped to the CIST instance.

- The region name is an empty string.

- The revision number is 0.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The MST configuration consists of three main parameters:

- Instance VLAN mapping (see the instance command)

- Region name (see the name command)

- Configuration revision number (see the revision command)

By default, the value for the MST configuration is the default value for all its parameters.

The abort and exit commands allow you to exit the MST configuration submode. The difference between the two commands depends on whether you want to save your changes or not.

The exit command commits all the changes before leaving MST configuration submode. If you do not map the secondary VLANs to the same instance as the associated primary VLAN, when you exit the MST configuration submode, a message displays and lists the secondary VLANs that are not mapped to the same instance as the associated primary VLAN. The message is as follows:

These secondary vlans are not mapped to the same instance as their primary:

->3

The abort command leaves the MST configuration submode without committing any changes.

Whenever you change an MST configuration submode parameter, it can cause a loss of connectivity. To reduce the number of service disruptions, when you enter the MST configuration submode, you are changing a copy of the current MST configuration. When you are done editing the configuration, you can apply all the changes at once by using the exit keyword, or you can exit the submode without committing any change to the configuration by using the abort keyword.

In the unlikely event that two users enter a new configuration at exactly at the same time, this message is displayed:

Switch(config-mst)# exit

% MST CFG:Configuration change lost because of concurrent access

Switch(config-mst)#

Examples

The following example shows how to enter the MST configuration submode:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst configuration

Switch(config-mst)#

The following example shows how to reset the MST configuration to the default settings:

Switch(config)# no spanning-tree mst configuration

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

instance

Maps a VLAN or a set of VLANs to an MST instance.

name

Sets the MST region name.

revision

Sets the MST configuration revision number.

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST protocol information.

spanning-tree mst forward-time

To set the forward delay timer for all the instances, use the spanning-tree mst forward-time command. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree mst forward-time seconds

no spanning-tree mst forward-time

Syntax Description

seconds

Number of seconds to set the forward delay timer for all the instances on the Catalyst 4500 series switch; valid values are from 4 to 30 seconds.

Command Default

The forward delay timer is set for 15 seconds.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the forward-delay timer:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst forward-time 20

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST protocol information.

spanning-tree mst hello-time

To set the hello-time delay timer for all the instances, use the spanning-tree mst hello-time command. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree mst hello-time seconds

no spanning-tree mst hello-time

Syntax Description

seconds

Number of seconds to set the hello-time delay timer for all the instances on the Catalyst 4500 series switch; valid values are from 1 to 10 seconds.

Command Default

The hello-time delay timer is set for 2 seconds.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If you do not specify the hello-time value, the value is calculated from the network diameter.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the hello-time delay timer:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst hello-time 3

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST protocol information.

spanning-tree mst max-age

To set the max-age timer for all the instances, use the spanning-tree mst max-age command. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree mst max-age seconds

no spanning-tree mst max-age

Syntax Description

seconds

Number of seconds to set the max-age timer for all the instances on the Catalyst 4500 series switch; valid values are from 6 to 40 seconds.

Command Default

The max-age timer is set for 20 seconds.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the max-age timer:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst max-age 40

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST protocol information.

spanning-tree mst max-hops

To specify the number of possible hops in the region before a BPDU is discarded, use the spanning-tree mst max-hops command. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree mst max-hops hopnumber

no spanning-tree mst max-hops

Syntax Description

hopnumber

Number of possible hops in the region before a BPDU is discarded; valid values are from 1 to 40 hops.

Command Default

Number of hops is 20.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch..

Examples

The following example shows how to set the number of possible hops in the region before a BPDU is discarded to 25:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst max-hops 25

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST protocol information.

spanning-tree mst simulate pvst global

To enable PVST + simulation globally, use the spanning-tree mst simulate pvst global command. This is enabled by default. To disable PVST+ simulation, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree mst simulate pvst global

no spanning-tree mst simulate pvst global

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

PVST+ simulation is enabled by default.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

3.8.0E and 15.2.(4)E

Support for the command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

This feature configures MST switches (in the same region) to seamlessly interact with PVST+ switches.

Use the show spanning-tree summary command to see if the feature is enabled.

To enable PVST+ simulation on a port, see spanning-tree mst simulate pvst (interface configuration mode).

Examples

The following example shows the spanning tree summary when PVST+ simulation is enabled in the MSTP mode:

Switch# show spanning-tree summary

Switch is in mst mode (IEEE Standard)

Root bridge for: MST0

EtherChannel misconfig guard is enabled

Extended system ID is enabled

Portfast Default is disabled

PortFast BPDU Guard Default is disabled

Portfast BPDU Filter Default is disabled

Loopguard Default is disabled

UplinkFast is disabled

BackboneFast is disabled

Pathcost method used is long

PVST Simulation Default is enabled

Name Blocking Listening Learning Forwarding STP Active

---------------------- -------- --------- -------- ---------- ----------

MST0 2 0 0 0 2

---------------------- -------- --------- -------- ---------- ----------

1 mst 2 0 0 0 2

The following example shows the spanning tree summary when the switch is not in MSTP mode, that is, the switch is in PVST or Rapid-PVST mode. The output string displays the current STP mode:

Switch# show spanning-tree summary

Switch is in rapid-pvst mode

Root bridge for: VLAN0001, VLAN2001-VLAN2002

EtherChannel misconfig guard is enabled

Extended system ID is enabled

Portfast Default is disabled

PortFast BPDU Guard Default is disabled

Portfast BPDU Filter Default is disabled

Loopguard Default is disabled

UplinkFast is disabled

BackboneFast is disabled

Pathcost method used is short

PVST Simulation Default is enabled but inactive in rapid-pvst mode

Name Blocking Listening Learning Forwarding STP Active

---------------------- -------- --------- -------- ---------- ----------

VLAN0001 2 0 0 0 2

VLAN2001 2 0 0 0 2

VLAN2002 2 0 0 0 2

---------------------- -------- --------- -------- ---------- ----------

3 vlans 6 0 0 0 6

Related Commands

Command

Description

spanning-tree mst simulate pvst (interface configuration mode)

Enables PVST+ simulation on a port.

show spanning-tree

Displays spanning-tree state information.

spanning-tree mst simulate pvst (interface configuration mode)

To enable PVST + simulation on a port, use the spanning-tree mst simulate pvst command in the interface configuration mode. This is enabled by default. To disable PVST+ simulation, use the no form of this command, or enter the spanning-tree mst simulate pvst disable command.

spanning-tree mst simulate pvst [disable]

no spanning-tree mst simulate pvst

Syntax Description

disable

Disables the PVST+ simulation feature. This prevents a port from automatically interoperating with a connecting device that is running Rapid PVST+.

Command Default

PVST+ simulation is enabled by default.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

3.8.0E and 15.2.(4)E

Support for the command was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

This feature configures MST switches (in the same region) to seamlessly interact with PVST+ switches.

Use the show spanning-tree interface interface-id detail command to see if the feature is enabled.

To enable PVST+ simulation globally, see spanning-tree mst simulate pvst global.

Examples

The following example shows the interface details when PVST+ simulation is explicitly enabled on the port:

Switch# show spanning-tree interface gi3/13 detail

Port 269 (GigabitEthernet3/13) of VLAN0002 is forwarding

Port path cost 4, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.297.

Designated root has priority 32769, address 0013.5f20.01c0

Designated bridge has priority 32769, address 0013.5f20.01c0

Designated port id is 128.297, designated path cost 0

Timers: message age 0, forward delay 0, hold 0

Number of transitions to forwarding state: 1

Link type is point-to-point by default

PVST Simulation is enabled

BPDU: sent 132, received 1

The following example shows the interface details when the PVST+ simulation feature is disabled and a PVST Peer inconsistency has been detected on the port:

Switch# show spanning-tree interface gi3/13 detail

Port 269 (GigabitEthernet3/13) of VLAN0002 is broken (PVST Peer Inconsistent)

Port path cost 4, Port priority 128, Port Identifier 128.297.

Designated root has priority 32769, address 0013.5f20.01c0

Designated bridge has priority 32769, address 0013.5f20.01c0

Designated port id is 128.297, designated path cost 0

Timers: message age 0, forward delay 0, hold 0

Number of transitions to forwarding state: 1

Link type is point-to-point by default

PVST Simulation is disabled

BPDU: sent 132, received 1

Related Commands

Command

Description

spanning-tree mst simulate pvst global

Globally enables PVST+ simulation

show spanning-tree

Displays spanning-tree state information.

spanning-tree mst root

To designate the primary root, secondary root, bridge priority, and timer value for an instance, use the spanning-tree mst root command. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree mst instance-id root {primary | secondary} | {priority prio} [diameter dia [hello-time hello]]

no spanning-tree mst root

Syntax Description

instance-id

Instance identification number; valid values are from 1 to 15.

root

Configures switch as the root switch.

primary

Sets a high enough priority (low value) to make the bridge root of the spanning-tree instance.

secondary

Designates this switch as a secondary root if the primary root fails.

priority prio

Sets the bridge priority; see the “Usage Guidelines” section for valid values and additional information.

diameter dia

(Optional) Sets the timer values for the bridge based on the network diameter; valid values are from 2 to 7.

hello-time hello

(Optional) Specifies the duration between the generation of configuration messages by the root switch.

Command Default

Bridge priority is 32768.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch..

Usage Guidelines

The bridge priority can be set in increments of 4096 only. When you set the priority, valid values are 0, 4096, 8192, 12288, 16384, 20480, 24576, 28672, 32768, 36864, 40960, 45056, 49152, 53248, 57344, and 61440.

You can set the priority to 0 to make the switch root.

The spanning-tree root secondary bridge priority value is 16384.

The diameter dia and hello-time hello options are available for instance 0 only.

If you do not specify the hello_time value, the value is calculated from the network diameter.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the priority and timer values for the bridge:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst 0 root primary diameter 7 hello-time 2

Switch(config)# spanning-tree mst 5 root primary

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST protocol information.

spanning-tree pathcost method

To set the path cost calculation method, use the spanning-tree pathcost method command. To revert to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree pathcost method {long | short}

no spanning-tree pathcost method

Syntax Description

long

Specifies 32-bit-based values for port path costs.

short

Specifies 16-bit-based values for port path costs.

Command Default

Port path cost has 16-bit-based values.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch..

Usage Guidelines

This command applies to all the spanning-tree instances on the switch.

The long path cost calculation method uses all the 32 bits for path cost calculation and yields values in the range of 1 through 200,000,000.

The short path cost calculation method (16 bits) yields values in the range of 1 through 65,535.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the path cost calculation method to long:

Switch(config) spanning-tree pathcost method long

Switch(config)

The following example shows how to set the path cost calculation method to short:

Switch(config) spanning-tree pathcost method short

Switch(config)

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree

Displays spanning-tree state information.

spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration mode)

To configure a port type on an individual interface spanning-tree portfast command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree portfast {disable | edge [trunk] | network}

no spanning-tree portfast

Syntax Description

disable

(Optional) Configures the port as a normal spanning tree port.

edge [trunk]

Configures the specified interfaces as an edge port.

(Optional) trunk—Configures the trunk port as an edge port.

network

Configures all interfaces as network ports.

Command Default

Port type is normal.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch..

12.1(12c)EW

The disable and trunk options were added.

3.8.0E and 15.2.(4)E

Support for the edge, and network, keywords was introduced.

Beginning with this release, if you enter the spanning-tree portfast [trunk] command in the interface configuration mode, the system automatically saves it as spanning-tree portfast edge [trunk].

Usage Guidelines

On any given interface, the type of port you can configure depends on the type of device to which the interface is connected:

- A PortFast edge port—is connected to a Layer 2 host, which can be an access port or an edge trunk port. An edge port is moved directly to the spanning-tree forwarding state when linkup occurs, without waiting for the standard forward-time delay.

Set this port type only on interfaces that connect to end stations (hosts or servers); otherwise, an accidental topology loop could cause a data packet loop and disrupt the Catalyst 4500 series switch and network operation.

- A PortFast network port—is connected only to a Layer 2 switch or bridge.

Set this port type on interfaces where you want to enable Bridge Assurance (Bridge Assurance is enabled on all network ports by default). If you configure a port that is connected to a Layer 2 host as a spanning tree network port, the port will automatically move into the blocking state.

- A PortFast normal port—is the default type of spanning tree port.

Using the no spanning-tree portfast interface configuration command resets the interface to the port type you have specified in the spanning-tree portfast global configuration command.

Using the spanning-tree portfast disable command resets the interface to the port type you have specified in the spanning-tree portfast global configuration command.

If you have not configured spanning-tree portfast globally, using the no spanning-tree portfast interface configuration command is equivalent to the spanning-tree portfast disable interface configuration command.

Use the show spanning-tree interface type detail command to know what is configured on a given port.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable edge behavior on GigabitEthernet interface 5/7 and verify configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 5/7

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree portfast edge

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to configure GigabitEthernet interface 5/8 as a network port and verify configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 5/8

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree portfast network

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

spanning-tree cost

Calculates the path cost of STP on an interface.

spanning-tree bridge assurance

Enables Bridge Assurance.

spanning-tree portfast

Globally enables a default state for all ports.

show spanning-tree

Displays spanning-tree state information.

spanning-tree portfast edge bpdufilter default

To enable the BPDU filtering by default on all PortFast edge ports, use the spanning-tree portfast edge bpdufilter default command. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree portfast edge bpdufilter default

no spanning-tree portfast edge bpdufilter default

Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or arguments.

Command Default

BPDU filtering is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

3.8.0E and 15.2.(4)E

Support for the edge keyword was introduced.

Usage Guidelines

The spanning-tree portfast edge bpdufilter default command enables BPDU filtering globally on the Catalyst 4500 series switch. BPDU filtering prevents a port from sending or receiving any BPDUs.

You can override the effects of the spanning-tree portfast edge bpdufilter default command by configuring BPDU filtering at the interface level.

Note Be careful when enabling BPDU filtering. Functionality is different when enabling on a per-port basis or globally. When enabled globally, BPDU filtering is applied only on ports that are in an operational PortFast state. Ports still send a few BPDUs at linkup before they effectively filter outbound BPDUs. If a BPDU is received on an edge port, it immediately loses its operational PortFast status and BPDU filtering is disabled.

When enabled locally on a port, BPDU filtering prevents the Catalyst 4500 series switch from receiving or sending BPDUs on this port.

Caution Be careful when using this command. This command can cause bridging loops if not used correctly.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable BPDU filtering by default:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree portfast edge bpdufilter default

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST protocol information.

spanning-tree bpdufilter

Enables BPDU filtering on an interface.

spanning-tree portfast edge bpduguard default

To enable BPDU guard by default on all the PortFast ports, use the spanning-tree portfast edge bpduguard default command. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree portfast edge bpduguard default

no spanning-tree portfast edge bpduguard default

Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or arguments.

Command Default

BPDU guard is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Caution Use this command only with the interfaces that connect to the end stations; otherwise, an accidental topology loop could cause a data packet loop and disrupt the Catalyst 4500 series switch and network operation.

BPDU guard disables a port if it receives a BPDU. BPDU guard is applied only on ports that are PortFast enabled and are in an operational PortFast state.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable BPDU guard by default:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree portfast edge bpduguard default

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree mst

Displays MST protocol information.

spanning-tree bpduguard

Enables BPDU guard on an interface.

spanning-tree portfast

To globally enable a default state for all ports, use the spanning-tree portfast command. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command, or enter the spanning-tree portfast default command.

spanning-tree portfast {edge | network | normal} default

no spanning-tree portfast

Syntax Description

edge

Configures all interfaces as edge ports.

network

Configures all interfaces as network ports.

normal

Configures all interfaces as normal spanning tree ports.

default

Sets the port type that you entered (whether edge, network, or normal) as the default port type on all interfaces.

Command Default

The default port type is normal.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

3.8.0E and 15.2.(4)E

Support for the edge, network, and normal keywords was introduced.

Beginning with this release, if you enter the spanning-tree portfast [trunk] command in the global configuration mode, the system automatically saves it as spanning-tree portfast edge [trunk].

Usage Guidelines

On any given interface, the type of port you can configure depends on the type of device to which the interface is connected:

- A PortFast edge port—is connected to a Layer 2 host, which can be an access port or an edge trunk port. An edge port is moved directly to the spanning-tree forwarding state when linkup occurs, without waiting for the standard forward-time delay.

Set this port type only on interfaces that connect to end stations (hosts or servers); otherwise, an accidental topology loop could cause a data packet loop and disrupt the Catalyst 4500 series switch and network operation.

- A PortFast network port—is connected only to a Layer 2 switch or bridge.

Set this port type on interfaces where you want to enable Bridge Assurance (Bridge Assurance is enabled on all network ports by default). For more information, see the spanning-tree bridge assurance global configuration command.

If you configure a port that is connected to a Layer 2 host as a spanning tree network port, the port will automatically move into the blocking state.

- A PortFast normal port—is the default type of spanning tree port.

You can configure a port type on individual interfaces using the spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration mode) command.

Examples

The following example shows how to globally configure all access and trunk ports connected to hosts as edge ports:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# spanning-tree portfast edge default

Related Commands

Command

Description

show spanning-tree

Displays spanning-tree state information.

spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration mode)

Configures a port type on an individual interface.

spanning-tree bridge assurance

Enables Bridge Assurance.

spanning-tree port-priority

To prioritize an interface when two bridges compete for position as the root bridge, use the spanning-tree port-priority command. The priority you set resolves the conflict. To revert to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree port-priority port_priority

no spanning-tree port-priority

Syntax Description

port_priority

Port priority; valid values are from 0 to 240 in increments of 16.

Command Default

Port priority value is set to 128.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to increase the possibility that the spanning-tree instance 20 will be chosen as the root-bridge on interface FastEthernet 2/1:

Switch(config-if)# spanning-tree port-priority 0

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

spanning-tree cost

Calculates the path cost of STP on an interface.

spanning-tree portfast

Enables PortFast by default on all access ports.

spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration mode)

Enables PortFast mode.

spanning-tree uplinkfast

Enables the UplinkFast feature.

spanning-tree vlan

Configures STP on a per-VLAN basis.

show spanning-tree

Displays spanning-tree state information.

spanning-tree uplinkfast

To enable the UplinkFast feature, use the spanning-tree uplinkfast command. To disable UplinkFast, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree uplinkfast [max-update-rate packets-per-second]

no spanning-tree uplinkfast [max-update-rate]

Syntax Description

max-update-rate packets_per_second

(Optional) Specifies the maximum rate (in packets per second) at which update packets are sent; valid values are from 0 to 65535.

Command Default

The default settings are as follows:

- Disabled.

- Maximum update rate is 150.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command should be used only on access switches.

When UplinkFast is configured, the bridge priority is changed to 49,152 so that this switch will not be selected as root. All interface path costs of all spanning-tree interfaces belonging to the specified spanning-tree instances are also increased by 3000.

When spanning tree detects that the root interface has failed, the UplinkFast feature causes an immediate switchover to an alternate root interface, transitioning the new root interface directly to the forwarding state. During this time, a topology change notification is sent. To minimize the disruption caused by the topology change, a multicast packet is sent to 01-00-0C-CD-CD-CD for each station address in the forwarding bridge except for those associated with the old root interface.

Use the spanning-tree uplinkfast max-update-rate command to enable UplinkFast (if not already enabled) and change the rate at which the update packets are sent. Use the no form of this command to return the default rate of 150 packets per second.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable UplinkFast and set the maximum rate to 200 packets per second:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree uplinkfast

Switch(config)# spanning-tree uplinkfast max-update-rate 200

Related Commands

Command

Description

spanning-tree cost

Calculates the path cost of STP on an interface.

spanning-tree port-priority

Prioritizes an interface when two bridges compete for position as the root bridge.

spanning-tree portfast

Enables PortFast by default on all access ports.

spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration mode)

Enables PortFast mode.

spanning-tree vlan

Configures STP on a per-VLAN basis.

spanning-tree vlan

To configure STP on a per-VLAN basis, use the spanning-tree vlan command. To return to the default value, use the no form of this command.

spanning-tree vlan vlan_id [forward-time seconds | hello-time seconds | max-age seconds | priority priority | protocol protocol | root {primary | secondary} [diameter net-diameter [hello-time seconds]]]

no spanning-tree vlan vlan_id [forward-time | hello-time | max-age | priority | root]

Syntax Description

vlan_id

VLAN identification number; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

forward-time seconds

(Optional) Sets the STP forward delay time; valid values are from 4 to 30 seconds.

hello-time seconds

(Optional) Specifies, in seconds, the time between configuration messages generated by the root switch; valid values are from 1 to 10 seconds.

max-age seconds

(Optional) Sets the maximum time, in seconds, that the information in a BPDU is valid; valid values are from 6 to 40 seconds.

priority priority

(Optional) Sets the STP bridge priority; valid values are from 0 to 65535.

protocol protocol

(Optional) Specifies the protocol.

root primary

(Optional) Forces this switch to be the root bridge.

root secondary

(Optional) Specifies this switch act as the root switch should the primary root fail.

diameter net-diameter

(Optional) Specifies the maximum number of bridges between two end stations; valid values are from 2 to 7.

Command Default

The default settings are as follows:

- Forward-time—15 seconds

- Hello-time—2 seconds

- Max-age—20 seconds

- Priority—32768 with STP enabled; 128 with MST enabled

- Root—No STP root

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended addressing was added.

Usage Guidelines

When you are setting the max-age seconds value, if a bridge does not hear BPDUs from the root bridge within the specified interval, it assumes that the network has changed and recomputes the spanning-tree topology.

The spanning-tree root primary command alters the switch bridge priority to 8192. If you enter the spanning-tree root primary command and the switch does not become root, then the bridge priority is changed to 100 less than the bridge priority of the current bridge. If the switch does not become root, an error will result.

The spanning-tree root secondary command alters the switch bridge priority to 16384. If the root switch fails, this switch becomes the next root switch.

Use the spanning-tree root commands on backbone switches only.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable spanning tree on VLAN 200:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree vlan 200

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to configure the switch as the root switch for VLAN 10 with a network diameter of 4:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree vlan 10 root primary diameter 4

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to configure the switch as the secondary root switch for VLAN 10 with a network diameter of 4:

Switch(config)# spanning-tree vlan 10 root secondary diameter 4

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

spanning-tree cost

Calculates the path cost of STP on an interface.

spanning-tree port-priority

Prioritizes an interface when two bridges compete for position as the root bridge.

spanning-tree portfast

Enables PortFast by default on all access ports.

spanning-tree portfast (interface configuration mode)

Enables PortFast mode.

spanning-tree vlan

Configures STP on a per-VLAN basis.

show spanning-tree

Displays spanning-tree state information.

speed

To configure the interface speed, use the speed command. To disable a speed setting, use the no form of this command.

speed {10 | 100 | 1000 | auto [10 | 100 | 1000] | nonegotiate}

no speed

Syntax Description

10

Configures the interface to transmit at 10 Mbps.

100

Configures the interface to transmit at 100 Mbps.

1000

Configures the interface to transmit at 1000 Mbps.

auto 10 | 100 | 1000

Enables the interface to autonegotiate the speed and specify the exact values to advertise when autonegotiating.

nonegotiate

Enables the interface to not negotiate the speed.

Command Default

The default values are shown in the following table:

Interface Type

Supported Syntax

Default Setting

10/100-Mbps module

speed [10 | 100 | auto [10 | 100]]

Auto

100-Mbps fiber modules

Not applicable

Not applicable

Gigabit Ethernet Interface

speed nonegotiate

Nonegotiate

10/100/1000

speed [10 | 100 | 1000 | auto [10 | 100 | 1000]]

Auto

1000

Not applicable

Not applicable

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(20)EWA

Support for auto negotiating specific speeds added.

Usage Guidelines

Table 2-44 lists the supported command options by interface.

Table 2-44 Supported speed Command Options

Interface Type

Supported Syntax

Default Setting

Guidelines

10/100-Mbps module

speed [10 | 100 | auto]

auto

If the speed is set to 10 or 100 and you do not configure the duplex setting, the duplex is set to half.

100-Mbps fiber modules

Not applicable.

Not applicable.

Not applicable.

Gigabit Ethernet Interface

speed nonegotiate

nonegotiate is enabled.

This is only applicable to Gigabit Ethernet ports.

10/100/1000

speed [10 | 100 | 1000 | auto]

auto

If the speed is set to 10 or 100 and you do not configure the duplex setting, the duplex is set to half.

If the speed is set to 1000 or auto with any subset containing 1000

(e.g. speed auto 10 1000 or

speed auto on a 10/100/1000 port), you will not able to set half duplex.

1000

Not applicable.

Not applicable.

The speed is always 1000.

The duplex is half.

If you configure the interface speed and duplex commands manually and enter a value other than

speed auto (for example, 10 or 100 Mbps), make sure that you configure the connecting interface speed command to a matching speed but do not use the auto parameter.

When manually configuring the interface speed to either 10 or 100 Mbps, the switch prompts you to also configure duplex mode on the interface.

Note Catalyst 4506 switches cannot automatically negotiate the interface speed and the duplex mode if either connecting interface is configured to a value other than auto.

Caution Changing the interface speed and the duplex mode configuration might shut down and reenable the interface during the reconfiguration.

Table 2-45 describes the system’s performance for different combinations of the duplex and speed modes. The specified duplex command that is configured with the specified speed command produces the resulting system action.

Table 2-45 System Action Using duplex and speed Commands

duplex Command

speed Command

Resulting System Action

duplex auto

speed auto

Autonegotiates both speed and duplex modes

duplex half

speed 10

Forces 10 Mbps and half duplex

duplex full

speed 10

Forces 10 Mbps and full duplex

duplex half

speed 100

Forces 100 Mbps and half duplex

duplex full

speed 100

Forces 100 Mbps and full duplex

duplex full

speed 1000

Forces 1000 Mbps and full duplex

Examples

The following example shows how to set the interface speed to 100 Mbps on the Fast Ethernet interface 5/4:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 5/4

Switch(config-if)# speed 100

The following example shows how to allow Fast Ethernet interface 5/4 to autonegotiate the speed and duplex mode:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 5/4

Switch(config-if)# speed auto

Note The speed auto 10 100 command is similar to the speed auto command on a Fast Ethernet interface.

The following example shows how to limit the interface speed to 10 and 100 Mbps on the Gigabit Ethernet interface 1/1 in auto-negotiation mode:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1

Switch(config-if)# speed auto 10 100

The following example shows how to limit the speed negotiation to 100 Mbps on the Gigabit Ethernet interface 1/1:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1

Switch(config-if)# speed auto 100

Related Commands

Command

Description

duplex

Configures the duplex operation on an interface.

interface (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Configures an interface type and enter interface configuration mode.

show controllers (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Displays controller information.

show interfaces

Displays traffice on a specific interface.

storm-control

To enable broadcast storm control on a port and to specify what is to be done when a storm occurs on a port, use the storm-control interface configuration command. To disable storm control for the broadcast traffic and to disable a specified storm control action, use the no form of this command.

storm-control {broadcast {high-level | bps bps [k | m | g] | pps pps [k | m | g]} | action {shutdown | trap}}

no storm-control {broadcast level | action {shutdown | trap}}

Syntax Description

broadcast

Enables the broadcast storm control on the port.

level {high-level | bps bps [k | m | g] | pps pps [k | m | g]}

Defines traffic suppression levels. You can configure the following:

- high-level —Rising suppression level as a percent of total bandwidth, up to two decimal places. Valid values are from 0 to 100 percent. Blocks the flooding of storm packets when the value specified for level is reached.

- bps bps —Specifies the threshold level for broadcast traffic, in bits per second (bps) (up to one decimal place). The port blocks only the traffic that exceeds this level. The range is 0.0 to 10000000000.0.

- pps pps —Specifies the threshold level for broadcast traffic, in packets per second (pps) (up to one decimal place). The port blocks all traffic when traffic utilization exceeds this level. The range is 0.0 to 10000000000.0.

- (Optional) [ k | m | g ]—Specifies the metric suffixes for large number thresholds, in bps and pps settings.

action

Directs the switch to take action when a storm occurs in a port.

shutdown

Disables the port during a storm.

trap

Sends an Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) trap when a storm occurs.

In Cisco IOS Release 12.1(19)EW, this keyword is available but not supported..

Command Default

Broadcast storm control is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration (config-if)

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on Supervisor Engine 6-E and Catalyst 4900M.

3.8.0E and 15.2.(4)E

This command was modified. The the bps bps and pps pps keywords were added.

Usage Guidelines

Enter the storm-control broadcast level command to enable traffic storm control on the interface, configure the traffic storm control level, and apply the traffic storm control level to the broadcast traffic on the interface.

The switch supports broadcast traffic storm control on all LAN ports.

The period is required when you enter the fractional suppression level.

The suppression level is entered as a percentage of the total bandwidth. A threshold value of 100 percent indicates that no limit is placed on traffic. A value of 0.0 means that all specified traffic on that port is blocked.

Enter the show interfaces counters storm-control command to display the discard count.

Enter the show running-config command to display the enabled suppression mode and level setting.

To turn off suppression for the specified traffic type, you can do one of the following:

- Set the high-level value to 100 percent for the specified traffic type.

- Use the no form of this command.

The lower level is ignored for the interfaces that perform storm control in the hardware.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable broadcast storm control in a port with a 75.67 percent rising suppression level:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 2/1

Switch(config-if)# storm-control broadcast level 75.67

Switch(config-if)# end

The following example shows how to disable a port during a storm:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 2/1

Switch(config-if)# storm-control action shutdown

Switch(config-if)# end

The following example shows how to disable storm control on a port:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 2/1

Switch(config-if)# no storm-control broadcast level

Switch(config-if)# end

The following example shows how to disable storm control by setting the high level to 100 percent:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 2/1

Switch(config-if)# storm-control broadcast level 100

Switch(config-if)# end

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces counters

Displays the traffic on the physical interface.

show running-config

Displays the running configuration of a switch.

storm-control broadcast include multicast

To enable multicast storm control on a port, use the storm-control broadcast include multicast command. To disable multicast storm control, use the no form of this command.

storm-control broadcast include multicast

no storm-control broadcast include multicast

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Multicast storm control is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode (config)

Interface configuration mode on Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, Catalyst 4948E-F, Supervisor Engines 6-E, 6L-E, 7-E, 7L-E, and 8-E.

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4900M and Supervisor Engine 6-E.

3.8.0E and 15.2.(4)E

This command was modified. The the bps bps and pps pps keywords were added.

Usage Guidelines

This command prompts the hardware to filter multicast packets if it is already filtering broadcast packets.

When you specify threshold levels for traffic as a percentage of the bandwidth or in bps, the traffic that is suppressed is a combined rate of multicast and broadcast traffic that exceeds the threshold (if the action is filtering).

When you specify threshold levels for traffic in pps, the rate at which traffic is suppressed is considered separately for broadcast and multicast traffic, and the storm action (if the action is filtering) is taken separately.

The switch supports per-interface multicas t suppression. When you enable multicast suppression on an interface, you subject incoming (multicast and broadcast) traffic on that interface to suppression.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable multicast storm control globally:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# storm-control broadcast include multicast

Switch(config)# end

The following example shows how to enable per-port Multicast storm control on a Supervisor Engine 6-E:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet2/4

Switch(config-if)# storm-control broadcast include multicast

Switch(config)# end

Related Commands

Command

Description

storm-control

Enables broadcast storm control on a port and and specifies what to do when a storm occurs on a port.

subscribe-to-alert-group all

To subscribe to all available alert groups, use the subscribe-to-alert-group all command.

subscribe-to-alert-group all

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

cfg-call-home-profile

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

To enter profile call-home configuration submode, use the profile command in call-home configuration mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to subscribe to all available alert groups:

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# profile cisco

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# subscribe-to-alert-group all

Related Commands

Command

Description

destination address

Configures the destination e-mail address or URL to which Call Home messages will be sent.

destination message-size-limit bytes

Configures a maximum destination message size for the destination profile.

destination preferred-msg-format

Configures a preferred message format.

destination transport-method

Enables the message transport method.

profile

Enters profile call-home configuration submode

subscribe-to-alert-group configuration

Subscribes this destination profile to the Configuration alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic

Subscribes this destination profile to the Diagnostic alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group environment

Subscribes this destination profile to the Environment alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group inventory

Subscribes this destination profile to the Inventory alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group syslog

Subscribes this destination profile to the Syslog alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group configuration

To subscribe a destination profile to the Configuration alert group, use the

subscribe-to-alert-group configuration command.

subscribe-to-alert-group configuration [periodic {daily hh:mm | monthly date hh:mm | weekly day hh:mm}]

Syntax Description

periodic

(Optional) Specifies a periodic call-home message.

daily hh:mm

Sets a daily alert in hours and minutes.

monthly date hh:mm

Sets a monthly alert in day, hour, and minute.

weekly day hh:mm

Sets a weekly alert in day, hour, and minutes.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

cfg-call-home-profile

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

To enter profile call-home configuration submode, use the profile command in call-home configuration mode.

The Configuration alert group can be configured for periodic notification.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure periodic "configuration" alert-group:

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# profile cisco

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# subscribe-to-alert-group configuration periodic weekly Tuesday 21:16

Related Commands

Command

Description

destination address

Configures the destination e-mail address or URL to which Call Home messages will be sent.

destination message-size-limit bytes

Configures a maximum destination message size for the destination profile.

destination preferred-msg-format

Configures a preferred message format.

destination transport-method

Enables the message transport method.

profile

Enters profile call-home configuration submode

subscribe-to-alert-group all

Subscribes to all available alert groups.

subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic

Subscribes this destination profile to the Diagnostic alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group environment

Subscribes this destination profile to the Environment alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group inventory

Subscribes this destination profile to the Inventory alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group syslog

Subscribes this destination profile to the Syslog alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic

To subscribe a destination profile to the Diagnostic alert group, use the subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic command.

subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic [severity catastrophic | disaster | fatal | critical | major | minor | warning | notification | normal | debugging]

Syntax Description

severity catastrophic

(Optional) Specifies network wide catastrophic failure (highest severity).

disaster

(Optional) Specifies significant network impact.

fatal

(Optional) Specifies that the system is unusable (system log level 0).

critical

(Optional) Specifies that immediate attention is needed (system log level 1).

major

(Optional) Specifies a major condition (System log level 2).

minor

(Optional) Specifies a minor condition (System log level 3).

warning

(Optional) Specifiies a warning condition (System log level 4).

notification

(Optional) Specifies an informational message (System log level 5).

normal

(Optional) Specifies returning to a normal state (System log level 6).

debugging

(Optional) Specifies a debugging message (Lowest severity).

Command Default

normal

Command Modes

cfg-call-home-profile

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

To enter profile call-home configuration submode, use the profile command in call-home configuration mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the "diagnostic" alert-group with "normal" severity:

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# profile cisco

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic severity normal

Related Commands

Command

Description

destination address

Configures the destination e-mail address or URL to which Call Home messages will be sent.

destination message-size-limit bytes

Configures a maximum destination message size for the destination profile.

destination preferred-msg-format

Configures a preferred message format.

destination transport-method

Enables the message transport method.

profile

Enters profile call-home configuration submode

subscribe-to-alert-group all

Subscribes to all available alert groups.

subscribe-to-alert-group configuration

Subscribes this destination profile to the Configuration alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group environment

Subscribes this destination profile to the Environment alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group inventory

Subscribes this destination profile to the Inventory alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group syslog

Subscribes this destination profile to the Syslog alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group environment

To subscribe a destination profile to the Environment alert group, use the

subscribe-to-alert-group environment command.

subscribe-to-alert-group environment [severity catastrophic | disaster | fatal | critical | major | minor | warning | notification | normal | debugging]

Syntax Description

severity catastrophic

(Optional) Specifies network wide catastrophic failure (highest severity).

disaster

(Optional) Specifies significant network impact.

fatal

(Optional) Specifies that the system is unusable (system log level 0).

critical

(Optional) Specifies that immediate attention is needed (system log level 1).

major

(Optional) Specifies a major condition (System log level 2).

minor

(Optional) Specifies a minor condition (System log level 3).

warning

(Optional) Specifiies a warning condition (System log level 4).

notification

(Optional) Specifies an informational message (System log level 5).

normal

(Optional) Specifies returning to a normal state (System log level 6).

debugging

(Optional) Specifies a debugging message (Lowest severity).

Command Default

normal

Command Modes

cfg-call-home-profile

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

To enter profile call-home configuration submode, use the profile command in call-home configuration mode.

The Environment alert group can be configured to filter messages based on severity.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the "environmental" alert-group with "severity notification":

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# profile cisco

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# subscribe-to-alert-group environment severity notification

Related Commands

Command

Description

profile

Enters profile call-home configuration submode

destination address

Configures the destination e-mail address or URL to which Call Home messages will be sent.

destination message-size-limit bytes

Configures a maximum destination message size for the destination profile.

destination preferred-msg-format

Configures a preferred message format.

destination transport-method

Enables the message transport method.

subscribe-to-alert-group all

Subscribes to all available alert groups.

subscribe-to-alert-group configuration

Subscribes this destination profile to the Configuration alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic

Subscribes this destination profile to the Diagnostic alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group inventory

Subscribes this destination profile to the Inventory alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group syslog

Subscribes this destination profile to the Syslog alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group inventory

To subscribe a destination profile to the Inventory alert group, use the

subscribe-to-alert-group inventory command.

subscribe-to-alert-group inventory [periodic {daily hh:mm | monthly date hh:mm |

weekly day hh:mm}]

Syntax Description

periodic

(Optional) Specifies a periodic call-home message.

daily hh:mm

Sets a daily alert in hours and minutes.

monthly date hh:mm

Sets a monthly alert in day, hour, and minute.

weekly day hh:mm

Sets a weekly alert in day, hour, and minutes.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

cfg-call-home-profile

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

To enter profile call-home configuration submode, use the profile command in call-home configuration mode.

The Inventory alert group can be configured for periodic notification.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the Inventory alert group with periodic daily alert at 21:12":

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# profile cisco

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# subscribe-to-alert-group inventory periodic daily 21:12

Related Commands

Command

Description

destination address

Configures the destination e-mail address or URL to which Call Home messages will be sent.

destination message-size-limit bytes

Configures a maximum destination message size for the destination profile.

destination preferred-msg-format

Configures a preferred message format.

destination transport-method

Enables the message transport method.

profile

Enters profile call-home configuration submode

subscribe-to-alert-group all

Subscribes to all available alert groups.

subscribe-to-alert-group configuration

Subscribes this destination profile to the Configuration alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic

Subscribes this destination profile to the Diagnostic alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group environment

Subscribes this destination profile to the Environment alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group syslog

Subscribes this destination profile to the Syslog alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group syslog

To subscribe this destination profile to the Syslog alert group, use the

subscribe-to-alert-group syslog command.

subscribe-to-alert-group syslog [severity catastrophic | disaster | fatal | critical | major | minor | warning | notification | normal | debugging | pattern string]

Syntax Description

severity catastrophic

(Optional) Specifies network wide catastrophic failure (highest severity).

disaster

(Optional) Specifies significant network impact.

fatal

(Optional) Specifies that the system is unusable (system log level 0).

critical

(Optional) Specifies that immediate attention is needed (system log level 1).

major

(Optional) Specifies a major condition (System log level 2).

minor

(Optional) Specifies a minor condition (System log level 3).

warning

(Optional) Specifiies a warning condition (System log level 4).

notification

(Optional) Specifies an informational message (System log level 5).

normal

(Optional) Specifies returning to a normal state (System log level 6).

debugging

(Optional) Specifies a debugging message (Lowest severity).

Command Default

normal

Command Modes

cfg-call-home-profile

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

To enter profile call-home configuration submode, use the profile command in call-home configuration mode.

You can configure the Syslog alert group can be configured to filter messages based on severity by specifying a pattern to be matched in the syslog message. If the pattern contains spaces, you must enclose it in quotes (“”).

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the syslog alert group with severity notification:

Switch(config)# call-home

Switch(cfg-call-home)# profile cisco

Switch(cfg-call-home-profile)# subscribe-to-alert-group syslog severity notification pattern "UPDOWN"

Related Commands

Command

Description

destination address

Configures the destination e-mail address or URL to which Call Home messages will be sent.

destination message-size-limit bytes

Configures a maximum destination message size for the destination profile.

destination preferred-msg-format

Configures a preferred message format.

destination transport-method

Enables the message transport method.

profile

Enters profile call-home configuration submode

subscribe-to-alert-group all

Subscribes to all available alert groups.

subscribe-to-alert-group configuration

Subscribes this destination profile to the Configuration alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group diagnostic

Subscribes this destination profile to the Diagnostic alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group environment

Subscribes this destination profile to the Environment alert group.

subscribe-to-alert-group inventory

Subscribes this destination profile to the Inventory alert group.

switch (virtual switch)

To assign a switch number, use the switch command in virtual switch domain configuration submode.

switch num [preempt delay | priority priority-value]

Syntax Description

num

Specifies the switch number; valid values are 1 or 2.

preempt delay

(Optional) Enables preemption and specifies a delay in minutes before the standby chassis takes over as the active chassis. Range: 5 (default) to 20

priority priority-value

(Optional) Specifies a priority number to determine the standby chassis that will become the new active chassis if the active chassis fails. Range: 1 (lowest priority) to 255 (highest priority)

Command Default

priority-value settings for Switch 1 and Switch 2 are 100.

Command Modes

Virtual switch domain configuration submode (config-vs-domain)

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You must set the virtual domain name and the switch number prior to converting the chassis into a virtual switch. You cannot configure the switch number after the chassis is in virtual switch mode.

When you boot the virtual switch, the role resolution logic validates that the chassis numbers in the two chassis diffe.

When you configure preempt, the switch with the highest priority assumes the active role during role negotiation.

Examples

The following example shows how to assign a switch number and to configure the virtual switch domain:

Router1(config)# switch virtual domain 100

Router1(config-vs-domain)# switch 1 priority 20

Router1(config-vs-domain)# switch 1 preempt 12

Router1(config-vs-domain)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

switch virtual domain (virtual switch)

Configures the virtual switch domain number and enter the virtual switch domain configuration submode.

switch convert mode (virtual switch)

To select the switch mode, use the switch convert mode command in privileged EXEC mode.

switch convert mode {easy-virtual-switch | stand-alone | virtual}

Syntax Description

easy-virtual-switch

Specifies execution on the standalone switch, which will be made the master, and switches to easy-vss mode.

stand-alone

Specifies standalone mode.

virtual

Specifies virtual switch mode.

Command Default

stand-alone

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Cisco IOS XE 3.6.0E and 15.2(2)E

easy-virtual-switch keyword introduced.

Usage Guidelines

You must reboot both switches when you convert a switch to virtual switch mode.

You execute the switch convert mode easy-virtual-switch command on the Catalyst 4500 switch intended as the “master” after the switch boots and comes up as VSS. In the easy-vss sub-exec mode, you specify the local interfaces [of the switch where the command is executed] that you want to select as a VSL interface.

In a VSS, the interface naming convention includes the switch number. For example, you must use switch/module/port to specify a port on a switching module. The switch convert mode virtual command converts the configuration file to use the VSS naming convention, and saves a backup copy of the file in the RP bootflash.

Note After you confirm the command (with yes at the prompt), the switch converts the configuration file and restarts both chassis. Subsequently, the chassis is in virtual switch mode and you must specify interfaces with three identifiers (switch/module/port).

A no form of this command does not exist. You must specify either stand-alone or virtual mode.

You can enter the switch convert mode virtual command only after the standby switch is fully operational (in hot standby mode). If you enter the command before the standby switch is fully operational, a message is displayed telling you to try again later.

Note If you have configured your config-register with a value that would skip file parsing during the bootup process, your change to either a standalone or virtual switch will not take place until you reconfigure your config-register. The config-register must be allowed to parse files to ensure a conversion from either a standalone or virtual switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to converts a switch to the “master” after the switch boots and comes up as VSS. In the easy-vss sub-exec mode, you specify the local interfaces GigabitEthernet3/5 [of the switch where the command is executed] that you want to select as a VSL interface:

Switch# switch convert mode easy-virtual-switch

Switch(easy-vss)#VSL ?

Local Interface Remote Interface Hostname Standby-IP

GigabitEthernet3/5 TenGigabitEthernet1/1 4K-DEMO 2.2.2.4

GigabitEthernet3/6 TenGigabitEthernet1/2 4K-DEMO 2.2.2.4

Switch(easy-vss)#VSL GigabitEthernet3/5

The following example shows how to configure a device in the distribution layer as a standalone switch that has a switch number of 1:

Router1# switch convert mode virtual

This command will convert all interface names to naming convention "interface-type

chassis-number/slot/port", save the running config to startup-config and reload the

switch.

Do you want proceed? [yes/no]: yes

Converting interface names

Building Configuration...

[OK]

Saving converted configuration to bootflash: ...

Destination filename [startup-config.converted_vs-20070723-235834]?

switch virtual domain (virtual switch)

To configure the virtual switch domain number and enter the virtual switch domain configuration submode, use the switch virtual domain command in global configuration mode.

switch virutal domain number

Syntax Description

number

Specifies the virtual switch domain number. Range: 1 to 255.

Command Default

No virtual switch domain number is configured.

Command Modes

Global configuration (config)

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When you enter the switch virtual domain command, you enter the virtual switch domain configuration submode, and the prompt changes to Router1(config-vs-domain)#. Within the virtual switch domain configuration submode, the following commands are available:

- default—Sets a command to its defaults.

- exit—Exits the virtual-switch-domain-mode and returns to the global configuration mode.

- no—Negates a command or set its defaults.

- switch num—Assigns the switch number. See the switch (virtual switch) command for additional information.

You must configure the same virtual switch domain number on both chassis of the virtual switch. The virtual switch domain is a number between 1 and 255, and must be unique for each virtual switch in your network.

Note The domain identification takes effect only after you enter the switch convert mode virtual command.

Note The switch number is not stored in the startup or running configuration, because both chassis use the same configuration file (but must not have the same switch number).

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the virtual switch number and virtual switch domain on two switches:

Router1(config)# switch virtual domain 100

Router1(config-vs-domain)# switch 1

Router1(config-vs-domain)# exit

Router2(config)# switch virtual domain 100

Router2(config-vs-domain)# switch 2

Router2(config-vs-domain)# exit

Related Commands

Command

Description

switch (virtual switch)

Assigns a switch number and enters virtual switch domain configuration submode.

switch virtual link (virtual switch)

To associate a switch to an interface, use the switch virtual link command in interface configuration mode.

switch virutal link switch-number

Syntax Description

switch-umber

Switch number; valid values are 1 and 2.

Command Default

The interfaces are not associated by default.

Command Modes

Interface configuration (config-if)

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The virtual switch link (VSL) is configured with a unique port channel on each chassis. You must add the VSL physical ports to the port channel. The VSL channel group must contain a minimum of two ports.

Examples

The following example shows how to associate switch 2 to a port channel:

Router-2(config)# interface port-channel 20

Router-2(config-if)# switch virtual link 2

Router-2(config-if)#

switchport

To modify the switching characteristics of a Layer 2 switch interface, use the switchport command. To return the interface to the routed-interface status and cause all further Layer 2 configuration to be erased, use the no form of this command without parameters.

switchport [access vlan {vlan_num | name vlan_name}] | [nonegotiate] | [voice vlan {vlan-id | dot1p | name vlan_name | none | untagged}]

no switchport [access vlan | nonegotiate | voice vlan]

Syntax Description

access vlan vlan_num

(Optional) Sets the VLAN when the interface is in access mode; valid values are from 1 to 1005 or a VLAN name.

nonegotiate

(Optional) Specifies that the DISL/DTP negotiation packets will not be sent on the interface.

voice vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies the number of the VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 1005

dot1p

(Optional) Specifies that the PVID packets are tagged as priority.

none

(Optional) Specifies that the telephone and voice VLAN do not communicate.

untagged

(Optional) Specifies the untagged PVID packets.

name vlan_name

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN name. You can enter up to 128 characters.

Command Default

The default settings are as follows:

- Switchport trunking mode is enabled.

- Dynamic negotiation parameter is set to auto .

- Access VLANs and trunk interface native VLANs are a default VLAN corresponding to the platform or interface hardware.

- All VLAN lists include all VLANs.

- No voice VLAN is enabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(11)EW

Support for voice VLAN was added.

IOS XE 3.8.0E and IOS 15.2(4)E

Option to specify a VLAN name for access and voice VLAN.

Usage Guidelines

The no switchport command shuts the port down and then reenables it, which may generate messages on the device to which the port is connected.

The no form of the switchport access command resets the access mode VLAN to the appropriate default VLAN for the device. The no form of the switchport nonegotiate command removes the nonegotiate status.

When you are using the nonegotiate keyword, DISL/DTP negotiation packets will not be sent on the interface. The device will trunk or not trunk according to the mode parameter given: access or trunk. This command will return an error if you attempt to execute it in dynamic (auto or desirable) mode.

The voice VLAN is automatically set to VLAN 1 unless you use one of the optional keywords.

If you use the switchport voice vlan command for an interface, the interface cannot join a port channel.

When you use the switchport voice vlan command, the output for the show running-config command changes to show the voice VLAN set.

Before you configure the switchport voice vlan name command, note the following:

- The VLAN ID and VLAN name association should be configured and present in the VLAN database (See example below).

- Different switches can have a different ID for the same name. The VLAN name is internally converted to the VLAN ID.

Examples

The following example shows how to cause the port interface to stop operating as a Cisco-routed port and convert to a Layer 2-switched interface:

Switch(config-if)# switchport

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to cause a port interface in access mode, which is configured as a switched interface, to operate in VLAN 2:

Switch(config-if)# switchport access vlan 2

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to cause a port interface, which is configured as a switched interface, to refrain from negotiating in trunking mode and act as a trunk or access port (depending on the mode set):

Switch(config-if)# switchport nonegotiate

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to set the voice VLAN for the interface to VLAN 2:

Switch(config-if)# switchport voice vlan 2

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to set the voice VLAN for the interface to VLAN test.

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config-vlan)# vlan 55

Switch(config-vlan)# name test

Switch(config-vlan)# end

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet5/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode access

Switch(config-if)# switchport voice vlan name test

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show running-config interface GigabitEthernet5/1

Building configuration...

Current configuration : 113 bytes

!

interface GigabitEthernet5/1

switchport voice vlan 55

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port.

switchport access vlan

To set the VLAN when an interface is in access mode, use the switchport access vlan command. To reset the access mode VLAN to the appropriate default VLAN for the device, use the no form of this command.

switchport access [vlan {vlan-id | dynamic | name vlan_name}]

no switchport access vlan

Syntax Description

vlan-id

(Optional) Number of the VLAN on the interface in access mode. Valid values are from 1 to 4094.

dynamic

(Optional) Enables VMPS control of the VLAN.

name vlan_name

(Optional) Name of the VLAN on the interface, in access mode. You can enter up to 128 characters.

Command Default

The default settings are as follows:

- The access VLAN and trunk interface native VLAN are default VLANs that correspond to the platform or the interface hardware.

- All VLAN lists include all VLANs.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(13)EW

Support for VPMS was added.

IOS XE 3.8.0E and IOS 15.2(4)E

Option to specify an access VLAN name. The name keyword was added.

Usage Guidelines

You must enter the switchport command without any keywords to configure the LAN interface as a Layer 2 interface before you can enter the switchport access vlan command. This action is required only if you have not already entered the switchport command for the interface.

Entering the no switchport command shuts the port down and then reenables it, which could generate messages on the device to which the port is connected.

The no form of the switchport access vlan command resets the access mode VLAN to the appropriate default VLAN for the device.

Before you configure the switchport access vlan name command, note the following:

- The VLAN ID and VLAN name association should be configured and present in the VLAN database (See example below).

- Different switches can have a different ID for the same name. The VLAN name is internally converted to the VLAN ID.

Examples

The following example shows how to cause the port interface to stop operating as a Cisco-routed port and convert to a Layer 2-switched interface:

Switch(config-if)# switchport

Switch(config-if)#

Note This command is not used on platforms that do not support Cisco-routed ports. All physical ports on such platforms are assumed to be Layer 2-switched interfaces.

The following example shows how to cause a port interface that has already been configured as a switched interface to operate in VLAN 2 instead of the platform’s default VLAN when in access mode:

Switch(config-if)# switchport access vlan 2

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to first populate the VLAN database by associating a VLAN ID with a VLAN name, and then setting the VLAN (using the name) on an interface, in the access mode:

Part 1—Making the entry in the VLAN database:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# vlan 33

Switch(config-vlan)# name test

Switch(config-vlan)# end

Part 2—Checking the VLAN database

Switch# show vlan id 33

VLAN Name Status Ports

---- -------------------------------- --------- -------------------------------

33 test active Po21

VLAN Type SAID MTU Parent RingNo BridgeNo Stp BrdgMode Trans1 Trans2

---- ----- ---------- ----- ------ ------ -------- ---- -------- ------ ------

33 enet 100033 1500 - - - - - 0 0

Remote SPAN VLAN

----------------

Disabled

Primary Secondary Type Ports

------- --------- ----------------- ------------------------------------------

Part 3—Setting the VLAN on the interface, by using the name test.

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface GigabitEthernet5/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode access

Switch(config-if)# switchport access vlan name test

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show running-config interface GigabitEthernet5/1

Building configuration...

Current configuration : 113 bytes

!

interface GigabitEthernet5/1

switchport access vlan 33

switchport mode access

Switch#

Switch# show interface GigabitEthernet5/1 switchport

Name: Gi5/1

Switchport: Enabled

Administrative Mode: static access

Operational Mode: static access

Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: dot1q

Operational Trunking Encapsulation: native

Negotiation of Trunking: Off

Access Mode VLAN: 33 (test)

Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Administrative Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Voice VLAN: none

Administrative private-vlan host-association: none

Administrative private-vlan mapping: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk native VLAN: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Administrative private-vlan trunk encapsulation: dot1q

Administrative private-vlan trunk normal VLANs: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk associations: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk mappings: none

Operational private-vlan: none

Trunking VLANs Enabled: ALL

Pruning VLANs Enabled: 2-1001

Capture Mode Disabled

Capture VLANs Allowed: ALL

Unknown unicast blocked: disabled

Unknown multicast blocked: disabled

Appliance trust: none

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port.

switchport autostate exclude

To exclude a port from the VLAN interface link-up calculation, use the switchport autostate exclude command. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

switchport autostate exclude

no switchport autostate exclude

Syntax Description

This command has no keywords or arguments.

Command Default

All ports are included in the VLAN interface link-up calculation.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(37)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You must enter the switchport command without any keywords to configure the LAN interface as a Layer 2 interface before you can enter the switchport autostate exclude command. This action is required only if you have not entered the switchport command for the interface.

Note The switchport command is not used on platforms that do not support Cisco-routed ports. All physical ports on such platforms are assumed to be Layer 2-switched interfaces.

The switchport autostate exclude command marks the port to be excluded from the interface VLAN up calculation when there are multiple ports in the VLAN.

The show interface interface switchport command displays the autostate mode if the mode has been set. If the mode has not been set, the autostate mode is not displayed.

Examples

The following example shows how to exclude a port from the VLAN interface link-up calculation:

Switch(config-if)# switchport autostate exclude

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to include a port in the VLAN interface link-up calculation:

Switch(config-if)# no switchport autostate exclude

Switch(config-if)#

You can verify your settings by entering the show interfaces switchport privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port.

switchport block

To prevent the unknown multicast or unicast packets from being forwarded, use the switchport block interface configuration command. To allow the unknown multicast or unicast packets to be forwarded, use the no form of this command.

switchport block {multicast | unicast}

no switchport block {multicast | unicast}

Syntax Description

multicast

Specifies that the unknown multicast traffic should be blocked.

unicast

Specifies that the unknown unicast traffic should be blocked.

Command Default

Unknown multicast and unicast traffic are not blocked.

All traffic with unknown MAC addresses is sent to all ports.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You can block the unknown multicast or unicast traffic on the switch ports.

Blocking the unknown multicast or unicast traffic is not automatically enabled on the switch ports; you must explicitly configure it.

Note For more information about blocking the packets, refer to the software configuration guide for this release.

Examples

The following example shows how to block the unknown multicast traffic on an interface:

Switch(config-if)# switchport block multicast

You can verify your setting by entering the show interfaces interface-id switchport privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port.

switchport mode

To set the interface type, use the switchport mode command. To reset the mode to the appropriate default mode for the device, use the no form of this command.

switchport mode {access | dot1q-tunnel | trunk | dynamic {auto | desirable}}

switchport mode private-vlan {host | promiscuous | trunk promiscuous | trunk [secondary]}

no switchport mode dot1q-tunnel

no switchport mode private-vlan

Syntax Description

access

Specifies a nontrunking, nontagged single VLAN Layer 2 interface.

dot1q-tunnel

Specifies an 802.1Q tunnel port.

trunk

Specifies a trunking VLAN Layer 2 interface.

dynamic auto

Specifies that the interface convert the link to a trunk link.

dynamic desirable

Specifies that the interface actively attempt to convert the link to a trunk link.

private-vlan host

Specifies that the ports with a valid PVLAN trunk association become active host private VLAN trunk ports.

private-vlan promiscuous

Specifies that the ports with a valid PVLAN mapping become active promiscuous ports.

private-vlan trunk promiscuous

Specifies that the ports with valid PVLAN trunk mapping become active promiscuous trunk ports.

private-vlan trunk secondary

Specifies that the ports with a valid PVLAN trunk association become active host private VLAN trunk ports.

Command Default

Link converts to a trunk link.

dot1q tunnel ports are disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch..

12.2(18)EW

Support was added for configuring dot1q tunnel ports.

12.2(31)SG

Support was added for trunk promiscuous ports.

Usage Guidelines

If you enter access mode, the interface goes into permanent nontrunking mode and negotiates to convert the link into a nontrunk link even if the neighboring interface does not approve the change.

If you enter trunk mode, the interface goes into permanent trunking mode and negotiates to convert the link into a trunk link even if the neighboring interface does not approve the change.

If you enter dynamic auto mode, the interface converts the link to a trunk link if the neighboring interface is set to trunk or desirable mode.

If you enter dynamic desirable mode, the interface becomes a trunk interface if the neighboring interface is set to trunk, desirable, or auto mode.

If you specify the dot1q-tunnel keyword, the port is set unconditionally as an 802.1Q tunnel port.

The port becomes inactive if you configure it as a private VLAN trunk port and one of the following applies:

- The port does not have a valid PVLAN association.

- The port does not have valid allowed normal VLANs.

If a private port PVLAN association or mapping is deleted, or if a private port is configured as a SPAN destination, it becomes inactive.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the interface to dynamic desirable mode:

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode dynamic desirable

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to set a port to PVLAN host mode:

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan host

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to set a port to private VLAN trunk:

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan trunk

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to configure a port for an 802.1Q tunnel port:

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode dot1q-tunnel

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to configure a promiscuous trunk port:

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan trunk promiscuous

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to configure an isolated trunk port:

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan trunk

OR

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan trunk secondary

Switch(config-if)#

You can verify your settings by entering the show interfaces switchport command and examining information in the Administrative Mode and Operational Mode rows.

The following example shows how to configure interface FastEthernet 5/2 as a PVLAN promiscuous port, map it to a PVLAN, and verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 5/2

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan mapping 200 2

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show interfaces fastethernet 5/2 switchport

Name:Fa5/2

Switchport:Enabled

Administrative Mode:private-vlan promiscuous

Operational Mode:private-vlan promiscuous

Administrative Trunking Encapsulation:negotiate

Operational Trunking Encapsulation:native

Negotiation of Trunking:Off

Access Mode VLAN:1 (default)

Trunking Native Mode VLAN:1 (default)

Voice VLAN:none

Administrative Private VLAN Host Association:none

Administrative Private VLAN Promiscuous Mapping:200 (VLAN0200) 2 (VLAN0002)

Private VLAN Trunk Native VLAN:none

Administrative Private VLAN Trunk Encapsulation:dot1q

Administrative Private VLAN Trunk Normal VLANs:none

Administrative Private VLAN Trunk Private VLANs:none

Operational Private VLANs:

200 (VLAN0200) 2 (VLAN0002)

Trunking VLANs Enabled:ALL

Pruning VLANs Enabled:2-1001

Capture Mode Disabled

Capture VLANs Allowed:ALL

The following example shows how to configure interface FastEthernet 5/1 as a PVLAN host port and verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 5/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan host

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan host-association 202 440

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show interfaces fastethernet 5/1 switchport

Name: Fa5/1

Switchport: Enabled

Administrative Mode: private-vlan host

Operational Mode: private-vlan host

Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: negotiate

Operational Trunking Encapsulation: native

Negotiation of Trunking: Off

Access Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Voice VLAN: none

Appliance trust: none

Administrative Private Vlan

Host Association: 202 (VLAN0202) 440 (VLAN0440)

Promiscuous Mapping: none

Trunk encapsulation : dot1q

Trunk vlans:

Operational private-vlan(s):

202 (VLAN0202) 440 (VLAN0440)

Trunking VLANs Enabled: ALL

Pruning VLANs Enabled: 2-1001

Capture Mode Disabled

Capture VLANs Allowed: ALL

The following example shows how to configure interface FastEthernet 5/2 as a secondary trunk port, and verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 5/2

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan trunk secondary

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan trunk native vlan 10

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan 10. 3-4

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan association trunk 3 301

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show interfaces fastethernet 5/2 switchport

Name: Fa5/2

Switchport: Enabled

Administrative Mode: private-vlan trunk secondary

Operational Mode: private-vlan trunk secondary

Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: negotiate

Operational Trunking Encapsulation: dot1q

Negotiation of Trunking: On

Access Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Administrative Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Voice VLAN: none

Administrative private-vlan host-association: none A

dministrative private-vlan mapping: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk native VLAN: 10

Administrative private-vlan trunk Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Administrative private-vlan trunk encapsulation: dot1q

Administrative private-vlan trunk normal VLANs: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk associations:

3 (VLAN0003) 301 (VLAN0301)

Administrative private-vlan trunk mappings: none

Operational private-vlan: none

Operational Normal VLANs: none

Trunking VLANs Enabled: ALL

Pruning VLANs Enabled: 2-1001

Capture Mode Disabled Capture VLANs Allowed: ALL

Unknown unicast blocked: disabled

Unknown multicast blocked: disabled

Appliance trust: none

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to configure interface FastEthernet 5/2 as a promiscuous trunk port and to verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 5/2

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan trunk promiscuous

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan trunk native vlan 10

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan 10, 3-4

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan mapping trunk 3 301, 302

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show interfaces fastethernet 5/2 switchport

Name: Fa5/2

Switchport: Enabled

Administrative Mode: private-vlan trunk promiscuous

Operational Mode: private-vlan trunk promiscuous

Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: negotiate

Operational Trunking Encapsulation: dot1q

Negotiation of Trunking: On

Access Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Administrative Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Voice VLAN: none

Administrative private-vlan host-association: none

Administrative private-vlan mapping: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk native VLAN: 10

Administrative private-vlan trunk Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Administrative private-vlan trunk encapsulation: dot1q

Administrative private-vlan trunk normal VLANs: 3-4,10

Administrative private-vlan trunk associations: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk mappings:

3 (VLAN0003) 301 (VLAN0301) 302 (VLAN0302)

Operational private-vlan:

3 (VLAN0003) 301 (VLAN0301) 302 (VLAN0302)

Trunking VLANs Enabled: ALL

Pruning VLANs Enabled: 2-1001

Capture Mode Disabled

Capture VLANs Allowed: ALL

Unknown unicast blocked: disabled

Unknown multicast blocked: disabled

Appliance trust: none

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port.

switchport

Enables port security on an interface.

switchport private-vlan host-association

Defines a PVLAN association for an isolated or community port.

switchport private-vlan mapping

Defines private VLAN mapping for a promiscuous port.

switchport port-security

To enable port security on an interface, use the switchport port-security command. To disable port security and set parameters to their default states, use the no form of this command.

switchport port-security [aging {static | time time | type {absolute | inactivity}} |

limit rate invalid-source-mac [N | none] | mac-address mac-address [vlan {access | voice} | mac-address sticky [mac-address] [vlan access | voice] | maximum value [vlan {access | voice} | violation {restrict | shutdown | shutdown vlan}]

no switchport port-security [aging {static | time time | type {absolute | inactivity}} |

limit rate invalid-source-mac [N | none] | mac-address mac-address [vlan {access | voice} | mac-address sticky [mac-address] [vlan access | voice] | maximum value [vlan {access | voice} | violation {restrict | shutdown | shutdown vlan}]

Syntax Description

aging

(Optional) Specifies aging for port security.

static

(Optional) Enables aging for statically configured secure addresses on this port.

time time

(Optional) Specifies the aging time for this port. The valid values are from 0 to 1440 minutes. If the time is 0, aging is disabled for this port.

type absolute

(Optional) Sets the aging type as absolute aging. All the secure addresses on this port age out exactly after the time (minutes) specified and are removed from the secure address list.

type inactivity

(Optional) Sets the aging type as inactivity aging. The secure addresses on this port age out only if there is no data traffic from the secure source address for the specified time period.

limit rate invalid-source-mac

(Optional) Sets the rate limit for bad packets. This rate limit also applies to the port where DHCP snooping security mode is enabled as filtering the IP and MAC address.

N none

(Optional) Supplies a rate limit (N) or indicates none (none).

mac-address mac-address

(Optional) Specifies a secure MAC address for the interface; a 48-bit MAC address. You can add additional secure MAC addresses up to the maximum value that is configured.

sticky

(Optional) Configures the dynamic addresses as sticky on the interface.

vlan access

(Optional) Deletes the secure MAC addresses from access VLANs.

vlan voice

(Optional) Deletes the secure MAC addresses from voice VLANs.

maximum value

(Optional) Sets the maximum number of secure MAC addresses for the interface. Valid values are from 1 to 3072. The default setting is 1.

violation

(Optional) Sets the security violation mode and action to be taken if port security is violated.

restrict

(Optional) Sets the security violation restrict mode. In this mode, a port security violation restricts data and causes the security violation counter to increment.

shutdown

(Optional) Sets the security violation shutdown mode. In this mode, a port security violation causes the interface to immediately become error disabled.

shutdown vlan

(Optional) Set the security violation mode to per-VLAN shutdown. In this mode, only the VLAN on which the violation occurred is error-disabled.

Command Default

The default settings are as follows:

- Port security is disabled.

- When port security is enabled and no keywords are entered, the default maximum number of secure MAC addresses is 1.

- Aging is disabled.

- Aging time is 0 minutes.

- All secure addresses on this port age out immediately after they are removed from the secure address list.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(19)EW

Extended to include DHCP snooping security enhancement.

12.2(18)EW

Added support for sticky interfaces.

12.2(31)SG

Added support for sticky port security.

12.2(52)SG

Added support for per-VLAN error-disable detection.

Usage Guidelines

After you set the maximum number of secure MAC addresses that are allowed on a port, you can add secure addresses to the address table by manually configuring them, by allowing the port to dynamically configure them, or by configuring some MAC addresses and allowing the rest to be dynamically configured.

The packets are dropped into the hardware when the maximum number of secure MAC addresses are in the address table and a station that does not have a MAC address in the address table attempts to access the interface.

If you enable port security on a voice VLAN port and if there is a PC connected to the IP phone, you set the maximum allowed secure addresses on the port to more than 1.

You cannot configure static secure MAC addresses in the voice VLAN.

A secure port has the following limitations:

- A secure port cannot be a dynamic access port or a trunk port.

- A secure port cannot be a routed port.

- A secure port cannot be a protected port.

- A secure port cannot be a destination port for Switched Port Analyzer (SPAN).

- A secure port cannot belong to a Fast EtherChannel or Gigabit EtherChannel port group.

When a secure port is in the error-disabled state, you can remove it from this state by entering the errdisable recovery cause psecure-violation global configuration command, or you can manually re-enable it by entering the shutdown and no shut down interface configuration commands. If a port is is disabled, you can also use the clear errdisable command to re-enable the offending VLAN on the port.

To enable secure address aging for a particular port, set the aging time to a value other than 0 for that port.

To allow limited time access to particular secure addresses, set the aging type as absolute. When the aging time lapses, the secure addresses are deleted.

To allow continuous access to a limited number of secure addresses, set the aging type as inactivity. This action removes the secure address when it becomes inactive, and other addresses can become secure.

To allow unlimited access to a secure address, configure it as a secure address, and disable aging for the statically configured secure address by using the no switchport port-security aging static interface configuration command.

If the sticky command is executed without a MAC address specified, all MAC addresses that are learned on that port will be made sticky. You can also specify a specific MAC address to be a sticky address by entering the sticky keyword next to it.

You can configure the sticky feature even when port security is not enabled on the interface. The feature becomes operational when you enable port security on the interface.

You can use the no form of the sticky command only if the sticky feature is already enabled on the interface.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the aging time to 2 hours (120 minutes) for the secure addresses on the Fast Ethernet port 12:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 0/12

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security aging time 120

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to set the aging timer type to Inactivity for the secure addresses on the Fast Ethernet port 12:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 0/12

Switch(config-if)# switch port-security aging type inactivity

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to configure rate limit for invalid source packets on Fast Ethernet port 12:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 0/12

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security limit rate invalid-source-mac 100

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to configure rate limit for invalid source packets on Fast Ethernet port 12:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 0/12

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security limit rate invalid-source-mac none

Switch(config-if)#

You can verify the settings for all secure ports or the specified port by using the show port-security privileged EXEC command.

The following example shows how to remove all sticky and static addresses that are configured on the interface:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 2/12

Switch(config-if)# no switchport port-security mac-address

Switch(config-if)

The following example shows how to configure a secure MAC address on Fast Ethernet port 12:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 0/12

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode access

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address 1000.2000.3000

Switch(config-if)

The following example shows how to make all MAC addresses learned on Fast Ethernet port 12 sticky:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 2/12

SSwitch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky

Switch(config-if)

The following example shows how to make MAC address 1000.2000.3000 sticky on Fast Ethernet port 12:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 2/12

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky 1000.2000.3000

Switch(config-if)

The following example shows how to disable the sticky feature on Fast Ethernet port 12:

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 2/12

Switch(config-if)# no switchport port-security mac-address sticky

Switch(config-if)

Note This command makes all sticky addresses on this interface normal learned entries. It does not delete the entries from the secure MAC address table.

Note The following examples show how to configure sticky secure MAC addresses in access and voice VLANs on interfaces with voice VLAN configured. If you do not have voice VLAN configured the

vlan [access | voice] keywords are not supported.

The following example shows how to configure sticky MAC addresses for voice and data VLANs on Fast Ethernet interface 5/1 and to verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface fa5/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode access

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky 0000.0000.obob vlan voice

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky 0000.0000.0005 vlan access

Switch(config-if)# end

The following example shows how to designate a maximum of one MAC address for a voice VLAN (for a Cisco IP Phone, let’s say) and one MAC address for the data VLAN (for a PC, let’s say) on Fast Ethernet interface 5/1 and to verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 5/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode access

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security maximum 1 vlan voice

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security maximum 1 vlan access

Switch(config-if)# end

The following example shows how to configure a port to shut down only the VLAN if a violation occurs:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 5/1

Switch(config)# switchport port-security violation shutdown vlan

Note Sending traffic to the ports causes the system to configure the port with sticky secure addresses.

You can verify your settings by using the show port-security address privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port.

show port-security

Displays the port security settings for an interface or for the switch.

switchport block

Prevents the unknown multicast or unicast packets from being forwarded.

switchport private-vlan association trunk

To configure the association between a secondary VLAN and a VLAN on a private VLAN trunk port, use the switchport private-vlan association trunk command. To remove the private VLAN mapping from the port, use the no form of this command.

switchport private-vlan association trunk {primary-vlan-id} {secondary-vlan-id}

no switchport private-vlan association trunk {primary-vlan-id}

Syntax Description

primary-vlan-id

Number of the primary VLAN of the private VLAN relationship.

secondary-vlan-id

Number of the secondary VLAN of the private VLAN relationship.

Command Default

Private VLAN mapping is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(20)EW

Support for community VLAN was added.

Usage Guidelines

Multiple private VLAN pairs can be specified so that a private VLAN trunk port can carry multiple secondary VLANs. If an association is specified for the existing primary VLAN, the existing association is replaced.

Only isolated secondary VLANs can be carried over a private VLAN trunk.

Note Community secondary VLANs on a private VLAN trunk are not supported in this release.

If there is no trunk association, any packets received on the secondary VLANs are dropped.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a port with a primary VLAN (VLAN 18) and secondary VLAN (VLAN 20):

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan association trunk 18 20

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to remove the private VLAN association from the port:

Switch(config-if)# no switchport private-vlan association trunk 18

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to configure interface FastEthernet 5/2 as a secondary trunk port, and verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 5/2

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan trunk secondary

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan trunk native vlan 10

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan 10. 3-4

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan association trunk 3 301

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show interfaces fastethernet 5/2 switchport

Name: Fa5/2

Switchport: Enabled

Administrative Mode: private-vlan trunk secondary

Operational Mode: private-vlan trunk secondary

Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: negotiate

Operational Trunking Encapsulation: dot1q

Negotiation of Trunking: On

Access Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Administrative Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Voice VLAN: none

Administrative private-vlan host-association: none A

dministrative private-vlan mapping: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk native VLAN: 10

Administrative private-vlan trunk Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Administrative private-vlan trunk encapsulation: dot1q

Administrative private-vlan trunk normal VLANs: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk associations:

3 (VLAN0003) 301 (VLAN0301)

Administrative private-vlan trunk mappings: none

Operational private-vlan: none

Operational Normal VLANs: none

Trunking VLANs Enabled: ALL

Pruning VLANs Enabled: 2-1001

Capture Mode Disabled Capture VLANs Allowed: ALL

Unknown unicast blocked: disabled

Unknown multicast blocked: disabled

Appliance trust: none

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port.

switchport mode

Enables the interface type.

switchport private-vlan host-association

To define a PVLAN association for an isolated or community port, use the switchport private-vlan host-association command. To remove the PVLAN mapping from the port, use the no form of this command.

switchport private-vlan host-association {primary-vlan-id} {secondary-vlan-id}

no switchport private-vlan host-association

Syntax Description

primary-vlan-id

Number of the primary VLAN of the PVLAN relationship; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

secondary-vlan-list

Number of the secondary VLAN of the private VLAN relationship; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

Command Default

Private VLAN mapping is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended addressing was added.

Usage Guidelines

There is no runtime effect on the port unless it is in PVLAN host mode. If the port is in PVLAN host mode but all VLANs do not exist, the command is allowed, but the port is made inactive.

The secondary VLAN may be an isolated or community VLAN.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a port with a primary VLAN (VLAN 18) and secondary VLAN (VLAN 20):

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan host-association 18 20

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to remove the PVLAN association from the port:

Switch(config-if)# no switchport private-vlan host-association

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to configure interface FastEthernet 5/1 as a PVLAN host port and verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 5/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan host

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan host-association 202 440

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show interfaces fastethernet 5/1 switchport

Name: Fa5/1

Switchport: Enabled

Administrative Mode: private-vlan host

Operational Mode: private-vlan host

Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: negotiate

Operational Trunking Encapsulation: native

Negotiation of Trunking: Off

Access Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Voice VLAN: none

Appliance trust: none

Administrative Private Vlan

Host Association: 202 (VLAN0202) 440 (VLAN0440)

Promiscuous Mapping: none

Trunk encapsulation : dot1q

Trunk vlans:

Operational private-vlan(s):

202 (VLAN0202) 440 (VLAN0440)

Trunking VLANs Enabled: ALL

Pruning VLANs Enabled: 2-1001

Capture Mode Disabled

Capture VLANs Allowed: ALL

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port.

switchport mode

Enables the interface type.

switchport private-vlan mapping

To define private VLAN mapping for a promiscuous port, use the switchport private-vlan mapping command. To clear all mapping from the primary VLAN, use the no form of this command.

switchport private-vlan mapping {primary-vlan-id} {secondary-vlan-list} | {add secondary-vlan-list} | {remove secondary-vlan-list}

switchport private-vlan mapping trunk {primary-vlan-id} [add | remove] secondary-vlan-list

no switchport private-vlan mapping [trunk]

Syntax Description

primary-vlan-id

Number of the primary VLAN of the private VLAN relationship; valid values are from 2 to 4094 (excluding 1002 to 1005).

secondary-vlan-list

Number of the secondary VLANs to map to the primary VLAN; valid values are from 2 to 4094.

add

Maps the secondary VLANs to the primary VLAN.

remove

Clears mapping between the secondary VLANs and the primary VLAN.

trunk

Maps the trunks secondary VLANs to the primary VLAN.

Command Default

Private VLAN mapping is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended addressing was added.

12.2(20)EW

Support for community VLAN was added.

12.2(31)SG

Support for trunk VLAN was added.

Usage Guidelines

There is no run-time effect on the port unless it is in private VLAN promiscuous mode. If the port is in private VLAN promiscuous mode but the VLANs do not exist, the command is allowed, but the port is made inactive.

The secondary VLAN may be an isolated or community VLAN.

Note The maximum number of unique private VLAN pairs supported by the switchport private-vlan mapping trunk command above is 500. For example, one thousand secondary VLANs could map to one primary VLAN, or one thousand secondary VLANs could map one to one to one thousand primary VLANs.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the mapping of primary VLAN 18 to the secondary isolated VLAN 20 on a port:

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan mapping 18 20

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to add a VLAN to the mapping:

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan mapping 18 add 21

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to add a range of secondary VLANs to the mapping:

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan mapping 18 add 22-24

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to add a range of secondary VLANs to the trunk mapping:

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan mapping trunk 18 add 22-24

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to configure interface FastEthernet 5/2 as a PVLAN promiscuous port, map it to a PVLAN, and verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 5/2

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan promiscuous

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan mapping 200 2

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show interfaces fastethernet 5/2 switchport

Name:Fa5/2

Switchport:Enabled

Administrative Mode:private-vlan promiscuous

Operational Mode:private-vlan promiscuous

Administrative Trunking Encapsulation:negotiate

Operational Trunking Encapsulation:native

Negotiation of Trunking:Off

Access Mode VLAN:1 (default)

Trunking Native Mode VLAN:1 (default)

Voice VLAN:none

Administrative Private VLAN Host Association:none

Administrative Private VLAN Promiscuous Mapping:200 (VLAN0200) 2 (VLAN0002)

Private VLAN Trunk Native VLAN:none

Administrative Private VLAN Trunk Encapsulation:dot1q

Administrative Private VLAN Trunk Normal VLANs:none

Administrative Private VLAN Trunk Private VLANs:none

Operational Private VLANs:

200 (VLAN0200) 2 (VLAN0002)

Trunking VLANs Enabled:ALL

Pruning VLANs Enabled:2-1001

Capture Mode Disabled

Capture VLANs Allowed:ALL

The following example shows how to configure interface FastEthernet 5/2 as a promiscuous trunk port and to verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 5/2

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan trunk promiscuous

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan trunk native vlan 10

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan 10, 3-4

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan mapping trunk 3 301, 302

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show interfaces fastethernet 5/2 switchport

Name: Fa5/2

Switchport: Enabled

Administrative Mode: private-vlan trunk promiscuous

Operational Mode: private-vlan trunk promiscuous

Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: negotiate

Operational Trunking Encapsulation: dot1q

Negotiation of Trunking: On

Access Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Administrative Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Voice VLAN: none

Administrative private-vlan host-association: none

Administrative private-vlan mapping: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk native VLAN: 10

Administrative private-vlan trunk Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Administrative private-vlan trunk encapsulation: dot1q

Administrative private-vlan trunk normal VLANs: 3-4,10

Administrative private-vlan trunk associations: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk mappings:

3 (VLAN0003) 301 (VLAN0301) 302 (VLAN0302)

Operational private-vlan:

3 (VLAN0003) 301 (VLAN0301) 302 (VLAN0302)

Trunking VLANs Enabled: ALL

Pruning VLANs Enabled: 2-1001

Capture Mode Disabled

Capture VLANs Allowed: ALL

Unknown unicast blocked: disabled

Unknown multicast blocked: disabled

Appliance trust: none

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces private-vlan mapping

Displays PVLAN mapping information for VLAN SVIs.

switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan

To configure a list of the allowed normal VLANs on a private VLAN trunk port, use the switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan command. To remove all the allowed normal VLANs from a private VLAN trunk port, use the no form of this command.

switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan {vlan-list} all | none | [add | remove | except] vlan_atom [,vlan_atom...]

no switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan

Syntax Description

vlan_list

Sets the list of allowed VLANs; see the “Usage Guidelines” section for formatting guidelines for vlan_list.

all

Specifies all VLANs from 1 to 4094. This keyword is not supported on commands that do not permit all VLANs in the list to be set at the same time.

none

Indicates an empty list. This keyword is not supported on commands that require certain VLANs to be set or at least one VLAN to be set.

add

(Optional) Adds the defined list of VLANs to those currently set instead of replacing the list.

remove

(Optional) Removes the defined list of VLANs from those currently set instead of replacing the list.

except

(Optional) Lists the VLANs that should be calculated by inverting the defined list of VLANs.

vlan_atom

Either a single VLAN number from 1 to 4094 or a continuous range of VLANs described by two VLAN numbers, the lesser one first, separated by a hyphen.

Command Default

All allowed normal VLANs are removed from a private VLAN trunk port.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

By default, no normal VLANs are allowed unless you explicitly configure the VLANs to be allowed.

Use this command only for normal VLANs on a private VLAN trunk port.

Use the switchport private-vlan association trunk command to configure a port that can carry private VLANs on a private VLAN trunk port.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the private VLAN trunk port that carries normal VLANs 1 to10:

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan 1-10

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to remove all the allowed normal VLANs from a private VLAN trunk port:

Switch(config-if)# no switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to configure interface FastEthernet 5/2 as a secondary trunk port, and verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 5/2

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan trunk secondary

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan trunk native vlan 10

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan 10. 3-4

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan association trunk 3 301

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show interfaces fastethernet 5/2 switchport

Name: Fa5/2

Switchport: Enabled

Administrative Mode: private-vlan trunk secondary

Operational Mode: private-vlan trunk secondary

Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: negotiate

Operational Trunking Encapsulation: dot1q

Negotiation of Trunking: On

Access Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Administrative Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Voice VLAN: none

Administrative private-vlan host-association: none A

dministrative private-vlan mapping: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk native VLAN: 10

Administrative private-vlan trunk Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Administrative private-vlan trunk encapsulation: dot1q

Administrative private-vlan trunk normal VLANs: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk associations:

3 (VLAN0003) 301 (VLAN0301)

Administrative private-vlan trunk mappings: none

Operational private-vlan: none

Operational Normal VLANs: none

Trunking VLANs Enabled: ALL

Pruning VLANs Enabled: 2-1001

Capture Mode Disabled Capture VLANs Allowed: ALL

Unknown unicast blocked: disabled

Unknown multicast blocked: disabled

Appliance trust: none

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to configure interface FastEthernet 5/2 as a promiscuous trunk port and to verify the configuration:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# interface fastethernet 5/2

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode private-vlan trunk promiscuous

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan trunk native vlan 10

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan trunk allowed vlan 10, 3-4

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan mapping trunk 3 301, 302

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch# show interfaces fastethernet 5/2 switchport

Name: Fa5/2

Switchport: Enabled

Administrative Mode: private-vlan trunk promiscuous

Operational Mode: private-vlan trunk promiscuous

Administrative Trunking Encapsulation: negotiate

Operational Trunking Encapsulation: dot1q

Negotiation of Trunking: On

Access Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Trunking Native Mode VLAN: 1 (default)

Administrative Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Voice VLAN: none

Administrative private-vlan host-association: none

Administrative private-vlan mapping: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk native VLAN: 10

Administrative private-vlan trunk Native VLAN tagging: enabled

Administrative private-vlan trunk encapsulation: dot1q

Administrative private-vlan trunk normal VLANs: 3-4,10

Administrative private-vlan trunk associations: none

Administrative private-vlan trunk mappings:

3 (VLAN0003) 301 (VLAN0301) 302 (VLAN0302)

Operational private-vlan:

3 (VLAN0003) 301 (VLAN0301) 302 (VLAN0302)

Trunking VLANs Enabled: ALL

Pruning VLANs Enabled: 2-1001

Capture Mode Disabled

Capture VLANs Allowed: ALL

Unknown unicast blocked: disabled

Unknown multicast blocked: disabled

Appliance trust: none

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port.

switchport mode

Enables the interface type.

switchport private-vlan trunk native vlan tag

To control the tagging of the native VLAN traffic on 802.1Q private VLAN trunks, use the switchport private-vlan trunk native vlan tag command. To remove the control of tagging (and default to the global setting), use the no form of this command.

switchport private-vlan trunk native vlan tag

no switchport private-vlan trunk native vlan tag

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

The default setting is global; the settings on the port are determined by the global setting.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(18)EW

Removed vlan-id keyword.

Usage Guidelines

The configuration created with this command only applies to ports that are configured as private VLAN trunks.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable 802.1Q native VLAN tagging on a PVLAN trunk:

Switch(config-if)# switchport private-vlan trunk native vlan tag

Switch(config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port.

switchport mode

Enables the interface type.

switchport trunk

To set the trunk characteristics when an interface is in trunking mode, use the switchport trunk command. To reset all of the trunking characteristics back to the original defaults, use the no form of this command.

switchport trunk native vlan {tag | vlan_id}

no switchport trunk native vlan {tag | vlan_id}

switchport trunk allowed vlan vlan_list

no switchport trunk allowed vlan vlan_list

switchport trunk pruning vlan vlan_list

no switchport trunk pruning vlan vlan_list

Syntax Description

native vlan tag

Specifies the tagging of native VLAN traffic on 802.1Q trunks.

native vlan vlan_id

Sets the native VLAN for the trunk in 802.1Q trunking mode.

allowed vlan vlan_list

Sets the list of allowed VLANs that transmit this interface in tagged format when in trunking mode. See the “Usage Guidelines” section for formatting guidelines for vlan_list.

pruning vlan vlan_list

Sets the list of VLANs that are enabled for VTP pruning when the switch is in trunking mode. See the “Usage Guidelines” section for formatting guidelines for vlan_list.

Command Default

The default settings are as follows:

- IOS-XE only supports dot1Q.

- The access VLANs and trunk interface native VLANs are a default VLAN that corresponds to the platform or the interface hardware.

- All VLAN lists include all VLANs.

- Native VLAN tagging is enabled on the port if enabled globally.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch..

12.1(12c)EW

Support for extended addressing was added.

12.2(18)EW

Support for native VLAN tagging was added.

Usage Guidelines

The vlan_list format is all | none | [add | remove | except] vlan_atom[,vlan_atom...], where:

- all specifies all VLANs from 1 to 4094. This keyword is not supported on commands that do not permit all VLANs in the list to be set at the same time.

- none indicates an empty list. This keyword is not supported on commands that require certain VLANs to be set or at least one VLAN to be set.

- add adds the defined list of VLANs to those currently set, instead of replacing the list.

- remove removes the defined list of VLANs from those currently set, instead of replacing the list.

- except lists the VLANs that should be calculated by inverting the defined list of VLANs.

- vlan_atom is either a single VLAN number from 1 to 4094 or a continuous range of VLANs described by two VLAN numbers (the lesser one first, separated by a hyphen).

The no form of the native vlan command resets the native mode VLAN to the appropriate default VLAN for the device.

The no form of the allowed vlan command resets the list to the default list, which allows all VLANs.

The no form of the pruning vlan command resets the list to the default list, which enables all VLANs for VTP pruning.

These configuration guidelines and restrictions apply when using 802.1Q trunks and impose some limitations on the trunking strategy for a network:

- When connecting Cisco switches through an 802.1Q trunk, make sure that the native VLAN for an 802.1Q trunk is the same on both ends of the trunk link. If the native VLAN on one end of the trunk is different from the native VLAN on the other end, spanning-tree loops might result.

- Disabling spanning tree on the native VLAN of an 802.1Q trunk without disabling spanning tree on every VLAN in the network can cause spanning-tree loops. We recommend that you leave spanning tree enabled on the native VLAN of an 802.1Q trunk. If this is not possible, disable spanning tree on every VLAN in the network. Make sure that your network is free of physical loops before disabling spanning tree.

- When you connect two Cisco switches through 802.1Q trunks, the switches exchange spanning-tree BPDUs on each VLAN that is allowed on the trunks. The BPDUs on the native VLAN of the trunk are sent untagged to the reserved 802.1d spanning-tree multicast MAC address (01-80-C2-00-00-00). The BPDUs on all other VLANs on the trunk are sent tagged to the reserved SSTP multicast MAC address (01-00-0c-cc-cc-cd).

- Non-Cisco 802.1Q switches maintain only a single instance of spanning tree (MST) that defines the spanning-tree topology for all VLANs. When you connect a Cisco switch to a non-Cisco switch through an 802.1Q trunk, the MST of the non-Cisco switch and the native VLAN spanning tree of the Cisco switch combine to form a single spanning-tree topology known as the CST.

- Because Cisco switches transmit BPDUs to the SSTP multicast MAC address on the VLANs other than the native VLAN of the trunk, non-Cisco switches do not recognize these frames as BPDUs and flood them on all ports in the corresponding VLAN. Cisco switches connected to the non-Cisco 802.1Q network receive these flooded BPDUs. Because Cisco switches receive the flooded BPDUs, the switches can maintain a per-VLAN spanning-tree topology across a network of non-Cisco 802.1Q switches. The non-Cisco 802.1Q network separating the Cisco switches is treated as a single broadcast segment between all switches that are connected to the non-Cisco 802.1Q network through the 802.1Q trunks.

- Ensure that the native VLAN is the same on all of the 802.1Q trunks connecting the Cisco switches to the non-Cisco 802.1Q network.

- If you are connecting multiple Cisco switches to a non-Cisco 802.1Q network, all of the connections must be through the 802.1Q trunks. You cannot connect Cisco switches to a non-Cisco 802.1Q network through the ISL trunks or through the access ports. This action causes the switch to place the ISL trunk port or access port into the spanning-tree “port inconsistent” state and no traffic will pass through the port.

Follow these guidelines for native VLAN tagging:

- The no switchport trunk native vlan tag command disables the native VLAN tagging operation on a port. This overrides the global tagging configuration.

- The switchport trunk native vlan tag command can be used to reenable tagging on a disabled port.

- The no option is saved to NVRAM so that the user does not have to manually select the ports to disable the tagging operation each time that the switch reboots.

- When the switchport trunk native vlan tag command is enabled and active, all packets on the native VLAN are tagged, and incoming untagged data packets are dropped. Untagged control packets are accepted.

Examples

The following example shows how to cause a port interface that is configured as a switched interface to encapsulate in 802.1Q trunking format regardless of its default trunking format in trunking mode:

Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to enable 802.1Q tagging on a port:

Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk native vlan tag

Switch(config-if)#

The following example shows how to configure a secure MAC-address and a maximum limit of secure MAC addresses on Gigabit Ethernet port 1 for all VLANs:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode trunk

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security maximum 3

The following example shows how to configure a secure MAC-address on Gigabit Ethernet port 1 in a specific VLAN or range of VLANs:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode trunk

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security

Switch(config-if)# vlan-range 2-6

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# port-security maximum 3

The following example shows how to configure a secure MAC-address in a VLAN on Gigabit Ethernet port 1:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet1/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport trunk encapsulation dot1q

Switch(config-if)# switchport mode trunk

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security

Switch(config-if)# switchport port-security mac-address sticky

Switch(config-if)# vlan-range 2-6

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# port-security mac-address 1.1.1

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# port-security mac-address sticky 1.1.2

Switch(config-if-vlan-range)# port-security mac-address sticky 1.1.3

You can verify your settings by using the show port-security interface vlan privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port.

switchport vlan mapping

To configure VLAN mapping on a trunk port, including one-to-one VLAN mapping, traditional IEEE 802.1Q tunneling (Q-in-Q) mapping, and selective Q-in-Q mapping, use the switchport vlan mapping interface configuration command. To disable configuration, use the no form of the command.

switchport vlan mapping original-vlan-id {translated-id | dot1q tunnel outer vlan-id} | default {dot1q tunnel outer vlan-id | drop}

no switchport vlan mapping original-vlan-id {translated-id | dot1q tunnel outer vlan-id} | default {dot1q tunnel outer vlan-id | drop}

no switchport vlan mapping all

Syntax Description

original-vlan-id

Specifies the original (customer) VLAN or C-VLANs IDs, also known as the VLAN on the wire, for one-to-one or selective Q-in-Q mapping. You can enter multiple VLAN IDs separated by a comma or a series of VLAN IDs separated by a hyphen (For example, 1,2,3-5). The VLAN ID range is from 1 to 4094.

translated-id

The translated VLAN-ID (S-VLAN ID) that is used in the service provider network. The range is from 1 to 4094.

dot1q-tunnel outer vlan-id

Adds a translated VLAN ID to specify a VLAN tunnel (add an outer S-VLAN tag). The range of the S-VLAN tag is 1 to 4094. Use this keyword for traditional Q-in-Q mapping.

default

Specifies default behavior for all the packets in the port.

drop

Specifies that all the packets in the port be dropped if they do not match the mapped VLAN IDs.

all

In the no switchport vlan mapping command, this keyword specifies that all VLAN mapping configurations on the interface are deleted.

Command Default

No VLAN mapping is configured.

Command Modes

Interface configuration (config-if)

Command History

Release

Modification

IOS 12.2(54)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 Series switch.

3.8.0E and 15.2.(4)E

The no switchport vlan mapping default drop command was added.

Usage Guidelines

Before configuring VLAN mapping on an interface, enter the switchport mode trunk interface configuration command to configure the interface as a trunk port.

You can configure VLAN mapping on a physical interface or on a port channel of multiple interfaces with the same configuration.

To configure one-to-one VLAN mapping, use the switchport vlan mapping original-vlan-id translated-id command.

Note To avoid mixing customer traffic, when you configure traditional Q-in-Q on a trunk port, use the switchport trunk allowed vlan vlan-id interface configuration command to configure the outer VLAN ID (S-VLAN) as an allowed VLAN on the trunk port.

Note You cannot configure one-to-one mapping and selective Q-in-Q on the same interface.

The no form of the switchport vlan mapping command clears the specified mapping configuration.

The no switchport vlan mapping all command clears all mapping configurations on the interface.

You cannot configure encapsulation replicate on a SPAN destination port if the source port is configured as a tunnel port or has a 1-to-2 mapping configured. Encapsulation replicate is supported with 1-to-1 VLAN mapping.

The no switchport vlan mapping default drop command ensures that packets that do not match, are not dropped. If this is not configured, by default, the packets that do not match are dropped.

Examples

The following example shows how to use one-to-one mapping to map VLAN IDs 1 and 2 in a customer network to VLANs 1001 and 1002 in the service provider network and drop traffic from other VLAN IDs:

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet0/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport vlan mapping 1 1001

Switch(config-if)# switchport vlan mapping 2 1002

Switch(config-if)# exit

The following example shows how to configure selective Q-in-Q mapping on a port so that traffic with a C-VLAN ID of 5, 7, or 8 enters the switch with an S-VLAN ID of 100. The traffic of other VLAN IDs is dropped.

Switch(config)# interface gigabiethernet0/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport vlan mapping 5, 7-8 dot1q-tunnel 100

Switch(config-if)# exit

The following example shows how to configure selective Q-in-Q mapping on a port so that traffic with a C-VLAN ID of 1 to 5 enters the switch with an S-VLAN ID of 100. The traffic of other VLAN IDs is allowed.

Switch(config)# interface gigabiethernet0/1

Switch(config-if)# switchport vlan mapping 1-5 dot1q-tunnel 100

Switch(config-if)# no switchport vlan mapping default drop

Switch(config-if)# exit

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vlan mapping

Displays VLAN mapping information.

system mtu

To set the maximum Layer 2 or Layer 3 payload size, use the system mtu command. To revert to the default MTU setting, use the no form of this command.

system mtu datagram-size

no system mtu

Syntax Description

datagram-size

Layer 2 payload size; valid values from 1500 to 1552 bytes.

Command Default

The default MTU setting is 1500 bytes.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The datagram-size parameter specifies the Ethernet payload size, not the total Ethernet frame size, and the Layer 3 MTU is changed as a result of changing the system mtu command.

For ports from 3 to18 on model WS-X4418-GB and ports from 1 to 12 on model WS-X4412-2GB-TX, only the standard IEEE Ethernet payload size of 1500 bytes is supported.

For other modules, an Ethernet payload size of up to 1552 bytes is supported with a total Ethernet frame size of up to 1600 bytes.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the MTU size to 1550 bytes:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# system mtu 1550

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

The following example shows how to revert to the default MTU setting:

Switch# configure terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# no system mtu

Switch(config)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces

Displays traffic on a specific interface.

show system mtu

Displays the global MTU setting.

template data timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is only supported on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To specify a template data timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector, use the template data timeout command. To delete the value, use the no form of this command.

template data timeout seconds

no dscp dscp-value

Syntax Description

seconds

Specifies a template data timeout value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

Command Default

1800 seconds

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

Usage Guidelines

Default timeout value is 1800 seconds or 30 minutes. The timeout value configured really depends on the collector and how often it needs the templates to be refreshed.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify a template data timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# destination 5.5.5.6

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# source 5.5.5.5

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# transport udp 8188

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# ttl 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# cos 7

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# dscp 32

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# template data timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options sampler-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options interface-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# export-protocol netflow-v9 Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# exit

Switch(config)#

Display the exporter

Switch# show netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Netflow-lite Exporter exporter1:

Network Protocol Configuration:

Destination IP address: 5.5.5.6

Source IP Address: 5.5.5.5

VRF label:

DSCP: 0x20

TTL: 128

COS: 7

Transport Protocol Configuration:

Transport Protocol: UDP

Destination Port: 8188

Source Port: 61670

Export Protocol Configuration:

Export Protocol: netflow-v9

Template data timeout: 60

Options sampler-table timeout: 1800

Options interface-table timeout: 1800

Exporter Statistics:

Packets Exported: 0

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite exporter privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

options timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies an options timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

cos (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

source (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a source Layer 3 interface of the NetFlow-lite collector.

transport udp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector.

ttl (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a ttl value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

destination (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a destination address in netflow-lite submode.

template data timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a template data timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

export-protocol (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies the export protocol for the NetFlow-lite collector.

dscp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

test cable-diagnostics tdr

To test the condition of copper cables on 48-port 10/100/1000 BASE-T modules, use the

test cable-diagnostics tdr command.

test cable-diagnostics tdr {interface {interface interface-number}

Note This command will be deprecated in future Cisco IOS releases. Use the diagnostic start command instead.

Syntax Description

interface interface

Interface type; valid values are fastethernet and gigabitethernet.

interface-number

Module and port number.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(25)SG

This command on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The TDR test is supported on Catalyst 4500 series switches running Cisco IOS Release 12.2(25)SG for the following line cards only:

- WS-X4548-GB-RJ45

- WS-X4548-GB-RJ45V

- WS-X4524-GB-RJ45V

- WS-X4013+TS

- WS-C4948

- WS-C4948-10GE

The valid values for interface interface are fastethernet and gigabitethernet.

Do not start the test at the same time on both ends of the cable. Starting the test at both ends of the cable at the same time can lead to false test results.

Do not change the port configuration during any cable diagnostics test. This action may result in incorrect test results.

The interface must be operating before starting the TDR test. If the port is down, the results of the test will be invalid. Issue the no shutdown command on the port.

Examples

The following example shows how to start the TDR test on port 1 on module 2:

Switch# test cable-diagnostics tdr int gi2/1

Switch#

The following example shows the message that displays when the TDR test is not supported on a module:

Switch# test cable-diagnostics tdr int gi2/1

00:03:15:%C4K_IOSDIAGMAN-4-TESTNOTSUPPORTEDONMODULE: Online cable

diag tdr test is not supported on this module

Switch#

Note The show cable-diagnostic tdr command is used to display the results of a TDR test. The test results will not be available until approximately 1 minute after the test starts. If you enter the show cable-diagnostic tdr command within 1 minute of the test starting, you may see a “TDR test is in progress on interface...” message.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show cable-diagnostics tdr

Displays the test results for the TDR cable diagnostics.

traceroute mac

To display the Layer 2 path taken by the packets from the specified source MAC address to the specified destination MAC address, use the traceroute mac command.

traceroute mac [interface interface-id] {source-mac-address} [interface interface-id] {destination-mac-address} [vlan vlan-id] [detail]

Syntax Description

interface interface-id

(Optional) Specifies the source or destination switch interface.

source-mac-address

MAC address of the source switch in hexadecimal format.

destination-mac-address

MAC address of the destination switch in hexadecimal format.

vlan vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies the VLAN on which to trace the Layer 2 path that the packets take from the source switch to the destination switch; valid VLAN IDs are from 1 to 4094. Do not enter leading zeros.

detail

(Optional) Displays detail information.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(15)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Do not use leading zeros when entering a VLAN ID.

The Layer 2 traceroute feature is available on these switches:

- Catalyst 2950 switches running Release 12.1(12c)EA1 or later

- Catalyst 3550 switches running Release 12.1(12c)EA1 or later

- Catalyst 4500 series switches running Catalyst operating system Release 6.2 or later for the supervisor engine

- Catalyst 4500 series switches running Release 12.1(15)EW or later

- Catalyst 5000 family switches running Catalyst operating system Release 6.1 or later for the supervisor engine

- Catalyst 6500 series switches running Catalyst operating system Release 6.1 or later for the supervisor engine

For Layer 2 traceroute to functional properly, Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) must be enabled on all of the switches in the network. Do not disable CDP.

When the switch detects a device in the Layer 2 path that does not support Layer 2 traceroute, the switch continues to send Layer 2 trace queries and lets them time out.

The maximum number of hops identified in the path is ten.

Layer 2 traceroute supports only unicast traffic. If you specify a multicast source or destination MAC address, the physical path is not identified, and a message appears.

The traceroute mac command output shows the Layer 2 path when the specified source and destination addresses belong to the same VLAN. If you specify source and destination addresses that belong to different VLANs, the Layer 2 path is not identified, and a message appears.

If the source or destination MAC address belongs to multiple VLANs, you must specify the VLAN to which both the source and destination MAC addresses belong. If the VLAN is not specified, the path is not identified, and a message appears.

Layer 2 traceroute is not supported when multiple devices are attached to one port through hubs (for example, multiple CDP neighbors are detected on a port). When more than one CDP neighbor is detected on a port, the Layer 2 path is not identified, and a message appears.

This feature is not supported in Token Ring VLANs.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the Layer 2 path by specifying the source and destination MAC addresses:

Switch# traceroute mac 0000.0201.0601 0000.0201.0201

Source 0000.0201.0601 found on con6[WS-C2950G-24-EI] (2.2.6.6)

con6 (2.2.6.6) :Fa0/1 =>Fa0/3

con5 (2.2.5.5 ) : Fa0/3 =>Gi0/1

con1 (2.2.1.1 ) : Gi0/1 =>Gi0/2

con2 (2.2.2.2 ) : Gi0/2 =>Fa0/1

Destination 0000.0201.0201 found on con2[WS-C3550-24] (2.2.2.2)

Layer 2 trace completed

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the detailed Layer 2 path:

Switch# traceroute mac 0000.0201.0601 0000.0201.0201 detail

Source 0000.0201.0601 found on con6[WS-C2950G-24-EI] (2.2.6.6)

con6 / WS-C2950G-24-EI / 2.2.6.6 :

Fa0/1 [auto, auto] =>Fa0/3 [auto, auto]

con5 / WS-C2950G-24-EI / 2.2.5.5 :

Fa0/3 [auto, auto] =>Gi0/1 [auto, auto]

con1 / WS-C3550-12G / 2.2.1.1 :

Gi0/1 [auto, auto] =>Gi0/2 [auto, auto]

con2 / WS-C3550-24 / 2.2.2.2 :

Gi0/2 [auto, auto] =>Fa0/1 [auto, auto]

Destination 0000.0201.0201 found on con2[WS-C3550-24] (2.2.2.2)

Layer 2 trace completed.

Switch#

The following example shows the Layer 2 path when the switch is not connected to the source switch:

Switch# traceroute mac 0000.0201.0501 0000.0201.0201 detail

Source not directly connected, tracing source .....

Source 0000.0201.0501 found on con5[WS-C2950G-24-EI] (2.2.5.5)

con5 / WS-C2950G-24-EI / 2.2.5.5 :

Fa0/1 [auto, auto] =>Gi0/1 [auto, auto]

con1 / WS-C3550-12G / 2.2.1.1 :

Gi0/1 [auto, auto] =>Gi0/2 [auto, auto]

con2 / WS-C3550-24 / 2.2.2.2 :

Gi0/2 [auto, auto] =>Fa0/1 [auto, auto]

Destination 0000.0201.0201 found on con2[WS-C3550-24] (2.2.2.2)

Layer 2 trace completed.

Switch#

The following example shows the Layer 2 path when the switch cannot find the destination port for the source MAC address:

Switch# traceroute mac 0000.0011.1111 0000.0201.0201

Error:Source Mac address not found.

Layer2 trace aborted.

Switch#

The following example shows the Layer 2 path when the source and destination devices are in different VLANs:

Switch# traceroute mac 0000.0201.0601 0000.0301.0201

Error:Source and destination macs are on different vlans.

Layer2 trace aborted.

Switch#

The following example shows the Layer 2 path when the destination MAC address is a multicast address:

Switch# traceroute mac 0000.0201.0601 0100.0201.0201

Invalid destination mac address

Switch#

The following example shows the Layer 2 path when the source and destination switches belong to multiple VLANs:

Switch# traceroute mac 0000.0201.0601 0000.0201.0201

Error:Mac found on multiple vlans.

Layer2 trace aborted.

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the Layer 2 path by specifying the interfaces on the source and destination switches:

Switch# traceroute mac interface fastethernet0/1 0000.0201.0601 interface fastethernet0/3 0000.0201.0201

Source 0000.0201.0601 found on con6[WS-C2950G-24-EI] (2.2.6.6)

con6 (2.2.6.6) :Fa0/1 =>Fa0/3

con5 (2.2.5.5 ) : Fa0/3 =>Gi0/1

con1 (2.2.1.1 ) : Gi0/1 =>Gi0/2

con2 (2.2.2.2 ) : Gi0/2 =>Fa0/1

Destination 0000.0201.0201 found on con2[WS-C3550-24] (2.2.2.2)

Layer 2 trace completed

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

traceroute mac ip

Displays the Layer 2 path that is taken by the packets from the specified source IP address or hostname to the specified destination IP address or hostname.

traceroute mac ip

To display the Layer 2 path that is taken by the packets from the specified source IP address or hostname to the specified destination IP address or hostname, use the traceroute mac command.

traceroute mac ip {source-ip-address | source-hostname} {destination-ip-address | destination-hostname} [detail]

Syntax Description

source-ip-address

IP address of the source switch as a 32-bit quantity in dotted-decimal format.

destination-ip-address

IP address of the destination switch as a 32-bit quantity in dotted-decimal format.

source-hostname

IP hostname of the source switch.

destination-hostname

IP hostname of the destination switch.

detail

(Optional) Displays detailed traceroute MAC IP information.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The Layer 2 traceroute feature is available on these switches:

- Catalyst 2950 switches running Release 12.1(12c)EA1 or later

- Catalyst 3550 switches running Release 12.1(12c)EA1 or later

- Catalyst 4500 series switches running Catalyst operating system Release 6.2 or later for the supervisor engine

- Catalyst 4500 series switches running Release 12.1(15)EW or later

- Catalyst 5000 family switches running Catalyst operating system Release 6.1 or later for the supervisor engine

- Catalyst 6500 series switches running Catalyst operating system Release 6.1 or later for the supervisor engine

For Layer 2 traceroute to functional properly, Cisco Discovery Protocol (CDP) must be enabled on all the switches in the network. Do not disable CDP.

When the switch detects a device in the Layer 2 path that does not support Layer 2 traceroute, the switch continues to send Layer 2 trace queries and lets them time out.

The maximum number of hops identified in the path is ten.

The traceroute mac ip command output shows the Layer 2 path when the specified source and destination IP addresses are in the same subnet. When you specify the IP addresses, the switch uses Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) to associate the IP addresses with the corresponding MAC addresses and the VLAN IDs.

- If an ARP entry exists for the specified IP address, the switch uses the associated MAC address and identifies the physical path.

- If an ARP entry does not exist, the switch sends an ARP query and tries to resolve the IP address. The IP addresses must be in the same subnet. If the IP address is not resolved, the path is not identified, and a message appears.

Layer 2 traceroute is not supported when multiple devices are attached to one port through hubs (for example, multiple CDP neighbors are detected on a port). When more than one CDP neighbor is detected on a port, the Layer 2 path is not identified, and an error message appears.

This feature is not supported in Token Ring VLANs.

Examples

The following example shows how to display the Layer 2 path by specifying the source and destination IP addresses and by using the detail keyword:

Switch# traceroute mac ip 2.2.66.66 2.2.22.22 detail

Translating IP to mac.....

2.2.66.66 =>0000.0201.0601

2.2.22.22 =>0000.0201.0201

Source 0000.0201.0601 found on con6[WS-C2950G-24-EI] (2.2.6.6)

con6 / WS-C2950G-24-EI / 2.2.6.6 :

Fa0/1 [auto, auto] =>Fa0/3 [auto, auto]

con5 / WS-C2950G-24-EI / 2.2.5.5 :

Fa0/3 [auto, auto] =>Gi0/1 [auto, auto]

con1 / WS-C3550-12G / 2.2.1.1 :

Gi0/1 [auto, auto] =>Gi0/2 [auto, auto]

con2 / WS-C3550-24 / 2.2.2.2 :

Gi0/2 [auto, auto] =>Fa0/1 [auto, auto]

Destination 0000.0201.0201 found on con2[WS-C3550-24] (2.2.2.2)

Layer 2 trace completed.

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the Layer 2 path by specifying the source and destination hostnames:

Switch# traceroute mac ip con6 con2

Translating IP to mac .....

2.2.66.66 =>0000.0201.0601

2.2.22.22 =>0000.0201.0201

Source 0000.0201.0601 found on con6

con6 (2.2.6.6) :Fa0/1 =>Fa0/3

con5 (2.2.5.5 ) : Fa0/3 =>Gi0/1

con1 (2.2.1.1 ) : Gi0/1 =>Gi0/2

con2 (2.2.2.2 ) : Gi0/2 =>Fa0/1

Destination 0000.0201.0201 found on con2

Layer 2 trace completed

Switch#

The following example shows the Layer 2 path when Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) cannot associate the source IP address with the corresponding MAC address:

Switch# traceroute mac ip 2.2.66.66 2.2.77.77

Arp failed for destination 2.2.77.77.

Layer2 trace aborted.

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

traceroute mac

Displays the Layer 2 path taken by the packets from the specified source MAC address to the specified destination MAC address.

transport udp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is only supported on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To specify a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector, use the transport udp command. To delete a transport UDP, use the no form of this command.

transport udp destination-port

no transport udp destination-port

Syntax Description

destination-port

Specifies a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector.

Command Default

None

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

Usage Guidelines

One of the mandatory parameters for a minimally configured exporter along with the destination address and UDP destination port of the NetFlow-lite collector.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# destination 5.5.5.6

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# source 5.5.5.5

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# transport udp 8188

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# ttl 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# cos 7

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# dscp 32

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# template data timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options sampler-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options interface-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# export-protocol netflow-v9 Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# exit

Switch(config)#

Display the exporter

Switch# show netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Netflow-lite Exporter exporter1:

Network Protocol Configuration:

Destination IP address: 5.5.5.6

Source IP Address: 5.5.5.5

VRF label:

DSCP: 0x20

TTL: 128

COS: 7

Transport Protocol Configuration:

Transport Protocol: UDP

Destination Port: 8188

Source Port: 61670

Export Protocol Configuration:

Export Protocol: netflow-v9

Template data timeout: 60

Options sampler-table timeout: 1800

Options interface-table timeout: 1800

Exporter Statistics:

Packets Exported: 0

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite exporter privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

options timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies an options timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

cos (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

source (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a source Layer 3 interface of the NetFlow-lite collector.

transport udp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector.

ttl (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a ttl value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

destination (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a destination address in netflow-lite submode.

template data timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a template data timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

export-protocol (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies the export protocol for the NetFlow-lite collector.

dscp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

transport udp load-share (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is only supported on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To specify the number of destination ports to load balance on for a NetFlow-lite collector, use the transport udp load-share command. To delete a transport UDP, use the no form of this command.

transport udp load-share destination-port

no transport udp load-share destination-port

Syntax Description

destination-port

Specifies number of destination ports to load balance on.

Command Default

1

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

Usage Guidelines

The CLI for UDP destination port load sharing allows you leverage multiple receive packet queues in current server NICs, where the collector is running. This is an optional parameter. When number >= 2 is configured, a switch exports datagrams with a UDP destination port number that “round robins” between a set of consecutive destination UDP port numbers starting with the base udp port number and ending with base udp port number + num ports-1. Typically, netflow templates are sent on the base UDP port number and the packet sample netflow records are sent on the remaining UDP ports. So, the collector provides optimized processing for templates or metadata and packet sample records on a socket.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# destination 5.5.5.6

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# source 5.5.5.5

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# transport udp 8188

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# transport udp load-share

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# ttl 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# cos 7

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# dscp 32

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# template data timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options sampler-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options interface-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# export-protocol netflow-v9 Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# exit

Switch(config)#

Display the exporter

Switch# show netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Netflow-lite Exporter exporter1:

Network Protocol Configuration:

Destination IP address: 5.5.5.6

Source IP Address: 5.5.5.5

VRF label: none

DSCP: 0x20

TTL: 128

COS: 7

Transport Protocol Configuration:

Transport Protocol: UDP

Source Port: 50441

Destination Port: 8188

Destination Ports to Load-share: 1

Export Protocol Configuration:

Export Protocol: netflow-v9

Template data timeout: 1800

Options sampler-table timeout: 1800

Options interface-table timeout: 1800

Exporter Statistics:

Packets Exported: 56

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite exporter privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

dscp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

options timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies an options timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

cos (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

source (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a source Layer 3 interface of the NetFlow-lite collector.

transport udp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector.

ttl (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a ttl value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

destination (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a destination address in netflow-lite submode.

template data timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a template data timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

export-protocol (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies the export protocol for the NetFlow-lite collector.

trust

To define a trust state for traffic classified through the class policy-map configuration command, use the trust policy-map class configuration command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

trust [cos | dscp]

no trust [cos | dscp]

Syntax Description

cos

(Optional) Classifies an ingress packet by using the packet class of service (CoS) value. For an untagged packet, the port default CoS value is used.

dscp

(Optional) Classifies an ingress packet by using the packet Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) values (most significant 6 bits of 8-bit service-type field). For a non-IP packet, the packet CoS value is used if the packet is tagged. If the packet is untagged, the default port CoS value is used to map CoS to DSCP.

Command Default

The action is not trusted.

Command Modes

Policy-map class configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is not supported on the Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervisor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

Use this command to distinguish the quality of service (QoS) trust behavior for certain traffic from other traffic. For example, inbound traffic with certain DSCP values can be trusted. You can configure a class map to match and trust the DSCP values in the inbound traffic.

Trust values set with this command supersede trust values set with the qos trust interface configuration command.

If you specify trust cos, QoS uses the received or default port CoS value and the CoS-to-DSCP map to generate a DSCP value for the packet.

If you specify trust dscp, QoS uses the DSCP value from the ingress packet. For non-IP packets that are tagged, QoS uses the received CoS value; for non-IP packets that are untagged, QoS uses the default port CoS value. In either case, the DSCP value for the packet is derived from the CoS-to-DSCP map.

To return to policy-map configuration mode, use the exit command. To return to privileged EXEC mode, use the end command.

Examples

The following example shows how to define a port trust state to trust inbound DSCP values for traffic classified with “class1”:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# policy-map policy1

Switch(config-pmap)# class class1

Switch(config-pmap-c)# trust dscp

Switch(config-pmap-c)# police 1000000 20000 exceed-action policed-dscp-transmit

Switch(config-pmap-c)# exit

Switch#

You can verify your settings by entering the show policy-map privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

class

Specifies the name of the class whose traffic policy you want to create or change.

police

Configures the Traffic Policing feature.

policy-map

Creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

set

Marks IP traffic by setting a class of service (CoS), a Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP), or IP-precedence in the packet.

show policy-map

Displays information about the policy map.

ttl (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is only supported on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To specify a ttl value for the NetFlow-lite collector, use the ttl command. To delete the value, use the no form of this command.

ttl ttl-value

no ttl ttl-value

Syntax Description

ttl-value

Specifies a ttl value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

Valid values are from 1 to 254.

Command Default

254

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

Usage Guidelines

The ttl limit takes effect only when the export packets are based on IPv4. It has no effect on IPv6.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify a ttl value for the NetFlow-lite collector:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# destination 5.5.5.6

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# source 5.5.5.5

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# transport udp 8188

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# ttl 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# cos 7

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# dscp 32

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# template data timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options sampler-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options interface-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# export-protocol netflow-v9 Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# exit

Switch(config)#

Display the exporter

Switch# show netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Netflow-lite Exporter exporter1:

Network Protocol Configuration:

Destination IP address: 5.5.5.6

Source IP Address: 5.5.5.5

VRF label:

DSCP: 0x20

TTL: 128

COS: 7

Transport Protocol Configuration:

Transport Protocol: UDP

Destination Port: 8188

Source Port: 61670

Export Protocol Configuration:

Export Protocol: netflow-v9

Template data timeout: 60

Options sampler-table timeout: 1800

Options interface-table timeout: 1800

Exporter Statistics:

Packets Exported: 0

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite exporter privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

dscp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

options timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies an options timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

cos (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

source (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a source Layer 3 interface of the NetFlow-lite collector.

transport udp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector.

destination (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a destination address in netflow-lite submode.

template data timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a template data timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

tx-queue

To configure the transmit queue parameters for an interface, use the tx-queue command. To return to the default value, use the no form of this command.

tx-queue [queue-id] {bandwidth bandwidth-rate | priority high | shape shape-rate}

no tx-queue

Syntax Description

queue-id

(Optional) Number of the queue; valid values are from 1 to 4.

bandwidth bandwidth-rate

Specifies traffic bandwidth; valid values are from 16000 to 1000000000 bits per second.

priority high

Specifies high priority.

shape shape-rate

Specifies the maximum rate that packets are passed through a transmit queue; valid values are from 16000 to 1000000000 bits per second.

Command Default

The default settings are as follows:

- Encapsulation type is dependent on the platform or interface hardware.

- QoS enabled bandwidth rate is 4:255.

- QoS disabled bandwidth rate is 255:1.

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

This command is not supported on Supervisor Engine 6-E, Supervsor Engine 6L-E, Catalyst 4900M, Catalyst 4948E, and Catalyst 4948E-F.

The bandwidth and shape rates cannot exceed the maximum speed of the interface.

The bandwidth can be configured only on the following:

- Ports on the WS-X4306-GB module

- The two 1000BASE-X ports on the WS-X4232-GB-RJ module

- The first two ports on the WS-X4418-GB module

- The two 1000BASE-X ports on the WS-X4412-2GB-TX module

Only transmit queue 3 can be configured to be a high-priority transmit queue.

Examples

The following example shows how to allocate bandwidth on queue 1 to 100 Mbps:

Switch(config-if)# tx-queue 1

Switch(config-if-tx-queue)# bandwidth 1000000000

Switch(config-if-tx-queue)#

The following example shows how to configure transmit queue 3 to the high priority:

Switch(config-if)# tx-queue 3

Switch(config-if-tx-queue)# priority high

Switch(config-if-tx-queue)#

The following example shows how to configure the traffic shaping rate of 64 kbps to transmit queue 1:

Switch(config-if)# tx-queue 1

Switch(config-if-tx-queue)# shape 64000

Switch(config-if-tx-queue)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show qos interface

Displays queueing information.

udld (global configuration mode)

To enable aggressive or normal mode in the UDLD protocol and to set the configurable message timer time, use the udld global configuration command. You can also use this command to set the error reporting mode for Fast UDLD.

Use the no form of this command to do the following:

- Disable normal mode UDLD on all the fiber ports by default

- Disable aggressive mode UDLD on all the fiber ports by default

- Disable the message timer

- Disable Fast UDLD error reporting mode

udld enable | aggressive

no udld enable | aggressive

udld message time message-timer-time

no udld message time

udld fast-hello error-reporting

no udld fast-hello error-reporting

Syntax Description

enable

Enables UDLD in normal mode by default on all the fiber-optic interfaces.

aggressive

Enables UDLD in aggressive mode by default on all the fiber-optic interfaces.

message time message-timer-time

fast-hello error-reporting

Sets the period of time between the UDLD probe messages on the ports that are in advertisement mode and are currently determined to be bidirectional; valid values are from 1 to 90 seconds.

If Fast UDLD is enabled and a link failure is detected, reports the link failure through a log message instead of errdisabling the port.

Command Default

All fiber-optic interfaces are disabled and the message timer for UDLD is set to 15 seconds.

Fast UDLD is disabled on all interfaces.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(54)SG

Support for Fast UDLD was added.

Usage Guidelines

If you enable aggressive mode, once all the switch port’s neighbors have aged out either in the advertisement or in the detection phase, UDLD and Fast UDLD restart the linkup sequence. They can resynchronize with any potentially out-of-sync neighbor and shut down the port if the UDLD messages from the neighbor indicate that the link state is still undetermined.

This command affects fiber interfaces only. Use the udld (interface configuration mode) command to enable UDLD on other interface types.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable UDLD on all the fiber interfaces:

Switch (config)# udld enable

Switch (config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show udld

Displays the administrative and operational UDLD status.

udld (interface configuration mode)

Enables UDLD and Fast UDLD on an individual interface or prevents a fiber interface from being enabled by the udld (global configuration mode) command.

udld (interface configuration mode)

To enable UDLD and Fast UDLD on an individual interface or to prevent a fiber-optic interface from being enabled by the udld (global configuration mode) command, use the udld interface level command. Use the no form of this command to disable UDLD, or to return a nonfiber port to the setting specified with the udld (global configuration mode) command.

udld port {aggressive | disable}

no udld port {aggressive | disable}

udld fast-hello interval

no udld fast-hello

Syntax Description

aggressive

Enables UDLD in aggressive mode.

disable

Disables UDLD.

fast-hello

Enables Fast UDLD with the configured timer.

interval

Sets the timer interval.

Command Default

The fiber-optic interfaces are enabled with the state of the global udld (enable or aggressive) command. The nonfiber interfaces are enabled with UDLD disabled.

Fast UDLD is disabled.

Command Modes

Interface configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

12.2(54)SG

Support was added for Fast UDLD.

Usage Guidelines

If you enable aggressive mode, once all the switch port’s neighbors have aged out either in the advertisement or in the detection phase, UDLD and Fast UDLD restart the linkup sequence. They can resynchronize with any potentially out-of-sync neighbor and shut down the port if the UDLD messages from the neighbor indicate that the link state is still undetermined

Use the udld port aggressive command on fiber-optic ports to override the setting of the global udld (enable or aggressive) command. Use the no form of the command on fiber-optic ports to restore the UDLD state as configured by the global udld command.

If udld enable is configured globally, UDLD is enabled on all fiber-optic interfaces in nonaggressive mode. You can configure udld port aggressive on a fiber-optic interface to override the udld enable command setting and to enter aggressive mode. If you enter the

no udld port aggresive command, the settings of the previous global state are reestablished and the aggressive mode is removed.

The disable keyword is supported on fiber-optic ports only. Use the no form of the udld command to reset UDLD to the value specified by the udld (global configuration mode) command.

If the port changes from fiber-optic to nonfiber-optic or vice versa, all configurations are maintained.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable UDLD on any port interface for any global udld (global configuration mode) setting:

Switch (config-if)# udld port

Switch (config-if)#

The following example shows how to enable UDLD in aggressive mode on any port interface for any global udld (enable or aggressive) setting:

Switch (config-if)# udld port aggressive

Switch (config-if)#

The following example shows how to disable UDLD on a fiber port interface for any global udld (global configuration mode) setting:

Switch (config-if)# udld disable

Switch (config-if)#

The following example shows how to enable Fast UDLD on a port interface with a timer value of 200 ms. To enable Fast UDLD on a port, you must first enable UDLD in normal or aggressive mode:

Switch (config-if)# udld port

Switch (config-if)# udld fast-hello 200

Switch (config-if)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show udld

Displays the administrative and operational UDLD and Fast UDLD status.

udld (global configuration mode)

Enables aggressive or normal mode in the UDLD protocol and sets the configurable message timer time.

udld reset

To reset all the UDLD ports in the shutdown state (that is, errdisabled by UDLD), use the udld reset priviledged EXEC command.

udld reset

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If the interface configuration is still enabled for UDLD, those ports will begin to run UDLD again and may shut down if the reason for the shutdown has not been resolved.

The udld reset command permits the traffic to flow on the ports again. Other features, operate normally if enabled, such as STP, PAgP, and DTP.

Examples

The following example shows how to reset all the ports that are shut down by UDLD:

Switch# udld reset

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show udld

Displays the administrative and operational UDLD status.

unidirectional

To configure the nonblocking Gigabit Ethernet ports to unidirectionally send or receive traffic on an interface, use the unidirectional command. To disable unidirectional communication, use the no form of this command.

unidirectional {receive-only | send-only}

no unidirectional {receive-only | send-only}

Syntax Description

receive-only

Specifies the unidirectional reception.

send-only

Specifies the unidirectional transmission.

Command Default

Disabled

Command Modes

Interface configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Enabling port unidirectional mode automatically disables port UDLD. You must manually ensure that the unidirectional link does not create a spanning-tree loop in the network.

Examples

The following example shows how to set Gigabit Ethernet interface 1/1 to receive traffic unidirectionally:

Switch# config terminal

Enter configuration commands, one per line. End with CNTL/Z.

Switch(config)# interface gigabitethernet 1/1

Switch(config-if)# unidirectional receive-only

Switch(config-if)# end

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show interfaces switchport

Displays the administrative and operational status of a switching (nonrouting) port.

username

To establish a username-based authentication system, use the username command.

username name secret {0 | 5} password

Syntax Description

name

User ID of the user.

secret 0 | 5

Specifies the authentication system for the user; valid values are 0 (text immediately following is not encrypted) and 5 (text immediately following is encrypted using an MD5-type encryption method).

password

Password of the user.

Command Default

No username-based authentication system is established.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Use this command to enable enhanced password security for the specified username. This command enables MD5 encryption on the password. MD5 encryption is a strong encryption method that is not retrievable. You cannot use MD5 encryption with protocols that require clear-text passwords, such as CHAP.

You can use this command for defining usernames that get special treatment. For example, you can define an “info” username that does not require a password but that connects the user to a general-purpose information service.

The username command provides both username and secret authentication for login purposes only.

The name argument can be only one word. White spaces and quotation marks are not allowed.

You can use multiple username commands to specify options for a single user.

For information about additional username commands, refer to the Cisco IOS Command Reference.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify an MD5 encryption on a password (warrior) for a username (xena):

Switch(config)# username xena secret 5 warrior

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

enable password (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Sets a local password to control access to various privilege levels.

enable secret (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Specifies an additional layer of security over the enable password command.

username (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Establishes a username-based authentication system.

verify

To verify the checksum of a file on a flash memory file system, use the verify command.

verify [/md5] [flash-filesystem:] [filename] [expected-md5-signature]

Syntax Description

/md5

(Optional) Verifies the MD5 signatures.

flash-filesystem:

(Optional) Device where the fash resides; valid values are bootflash:, slot0:, flash:, or sup-bootflash:.

filename

(Optional) Name of the Cisco IOS image.

expected-md5-signature

(Optional) MD5 signature.

Command Default

The current working device is specified.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

Each software image that is distributed on the disk uses a single checksum for the entire image. This checksum is displayed only when the image is copied into the flash memory.

The Readme file, which is included with the image on the disk, lists the name, file size, and checksum of the image. Review the contents of the Readme file before loading or duplicating the new image so that you can verify the checksum when you copy it into the flash memory or on to a server.

Use the verify /md5 command to verify the MD5 signature of a file before using it. This command validates the integrity of a copied file by comparing a precomputed MD5 signature with the signature that is computed by this command. If the two MD5 signatures match, the copied file is identical to the original file.

You can find the MD5 signature posted on the Cisco.com page with the image.

You can use the verify /md5 command in one of the following ways:

- Verify the MD5 signatures manually by entering the verify /md5 filename command.

Check the displayed signature against the MD5 signature posted on the Cisco.com page.

- Allow the system to compare the MD5 signatures by entering the verify /md5 { flash-filesystem : filename } { expected-md5-signature } command.

After completing the comparison, the system returns with a verified message. If an error is detected, the output is similar to the following:

Switch# verify /md5 slot0:c4-jsv-mz 0f

..................................

..................................

..................................

..................................

..................................

...............................Done!

%Error verifying slot0:c4-jsv-mz

Computed signature = 0f369ed9e98756f179d4f29d6e7755d3

Submitted signature = 0f

To display the contents of the flash memory, enter the show flash command. The flash contents listing does not include the checksum of the individual files. To recompute and verify the image checksum after the image has been copied into the flash memory, enter the verify command.

A colon (:) is required after the specified device.

Examples

The following example shows how to use the verify command:

Switch# verify cat6k_r47_1.cbi

..........................................................

File cat6k_r47_1.cbi verified OK.

Switch#

The following example shows how to manually verify the MD5 signature:

Switch# verify /md5 c4-jsv-mz

.................................................

.................................................

.................................................

.................................................

.................................................

............................................Done!

verify /md5 (slot0:c4-jsv-mz) = 0f369ed9e98756f179d4f29d6e7755d3

Switch#

The following example shows how to allow the system to compare the MD5 signatures:

Switch# verify /md5 slot0:c4-jsv-mz 0f369ed9e98756f179d4f29d6e7755d3

.................................................

.................................................

.................................................

.................................................

.................................................

............................................Done!

verified /md5 (slot0:c6sup12-jsv-mz) = 0f369ed9e98756f179d4f29d6e7755d3

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show file system (Flash file system) (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Displays available file systems.

show flash (refer to Cisco IOS documentation)

Displays the contents of flash memory.

vlan (VLAN Database mode)

To configure a specific VLAN, use the vlan command. To delete a VLAN, use the no form of this command.

vlan vlan_id [are hops] [backupcrf mode] [bridge type | bridge-num] [media type] [mtu mtu-size] [name vlan-name] [parent parent-vlan-id] [ring ring-number] [said said-value] [state {suspend | active}] [stp type type] [tb-vlan1 tb-vlan1-id] [tb-vlan2 tb-vlan2-id]

no vlan vlan

Syntax Description

vlan_id

Number of the VLAN; valid values are from 1 to 4094.

are hops

(Optional) Specifies the maximum number of All Route Explorer hops for this VLAN; valid values are from 0 to 13. Zero is assumed if no value is specified.

backupcrf mode

(Optional) Enables or disables the backup CRF mode of the VLAN; valid values are enable and disable.

bridge type

(Optional) Specifies the bridging characteristics of the VLAN or identification number of the bridge; valid type values are srb and srt.

bridge_num

(Optional) Valid bridge_num values are from 0 to 15.

media type

(Optional) Specifies the media type of the VLAN; valid values are fast ethernet, fd-net, fddi, trcrf, and trbrf.

mtu mtu-size

(Optional) Specifies the maximum transmission unit (packet size, in bytes) that the VLAN can use; valid values are from 576 to 18190.

name vlan-name

(Optional) Defines a text string used as the name of the VLAN (1 to 32 characters).

parent parent-vlan-id

(Optional) Specifies the ID number of the parent VLAN of FDDI or Token Ring-type VLANs; valid values are from 2 to 1001.

ring ring-number

(Optional) Specifies the ring number of FDDI or Token Ring-type VLANs; valid values are from 2 to 1001.

said said-value

(Optional) Specifies the security association identifier; valid values are from 1 to 4294967294.

state

(Optional) Specifies the state of the VLAN.

suspend

Specifies that the state of the VLAN is suspended. VLANs in the suspended state do not pass packets.

active

Specifies that the state of the VLAN is active.

stp type type

(Optional) Specifies the STP type; valid values are ieee, ibm, and auto.

tb-vlan1 tb-vlan1-id

(Optional) Specifies the ID number of the first translational VLAN for this VLAN; valid values are from 2 to 1001. Zero is assumed if no value is specified.

tb-vlan2 tb-vlan2-id

(Optional) Specifies the ID number of the second translational VLAN for this VLAN; valid values are from 2 to 1001. Zero is assumed if no value is specified.

Command Default

The defaults are as follows:

- The vlan-name is “VLANxxxx” where “xxxx” represents four numeric digits (including leading zeroes) equal to the VLAN ID number.

- The media type is Fast Ethernet.

- The state is active.

- The said-value is 100,000 plus the VLAN ID number.

- The mtu-size default is dependent upon the VLAN type:

– fddi—1500

– trcrf—1500 if V2 is not enabled; 4472 if it is enabled

– fd-net—1500

– trbrf—1500 if V2 is not enabled; 4472 if it is enabled

- No ring number is specified.

- No bridge number is s pecified.

- No parent VLAN is specified.

- No STP type is specified.

- No transl ational bridge VLAN is specified.

Command Modes

VLAN configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

VLAN 1 parameters are factory configured and cannot be changed.

When you define vlan-name, the name must be unique within the administrative domain.

The SAID is documented in 802.10. When the no form is used, the VLANs SAID is returned to the default.

When you define the said-value, the name must be unique within the administrative domain.

The bridge bridge-number argument is used only for Token Ring-net and FDDI-net VLANs and is ignored in other types of VLANs. When the no form is used, the VLANs source-route bridging number returns to the default.

The parent VLAN resets to the default if the parent VLAN is deleted or the media keyword changes the VLAN type or the VLAN type of the parent VLAN.

The tb-vlan1 and tb-vlan2 are used to configure translational bridge VLANs of a specified type of VLAN and are not allowed in other types of VLANs. The translational bridge VLANs must be a different VLAN type than the affected VLAN; if two VLANs are specified, the two must be different VLAN types.

A translational bridge VLAN will reset to the default if the translational bridge VLAN is deleted or the media keyword changes the VLAN type or the VLAN type of the corresponding translational bridge VLAN.

Examples

The following example shows how to add a new VLAN with all the default parameters to the new VLAN database:

Switch(vlan)# vlan 2

Note If the VLAN already exists, no action occurs.

The following example shows how to cause the device to add a new VLAN, specify the media type and parent VLAN ID number 3, and set all the other parameters to the defaults:

Switch(vlan)# vlan 2 media fastethernet parent 3

VLAN 2 modified:

Media type FASTETHERNET

Parent VLAN 3

The following example shows how to delete VLAN 2:

Switch(vlan)# no vlan 2

Switch(vlan)#

The following example shows how to return the MTU to the default for its type and the translational bridging VLANs to the default:

Switch(vlan)# no vlan 2 mtu tb-vlan1 tb-vlan2

Switch(vlan)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vlan

Displays VLAN information.

vlan access-map

To enter VLAN access-map command mode to create a VLAN access map, use the vlan access-map command. To remove a mapping sequence or the entire map, use the no form of this command.

vlan access-map name [seq# ]

no vlan access-map name [seq# ]

Syntax Description

name

VLAN access-map tag.

seq#

(Optional) Map sequence number; valid values are from 0 to 65535.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If you enter the sequence number of an existing map sequence, you enter VLAN access-map mode. If you do not specify a sequence number, a number is automatically assigned. You can enter one match clause and one action clause per map sequence. If you enter the no vlan access-map name [seq# ] command without entering a sequence number, the whole map is removed. Once you enter VLAN access-map mode, the following commands are available:

- action — Sets the action to be taken (forward or drop).

- default — Returns a command to its default settings.

- end — Exits from configuration mode.

- exit — Exits from VLAN access-map configuration mode.

- match — Sets the values to match (IP address or MAC address).

- no — Negates a command or reset its defaults.

Examples

The following example shows how to enter VLAN access-map mode:

Switch(config)# vlan access-map cisco

Switch(config-access-map)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

match

Specifies a match clause by selecting one or more ACLs for a VLAN access-map sequence.

show vlan access-map

Displays the contents of a VLAN access map.

vlan configuration

To configure a service-policy on a VLAN, use the vlan configuration command to enter the VLAN feature configuration mode.

vlan configuration {vlan}

Syntax Description

vlan

Specifies a list of VLANs. “,” “-” operators can be used; such as, 1-10,20.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(40)SG

This command was introduced on Catalyst 4900M and Supervisor Engine 6E.

Usage Guidelines

Even though an SVI is not needed in all cases, such as when you use your Catalyst 4500 series switch as a pure Layer 2 switch, you are required to create an SVI.

VLAN configuration mode has been inroduced to remove the requirement of creating an SVI. With this command you can specify lists of VLANs and the input and output policies that are applied. To configure your system in this mode there is no requirement for you to create SVIs, or create VLAN or VTP mode interactions. Once the VLAN becomes active the configuration becomes active on that VLAN. You can use “-” or “,” extensions to specifying VLAN list.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure a service policy while in VLAN configuration mode and display the new service policy:

Switch# configure terminal

Switch(config)# vlan configuration 30-40

Switch(config-vlan-config)# service-policy input p1

Switch(config-vlan-config)# end

Switch# show running configuration | begin vlan configuration

!

vlan configuration 30-40

service-policy input p1

!

vlan internal allocation policy ascending !

vlan 2-1000

!

Switch#

The following example shows how to display the new service policy:

Switch# show policy-map vlan 30

vlan 30

Service-policy input: p1

Class-map: class-default (match-any)

0 packets

Match: any

0 packets

police:

rate 128000 bps, burst 4000 bytes

conformed 0 packets, 0 bytes; action:

transmit

exceeded 0 packets, 0 bytes; action:

drop

conformed 0 bps, exceeded 0 bps

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

vlan (VLAN Database mode)

Configures a specific VLAN.

policy-map

Creates a policy map that can be attached to multiple ports to specify a service policy and to enter policy-map configuration mode.

vlan database

To enter VLAN configuration mode, use the vlan database command.

vlan database

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

From VLAN configuration mode, you can access the VLAN database editing buffer manipulation commands, including:

- abort —Exits mode without applying the changes.

- apply —Applies the current changes and bumps the revision number.

- exit —Applies the changes, bumps the revision number, and exits VLAN configuration mode.

- no —Negates a command or sets its defaults; valid values are vlan and vtp .

- reset —Abandons the current changes and rereads the current database.

- show —Displays the database information.

- vlan —Accesses the subcommands to add, delete, or modify values that are associated with a single VLAN. For information about the vlan subcommands, see the vlan (VLAN Database mode) command.

- vtp —Accesses the subcommands to perform VTP administrative functions. For information about the vtp subcommands, see the vtp client command.

Examples

The following example shows how to enter VLAN configuration mode:

Switch# vlan database

Switch(vlan)#

The following example shows how to exit VLAN configuration mode without applying changes after you are in VLAN configuration mode:

Switch(vlan)# abort

Aborting....

Switch#

The following example shows how to delete a VLAN after you are in VLAN configuration mode:

Switch(vlan)# no vlan 100

Deleting VLAN 100...

Switch(vlan)#

The following example shows how to turn off pruning after you are in VLAN configuration mode:

Switch(vlan)# no vtp pruning

Pruning switched OFF

Switch(vlan)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vlan

Displays VLAN information.

vlan dot1q tag native

To enable tagging of the native VLAN frames on all 802.1Q trunk ports, use the vlan dot1q tag native command. To disable tagging of native VLAN frames, use the no form of this command.

vlan dot1q tag native

no vlan dot1q tag native

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

802.1Q native VLAN tagging is disabled.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(18)EW

This command was first introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When enabled, the native VLAN packets exiting all 802.1Q trunk ports are tagged unless the port is explicitly configured to disable native VLAN tagging.

When disabled, the native VLAN packets exiting all 802.1Q trunk ports are not tagged.

You can use this command with 802.1Q tunneling. This feature operates on an edge switch of a service-provider network and expands VLAN space by using a VLAN-in-VLAN hierarchy and by tagging the tagged packets. You must use the 802.1Q trunk ports for sending out the packets to the service-provider network. However, the packets going through the core of the service-provider network might also be carried on the 802.1Q trunks. If the native VLANs of an 802.1Q trunk match the native VLAN of a tunneling port on the same switch, the traffic on the native VLAN is not tagged on the sending trunk port. This command ensures that the native VLAN packets on all 802.1Q trunk ports are tagged.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable 802.1Q tagging on the native VLAN frames and verify the configuration:

Switch# config terminal

Switch (config)# vlan dot1q tag native

Switch (config)# end

Switch# show vlan dot1q tag native

dot1q native vlan tagging is enabled

Related Commands

Command

Description

switchport private-vlan trunk native vlan tag

Configures the tagging of the native VLAN traffic on 802.1Q private VLAN trunks.

switchport trunk

Sets the trunk characteristics when an interface is in trunking mode.

vlan filter

To apply a VLAN access map, use the vlan filter command. To clear the VLAN access maps from VLANs or interfaces, use the no form of this command.

vlan filter map-name {vlan-list vlan-list}

no vlan filter map-name {vlan-list [vlan-list]}

Syntax Description

map-name

VLAN access-map tag.

vlan-list vlan-list

Specifies the VLAN list; see the “Usage Guidelines” section for valid values.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(12c)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When configuring an action clause in a VLAN access map, note the following:

- You can apply the VLAN access map to one or more VLANs.

- The vlan-list parameter can be a single VLAN ID, a list of VLAN IDs, or VLAN ID ranges ( vlan-id - vlan-id ). Multiple entries are separated by (-), (hyphen), or (,) (comma).

- You can apply only one VLAN access map to each VLAN.

When entering the no form of this command, the vlan-list parameter is optional (but the keyword vlan-list is required). If you do not enter the vlan-list parameter, the VACL is removed from all the VLANs where the map-name is applied.

Examples

The following example shows how to apply a VLAN access map on VLANs 7 through 9:

Switch(config)# vlan filter ganymede vlan-list 7-9

Switch(config)#

vlan group

To create or modify a VLAN group, use the vlan group command in global configuration mode. Use the no form of this command to remove a VLAN list from the VLAN group.

vlan group group-name vlan-list vlan-list

no vlan group group-name vlan-list vlan-list

Syntax Description

group-name

Specifies the VLAN group name.

vlan-list

Specifies a VLAN list name. See the Usage Guidelines section below for additional information about this argument.

Command Default

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Modes

Global configuration

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(54)SG

This command was modified to support user distribution on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The VLAN group name can contain up to 31 characters and must begin with a letter.

The vlan-list argument can be a single VLAN ID, a list of VLAN IDs, or VLAN ID ranges (vlan-id-vlan-id). Multiple entries are separated by a hyphen (-) or a comma (,).

If the named VLAN group does not exist, the vlan group command creates the group and maps the specified VLAN list to the group. If the named VLAN group exists, the specified VLAN list is mapped to the group.

The no form of the vlan group command removes the specified VLAN list from the VLAN group. When you remove the last VLAN from the VLAN group, you delete the VLAN group.

You can configure a maximum of 100 VLAN groups, and map a maximum of 4094 VLANs to a VLAN group.

Examples

The following example shows how to map VLANs 7 through 9 and 11 to a VLAN group:

Switch(config)# vlan group ganymede vlan-list 7-9,11

The following example shows how to remove VLAN 7 from the VLAN group:

Switch(config)# no vlan group ganymede vlan-list 7

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vlan group

Displays the VLANs mapped to VLAN groups.

vlan internal allocation policy

To configure the internal VLAN allocation scheme, use the vlan internal allocation policy command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

vlan internal allocation policy {ascending | descending}

no vlan internal allocation policy

Syntax Description

ascending

Specifies to allocate internal VLANs from 1006 to 4094.

descending

Specifies to allocate internal VLANs from 4094 to 1006.

Command Default

The default is the ascending allocation scheme.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(19)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You can configure internal VLAN allocation to be from 1006 and up or from 4094 and down.

The internal VLANs and user-configured VLANs share the 1006 to 4094 VLAN spaces. A “first come, first served” policy is used in allocating these spaces.

The vlan internal allocation policy command allows you to configure the allocation direction of the internal VLAN.

During system bootup, the internal VLANs that are required for features in the startup-config file are allocated first. The user-configured VLANs in the startup-config file are configured next. If you configure a VLAN that conflicts with an existing internal VLAN, the VLAN that you configured is put into a nonoperational status until the internal VLAN is freed and becomes available.

After you enter the write mem command and the system reloads, the reconfigured allocation scheme is used by the port manager.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the VLANs in a descending order as the internal VLAN allocation policy:

Switch(config)# vlan internal allocation policy descending

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vlan internal usage

Displays information about the internal VLAN allocation.

vmps reconfirm (global configuration)

To change the reconfirmation interval for the VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) client, use the vmps reconfirm command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

vmps reconfirm interval

no vmps reconfirm

Syntax Description

interval

Queries to the VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS) to reconfirm dynamic VLAN assignments; valid values are from 1 to 120 minutes.

Command Default

The reconfirmation interval is 60 minutes.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the VQP client to reconfirm dynamic VLAN entries every 20 minutes:

Switch(config)# vmps reconfirm 20

Switch(config)#

You can verify your setting by entering the show vmps command and examining information in the Reconfirm Interval row.

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vmps

Displays the VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) version, reconfirmation interval, retry count, VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS) IP addresses, current servers, and primary servers.

vmps reconfirm (privileged EXEC)

Sends VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) queries to reconfirm all the dynamic VLAN assignments with the VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS).

vmps reconfirm (privileged EXEC)

To immediately send VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) queries to reconfirm all the dynamic VLAN assignments with the VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS), use the vmps reconfirm command.

vmps reconfirm

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

Privileged EXEC mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch..

Usage Guidelines

You can verify your setting by entering the show vmps command and examining the VMPS Action row of the Reconfirmation Status section. The show vmps command shows the result of the last time that the assignments were reconfirmed either because the reconfirmation timer expired or because the vmps reconfirm command was entered.

Examples

The following example shows how to immediately send VQP queries to the VMPS:

Switch# vmps reconfirm

Switch#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vmps

Displays the VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) version, reconfirmation interval, retry count, VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS) IP addresses, current servers, and primary servers.

vmps reconfirm (global configuration)

Changes the reconfirmation interval for the VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) client.

vmps retry

To configure the per-server retry count for the VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) client, use the vmps retry command. To return to the default setting, use the no form of this command.

vmps retry count

no vmps retry

Syntax Description

count

Number of attempts to contact the VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS) by the client before querying the next server in the list; valid values are from 1 to 10.

Command Default

The retry count is 3.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(13)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You can verify your setting by entering the show vmps command and examining information in the Server Retry Count row.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the retry count to 7:

Switch(config)# vmps retry 7

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vmps

Displays the VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) version, reconfirmation interval, retry count, VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS) IP addresses, current servers, and primary servers.

vmps server

To configure the primary VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS) and up to three secondary servers, use the vmps server command. To remove a VMPS server, use the no form of this command.

vmps server ipaddress [primary]

no vmps server ipaddress

Syntax Description

ipaddress

IP address or host name of the primary or secondary VMPS servers. If you specify a hostname, the Domain Name System (DNS) server must be configured.

primary

(Optional) Determines whether primary or secondary VMPS servers are being configured.

Command Default

No primary or secondary VMPS servers are defined.

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(4)EA1

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The first server that you entered is automatically selected as the primary server whether or not primary is entered. You can override the first server address by using primary in a subsequent command.

If a member switch in a cluster configuration does not have an IP address, the cluster does not use the VMPS server that is configured for that member switch. Instead, the cluster uses the VMPS server on the command switch, and the command switch proxies the VMPS requests. The VMPS server treats the cluster as a single switch and uses the IP address of the command switch to respond to requests.

When using the no form without specifying the ipaddress, all configured servers are deleted. If you delete all servers when dynamic-access ports are present, the switch cannot forward the packets from the new sources on these ports because it cannot query the VMPS.

You can verify your setting by entering the show vmps command and examining information in the VMPS Domain Server row.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the server with IP address 191.10.49.20 as the primary VMPS server. The servers with IP addresses 191.10.49.21 and 191.10.49.22 are configured as secondary servers:

Switch(config)# vmps server 191.10.49.20 primary

Switch(config)# vmps server 191.10.49.21

Switch(config)# vmps server 191.10.49.22

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to delete the server with IP address 191.10.49.21:

Switch(config)# no vmps server 191.10.49.21

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vmps

Displays the VLAN Query Protocol (VQP) version, reconfirmation interval, retry count, VLAN Membership Policy Server (VMPS) IP addresses, current servers, and primary servers.

vrf (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Note NetFlow-lite is only supported on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

To specify a VRF label for the NetFlow-lite collector, use the vrf command. To delete a VRF label, use the no form of this command.

vrf source-address

no vrf source-address

Syntax Description

vrf-label

Specifies a VRF label for the NetFlow-lite collector.

Command Default

global vrf

Command Modes

netflow-lite exporter submode

Command History

Release

Modification

15.0(2)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4948E and Catalyst 4948E-F Ethernet switches.

Usage Guidelines

By default when no vrf label is specified the global vrf is used for routing. The vrf label is ignored if the collector's address is IPv6. Default global routing table is used to route the IPv6 export packets to the collector.

Note Support for VRF with IPv6 will be provided in a later release.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify a VRF label for the NetFlow-lite collector:

Switch# config terminal

Switch(config)# netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# destination 5.5.5.6

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# source 5.5.5.5

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# transport udp 8188

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# ttl 128

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# cos 7

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# dscp 32

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# template data timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options sampler-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# options interface-table timeout 1

Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# export-protocol netflow-v9 Switch(config-netflow-lite-exporter)# exit

Switch(config)#

Display the exporter

Switch# show netflow-lite exporter exporter1

Netflow-lite Exporter exporter1:

Network Protocol Configuration:

Destination IP address: 5.5.5.6

Source IP Address: 5.5.5.5

VRF label:

DSCP: 0x20

TTL: 128

COS: 7

Transport Protocol Configuration:

Transport Protocol: UDP

Destination Port: 8188

Source Port: 61670

Export Protocol Configuration:

Export Protocol: netflow-v9

Template data timeout: 60

Options sampler-table timeout: 1800

Options interface-table timeout: 1800

Exporter Statistics:

Packets Exported: 0

You can verify your settings with the show netflow-lite exporter privileged EXEC command.

Related Commands

Command

Description

dscp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

cos (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a cos value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

source (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a source Layer 3 interface of the NetFlow-lite collector.

transport udp (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a UDP transport destination port for a NetFlow-lite collector.

ttl (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a ttl value for the NetFlow-lite collector.

destination (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a destination address in netflow-lite submode.

template data timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies a template data timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

options timeout (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies an options timeout for the NetFlow-lite collector.

export-protocol (netflow-lite exporter submode)

Specifies the export protocol for the NetFlow-lite collector.

vslp interval (virtual switch)

To configure the virtual switch link protocol (VSLP) hello packet interval, use the vslp interval command in interface configuration mode. To return to the default settings, use the no form of this command.

vslp interval interval min_rx min-interval multiplier factor

no vslp interval

Syntax Description

interval

Specifies the hello packet interval in milliseconds between the transmission of hello packets. Range: 300 to 5000.

min_rx min-interval

Specifies the minimum interval in milliseconds for received hello packets. Range: 300 to 10000.

multiplier factor

Specifies a factor in which, if no hello packets are received, the link is flagged as non operational. Range: 3 to 50.

Command Default

The interfaces are not associated.

Command Modes

Interface configuration (config-if)

Command History

Release

Modification

12.2(52)SG

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When you specify a factor, the formula is if no hello packets are received in (min_rx * multiplier) milliseconds, the link is flagged as non-operational.

Examples

The following example shows how to configure the virtual switch link protocol (VSLP) hello packet interval:

Router-2(config-if)# vslp interval 400 min_rx 500

Router-2(config-if)#

vtp (global configuration mode)

To modify the name of a VTP configuration storage file, use the vtp command. To clear a filename, use the no form of this command.

vtp {{file filename} | {if-id name}}

no vtp {{file filename} | {if-id name}}

Syntax Description

file filename

Specifies the IFS file where VTP configuration will be stored.

if-id name

Specifies the name of the interface providing the VTP updater ID for this device, where the if-id name is an ASCII string limited to 255 characters.

Command Default

Disabled

Command Modes

Global configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

You cannot use the vtp file command to load a new database. You can use it only to rename the file in which the existing database is stored.

You can use the vtp if-id command to specify the name of the interface providing the VTP updater ID for this device. The VTP updater is the device that adds, deletes, or modifies VLANs to a network, and triggers a VTP updater to inform the rest of the system of the changes.

Examples

The following example shows how to specify the IFS file system file where VTP configuration is stored:

Switch(config)# vtp file vtpconfig

Setting device to store VLAN database at filename vtpconfig.

Switch(config)#

The following example shows how to specify the name of the interface providing the VTP updater ID:

Switch(config)# vtp if-id fastethernet

Switch(config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vtp

Displays VTP statistics and domain information.

vtp client

To place a device in VTP client mode, use the vtp client command. To return to VTP server mode, use the no form of this command.

vtp client

no vtp client

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Disabled

Command Modes

VLAN configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If the receiving switch is in client mode, the client switch changes its configuration to duplicate the configuration of the server. If you have switches in client mode, make sure to make all VTP or VLAN configuration changes on a switch in server mode.

The vtp server command is the functional equivalent of no vtp client except that it does not return an error if the device is not in client mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to place the device in VTP client mode:

Switch(vlan-config)# vtp client

Switch(vlan-config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vtp

Displays VTP statistics and domain information.

vtp (global configuration mode)

Configures the name of a VTP configuration storage file.

vtp domain

To configure the administrative domain name for a device, use the vtp domain command.

vtp domain domain-name

Syntax Description

domain-name

Name of the domain.

Command Default

This command has no default settings.

Command Modes

VLAN configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

When you define the domain-name, the domain name is case sensitive and can be from 1 to 32 characters.

You must set a domain name before you can transmit any VTP advertisements.

Even if you do not set a domain name, the device will leave the no-management-domain state upon receiving the first VTP summary packet on any port that is currently trunking.

If the device receives its domain from a summary packet, it resets its configuration revision number to zero. Once the device leaves the no-management-domain state, it can never be configured to reenter the number except by cleaning NVRAM and reloading.

Examples

The following example shows how to set the devices administrative domain:

Switch(vlan-config)# vtp domain DomainChandon

Switch(vlan-config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vtp

Displays VTP statistics and domain information.

vtp (global configuration mode)

Configures the name of a VTP configuration storage file.

vtp password

To create a VTP domain password, use the vtp password command. To delete the password, use the no form of this command.

vtp password password-value

no vtp password

Syntax Description

password-value

An ASCII string, from 1 to 32 characters, identifying the administrative domain for the device.

Command Default

Disabled

Command Modes

VLAN configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Examples

The following example shows how to create a VTP domain password:

Switch(vlan-config)# vtp password DomainChandon

Switch(vlan-config)#

The following example shows how to delete the VTP domain password:

Switch(vlan-config)# no vtp password

Clearing device VLAN database password.

Switch(vlan-config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vtp

Displays VTP statistics and domain information.

vtp (global configuration mode)

Configures the name of a VTP configuration storage file.

vtp pruning

To enable pruning in the VLAN database, use the vtp pruning command. To disable pruning in the VLAN database, use the no form of this command.

vtp pruning

no vtp pruning

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Disabled

Command Modes

VLAN configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

VTP pruning causes information about each pruning-eligible VLAN to be removed from VTP updates if there are no stations belonging to that VLAN.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable pruning in the VLAN database:

Switch(vlan-config)# vtp pruning

Pruning switched ON

Switch(vlan-config)#

The following example shows how to disable pruning in the VLAN database:

Switch(vlan-config)# no vtp pruning

Pruning switched OFF

Switch(vlan-config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vtp

Displays VTP statistics and domain information.

vtp (global configuration mode)

Configures the name of a VTP configuration storage file.

vtp server

To place the device in VTP server mode, use the vtp server command.

vtp server

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Enabled

Command Modes

VLAN configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

If you make a change to the VTP or VLAN configuration on a switch in server mode, that change is propagated to all the switches in the same VTP domain.

You can set VTP to either server or client mode only when you disable dynamic VLAN creation.

If the receiving switch is in server mode, the configuration is not changed.

The vtp server command is the functional equivalent of no vtp client, except that it does not return an error if the device is not in client mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to place the device in VTP server mode:

Switch(vlan-config)# vtp server

Switch(vlan-config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vtp

Displays VTP statistics and domain information.

vtp (global configuration mode)

Configures the name of a VTP configuration storage file.

vtp transparent

To place a device in VTP transparent mode, use the vtp transparent command. To return to VTP server mode, use the no form of this command.

vtp transparent

no vtp transparent

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Disabled

Command Modes

VLAN configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

The vtp transparent command disables VTP from the domain but does not remove the domain from the switch.

If the receiving switch is in transparent mode, the configuration is not changed. The switches in transparent mode do not participate in VTP. If you make VTP or VLAN configuration changes on a switch in transparent mode, the changes are not propagated to the other switches in the network.

The vtp server command is similar to the no vtp transparent command, except that it does not return an error if the device is not in transparent mode.

Examples

The following example shows how to place the device in VTP transparent mode:

Switch(vlan-config)# vtp transparent

Switch(vlan-config)#

The following example shows how to return the device to VTP server mode:

Switch(vlan-config)# no vtp transparent

Switch(vlan-config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vtp

Displays VTP statistics and domain information.

vtp (global configuration mode)

Configures the name of a VTP configuration storage file.

vtp v2-mode

To enable version 2 mode, use the vtp v2-mode command. To disable version 2 mode, use the no form of this command.

vtp v2-mode

no vtp v2-mode

Syntax Description

This command has no arguments or keywords.

Command Default

Disabled

Command Modes

VLAN configuration mode

Command History

Release

Modification

12.1(8a)EW

This command was introduced on the Catalyst 4500 series switch.

Usage Guidelines

All switches in a VTP domain must run the same version of VTP. VTP version 1 and VTP version 2 do not operate on switches in the same VTP domain.

If all switches in a domain are VTP version 2-capable, you only need to enable VTP version 2 on one switch; the version number is then propagated to the other version 2-capable switches in the VTP domain.

If you toggle the version 2 mode, the parameters of certain default VLANs will be modified.

Examples

The following example shows how to enable version 2 mode in the VLAN database:

Switch(vlan-config)# vtp v2-mode

Switch(vlan-config)#

The following example shows how to disable version 2 mode in the VLAN database:

Switch(vlan-config)# no vtp v2-mode

Switch(vlan-config)#

Related Commands

Command

Description

show vtp

Displays VTP statistics and domain information.

vtp (global configuration mode)

Configures the name of a VTP configuration storage file.

Abbreviations

A

ACE

access control entry

ACL

access control list

AFI

authority and format identifier

Agport

aggregation port

AMP

Active Monitor Present

APaRT

Automated Packet Recognition and Translation

ARP

Address Resolution Protocol

B

BEM

best effort method

BGP

Border Gateway Protocol

BPDU

bridge protocol data unit

BRF

bridge relay function

BSC

Bisync

BSTUN

Block Serial Tunnel

BUS

broadcast and unknown server

BVI

bridge-group virtual interface

C

CAM

content-addressable memory

CAR

committed access rate

CCA

circuit card assembly

CDP

Cisco Discovery Protocol

CEF

Cisco Express Forwarding

CHAP

Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol

CIR

committed information rate

CLI

command-line interface

CLNS

Connection-Less Network Service

CMNS

Connection-Mode Network Service

COPS

Common Open Policy Server

COPS-DS

Common Open Policy Server Differentiated Services

CoS

class of service

CPLD

Complex Programmable Logic Device

CRC

cyclic redundancy check

CRF

concentrator relay function

CST

Common Spanning Tree

D

DAI

Dynamic ARP Inspection

DBL

Dynamic Buffer Limiting

DCC

Data Country Code

dCEF

distributed Cisco Express Forwarding

DDR

dial-on-demand routing

DE

discard eligibility

DEC

Digital Equipment Corporation

DFI

Domain-Specific Part Format Identifier

DFP

Dynamic Feedback Protocol

DISL

Dynamic Inter-Switch Link

DLC

Data Link Control

DLSw

Data Link Switching

DMP

data movement processor

DNS

Domain Name System

DoD

Department of Defense

DOS

denial of service

DRAM

dynamic RAM

DRiP

Dual Ring Protocol

DSAP

destination service access point

DSCP

differentiated services code point

DSPU

downstream SNA Physical Units

DTP

Dynamic Trunking Protocol

DTR

data terminal ready

DVMRP

Distance Vector Multicast Rotuing Protocol

DXI

data exchange interface

E

EAP

Extensible Authentication Protocol

EARL

Enhanced Address Recognition Logic

EEPROM

electrically erasable programmable read-only memory

EHSA

enhanced high system availability

EIA

Electronic Industries Association

ELAN

Emulated Local Area Network

EOBC

Ethernet out-of-band channel

ESI

end-system identifier

F

FECN

forward explicit congestion notification

FM

feature manager

FRU

field replaceable unit

FSM

feasible successor metrics

G

GARP

General Attribute Registration Protocol

GMRP

GARP Multicast Registration Protocol

GVRP

GARP VLAN Registration Protocol

I

ICC

Inter-card Communication

ICD

International Code Designator

ICMP

Internet Control Message Protocol

IDB

interface descriptor block

IDP

initial domain part or Internet Datagram Protocol

IDPROM

ID Programmable Read-Only Memory

IFS

IOS File System

IGMP

Internet Group Management Protocol

IGRP

Interior Gateway Routing Protocol

ILMI

Integrated Local Management Interface

IP

Internet Protocol

IPC

interprocessor communication

IPX

Internetwork Packet Exchange

IS-IS

Intermediate System-to-Intermediate System Intradomain Routing Protocol

ISL

Inter-Switch Link

ISO

International Organization of Standardization

ISR

Integrated SONET router

ISSU

In Service Software Upgrade

L

L2

Layer 2

L3

Layer 3

L4

Layer 4

LAN

local area network

LANE

LAN Emulation

LAPB

Link Access Procedure, Balanced

LDA

Local Director Acceleration

LCP

Link Control Protocol

LEC

LAN Emulation Client

LECS

LAN Emulation Configuration Server

LEM

link error monitor

LER

link error rate

LES

LAN Emulation Server

LLC

Logical Link Control

LTL

Local Target Logic

M

MAC

Media Access Control

MCL

Mismatched Command List

MD5

Message Digest 5

MET

Multicast Expansion Table

MFIB

Multicast Forwarding Information Base

MIB

Management Information Base

MII

media-independent interface

MLS

Multilayer Switching

MLSE

maintenance loop signaling entity

MOP

Maintenance Operation Protocol

MOTD

message-of-the-day

MRM

multicast routing monitor

MRQ

Multicast Replication Queue

MSDP

Multicast Source Discovery Protocol

MST

Multiple Spanning Tree

MTU

maximum transmission unit

MVAP

multiple VLAN access port

N

NBP

Name Binding Protocol

NCIA

Native Client Interface Architecture

NDE

NetFlow Data Export

NET

network entity title

NetBIOS

Network Basic Input/Output System

NFFC

NetFlow Feature Card

NMP

Network Management Processor

NSAP

network service access point

NTP

Network Time Protocol

NVRAM

nonvolatile RAM

O

OAM

Operation, Administration, and Maintenance

OSI

Open System Interconnection

OSPF

open shortest path first

P

PAE

port access entity

PAgP

Port Aggregation Protocol

PBD

packet buffer daughterboard

PC

Personal Computer (formerly PCMCIA)

PCM

pulse code modulation

PCR

peak cell rate

PDP

policy decision point

PDU

protocol data unit

PEM

Power Entry Module

PEP

policy enforcement point

PGM

Pragmatic General Multicast

PHY

physical sublayer

PIB

policy information base

PIM

Protocol Independent Multicast

PM

Port manager

PPP

Point-to-Point Protocol

PRC

Parser Return Code

PRID

Policy Rule Identifiers

PVLAN

Private VLAN

PVST+

Per VLAN Spanning Tree+

Q

QM

QoS manager

QoS

Quality of Service

R

RACL

Router Interface Access Control List

RADIUS

Remote Access Dial-In User Service

RAM

random-access memory

RCP

Remote Copy Protocol

RGMP

Router Group Management Protocol

RIF

Routing Information Field

RMON

Rmote Network Monitor

ROM

read-only memory

RP

route processor or rendezvous point

RPC

remote procedure call

RPF

reverse path forwarding

RPR

Router Processor Redundancy

RSPAN

remote SPAN

RST

reset

RSVP

ReSerVation Protocol

Rx

Receive

S

SAID

Security Association Identifier

SAP

service access point

SCM

service connection manager

SCP

Switch-Module Configuration Protocol

SDLC

Synchronous Data Link Control

SGBP

Stack Group Bidding Protocol

SIMM

single in-line memory module

SLB

server load balancing

SLCP

Supervisor Line-Card Processor

SLIP

Serial Line Internet Protocol

SMDS

Software Management and Delivery Systems

SMF

software MAC filter

SMP

Standby Monitor Present

SMRP

Simple Multicast Routing Protocol

SMT

Station Management

SNAP

Subnetwork Access Protocol

SNMP

Simple Network Management Protocol

SPAN

Switched Port Analyzer

SRB

source-route bridging

SRT

source-route transparent bridging

SSTP

Cisco Shared Spanning Tree

STP

Spanning Tree Protocol

SVC

switched virtual circuit

SVI

switched virtual interface

T

TACACS+

Terminal Access Controller Access Control System Plus

TARP

Target Identifier Address Resolution Protocol

TCAM

Ternary Content Addressable Memory

TCL

table contention level

TCP/IP

Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol

TFTP

Trivial File Transfer Protocol

TIA

Telecommunications Industry Association

TLV

type-length-value

TopN

Utility that allows the user to analyze port traffic by reports

TOS

type of service

TrBRF

Token Ring Bridge Relay Function

TrCRF

Token Ring Concentrator Relay Function

TTL

Time To Live

TVX

valid transmission

Tx

Transmit

U

UDLD

UniDirectional Link Detection Protocol

UDP

User Datagram Protocol

UNI

User-Network Interface

UTC

Coordinated Universal Time

V

VACL

VLAN access control list

VCC

virtual channel circuit

VCD

virtual circuit descriptor

VCI

virtual circuit identifier

VCR

Virtual Configuration Register

VINES

Virtual Network System

VLAN

virtual LAN

VMPS

VLAN Membership Policy Server

VTP

VLAN Trunking Protocol

VVID

voice VLAN ID

W

WFQ

weighted fair queueing

WRED

weighted random early detection

WRR

weighted round-robin

X

XNS

Xerox Network System

THE SPECIFICATIONS AND INFORMATION REGARDING THE PRODUCTS IN THIS MANUAL ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. ALL STATEMENTS, INFORMATION, AND RECOMMENDATIONS IN THIS MANUAL ARE BELIEVED TO BE ACCURATE BUT ARE PRESENTED WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. USERS MUST TAKE FULL RESPONSIBILITY FOR THEIR APPLICATION OF ANY PRODUCTS.

THE SOFTWARE LICENSE AND LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE ACCOMPANYING PRODUCT ARE SET FORTH IN THE INFORMATION PACKET THAT SHIPPED WITH THE PRODUCT AND ARE INCORPORATED HEREIN BY THIS REFERENCE. IF YOU ARE UNABLE TO LOCATE THE SOFTWARE LICENSE OR LIMITED WARRANTY, CONTACT YOUR CISCO REPRESENTATIVE FOR A COPY.

The Cisco implementation of TCP header compression is an adaptation of a program developed by the University of California, Berkeley (UCB) as part of UCB’s public domain version of the UNIX operating system. All rights reserved. Copyright © 1981, Regents of the University of California.

NOTWITHSTANDING ANY OTHER WARRANTY HEREIN, ALL DOCUMENT FILES AND SOFTWARE OF THESE SUPPLIERS ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” WITH ALL FAULTS. CISCO AND THE ABOVE-NAMED SUPPLIERS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THOSE OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OR ARISING FROM A COURSE OF DEALING, USAGE, OR TRADE PRACTICE.

IN NO EVENT SHALL CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, LOST PROFITS OR LOSS OR DAMAGE TO DATA ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS MANUAL, EVEN IF CISCO OR ITS SUPPLIERS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

Cisco and the Cisco logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Cisco and/or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. To view a list of Cisco trademarks, go to this URL: www.cisco.com/go/trademarks . Third-party trademarks mentioned are the property of their respective owners. The use of the word partner does not imply a partnership relationship between Cisco and any other company. (1721R)

Catalyst 4500 Series Switch Cisco IOS Command Reference

Copyright © 1999–2016 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved.